produced from scanned images of public domain material
from the Google Print project.)









                    THE EXPEDITION TO BORNEO

                               OF

                         H. M. S. DIDO

                              FOR

                   THE SUPPRESSION OF PIRACY:

                       WITH EXTRACTS FROM

         THE JOURNAL OF JAMES BROOKE, ESQ., OF SARAWAK,

       (Now Agent for the British Government in Borneo).



                               BY

              CAPTAIN THE HON. HENRY KEPPEL, R. N.





                           NEW YORK:

                 HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS,

                        82 CLIFF STREET.

                             1846.











TO

THE EARL OF ALBEMARLE.


My dear Father,

You could scarcely have anticipated, from my profession, the dedication
of a book in testimony of my gratitude and affection; but, having had
the good fortune to acquire the friendship of Mr. James Brooke, and
to be intrusted by him with a narrative of his extraordinary career
in that part of the world where the services of the ship I commanded
were required, I am not without a hope that the accompanying pages
may be found worthy of your approval, and not altogether uninteresting
to my country.


I am, my dear father,

Your affectionate son,

Henry Keppel.

Droxford, January, 1846.







PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.


The visit of her majesty's ship Dido to Borneo, and her services
against the pirates, occupy comparatively so small a portion of this
volume, that some excuse may be necessary for its leading title.

It was only by undertaking to make the account of them part of the
narrative, that I could prevail upon my friend Mr. Brooke to intrust
me with his Journal for any public object; and when I looked at his
novel and important position as a ruler in Borneo, and was aware how
much of European curiosity was attached to it, I felt it impossible
not to consent to an arrangement which should enable me to trace the
remarkable career through which he had reached that elevation. I hope,
therefore, to be considered as having conquered my own disinclination
to be the relater of events in which I was concerned, in order to
overcome the scruples which he entertained against being the author
of the autobiographical sketch, embracing so singular a portion of
his life, which I have extracted from the rough notes confided to me.

That his diffidence in this respect was groundless will, I trust,
be apparent from these  pages, however indifferently I may have
executed my unusual task, during a long homeward sea-voyage; and,
from the growing interest which has arisen throughout the country for
intelligence on the subject of Borneo and the adjacent archipelago,
I venture also to indulge the belief that the general information
will be deemed no unfit adjunct to the story of personal adventure.





ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SECOND EDITION.


The text of this edition has been carefully revised, and has undergone
numerous verbal alterations; some portions of it have been transposed,
and a few additions have been made to the work. [In the American
edition, a few pages of matter, of no interest to American readers,
have been omitted from the Appendix.]






CONTENTS.



CHAPTER I.

The Chinese War having terminated, Captain Keppel in H.M.S. Dido
appointed to command of the Straits station.--Meeting with
Mr. Brooke.--Sketch of his life.--Mr. Brooke's outward voyage in the
Royalist.--Touch at Singapore.--Arrival off the coast of Borneo.--Land
at the island of Talang Talang.--Intercourse with the Bandar   _Page_ 1

CHAPTER II.

Progress: observations.--Description of the coast of Borneo.--Account,
&c. of a Pangeran.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Meetings with Rajah Muda
Hassim, and conversations.--The Town.--Interchange of visits and
presents.--Excursion to Dyak tribes.--Resources and commercial
products   14

CHAPTER III.

Second Cruise: up the River Lunda.--The Sibnowan Dyaks.--Their
Town of Tungong.--Their Physical Proportions, and Words of their
Language.--Their Customs.--Skull-trophies.--Religious Ceremonies
and Opinions.--Their Ornaments.--Appearance of both Sexes.--Dress
and Morals.--Missionary Prospects of Conversion, and Elevation in
the Social Scale.--Government, Laws, and Punishments.--Dances.--Iron
Manufacturing.--Chinese Settlement.--Excursion continued   32

CHAPTER IV.

Renewed intercourse with the Rajah.--Prospects of
trade.--Ourang-outang, and other animals.--The two sorts of
mias.--Description of the Rajah, his suite, and Panglimas, &c.--The
character of the natives.--Leave Sarawak.--Songi Dyaks.--Visit Seriff
Sahib.--Buyat tongue.--Attack by pirates.--Sail for Singapore   45

CHAPTER V.

Summary of information obtained during this
visit to Borneo.--Geographical and topographical
observations.--Produce.--Various Dyak tribes.--Natural
history.--Language.--Origin of Races.--Sail from
Singapore.--Celebes.--Face of the country.--Waterfall   59

CHAPTER VI.

Dain Matara, the Bugis.--Excursions in Celebes.--Dispute
with the Rajah's son-in-law.--Baboon shot.--Appearance of the
country.--Visit the Resident.--Barometrical observations.--The
Bugis.--Geography.--Coral reefs.--Visit the Rana of
Lamatte.--Population and products of the country   72

CHAPTER VII.

Mr. Brooke's second visit to Sarawak.--The civil war.--Receives a
present of a Dyak boy.--Excursion to the seat of war.--Notices of
rivers, and settlements on their banks.--Deaths and burials.--Reasons
for and against remaining at Sarawak.--Dyak visitors.--Council of
war.--Why side with the Rajah.--Mode of constructing forts.--State
of enemy's and Rajah's forces.--Conduct of the war   87

CHAPTER VIII.

Appearance of the country.--Progress of the rebel war.--Character of
the Sow and Singè Dyaks.--Their belief in augury.--Ruinous effects of
protracted warfare.--Cowardice and boasting of the Malays.--Council
of war.--Refuse to attack the enemy's forts.--Rebels propose to
treat.--The Malays oppose.--Set out to attack the rebels, but
frustrated by our allies.--Assailed by the rebels.--Put them to
flight.--Treat with them.--They surrender.--Intercede with the Rajah
for their lives.--Renewed treachery of the Malays   100

CHAPTER IX.

Retrospect of Mr. Brooke's proceedings and prospects.--Visit of
a pirate fleet.--Intercourse with the chief leaders, and other
characteristic incidents.--War dances.--Use of opium.--Story of
Si Tundo.--Preparations for trading.--Conditions of the cession of
Sarawak   119

CHAPTER X.

Obstacles in the way of coming to a satisfactory conclusion with Muda
Hassim.--The law of force and reprisal considered.--Capabilities of
Sarawak.--Account of Sarebus and Sakarran pirates.--Excursion up the
river.--Visit to the Singè Dyaks.--Description of Mr. Brooke's house at
Sarawak.--Circumstances relating to the wreck off Borneo Proper   135

CHAPTER XI.

Return of the Royalist from Borneo Proper with intelligence of the
sufferers from the wreck of the Sultana.--Effect of the arrival
of the Diana on the negotiations for their release.--Outrage and
oppression of Macota.--Fate of the Sultana and her crew.--Mr. Brooke
made Rajah of Sarawak.--Liberation of rebel prisoners.--State of Dyak
tribes.--Court of justice opened.--Dyak burials, and respect for the
dead.--Malay cunning and treachery   151

CHAPTER XII.

Reflections on the new year.--The plundered village, and other
wrongs.--Means for their suppression.--The new government proceeds
to act.--The constitution.--Preparations for an expedition
against the Sea Dyaks.--Form of a treaty.--Wreck of the Viscount
Melbourne.--Administration of justice.--Difficulties and dangers.--Dyak
troubles.--Views and arrangements of the Chinese.--Judicial
forms.--Wrongs and sufferings of the Lundus   164

CHAPTER XIII.

Ascent of the left-hand river to the Stabad.--Remarkable cave in
the Tubbang.--Diamond works at Suntah.--Return.--Infested by Dyak
pirates.--A meeting of prahus, and fight.--Seriff Sahib's treatment of
the Suntah Dyaks.--Expedition against the Singè.--Their invasion of
the Sigos, and taking heads.--The triumph over these trophies.--Arms
and modes of war.--Hot and cold council-houses.--Ceremonies in the
installation of the Orang Kaya Steer Rajah.--Meeting of various Dyak
tribes.--Hostile plans of Seriff Sahib, and their issue.--Resolves
to proceed to Borneo Proper   183

CHAPTER XIV.

Visit of Captain Elliott.--Mr. Brooke sails for Borneo
Proper.--Arrival.--Visited by leading men.--Condition of
the country.--Reception by the Sultan.--Objects in view.--The
different chiefs, and communications with them.--The Sultan and
his Pangerans.--Objects of the visit accomplished.--Return to
Sarawak.--Ceremonies of the cession.--Sail for Singapore   199

CHAPTER XV.

Captain Keppel's voyage in the Dido with Mr. Brooke to Sarawak.--Chase
of three piratical prahus.--Boat expedition.--Action with the
pirates, and capture of a prahu.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Mr. Brooke's
reception.--Captain Keppel and his officers visit the Rajah.--The
palace and the audience.--Return royal visit to the Dido.--Mr. Brooke's
residence and household.--Dr. Treacher's adventure with one of the
ladies of Macota's harem.--Another boat affair with the pirates,
and death of their chief   213

CHAPTER XVI.

The Rajah's letter to Captain Keppel, and his reply.--Prepares for
an expedition against the Sarebus pirates.--Pleasure excursion up the
river.--The Chinese settlement.--The Singè mountain.--Interior of the
residences.--Dyak festival of Maugut.--Relics.--Sporting.--Return to
Sarawak.--The expedition against Sarebus.--State and number of the
assailing force.--Ascent of the river.--Beauty of the scenery   228

CHAPTER XVII.

Ascent of the river to Paddi.--Town taken and burnt.--Narrow
escape of a reinforcement of friendly Dyaks.--Night-attack by the
pirates.--Conference: they submit.--Proceed against Pakoo.--Dyak
treatment of dead enemies.--Destruction of Pakoo, and submission
of the pirates.--Advance upon Rembas.--The town destroyed: the
inhabitants yield.--Satisfactory effects of the expedition.--Death
of Dr. Simpson.--Triumphant return to Sarawak   242

CHAPTER XVIII.

Captain Keppel sails for China.--Calcutta.--The Dido ordered to
Borneo again.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Effect of her presence at
Sarawak.--Great improvements visible.--Atrocities of the Sakarran
pirates.--Mr. Brooke's letter.--Captain Sir E. Belcher's previous
visit to Sarawak in the Samarang.--Coal found.--Second letter from the
Rajah Muda Hassim.--Expedition against the Sakarran pirates.--Patusen
destroyed.--Macota remembered, and his retreat burnt.--Further
fighting, and advance.--Ludicrous midnight alarm   257

CHAPTER XIX.

Seriff Muller's town sacked.--Ascend the river in pursuit of
the enemy.--Gallant exploit of Lieutenant Wade.--His death and
funeral.--Interesting anecdote of him.--Ascend the Sakarran
branch.--Native boats hemmed in by pirates, and their crews
slaughtered to a man.--Karangan destroyed.--Captain Sir E. Belcher
arrives in the Samarang's boats.--Return to Sarawak.--New expedition
against Seriff Sahib and Jaffer.--Macota captured.--Flight of Seriff
Sahib.--Conferences.--Seriff Jaffer deposed.--Mr. Brooke's speech in
the native tongue.--End of the expedition, and return to Sarawak.--The
Dido sails for England   274

CHAPTER XX.

Later portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal.--Departure of Captain Keppel,
and arrival of Sir E. Belcher.--Mr. Brooke proceeds, with Muda
Hassim, in the Samarang to Borneo.--Labuan examined.--Returns to
Sarawak.--Visit of Lingire, a Sarebus chief.--The Dyaks of Tumma
and Bandar Cassim.--Meets an assembly of Malays and Dyaks.--Arrival
of Lingi, as a deputation from the Sakarran chiefs.--The Malay
character.--Excursion up the country.--Miserable effects of excess
in opium-smoking.--Picturesque situation of the Sow village of
Ra-at.--Nawang.--Feast at Ra-at.--Returns home.--Conferences with
Dyak chiefs   290

CHAPTER XXI.

Mr. Brooke's memorandum on the piracy of the Malayan Archipelago.--The
measures requisite for its suppression, and for the consequent
extension of British commerce in that important locality   302

CHAPTER XXII.

Arrival of Captain Bethune and Mr. Wise.--Mr. Brooke appointed
her Majesty's Agent in Borneo.--Sails for Borneo Proper.--Muda
Hassim's measures for the suppression of piracy.--Defied by
Seriff Houseman.--Audience of the Sultan, Muda Hassim, and the
Pangerans.--Visit to Labuan.--Comparative eligibility of Labuan and
Balambangan for settlement.--Coal discovered in Labuan.--Mr. Brooke
goes to Singapore and visits Admiral Sir T. Cochrane.--The
upas-tree.--Proceeds with the Admiral to Borneo Proper.--Punishment
of Pangeran Usop.--The battle of Malludu.--Seriff Houseman obliged
to fly.--Visit to Balambangan.--Mr. Brooke parts with the Admiral,
and goes to Borneo Proper.--An attempt of Pangeran Usop defeated.--His
flight, and pursuit by Pangeran Budrudeen.--Triumphant reception of
Mr. Brooke in Borneo.--Returns to Sarawak   314

CHAPTER XXIII.

Borneo, its geographical bounds and leading divisions.--British
settlements in 1775.--The province of Sarawak formally ceded by the
sultan in perpetuity to Mr. Brooke its present ruler.--General view
of the Dyaks, the aborigines of Borneo.--The Dyaks of Sarawak, and
adjoining tribes; their past oppression and present position   329

CHAPTER XXIV.

Proposed British settlement on the northwest coast of Borneo, and
occupation of the island of Labuan.--Governor Crawfurd's opinions
thereon   345

Concluding Observations   355

Postscript to Second Edition   359

APPENDIX.

I. Natural History. Mr. Brooke's report on the Mias   365

II. Philology   370

III. Proposed Exploring Expedition to the Asiatic Archipelago, by
James Brooke, Esq. 1838   373

IV. Sketch of Borneo, or Pulo Kalamantan, by J. Hunt, Esq.   381

V. Extracts from the late Mr. Williamson's Journal   409










EXPEDITION TO BORNEO.


CHAPTER I.


    The Chinese War having terminated, Captain Keppel in H.M.S. Dido
    appointed to command of the Straits station.--Meeting with
    Mr. Brooke.--Sketch of his life.--Mr. Brooke's outward voyage
    in the Royalist.--Touch at Singapore.--Arrival off the coast of
    Borneo.--Land at the island of Talang Talang.--Intercourse with
    the Bandar.


At the conclusion of the Chinese war, the commander-in-chief,
Vice-Admiral Sir William Parker, ordered the Dido to the Malacca
Straits, a station in which was included the island of Borneo;
our principal duties being the protection of trade, and suppression
of piracy.

In the month of March, 1843, while at Pinang, I received intimation
from the governor of various daring acts of piracy having been
committed near the Borneon coast on some vessels trading to
Singapore. I proceeded to that port; and, while undergoing a partial
refit, made the acquaintance of Mr. Brooke, who accepted my invitation
to return to Sarawak in the Dido; and I could not have visited Borneo
with a more agreeable or intelligent companion.

The objects of Mr. Brooke in leaving England, the reasons which induced
him to settle at Sarawak, and the circumstances which have led him to
take so deep an interest in promoting the civilization and improving
the condition of the singular people whom he has adopted, form indeed
a story very unlike the common course of events in modern times.

But before illustrating these circumstances from his own journals,
it may be acceptable to say a few words respecting the individual
himself, and his extraordinary career. I am indebted to a mutual
friend, acquainted with him from early years, for the following brief
but interesting outline of his life; and have only to premise, that
Mr. Brooke is the lineal representative of Sir Robert Vyner, baronet,
and lord mayor of London in the reign of Charles II.; Sir Robert had
but one child, a son, Sir George Vyner, who died childless, and his
estate passed to his heir-at-law, Edith, his father's eldest sister,
whose lineal descendant is our friend. Sir Robert was renowned for
his loyalty to his sovereign, to whom he devoted his wealth, and to
whose memory he raised a monument.

"Mr. Brooke was the second, and is now the only surviving son of the
late Thomas Brooke, Esq., of the civil service of the East India
Company; was born on the 29th April, 1803; went out to India as
a cadet, where he held advantageous situations, and distinguished
himself by his gallantry in the Burmese war. He was shot through
the body in an action with the Burmese, received the thanks of the
government, and returned to England for the recovery of his prostrated
strength. He resumed his station, but shortly afterward relinquished
the service, and in search of health and amusement left Calcutta for
China in 1830. In this voyage, while going up the China seas, he saw
for the first time the islands of the Asiatic Archipelago--islands
of vast importance and unparalleled beauty--lying neglected, and
almost unknown. He inquired and read, and became convinced that
Borneo and the Eastern Isles afforded an open field for enterprise
and research. To carry to the Malay races, so long the terror of the
European merchant-vessels, the blessings of civilization, to suppress
piracy, and extirpate the slave-trade, became his humane and generous
objects; and from that hour the energies of his powerful mind were
devoted to this one pursuit. Often foiled, often disappointed, but
animated with a perseverance and enthusiasm which defied all obstacle,
he was not until 1838 enabled to set sail from England on his darling
project. The intervening years had been devoted to preparation and
inquiry; a year spent in the Mediterranean had tested his vessel, the
Royalist, and his crew; and so completely had he studied his subject
and calculated on contingencies, that the least sanguine of his friends
felt as he left the shore, hazardous and unusual as the enterprise
appeared to be, that he had omitted nothing to insure a successful
issue. 'I go,' said he, 'to awake the spirit of slumbering philanthropy
with regard to these islands; to carry Sir Stamford Raffles' views
in Java over the whole archipelago. Fortune and life I give freely;
and if I fail in the attempt, I shall not have lived wholly in vain.'

"In the admiration I feel for him, I may farther be permitted to
add, that if any man ever possessed in himself the resources and
means by which such noble designs were to be achieved, that man was
James Brooke! Of the most enlarged views; truthful and generous;
quick to acquire and appreciate; excelling in every manly sport and
exercise; elegant and accomplished; ever accessible; and above all,
prompt and determined to redress injury and relieve misfortune, he
was of all others the best qualified to impress the native mind with
the highest opinion of the English character. How he has succeeded,
the influence he has acquired, and the benefits he has conferred,
his own uncolored narrative, contained in the following pages, best
declares, and impresses on the world a lasting lesson of the good
that attends individual enterprise, when well directed, of which
every Englishman may feel justly proud."

Such is the sketch of Mr. Brooke by one well competent to judge of
that to which he bears witness. In pursuance of the mission thus
eloquently and truly described, that gentleman left his native shores
in the year 1838, in his yacht the Royalist schooner, of 142 tons,
belonging to the Royal Yacht Squadron, with a crew of upward of twenty
men. His general views were distinct and certain; but the details
into which they shaped themselves have been so entirely guided by
unforeseen occurrences, that it is necessary to look to his first
visit to Borneo for their explanation; and in order to do so, I must
refer to his private journal, which he kindly confided to me, after I
had in vain tried to persuade him to take upon himself the publication
of its contents, so rich in new and interesting intelligence.





EXTRACTS FROM Mr. BROOKE'S JOURNAL.

"I had for some years turned my mind to the geography of the
Indian Archipelago, and cherished an ardent desire to become better
acquainted with a country combining the richest natural productions
with an unrivaled degree of luxuriant beauty. Circumstances for a
time prevented my entering on this field for enterprise and research;
and when the barriers were removed, I had many preparations to make
and some difficulties to overcome.

"In an expedition conducted by government, the line of discipline is
so distinctly understood, and its infringement so strictly punished,
that small hazard is incurred of any inconvenience arising from such
a source. With an individual, however, there is no such assurance,
for he cannot appeal to the articles of war; and the ordinary legal
enactments for the protection of the mariner will not enable him to
effect objects so far removed beyond the scope of the laws. I was
fully aware that many would go, but that few might stay; for while a
voyage of discovery _in prospectu_ possesses great attractions for the
imagination, the hardship, danger, and thousand other rude realities,
soon dissipate the illusion, and leave the aspirant longing for that
home he should never have quitted. In like manner, seamen can be
procured in abundance, but cannot be kept from desertion whenever any
matter goes wrong; and the total previous ignorance of their characters
and dispositions renders this more likely, as the admission of one
'black sheep' goes far to taint the entire crew.

"These considerations fully convinced me that it was necessary to
form _men_ to my purpose, and, by a line of steady and kind conduct,
to raise up a personal regard for myself and attachment for the
vessel, which could not be expected in ordinary cases. In pursuance
of this object, I was nearly three years in preparing a crew to my
mind, and gradually moulding them to consider the hardest fate or
misfortune under my command as better than the ordinary service in a
merchant-vessel. How far I have succeeded remains yet to be proved;
but I cannot help hoping that I have raised the character of many,
and have rendered all happy and contented since they have been with
me; and certain am I that no men can do their duty more cheerfully
or willingly than the crew of the Royalist.

"I may pass over in silence my motives for undertaking so long and
arduous a voyage; and it will be sufficient to say, that I have been
firmly convinced of its beneficial tendency in adding to knowledge,
increasing trade, and spreading Christianity. The prospectus
of the undertaking was published in the _Geographical Journal_,
vol. viii. part iii., of 1838, when my preparations for sea were
nearly complete. I had previously avoided making any public mention
of my intentions, for praise before performance is disgusting; and
I knew I should be exposed to prying curiosity, desirous of knowing
what I did not know myself.

"On the 27th October, 1838, the Royalist left the river; and, after
a succession of heavy gales, finally quitted the land on the 16th
December. I may here state some farther particulars, to enable my
readers to become better acquainted with her and her equipment. The
Royalist, as already noticed, belonged to the Royal Yacht Squadron,
which in foreign ports admits her to the same privileges as a
man-of-war, and enables her to carry a white ensign. She sails fast,
is conveniently fitted up, is armed with six six-pounders, a number
of swivels, and small arms of all sorts, carries four boats, and
provisions for four months. Her principal defect is being too sharp
in the floor, which, in case of taking the ground, greatly increases
the risk; but I comfort myself with the reflection that a knowledge of
this will lead to redoubled precaution to prevent such a disaster. She
is withal a good sea-boat, and as well calculated for the service as
could be desired.

"Most of her hands had been with me for three years or upward,
and the rest were highly recommended. They are, almost without
exception, young, able-bodied, and active--fit in all respects for
enduring hardship and privation, or the more dangerous reverse of
self-indulgence, and willing to follow the fortunes of the Royalist and
her commander through all the various shades of good or evil fortune
which may betide. A fine, though slow passage took us to Rio Janeiro,
which presents features of natural beauty rarely equaled. The weather
during our stay was hot in the extreme, and very wet, which marred,
in some degree, the satisfaction I should otherwise have enjoyed in
wandering about this picturesque country. I passed ten days, however,
very agreeably, and departed with some regret from this brief visit to
America and from my friends (if they will so allow me to call them)
on board H.M.S. Calliope. I must not omit to mention that, during my
stay, I visited a slaver, three of which (prizes to our men-of-war)
lay in the harbor. It is a most loathsome and disgusting sight. Men,
women, and children--the aged and the infant--crowded into a space as
confined as the pens in Smithfield, not, however, to be released by
death at the close of the day, but to linger, diseased and festering,
for weeks or months, and then to be discharged into perpetual and
hopeless slavery. I wish I could say that our measures tended toward
the abolition of this detestable traffic; but from all that I could
learn and observe, I am forced to confess that the exertions made to
abolish slavery are of no avail in this country, and never will be
till harsher means are resorted to.

"There are points of view in which this traffic wears a more cheering
aspect; for any one comparing the puny Portuguese or the bastard
Brazilian with the athletic negro, cannot but allow that the ordinary
changes and chances of time will place this fine country in the hands
of the latter race. The negro will be fit to cultivate the soil, and
will thrive beneath the tropical sun of the Brazils. The enfeebled
white man grows more enfeebled and more degenerate with each succeeding
generation, and languishes in a clime which nature never designed him
to inhabit. The time will come when the debased and suffering negroes
shall possess this fertile land, and when some share of justice shall
be awarded to their cheerful tempers and ardent minds.

"Quitting Rio on the 9th, we cruised for a day or two with
H.M.S. Calliope and Grecian; and on the 11th, parting company,
prosecuted our voyage for the Cape of Good Hope."

The next notice runs thus:--"The aspect of Tristan d'Acunha is bold
even to grandeur. The peak, towering upward of eight thousand feet
above the sea, is inferior only to Teneriffe, and the precipitous
cliffs overhanging the beach are a fitting base for such a mountain. I
regretted not being able to examine this island for many reasons, but
principally, perhaps, on account of the birds of the South Atlantic
I had hoped to collect there, many of which are so often seen by
voyagers, yet so little known and so vaguely described.

"On the 29th March, after being detained a fortnight [at the Cape of
Good Hope] by such weather as no one could regret, we sailed again
in a southeaster, and after a passage of six weeks reached Java Head.

"I had been suffering for some time under a severe indisposition,
and consequently hailed the termination of our voyage with double
satisfaction, for I greatly required rest and quiet--two things
impossible to be had on ship-board. From Java Head we glided slowly
through Prince's Strait, and coasting along the island, dropped our
anchor in Anjer Roads. The scenery of this coast is extremely lovely,
and comprises every feature which can heighten the picturesque; noble
mountains, a lake-like sea, and deeply indented coast-line, rocks,
islets, and, above all, a vegetation so luxuriant that the eye never
wearies with gazing on its matchless tints. Anjer combines all these
beauties, and possesses the incalculable advantage of being within a
moderate ride of the refreshing coolness of the hills. We here procured
water and provisions in abundance, being daily visited by crowds of
canoes filled with necessaries or curiosities. Fowls, eggs, yams,
cocoa-nuts, and sweet potatoes, were mixed with monkeys of various
sorts, paroquets, squirrels, shells, and similar temptations on the
stranger's purse or wardrobe. Great was the bartering for old clothes,
handkerchiefs, and hats; and great the number of useless and noisy
animals we received in exchange. Great, too, was the merriment aboard,
and the excitement when the canoes first came. The transition from
the monotony of a sea-life to the loquacious bustle of barter with
a half-civilized people is so sudden, that the mind at once feels in
a strange land, and the commonest productions proclaim the luxuriant
climes of the tropics. Until this impression is made, we hardly know
why we have been sailing onward for four months past, so quiet and
unvarying is the daily tenor of a life aboard ship.

"_1st June, Singapore._--On reaching Singapore I was most hospitably
received by the kind inhabitants, and took up my abode with
Mr. Scott. The quiet and repose of my present life, the gentle ride
in the cool of the morning and evening drive after an early dinner,
are already restoring my shattered strength, and I trust soon to be
enabled to prosecute my farther undertaking. In the mean time the
Royalist is undergoing a refit after her passage, and, like her owner,
is daily improving in good looks.

"I could say much of Singapore, for it is the pivot of the liberal
system in the Archipelago, and owes its prosperity to the enlightened
measures of Sir Stamford Raffles. The situation is happily chosen,
the climate healthy, the commerce unshackled, and taxation light; and
these advantages have attracted the vessels of all the neighboring
nations to bring their produce to this market in order to exchange
it for the manufactures of England.

"The extent of the island is about 27 miles by 11 broad. The town
of Singapore stands on the south side, facing the shores of Battam,
and is intersected by a salt-water stream, which separates the native
town from the pleasant residences of the European inhabitants; the
latter stretch along the beach, and cover a space which extends to the
foot of a slight eminence, on which stands the governor's house. Off
the town lie the shipping of various countries, presenting a most
picturesque and striking appearance. The man-of-war, the steamer,
and the merchant-vessels of the civilized world, contrast with the
huge, misshapen, and bedizened arks of China! The awkward prahus
of the Bugis are surrounded by the light boats of the island. The
semi-civilized Cochin-Chinese, with their vessels of antiquated
European construction, deserve attention from this important step
toward improvement; and the rude prahus of some parts of Borneo claim
it from their exhibiting the early dawn of maritime adventure.

"_27th July._--After various causes of delay I sailed on this day from
Singapore. When I contrast my state of health at my arrival with what
it now is, I may well be thankful for the improvement. Every kindness
and hospitality has been shown me.

"On Saturday at noon we got under weigh with a light breeze, and
stood down the Strait on our way to Borneo.

"_28th._--In the morning we were well out in the China Sea, running
six knots per hour, N. 3/4 E. Lines of discolored water were seen
about us, and about 11 A.M. we entered a field some two miles long
and 400 yards wide. The consistence of this dirty mass was that of
pea-soup, which it likewise resembled in color; and I doubt not the
white water of the China Sea (vide _Nautical Magazine_) is referable
to this appearance seen in the night, as may the report of rocks,
&c. The Malays on board called it 'sara,' and declared it to come from
the rivers. On examination it appeared, when magnified, somewhat like
a grain of barley or corn. The particles were extremely minute, soft,
and, when rubbed between the fingers, emitted a strong smell like
paint-oil; a potent odor arose while passing through the thick patch.

"It may not be superfluous to recount here the preparations I have
made for this trip to Borneo, or my intentions when I get there. Borneo
Proper, once the seat of piracy, which few vessels could approach with
safety, is now under the sway of the Rajah Muda Hassim. The character
given this rajah by many persons who know and have traded with him is
good, and he is spoken of as generous and humane, and greatly inclined
to the English. These reasons have induced me to abandon my intention
of proceeding direct to Malludu Bay, and during the season of the
southwest monsoon to confine myself principally to the northwest
coast. Muda Hassim being at present reported to be at Sarawak, I
propose, after taking a running sketch of the coast from Tanjong Api,
to enter the river of that name, and proceed as far as the town.

"I believe I have availed myself of every means within my reach
to render my visit agreeable to the rajah. I carry with me many
presents which are reported to be to his liking; gaudy silks of
Surat, scarlet cloth, stamped velvet, gunpowder, &c., beside a large
quantity of confectionery and sweets, such as preserved ginger, jams,
dates, syrups, and to wind up all, a huge box of China toys for his
children! I have likewise taken coarse nankeen to the amount of 100_l._
value, as the best circulating medium in the country. Beside the
above mentioned preparations, I carry letters from the government of
Singapore, to state, as far as can be done, the objects of my voyage,
and to caution the rajah to take every care of my safety and that
of my men. The Board of Commerce have at the same time entrusted me
with a letter and present to him, to thank him for his humanity to
the crew of an English vessel wrecked on this coast. The story, as
I had it from the parties shipwrecked, is highly creditable to his
humanity. The vessel, called the Napoleon, was wrecked on the bar of
Sarawak river in the northeast monsoon. The people were saved with
difficulty, and remained in the jungle, where they were after a time
discovered by some Malays. Muda Hassim, on receiving intelligence of
this, sent down and brought them to his town, collected all that he
could recover from the wreck, clothed them handsomely, and fed them
well for several months, and, on an opportunity arriving, sent them
back to Singapore free of expense.

"At the same time, however, that I have prepared to meet the natives
as friends, I have not neglected to strengthen my crew, in case I
should find them hostile. Eight stout men of the Ourang Laut, or men of
the sea (Malays), have been added to the force. They are an athletic
race, cheerful and willing; and though not seaman in our sense of the
term, yet well calculated for this expedition. They pull a good oar,
and are invaluable in saving the Europeans the exposure consequent
to wooding and watering. They possess, likewise, the knowledge of
the jungle and its resources, and two of them have before been to
Sarawak and along the coast. Beside these, a young gentleman named
Williamson accompanies me as interpreter; and I have fortunately met
with a medical gentleman, Mr. Westermann, a Dane, who is surgeon for
this voyage, Mr. Williams having left me at Singapore. With these
arrangements I look without apprehension to the power of the Malays;
and without relaxing in measures of the strictest vigilance, I shall
never sleep less soundly when it comes to my turn so to do.

"_August 1st._--I am, then, at length, anchored off the coast of
Borneo! not under very pleasant circumstances, for the night is pitchy
dark, with thunder, lightning, rain, and squalls of wind.

"_2d._--Squally bad night. This morning, the clouds clearing away, was
delightful, and offered for our view the majestic scenery of Borneo. At
nine got under weigh, and ran in on an east-by-south course 4 1/2 or
5 miles toward Tanjong Api. Came to an anchor about five miles from
the land, and dispatched the boat to take sights ashore, in order to
form a base-line for triangulation. The scenery may really be called
majestic. The low and wooded coast about Tanjong Api is backed by
a mountain called Gunong [1] Palo, some 2000 feet in height, which
slopes down behind the point and terminates in a number of hummocks,
showing from a distance like islands.

"The coast, unknown, and represented to abound in shoals and reefs, is
the harbor for pirates of every description. Here, every man's hand is
raised against his brother man; and here sometimes the climate wars
upon the excitable European, and lays many a white face and gallant
heart low on the distant strand.

"_3d._--Beating between Points Api and Datu. The bay, as far as we
have seen, is free from danger; the beach is lined by a feathery row
of beautiful casuarinas, and behind is a tangled jungle, without fine
timber; game is plentiful, from the traces we saw on the sand; hogs in
great numbers, troops of monkeys, and the print of an animal with cleft
hoofs, either a large deer, tapir, or cow. We saw no game save a tribe
of monkeys, one of which, a female, I shot, and another quite young,
which we managed to capture alive. The captive, though the young of
the black monkey, is grayish, with the exception of his extremities,
and a stripe of black down his back and tail. Though very young, he
has already taken food, and we have some hope of preserving his life.

"We witnessed, at the same time, an extraordinary and fatal leap
made by one of these monkeys. Alarmed by our approach, he sprang
from the summit of a high tree at the branch of one lower, and at
some distance. He leaped short, and came clattering down some sixty
or seventy feet amid the jungle. We were unable to penetrate to the
spot on account of a deep swamp to ascertain his fate.

"A rivulet flows into the sea not far from where we landed; the water
is sweet, and of that clear brown color so common in Ireland. This
coast is evidently the haunt of native prahus, whether piratical or
other. Prints of men's feet were numerous and fresh, and traces of
huts, fires, and parts of boats, some of them ornamented after their
rude fashion. A long pull of five miles closed the day.

"_Sunday, 4th._--Performed divine service myself! manfully overcoming
that horror which I have to the sound of my own voice before an
audience. In the evening landed again more to the westward. Shore
skirted by rocks; timber noble, and the forest clear of brushwood,
enabling us to penetrate with ease as far as caution permitted. Traces
of wild beasts numerous and recent, but none discovered. Fresh-water
streams, colored as yesterday, and the trail of an alligator from
one of them to the sea. This dark forest, where the trees shoot up
straight and tall, and are succeeded by generation after generation
varying in stature, but struggling upward, strikes the imagination
with pictures trite yet true. Here the hoary sage of a hundred years
lies moldering beneath your foot, and there the young sapling shoots
beneath the parent shade, and grows in form and fashion like the
parent stem. The towering few, with heads raised above the general
mass, can scarce be seen through the foliage of those beneath; but
here and there the touch of time has cast his withering hand upon
their leafy brow, and decay has begun his work upon the gigantic and
unbending trunk. How trite and yet how true! It was thus I meditated
in my walk. The foot of European, I said, has never touched where
my foot now presses--seldom the native wanders here. Here I indeed
behold nature fresh from the bosom of creation, unchanged by man, and
stamped with the same impress she originally bore! Here I behold God's
design when He formed this tropical land, and left its culture and
improvement to the agency of man. The Creator's gift as yet neglected
by the creature; and yet the time may be confidently looked for when
the axe shall level the forest, and the plow turn the ground.

"_6th._--Made sail this morning, and stood in for an island called
Talang Talang, anchoring about eight miles distant, and sending a
boat to take correct observations for a base-line.

"Our party found Malays of Sarawak on the island, who were civil
to them, and offered to conduct us up to-morrow, if we wanted their
assistance. The pirates, both Illanuns and Dyaks, have been gone from
the bay but a few days; the former seaward, the latter up the rivers.

"_7th._--Morning calm. In the afternoon got under weigh, and anchored
again near the island of Talang Talang; the smaller one a conical
hill bearing south. The Bandar [2] of the place came off in his canoe
to make us welcome. He is a young man sent by Rajah Muda Hassim to
collect turtles' eggs, which abound in this vicinity, especially
on the larger island. The turtles are never molested, for fear of
their deserting the spot; and their eggs, to the amount of five or
six thousand, are collected every morning and forwarded at intervals
to Sarawak as articles of food.

"Our visitor was extremely polite, and, in common with other Asiatics,
possessed the most pleasing and easy manners. He assured us of a
welcome from his rajah, and, in their usual phrase, expressed himself
that the rajah's heart would dilate in his bosom at the sight of
us. His dress consisted of trowsers of green cloth, a dark green
velvet jacket, and his sarong round his waist, thrown gracefully
over two krisses, which he wore at his girdle. His attendants were
poorly attired, and mostly unarmed--a proof of confidence in us, and
a desire to assure us of his own friendly intentions. I treated him
with sweetmeats and syrup, and of his own accord he took a glass of
sherry, as did his chief attendant. On his departure he was presented
with three yards of red cloth, and subsequently with a little tea
and gunpowder."




CHAPTER II.

    Progress: observations.--Description of the coast of
    Borneo.--Account, &c. of a Pangeran.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Meetings
    with Rajah Muda Hassim, and conversations.--The Town.--Interchange
    of visits and presents--Excursion to Dyak tribes.--Resources and
    commercial products.


I Resume Mr. Brooke's Journal, which requires no introductory remark.

"_Aug. 8th._--A cloudy day, preventing us from taking our wished-for
observations. I made a boat-excursion round the two islands. The north
one is somewhat the larger; the southern one, running north and south,
consists of two hills joined by a low and narrow neck of land. The
water between these islands is deep, varying from seven to six fathoms;
but between the smaller one and the main there are rocks and reefs;
and though a passage may exist, it would not be advisable for a vessel
to try it. These two small islands possess all the characteristic
beauties of the clime. Formed of brown granite, with a speck of
white sandy beach, and rising into hills covered with the noblest
timber, wreathed with gigantic creepers. Cream-colored pigeons flit
from tree to tree, and an eagle or two soared aloft watching their
motions. Frigate-birds are numerous; and several sorts of smaller
birds in the bush, difficult to get at. A small species of crocodile,
or alligator, was likewise seen: but we were not fortunate enough
to shoot one. The natives, when asked whether they were alligators,
answered in the negative, calling them crocodiles. The tides appear
to be as irregular as tides usually are in a deep bay. The rise and
fall of the tide is about fifteen feet.

"_9th._--After breakfast this morning took our sights, and at twelve
o'clock the latitude of the smaller Talang Talang and the ship for
a base-line. We yesterday took the same base-line by sound, firing
alternately three guns from the vessel and three from the shore.

"_10th._--A squall from the northward brought in a chopping sea in
the morning. We were favored with a visit from another native party,
but the chief was in every respect inferior to our first acquaintance,
Bandar Dowat.

"_11th Sunday._--Got under weigh early, after a night of torrents of
rain. The breeze being directly out of Lundu river, I stood as near
it as I could, and then bore away for Santobong, in order to reach
Sarawak. From Gunong Gading the coast gradually declines, and forms
two points. The first of these is Tanjong Bloungei, near which, on the
right hand, runs a small river, of the same name. The next point is
Tanjong Datu, which shows prominently from most parts of the bay. From
Tanjong Datu the coast recedes into a bay, and again forms a low point,
which I have christened Tanjong Lundu. The river Lundu disembogues
itself into the bay just beyond the point of the same name; and the
land on its far bank forms a bight of considerable depth. The Lundu is
a barred river with but little water; though, judging from the opening,
it is by no means small. Our pilots inform me at the same time,
however, that within the bar there is considerable depth of water.

"From the Sungei Lundu the land rises behind a wooded beach. The first
hill, which may be said to form the larboard entrance of the river,
is peaked, and called Sumpudin, and near it is a barred river of the
same name. This range of high land runs some distance; and near its
termination is the river Tamburgan. The low coast runs into another
bight; and the first opening after the termination of the high land is
the mouth of the river Seboo. Then comes another river; after which
the land rises into hills, gradually larger, till they terminate in
a round-topped hill, which forms the starboard entrance (going in)
of the Sarawak river.

"This river discharges itself at the east corner of the bay; and its
locality is easily recognized by the highest peak of Santobong, which
towers over its left bank, close to the entrance. A ship rounding Datu
will readily perceive the high land of Santobong, showing like a large
island, with another smaller island at its northern extremity. Both
these, however, are attached to the main: and the northernmost point,
called Tanjong Sipang, is distinguished by two peaks, like horns, one
small, the other larger. Steer from Datu a direct course toward this
high land, and when within a mile and a half or two miles of the shore,
haul in along the land, as there is a sand nearly dry at low water on
the starboard hand, stretching from the shore to the Saddle island,
or Pulo Satang. The leading mark to clear this sand is to bring the
hollow formed between the round hill at the right entrance of the
Sarawak river and the next hill a-head, and as you approach the river's
mouth, steer for a small island close to the shore, called Pulo Karra,
or Monkey Island. These marks will conduct you over a shoal with 1/4
three, the least depth at high water; you will then deepen your water,
and keep away for the low green point on the far side of the river,
edging gradually in; and when you are some distance from the opposite
low point on the port hand, cross the bar in three fathom (high water)
nearly in the center of the river. You must not, however, encroach on
the larboard side. The bar is narrow, and just within is 7 and 7 1/2
fathom, where we are at present anchored. The scenery is noble. On our
left hand is the peak of Santobong, clothed in verdure nearly to the
top; at his foot a luxuriant vegetation, fringed with the casuarina,
and terminating in a beach of white sand. The right bank of the river
is low, covered with pale green mangroves, with the round hill above
mentioned just behind it. Santobong peak is 2050 feet, or thereabouts,
by a rough trigonometrical measurement.

"_12th._--Lay at anchor; took angles and observations, and shot in
the evening without any success. There is a fine species of large
pigeon of a gray color I was desirous of getting, but they were too
cunning. Plenty of wild hogs were seen, but as shy as though they
had been fired at all their lives. When the flood made, dispatched
my gig for Sarawak, in order to acquaint the rajah of my arrival.

"_13th._--Got under weigh, and in the second reach met our gig
returning, followed by a large canoe, with a Pangeran of note to
welcome us. We gave him a salute of five guns; while he, on his part,
assured us of his rajah's pleasure at our arrival, and his own desire
to be of service. With the Pangeran Oula Deen (or Illudeen, anglicè
Aladdin), came the rajah's chief writer, his shroff, a renegade Parsee,
a war-captain, and some others, beside a score of followers. They
made themselves much at home, ate and drank (the less scrupulous
took wine), and conversed with ease and liveliness. No difference
can be more marked than between the Hindoostani and the Malay. The
former, though more self-possessed and polished, shows a constraint
in manners and conversation, and you feel that his training has made
him an artificial character. The Malay, on the contrary, concealing as
well the feelings upper-most in his mind, is lively and intelligent,
and his conversation is not confined to a dull routine of unmeaning
compliments.

"_August 13th._--The Pangeran spoke to me of some ship-captain who
was notoriously cruel to his Lascars, and insolent in his language
to the Malays. He was murdered by his crew, and the circumstance was
related to me as though I was to approve the act! 'No Malay of Borneo
(added the Pangeran) would injure a European, were he well treated, and
in a manner suitable to his rank.' And I am sure such a declaration,
in a limited sense, is consonant with all known principles of human
nature, and the action of the passions and feelings.

"Our Pangeran was quite the gentleman, and a manly gentleman too. His
dress was a black velvet jacket, trimmed with gold lace, and trowsers
of green cloth, with a red sarong and kris. He was the only one of
the party armed while aboard. The rest were good, quiet men, and one
or two of them very intelligent. They took their leave of us to get
back to the town at sunset; but the ebb making, returned and stayed
until twelve at night, when the tide turned in their favor. We had
some difficulty in providing beds. The Pangeran slept in my cabin,
and the rest were distributed about on couches or carpets.

"_August 14th._--Got under weigh with the flood, and, favored by a
light breeze, proceeded up the river nearly as far as the town. From
the ignorance of the pilots, however, we grounded on a rock in the
middle of the river in 1 1/2 fathom water, and it took us an hour
to heave the vessel off by the stern. Had the tide been falling, we
should have been in a critical situation, as the rock is dry at low
water; but as it was, we received no damage. Shortly after getting
off, several boats with assistance came from the place, dispatched
in haste by the rajah. The intention was kind, though we needed not
the aid. Being dark, we dropped anchor in 5 1/2 fathom, about 1 1/2
mile from the town.

"_15th._--Anchored abreast of Sarawak at seven, and saluted the rajah
with twenty-one guns, which were returned with eighteen from his
residence. The rajah's own brother, Pangeran Mahammed, then saluted
the vessel with seven guns, which were returned. Having breakfasted,
and previously intimated our intention, we pulled ashore to visit the
great man. He received us in state, seated in his hall of audience,
which outside is nothing but a large shed, erected on piles, but
within decorated with taste. Chairs were placed on each side of the
ruler, who occupied the head seat. Our party were placed on one hand;
on the other sat his brother Mahammed, and Macota and some others of
his principal chiefs, while immediately behind him his twelve younger
brothers were seated.

"The dress of Muda Hassim was simple, but of rich material; and most
of the principal men were well, and even superbly, dressed. His
countenance is plain, but intelligent and highly pleasing, and
his manners perfectly elegant and easy. His reception was kind,
and, I am given to understand, highly flattering. We sat, however,
trammeled with the formality of state, and our conversation did not
extend beyond kind inquiries and professions of friendship. We were
presented with tobacco rolled up in a leaf, each about a foot long,
and tea was served by attendants on their knees. A band played wild and
not unmusical airs during the interview, and the crowd of attendants
who surrounded us were seated in respectful silence. After a visit
of half an hour, we rose and took our leave.

"Sarawak is but an occasional residence of the Rajah Muda Hassim,
and he is now detained here by a rebellion in the interior. On my
inquiring whether _the war_ proceeded favorably, he replied that there
was _no war_, but merely _some child's play among his subjects_. From
what I hear, however, from other quarters, it is more serious than he
represents it; and hints have been thrown out that the rajah wishes
me to stay here _as a demonstration_ to intimidate the rebels. We
shall see.

"The town consists of a collection of mud huts erected on piles, and
may contain about 1500 persons. The residences of the rajah and his
fourteen brothers occupy the greater part, and their followers are
the great majority of the population. When they depart for Borneo (or
Bruni), the remainder must be a very small population, and apparently
very poor. The river affords a few fish; but there is little sign
of cultivation either of rice or other grain. Fowls and goats seem
the only other means of subsistence of these people. The geological
features of the country are easily described. Vast masses of granite
rock are scattered along the coast; for instance, Gunong Poe, Gading,
Santobong, &c. &c., which have evidently at some former period been
detached islands. The spaces between these granite masses is now filled
in with alluvial soil, intersected in every direction with rivers and
streams, and on the low alluvial bank of the Sarawak river stands this
little town. The distance from the sea is about twenty-five miles,
through banks of mangrove and the Nepa palm, until approaching the
town, where some jungle-trees first appear. The breadth is about 100
yards, and the depth six fathoms at low water spring-tides in mid
river opposite the rajah's residence. In some places below, the river
is narrower, and the depths considerable, varying from three to seven
fathoms. The prominent points, however, are shallow, and the rocks
below the town lie on the starboard hand coming up just as the first
houses appear in sight. The larboard hand should then be kept close
aboard. Some other rocks are likewise reported; and in ascending the
stream, though it be generally clear, a vessel _with_ or without a
pilot should have a boat a-head sounding. In the evening I went ashore
suddenly to pay a visit to the rajah, in order, if possible, to break
through the bonds of formality. The great man soon made his appearance,
and received us very well. We talked much of the state of his country
and of ours; but he was very guarded when I spoke of the Dutch. 'He
had no dealings whatever (he said) with them, and never allowed their
vessels to come here, and therefore could not say what they were
like.' We sat in easy and unreserved converse, out of hearing of the
rest of the circle. He expressed great kindness to the English nation;
and begged me to tell him _really_ which was the most powerful nation,
England or Holland, or, as he significantly expressed it, which is the
'cat, and which the rat?' I assured him that England was the mouser,
though in this country Holland had most territory. We took our leave
after he had intimated his intention of visiting us to-morrow morning.

"_16th._--We were ready to receive the rajah after breakfast; but these
affairs of state are not so easily managed. There came two diplomatists
on board to know, in the first place, how many guns we intended to
salute with, and, in the second, whether I would go ashore in my gig,
in order to fetch the chief and his brother off. The latter request
I might have refused, and in a diplomatic light it was inadmissible;
but I readily conceded it, because, in the first place, it was less
troublesome than a refusal; and, in the next, I cared not to bandy
paltry etiquets with a semi-savage; and whatever pride might whisper,
I could not, as an individual traveler, refuse an acknowledgment
of the supremacy of a native prince. I went accordingly. The great
man came on board, and we treated him with every distinction and
respect. Much barbaric state was maintained as he quitted his own
residence. His sword of state with a gold scabbard, his war-shield,
jewel-hilted kris, and flowing _horse_-tails, were separately carried
by the grand officers of state. Bursts of wild music announced his
exit. His fourteen brothers and principal Pangerans surrounded him,
and a number (formidable on the deck of a vessel) covered the rear. He
stayed two hours and a half; ate and drank, and talked with great
familiarity; till the oppressive heat of the crowded cabin caused
me to wish them all to another place. However, he departed at last,
under a salute of twenty-one guns; and the fatigues of the day were
satisfactorily brought to a close. I afterward sent the rajah the
presents I had brought for him, consisting of a silk sarong, some
yards of red cloth and velvet, a pocket-pistol, scissors and knives,
with tea, biscuits, sweetmeats, China playthings, &c. &c. A person
coming here should be provided with a few articles of small importance
to satisfy the crowd of inferior chiefs. Soap, small parcels of tea,
lucifers, writing-paper, a large stock of cigars, biscuits, and knives,
are the best; for, without being great beggars, they seem greatly
to value these trifles, even in the smallest quantity. The higher
class inquired frequently for scents; and for the great men I know no
present which would be more acceptable than a small pier-glass. All
ranks seemed greatly pleased with those aboard; and some of the lower
orders, quite ignorant of the reflection, were continually laughing,
moving, sitting, and rising, to observe the corresponding effect.

"_18th._--In the morning I intimated my intention of paying a visit to
the Pangeran Muda Mahammed; and being apprised of his readiness to see
us, I went ashore to his house. He was not, however, in the room to
receive us; nor, indeed, was I much surprised at this slight, for he
is a sulky-looking, ill-favored savage, with a debauched appearance,
and wanting in the intelligence of his brother the rajah. I seated
myself, however, and remained some time; but the delay exceeding
what I considered the utmost limit of due forbearance, I expressed
to the Pangeran Macota my regret that his compeer was not ready to
receive me, adding that, as I was not accustomed to be kept waiting,
I would return to my vessel. I spoke in the quietest tone imaginable,
rose from my seat, and moved away; but the assembled Pangerans, rising
likewise, assured me it was a mistake; that he was not yet dressed,
and would greatly regret it himself. I repeated that when I visited the
rajah, he received me in the hall. While this brief discussion passed,
the culprit Muda Mahammed appeared and apologized for his remissness,
assuring me that the error was his attendants', who told him I was not
coming for an hour. The excuse of course passed current, though false,
as excuses generally are. I vindicated my independence, not until it
was necessary; and I am well aware that any endeavor of a native to
commit an indirect rudeness, if met with firmness and gentleness,
always recoils on his own head. The routine of the visit resembled
our last--tea, cigars, complimentary conversation and departure. The
Pangeran afterward sent me a present of fowls and goats, and I was
right glad to have it over. Muda Mahammed is the 'own' brother to Muda
Hassim, and next in rank here. As yet I had not made any request to the
rajah to allow me to visit various parts of his country; but thinking
the time to do so was come (the ceremonial of arrival being past),
I sent Mr. Williamson, my interpreter, to express my wish to travel
to some of the Malay towns and into the country of the Dyaks. The
latter request I fully expected, would be evaded, and was therefore
the more pleased when an answer came giving a cheerful consent to my
going among the Dyaks of Lundu, and visiting the towns of Sadung,
Samarahan, &c. At the same time the rajah informed me, that if I
went up the river, he could not be answerable for my safety, as the
rebels were not far distant, and constantly on the watch. Sarebus,
another large Dyak town, he advised me not to visit, as they were
inimical to his government, and a skirmish had lately taken place
between them and some of his subjects.

"_18th, Sunday._--Performed service. In the evening walked ashore,
but the jungle was wet after rain. Every day or night since arriving
it has rained, sometimes in torrents, at others in showers, and the
sky has been so obscured that no observations can be obtained. The
thermometer never ranges above 81°, and sometimes stands at 59°.

"At twelve at night we were surprised by a boat sent from the rajah,
to say he was taken ill, and wanted some physic. We dispatched our
surgeon, but it was found impossible to admit him into the sacred
precincts of the seraglio, and he returned with the information that
the rajah was asleep.

"_21st._--Our fleet were in readiness before daylight, and by five
o'clock we left Kuching, [3] and dropped down the river. The Pangeran
Illudeen and the Panglima, both in prahus, accompanied us, and with
our long-boat (the Skimalong) formed quite a gay procession. The prahu
of the Pangeran pulled twelve paddles, mounted two brass swivels, and
in all had a crew of about twenty men. The Panglima's boat likewise
carried a gun, and had about ten men; while the Skimalong mounted
an iron swivel, and carried six Englishmen and one of our Singapore
Malays. With this equipment we might be pronounced far superior to
any force of the rajah's enemies we were likely to meet.

"We passed from the Sarawak river into the Morotaba. At the junction
of the two streams the Morotaba is narrow; but at no great distance,
where it meets the Quop, it becomes wider, and in some places more
than half a mile across.

"The river Quop is a fine stream, fully, as far as I could see,
as broad as the Morotaba or Sarawak. Beyond the junction of the
Quop and Morotaba the latter river divides into two branches--the
left-hand one, running to the sea, retains the name of Morotaba,
while the right is called Riam.

"The Riam is a fine stream; at its junction with the Morotaba it
takes that name, as the Morotaba does that of Sarawak where they
join. Low mangrove or Nepa palm banks characterize these streams;
and occasionally slight eminences, with timber, are to be seen. The
highest hill is about 3000 feet high, called Matang, and is at the
point of junction between the Morotaba and Riam.

"The next river on the starboard hand is the Tanjan, a small stream;
and some distance from it, the Kulluong, or Parwheet river, more
properly the continuation of the Riam. On the port hand is a smaller
river, running N. 35° E. We pursued this stream, called Ugong Passer;
and after a hard pull against a strong tide, emerged into the larger
river of Samarahan. The tide was so strong against us that we brought
up for a couple of hours till it slacked, and between four and five
got under weigh again, with the expectation of shortly arriving at
our place of destination. Hour after hour passed, however; the sun
set; the glorious moon rose upon our progress as we toiled slowly but
cheerfully onward. Silence was around, save when broken by the wild
song of the Malay boatmen, responded to by the song of our tars to
the tune of 'Bonnie laddie, Highland laddie.'

"It was such a situation as an excitable mind might envy. The
reflection that we were proceeding up a Borneon river hitherto
unknown, sailing where no European ever sailed before; the deep
solitude, the brilliant night, the dark fringe of retired jungle,
the lighter foliage of the river bank, with here and there a tree
flashing and shining with fireflies, nature's tiny lamps glancing and
flitting in countless numbers and incredible brilliancy! At eleven at
night we reached Samarahan, having been eighteen hours in the boat,
and fifteen at the oars, chiefly against tide. The men were tired,
but cheerful. Indeed, I can give them no praise beyond their merits
for conduct spirited, enduring, and yet so orderly as never to offend
the native inhabitants, or infringe upon their prejudices. A glass of
grog with our supper, and we all soon closed our eyes in comfortable
sleep, such as fatigue alone can bring.

"_22d._--The village of Samarahan consists of a few houses, built,
as usual, upon posts, and standing close to the brink of the river. It
contains from sixty to eighty inhabitants in all, and there is nothing
in its site different from the rest of the country. While here, a boat,
with a Dyak family, came alongside, consisting of a father, his son,
and two daughters. They belonged to the Sibnowan tribe, and had a
'ladang,' or farm, on the Samarahan, toward the sea. The women were
good-looking; one, indeed, handsome, plump, and intelligent. They
were naked to the waist, and ornamented with several cinctures of
brass and colored rattans scraped very thin.

"About ten we quitted Samarahan and proceeded up the river,
stopping only to take a set of sights, and about seven in the evening
reached Sibnow, having previously passed the villages of Rembas and
Siniawan. Siniawan and Sibnow are not above half a mile from each
other, and Rembas not far distant. They are all about the same size,
consisting each of eight or ten houses, and containing sixty or eighty
inhabitants. The river, during its course so far, is characterized by
the same clay-mud bank, evidently an alluvial deposit, without one
rock to be seen. The banks are low, and for the most part cleared a
quarter of a mile or more on either side, but the jungle is rarely
disturbed beyond that distance. Occasionally, however, the scene
is varied by the rich foliage of this jungle, which here and there
kisses the tide as it flows by, and in some spots on the cleared
ground arise clumps of trees that would be the pride of any park
in Europe. Monkeys in great numbers frisked among the branches; and
though unable to shoot them, they amused us often by their grotesque
attitudes and the tremendous leaps they made. On one occasion we
saw as many as twenty throw themselves, one after the other, from
the branch of a high tree into a thick bush full forty feet below,
and not one missed his distance or hold! On our way to Sibnow the
Pangeran had collected a number of men for a deer-hunt. The nets used
for this purpose are formed of rattans strongly wove together, which,
being stretched along the jungle, have nooses of the same material,
at three feet apart, attached to this ridge-rope. Beaters and dogs
then hunt from the opposite quarter, and the deer, in escaping them, is
caught in this trap. A length of several hundred fathoms is stretched
at once, each separate part of thirty or forty fathoms being joined
on as required; and I was told that in this way many deer were taken.

"A heavy rain came on directly after we had brought up, and quickly
dispelled all our preparations for supper, by putting out our fire,
cooling our hot water, and soaking our half-broiled fowls. To a hungry
man such an event is very disastrous; but nothing could exceed the
kindness of our Malay friends. They took us to the best house in the
village, prepared our supper, and provided us with comfortable mats
and pillows to sleep on. Some of our party preferred a bad supper and
wet bed to these accommodations; and, to consummate their discomfort,
they were kept awake a great part of the night by sandflies. Our
lot in the house was more fortunate. We heard the rattling of the
pitiless rain, and commiserated those whose choice or distrust kept
them in the boat. I obtained by this means an excellent opportunity of
seeing a Malay _ménage_ in its primitive simplicity. Women, children,
and all their domestic arrangements, were exposed to view. Nothing
appeared to be concealed, nor could anything exceed the simple,
kind-hearted hospitality of the inhabitants. The women gazed upon us
freely; and their children, with the shyness natural to their age,
yet took a glance at the strangers. Never having seen a white man,
their curiosity was naturally excited; but it was never offensive. Our
supper consisted of an excellent curry, and cold venison broiled on a
stick, flavored with a glass of sherry, and concluded by a cigar. We
retired to a dry bed, laying our head on the pillow with as entire
a feeling of security as though reposing in England.

"A description of this Malay dwelling, situated so far up this hitherto
unknown river, may be interesting. Built, like other Malay houses,
on posts, floored with split bamboo, and covered with the leaf of the
Nepa palm, it presents the very _beau ideal_ of fragility, but affords,
at the same time, many advantages, and with a little improvement
might be rendered admirably calculated for a new settler in any warm
country. It is built at very small expense, is remarkably roomy, free
from damp, and weather-proof. The interior of the house consists of
four rooms, the center one large and commodious, the front narrower,
but thirty-six feet in length, a family sleeping-apartment on one side,
and a kitchen at the back. These apartments are divided one from the
other by partitions made of the Nepa; the floors were nicely spread
with strong mats of Dyak manufacture, and on our arrival finer white
mats were laid over these. The entrance of the house is approached
by a steep ladder, which in case of attack is easily removed. The
river Samarahan is admirably calculated for trade, and, indeed,
the same may be said of the whole country, from the great facility
it offers of inland communication. There is no impediment for small
vessels of 200 or 300 tons navigating as far as Sibnow, the stream
being deep and clear of danger. The tides in the river are strong,
but not dangerously so; and, sounding occasionally in every reach,
we never found less water than three fathoms. The distant mountains,
called Bukar (and some other name), are inhabited by Dyaks, and are
said to offer many valuable articles of trade; and we may presume
this true from the riches of the region whence the Sarawak river
takes its rise. It is highly probable, indeed, that both these rivers,
as well as the Quop and others, have their source in the same range,
and will be found to afford the same mineral productions. Tin, the
natives confidently assert, can be procured, and birds' nests in
very considerable quantities. The latter article, I have heretofore
understood, was found only in the vicinity of the sea, whence the
material of which they are composed is gathered; but both here and
at Sarawak the best informed and most intelligent Malays assure me
it is likewise found in the interior, and brought by the Dyaks from
the mountains. The alluvial soil is a rich clay loam. The principal
production at present is rice, of which considerable quantities are
grown on the banks of the river, which accounts for the clearing
of so many miles of the jungle. The mode of cultivation is similar
to what is pursued in Sumatra, and so well described by Marsden. A
small spot is cleared of jungle, and when the soil is exhausted of
its primeval richness, is deserted for another, which again in turn
is neglected, and returns to its wild state. The rice produced is of
excellent quality, and of a smaller grain than the Java rice we have
with us. It is very white and of excellent flavor, and I am inclined
to think is the 'Padi ladang,' or rice grown on dry ground. (For rice,
cultivation of, &c., &c., vide Marsden's _Sumatra_, p. 65.)

"Beside rice, rattans are found in great quantities, and likewise
Malacca canes, but whether of good quality I am not able to say. On my
expressing a wish to see one, a man was dispatched into the jungle,
and returned with one in a few minutes. Bees-wax is another article
to be procured here _at present_ to the amount of thirty or forty
peculs per year from Sibnow, Malacca canes a small ship-load, rattans
in abundance, and any quantity of Garu wood. [4] When we consider the
antimony of Sarawak, beside the other things previously mentioned (to
say nothing of gold and diamonds), we cannot doubt of the richness
of the country: but allowance must be made for the exaggeration of
native statements.

"It must likewise be borne in mind, that these articles are
collected in small quantities in a country thinly populated; and
for the purposes of trade it would be necessary to have a resident
European on the spot to gather the produce of the country ready for
exportation. I have no doubt that permission might be obtained for
an English merchant to reside in the country, and that during the
lifetime of the Rajah Muda Hassim he would be secure from outrage. The
produce of the country might likewise be obtained (at first) at a
low rate in exchange for European goods suited to native tastes. In
addition to the articles I have already mentioned, I must here add
pins, needles, and thread, both gold and white, showy cheap velvets,
yellow, green, and red cloth, Surat silks, cottons, colored beads
(for the Dyaks), nankeens in small quantities, gold-lace of various
qualities, gunpowder, muskets, pistols, flints, &c., &c. The head man
of Sibnow (Orang Kaya), when I asked him why he did not collect the
produce of the country, replied, that the inhabitants were few, and
unless an English merchant was settled at Kuching to buy the things,
it was no use collecting them. The uncertainty of sale, as well as
the very small prices to be obtained from trading Malays, prevents
these people using the advantages of their country, and as yet they
seemed to consider it impossible that vessels would come for them. That
they will one day or other be convinced to the contrary, I am sure;
that it will be soon, I sincerely hope; for I can see no reason, with
a population and rulers so pacific, why a trade highly advantageous
to Singapore should not be opened. I considered our reception as an
additional proof how much better the natives are disposed where they
have had no intercourse with Europeans; how perfectly willing they
are to extend a friendly hospitality when never previously injured or
aggravated; and as the first white men who ever visited their country,
we can bear the most cordial testimony to their unaffected kindness.

"It is true that we were under the protection of the rajah and
accompanied by a Pangeran, and could have insisted on obtaining what
was readily granted. But in case the natives had shown any aversion
or antipathy toward us, it would easily have been observed.

"_23d._--Heavy rain all the morning. Our salt provisions being
exhausted, we procured a goat, which was cooked to last during our
upward passage.

"At 12, the flood making, we quitted Sibnow, and passing through the
same description of country, reached the village of Guntong, consisting
of eight houses, and about sixty or seventy inhabitants. The scattered
population on the banks of the river amounts, however, to an equal,
or probably greater number than in the villages. Beyond Guntong
the country becomes wild, but beautiful, and the river gradually
narrows until not above twenty-five yards wide. The depth, however,
was three fathoms at high water, where we brought up for the night,
about five hours' pull from Guntong. The course of the river is so
tortuous, that in one place two reaches are only divided by a neck
of land five yards across!

"We were now fairly in the bush, and beyond the range of our Pangeran's
knowledge; and I was not therefore surprised (though disappointed)
when he intimated the necessity of returning. 'There was nothing to
see; the river was narrow, rapid, and obstructed by trees; the Dyaks
hostile; the rajah's enemies in ambush.'

"I had nothing to answer, save my desire to proceed; but I felt, at
the same time, bound in honor to return; for to abuse the indulgence
of a native prince on our first excursion would have been a poor way
to obtain his future permission to visit other places.

"I did everything man could do to shake the Pangeran's resolution;
and I believe I should have been successful, had his stock of tobacco
and sirih [5] not been expended. My last resource was resorting to
the means found efficient with most men to induce them to alter
their opinion. I was content to gain a consent to our proceeding
some miles farther up the stream in the morning, and then returning
with the ebb. Nothing during this contention could be more polite
than the Pangeran's manner; for he not only expressed but looked his
regret, and urged on me his responsibility to the rajah. The plea was
unanswerable, though I could not help suspecting the want of tobacco
and betel as the leading motive.

"_24th._--We proceeded, as previously agreed, up the river some
ten or twelve miles farther, during which distance it narrows to
an inconsiderable but deep stream. In many places it was not above
eighteen feet wide, with trees overhanging the water. The depth was
2 1/2 fathoms high water; but being the rainy season, it would not
be deeper than necessary for boats all the year round. In the early
morning the jungle presented a charming scene. Long vistas of noble
trees with a diversity of richest foliage were before us--in some
places overarching the water, and forming a verdant canopy above
our heads. Birds were numerous, and woke the woods with their notes,
but rarely approached within shot. Pigeons in numbers and of several
varieties were seen, but very shy and wild.

"We pushed on ahead of our attendant Pangeran, and pulled up long
after the ebb had made. He had a long chase, and exhausted his
lungs in shouting to us to return; and at last, from pity and
according to promise, I did so. Poor fellow, he was very glad,
fired his swivel-gun, and then brought up for breakfast. I believe
a few hours' progress would have brought us to the vicinity of the
hills and into the country of the Dyaks; and although disappointed
at not being allowed to proceed thither, I nevertheless comfort
myself that we have penetrated a hundred miles up a Borneon river
hitherto unknown--a river likewise (as far as we have yet examined
it) admirably calculated for the purposes of navigation and trade,
and which may at some future period become of importance not only to
the trade of our settlement of Singapore, but even to the commercial
interests of Great Britain. The general character of the Samarahan
is similar to that of other rivers flowing through alluvial soils;
the stream is deep, with muddy banks and bottom, and apparently free
from danger or obstruction. Of course these remarks are not meant
to prevent the necessity of caution in any vessel proceeding up,
as our survey was necessarily very brief; and, like other rivers,
one bank will usually be found deep, the other shallow; which must
be attended to.

"It now remains for us to proceed up the river from its mouth to its
junction with the Ugong Passer; and should it prove to have sufficient
water for vessels on the bar, nothing more will be desired.

"Returning, it took us five hours with a fair tide to Sibnow; the
next ebb we reached Samarahan in three hours, where we stopped for
the night. A heavy rain set in after we brought to, and continued
till morning.

"_25th._--The morning was cold and raw; but cleared up as the sun
rose. At 7 we started, and at a quarter past 10 reached the mouth
of the Ugong Passer and thence into the Riam. Thus it took us 11 1/4
hours, with a strong ebb tide, to pull the distance. We had ascended
the river from the junction of the Ugong Passer. Mr. Murray's plan
of the river will show the distance as taken of each reach, together
with its bearing. The ebb tide lasted us some distance up the Riam;
but the flood making, we entered a small creek, called Tarusongong,
scarce wide enough for the boat to get through, and entirely
overarched with the Nepa palm. The general direction of the creek
was N.W., and we emerged from it into the Boyur river; and pulling
through several reaches, got into the Quop, [6] and thence, after a
while, into the Morotaba; from the Morotaba into the Sarawak river,
reaching the schooner at sunset, all well and happy. Thus ended our
first cruise into the interior of Borneo."





CHAPTER III.

    Second Cruise: up the River Lundu.--The Sibnowan Dyaks--Their
    Town of Tungong.--Their Physical Proportions, and Words of
    their Language.--Their Customs.--Skull-trophies.--Religious
    Ceremonies and Opinions.--Their Ornaments.--Appearance of
    both Sexes.--Dress and Morals.--Missionary Prospects of
    Conversion, and Elevation in the Social Scale.--Government,
    Laws, and Punishments.--Dances.--Iron Manufacturing.--Chinese
    Settlement.--Excursion continued.


"_Aug. 30th._--Our flotilla, constituted as before, quitted Sarawak
with the ebb tide, and reached Santobong, at the mouth of the river,
soon after the flood had made. We waited for the turn of the tide; and
in wandering along the sand, I had a shot at a wild hog, but unluckily
missed. I likewise saw a deer, very like a red deer, and nearly as
large. The hog I fired at was a dirty white, with a black head, very
unlike in this particular to any wild hogs I have hitherto seen either
in India or Europe; but several young pigs, likewise seen, were black.

"With the flood we weighed anchor, intending to bring up at the mouth
of the Seboo river; but the Skimalong outsailing the prahus, foolishly
parted company, causing me much uneasiness, and keeping the prahus
under weigh all night. I was at this time aboard the Pangeran's boat,
where I usually slept. About 10 on the 31st we reached Lobrek Bay,
and rejoined our boat.

"With the flood tide we proceeded up Lundu river, which has Gunong
Gading on the right hand. The course of the river is very tortuous,
but it appears every where of more than sufficient depth. The Dyak
village of Tungong is situated about eighteen miles from the mouth, and
takes its name from a small stream which joins the Lundu just below,
on the left hand. It was dark when we arrived, and we ran against a
boom formed of large trees run across the river as a defense against
adverse Dyak tribes. We could see nothing of the town, save that it
appeared longer than any we had yet visited.

"_September 1st._--The River Lundu is of considerable breadth, about
half a mile at the mouth, and 150 or 200 yards off Tungong. Tungong
stands on the left hand (going up) close to the margin of the stream,
and is inclosed by a slight stockade. Within this defense there is
_one_ enormous house for the whole population, and three or four
small huts. The exterior of the defense between it and the river is
occupied by sheds for prahus, and at each extremity are one or two
houses belonging to Malay residents.

"The common habitation, as rude as it is enormous, measures 594 feet
in length, and the front room, or _street_, is the entire length of the
building, and 21 feet broad. The back part is divided by mat partitions
into the private apartments of the various families, and of these there
are forty-five separate doors leading from the public apartment. The
widowers and young unmarried men occupy the public room, as only those
with wives are entitled to the advantage of separate rooms. The floor
of this edifice is raised twelve feet from the ground, and the means
of ascent is by the trunk of a tree with notches cut in it--a most
difficult, steep, and awkward ladder. In front is a terrace fifty feet
broad, running partially along the front of the building, formed, like
the floors, of split bamboo. This platform, as well as the front room,
besides the regular inhabitants, is the resort of pigs, dogs, birds,
monkeys, and fowls, and presents a glorious scene of confusion and
bustle. Here the ordinary occupations of domestic labor are carried
on--padi ground, mats made, &c., &c. There were 200 men, women, and
children counted in the room and in front while we were there in the
middle of the day; and, allowing for those abroad and those in their
own rooms, the whole community can not be reckoned at less than 400
souls. Overhead, about seven feet high, is a second crazy story, on
which they stow their stores of food and their implements of labor
and war. Along the large room are hung many cots, four feet long,
formed of the hollowed trunks of trees cut in half, which answer the
purpose of seats by day and beds by night. The Sibnowan Dyaks are a
wild-looking but apparently quiet and inoffensive race. The apartment
of their chief, by name Sejugah, is situated nearly in the center
of the building, and is larger than any other. In front of it nice
mats were spread on the occasion of our visit, while over our heads
dangled about thirty ghastly skulls, according to the custom of these
people. The chief was a man of middle age, with a mild and pleasing
countenance and gentle manners. He had around him several sons and
relations, and one or two of the leading men of his tribe, but the
rest seemed by no means to be restrained by his presence, or to show
him any particular marks of respect: certainly nothing of the servile
obsequiousness observed by the Malays before their prince. Their
dress consists of a single strip of cloth round the loins, with the
ends hanging down before and behind, and a light turban, composed of
the bark of trees, twined round the head, and so arranged that the
front is stuck up somewhat resembling a short plume of feathers.

"Their figures are almost universally well made, showing great activity
without great muscular development; but their stature is diminutive,
as will be seen by the following measurements, taken at random among
them, and confirmed by general observation:


    "Sejugah, the chief, height, 5 ft. 1 3/4 in. Head round, 1 ft. 9
    in. Anterior portion, from ear to ear, 1 foot; posterior, 9 in.;
    across the top, 1 1/4 ft.

    "Kalong, the chief's eldest son, height, 5 ft. 2 1/4 in. Anterior
    portion of head, 1 ft.; posterior, 8 3/4 in.; across the top,
    1 ft., wanting a few lines.

                                     Height

                Man from the crowd   5 ft.  1 3/4 in.
                Another              5      1 1/2
                Another              5      4
                Another              4     10
                Another              5      3
                Another              5      4



"The following is a specimen of their names, and some few words
of their dialect, the only ones I could get not Malayan. The fact,
indeed, appears to be that, from constant intercourse, their Dyak
language is fast fading away; and, while retaining their separate
religion and customs, they have substituted the soft and fluent Malay
for their own harsher jargon. The names are, Jugah or Sejugah, Kalong,
Bunshie, Kontong, Lang, Rantie.

The vocabulary:


            hairs, _bok_ (similar to the Lundu Dyaks).
            thigh, _pah_.
            woman, _indo_.
            father, _api_.
            sea, _tasiek_.
            slave, _ulon_.
            spear, _sancho_.
            black, _chelum_.
            good, _badass_.
            bad, _jaie_.
            quick, _pantass_.
            slow, _bagadie_.
            that, _kneah_ (nasal, like _kgneah_).
            this, _to_.
            to go, _bajali_.
            there, _kein_.
            come, _jali_
            here, _keto_.
            come here, _jali keto_.
            to give, _bri_.
            give all, _bri samonia_ (M).
            to bring, _bii_.
            bring that, _bii kneah_.
            bring here, _bii keto_.


"The corruptions of the Malay are _langan_ for _tangon_, arm; _ai_
for _ayer_, water; _menua_ for _benua_, country; _komah_ for _rumah_,
house; _besi_ for _besar_, great.

"Like the rest of the Dyaks, the Sibnowans adorn their houses with
the heads of their enemies; but with them this custom exists in a
modified form; and I am led to hope that the statements already made
public of their reckless search after human beings, _merely_ for the
purpose of obtaining their heads, will be found to be exaggerated, if
not untrue; and that the custom elsewhere, as here and at Lundu, will
be found to be more accordant with our knowledge of other wild tribes,
and to be regarded merely as a triumphant token of valor in the fight
or ambush; similar, indeed, to the scalps of the North American Indian.

"Some thirty skulls were hanging from the roof of the apartment; and I
was informed that they had many more in their possession; all, however,
the heads of enemies, chiefly of the tribe of Sarebus. On inquiring,
I was told that it is indispensably necessary a young man should
procure a skull before he gets married. When I urged on them that the
custom would be more honored in the breach than the observance, they
replied that it was established from time immemorial, and could not
be dispensed with. Subsequently, however, Sejugah allowed that heads
were very difficult to obtain now, and a young man might sometimes
get married by giving presents to his lady-love's parents. At all
times they warmly denied ever obtaining any heads but those of their
enemies; adding, they were bad people, and deserved to die.

"I asked a young unmarried man whether he would be obliged to get a
head before he could obtain a wife. He replied, 'Yes.' 'When would
he get one?' 'Soon.' 'Where would he go to get one?' 'To the Sarebus
river.' I mention these particulars in detail, as I think, had their
practice extended to taking the head of any defenseless traveler,
or any Malay surprised in his dwelling or boat, I should have wormed
the secret out of them.

"The men of this tribe marry but one wife, and that not until they have
attained the age of seventeen or eighteen. Their wedding ceremony is
curious; and, as related, is performed by the bride and bridegroom
being brought in procession along the large room, where a brace of
fowls is placed over the bridegroom's neck, which he whirls seven
times round his head. The fowls are then killed, and their blood
sprinkled on the foreheads of the pair, which done, they are cooked,
and eaten by the new-married couple _alone_, while the rest feast
and drink during the whole night.

"Their dead are put in a coffin, and buried; but Sejugah informed
me that the different tribes vary in this particular; and it would
appear they differ from their near neighbors the Dyaks of Lundu.

"Like these neighbors, too, the Sibnowans seem to have little or no
idea of a God. They offer prayers to Biedum, the great Dyak chief of
former days. Priests and ceremonies they have none; the thickest mist
of darkness is over them: but how much easier is it to dispel darkness
with light than to overcome the false blaze with the rays of truth!

"The manners of the men of this tribe are somewhat reserved, but
frank; while the women appeared more cheerful, and more inclined to
laugh and joke at our peculiarities. Although the first Europeans
they had ever seen, we were by no means annoyed by their curiosity:
and their honesty is to be praised; for, though opportunities were
not wanting, they never on any occasion attempted to pilfer any
thing. Their color resembles the Malay, and is fully as dark; and
the cast of their countenance does not favor the notion that they are
sprung from a distinct origin. They never intermarry with the Malays,
so as to intermingle the two people, and the chastity of their women
gives no presumption of its otherwise occurring. Their stature, as I
have before remarked, is diminutive, their eyes are small and quick,
their noses usually flattened, and their figures clean and well
formed, but not athletic. Both sexes generally wear the hair long
and turned up, but the elder men often cut it short. As is natural,
they are fond of the water, and constantly bathe; and their canoes
are numerous. I counted fifty, besides ten or twelve small prahus,
which they often build for sale to the Malays, at a very moderate
price indeed. The men wear a number of fine cane rings, neatly worked
(which we at first mistook for hair), below the knee or on the arm, and
sometimes a brass ring or two; but they have no other ornaments. The
ears of a few were pierced, but I saw nothing worn in them except a
roll of thin palm-leaf, to prevent the hole closing. The women are
decidedly good-looking, and far fairer than the men; their figures
are well shaped, and remarkable for their _embonpoint_. The expression
of their countenance is very good-humored, and their condition seems
a happy one. Their dress consists of a coarse stuff, very scanty
(manufactured by the Sakarran Dyaks), reaching from the waist to the
knee; around the waist they have rings of ratan, either black or red,
and the loins are hung round with a number of brass ornaments made by
their husbands. Above the waist they are entirely naked, nor do they
wear any covering or ornament on the head. They have a few bracelets
of brass, but neither ear-rings nor nose-rings; and some, more lucky
than the rest, wear a necklace of beads. They prefer the smallest
Venetian beads to the larger and more gaudy ones of England. The labor
of the house, and all the drudgery, falls on the females. They grind
the rice, carry burdens, fetch water, fish, and work in the fields;
but though on a par with other savages in this respect, they have many
advantages. They are not immured; they eat in company with the males;
and, in most points, hold the same position toward their husbands and
children as European women. The children are entirely naked; and the
only peculiarity I observed is filing their teeth to a sharp point,
like those of a shark. The men marry but one wife, as I have before
observed. Concubinage is unknown; and cases of seduction or adultery
very seldom arise. Even the Malays speak highly of the chastity of the
Dyak women; yet they are by no means shy under the gaze of strangers,
and used to bathe before us in a state of nudity.

"That these Dyaks are in a low condition there is no doubt; but,
comparatively, theirs is an innocent state, and I consider them
capable of being easily raised in the scale of society. The absence
of all prejudice regarding diet, the simplicity of their characters,
the purity of their morals, and their present ignorance of all forms
of worship and all idea of future responsibility, render them open to
conviction of truth and religious impression. Yet, when I say this,
I mean, of course, only when their minds shall have been raised by
education; for without previous culture I reckon the labors of the
missionary as useless as endeavoring to read off a blank paper. I
doubt not but the Sibnowan Dyaks would readily receive missionary
families among them, provided the consent of the Rajah Muda Hassim
was previously obtained. That the rajah would consent I much doubt;
but if any person chose to reside at Tungong, for the charitable
purpose of leading the tribe gradually, by means of education, to
the threshold of Christianity, it would be worth the asking, and I
would exert what influence I possess with him on the occasion. I feel
sure a missionary would be safe among them, as long as he strictly
confined himself to the gentle precepts and practice of his faith;
he would live abundantly and cheaply, and be exposed to no danger
except from the incursion of hostile tribes, which must always be
looked for by a sojourner amid a Dyak community.

"I must add, that this day, when so many of my friends are destroying
partridges, I have had my gun in my hand, to procure a few specimens.

"_2d._--To continue my account of the Sibnowan Dyaks. I made particular
inquiry about the superstition stated to exist regarding birds,
and the omens said to be drawn from their flight; but I could trace
no vestige of such a belief, nor did they seem at all acquainted
with its existence. The government of the Sibnowans may be called
patriarchal. The authority of the chief appears limited within very
narrow bounds; he is the leader in war, and the dispenser of the laws;
but possesses no power of arbitrary punishment, and no authority for
despotic rule. The distinction between Sejugah and the lowest of his
tribe is not great, and rather a difference of riches than of power. A
few ornamented spears, presented by the Malays, seem his only insignia
of office; and these were never displayed in our presence, save in the
dance. The chiefship would appear to be elective, and not hereditary;
but I could not distinctly understand whether the appointment rested
with the rajah or the tribe. The former claims it; but the latter
did not speak as though his right were a matter of necessity or
certainty. On asking Kalong, the eldest son of Sejugah (a young man
of twenty years of age, active, clever, and intelligent), whether he
would succeed his father, he replied, he feared he was not _rich _
enough; but two or three of the tribe, who were present, asserted
that he would be made chief. The Rajah Muda Hassim told me that the
only hold he had on the Dyaks was through the chief and his family,
who were attached to him; but that the tribe at large cared nothing
for the Malays. I can easily believe this, as any ill treatment or
cruelty directed against a Dyak community would soon drive them beyond
the power and the territory of the prince. This is the best safeguard
of the Dyaks; and the Malays are well aware that a Dyak alliance must
be maintained by good treatment. They are called subjects and slaves;
but they are subjects at pleasure, more independent and better used
than any Malay under his native prince.

"The laws of this Dyak tribe are administered by the chief and the two
principal men. They have no fixed code, nor any standard of punishment,
each case of crime being judged according to its enormity. In the
event of murder in their own tribe, the murderer suffers death by
decapitation, _provided he be in fault_. Theft is punished by fine,
and adultery (stated as a heinous offense) by severe beating and heavy
mulct [7]. Other crimes are, in like manner, punished by fine and
beating--one or both, according to their various shades of evil. The
latter varies greatly in degree, sometimes being inflicted on the
head or arm, with a severity which stops short only of death. The
arm is often broken under this infliction; so, according to their
representation, it is a risk to be dreaded and avoided.

"Slavery holds among them; and, as among the Malays, a debtor is
reduced to this state until his debt be discharged. Children are
likewise bought, and must be considered as slaves.

"In the evening I requested Sejugah to collect his tribe, and to show
me their dances and musical instruments. They readily consented,
and about nine at night we went to witness the exhibition. The
musical instruments were, the tomtom, or drum, and the Malayan gong;
which were beat either slow or fast, according to the measure of
the dance. The dances are highly interesting, more especially from
their close resemblance, if not identity, with those of the South Sea
Islanders. Two swords were placed on the mat, and two men commenced
slowly, from the opposite extremities, turning the body, extending
the arms, and lifting the legs, in grotesque but not ungraceful
attitudes. Approaching thus leisurely round and round about, they at
length seize the swords, the music plays a brisker measure, and the
dancers pass and repass each other, now cutting, now crossing swords,
retiring and advancing, one kneeling as though to defend himself from
the assaults of his adversary; at times stealthily waiting for an
advantage, and quickly availing himself of it. The measure throughout
was admirably kept, and the frequent turns were simultaneously made
by both dancers, accompanied by the same eccentric gestures. The
effect of all this far surpasses the impression to be made by a
meager description. The room partially lighted by damar torches;
the clang of the noisy instruments; the crowd of wild spectators;
their screams of encouragement to the performers; the flowing hair and
rapid evolutions of the dancers, formed a scene I wish could have been
reduced to painting by such a master as Rembrandt or Caravaggio. The
next dance was performed by a single person, with a spear, turning
like the last; now advancing, retiring, poising, brandishing, or
pretending to hurl his weapon. Subsequently we had an exhibition with
the sword and shield, very similar to the others, and only differing
in the use of the weapons; and the performance was closed by a long
and animated dance like the first, by two of the best performers.

"The dance with the spear is called Talambong; that with the sword,
Mancha. The resemblance of these dances to those of the South Seas is,
as I have observed, a remarkable and interesting fact, and one of many
others which may, in course of time, elucidate the probable theory that
the two people are sprung from a common source. The Malays of Sarawak,
and other places in the neighborhood of the Dyak tribes, dance these
dances; but they are unknown to Borneo Proper, and the other Malay
islands; and although the names may be given by the Malays, I think
there is no doubt that the dances themselves belong to the Dyaks:
a correcter judgment can be formed by a better acquaintance with
other Dyak tribes.

"The household utensils in use here are few and simple. The mode
of grinding padi clear of the husk is through the trunk of a tree
cut into two parts, the upper portion being hollow, the lower solid;
small notches are cut where the two pieces fit, and handles attached
to the upper part, which being filled with padi and kept turning round,
the husk is detached and escapes by the notches.

"The Dyaks, as is well known, are famous for the manufacture of
iron. The forge here is of the simplest construction, and formed
by two hollow trees, each about seven feet high, placed upright,
side by side, in the ground; from the lower extremity of these, two
pipes of bamboo are led through a clay-bank, three inches thick,
into a charcoal fire; a man is perched at the top of the trees,
and pumps with two pistons (the suckers of which are made of cocks'
feathers), which being raised and depressed alternately, blow a
regular stream of air into the fire. Drawings were taken of these
and other utensils and instruments. The canoes are not peculiar,
but the largest prahus (some forty feet long, with a good beam)
are constructed, in the first place, exactly like a small canoe:
a single tree is hollowed out, which forms the keel and kelson,
and on this foundation the rest of the prahu is built with planks,
and her few timbers fastened with ratans. A prahu of fifty feet long,
fitted for service, with oars, mast, attops, &c., was ordered by the
Panglima Rajah while we were with him, which, completed, was to cost
thirty reals, or sixty Java rupees, or £6 English. During the course
of the day we ascended the river to visit the settlement of Chinese
lately established here. It is situated about two and a half miles
up the river, on the same side as Tungong, and consists of thirty men
(real Chinese), and five women of the mixed breed of Sambas. Nothing
can be more flourishing than this infant settlement, and I could hardly
credit their statement that it had only been formed between four and
five months. The soil they represented as most excellent, and none
are better judges; many acres were cleared and under cultivation;
rice, sirih, sweet potatoes (convolvulus), Indian corn, &c., &c.,
were growing abundantly; and they were able to supply us with seven
pecul, or 933 pounds of sweet potatoes, without sensibly diminishing
their crop. They showed me samples of birds' nests, bees' wax, garu
wood (lignum aloes), and ebony, collected in the vicinity, chiefly
from Gunong Gading. Several peculs of birds' nests and bees' wax, and
the wood in large quantity, could _now_ be brought to market; and no
doubt, when demand stimulates industry, the quantities would greatly
increase. The Dyaks, they told me, collected ratans, and likewise
canes, which are plentiful. The mixed breed of the Chinese with the
Malay or Dyak are a good-looking and industrious race, partaking
much more of the Chinese character than that of the natives of this
country. This mainly arises from education and early-formed habits,
which are altogether Chinese; and in religion and customs they likewise
follow, in a great measure, the paternal stock. The race are worthy
of attention, as the future possessors of Borneo. The numbers of this
people can not be stated, but it must amount to many thousand persons:
3000 were said to be on their way to the Borneon territory.

"The head man of this settlement, a Chinese of Quantung, or Canton,
but long resident in the vicinity of Sambas, gave me some valuable
information respecting the Sarawak mountains. He had, with a
considerable party of his countrymen, been employed there at the
gold-mines, and he spoke of them as abundant, and of the ore as
good. Tin they had not found, but thought it existed. Antimony ore was
to be had in any quantities, and diamonds were likewise discovered. I
mention these facts as coming from an intelligent Chinese, well able
from experience to judge of the precious metals, and the probability
of their being found.

"_3d._--Night, as usual, set in with torrents of rain, which lasted
until the morning: the days, however, are fine, though cloudy. Got
sights in the afternoon; and, leaving our Dyak friends, we dropped
down to the mouth of the river, where we slept.

"_4th._--At 2 A.M. got under weigh for the Samatan river, which we
reached at 8 A.M. I had been given to understand that the Lundu and
Sibnowan Dyaks were to be found on this river; but on arriving, I
was informed we must proceed to Seru, where we should see plenty of
Dyaks. I accordingly started immediately after breakfast, and reached
Seru after mid-day. Here we found a small Malay fishing village, with
two or three stray Dyaks of the Sibnowan tribe; and, on inquiring, we
were told by them that their country was far away. Being convinced that
the Pangeran had dragged me all this distance to answer some purpose
of his own, I re-embarked on the instant, and set off on my return
to Lundu, indignant enough. However, I had the poor satisfaction of
dragging them after me, and making them repent their trick, which I
believe was nothing else than to visit the island of Talang Talang for
turtles' eggs. We were pretty well knocked up by the time we reached
Samatan, having been pulling thirteen hours, the greater part of the
time under a burning sun.

"The Samatan river, like the others, is inclosed in a bay choked with
sand: the boat-passage is on the right-hand side, going in near Point
Samatan. The sands are mostly dry at low water, and stretch out a
considerable distance. There is a fishing station here, though not so
large as at Seru, and the fish at both places are very plentiful, and
are salted for exportation to Sambas, and along their own coast. Seru
is a shallow creek; the village may consist of 50 or 60 inhabitants,
and the sands stretch a long way out. We thus lost two days, through
the cunning of our Malay attendant; and the only advantage gained is
being enabled to fill up the details of our survey of this bay.

"_5th._--The day consumed returning along the coast to the Lundu,
and we did not reach Tungong till late.

"_6th._--Remained at Tungong. Every impediment was thrown in my way to
prevent my reaching the Lundu Dyaks; the distance was great, the tribe
small and unsettled, there was little probability of finding them,
&c. I would, however, have gone; but another cause had arisen of a more
serious nature. My feet, from the heat of the sun, musqueto-bites, and
cuts (for I foolishly went without shoes that unlucky day to Seru),
had become so painful and inflamed that I felt great doubt whether,
if I walked in pain to Lundu, I could come back again. With the best
grace I could, I yielded the point; with a vow, however, never to
have the same Pangeran again. I did _manage_ to be civil to him,
from policy alone. He was superfluously kind and obliging.

"_7th._--Left Tungong on our return to the vessel, and brought-to
for the night at Tanjong Siri. In the evening I walked along the fine
sandy beach as far as the entrance of the Sumpudin river. We saw many
wild hogs; and on one occasion I was able to get within twenty yards
of some ten of them together, among some large drift-wood. Just as I
was crawling over a tree and balancing, I found myself confronted by
these animals; but they were out of sight almost before I could cock
my gun and fire. They were of a large size, and most of them we saw
during the evening either dirty white, or white and black. At night,
after we had retired to our quarters in the Pangeran's boat, she filled
with water, and was near going down. The first intimation we had of
it was the water wetting our mats on which we were sleeping. She was
beached and baled out, and a hand kept baling all night, as they had
laden her so deep that she leaked considerably.

"_8th._--In the morning we got our anchor at daylight, and
breakfasted on the island of Sumpudin. There are deer, hogs, and
pigeons on Sumpudin Island; but what was more interesting to me was,
the discovery of the wild nutmeg-tree in full flower, and growing to
the height of twenty or thirty feet. The nutmegs lay in plenty under
the trees, and are of considerable size, though elongated in shape,
and tasteless, as usual in the wild sorts. While the East India Company
were sending Captain Forest from their settlement of Balambangan as
far as New Guinea in search of this plant, how little they dreamed
of its flourishing so near them on the island of Borneo! The soil on
which they grow is a yellowish clay, mixed with vegetable mould. I
brought some of the fruit away with me. After breakfast, a breeze
springing up, we sailed to the mouth of the Sarawak river, waited
for the tide, and pushed on for the vessel, getting aboard about
half past three in the morning. Our Malay attendants were left far,
far behind, and there is little chance of their being here to-morrow,
for their boats sail wretchedly."




CHAPTER IV.

    Renewed intercourse with the Rajah.--Prospects of
    trade.--Ourang-outang, and other animals.--The two sorts of
    mias.--Description of the Rajah, his suite, and Panglimas, &c.--The
    character of the natives.--Leave Sarawak.--Songi Dyaks.--Visit
    Seriff Sahib.--Buyat tongue.--Attack by pirates.--Sail for
    Singapore.


Having returned to Sarawak, Mr. Brooke renewed his intercourse with
the rajah; and his Journal proceeds:

"_Sept. 9th._--Visited the rajah; civil and polite--I ought indeed to
say friendly and kind. Der Macota was on board, speaking on the trade,
and very anxious for me to arrange the subject with the rajah. I could
only say, that I would do so if the rajah wished, as I believed it
would be greatly for the benefit of their country and Singapore.

"_10th._--Laid up with my bad legs, and hardly able to crawl. Muda
Hassim presented us with another bullock, which we salted. At Lundu we
bought eight pigs, which arrived to-day in charge of Kalong, the young
Dyak. He is a fine fellow. I gave him a gun, powder-flask, powder,
&c. He was truly delighted. Our Pangerans arrived at the same time.

"_11th._--Very bad; got a novel, and read all day. Went ashore to
see Muda Hassim in the evening. He gave us a private audience: and we
finished our discussion respecting the trade, and I think successfully.

"I began by saying, that I as a private gentleman, unconnected with
commerce, could have no personal interest in what I was about to speak;
that the rajah must clearly understand that I was in no way connected
with the government of Singapore, and no way authorized to act for
them: that he must, therefore, look upon it merely as my private
opinion, and act afterward as his wisdom thought fit. I represented
to him that the kingdom of Borneo was the last Malay state possessing
any power, and that this might be in a great measure attributed to
the little intercourse they had had with European powers. I thought
it highly advisable to call into play the resources of his country,
by opening a trade with individual European merchants. Sarawak,
I stated, was a rich place, and the territory around produced many
valuable articles for a commercial intercourse--bees-wax, birds-nests,
rattans, beside large quantities of antimony ore and sago, which might
be considered the staple produce of the country. In return for these,
the merchants of Singapore could send goods from Europe or China which
his people required, such as gunpowder, muskets, cloths, &c.; and both
parties would thus be benefited by their commercial interchange of
commodities. I conceived that Singapore was well fitted for trade with
this place. The rajah must not suppose I was desirous of excluding
other nations from trading here, or that I wished he should trade
with the English alone; on the contrary, I thought that the Americans,
the French, or any other nation, should be admitted on the same terms
as the English.

"Of course, I was not allowed to proceed without much questioning and
discussion; many of the views were urged and re-urged, to remove their
false notions. That Mr. Bonham had the supreme command of the trade
of Singapore was the prominent one; and when he died, or was removed,
would not the next governor alter all kind intentions and acts? 'What
friend should they have at Singapore then?'

"Again they thought that a few ships might come at first; but then
they would deceive them, and not come again. It was very difficult
to explain, that if they procured cargoes at an advantageous rate,
they would come here for their own benefit; if not, of course it
would not be worth their while to come at all. The entire discussion
proceeded with the utmost good-will and politeness.

"That the political ascendency of the English is paramount here is
apparent. They might if they pleased, by means of an offensive and
defensive alliance between the two powers, gain the entire trade of
the northwest coast of Borneo, from Tanjong Datu to Malludu Bay.

"I obtained subsequently from Macota the following list of imports
and exports; which I here commit to paper, for the information of
those whom it may concern.

"_From Singapore._--Iron; salt, Siam; nankeen; Madras, Europe,
and China cotton cloth, coarse and fine; Bugis and Pulicat sarongs;
gold and other threads, of sorts and colors; brass wire, of sizes;
iron pans from Siam, called qualis; chintzes, of colors and sorts;
coarse red broadcloth, and other sorts of different colors; China
crockery; gunpowder; muskets; flints; handkerchiefs (Pulicat and
European); gambir; dates; Java tobacco; soft sugar; sugar-candy;
biscuits; baharri; common decanters; glasses, &c. &c.; China silk,
of colors; ginghams; white cottons; nails; beside other little things,
such as Venetian beads; ginger; curry-powder; onions; ghee; &c. &c.

"The returns from Sarawak are now: antimony ore, sago, timber
(lackah, garu), rattans, Malacca canes, bees-wax, birds-nests, rice,
&c. Other articles, such as gold, tin, &c. &c., Macota said, would be
procured after the war, but at present he need say nothing of them;
the articles above mentioned might subsequently be greatly increased
by demand; and, in short, as every person of experience knows, in a
wild country a trade must be fostered at first.

"To the foregoing list I must add, pipeclay, vegetable tallow,
which might be useful in commerce, being of fine quality; and the
ore, found in abundance round here, of which I can make nothing,
but which I believe to be copper.

"_12th._--I received from the rajah a present of an ourang-outang,
young, and like others I have seen, but better clothed, with fine
long hair of a bright chestnut color. The same melancholy which
characterizes her race is apparent in Betsy's face; and though but
just caught, she is quite quiet unless teased.

"From the man who brought Betsy I procured a _Lemur tardigradus_,
called by the Malays _Cucan_, not _Poucan_, as written in
Cuvier--Marsden has the name right in his dictionary--and at the same
time the mutilated hand of an ourang-outang of _enormous_ size. This
hand far exceeds in length, breadth, and power, the hand of any man
in the ship; and though smoked and shrunk, the circumference of the
fingers is half as big again as an ordinary human finger. The natives
of Borneo call the ourang-outang the _Mias_, of which they say there
are two distinct sorts; one called the _Mias rombi_ (similar to the
specimen aboard and the two in the Zoological Gardens), and the _Mias
pappan_, a creature far larger, and more difficult to procure. To the
latter kind the hand belongs. The mias pappan is represented to be as
tall or taller than a man, and possessing vast strength: the face is
fuller and larger than that of the mias rombi, and the hair reddish,
but sometimes approaching to black. The mias rombi never exceeds four
or four and a half feet; his face, unlike the pappan, is long, and his
hair redder. I must own myself inclined to this opinion from various
reasons:--1st. The natives appear so well agreed on the point, and so
well acquainted with the distinction and the different names, that it
is impossible to suppose it a fabrication for our peculiar use. Of the
many whom I asked respecting them, at different times and in different
places, the greater part of their own accord mentioned the difference
between the mias pappan and the mias rombi. The animal when brought
aboard was stated to be the mias rombi, or small sort. In short,
the natives, whether right or wrong, make the distinction. 2d. The
immense size of the hand in my possession, the height of the animal
killed on the coast of Sumatra, and the skull in the Paris Museum,
can scarcely be referred to an animal such as we know at home; though
by specious analogical reasoning, the great disparity of the skulls
has been pronounced the result merely of age.

"However, facts are wanting, and these facts I doubt not I can soon
procure, if not actual proof; and whichever way it goes, in favor of
Buffon's Pongo or not, I shall be contented, so that I bring truth
to light.

"_19th._--From the 12th to the 19th of September we lay, anxious to be
off, but delayed by some trifling occurrence or other, particularly for
the letters which I was to receive for the merchants of Singapore. Our
intercourse the whole time was most friendly and frequent; almost
daily I was ashore, and the rajah often visited the vessel. How
tedious and _ennuyant_ to me can only be known by those who know me
well, and how repugnant these trammels of society and ceremony are to
nature. Nevertheless, I suffered this martyrdom with exemplary outward
patience, though the spirit flagged, and the thoughts wandered, and the
head often grew confused, with sitting and talking trifling nonsense,
through a poor interpreter.

"I here bid adieu to these kind friends, fully impressed with their
kindness, and the goodness of their dispositions. To me they are far
different from anything I was at all prepared to meet, and devoid
of the vices with which their countrymen are usually stigmatized by
modern writers. I expected to find an indolent and somewhat insolent
people, devoted to sensual enjoyments, addicted to smoking opium, and
eternally cock-fighting or gambling: let me speak it to the honor of
the Borneons, that they neither cock-fight nor smoke opium; and in the
military train of their rajah they find at Kuching few conveniences
and fewer luxuries. Like all the followers of Islam, they sanction
polygamy; and the number of their women, and, probably, the ease and
cheerfulness of the seraglio, contrasted with the ceremonial of the
exterior, induce them to pass a number of their hours amid their women,
and excite habits of effeminacy and indolence. I should pronounce
them indolent and unwarlike; but kind and unreserved to foreigners,
particularly to Englishmen. They are volatile, generally speaking very
ignorant, but by no means deficient in acuteness of understanding;
and, indeed, their chief defects may be traced entirely to their
total want of education, and the nature of their government. The
lower orders of people are poor and wretched, and the freemen are
certainly poorer and more wretched than the slaves. They are not
greatly addicted to theft, and yet, unlike the scrupulous honesty
of the Sibnowans, they pilfered some trifling articles occasionally
when left in their way. The retainers of the court showed much the
same mean intriguing spirit which is too often found in courts,
and always in Eastern ones; and the rajah himself seldom requested
any favor from me directly, but employed some intermediate person
to sound me--to get whatever was required for himself if possible,
if not for the rajah. I took the hint, and always expressed my
wishes through the interpreter when not present myself. In this way
we were enabled to grant or refuse without the chance of insult or
offence. The suite of the rajah consists principally of slaves, either
purchased or debtors: they are well treated, and rise to offices of
some note. The Panglima rajah was a slave-debtor, though we did not
know it for some time after our arrival. I never saw either cruelty
or undue harshness exercised by the great men during my stay, and in
general their manners were affable and kind to those about them. The
Rajah Muda Hassim is a remarkably short man, and slightly built;
about 45 years of age; active and intelligent, but apparently little
inclined to business. His disposition I formed the highest estimate
of, not only from his kindness to myself, but from the testimony of
many witnesses, all of whom spoke of him with affection, and gave him
the character of a mild and gentle master. Muda Hassim's own brother,
Muda Mahammed, is a reserved and sulky man, but they spoke well of him;
and the rajah said he was a good man, but given to fits of sulkiness.

"Der Macota, unlike other Malays, neither smokes tobacco nor chews
sirih. He sought our society, and was the first person who spoke to
me on the subject of the trade. His education has been more attended
to than that of others of his rank. He both reads and writes his own
language, and is well acquainted with the government, laws, and customs
of Borneo. From him I derived much information on the subject of the
Dyaks, and the geography of the interior; and if I have failed to put
it down, it is because I have not departed from my general rule of
never giving any native statements unless they go far to verify my
own actual observations. I parted from the rajah with regret, some
six or seven miles down the river. Never was such a blazing as when
we left Sarawak; twenty-one guns I fired to the rajah, and he fired
forty-two to me--at least we counted twenty-four, and they went on
firing afterward, as long as ever we were in sight. The last words
the Rajah Muda Hassim said, as I took my leave, were--'Tuan Brooke,
do not forget me.'

"Among the curiosities in my possession are spears, swords, and
shields, from various tribes; a coat of mail, made to the northward of
Borneo, and worn by the pirates; specimens of Sakarran Dyak manufacture
of cloth, and Sarebus ditto; ornaments and implements of the Sibnowans;
and, last not least, a gold-handled kris, presented me by the rajah,
which formerly belonged to his father, and which he constantly wore
himself. I likewise presented him with a small English dagger, with
a mother-of-pearl handle; and my favor was so high with him, that he
used always to wear my gift, and I, to return the compliment, wore his.

"The climate of Sarawak is good, and is seldom hot: the last eight or
ten days were oppressive, but until then we could sleep with a blanket,
and seldom found it too warm in the day. Rain at this season falls
in great quantities; and from imprudence, our crew suffered on their
first arrival from colds and rheumatism; but getting more careful,
we had latterly no sick-list.

"Farewell to Sarawak! I hope to see it again; and have obtained a
promise from the rajah that he will go with me to Borneo, and show
me every part of the country by the way.

"I may here state the result of some inquiries I have made respecting
the government of Borneo. The form of government may be considered
aristocratic rather than oligarchical: it is ruled by the sultan, but
his power is kept in check by four great officers of government. These
are, the Rajah Muda Hassim, the Bandar, in whose hands is the
government of the country; Pangeran Mumin, the Degadon, the treasurer,
or, as Mr. Hunt says, controller of the household of the sultan;
Pangeran Tizudeen, Tumangong, or commander-in-chief; and Pangeran
Kurmaindar, the Pen-damei, or mediator and interceder. This officer
is the means of communication or mediation between the sultan and
his Pangerans; and in case of condemnation, he sues for the pardon or
mercy of his sovereign. Mr. Hunt, in his short but excellent paper on
Borneo, mentions some other officers of state: I will not follow him,
but in the names, as well as duties of these officers, his account
agrees with my information. Further than this, I have not yet learned,
therefore state not; for I am not _manufacturing_ a book, but gaining
information. I may add, however, that these offices are elective,
and not hereditary: as far as I yet know, I am inclined to believe
the election rests with the chief Pangerans of the state; not only
those in office, but others. When I reach Borneo I can procure more
ample details.

"_23d._--Quitted the Royalist at the entrance of the Morotaba,
and accompanied by Pangerans Subtu and Illudeen, set sail for the
river Sadung.

"The town called Songi is of considerable size, and the entire
population along the river may certainty be reckoned at from 2000
to 3000 persons, independent of Dyaks. The country has a flourishing
aspect, but the soil is represented as bad, being soft and muddy. There
is a good deal of trade from this river, and it annually sends several
large prahus to Singapore: two were lying off the town when we arrived,
and two others had sailed for that place twenty days before. The
produce of the country is bees-wax, birds'-nests, rice, &c. &c., but
they seem to be procured in less abundance than in the other contiguous
rivers. There is nothing peculiar about the Malay population, except
that, generally speaking, it struck me, they appeared better off than
the people of Sarawak, or others I have visited hereabouts. We ascended
the river by night, anchored a short distance from the Songi, in a
tide-way like a sluice, and entered the smaller river shortly after
daylight. Having sent the Pangerans ahead to advise Seriff Sahib of our
arrival, we pulled slowly up to the campong of the Data Jembrong, where
we brought up to breakfast. Data Jembrong is a native of Mindanao,
an Illanun and a pirate; he is slightly advanced in years, but stout
and resolute-looking, and of a most polite demeanor--as oily-tongued
a cut-throat as a gentleman would wish to associate with. He spoke
of his former life without hesitation, and confessed himself rather
apprehensive of going to Singapore. He was remarkably civil, and sent
us a breakfast of some fruit, salt fish, stale turtles' eggs, and
coffee sweetened with syrup; but spite of all this, his blood-thirsty
education and habits prejudiced me against him. Breakfast finished,
we went forward to visit Seriff Sahib, who received us in an open
hall; promised to get us as many animals as he could now; regretted
our short stay, and assured me he would collect more by the time I
returned. Among these is to be a mias pappan, living or dead. I at
the same time offered ten dollars for the skeleton belonging to the
hand already in my possession, and a less sum for the parts. Being the
first Europeans Seriff Sahib had ever met, he was rather puzzled to
know what we were like; but we had every reason to be satisfied with
his kindness and the civility of his people: the inhabitants, though
crowding to see us, are by no means intrusive, and their curiosity
is too natural to be harshly repressed. I need hardly remark here
how very erroneously the position of the Sadung river is laid down in
the charts, it being placed in the bay, to the westward of Santobong,
and nearly in the position of the Samatan river.

"_25th._--The last night was passed off Datu Jembrong's house, and I
left him with a firm impression that he is still a pirate, or at any
rate connected with them. He resides generally at Tawarron, to the
northward of Borneo Proper, where his wives and children now are,
and he has come here to superintend the building of a prahu. The
people about him speak of his pursuits without disguise, and many
informed us the prahu near his house is intended for a piratical
vessel. Nothing could exceed the polite kindness of our rascally host,
and I spent the rainy evening in his house with some satisfaction,
acquiring information of the coast to the northward, which he is well
able to give.

"In the morning we dropped down with the last of the ebb to the mouth
of the Songi, and took the young flood to proceed up the Sadung. Beyond
the point of junction with the Songi the Sadung retains an average
breadth of from three-quarters of a mile to a mile. The banks continue
to be partially cleared, with here and there a few Dyaks residing in
single families or small communities on their ladangs or farms. The
Dyak campong, which terminated our progress up the stream, consists
of three moderately long houses inhabited by Sibnowans. The manners,
customs, and language of the Sibnowans of the Sadung are the same as
those of their Lundu brethren; they are, however, a wilder people,
and appear poor. Like other Dyaks, they had a collection of heads
hanging before the entrance of their chief's private apartments. Some
of these heads were fresh, and, with the utmost _sang-froid_, they
told us they were women's. They declared, however, they never took any
heads but those of their enemies, and these women (unhappy creatures)
had belonged to a distant tribe. The fresh heads were ornamented with
fowl's feathers, and suspended rather conspicuously in separate rattan
frames of open work. They professed themselves willing to go with
me up the river to the mountains; and on the way, they informed me,
were some large Malay towns, beside some more campongs of their own
countrymen. Farther up they enumerated some twenty tribes of Dyaks,
whose names I thought it useless to preserve. Late in the evening we
set off on our return, and anchored once again near Datu Jembrong's
house.

"_26th._--Again visited Seriff Sahib. His name and descent are
Arabic; his father, an Arab, having married a daughter of the Borneo
Rajah. The Malays evidently honor this descent, and consider his birth
very high. His power, they say, equals his family; as he is, in some
measure, independent; and were he to instigate the Sadung country to
take arms against Borneo, it is very probable he would overthrow the
government, and make himself Sultan of Borneo. In person, this noble
partakes much of his father's race, both in height and features, being
tall and large, with a fine nose and contour of face. His manners are
reserved but kind; and he looks as if too indolent to care much about
acquiring power; too fat for an active traitor, though a dangerous
man to oppress. We were the first Europeans he had ever seen; but,
on our second visit, he lost much of his previous reserve, and
was curious in examining our arms and accoutrements. We, as usual,
_exchanged_ presents; mine consisting of some nankeen, red cloth,
knife, scissors, and handkerchief; while he gave me the shield of a
great Kayan warrior, a Bukar spear, a goat, fowls, and our dinner
and breakfast daily. He promised me specimens of the arms of all
the Dyak tribes, and plenty of animals, particularly my much-desired
mias pappan; and I, in return, agreed to bring him two small tables,
six chairs, and a gun. Subsequently to our interview he sent me a
tattooed Dyak, the first I had seen. The lines, correctly and even
elegantly laid in, of a blue color, extended from the throat to his
feet. I gained but little information; yet the history of the poor
man is curious, and similar to that of many other unfortunates. He
represented himself as a chief among his own people in the country
of Buyat, five days' journey up the Cotringen river (_vulgo_ Coti
river). Going in his canoe from the latter place to Banjamassim, he
was captured by Illanun pirates, with whom he was in bondage for some
time, but ultimately sold as a slave to a resident of Sadung. It was
now five years since he became first captive; but having lately got
money enough to buy his liberty, he is again a freeman; and having
married, and turned to the religion of Islam, desires no longer to
revisit his native country. The language of the tribe of Buyat he
represents as entirely Malay. I made him a small present for the
trouble I had given him, and he departed well content.

"About three o'clock in the afternoon we had a heavy thunder-storm,
with lightning as vivid as the tropics produce. Torrents of rain
descended, and continued a great part of the night; but, sheltered by
our kajangs or mats, we managed to keep tolerably dry. Indeed, the
voyager on this coast must be prepared for exposure to heavy rains,
and considerable detention from thick and cloudy weather. The latter
obstruction, of little moment or even agreeable to those making a
passage, is a cause of much vexation in surveying the coast, as for
days together no observations are to be had.

"_27th._--About 7 A. M. we quitted Songi, and dropped down as far as
Tanjong Balaban, a low point forming the larboard entrance into the
Sadung river, and bounding the bay, which lies between it and Tanjong
Sipang. Coming to this point gave us a good offing for our return,
and enabled me to take a round of angles to finish the survey as far
as this point and Pulo Burong, which lies off it. We crossed over
the sand flats with a light breeze, and reached the Royalist at 4
P.M. In the evening the Datu Jembrong, who had preceded us from Sadung,
spent the evening aboard. He expressed his willingness to accompany
me next season: whether I shall take him is another question; but,
could he be trusted, his services might be highly useful.

"Our Pangerans arrived early this morning from Sadung; and to-morrow
was fixed for our departure, when an unforeseen occurrence caused a
farther detention. The day passed quietly: in the evening I was ashore,
and took leave of the Pangerans Subtu and Illudeen, who returned to
Sarawak, leaving the Panglima Rajah to pilot us out. The first part of
the night was dark; and the Panglima in his prahu, with twelve men,
lay close to the shore, and under the dark shadow of the hill. About
nine, the attention of the watch on deck was attracted by some bustle
ashore, and it soon swelled to the wildest cries; the only word
we could distinguish, however, being 'Dyak! Dyak!' All hands were
instantly on deck. I gave the order to charge and fire a gun with a
blank cartridge, and in the mean time lit a blue light. The gig was
lowered, a few muskets and cutlasses thrown into her, and I started
in the hope of rescuing our poor Malay friends. The vessel meanwhile
was prepared for defence; guns loaded, boarding-nettings ready for
running up, and the people at quarters; for we were ignorant of the
number, the strength, or even the description of the assailants. I
met the Panglima's boat pulling toward the vessel, and returned with
her, considering it useless and rash to pursue the foe. The story is
soon told. A fire had been lit on the shore; and after the people had
eaten, they anchored their boat, and, according to their custom, went
to sleep. The fire had probably attracted the roving Sarebus Dyaks,
who stole upon them, took them by surprise, and would inevitably have
cut them off but for our presence. They attacked the prahu fiercely
with their spears; five out of twelve jumped into the water, and swam
ashore; and the Panglima Rajah was wounded severely. When our blue
light was seen they desisted; and directly the gun fired, paddled
away fast. We never saw them. The poor Panglima walked aboard with a
spear fixed in his breast, the barb being buried, and a second rusty
spear-wound close to the first; the head of the weapon was cut out,
his wounds dressed, and he was put to bed. Another man had a wound from
a wooden-headed spear; and most had been struck more or less by these
rude and, luckily, innocuous weapons. A dozen or two of Dyak spears
were left in the Malay boat, which I got. Some were well-shaped, with
iron heads; but the mass simply pieces of hard wood sharp-pointed,
which they hurl in great numbers. Fire-arms the Dyaks had none,
and during the attack made no noise whatever; while the Malays, on
the contrary, shouted lustily, some perhaps from bravery, most from
terror. The force that attacked them was differently stated; some
said the boat contained eighty or a hundred men, others rated the
number as low as fifty; and, allowing for an exaggeration, perhaps
there might have been thirty-five--not fewer, from the number of
spears thrown. Being fully prepared, we set our watch, and retired
as usual to our beds; the stealthy and daring attack, right under
the guns of the schooner, having given me a lesson to keep the guns
charged in future. The plan was well devised; for we could not fire
without the chance of hitting our friends as well as foes, and the
deep shadow of the hill entirely prevented our seeing the assailants.

"_29th._--I considered it necessary to dispatch a boat to Sarawak to
acquaint the rajah with the circumstance of the attack made on his
boat. The wound of the Panglima was so severe, that in common humanity
I was obliged to wait until all danger for him was past. He was soon
well; and, as with natives in general, his wound promises favorably; to
a European constitution a similar wound would be imminently dangerous.

"_30th._--Took the long boat, and sounded along the edge of the sand;
soundings very regular. In the evening Mr. Williamson returned in
the gig, and a host of Pangerans; the Pangeran Macota at the head. He
urged me much to go and see Muda Hassim. The rajah, he said, desired
it so much, and would think it so kind, that I consented to go up
to-morrow. I am very desirous to fix their good feelings toward us: and
I was prompted by curiosity to see the rajah's _ménage_ as his guest.

"_October 1st._--We had a heavy pull against tide, and arrived at
Sarawak about 4 P.M. We had eaten nothing since breakfast at 8; and we
had to sit and talk, and drink tea and smoke, till 8 in the evening;
then dinner was announced, and we retired to the private apartments--my
poor men came willingly too! The table was laid _à l'Anglaise_, a good
curry and rice, grilled fowls, and a bottle of wine. We did justice
to our cheer; and the rajah, throwing away all reserve, bustled about
with the proud and pleasing consciousness of having given us an English
dinner in proper style; now drawing the wine; now changing our plates;
pressing us to eat; saying, 'You are at home.' Dinner over, we sat,
and drank, and smoked, and talked cheerfully, till, tired and weary,
we expressed a wish to retire, and were shown to a private room. A
crimson silk mattress, embroidered with gold, was my couch: it was
covered with white gold-embroidered mats and pillows. Our men fared
equally well, and enjoyed their wine, a luxury to us; our stock of
wine and spirits having been expended some time.

"_2d._--Once more bade adieu to our kind friends; reached the vessel
at 4 P.M., and got under weigh directly. At dusk anchored in the
passage between the sands.

"_3d._--Five A.M. under weigh. Clear of the sands about mid-day,
and shaped our course for Singapore.

"_4th._--Strong breeze from w.s.w. Beating from leeward of Datu to
Pulo Murrundum, in a nasty chop of a head sea."





CHAPTER V.

    Summary of information obtained during this
    visit to Borneo.--Geographical and topographical
    observations.--Produce.--Various Dyak tribes.--Natural
    history.--Language.--Origin of Races.--Sail from
    Singapore.--Celebes.--Face of the country.--Waterfall.


Mr. Brooke's journal continues his observations on the people and
country he had just left; and, I need hardly say, communicates much
of novelty and interest in his own plain and simple manner.

"_Oct. 5th._--Just laying our course. I may here briefly
recapitulate the information acquired during the last two months and
a half. Beginning from Tanjong Api, we have delineated the coast as
far as Tanjong Balaban, fixing the principal points by chronometer and
observation, and filling in the details by personal inspection. The
distance, on a line drawn along the headlands, may be from 120 to
130 miles, the entire coast being previously quite unknown.

"Within this space are many fine rivers, and some navigable for
vessels of considerable burden, and well calculated for the extension
of commerce, such as Sarawak, Morotaba, and Sadung. The others, equally
fine streams, are barred, but offer admirable means for an easy inland
communication; these are the Quop, Boyur, Riam, Samarahan, Lundu,
Samatan, &c. In our excursions into the interior of the island, most
of these streams have been ascended to a distance of 25 or 30 miles,
and some further. We traced the Samarahan river for 70 or 80 miles from
its mouth, and passed through portions of the intermediate streams of
the Riam, Quop, and Boyur. The Morotaba, which is but another mouth
of the Sarawak, we passed through several times from the sea to its
junction with that river. The Lundu and Sadung rivers were likewise
ascended to the distance of near 30 miles; and plans of all these
rivers have been taken as accurately as circumstances would permit,
by observations of the latitude and longitude, and various points,
and an eye-sketch of the distance of each reach and the compass
bearing. The entrances into the Sarawak and Morotaba were carefully
examined, and the former accurately laid down. The productions of
the country attracted our attention, and the articles best fitted
for commerce have been already enumerated. Among these are, first,
minerals; say gold, tin, probably copper, antimony-ore, and fine
white clay for pipes. Secondly, woods of the finest descriptions,
for ship-building, and other purposes; besides aloes wood (_lignum
aloes_), and arang or ebony wood, canes, and ratans. To these may be
added, among vegetable productions, sago, compon, rice, &c., &c.

"The wild nutmeg was found growing on the islands of Sadung and
Sumpudin in abundance and perfection, proving that by cultivation it
might be brought into the market as cheap, and probably as good,
as those produced in the Moluccas. We have various specimens
of ores and stones, which, on being tested, may prove valuable
commodities. Among these is decomposed granite rock (I believe),
containing minute particles of what we conceive to be gold, and an
ore believed to be copper. Besides the articles above enumerated,
are birds' nests and bees' wax in considerable quantities, and others
not worth detailing here. We have been able, during our residence
with the Borneons, to continue on the most friendly terms with them,
and to open a field of research for our subsequent inquiries in the
proper season. My attention has been anxiously directed to acquiring
a knowledge of the Dyak tribes; and for this purpose I passed ten days
among them at Lundu. I have made such vocabularies of the language of
the Sibnowans and Lundus as my means allowed; and a further addition
of their various dialects will furnish, I conceive, matters of high
importance to those interested in tracing the emigration of nations. I
may here briefly notice, that the nation of Kayans, included under the
common denomination of Dyak, are a tattooed race, who use the sumpitan,
or blow-pipe; while the other Dyak tribes (which are very numerous)
are not tattooed, and never use the blow-pipe.

"The arms and instruments of many tribes are in my possession; and
among the Sibnowans I had the opportunity of becoming acquainted with
their habits, customs, and modes of living.

"The appellation of the Dyak tribes near the coast is usually the
same as the rivers from which they originally came. The Dyaks of
Sibnow come from the river of that name, just beyond Balaban Point,
though large communities are dispersed on the Lundu and the Sadung. The
same may be said of the Sarebus tribe (the most predaceous and wild
on the coast), which has powerful branches of the original stock on
the Skarran river. Beyond Point Balaban is a bay--between that point
and Point Samaludum; the first river is the Sibnow; the next the
Balonlupon, which branches into the rivers of Sakarran and Linga;
passing Tanjong Samaludum you come to the two islands of Talison;
and between it and the next point, or Banting Marron, lies the Sarebus
river. Between Banting Marron and Tanjong Siri are the Kaleka river,
a high mountain called Maban, and then Rejong, the chief river of the
Kayans. I may here likewise correct some of the statements and names
usually current in England. The Idaan, represented as a Dyak tribe,
are a hill people, and probably not Dyaks; and the name Marat is
applied by the natives of Borneo to the various wild tribes, Dyaks
and others, without any specific meaning.

"In natural history the expedition has done as much as was in its
power, by forming collections of birds, animals, and reptiles; but
these collections are as small as our means. Specimens of woods and
seeds have been preserved; but the season was not the proper one for
flowers, as very few indeed were seen. The specimen of the hand of
the mias pappan and the head of an adult mias rombi will, I believe,
go far to establish the existence of an animal similar to the Pongo
of the Count Buffon. I have little doubt that I shall be able in the
ensuing season to establish the fact, or set it at rest forever;
though I confess myself greatly inclined to think that the former
will be the case. I here leave the coast with an excellent prospect
for the coming year; and I would not now have quitted it so soon,
but for the want of provisions, added to which, the change of the
monsoon, bringing squally and dark weather, greatly interferes with
our further progress in surveying.

"_Nov. 22d, 1839._--The Malayan language has been compared to the
_lingua franca_ of Europe. They are both, indeed, used by various
nations in their commercial transactions; but, beyond this, nothing
can be more unjust or absurd than the comparison. The _lingua franca_
is a jargon compounded at random, devoid of grammar or elegance; the
Malayan, on the contrary, is musical, simple in its construction,
and well calculated for the expression of poetry. It boasts many
dialects, like the Italian, of superior softness, and, like the
Italian, it is derived from many sources, refining all to the most
liquid sounds by the addition of a final vowel. I fully concur with
Mr. Marsden in his opinion that the Malayan tongue, though derived
from the Sanscrit, the Arabic, the Hindoostani, &c., &c., is based
on the language which he calls the Polynesian; a language which may
be considered original (as far as we know), and which embraces so
vast an extent of geographical surface. The proof of this rests
mainly on the fact that the simple wants of man, as well as the
most striking features of nature, are expressed in the Polynesian;
while the secondary class of ideas is derived from the Sanscrit, or
some other language, and usually grafted in a felicitous manner on the
original stem. By an original language, I must be understood, however,
to mean only a language which can not be derived from any other
known tongue. I seek not to trace the language of Noah, or to raise
a theory which shall derive the finished and grammatical Sanscrit,
the pure and elegant Greek, from some barbarous stock, whether Celtic
or Teutonic. Such inquiries are fitted for those with leisure and
patience to undertake a hopeless task, and learning enough to achieve
better things. When we look for the origin of languages we are lost,
for those existing afford us no help. They present some affinities,
as might be expected; but their discrepancies are irreconcilable; and,
amid many equally good claims, who shall be able to demonstrate the
only one which is right? Supposing even that all languages agreed as
to primary ideas, it would be difficult to determine the original; but
when this primary class of ideas is expressed by sounds entirely and
totally different, the task becomes utterly hopeless, and the labor
as vain as that of Sisyphus. Indeed, it would be very difficult to
show how languages, derived from one stock, could possibly differ so
far in their expression of the simplest ideas and wants as not to be
mutually traceable: and truly, until this is done (which I conceive
impossible), I am content to rest in the belief that there are more
original languages _than one_--a conclusion agreeable to common sense,
and consonant with the early history of the Hebrews.

"To trace the original identity of distant races, and their early
migrations, through the affinity of language, is indeed a limited
task compared with the other, but one both feasible and useful. To
further this labor, the smallest additional information is valuable;
and the dialects of the rude people inhabiting the interior of the
islands of Borneo and Celebes would be highly important. Previously,
however, to instituting such a comparison, as far as in my power, I
propose taking a brief glance at the different races whose languages
may be included under the common name of Polynesian.

"In the first place, the Malayan. Issuing from the interior of Sumatra,
there is reason to conjecture, and even facts to prove, that originally
the dialect of Menangkabau resembled the other dialects of its
birthplace. The gradual extension of a warlike race gave a polish to
the language; additional wants, increasing luxury, extended knowledge,
and contact with the merchants of many Eastern nations, all combined
to produce the Malayan in its present form. But, during the progress
of this change, the radical Polynesian stock remained; and we find,
consequently, that the words necessary to mankind in their earliest
stage bear a striking and convincing resemblance to the dialects of
Rejong and Lampung, in Sumatra. Subsequent improvements were largely
adopted from the Sanscrit and the Arabic; but the fact of the primary
ideas being expressed in the Polynesian must preclude the conclusion
of either of these being the source whence the Malayan is derived,
its improvement and extension being alone referable to them. Marsden
positively states his inability to trace the Polynesian to any other
Eastern language; and, at the same time, he has demonstrated, in
what he considers a convincing manner, the identity of this language
from Madagascar and the islands of the Pacific to the Philippines
and Sumatra.

"It may here be incidentally remarked, that while so many authors are
endeavoring to prove that the Asiatic archipelago was peopled from the
Western Continent, [8] they overlook the fact of the radical difference
of language. Unless the roots of the language can be traced either to
India, Cambodia, or other parts, it must follow, as a matter of course,
that the islands were peopled at a time previous to the introduction of
the language now spoken on the Continent; else how are we to account
for the simple dialects of a rude people being radically distinct
from the language of the mother country? If the Dyaks of Borneo
and the Arafuras of Celebes and New Guinea speak a dialect of the
Polynesian, it will go far to prove an original people as well as an
original language, that is, as original as the Celtic, the Teutonic,
the South American; original because not derived from any known source.

"These brief remarks on the Malayan will, I believe, apply to the
language of the Island of Java, which, equally improved and enlarged by
the addition of Sanscrit and Arabic words, and differently modified,
retains, nevertheless, its radical Polynesian stock and its distinct
written character, as do likewise the dialects of the islands of Bally
and Lombock. The districts of Rejong, Lampung, &c., in Sumatra, retain
the original language in a much higher degree, possess distinctive
written characters, and have little intermixture of Sanscrit or
Arabic. Celebes, or Bugis-land, with a distinct language and character,
will probably be found to follow the same rule; and the Philippines,
including Mindanao, according to Marsden, possess the same language,
though altered and modified into the Tagala tongue.

"Madagascar, so far removed, exhibits in its language a dialect of
Tagala, or, strictly speaking, of Polynesian; and the South Sea islands
present striking and almost convincing proofs of the same origin.

"The inquiry ought to be pushed to the languages of the Mexicans and
Peruvians of South America; and, as far as our knowledge permits,
their identity established or disproved; for the language of this
by-gone people would go far toward tracing the course of emigration,
it being evident that a strong argument would be raised in favor of
the migration proceeding from east to west, if the language is common
to South America and Sumatra, and not traceable to any country of
the Continent of India.

"It remains, however, to inquire into the language of the interior
tribes of Borneo, Celebes, and New Guinea; and, on such inquiry,
should they be found to possess the same primary roots as the rest, I
believe the conclusion must ultimately be arrived at of the existence
of a Polynesian language common to this vast geographical extent,
and distinct from the languages of Asia. In tracing this identity,
we can only, of course, find it in few instances in the cultivated
Javanese and Malayan languages. Discrepancies must naturally be great
from the intermixture, from early recorded times, of all languages
in the archipelago; but, nevertheless, if the radical affinities be
striking, they will be conclusive in establishing the original identity
of all the races before mentioned; for, without this original identity,
how can we account for these affinities of language? It may, indeed,
be urged that this language has gradually crept into the dialects of
Java and Menangkabau. But, in the first place, the affinities will
be found in the very roots of the language--in the expressions for
the primary and necessary ideas, which seldom alter in any people;
in the next, there is a high degree of improbability in supposing
a rude dialect to supplant a substantial portion of a more polished
one; and, thirdly, we must not overlook the collateral evidence of the
similarity of conformation pervading the entire race from Polynesia to
the archipelago--distinct alike from the Caucasian and the Mongolian.

"In tracing the identity of this language, we may reckon the dialects
of the Dyaks of Borneo, &c., as the lowest step of the ladder; those
of the Pacific islands next; and so through the dialects of Sumatra and
Tagala, up to the Malayan and Javanese. For this purpose, a comparative
view of all must be attained; and Eastern scholars should point out,
when possible, the words taken from Sanscrit and other languages. For
my own part, these remarks are made as a sketch to be enlarged on,
and to assist in obtaining the vocabularies of the Dyaks and Arafuras.

"_Dec. 6th._--In looking over Marsden's admirable Introduction to his
Malayan Grammar, I find I have taken many of his views in the foregoing
remarks; but I consider that his opinions may be pushed to conclusions
more extended than he has ventured upon. Having described the 'exterior
circumstance' of the Malayan language, he proceeds to point out those
more original languages from whence we may presume it to be derived.

"'The words of which it consists may be divided into three classes,
and that two of these are Hindoo and Arabic has been generally
admitted. The doubts that have arisen respect only the third, or
that original and essential part which, to the Malayan, stands in the
same relation as the Saxon to the English, and which I have asserted
to be one of the numerous dialects of the widely-extended language
found to prevail, with strong features of similarity, throughout
the archipelago on the hither side of New Guinea, and, with a less
marked resemblance, among the islands of the Pacific Ocean.... To
show the general identity, or radical connection of its dialects,
and, at the same time, their individual differences, I beg leave to
refer the reader [9] to the tables annexed to a paper on the subject
which I presented, so long ago as the year 1780, to the Society of
Antiquaries, and is printed in vol. vi. of the _Archæologia_; also,
a table of comparative numerals, in the appendix to vol. iii. of
Captain Cook's last voyage; and likewise to the chart of ten numerals,
in two hundred languages, by the Rev. R. Patrick, recently published
in Valpy's _Classical, Biblical and Oriental Journal_.'

"Again, Marsden states:

"'But whatever pretensions any particular spot may have to precedence
in this respect, the so wide dissemination of a language common to all
bespeaks a high degree of antiquity, and gives a claim to originality,
as far as we can venture to apply that term, which signifies no more
than the state beyond which we have not the means, either historically
or by fair inference, of tracing the origin. In this restricted sense
it is that we are justified in considering the main portion of the
Malayan as original, or indigenous, _its affinity to any Continental
tongue not having yet been shown_; and least of all can we suppose
it connected with the monosyllabic, or Indo-Chinese, with which it
has been classed.'

"When we find an original language bearing no traces of being derived
from any Continental tongue, we must conclude the people likewise to
be original, in the restricted sense, or to have emigrated with their
language from some source hitherto unknown. The Sanscrit and Arabic
additions to the original stock are well marked, though the period
of the introduction of the former is hidden in darkness. It may be
inferred, however, that it came with the Hindoo religion, the remains
of which are yet in existence. It is evident that the question resolves
itself into two distinct branches: first, the original language, its
extent, the coincidence of its dialects, its source, &c.; secondly,
its discrepancies, whence arising, &c.; together with the inquiry into
the probable time and mode of the introduction of the Sanscrit. With
the latter of these inquiries I have nothing to do; on the former
subject I may collect some valuable information by adding the dialects
of the savage tribes in the interior of Borneo and Celebes.

"The alphabets of the island of Java, of the Tagala, and the Bugis
of Celebes, are given by Corneille, Le Brun, Thevenot, and Forrest."

Of Mr. Brooke's sojourn at Singapore it is unnecessary to speak; and
I accordingly resume my extracts with his ensuing voyage from that
port, and again for the Indian archipelago, but contenting myself,
for reasons which need not be entered into at length, with only
that portion of his excursion to Celebes and among the Bugis which
particularly bears upon his Borneon sequel.

"_Dec. 7th, 1839._--Off Great Solombo. Never was there a more tedious
passage than ours has been from Singapore. Sailing from that place on
the 20th of November, we have encountered a succession of calms and
light winds--creeping some days a few miles, and often lying becalmed
for forty-eight hours without a breath to fill the sails. Passing
through the straits of Rhio and Banca, and watering at the islands of
Nanka, we stood thence for Pulo Babian, or Lubeck, lay a night becalmed
close to the Arrogants Shoal, of which, however, we saw nothing,
owing, probably, to the smoothness of the water. The depths are
greater than laid down on Horsburgh's chart, varying from thirty-six
to thirty-eight fathoms. A calm now keeps us off the greater Solombo,
which it is my intention to visit when in my power.

"_8th._--Drifted past Solombo in the calm, and, reluctant to return,
I continued on my voyage with a light breeze from the eastward. This
island is well laid down: from the sea we made its longitude 113° 31';
Horsburgh gives it 113° 28', which, considering that both observations
were made afloat, is a near enough approximation. The land is low, with
a single hill, showing round from the westward, flat or wedge-shaped
from the eastward. The smaller Solombo is low: both wooded.

"_10th._--In sight of Laurots islands.

"_11th._--In the evening stood within four miles of the southern island
of Laurots. These islands are high and steep, covered with wood, and
uninhabited. The easternmost island seems, by bearings, badly laid
down, being not far enough to the southward and eastward. The southern
island is called by the Bugis, Mata Siri; the eastern, Kadapangan;
the northern one, Kalambow. A few rocks and islets lay off them;
water deep, and apparently clear of all danger.

"_15th._--Turatte Bay. After experiencing continued calms and light
winds, and falling short of water, we at length reached this bay, and
anchored in 7 1/2 fathoms. The first impression of Celebes is highly
favorable. The mountains present a bold outline, and rise in confused
masses, until crowned by what is commonly called _Bonthian Hill_. The
sides of the mountains slope gradually to the sea, and present an
inviting and diversified aspect of wood and cleared land. I dispatched
a boat for water to a small village; and the crew were well received
by the natives, after they became assured that they were not pirates.

"The outline of this bay, in Norie's chart, is not badly laid down; but
on either side there is great room for improvement and survey. Turatte
Bay may be fairly so called, as the district (or _negri_) generally
bears that name. The larboard point of Turatte Bay (approaching)
is called Malasaro, which comes next to Tanjong Layken in the
charts. The starboard point is Tanjong Uju Loke, and from Uju Loke
the land runs low to the point of Galumpang, the entrance of a river
marked in the charts. From Uju Loke (named Bolo Bolo in Norie's chart)
the coast-line runs for 12 or 15 miles to Bolo Bolo, which space is
entirely omitted. Bolo Bolo forms the entrance of Bonthian Bay.

"_16th._--Bonthian Bay. Called Banthi by the natives: is in lat. 5°
37' S.; long. 119° 33' E.

"The bay is pretty well laid down by Dalrymple. The small Dutch fort,
or intrenchment, stands rather on the eastern bight of the bay, and
is composed of a few huts, surrounded by a ditch and green bank. Two
guns at each corner compose its strength, and the garrison consists of
about thirty Dutchmen and a few Javanese soldiers. We were cordially
and hospitably received by the officers, and, after a great deal
of trouble and many excuses, here procured horses to carry us to
the waterfall. Bonthian Hill is immediately over this place; a flat
space of rice-ground, some miles in extent, only intervening. The
hill (so called) may with more propriety be designated as a range
of mountains, which here attain their utmost height and sink down
gradually almost across the peninsula. The view is most attractive;
the green and refreshing rice-grounds in the front and behind, the
slopes of the mountain and its various peaks, verdant grass, wooded
chasms, and all the inequalities which mark a mountain region. I am
very anxious to mount to the summit; but so many difficulties are
thrown in the way, that I almost despair--horses and guides are not
to be procured. The Dutch say the natives are lazy: the natives say
they dare not go without authority--either way we are the losers;
but the officers certainly exert themselves in our favor. Coming
into this bay, there is some difficulty in distinguishing the fort;
but coming from the westward, its position may readily be known by
steering for two lumps on the S.E. declivity of the mountain.

"_18th._--Got ashore by seven o'clock to start for the waterfall;
till nine we were detained by want of horses, but after much trouble
the animals were procured, and off we started. Our party consisted
of three doctors (him of the fortification, a German gentleman,
Treacher, and Theylingen) and myself, with native guides. The road
lay for a short way along the beach, then struck into the thicket,
and we commenced a gradual ascent. The scenery was most striking and
lovely; glades and glens, grassy knolls and slopes, with scattered
trees, and the voice of a hidden river which reached our ears from
a deep valley on the left hand. Proceeding thus for some distance,
we at length plunged into the wood, and descending a short space,
found ourselves by the sides of the stream below the waterfall. Here,
breakfast being finished, we all stripped to our trowsers, entered the
water, and advanced along the bed of the river to the fall. The banks
on either hand, steep and woody, prevented any other mode of approach,
and the stream, rushing down and falling over huge rocks, rendered the
only available one any thing but easy. At times we were up to the arms,
then crawling out and stealing with care over wet and slippery stones,
now taking advantage of a few yards of dry ground, and ever and anon
swimming a pool to shorten an unpleasant climb. In this manner we
advanced about half a mile, when the fall became visible; thick trees
and hanging creepers intervened; between and through the foliage we
first saw the water glancing and shining in its descent. The effect
was perfect. After some little further and more difficult progress,
we stood beneath the fall, of about 150 feet sheer descent. The wind
whirled in eddies, and carried the sleet over us, chilling our bodies,
but unable to damp our admiration. The basin of the fall is part of a
circle, with the outlet forming a funnel; bare cliffs, perpendicular on
all sides, form the upper portion of the vale, and above and below is
all the luxuriant vegetation of the East; trees, arched and interlaced,
and throwing down long fantastic roots and creepers, shade the scene,
and form one of the richest sylvan prospects I have ever beheld. The
water, foaming and flashing, and then escaping amid huge gray stones
on its troubled course--clear and transparent, expanding into tranquil
pools, with the flickering sunshine through the dense foliage--all
combine to form at scene such as Tasso has described. [10]

"Inferior in body of water to many falls in Switzerland, it is superior
to any in sylvan beauty; its deep seclusion, its undisturbed solitude,
and the difficulty of access, combine to heighten its charms to
the imagination. Our descent was like our upward progress. Having
again dressed ourselves, we rested for a time, and then started
for Bonthian--wearing away the rest of the day shooting amid the
hills. Theylingen and myself procured many specimens, and returned
laden with our spoil, and charmed with our day's excursion. The
waterfall is called Sapo, from the neighboring green peak of that
name. The height of our resting-place (not the highest point of the
day's ascent) was 750.5 feet, by Newman's two barometers; yet this is
the bottom of the mountain on its western slope. The officers dined
with us; they are very polite and kind; and we retired early to rest,
all the better for our excursion.

"_19th._--At 6 A.M. went with the Dutch officers shooting, and reached
the same stream which forms the waterfall. The scenery delightful;
water cool, and pleasant for bathing, a luxury I enjoyed in high
perfection. Aboard again to a late breakfast."





CHAPTER VI.

    Dain Matara, the Bugis,--Excursions in Celebes.--Dispute
    with the Rajah's son-in-law.--Baboon shot.--Appearance of the
    country.--Visit the Resident.--Barometrical observations.--The
    Bugis.--Geography.--Coral reefs.--Visit the Rana of
    Lamatte.--Population and products of the country.


"I may here, indulge in a brief episode to introduce my Bugis
companion, Dain Matara,--which properly I should have done long
since,--a man well born, and, for his country, affluent and educated:
he offered at Singapore, to accompany me on this expedition,
refusing all pay or remuneration, and stating that the good name
to be acquired, and the pleasure of seeing different places, would
recompense, him. At first, I must own this disinterestedness rendered
me suspicious; but conceiving that the greatest utility might accrue
from his assistance, I agreed to take him with his servant. Our long
passage seemed to make us well acquainted, and, I believe, raised a
mutual confidence. Dain, cheerful, good-tempered, and intelligent,
gained daily on my esteem; and, by the time we reached Bonthian,
I was rejoiced that he accompanied me.

"On this day we succeeded in procuring horses and guides for the
_hill_, as it is called.

"_20th._--By 8 A.M. our preparations were complete, and we mounted our
horses; a motley group we formed, composed of Treacher, Theylingen,
and myself, two seamen (Spence and Balls), Dain Matara, a son-in-law
of the Bonthian Rajah, and six footmen. Provisions for four days
were on one of the horses, and a goodly stock of fowling-pieces,
beside my mountain barometer. The plain was soon cleared; and three
hours' ride by a good horse-path brought us to the village of Senua,
consisting of a dozen houses. We found the inhabitants hospitable,
and took refuge from a heavy squall of wind and rain in the best
house the place afforded. During the rain the thermometer sunk to
76°, but rose directly afterward. At half-past one the rain cleared
away, but we were detained until three by the Bugis getting their
dinner. During this time I strayed along the sparkling stream which
runs by the village, and after enjoying a bathe, called to horse, in
order to proceed. Great was my surprise, however, to be told by the
rajah's son-in-law that he supposed we were going back. A discussion
arose,--he declaring there was no road for the horses, and that we
could not go farther; while I insisted, if he would not advance, I
should continue my journey on foot. After much time had been lost,
our guide set off slowly and reluctantly, and we proceeded for two
or three miles, when, finding our head turned to the southward,
and the road descending, I again called a halt, and was once more
told it was not possible to mount farther. A scheme had been formed
to lead us round about, and take us gradually down, until too late
to mount again. A long parley ensued; both parties seemed resolute;
and it finished by our unloading the baggage-horse, and making a
small parcel of necessaries to carry on foot. Our guide, however,
never intended matters to go so far, and we finished at last by taking
half the horses, and allowing him (the rajah's son-in-law) to descend
with the rest. This being done, we had to retrace our road nearly to
Senua; and a little before sunset our party crossed an awkward stream,
and struck into the path up the mountains.

"A short walk brought us to Lengan Lengang about dusk, where we put
up for the night. For the first time, this day I saw the cockatoo
in his wild state; I was within easy shot of two of them, but the
stream lay between us, and I felt some compunction at shooting these
favorite birds.

"Lourikeets were in great plenty, and many varieties of pigeons
and doves, beside other birds. Near Lengan Lengang we encountered a
community of dusky baboons, many of them very large and powerful:
after a hard scramble I got within shot of them; on my firing the
first barrel, the young ones and females made off, but the leaders
of the band disdained to retreat, and, with threatening gestures and
grimaces, covered the retreat of their party. The consequence was,
I sacrificed one of these heroes, of a large size: he fell from
the branch on which he was seated into a deep valley, and his fall
completed the rout of the rest. Spence, in the mean time, having
arrived, I dispatched him to secure the prize; but at the bottom
of the valley the baboons again showed themselves, and manifested
every inclination to fall on him; another barrel put them to flight,
and between us we dragged the fallen hero to the horses.

"The village of Lengan Lengang consists of about a dozen houses, is
situated in a nook of the hills, and surrounded by cocoanut-trees. We
were accommodated in the principal house, and treated with every
hospitality. The people of the hills are poor, though their land is
fertile, and produces abundance of rice and Indian corn. Theft is
said to be common, especially of horses, and the care of the horses
belonging to travelers devolves on the villagers; for, in case a
horse is stolen, a fine is imposed on the population in general. To
prevent this misfortune, our hosts kept playing, as long as we could
bear it, on an instrument like a clarinet; but at twelve o'clock,
after trying in vain to sleep, we were obliged to stop the noise and
risk the horses.

"This instrument is about three feet long, with five or six holes,
and a flat mouthpiece on the cane-tube; the sound is musical when
gently breathed into, but in their usual mode of playing, it emits
frightful shrieks. During the night the thermometer sunk to 69°,
and we were glad of our blankets.

"_21st._--Rose between five and six. Took some barometrical
observations, and at half-past six continued our upward way. As far as
Lengan Lengang the country presents beautiful woodland and mountain
scenery, with luxuriant vegetation, thickly wooded valleys, and
sparkling streams. The flats and valleys are occupied by rice-grounds,
and the pasturage is of the very finest description for all sorts
of cattle: the grass short and rich. Lengan Lengang is the last
point where the cocoanut or other palms is seen; but there it grows
remarkably well, and attains a great height. Above this point the wood,
generally speaking, becomes smaller, and the vegetation more coarse,
the hills being covered with a rank high grass, and ferns, similar to
those in England. Three hours' slow traveling brought us to the village
of Lokar, situated at the foot of the peak of that name. I mounted,
while breakfast was preparing, nearly to the top, and up to the belt
of thick wood which surrounds the last 100 or 150 feet. Observations
were repeated here, showing a great fall of the mercury, and afterward
taken at the village. Lokar consists of a few scattered huts, situated
amid gardens of fruit and vegetables: the mango, the guava, the jack,
and the plantain, with cabbages and Indian corn, compose the stock of
the inhabitants; the latter constitutes their principal food, and is
granaried for use in large quantities, not only in the house, but on
frameworks of bamboo without, on which it is thickly hung in rows,
with the head downward, to protect it from the weather. The highest
summit, called Lumpu Balong, was visible when we first arrived, some
miles in advance: at breakfast-time the clouds entirely covered it,
and rolled down upon Lokar in heavy rain, driving us into a miserable
hut for shelter.

"During the rain the thermometer fell to 70°. At 3 P.M. started for
some huts we saw at the foot of Lumpu Balong, having first sent our
horses back to Lengan Lengang, being assured their farther progress
was impracticable. When, however, our guide from Lokar understood
our intention of reaching Lumpu Balong, he objected to proceed, on
the plea that the village in advance was inhabited by people from
Turatte. We managed to coax him on, and, after two and a half hours'
walk, reached Parontalas. The country, ascending gradually, becomes
more and more wild; the wood stunted; and the streams, finding their
way through masses of rock, leave strong traces of their occasional
violence. Parontalas stands on the edge of the forest which skirts
Lumpu Balong, from which it has not long been retrieved. It consists
of a few scattered huts, far apart. Potatoes, tobacco, and coffee
are grown here, the former in great abundance. Like the rest of the
people, their food consists of Indian corn; and, as in the other
villages, they breed horses. Our host of Parontalas was very polite,
and gave us some fowls and the accommodation of his house; the latter,
indeed, was needful, for we were all badly provided with covering,
and the mountain air was raw and cold. To our request for guides to
ascend the mountain he replied, that it was necessary to consult the
head man of the district, who lived some little distance off. In the
interim we made ourselves very happy, determined to ascend with or
without a guide or guides. We lay down at nine, in order to be ready
for the morning's work, the thermometer standing at 59° in the house.

"_22d._--At five, when we rose, the thermometer stood at 56° in the
air. The head man had arrived, and willingly gave us guides, warning
us only of the difficulty of the ascent. Nothing could exceed the
kindness and attention of this simple old man. He remembered the time
the English had the country, and spoke of his people's respect for our
nation, and their regret that we had left the country. At 6 A.M. we
started, and, after walking about a mile, plunged into the belt of
forest which environs Lumpu Balong. From six till half-past two,
we were alternately ascending and descending, scrambling over rocks
or fallen timber, or cutting a path through the most tangled thicket
that ever tore the wayfarer. To add to our difficulty, during the
latter half of the ascent, we could procure no water, which caused us
considerable suffering. At length, however, we stood at the summit of
Lumpu Balong, and looked, on either side, over a vast sea of fleecy
clouds which rolled beneath. The top is a narrow ridge, covered with
stunted trees and luxuriant moss; and a second peak to the westward,
of rather less elevation, is separated from it by a declivity. I
climbed to the top of a tree to look along the mountain, and make
certain that we were at the highest point; and having convinced myself
of this, I proceeded with the barometric observations, which were
concluded by 3 P.M.; for it was highly necessary to get down before
night overtook us in the dreary and inhospitable forest. Our thirst,
too, was tormenting, and increased by hearing the fall of a torrent
deep in the valley to the northward.

"As far as I could observe, the northern face of the mountain was
perpendicular, and the ascent on that side would have been attended
with greater difficulty than from the point we chose. Our way down was
easier, and the descent was made as expeditiously as the nature of the
ground would allow. Having fairly worn our shoes off our feet, we were
pierced by brambles and thorns in a cruel manner. Our guide, in going
down, discovered a tree with a bee-hive in it containing great store of
honey. The Bugis instantly attacked the tree, on seeing which my first
impression was, that it would be prudent to retreat to a distance;
but their composure induced me to remain; and, to my surprise, when
the tree was laid open, the honey was taken out in large quantities,
and the bees brushed off the comb without offering to sting. Though
flying round about us, and on the hands of all the people, they were
quite innocent of harm; and I conclude, therefore, they were different
from the common honey-bee. The honey was excellent, and refreshed us
for a few minutes, but ultimately only added to our thirst. At length,
about five, we reached a stream of water, and quenched our thirst with
draughts of the coolest and most limpid mountain stream. The Bugis,
though, like ourselves, they had been, without any water from nine
o'clock in the morning till five in the evening, refused to drink,
alleging that it was highly injurious after eating honey! Glad were we,
just at dark, to get clear of the forest; and a short walk farther
brought us to our temporary dwelling. We were much knocked up, and
very much torn with the thorns. A brief dinner and a delicious cigar,
and we lay down to sleep--not even incommoded by the cold, which kept
us awake the last night.

"_23d._--Having, through mistake, forgotten to bring up any money,
I had no means of repaying the obligations received from these
simple hill-people except _by promises_. My old friend ordered the
guide of yesterday to accompany us to the plains, to receive his own
payment, and to bring some things, for others, up there. At ten we
hobbled forth, very foot-sore, and lacking proper covering for our
feet. The prospect of four or five hours' walk to Lengan Lengang
was very unpleasant; and in proportion to our expected pain was
our gratification on meeting _all_ our horses within three miles
of Parontalas--_all_ the horses, which all the men swore could not,
by any possibility, ascend, were there; and though without saddles
and bridles, or the Bugis, we were too glad to mount. We went down
by another road. Four hours brought us to Lengan Lengang, where we
rested for two hours, and, remounting, reached Bonthian at about seven
o'clock in the evening. Thus concluded this interesting excursion
into a hill-region, where we attained the summit of Lumpu Balong,
never before reached by European. The Dutch officers informed me that
three successive residents of Bonthian had attempted it and failed.

"Before I conclude, I may take a brief survey of the country. The
hills are generally rounded or flat at top, and not offering any
rugged or broken peaks. The scenery about Senua and Lengan Lengang
is the perfection of woodland, with the picturesque characteristics
of a mountain region; the climate admirably suited, thence to the
summit, for Europeans, and capable of producing most European and
tropical plants to perfection. Coffee plantations on these hills
might be undertaken with certainty of success, and there is much in
the character of the natives which would facilitate the operation. To
the westward of Lokar, and somewhat lower, is a fine extensive plain,
which we just skirted coming down; it was cultivated in every part,
apparently with rice. The vegetable productions of the hills I have
briefly mentioned; but I may add that the wild raspberry was found,
and that wild guavas grow in the greatest abundance, as well as
oranges and grapes.

"The animal kingdom, of course, we had no time to examine; but
the babi rupa is said to be found in the higher regions; and in
the forest, toward the summit of Lumpu Balong, we saw the dung of
wild cattle, which, I am told, are a species of urus. The birds we
saw were, paroquets of two sorts, viz., the lourikeet and a small
green paroquet; a large green pigeon, specimens of which we got;
the cream-colored pigeon of Borneo, beside many others.

"The geological formation of the region I must leave to others. I
brought down some specimens of the rocks and loose stones, which are,
I believe, pummice; if so, I presume the formation volcanic, similar
to Java.

"_24th._--Called on the resident, and saw the rajah.

"_25th._--Christmas, with his jolly nose and icy hands. Here it is
hot enough! Were I to live in this country, I should retire for the
season up in the mountains. Dined with the Resident of Bonthian; by no
means surprised that he and his congeners had failed in their attempt
to climb the mountain: the resident is a native! In the evening,
celebrated the day with all sorts of sports.

"_26th._--Mid-day, quitted Bonthian, and ran to Boele Comba or Compa.

"_27th._--I have little to say of Boele Comba. It is situated in the
bight of the bay, eastward of Bonthian. There appears to be much,
confusion an Horsburgh's Directory about the latitude and longitude,
and the hill called after the place. This hill is the last of the
mountain-range, somewhat detached, covered with wood, of moderate
elevation, and peaked. From our anchorage, two miles from the fort,
it bore N.N.W. The fort is similar to the one at Bonthian, the country
pretty, and nearly level. The Bonthian mountains (_i. e._ Lumpu Balong
and the range) show steep and well in the background. Game abounds,
by report. Europeans are subject to complaints of the eyes, and
occasionally to fever. Any vessel running in should be very careful,
for the charts are defective, and Boele Comba reef is said to project
farther to the westward of the fort than laid down.

"I here subjoin a list of our barometric observations, the upper
barometer reduced to the rate of the lower and standard one:--



    _Senua, 20th December, 1839._

       Bar.          A.   D.

    1. 30.054       86   87  3h 15m P.M.
    2. 28.385       79   80


    _Lengan Lengang, 21st December._

       Bar.          A.   D.

    1. 30.119        79  78.5   6h 30m A.M.
    2. 27.988        70  69.5   6h 0m   "


    _Lokar Peak, 21st December, 100 feet below summit._

       Bar.          A.   D.

    1. 30.095        90   90  10h 30m A.M.
    2. 25.975        79   79


    _Hill on the way to Lumpu Balong, 22d December._

       Bar.          A.    D.

    1. 30.144        90    90     Mean between 8h and noon.
    2. 23.612 ...    66    65.5   10h 40m A.M.


    _Lumpu Balong Peak, 22d December._

       Bar.          A.    D.

    1. 30.146        89.5  90.5  2h 0m   P.M.
    2. 23.718        64    63.5  2h 30m   "



_28th._--Leaving Boele Comba after breakfast, we shaped our course
for Point Berak.

"With the richest country, the natives of these places are poor, and
they bear no good-will to their rulers. It is likewise certain that few
active measures are resorted to for forwarding the development of the
native character and local resources. The resident is a Macassar-born
native, and this fact alone speaks volumes for the mode and manner of
government. The people of the country I found a kind and simple race;
and though they are accused of pride and laziness by their masters, I
could not, circumstances taken into consideration, discover any trace,
of the latter vice, and the former I can readily forgive them. That the
Bugis are not an indolent race is well proved by their whole conduct,
wherever circumstances offer any inducement to exertion. Even here,
the cleared country and the neat cultivation prove them far otherwise;
and traces are visible everywhere on the mountains of their having
been more highly cultivated than at present. Coffee plantations
once flourished, and being destroyed during a war, years ago, have
never been renewed. Inclosures and partition walls in decay are very
frequent, marking the former boundary of cultivation. That they are
independent enough to be proud, I honor them for! The officers allowed
they were courageous, and one designated them as '_fier comme un
Espagnol_;' and, on the whole, no doubt exists in my mind that they
are people easily to be roused to exertion, either agricultural or
commercial; their sullen and repulsive manners toward their masters
rather indicating a dislike to their sway, and the idleness complained
of only proving that the profits of labor are lower than they ought
to be.

"Nothing so strongly marks the degradation of a race or nation as
a cheerful acquiescence under a foreign rule. The more virtuous,
the more civilized, the more educated a people, the more turbulent,
indolent, and sullen, when reduced to a state of subjection; the
fewer qualities will they have to please their masters, when foreign
rule is oppressive, or looks solely to the advantage of the country
of the conquerors, and not of the conquered. There is no race will
willingly submit: the bayonet and the sword, the gallows and the whip,
imprisonment and confiscation, must be constantly at work to keep
them under.

"Leaving Boele Comba, as I before said, we shaped our course for
Tanjong Berak, passing between that point and the north island. The
passage is excellent, clear of all danger, as far as we could see,
with deep water. The rocks reported to exist by Horsburgh, and put
down on Norie's chart, have no existence. The Bugis prahus always use
this channel, and know them not; and the captain of a Dutch cruiser
informed me that he had often run through the passage at night,
and that it was clear of all danger or obstruction.

"My own observation went to verify the fact, for every part of the
passage appears deep and clear, and we passed over the spots where
these rocks are marked. Approaching Tanjong Berak, there is a sandy
beach, where a vessel may get anchorage in case the wind dies away. The
tides in the channel are strong; here, and along the south coast, the
ebb runs from the eastward, the flood from the west. Having cleared
the channel, we hauled into the Bay of Boni, which, although running
in a north and south direction, has some headlands extending to the
eastward. There are two places marked on the chart, viz. Berak and
Tiero; but these, instead of being towns or villages, are names of
districts; the first, reaching from Tanjong Berak, about 15 miles,
till it joins Tiero; Tiero, extending from the northern confine of
Berak to Tanjong Labu, 15 miles in all. To the northward and eastward
is a high island called Balunrueh. From Tanjong Berak the water along
the coast is very deep; no soundings with 50 fathoms. Toward evening we
went into Tiero Bay, a pretty secluded spot. The southern part of the
bay is foul, having a reef visible at low water, The northern headland
has a spit running from it, with 14 fathom half a mile (or little more)
off. Within the bay there is no bottom with 50 fathom till near its
northern extremity, where the water shoals suddenly. Running in, in
a squall, we got into 3 1/4 fathom, where we anchored. This country
belongs to the Dutch as far as Point Labu.

"_29th._--Calm all day. Sounded the bay: the southern point has a
steep coral reef nearly a quarter of a mile off. The southern part of
the bay is inclosed by a reef, part of which seems to me artificial,
for the purpose of catching fish, and is shallow: outside the reef
the water is deep dose to. The western shore is lined by a reef
close to it, and the water is deep. The center part of the bay is
very deep; and within 100 yards of where we lay we got no bottom
at 17 fathoms. The next cast was 6, and the next 3 fathoms--hard
clay bottom. A small river discharges itself, in the northern part,
inside the anchorage: there is a considerable depth within, but the
bar is shallow. The scenery on the river is beautiful; wild at first,
and gradually becoming undulating and cultivated. Birds are plenty:
cockatoos abound, of which I shot two. This part of the country
possesses considerable geological interest: the hills round the bay
are of slight elevation; and 80 or 100 feet from the sea level are
large masses of coral rock, upheaved by some convulsion.

"_30th._--Under weigh. Brought up in 23 fathoms, amid the coral shoals.

"_31st._--Visited the island of Balunrueh for sights.

"Tanjong Labu is bluff and bold, and of moderate elevation. The
land from thence trends away westward, forming a long bay, which,
for distinction, may be called Labu Bay, at the N.W. part of which is
the town of Songi, the principal place about here. Between Labu and
Songi are the following countries: Kupi Kajang, Pakah, Buah, Kalaku,
Baringan, and Magnarabunbang; each with a separate petty rajah. The
country is moderately well cleared; about an average height, near
the shore, of 300 feet; with few habitations about, but no towns or
villages. The mountain range throws a spur downward to the sea in the
vicinity of Songi and the fine peaks of Lumpu Balong; and Wawa Karang,
with the _confusion_ of mountains, form a magnificent background to the
prospect. From Magnarabunbang the land runs away to the eastward toward
Tanjong Salanketo, which must be described on a future occasion. In
the offing are several islands and numerous reefs. The principal
island is Balunrueh, 400 or 500 feet high; bold, steep, and covered
with trees, except at its northern extremity; where it is low, with a
sandy point. Off this north point runs a coral reef; direction 354°,
and extent about two miles. At the S.W. angle of the island there
is likewise a reef stretching half a mile; and the shores all round,
for a short distance, are lined with coral, outside of which the water
is apparently very deep. We could get no soundings with a hand lead,
half a mile to the westward.

"Off Balunrueh, to the S.E., is the islet of Liang Liang; next to
Liang Liang, Tanbunoh, which is larger; then Cadingareh Batantampeh
(the largest), Cotingduan Lariahriah, and two islands to the northward
called Canallo. Balunrueh and Batantampeh have both indifferent
fresh water; the former near the low point at the north end. From
the S.W. end of Liang Liang a reef runs out. The bearing, from the
small hill, over the watering place of Balunrueh, was 77°. The reef
extends to 104°, and stretches to the southward beside: near Liang
Liang it is narrow. Its limits I could not define.

"Between Liang Liang and Tanbunoh a narrow reef, and spits from most
of the islands. Two patches lay off Balunrueh about two miles and a
half: the first, bearing 319°, is narrow, and about half a mile long;
the other smaller, and bearing 287°. Part of the day we passed on
Balunrueh was very hot; but we got satisfactory sights, and sailed
round the island, returning to the vessel about six in the evening.

"I must now return to Labu, to give some account of the channel
between the reefs; as, from the appearance of the charts, it would
seem impossible to navigate the western side of the bay. Having
passed Tanjong Labu at a distance of 3 1/2 or 4 miles, get the
flat-topped hill called Bulu Tanna ahead. Close to the Bulu Tanna,
in the foreground, is another smaller hill, with two remarkable tufts
on the top: this hill, just open to the eastward of Bulu Tanna,
is the leading mark for Songi, which stands to the westward. This
mark will lead clear, or very nearly so, of all the reefs; but as
there is uncertainty in the distance from Tanjong Labu, it may be
necessary to diverge from the straight course in order to avoid some
of the patches. In the daytime the coral is seen with the greatest
ease; and a vessel with a lookout aloft, and a breeze, may proceed
with safely. The first reef is on the starboard hand; part was dry,
and shoal-water about. This first patch is in the proximity of the
great reef called Melompereh, which runs to the eastward. Beside
these, the channel is occasionally lined by patches on either hand;
but is nowhere narrower than a mile and a half, and is anything but
difficult navigation, so far, in clear weather.

"_Jan. 4th, 1840._--Arrived off Songi on the 1st, and dispatched a
boat to the old Rajah, or Rana, of Lamatte. Our answer was, that not,
having been to Boni, she feared receiving us, as she felt inclined;
but if we would come to her house, she should be glad to see us. On
the following day, accordingly, we paid our visit at her residence,
which is situated about four miles up the river Tanca.

"The old lady is about sixty-five years of age, and (as she herself
informed us) very poor. Her house, indeed, bears every mark of great
poverty; having a leaky roof, and not sufficient matting to cover
the bamboo floors. She was kind, and seemed pleased to see us; said
I should henceforward be her son, and that nothing but her fear of
the Boni Rajah prevented her receiving me in the best way in her
power; but pointing to the roof and to the floor, she repeated,
'I have nothing.' I presented her with such articles as I thought
would be acceptable to her; and, in return, she gave me a sarong.

"The population of the country is considerable. The last district
I mentioned was Magnarabunbang. The town of that name, on the
sea-side, consists of forty-five houses, beside a roving population of
Badjows. Along the coast to the eastward, and close to Magnarabunbang,
is the river of Songi. Proceeding up this shallow river, the first
village is Tacolompeh, situated on the right bank, and consisting of
twenty houses; nearly opposite the village of Pangassa, of thirteen
houses; and farther up, about four miles from the river's mouth,
stands Songi, consisting of 164 houses on the right bank, and 60
on the left. These places are all on the low ground, and surrounded
with cocoanut-trees.

"Joining the district of Magnarabunbang, on the coast, is Lamatte, the
rajanate of our old friend. The river, like the Songi, is shallow, and
running through very low ground. On the left bank is Luppa, consisting
of twenty-five houses; then, on the right, Ulo, twenty-two houses;
and above Ulo comes Ullue, of twelve houses. Nearly opposite Ullue is
Balammepa, with thirty houses, superior to the others, and inhabited by
merchants who have made money in trading voyages. This village sends
yearly two prahus to Singapore. Just above Ullue stand seven houses;
and above Balammepa is Tanca, the residence of the Rajah of Lamatte,
consisting of ten houses. The streams, as I have said, are shallow,
and the ground low, neatly cultivated with Indian corn, and abounding
in cocoanut-trees. Behind Magnarabunbang there is a narrow strip
of low ground, which becomes wider as it advances to the eastward,
with here and there moderate elevations.

"The chief product of the country is coffee, which is grown in great
quantities on the hills, but brought down as it ripens, when it
is collected by the Bugis merchants for their yearly shipments. The
yearly produce is stated to be 2000 coyans or 80,000 peculs. The price
is from fifteen to sixteen Java rupees the pecul; to which must be
added the trouble and expense of storing and clearing from the inner
skin. Tortoise-shell is brought in by the Badjows; and mother-of-pearl
shells in any quantity there is demand for. Taking the number of houses
in this small space, above described, the total will be 308 houses,
which reckoned at the low estimate of eight persons for each house,
will give 2464 inhabitants; this, however, is far below the proper
estimate, as there are villages scattered between the rivers, and
numbers of detached houses; in all, therefore, safely computed at
5000 persons. The villages, with the exception of Balammepa, have
an aspect of poverty, and the country is ravaged by that frightful
scourge the small-pox, and likewise some cases apparently of cholera,
from the account given of the complaint. Near the hill of Bulu Tanna
there is a hot spring, and likewise, by the report of the natives, some
slight remains of an old building. I regretted much not seeing these;
but the natives, with much politeness, begged me not to go previous to
my visit to Boni, as they would be answerable for allowing strangers
to see the country without orders from the chief rajah. All I see
and hear convinces me that the Rajah of Boni has great power over
the entire country. On a friendly communication with him, therefore,
depends our chance of seeing something of the interior.

"The inhabitants here are polite, but shy and reserved: and the death
of the Rana of Songi and the absence of the Rajah Mooda, her reported
successor, have been against us.

"_5th._--Sailing from Songi about 4 P.M., we directed our course
for Tanjong Salanketo. The breeze was stiff, which caused us to use
considerable precaution in sailing among the shoals. Assisted by
a native Nacòdah, by name Dain Pativi, we were enabled to keep the
tortuous channel, of which otherwise we should have been ignorant. A
little farther than the Tanca river is a shoal stretching from the
shore, to avoid which we kept Canallo on our lee bow: this being
cleared, we gradually luffed up, ran between two shoals, and passed
several others."






CHAPTER VII.

    Mr. Brooke's second visit to Sarawak.--The civil war.--Receives a
    present of a Dyak boy.--Excursion to the seat of war.--Notices
    of rivers, and settlements on their banks.--Deaths and
    burials.--Reasons for and against remaining at Sarawak.--Dyak
    visitors.--Council of war.--Why side with the Rajah.--Mode of
    constructing forts.--State of enemy's and Rajah's forces.--Conduct
    of the war.


Mr. Brooke continued his cruise for some time, and made very
interesting collections of natural history, beside acquiring much
insight into the native history, language, and customs, his detailed
remarks on which it is to be hoped he will at a future day give to
the public. He then returned to Singapore, where he was detained for
several months by ill health; but availed himself of the opportunity
to recopper and refit the Royalist, and set everything else in order
for his next visit to Sarawak, the remarkable results of which are
related in the following pages. Still sick and languid though he was,
the very air of Borneo, and the prospect of activity, seemed to restore
him to life, after the listless rest at Singapore, with "nothing to
observe;" and only cheered by the kindest attentions and hospitalities
of the inhabitants of that interesting and important settlement.

On the second visit of Mr. Brooke to Sarawak, about the end of August,
1840, he found the inhabitants in nearly the same state as at first,
although there was much talk of reinforcements, and decisive measures
for bringing the war to a close. The two parties lay within thirty
miles of each other, the rebels holding the upper part of the river,
and communication with the interior. The sultan, however, had sent down
the Orang Kaya de Gadong to take more active measures, and his arrival
stimulated Muda Hassim to something like exertion. This occurred
on the fourth September, 1840, as appears by Mr. Brooke's journal,
from which I shall give various extracts indicative not only of the
character of my friend, whose ideas were written down at the time the
impressions were made, but also supplying a distinct picture of the
progress of this novel and amusing civil warfare, and demonstrating
the unwarlike character of the Sarawak Borneons.

"An army of mixed Malays and Dyaks was raised to attack the Dyak
tribes in rebellion, and this service was successfully performed;
the rebel Dyaks were defeated, and most of them have since come
over to the rajah. Their forces being weakened by desertion, were
reported not to amount to more than 400 or 500 men, in four or five
forts situated on the river; and it now remained to drive them from
their last stronghold of resistance. It was confidently asserted by
the rajah and Macota, that, were it not for the underhand assistance
of the Sultan of Sambas, who had constantly supplied them with food
and ammunition, the insurgents would long since have been dispersed.

"At the period in question they were said to be in great distress
for want of provisions; and as a force was collecting to attack them
from various quarters, it was greatly to be hoped that the war was
verging to a termination. During my week's stay I have frequently
visited Muda Hassim, and he has likewise been on board: our good
understanding knows no interruption; and these savage, treacherous,
bloodthirsty Borneons are our good friends, with whom we chat and
laugh every evening in familiar converse. I find no cause to alter my
last year's opinion, that they have few active vices; but indolence
is the root of their evils.

"_Sept. 7th._--Last night I received a strange and embarrassing
present, in the shape of a young Dyak boy of five years old--a
miserable little prisoner, made during this war, from the tribe of
Brong. The gift caused me vexation, because I knew not what to do
with the poor innocent; and yet I shrink from the responsibility of
adopting him. My first wish is to return him to his parents and his
tribe; and if I find I cannot do this, I believe it will be bettor
to carry him with me than leave him to become the slave of a slave:
for should I send him back, such will probably be his fate. I wish
the present had been a calf instead of a child.

"_9th._--Situ, my Dyak boy, seems content and happy; and judging by his
ways, and his fondness for tobacco, he must be older than I at first
supposed. In pursuance of my desire to restore him to his parents
I made every inquiry as to their probable fate; but have learned
nothing that leaves me any hope that I shall be able to do so. The
Brong tribe having taken part with the rebels, were attacked by the
rajah's people; and many were killed and the rest scattered. Pino,
the Brong, knows not whether Situ's parents are alive or dead; nor,
if the former, whither they have fled. Supposing my endeavors to
restore the child fail, I have resolved to keep him with me, for many
reasons. The first is that his future prospects will be better, and
his fate as a freeman at Singapore happier, than as a slave in Borneo;
the second, that he can be made a Christian. I can easily provide
for him in some respectable household, or take him to England, as may
hereafter be most advantageous for him; and at the former place he can
always be made a comfortable servant with good training. Yet with all
this, I cannot disguise from myself that there is responsibility--a
heavy moral responsibility--attached to this course, that might
be avoided: but then, _should_ it be avoided? Looking to the boy's
interests--temporal, perhaps, eternal--I think it ought not; and so,
provided always I cannot place him where humanity and nature dictate,
I will take the responsibility, and serve this wretched and destitute
child as far as lies in my power. He is cast on my compassion;
I solemnly accept the charge; and I trust his future life may bear
good fruit and cause me to rejoice at my present decision.

"_Oct. 2d._--Lying at Sarawak, losing valuable time, but pending the
war difficult to get away; for whenever the subject is mentioned, Muda
Hassim begs me not to desert him just as it is coming to a close; and
daily holds out prospects of the arrival of various Dyak tribes. The
rajah urged upon me that he was deceived and betrayed by the intrigues
of Pangerans, who aimed at alienating his country; and that if I left
him, he should probably have to remain here for the rest of his life,
being resolved to die rather than yield to the unjust influence which
others were seeking to acquire over him; and he appealed to me that
after our friendly communication I could not, as an Engliah gentleman,
desert him under such circumstances. I felt that honorably I could not
do so; and though reluctantly enough, I resolved to give him the aid
he asked;--small indeed, but of consequence in such a petty warfare.

"_3d._--I started to join Macota at Leda Tanah. At 4h. 30m. P.M. a
pouring rain delayed us some time: and darkness setting in, rendered
our pull a long and very disagreeable one. We did not reach Leda Tanah
until eleven, when we found _the army_ in their boats, and a small
fort they had built on the bank of the river. I moved into Macota's
large boat, and slept there; while he, as commander-in-chief, went
backward and forward from one post to another during the night.

"_4th._--At Leda Tanah the river divided into two branches; one part
running past Siniawan, and the other to the left--likewise to another
point of the mountain-range. Above Siniawan is Sarambo, a high detached
mountain, perhaps 3000 feet in height, with a notch in the center. Off
Leda Tanah is a sand and pebble bank formed by the junction of the
two streams, and the country around is well cleared for this part;
while the graves on the right bank bear witness to the population
of former days. It is represented to have been a flourishing place,
and the neighborhood well inhabited, until the breaking out of this
unhappy war. The situation is delightful, and advantageously chosen
at the confluence of the two streams.

"_5th._--Ascended that to the left for a short distance. On the
left hand, just above Leda Tanah, is the small creek of Sarawak, the
original settlement, and from which the larger river now takes its
name. I intended to have returned to-day; but as the weather threatened
another deluge, I stopped till the following morning. It was a curious
sight to see the whole army bathe, with the commander-in-chief at
their head, and his Pangerans. The fare of these people is anything
but luxurious, for they get nothing but rice and salt; and they
were thankful in proportion for the small supplies of tea, sugar,
and biscuit I was able to spare them.

"_6th._--Quitted Leda Tanah, and reached the Royalist in five hours,
one of which we were delayed by the way. The river is remarkably
pretty; banks cleared of jungle, with fine trees, and a view of the
mountains. Many parts are exceedingly shallow; but the natives state
there is a channel for a moderate-sized vessel as far as Leda Tanah."

On Mr. Brooke's return on board the Royalist, he found his steward
Rankin, who had been lingering some time, still alive; and a seaman
named Daniel, whom he had left with a slight fever, suddenly expired
at ten at night in a fainting fit. He writes in his journal: "It is
difficult to allege the immediate cause of his death, which probably
arose from some organic complaint of the heart or the brain, quite
independent of fever. Five minutes before his decease the man's
pulse was high and full. The steward will follow in a few days; and
death, which has never before entered on board, will thus strike
two blows. To me it is a satisfaction that neither is in any way
attributable to climate.

"_7th._--Muda Hassim rendered me every assistance. A grave was
prepared, and wood for a coffin, so that by two o'clock we proceeded to
inter the dead. His last resting-place was situated on a gently rising
ground behind the Chinamen's houses. The ensign was placed over his
simple bier, and he was carried by his shipmates to the grave. All who
could be spared attended, and I performed the service--that impressive
and beautiful service of the Church of England.

"_8th._--Having the melancholy duty of yesterday over was a relief,
only alloyed by the sad prospect of a near recurrence. I now turned
my mind seriously to departure, having well weighed the pros and cons
of the subject.

"In the first place, the greatest advantage would result from my
accompanying the rajah along the coast of Borneo; and if I could hope
a reasonable time would leave him free to go there, I would wait spite
of the season: for it is evident that by myself I should have to form
fresh connections among the chiefs, and without that I reckon it next
to impossible to penetrate even a moderate distance from the coast in
a strange place. The next reason is, that it has been intimated to me
that a rival faction, headed by Pangeran Usop, exists in Borneo Proper,
and that that Pangeran, from my known friendship to Muda Hassim,
might endeavor to injure me, _i. e._ kill me. At any rate, during
Muda Hassim's absence, I should be obstructed in all my proceedings,
and could not do more than sketch the bare coast-line. These are
strong and cogent reasons for remaining _for a time_, if the ultimate
object be attainable; and to these may be added my own feelings--my
reluctance to quit the rajah in the midst of difficulty and distress,
and his _very very sad face_ whenever I mention the topic.

"On the other hand must be weighed the approach of the adverse
monsoon, the loss of time, and the failure of provisions, which,
though but luxuries to gentlemen which they can readily dispense
with, are nevertheless necessaries to seamen, without which they get
discontented, perhaps mutinous. There are good reasons on both sides.

"_9th._--I sent Williamson to intimate my approaching departure;
and when I went in the evening the little man had such a sorrowful
countenance that my heart smote me. When I told him I would remain
if there were the slightest chance of a close to the war, his
countenance cleared, and he gaily repeated that my fortune and his
would bring this struggle to an end, though others forsook him. I
then consented to await the issue a few days longer, and to revisit
Leda Tanah to ascertain if the news were true. It ran to the effect
that the rebels, under the Patingi and Tumangong, are fortified at
the foot of the mountain of Sarambo, on which hill are three Dyak
tribes below that of Sarambo; over them Bombak; and on the summit
the Paninjow. The Bombak and Paninjow have already, in part, joined
Macota, and the Sarambo are to come in as to-day. These three last
Dyak tribes deserting the rebels will leave them surrounded in their
forts, which are commanded by the rest of the hill; and everything
promises well, if the opportunity be vigorously used. The Sow and the
Singè are in part at Leda Tanah, and more Dyaks daily joining. I must
push the rajah on to action, for help from without is not likely to
come. Yet I wish still more to accommodate matters; and if he would
spare the leaders' lives, I believe they would lay down their arms
on my guaranty. But though he does not say that he will kill them,
he will listen to no terms of compromise; and when I reflect that a
European monarch, in the same circumstances, would act in the same
way--that the laws of my own country would condemn the men for the
same offence--I cannot urge the subject into a personal matter.

"_16th._--Rankin's (my steward's) death having been some time
inevitable, it was a relief when the event occurred. He was cut off in
the flower of manhood, from the effects of hard drinking, which even
his fine constitution could not resist. I buried him near the other
man, and had a neat inscription, with the name of the individual,
his ship and age, placed over each.

"Days passed on, but not quite unrelieved by events. And now I may
positively state, that the war will be over in a few days, or not
over at all. The first of these events was the desertion of the Dyaks,
and the arrival of their chiefs with Macota. Next arrived 200 Chinese
from Sambas, under a very intelligent capitan. Rajah Ali came next,
bringing some ourang-outangs' heads; then Datu Naraja; and lastly,
Pangeran Jedut from Sarebus, with the information that the Dyaks
of that name, in consequence of a war with Linga, would not come
here. Thus they not only refused to come themselves, but obliged the
Linga people to stay at home to defend their country. To quiet this
coast the Sarebus should receive a severe lesson.

"_17th._--I had a large party of Dyaks on board in the evening,
viz. the Singè, Sow, Bombak, and Paninjow, in all about fifteen men
and two old chiefs. They ate and drank, and asked for everything,
but stole nothing. One man wore a necklace of beads set with human
teeth, taken of course in war, which I got from him for two yards of
red cloth. Another was ornamented with a necklace of bears' teeth;
and several had such a profusion of small white beads about their
necks as to resemble the voluminous foldings of the old fashioned
cravat. As far as I could observe, they all seemed in earnest about
attacking Siniawan; and their allegiance to the rajah was as warm now
(in words) as it had been heretofore defective in action.

"_18th._--Proceeded in the long-boat to Leda Tanah, which we reached
in three and a half hours' pulling, and just in time to witness the
start of 150 Malays and 100 Dyaks of Lundu for the mountain of Sarambo,
at the foot of which Siniawan and the enemies' forts are situated.

"_19th._--Did everything in my power to urge Macota to advance
and divert the attention of the rebels from the party going up the
mountain, but in vain: Malay-like, he would wait.

"_20th._--I have before remarked that two rivers formed a junction
at Leda Tanah; and this day I ascended the left hand stream, or, as
they call it, the Songi besar (_i. e._ great Songi). The scenery is
picturesque; the banks adorned with a light and variegated foliage
of fruit-trees; and everywhere bearing traces of former clearing and
cultivation. In the background is the range of mountains, among which
Stat is conspicuous from his noble and irregular shape. On our return,
the white flag (a Hadji's turban) was descried on the mountain,
being the prearranged signal that all was well. No news, however,
came from the party; and in spite of the white banner Macota took
fright at the idea that the rebels had surrounded them.

"_21st._--Detachments of Dyaks are coming in. Ten of the tribe of
Sutor were dispatched as scouts; and in a few hours returned with
the welcome intelligence that the detachment was safe on the top
of the mountain, and that the three tribes of Paninjow, Bombak, and
Sarambo, had finally decided on joining the rajah, and surrendering
their fortified houses. Soon after this news the chiefs of the tribes
arrived with about 100 men, and were of course well received; for if
chargeable with deserting their cause, it is done with the utmost
simplicity, and perfect confidence in their new associates. From
their looks it was apparent they had suffered greatly from want of
food; and they frankly confessed that starvation was their principal
motive for coming over. I did all in my power to fix their new faith by
presents of provisions, &c. &c.: and I think they are trustworthy; for
there is a straightforwardness about the Dyak character far different
from the double-faced dealings of the Malay. Their stipulations were,
forgiveness for the past, and an assurance that none of the Dyaks from
the sea (_i. e._ Sarebus and Sakarran) should be employed; for they
were, they said, hateful to their eyes. These terms being readily
conceded--the first from interest, the second from necessity--they
became open and communicative on the best means of attacking
the forts. A grand council of war was held, at which were present
Macota, Subtu, Abong Mia, and Datu Naraja, two Chinese leaders, and
myself--certainly a most incongruous mixture, and one rarely to be met
with. After much discussion, a move close to the enemy was determined
on for to-morrow, and on the following day to take up a position
near their defences. To judge by the sample of the council, I should
form very unfavorable expectations of the conduct in action. Macota is
lively and active; but whether from indisposition or want of authority,
undecided. The Capitan China is lazy and silent; Subtu indolent and
self-indulgent; Abong Mia and Datu Naraja stupid. However, the event
must settle the question; and, in the mean time, it was resolved that
the small stockade at this place was to be picked up, and removed to
our new position, and there erected for the protection of the fleet. I
may here state my motives for being a spectator of, or participator
(as may turn out), in this scene. In the first place I must confess
that curiosity strongly prompted me; since to witness the Malays,
Chinese, and Dyaks in warfare was so new, that the novelty alone might
plead an excuse for this desire. But it was not the only motive;
for my presence is a stimulus to our own party, and will probably
depress the other in proportion. I look upon the cause of the rajah
as most just and righteous: and the speedy close of the war would
be rendering a service to humanity, especially if brought about by
treaty. At any rate much might be done to ameliorate the condition
of the rebels in case of their defeat; for though I cannot, perhaps
ought not to, save the lives of the three leaders, yet all the others,
I believe, will be forgiven on a slight intercession. At our arrival,
too, I had stated that if they wished me to remain, no barbarities
must be committed; and especially that the women and children must
not be fired upon. To counterbalance these motives was the danger,
whatever it might amount to, and which did not weigh heavily on my
mind. So much for reasons, which, after all, are poor and weak when
we determine on doing anything, be it right or be it wrong. _If_ evil
befall, I trust the penalty may be on me rather than on my followers.

"_22d._--At daylight the fleet was astir; and in an hour the defences
were cut down, the timber, bamboos, &c., formed into rafts ready for
transportation, and the stockade, by breakfast-time, had as completely
vanished as though it had been bodily lifted away by some genius of the
Wonderful Lamp. Everything was ready for a start, and we waited lazily
for the flood-tide; but when it did make, the usual procrastination
ensued, and there was no move till it was near done. Then, indeed,
we proceeded up about two-thirds of the way, and brought up with two
good hours' daylight, in spite of my remonstrances. No place could
be better calculated than where we rested for an attack upon boats:
high banks covered with grass and trees offered a safe shelter for
musketry, against which no return could be made. The night, however,
passed away quietly.

"_24th._--Dawn found us on the advance to our proper position. A thick
fog concealed us, and in half an hour the people were on shore busy
reërecting our fort, less than a mile from two forts of the enemy,
but concealed from them by a point of the river. No opposition was
offered to us; and in a few hours a neat defence was completed from
the _débris_ of the former. The ground was cleared of jungle; piles
driven in a square, about fifteen yards to each face; and the earth
from the center, scooped out and intermixed with layers of reeds, was
heaped up about five feet high inside the piles. At the four corners
were small watch-towers, and along the parapet of earth a narrow
walk connecting them. In the center space was a house crowded by the
Chinese garrison, a few of whose harmless gingalls were stuck up at
the angles to intimidate rather than to wound. While they labored at
the body of the defence, the Dyaks surrounded it by an outer work,
made of slight sticks run into the ground with cross binding of
split bamboo, and bristling with a _chevaux de frise_ (if it may be
so styled) of sharpened bamboos about breast-high. The fastenings
of the entire work were of rattan, which is found in plenty. It was
commenced at 7 A.M. and finished about 3 P.M., showing how the fellows
can get through business when they choose. This stockade, varying
in strength according to circumstances, is the usual defence of the
Sambas Chinese. The Malays erect a simple and quicker-constructed
protection by a few double uprights, filled in between with timber
laid lengthwise and supported by the uprights. Directly they are under
cover, they begin to form the ranjows or sudas, which are formidable
to naked feet, and stick them about their position. Above our station
was a hill which entirely commanded both it and the river; to the top
of which I mounted, and obtained an excellent view of the country
around, including the enemies' forts and the town of Siniawan. A
company of military might finish the war in a few hours, as these
defences are most paltry, the strongest being the fort of Balidah,
against which our _formidable_ assault was to be leveled. It was
situated at the water's edge, on a slight eminence on the right bank
of the river; and a large house with a thatched roof and a lookout
house on the summit; a few swivels and a gun or two were in it, and
around it a breastwork of wood--judging from a distance, about six
or seven feet high. The other defences were more insignificant even
than this; and the enemies' artillery amounted, by account, to three
six-pounders and numerous swivels; from 350 to 500 men, about half
of whom were armed with muskets, while the rest carried swords and
spears. They were scattered in many forts, and had a town to defend,
all of which increased their weakness. Their principal arm, however,
consisted in the ranjows, which were stated to be stuck in every
direction. These ranjows are made of bamboo, pointed fine and stuck
in the ground; and there are beside, holes about three feet deep,
filled with these spikes, and afterward lightly covered, which are
called patobong. Another obstacle consists of a spring formed by
bending back a stiff cane with a sharp bamboo attached to it, which,
fastened by a slight twine, flies forcibly against any object passing
through the bush and brushing against it: they resemble the mole-traps
of England. The Borneons have a great dread of these various snares;
and the way they deal with them is by sending out parties of Dyaks
during the night to clear the paths from such dangers.

"Though I have stated the insignificant nature of the enemies' lines,
it must not be supposed I imagined them at all inferior to our own
resources. Our grand army consisted of 200 Chinese, excellent workmen,
but of whose qualities as soldiers I can say nothing. They were,
however, a stout, muscular set of men, though wretchedly armed, having
no guns and scarcely any muskets; but swords, spears, and shields,
together with forty long thin iron tubes with the bore of a musket
and carrying a slug. These primitive weapons were each managed by
two men, one being the carrier of the ordnance, the other the gunnery
for while one holds the tube over his shoulder, the other takes aim,
turns away his head, applies his match, and is pleased with the
sound. Their mode of loading is as curious as the piece and its mode
of discharge. Powder is poured in, the end knocked on the ground,
and the slug with another knock sent on the powder, without either
ramming or cartridge. Indeed, it is difficult to imagine any weapon
more rude, awkward, or inefficient.

"Of Malays we had 250, of whom 150 were on the Sarambo mountain,
occupied in defending the Dyak houses. Of the hundred remaining with
the grand army, about half were armed with muskets. A few brass guns
composed our artillery; and in the boats were a good many swivels. The
Dyaks amounted to about 200, of various tribes, viz., Sibnowans,
Paninjows, Bombak, Sarambo, Kampit, Tabah, Sanpro, Suntah; but these
were merely pioneers, and would not face the report of fire-arms. The
Borneons, in fighting, wear a quilted jacket or spencer, which reaches
over the hips, and from its size has a most unservicelike appearance:
the bare legs and arms sticking out from under this puffed-out coat,
like the sticks which support the garments of a scarecrow. Such was
our incongruous and most inefficient array; yet with 300 men who
would fight, nothing would have been easier than to take the detached
defences of the enemy, none of which could contain above thirty or
forty men. But our allies seemed to have little idea of fighting except
behind a wall; and my proposal to attack the adversary was immediately
treated as an extreme of rashness amounting to insanity. At a council
of war it was consequently decided that advances should be made from
the hill behind our fort to Balidah by a chain of posts, the distance
being a short mile, in which space they would probably erect four or
five forts; and then would come a bombardment, noisy but harmless.

"During the day we were not left quiet. The beating of gongs, shouts,
and an occasional shot, gave life to the scene. With my glass I
could espy our forces at the top of the hill, pleased no doubt to
see us coming to their support. At night loud shouts and firing from
the rebels caused us to prepare for an attack; but it proved to be
nothing but lights moving about the hill-side, with what intent we
were ignorant. The jungle on the left bank having been cleared, we
did not much expect any skirmishers; but some spies were heard near
our boats. With this exception the night passed away unbroken on
our part, though the rebels kept up an incessant beating of gongs,
and from time to time fired a few stray shots, whether against an
enemy or not was doubtful.

"_25th._--The grand army was lazy, and did not take the field when
they possessed themselves of two eminences, and commenced forts on
each. About 11 A.M. we got intelligence that the enemy was collecting
on the right bank, as they had been heard by our scouts shouting one
to another to gather together in order to attack the stockades in
the course of building. Even with a knowledge of their usual want of
caution, I could not believe this, but walked nevertheless to one of
the forts, and had scarcely reached it when a universal rebel shout,
and a simultaneous beating of the silver-tongued gongs, announced,
as I thought, a general action. But though the shouts continued loud
and furious from both sides, and a gun or two was discharged in the
air to refresh their courage, the enemy did not attack, and a heavy
shower damped the ardor of the approaching armies, and reduced all to
inaction. Like the heroes of old, however, the adverse parties spoke
to each other: 'We are coming, we are coming,' exclaimed the rebels;
'lay aside your muskets and fight us with swords.' 'Come on,' was the
reply; 'we are building a stockade, and want to fight you.' And so the
heroes ceased not to talk, but forgot to fight, except that the rebels
opened a fire from Balidah from swivels, all of which went over the
tops of the trees. Peace, or rather rest, being restored, our party
succeeded in entrenching themselves, and thus gained a field which had
been obstinately assaulted by big words and loud cries. The distance
of one fort from Balidah was about 800 yards, and manned with sixty
Malays; while a party of Chinese garrisoned the other. Evening fell
upon this innocent warfare. The Borneons, in this manner, contend with
vociferous shouts; and, preceding each shout, the leader of the party
offers up a prayer aloud to the Almighty, the chorus (or properly
response) being the acclamation of the soldiery. We, on our side,
kept up a firing and hallooing till midnight, to disguise the advance
of a party who were to seize and build a stockade within a shorter
distance of Balidah. When they reached the spot, however, the night
being dark, the troops sleepy, and the leaders of different opinions,
they returned without effecting anything."





CHAPTER VIII.

    Appearance of the country.--Progress of the rebel war.--Character
    of the Sow and Singè Dyaks.--Their belief in augury.--Ruinous
    effects of protracted warfare.--Cowardice and boasting of
    the Malays.--Council of war.--Refuse to attack the enemy's
    forts.--Rebels propose to treat.--The Malays oppose.--Set out
    to attack the rebels, but frustrated by our allies.--Assailed
    by the rebels.--Put them to flight.--Treat with them.--They
    surrender.--Intercede with the Rajah for their lives.--Renewed
    treachery of the Malays.


"_26th._--I must here pause in my account of this extraordinary
and novel contest, briefly to describe the general appearance of
the country.

"It is one delightful to look upon, combining all the requisites of
the picturesque, viz. wood, water, mountain, cliff, and a foreground
gently undulating, partially cultivated, and of the richest soil. The
mountain of Sarambo, about 3000 feet in height, is the principal
feature in the scene, situated at a short distance from the left bank
of the river. The remainder of the ground slopes gradually; and the
town of Siniawan, likewise on the left bank, is close to the water,
and at the foot of the eminence called Gunga Kumiel.

"The advance of the party last night was, as I have said, disguised
by firing, drumming, and shouting from the fleet and forts; and,
in the deep stillness of the fine night, the booming of the guns,
the clamor of the gongs, and the outcries raised from time to time,
came on our ears like the spirit of discord breaking loose on a fair
and peaceful paradise. About one o'clock the noises died away, and I
enjoyed as quiet a slumber till daylight as though pillowed on a bed
of down in the heart of Old England. About six I visited the three
forts. The Chinese, Malays, and Dyaks were taking their morning meal,
consisting of half a cocoanut-shell full of boiled rice with salt. The
Dyaks were served in tribes; for as many of them are at war, it is
necessary to keep them separate; and though they will not fight the
enemy, they would have no objection to fall out with one another,
and the slightest cause might give rise to an instant renewal of
hostilities.

"About 9 A.M. a party proceeded to the elevation previously marked,
within 300 yards of Balidah, and worked quietly till 2 P.M., by which
time they had made considerable progress; and being then reinforced,
they soon finished this new stockade, with a strong face toward
their adversaries, and an outer fence. This erection, however, being
below the brow of the hill, is useless as a post whence to assault
Balidah; and to-morrow another stockade is to be made close to it on
the summit, the present being intended to cover the working party at
the next. The enemy, about 4 P.M., having discovered the stockade,
opened a fire for half an hour; but finding it ineffectual, they sank
into their usual apathy. It is difficult to attribute this quietude
to any other cause than weakness; and they are doubtless harassed by
the want of Dyak light troops, as they are unable to oppose stockade
to stockade. Our party, by these successful advances, seem to gain
confidence; and it must soon come to an issue one way or other. To make
it favorable, I have sent for two six-pounder carronades, guns of vast
caliber here, together with a small addition to our force. I had the
curiosity to inquire of Macota the progress of his former campaign,
when he had 1000 Malays with only a few Dyaks. He represented the
enemy as active and daring then, and very different from their want
of spirit now. They had, he declared, combats by sea and by land;
stockade was opposed to stockade, and the fighting was constant and
severe; but he never lost a man killed during the two months, and
only boasted of killing five of the enemy! The principal danger in
Malay warfare is the 'Mengamuk' (_Anglicè_, running a-muck), which
is the last resource of a desperate man.

"_27th._--The night passed quietly as usual. About 6 A.M. I started for
the hills, and inspected each post in turn. They are about commencing
another fort. I visited the spot to reconnoiter it; and the enemy
opened a fire directly they perceived me, which we returned. They
shot wretchedly ill; and the position is good, but exposed. About 10
A.M. they again began to fire from their fort, and detached thirty
or forty men, who crept out between our forts in order to interrupt
the work. The Malays, however, received them steadily; while the
Chinese placed them between two fires, and, by a discharge from a
tube, knocked down _one_ man. The rebels showed anxiety to possess
themselves of their fallen comrade, while the opposite party shouted,
'Cut off his head;' but he was carried off; and the enemy, when they
had saved his body, fled in all directions, dropping a number of
their small bamboo powder flasks on the way. Some fierce alarms were
given of an attack by water, and I went up the river to ascertain
really whether there was any mischief to be expected; but there was
no appearance of any adversary. A slack fire from the hill proclaimed
that our work was going on there; and toward evening all was in repose.

"_28th._--The stockade was completed in the evening, with ranjows stuck
round the outer defence. It was excellently situated for battering
Balidah; but Balidah, I fear, is too loosely constructed to be battered
to the best advantage. During the day the Sow and Singè Dyaks joined,
to the amount of about 150 men, and other tribes have been gradually
dropping in; so that altogether there are not fewer than 500 of these
men joined to our equipment. Most of them show all the characteristics
of a wild people; never openly resisting their masters, but so
obstinate that they can always get their own way in every thing;
to all threats and entreaties opposing a determined and immovable
silence. Many of them depend upon us for their food and salt, and
their applications are endless. Three women of Singè are our regular
pensioners; for their sex excludes them from the rations granted to the
men. By these means we had many excellent opportunities of judging of
their habits and temper. Among all these tribes the language differs
but slightly--so slightly, indeed, that it is needless to note the
variations in detail. They have the same superstition about particular
birds, and I often heard this omen alluded to in conversation; but
their birds are not the same as those of the sea Dyaks.... The chief
of the Sarambo, explaining his reasons for leaving the rebels, urged
the constant unfavorable omen of the birds as one. Often, very often,
he said, when he went out, the bird cried, and flew in the direction
of Siniawan, which will be explained by what I have before stated;
for if they hear the bird to the right, they go to the left, and _vice
versá_; so that the bird may be considered as warning them from evil.

"The Sow Dyaks brought in the head of an unfortunate Malay whom
they had decapitated in the jungle. This species of warfare is
extremely barbarous, and in its train probably brings more evil
than the regular campaigns of civilized nations. Not that it is
by any means so fatal to human life directly; but it is the slow
poison which wastes the strongest frame, the smoldering fire which
does its work of destruction slowly but surely. Year after year it
is protracted; few fall in open fight, but stragglers and prisoners
are murdered; and while both weak parties, gradually growing weaker,
hold their own ground, the country becomes a desert. First, trade
stagnates, agriculture withers, food becomes scarce, all are ruined
in finances, all half-starved and most miserable--and yet the war
drags on, and the worst passions are aroused, effectually preventing
the slightest concession, even if concession would avail. But each
combatant knows the implacable spirit--the deep desperation--of the
other too well to trust them; and if at length the fortunes of famine
decide against them, they die rather than yield; for a Dyak can die
bravely, I believe, though he will not fight as long as life has any
prospect. This is also the case here: for the rebel chiefs know there
is no pardon, and the Bandar is disgraced if he fails. It is indeed
a slow process, but one of extermination.

"_29th._--Our guns arrived with a welcome reinforcement. In the evening
I dropped up the river to reconnoiter; but the adversary discovered
us, as we were dressed in white clothes.

"_30th._--Fort not finished. All quiet.

"_31st._--Got the guns and ammunition up, and while fixing them opened
a fire from one of our swivels to overbear the fire of the enemy. The
little piece was well served; and, in a quarter of an hour, we silenced
their fire entirely, and knocked about the timber considerably, making
a breach which several men could enter together. Seeing the effect, I
proposed to Macota to storm the place with 150 Chinese and Malays. The
way from one fort to the other was protected. The enemy dared not
show themselves for the fire of the grape and canister, and nothing
could have been easier; but my proposition caused a commotion which it
is difficult to forget, and more difficult to describe. The Chinese
consented, and Macota, the commander-in-chief, was willing; but his
inferiors were backward, and there arose a scene which showed me the
full violence of the Malay passions, and their infuriated madness when
once roused. Pangeran Houseman urged with energy the advantage of the
proposal, and in the course of a speech lashed himself to a state of
fury; he jumped to his feet, and with demoniac gestures stamped round
and round, dancing a war-dance after the most approved fashion; his
countenance grew livid, his eyes glared, his features inflamed; and,
for my part, not being able to interpret the torrent of his oratory,
I thought the man possessed of a devil, or about to 'run a-muck.' But
after a minute or two of this dance, he resumed his seat, furious and
panting, but silent. In reply, Subtu urged some objections to my plan,
which was warmly supported by Illudeen, who apparently hurt Subtu's
feelings; for the indolent, the placid Subtu leapt from his seat,
seized his spear, and rushed to the entrance of the stockade, with
his passions and his pride desperately aroused. I never saw finer
action than when, with spear in hand, pointing to the enemy's fort,
he challenged any one to rush on with him. Houseman and Surradeen
(the bravest of the brave) like madmen seized their swords to inflame
the courage of the rest--it was a scene of fiends--but in vain;
for though they appeared ready enough to quarrel and fight among
themselves, there was no move to attack the enemy. All was confusion;
the demon of discord and madness was among them, and I was glad to
see them cool down, when the dissentients to the assault proposed
making a round to-night and attacking to-morrow. In the mean time our
six-pounders were ready in battery, and it is certain the assailants
might walk nearly to the fort without any of the rebels daring to
show themselves in opposition to our fire.

"_Nov. 1st._--The guns were ready to open their fiery mouths, and
their masters ready to attend on them; but both had to wait till
mid-day, when the chiefs of the grand army, having sufficiently
slept, breakfasted, and bathed, lounged up with their straggling
followers. Shortly after daylight the forts are nearly deserted of
their garrisons, who go down at the time to the water more like a flock
of geese than warriors. The instant the main division and head-quarters
of the army arrived at the battery, I renewed my proposal for an
assault, Which was variously received. If the Malays would go, the
Chinese agreed; but the Malays had grown colder and colder. In order
to encourage them, I opened a fire to show the effect of our guns; and
having got a good range, every ball, as well as grape and canister,
rattled against and through the wood. I then urged them again and
again, but in vain; that coward Panglima rajah displayed that dogged
resolution which is invincible--an invincible resolution to do nothing;
and the cold damp looks of the others at once told the amount of their
bravery! A council of war was called--grave faces covered timid hearts
and fainting spirits. The Chinese contended with justice, that in
fairness they could not be expected to assault without the Malays did
the same; Abong Mia was not brave enough. The Datu agreed, and Panglima
delivered himself of a wise harangue, to the effect that, 'the last
campaign, when they had a fort, how had the enemy fired then?--stabbed
them, speared them, &c. &c.; and without a fort, assaulting!--how could
it be expected they should succeed? how unreasonable they should go
at all!' But even his stolid head seemed to comprehend the sarcasm
when I asked him how many men had been killed during all this severe
fighting. However, it was clear that it was no battle. We were all
very savage, and I intimated how useless my being with them was, if
they intended to play instead of fight. 'What,' I asked, 'if you will
not attack, are you going to do?' Oh, the wise councils of these wise
heads! Abong Mia proposed erecting a fort in a tree, and thence going
'puff, puff,' down into Balidah, accompanying the words 'puff, puff,'
with expressive gestures of firing; but it was objected, that trees
were scarce, and the enemy might cut down the tree, fort and all. [11]

"_2d._--Till two o'clock last night, or thereabouts, I sat on our
rampart and gazed upon the prospect around, shaded with gloom. The
doctor was with me, and we ran over every subject--the past, present,
and the future. Such a scene--a rude fort in the interior of Borneo;
such a night, dark but starlight--leaves an indelible impression
on the mind, which recurs to move it even after long years. The
morning, however, found us ready, and no one else. The fort was
left to ourselves; we waited and waited until 2 P.M., when I was
made aware that all thoughts of attack were at an end. Macota, for
very shame, staid below; and I must say there was not a countenance
that met mine but had that bashful and hang-dog look which expresses
cowardice and obstinacy predominant, yet shame battling within. They
were now resolved not to make the attempt; and I asked them casually
whether they would fly a white flag, and hold a conference with
the enemy. They caught at the alternatives; the flag was hoisted;
the rebels were ready to _meet me_, and it was agreed that we should
assemble on the morrow. But no sooner was the arrangement made than a
thousand objections were started, and any thing, even attack itself
(though that was out of the question), was held to be preferable. I
need not dwell on this mixture of deceit and fear; in short, as
they would do nothing themselves, they expected us to do nothing:
and without the courage to carry on the war, they had not either
wisdom or sorcery to bring it to a conclusion.

"_3d._--Dispatched an express during last night to the rajah, and
received an answer that he was coming up in person; but my resolve was
taken, and I quitted the grand army, much to their evident surprise
and vexation. Nevertheless, they were still friendly and polite,
and very very lazy about bringing down our guns. This was, however,
done at last, and we were ready for a start.

"_4th._--Reached the ship at two P.M., saw rajah, &c. &c.

"From the 4th to the 10th of November I may condense into the shape of
a narrative. I explained to the rajah how useless it was my remaining,
and intimated to him my intention of departing; but his deep regret
was so visible, that even all the self-command of the native could
not disguise it. He begged, he entreated me to stay, and offered me
the country of Siniawan and Sarawak, and its government and trade, if
I would only stop, and not desert him. I could at once have obtained
this grant, but I preferred interposing a delay; because to accept
such a boon when imposed by necessity, or from a feeling of gratitude
for recent assistance, would have rendered it both suspicious and
useless; and I was by no means eager to enter on the task (the full
difficulties of which I clearly foresaw) without the undoubted and
spontaneous support of the rajah.

"_Jan. 8th, 1841._--The following narrative, extracted from my journal,
includes a period from the 10th of December to the 4th of January,
and it is put into its present shape to avoid the tedium of detailing
each day's proceedings. On the 10th of December we reached the
fleet and disembarked our guns, taking up our residence in a house,
or rather shed, close to the water. The rajah's brother, Pangeran
Budrudeen, was with the army, and I found him ready and willing
to urge upon the other indolent Pangerans the proposals I made for
vigorous hostilities. We found the grand army in a state of torpor,
eating, drinking, and walking up to the forts and back again daily;
but having built these imposing structures, and their appearance not
driving the enemy away, they were at a loss what next to do, or how
to proceed. On my arrival, I once more insisted on mounting the guns
in our old forts, and assaulting Balidah under their fire. Macota's
timidity and vacillation were too apparent; but in consequence of
Budrudeen's overawing presence, he was obliged, from shame, to yield
his assent. The order for the attack was fixed as follows:--Our
party of ten (leaving six to serve the guns) were to be headed by
myself. Budrudeen, Macota, Subtu, and all the lesser chiefs, were to
lead their followers, from 60 to 80 in number, by the same route,
while 50 or more Chinese, under their captain, were to assault by
another path to the left. Macota was to make the paths as near as
possible to Balidah, with his Dyaks, who were to extract the sudas
and fill up the holes. The guns having been mounted and their range
well ascertained the previous evening, we ascended to the fort at about
eight A.M., and at ten opened our fire, and kept it up for an hour. The
effect was severe: every shot told upon their thin defences of wood,
which fell in many places so as to leave storming breaches. Part
of the roof was cut away and tumbled down, and the shower of grape
and canister rattled so as to prevent their returning our fire,
except from a stray rifle. At mid-day the forces reached the fort,
and it was then discovered that Macota had neglected to make any road
because it rained the night before! It was evident that the rebels
had gained information of our intention, as they had erected a frieze
of bamboo along their defences on the very spot which we had agreed
to mount. Macota fancied the want of a road would delay the attack;
but I well knew that delay was equivalent to failure, and so it was
at once agreed that we should advance without any path. The poor man's
cunning and resources were now nearly at an end. He could not refuse to
accompany us; but his courage could not be brought to the point, and,
pale and embarrassed, he retired. Everything was ready--Budrudeen,
the Capitan China, and myself, at the head of our men--when he once
more appeared, and raised a subtle point of etiquet which answered his
purpose. He represented to Budrudeen that the Malays were unanimously
of opinion that the rajah's brother could not expose himself in an
assault; that their dread of the rajah's indignation far exceeded the
dread of death; and in case any accident happened to him, his brother's
fury would fall on them. They stated their readiness to assault the
place; but in case Budrudeen insisted on leading in person, they must
decline accompanying him. Budrudeen was angry, I was angry too, and the
doctor most angry of all; but anger was unavailing: it was clear they
did not intend to do anything in earnest; and after much discussion,
in which Budrudeen insisted that if I went he should likewise go,
and the Malays insisted that if he went they would not go, it was
resolved we should serve the guns, while Abong Mia and the Chinese
(not under the captain) should proceed to the assault. But its fate
was sealed, and Macota had gained his object; for neither he nor
Subtu thought of exposing themselves to a single shot. Our artillery
opened and was beautifully served. The adverse troops advanced; but
our fire completely subdued them, as only three rifles answered us,
by one of which a seaman (Williams) was wounded in the hand, but not
seriously. Two-thirds of the way the storming-party proceeded without
the enemy being aware of their advance; and they might have reached
the very foot of the hill without being discovered, had not Abong
Mia, from excess of piety and rashness, begun most loudly to say his
prayers. The three rifles then began to play on them; one Chinaman was
killed, the whole halted, the prayers were more vehement than ever,
and, after squatting under cover of the jungle for some time, they
all returned. It was only what I expected; but I was greatly annoyed
at their cowardice and treachery--treachery to their own cause. One
lesson, however, I learned, and that was, that, had I assaulted with
our small party, we should assuredly have been victimized! The very
evening of the failure the rajah came up the river. I would not see
him, and only heard that the chiefs got severely reprimanded; but
the effects of reprimand are lost where cowardice is stronger than
shame. Inactivity followed; two or three useless forts were built,
and Budrudeen, much to my regret and the detriment of the cause,
was recalled.

"Among the straggling arrivals I may mention Panglima Dallam,
with a number of men, consisting of the Orang Bentulu, Meri Muka,
and Kayan, Dyaks from the interior. Our house--or, as it originally
stood, shed--deserves a brief record. It was about twenty feet long,
with a loose floor of reeds, and an attop roof. It served us for some
time; but the attempts at theft obliged us to fence it in and divide
it into apartments: one at the end served Middleton, Williamson,
and myself; adjoining it was the store-room and hospital; and the
other extreme belonged to the seamen. Our improvements kept pace with
our necessities. Theft induced us to shut in our house at the sides,
and the unevenness of the reeds suggested the advantage of laying
a floor of the bark of trees over them, which, with mats over all,
rendered our domicile far from uncomfortable. Our forts gradually
extended at the back of the enemy's town, on a ridge of swelling
ground; while they kept pace with us on the same side of the river
on the low ground. The inactivity of our troops had long become a
by-word among us. It was indeed truly vexatious, but it was in vain
to urge them on, in vain to offer assistance, in vain to propose a
joint attack, or even to seek support at their hands; promises were
to be had in plenty, but performances never!

"At length the leaders resolved on building a fort at Sekundis,
thus outflanking the enemy and gaining the command of the river. The
post was certainly an important one, and in consequence they set
about it with the happy indifference which characterizes their
proceedings. Pangeran Illudeen (the most active among them) had
the building of the fort, assisted by the Orang Kaya Tumangong of
Lundu. Macota, Subtu, &c. were at the next fort, and by chance I
was there likewise; for it seemed to be little apprehended that any
interruption would take place, as the Chinese and the greater number of
Malays had not left the boats. When the fort commenced, however, the
enemy crossed the river and divided into two bodies, the one keeping
in check the party at Pangeran Gapoor's fort, while the other made an
attack on the works. The ground was not unfavorable for their purpose;
for Pangeran Gapoor's fort was separated from Sekundis by a belt of
thick wood which reached down to the river's edge. Sekundis itself,
however, stood on clear ground, as did Gapoor's fort. I was with
Macota at the latter when the enemy approached through the jungle. The
two parties were within easy speaking distances, challenging and
threatening each other; but the thickness of the jungle prevented
our seeing or penetrating to them. When this body had advanced,
the real attack commenced on Sekundis with a fire of musketry, and
I was about proceeding to the scene, but was detained by Macota,
who assured me there were plenty of men, and that it was nothing at
all. As the musketry became thicker, I had my doubts, when a Dyak
came running through the jungle, and with gestures of impatience and
anxiety begged me to assist the party attacked. He had been sent by
my old friend the Tumangong of Lundu, to say they could not hold the
post unless supported. In spite of Macota's remonstrances, I struck
into the jungle, winded through the narrow path, and after crossing an
ugly stream, emerged on the clear ground. The sight was a pretty one:
to the right was the unfinished stockade, defended by the Tumangong;
to the left, at the edge of the forest, about twelve or fifteen of
our party, commanded by Illudeen, while the enemy were stretched along
between the points and kept up a sharp shooting from the hollow ground
on the bank of the river. They fired, and loaded, and fired, and had
gradually advanced on the stockade as the ammunition of our party
failed; and as we emerged from the jungle, they were within twenty or
five and twenty yards of the defence. A glance immediately showed me
the advantage of our position, and I charged with my Europeans across
the padi-field; and the instant we appeared on the ridge above the
river, in the hollows of which the rebels were seeking protection,
their rout was complete. They scampered off in every direction,
while the Dyaks and Malays pushed them into the river. Our victory
was decisive and bloodless: the scene was changed in an instant,
and the defeated foe lost arms, ammunition, &c. &c., whether on the
field of battle or in the river, and our exulting conquerors set no
bounds to their triumph.

"I cannot omit to mention the name of Si Tundo, the only native who
charged with us. His appearance and dress were most striking, the
latter being entirely of red, bound round the waist, arms, forehead,
&c. with gold ornaments; and in his hand bearing his formidable Bajuck
sword, he danced or rather galloped across the field close to me,
and mixing with the enemy was about to dispatch a hadji or priest
who was prostrate before him, when one of our people interposed and
saved him by stating that he was a companion of our own. The Lundu
Dyaks were very thankful for our support, our praises were loudly
sung, and the stockade was concluded. After the rout, Macota, Subtu,
and Abong Mia arrived on the field; the latter with forty followers
had ventured half way before the firing ceased, but the detachment,
under a paltry subterfuge, halted, so as not to be in time. The enemy
might have had fifty men at the attack; the defending party consisted
of about the same number; but the Dyaks had very few muskets. I had a
dozen Englishmen, Seboo, one of our boatmen, and Si Tundo. Sekundis
was a great point gained, as it hindered the enemy from ascending
the river and seeking any supplies.

"Macota, Subtu, and the whole tribe arrived as soon as their safety
from danger allowed, and none were louder in their own praise;
but nevertheless their countenances evinced some sense of shame,
which they endeavored to disguise by the use of their tongues. The
Chinese came really to afford assistance, but too late. We remained
until the stockade of Sekundis was finished, while the enemy kept up
a wasteful fire from the opposite side of the river, which did no harm.

"The next great object was to follow up the advantage by crossing the
stream; but day after day some fresh excuse brought on fresh delay,
and Macota built a new fort and made a new road within a hundred yards
of our old position. I cannot detail further our proceedings for many
days, which consisted on my part of efforts to get something done,
and on the others a close adherence to the old system of promising
everything and doing nothing. The Chinese, like the Malays, refused
to act; but on their part, it was not fear, but disinclination. By
degrees, however, the preparations for the new fort were complete, and
I had gradually gained over a party of the natives to my views; and,
indeed, among the Malays, the bravest of them had joined themselves
to us, and what was better, we had Datu Pangeran, thirteen Illanuns,
and the Capitan China allowed me to take his men whenever I wanted
them. My weight and consequence were increased, and I rarely moved
now without a long train of followers. The next step (while crossing
the river was uncertain) was to take my guns up to Gapoor's fort,
which was about 600 or 700 yards from the town, and half the distance
from a rebel fort on the river's bank.

"Panglima Rajah, the day after our guns were in battery, took it into
his head to build a fort on the river's side close to the town, in
front and between two of the enemy's forts. It was a bold undertaking
for the old man, after six weeks of uninterrupted repose. At night,
the wood being prepared, the party moved down, and worked so silently
that they were not discovered till their defence was nearly finished,
when the enemy commenced a general firing from all their forts,
returned by a similar firing from all ours, none of the parties being
quite clear what they were firing at or about, and the hottest from
either party being equally harmless. We were at the time about going
to bed in our habitation; but expecting some reverse, I set off
(to scale the hills) to the stockade where our guns were placed,
and opened a fire upon the town and the stockade near us, till the
enemy's fire gradually slackened and died away. We then returned,
and in the morning were greeted with the pleasing news that they had
burned and deserted five of their forts, and left us sole occupants
of the right bank of the river. The same day, going through the jungle
to see one of these deserted forts, we came upon a party of the enemy,
and had a brief skirmish with them before they took to flight. Nothing
can be more unpleasant to a European than this bush-fighting, where
he scarce sees a foe, while he is well aware that their eyesight is
far superior to his own. To proceed with this narrative, I may say
that four or five forts were built on the edge of the river opposite
the enemy's town, and distant not above 50 or 60 yards; here our guns
were removed, and a fresh battery formed ready for a bombardment,
and fire-balls essayed to ignite the houses.

"At this time Seriff Jaffer, from Singè, arrived with about seventy
men, Malays and Dyaks of Balow. The river Singè being situated close
to Sarebus, and incessant hostilities being waged between the two
places, he, with his followers, was both more active and more warlike
than the Borneons, but their warfare consists of closing hand to
hand with spear and sword. They scarcely understood the proper use
of fire-arms, and were of little use in attacking stockades. As a
negotiator, however, the seriff bore a distinguished part; and on his
arrival a parley ensued, much against Macota's will, and some meetings
took place between Jaffer and a brother seriff at Siniawan, named
Moksain. After ten days' delay nothing came of it, though the enemy
betrayed great desire to yield. This negotiation being at an end,
we had a day's bombardment and a fresh treaty brought about thus;
Macota being absent at Sarawak, I received a message from Seriff
Jaffer and Pangeran Subtu to say that they wished to meet me; and on
my consenting, they stated that Seriff Jaffer felt confident the war
might be brought to an end, though alone he dared not treat with the
rebels; but in case I felt inclined to join him, we could bring it
to a favorable conclusion. I replied that our habits of treating were
very unlike their own, as we allowed no delays to interpose; but that
I would unite with him for one interview, and if that interview was
favorable, we might meet the chiefs at once and settle it, or put
an end to all farther treating. Pangeran Subtu was delighted with
the proposition, urged its great advantages, and the meeting by my
desire for that very night, the place Pangeran Illudeen's fort at
Sekundis. The evening arrived, and at dark we were at the appointed
place, and a message was dispatched for Seriff Moksain. In the mean
time, however, came a man from Pangeran Subtu to beg us to hold no
intercourse; that the rebels were false, meant to deceive us, and
if any did come, we had better make them prisoners. Seriff Jaffer,
after arguing the point some time, rose to depart, remarking that with
such proceedings he would not consent to treat. I urged him to stay;
but finding him bent on going, I ordered my gig (which had some time
before been brought overland) to be put into the water, my intention
being to proceed to the enemy's campong, and there hear what they had
to say. I added that it was folly to leave undone what we had agreed
to do in the morning because Pangeran Subtu changed his mind--that I
had come to treat, and treat I would. I would not go away now without
giving the enemy a fair hearing--for the good of all parties I would
do it; and if the seriff liked to join me, as we proposed before,
and wait for Seriff Moksain, good; if not, I would go in the boat
to the campong. My Europeans, on being ordered, jumped up, ran out
and brought the boat to the water's edge, and in a few minutes oars,
rudder, and rowlocks were in her. My companions, seeing this, came
to terms, and we waited for Seriff Moksain; during which, however, I
overheard a whispering conversation from Subtu's messenger, proposing
to seize him; and my temper was ruffled to such a degree that I drew
out a pistol, and told him I would shoot him dead if he dared to seize,
or talk of seizing, any man who trusted himself from the enemy to
meet me! The scoundrel slunk off, and we were no more troubled with
him. This past, Seriff Moksain arrived, and was introduced into our
fortress alone--alone and unarmed in an enemy's stockade, manned with
two hundred men! His bearing was firm; he advanced with ease and took
his seat; and, during the interview, the only sign of uneasiness was
the quick glance of his eye from side to side. The object he aimed at
was to gain my guaranty that the lives of all the rebels should be
spared; but this I had it not in my power to grant. He returned to
his campong, and came again toward morning, when it was agreed that
Seriff Jaffer and myself should meet the Patingis and the Tumangong,
and arrange terms with them. By the time our conference was over,
the day broke, and we descended to the boats to enjoy a little rest.

"On the 20th of December we met with the chiefs on the river; and they
expressed themselves ready to yield, without conditions, to the rajah,
if I would promise that they should not be put to death. My reply was,
that I could give no such promise; that if they surrendered, it must
be for life or death, according to the rajah's pleasure; and all I
could do was to use my influence in order to save their lives. To this
they assented after a while; but then there arose the more difficult
question, how they were to be protected until the rajah's orders
arrived. They dreaded both Chinese and Malays, especially the former,
who had just cause for angry feelings, and who, it was feared, would
make an attack on them directly their surrender had taken from them
their means of defence. The Malays would not assail them in a body,
but would individually plunder them, and give occasion for disputes
and bloodshed. These apprehensions were almost sufficient to break off
the hitherto favorable negotiations, had I not proposed to them myself
to undertake their defence, and to become responsible for their safety
until the orders of their sovereign arrived. On my pledging myself to
this, they yielded up their strong fort of Balidah, the key of their
position. I immediately made it known to our own party that no boats
were to ascend or descend the river, and that any persons attacking
or pillaging the rebels were my enemies, and that I should fire upon
them without hesitation.

"Both Chinese and Malaya agreed to the propriety of the measure,
and gave me the strongest assurances of restraining their respective
followers, the former with good faith, the latter with the intention of
involving matters, if possible, to the destruction of the rebels. By
the evening we were in possession of Balidah, and certainly found
it a formidable fortress, situated on a steep mound, with dense
defences of wood, triple deep, and surrounded by two inclosures,
thickly studded on the outside with ranjows. The effect of our fire had
shaken it completely, now much to our discomfort; for the walls were
tottering, and the roof as leaky as a sieve. On the 20th of December,
then, the war closed. The very next day, contrary to stipulation,
the Malay Pangerans tried to ascend the river, and when stopped began
to expostulate. After preventing many, the attempt was made by Subtu
and Pangeran Hassim, in three large boats, boldly pulling toward
us. Three hails did not check them, and they came on in spite of a
blank cartridge and a wide ball, to turn them back. But I was resolved;
and when a dozen musket-balls whistled over and fell close around them,
they took to an ignominious flight. I subsequently upbraided them
for this breach of promise, and Macota loudly declared they had _been
greatly to blame_; but I discovered that he himself had set them on.

"I may now briefly conclude this detail. I ordered the rebels to
burn all their stockades, which they did at once, and delivered up
the greater part of their arms; and I proceeded to the rajah to
request from him their lives. Those who know the Malay character
will appreciate the difficulty of the attempt to stand between the
monarch and his victims; I only succeeded when, at the end of a long
debate--I soliciting, he denying--I rose to bid him farewell, as it
was my intention to sail directly, since, after all my exertions
in his cause, if he would not grant me the lives of the people,
I could only consider that his friendship for me was at an end. On
this he yielded. I must own that during the discussion he had much
the best of it; for he urged that they had forfeited their lives by
the law, as a necessary sacrifice to the future peace of the country;
and argued that in a similar case in my own native land no leniency
would be shown. On the contrary, my reasoning, though personal,
was, on the whole, the best for the rajah and the people. I stated
my extreme reluctance to have the blood of conquered foes shed; the
shame I should experience in being a party, however involuntarily,
to their execution; and the general advantage of a merciful line
of policy. At the same time I told him their lives were forfeited,
their crimes had been of a heinous and unpardonable nature, and it
was only from so humane a man as himself, one with so kind a heart,
that I could ask for their pardon; but I added, he well knew that
it was only my previous knowledge of his benevolent disposition,
and the great friendship I felt for him, which had induced me to
take any part in this struggle. Other stronger reasons might have
been brought forward, which I forbore to employ, as being repugnant
to his princely pride, viz. that severity in this case would arm many
against him, raise powerful enemies in Borneo Proper, as well as here,
and greatly impede the future right government of the country. However,
I gained my point, and was satisfied.

"Having fulfilled this engagement, and being moreover, together with
many of my Europeans, attacked with an ague, I left the scene with all
the dignity of complete success. Subsequently, the rebels were ordered
to deliver up all their arms, ammunition, and property; and last, the
wives and children of the principal people were demanded as hostages,
and obtained. The women and children were treated with kindness,
and preserved from injury or wrong. Siniawan thus dwindled away; the
poorer men stole off in canoes and were scattered about, most of them
coming to Sarawak. The better class pulled down the houses, abandoned
the town, and lived in boats for a month; when, alarmed by the delay
and impelled by hunger, they also fled--Patingi Gapoor, it was said,
to Sambas; and Patingi Ali and the Tumangong among the Dyaks. After
a time it was supposed they would return and receive their wives and
children. The army gradually dispersed to seek food, and the Chinese
were left in possession of the once-renowned Siniawan, the ruin of
which they completed by burning all that remained, and erecting a
village for themselves in the immediate neighborhood. Seriff Jaffer
and many others departed to their respective homes, and the pinching
of famine succeeded to the horrors of war. Fruit being in season,
helped to support the wretched people, and the near approach of the
rice-harvest kept up their spirits."





CHAPTER IX.

    Retrospect of Mr. Brooke's proceeding and prospects.--Visit of
    a pirate fleet.--Intercourse with the chief leaders, and other
    characteristic incidents.--War dances.--Use of opium.--Story of
    Si Tundo.--Preparations for trading.--Conditions of the cession
    of Sarawak.


I have gone into the details of this curious rebellion, and selected
from my friend's memoranda more, perhaps, than the actual and
present importance of the circumstances might seem to require; but I
have done so under the impression that in developing the traits and
lineaments of the native character, I am laying the foundation for a
more accurate estimate of them and their bearing upon futurity. The
difference between the Malay and the Chinese, between the sea and the
land Dyak, and even between one tribe and another, presents a variety
of elements out of which a consistent whole has to be compounded, and
a new state of things to be established in Borneo. It is, therefore,
of considerable interest to view these elements in their earliest
contact with European mind and civilization, and thence endeavor to
shape out the course which is best calculated to insure the welfare of
all in the closer ties and more extended connection which is springing
out of this new intercourse. To enlarge the beneficial effects
of trade and commerce, it is not enough to ascertain the products
of a strange country, nor even the chief wants of its population;
but to inform ourselves of their habits, feelings, and disposition,
and so devise the wisest measures for supplying what is immediate,
removing obstacles, and increasing demand by a continually growing
improvement in government and general condition.

Following the war, and receiving the investiture of the government of
Sarawak, Mr. Brooke was enabled, from the insight he had obtained into
the diversified relations and habits, motives and ways of thinking of
these people, to address himself clearly and at once to reform the
evils which oppressed, and the abuses which destroyed them. Had he
not mixed with them and shared in this protracted contest, he must
have begun rather as an experimentalist with a theory which might be
right or might be wrong. But he had acquired the necessary experience,
and could proceed to put his finger where it was required to repress
or to foster, without danger of mistake. It was extraordinary what
his energy produced within a small compass of time. Security succeeded
the utmost uncertainty, equal justice superseded tyrannical caprice,
order arose out of confusion, and peace was gradually spread over
the fruitful soil so lately polluted by the murderous warfare of
heads-taking and imperishable feud. It is to be hoped that such an
example will not be lost in the further prosecution of international
and commercial policy in this interesting and important quarter of
the eastern world. Piracy must be put down, slavery must be effaced,
industry must be cherished and protected; and these objects, we shall
see, from the model afforded by our truly illustrious countryman,
may be accomplished; and we may further learn from his example, that
from the experience even of "a little war," an enlightened observer
may deduce the most sound data on which to commence a mighty change,
leading, probably, to the happiness of millions, and the foundation
of colonial empire.

With these few retrospective remarks, I resume the sequel of my
friend's Bornean Journal.

"Our subsequent adventures," he notes, "may be easily related. We
lay for some days, after winding up our affairs, in order to have
an agreement drawn out between the rajah and myself, and during this
time heard the bruit of a pirate fleet being on the coast. In a day
or two after, certain news arrived of their having taken two Sadung
boats, bound from Singapore, and Datu Pangeran was, in consequence,
dispatched to communicate with them. He returned from Tanjong Datu,
bringing the fleet with him to the mouth of the river, whence they
requested permission to visit Sarawak, and pay their respects to the
rajah. I was consulted on the subject whether I would meet them; and
as I preferred a pacific to a hostile rencounter, and had, moreover,
a considerable curiosity to see these roving gentry, I consented
without hesitation. Reports--a greater curse in Malay countries than
elsewhere--stated their object to be the capture of the Royalist, as
they had, it was averred, received positive accounts of her having
fifty lacks of dollars on board, and that her figure-head was of
solid gold. As, however, we had no such treasure, and the meeting
was unavoidable, and might be hostile, I put myself into a complete
posture of defense, with a determination neither to show backwardness
nor suspicion. The day arrived, and the pirates swept up the river;
eighteen prahus, one following the other, decorated with flags
and streamers, and firing both cannon and musketry; the sight was
interesting and curious, and heightened by the conviction that these
friends of the moment might be enemies the next. Having taken their
stations, the chief men proceeded to an interview with the rajah,
which I attended to witness. Some distrust and much ceremony marked
the meeting; and both parties had numerous followers, who filled
the hall of audience and the avenues leading to it; and as few of
the Illanuns spoke Malay, the communication was rendered difficult
and troublesome. The pirates consisted of Illanuns and Malukus from
Gillolo. The Illanuns are fine athletic men, with a strong resemblance
in appearance to the Bugis; their bearing was haughty and reserved,
and they seemed quite ready to be friends or foes, as best suited their
purpose. The Malukus are from a bay in Gillolo, and their country is
now in possession of the Dutch; they are a darker and an uglier race,
but their manners more supple and pliant. They were the principal
talkers, while the Illanuns maintained a dignified silence.

"These Malukus, from their own account, since the capture of their
rajah, and the subjugation of their country, have led a wandering,
piratical life; they represent their force at about twenty-five boats,
of which three are now joined by the Illanuns, as a matter of mere
convenience. Beyond the usual formalities, this meeting had nothing
to distinguish it; one party retired to their boats, while the other
went to their respective houses, and every thing betokened quiet. In
the evening I pulled through the fleet, and inspected several of
the largest prahus. The entire force consisted of eighteen boats,
viz., three Malukus and fifteen Illanuns; the smallest of these boats
carried thirty men, the largest (they are mostly large) upward of a
hundred; so that, at a moderate computation, the number of fighting
men might be reckoned at from five to six hundred. The Illanum
expedition had been absent from Magindano upward of three years,
during which time they had cruised among the Moluccas and islands
to the eastward, had haunted Boni Bay and Celebes, and beat up the
Straits of Makassar. Many of their boats, however, being worn out,
they had fitted out Bugis prize prahus, and were now on their return
home. They had recently attacked one of the Tambelan islands, and had
been repulsed; and report said they intended a descent upon Sirhassan,
one of the Southern Natunas group. These large prahus are too heavy
to pull well, though they carry thirty, forty, and even fifty oars:
their armament is one or two six-pounders in the bow, one four-pounder
stern-chaser, and a number of swivels, besides musketry, spears, and
swords. The boat is divided into three sections, and fortified with
strong planks, one behind the bow, one amidships, and one astern,
to protect the steersman. The women and children are crammed down
below, where the unhappy prisoners are likewise stowed away during an
action. Their principal plan is boarding a vessel, if possible, and
carrying her by numbers; and certainly if a merchantman fired ill, she
would inevitably be taken; but with grape and canister fairly directed,
the slaughter would be so great that they would be glad to sheer off
before they neared a vessel. This is, of course, supposing a calm,
for in a breeze they would never have the hardihood to venture far
from land with a ship in sight, and would be sorry to be caught at a
distance. Their internal constitution is as follows: one chief, a man
usually of rank, commands the whole fleet; each boat has her captain,
and generally from five to ten of his relations, free men: the rest,
amounting to above four fifths, are slaves, more or less forced to
pursue this course of life. They have, however, the right of plunder,
which is indiscriminate with certain exceptions; viz., slaves, guns,
money, or any other heavy articles, together with the very finest
description of silks and cloths, belonging to the chiefs and free
men; and the rest obey the rule of 'First come, first served.' No
doubt the slaves become attached to this predatory course of life;
but it must always be remembered that they are slaves and have no
option; and it appears to me that, in the operation of our laws,
some distinction ought to be drawn on this account, to suit the
circumstances of the case. The Datus, or chiefs, are incorrigible;
for they are pirates by descent, robbers from pride as well as taste,
and they look upon the occupation as the most honorable hereditary
pursuit. They are indifferent to blood, fond of plunder, but fondest
of slaves: they despise trade, though its profits be greater; and,
as I have said, they look upon this as their 'calling,' and the
noblest occupation of chiefs and free men. Their swords they show
with boasts, as having belonged to their ancestors who were pirates,
renowned and terrible in their day; and they always speak of their
ancestral heir-loom as decayed from its pristine vigor, but still
deem the wielding of it as the highest of earthly existences. That
it is in reality the most accursed, there can be no doubt, for its
chief support is slaves they capture on the different coasts. If
they attack an island, the women and children, and as many of the
young men as they require, are carried off. Every boat they take
furnishes its quota of slaves; and when they have a _full cargo_,
they quit that coast or country and visit another, in order to
dispose of their human spoil to the best advantage. Thus a cargo of
slaves, captured on the east coast of Borneo, is sold on the west;
and the slaves of the south find ready purchasers to the northward,
and _vice versâ_. As the woolly-haired Papuas are generally prized by
the natives, constant visits are made to New Guinea and the easternmost
islands, where they are procured, and afterward sold at high prices
among any Malay community. The great nests of piracy are Magindano,
Sooloo, and the northern part of Borneo; and the devastation and
misery they inflict on the rest of the Archipelago are well known;
yet are no measures adopted for their suppression, as every European
community, be it English, Dutch, or Spanish, seems quite satisfied to
clear the vicinity of its own ports, and never considers the damage
to the native trade which takes place at a distance. To be attacked
with success, they must be attacked on their own coasts with two or
three steamers. A little money would gain every intelligence as to
where they were preparing; and while the steamers were so worthily
engaged in suppressing piracy, they might at the same time be acquiring
information respecting countries little known, and adding to our stock
of geography and science. A few severe examples and constant harassing
would soon cure this hereditary and personal mania for a rover's life;
and while we conferred the greatest blessings on the rest of the
Archipelago, Magindano itself would be improved by the change.

"The Illanun Datus and the Gillolo chiefs visited the schooner
constantly, and were always considerate enough to bring but few
followers. We conversed much upon piracy in general, their mode of
life, their successes, and their privations. They seemed to have but
few fears of the Dutch or English men-of-war being able to take them,
and during their three years' cruise had never been chased by any
of them.

"After being three or four days in company with these worthies,
_i. e._, the fleet of Illanuns and Malukus, the Royalist dropped down
the river to Santobong, while Williamson and myself stayed yet a few
days with Muda Hassim in his house. We had a week's incessant torrent
of rain. Nothing could exceed the kindness of the rajah during our
stay, with his brothers, of all ages, as our constant companions. We
had one day a dance of the Illanuns and Gillolos: they might both
be called war-dances, but are very different. The performer with the
Illanuns is decked out with a _fine helmet_ (probably _borrowed_ from
our early voyagers), ornamented with bird-of-paradise feathers. Two
gold belts, crossed, like our soldiers', over the breast, are bound
at the waist with a fantastical garment reaching half way down the
thigh, and composed of various-colored silk and woolen threads one
above another. The sword, or 'kempilan,' is decorated at the handle
with a yard or two of red cloth, and the long upright shield is
covered with small rings, which clash as the performer goes through
his evolutions. The dance itself consists of a variety of violent
warlike gestures, stamping, striking, advancing, retreating, turning,
falling, yelling, with here and there bold stops, and excellent as to
_àplomb_, which might have elicited the applause of the opera-house;
but, generally speaking, the performance was outrageously fierce,
and so far natural as approaching to an actual combat; and in half
an hour the dancer, a fine young man, was so exhausted that he fell,
fainting, into the arms of his comrades. Several others succeeded,
but not equal to the first; and we had hardly a fair opportunity of
judging of the Maluku dance from its short continuance; but it is of
a more gentle nature, advancing with the spear stealthily, easting it,
then retreating with the sword and shield. The Maluku shield, it should
be observed, is remarkably narrow, and is brandished somewhat in the
same way as the single stick-player uses his stick, or the Irishman
his shillelah, that is to say, it is held nearly in the center, and
whirled every way round. I procured some of the instruments, and found
that the sword of the Malukus of Gillolo is similar to that of the
Moskokas of Boni Bay, in Celebes. All these pirates are addicted to
the _excessive_ use of opium; but the effects of it are by no means so
deleterious or so strongly marked as has been represented; and it must
likewise be remembered that they are in other respects dissolute and
debauched. Among the Chinese it would be difficult--nay, impossible--to
detect the smokers of the drug. Here and there you may see an emaciated
man; but, out of a body of five hundred, some are usually emaciated
and unhealthy. I do not mean to deny the bad effects of opium; but the
stories of its pernicious results are greatly exaggerated where the
habit exists in moderation. The Chinese themselves, when I spoke to
them of the bad consequences, always argued that, taken moderately,
it was a stimulus to industry and activity; but they allowed, at the
same time, that excess was highly injurious.

"The time at length came for my departure, but I was pressed to stay
one day after another, for our society was a relief to the usual
monotonous tenor of their lives. The papers were signed which made me
Resident of Sarawak. I started to Santobong, and reached the vessel
on the 13th of February; and after waiting two days, in the vain hope
of a lull or change of wind, we beat out of the channel."

Mr. Brooke did not remain long at Singapore. His principal object was
to procure a vessel to trade between that place and Sarawak. Trading,
however, was not his forte; but he already felt the deepest interest
in the welfare of those people. By accident--or, more properly,
by Providence--he appears to have been sent to put a stop to an
unnatural war, and to save the lives of the unfortunate rebels;
and the benefit he had conferred on so many of his fellow-creatures,
the good he had already done, and the infinity of good which he saw
he still might do, made him anxious to return.

After some difficulty, he succeeded in purchasing a schooner of 90
tons, called the Swift, which I recollected in the Malacca Straits as
the Zephyr, then a cruiser in the East India Company's service. Having
put a suitable cargo into her, he sailed with his squadron (Royalist
and Swift) for Sarawak early in April, 1841.

The rajah, already described as an indolent, weak-minded man, had
promised Mr. Brooke the government of the country; but, among other
obstacles with which he would have to contend in accepting it, I do not
think my friend calculated on jealousy, low cunning, and treachery,
or the dangerous enemy he had made in Pangeran Macota. He had been
an eye-witness to his cowardice, and had more than once detected
and exposed his cunning and trickery; sins not to be forgiven,
especially by a Malay. Notwithstanding this, firmness, courage, and
straightforward honesty gained the victory, as the sequel will show.

Among the characters with whom Mr. Brooke got acquainted during the
rebel war was a young chief named Si Tundo, who was constantly by his
side whenever there was danger. He was an Illanun, and had been sent
from Sadung, with some thirteen of his countrymen, by Seriff Sahib, to
offer his services to Macota, commander-in-chief of the rajah's forces;
and I resume Mr. Brooke's memoranda, with the following interesting
account of this poor fellow's fate: "On my arrival at Sarawak, we
were received with the usual honors; and the first thing I heard
of was the decease of my poor companion, Si Tundo of Magindano, who
had been put to death by the rajah's orders. The course of justice,
or, rather, injustice, or perhaps, more justly, a mixture of both,
is so characteristic of the people, that I am tempted to give the
particulars. Si Tundo fell in love with a woman belonging to an adopted
son of Macota, and the passion being mutual, the lady eloped from her
master and went to her lover's house. This being discovered in a short
time, he was ordered to surrender her to Macota, which he reluctantly
did, on an understanding that he was to be allowed to marry her on
giving a proper dowry. Either not being able to procure the money,
or the terms not being kept, Si Tundo and a relation (who had left
the pirate fleet and resided with him) mounted to Macota's hill,
and threatened to take the woman and to burn the house. The village,
however, being roused, they were unable to effect their purpose,
and retired to their own residence. Here they remained for some days
in a state of incessant watchfulness; and when they moved, they each
carried their kempilan, and wore the krisses ready to the hand. The
Rajah Muda Hassim, being well aware of the state of things, sent, at
this crisis, to order Si Tundo and his friend to his presence; which
order they obeyed forthwith, and entered the balei, or audience-hall,
which was full of their enemies. According to Muda Hassim's account,
he was anxious to save Si Tundo's life, and offered him another wife;
but, his affections being fixed on the girl of his own choice, he
rejected the offer, only praying he might have the woman he loved. On
entering the presence of the rajah, surrounded by foes, and dreading
treachery (which most probably was intended), these unfortunate men
added to their previous fault by one which, however slight in European
estimation, is here of an aggravated nature--they entered the presence
with their kempilans in their hands, and their sarongs clear of the
kris-handle; and instead of seating themselves cross-legged, they
only squatted on their hams, ready for self-defense. From that hour
their doom was resolved on: the crime of disrespect was deemed worthy
of death, though their previous crime of abduction and violence might
have obtained pardon. It was no easy matter, however, among an abject
and timid population, to find executioners of the sentence against two
brave and warlike men, well armed and watchful, and who, it was well
known, would sell their lives dearly; and the subsequent proceeding
is, as already observed, curiously characteristic of the people,
and the deep disguise they can assume to attain their purposes. It
was intimated to Si Tundo that, if he could raise a certain sum of
money, the woman should be made over to him; and to render this the
more probable, the affair was taken out of Macota's hands, and placed
at the decision of the Orang Kaya de Gadong, who _was friendly_ to
the offenders, but who received his private orders how to act. Four
men were appointed to watch their opportunity, in order to seize the
culprits. It is not to be imagined, however, that a native would trust
or believe the friendly assurances held out to him; nor was it so in
the case of Si Tundo and his companion; they attended at the Orang Kaya
de Gadong's house frequently for weeks, with the same precautions,
and it was found impossible to overpower them; but the deceit of
their enemies was equal to the occasion, and delay brought no change
of purpose. They were to die, and opportunity alone was wanting to
carry the sentence into effect. Time passed over, suspicion was lulled;
and as suspicion was lulled the professions to serve them became more
frequent. Poor Si Tundo brought _all_ his little property to make good
the price required for the woman, and his friend added his share;
but it was still far short of the required amount. Hopes, however,
were still held out; the Orang Kaya advanced a small sum to assist,
and other _pretended_ friends, slowly and reluctantly, at his request,
lent a little money. The negotiation was nearly complete; forty or
fifty reals only were wanting, and the opposite party were ready to
deliver the lady whenever the sum was made good. A final conference
was appointed for the conclusion of the bargain at the Orang Kaya's,
at which numbers were present; and the devoted victims, lulled into
fatal security, had ceased to bring their formidable kempilans. At
the last interview, the forty reals being still deficient, the Orang
Kaya proposed receiving their gold-mounted krisses in pledge for
the amount. The krisses were given up, and the bargain was complete,
when the four executioners threw themselves on the unarmed men, and,
assisted by others, overpowered and secured them. Si Tundo, wounded
in the scuffle, and bound, surrounded by enemies flourishing their
krisses, remarked, 'You have taken me by treachery; openly you could
not have seized me.' He spoke no more. They triumphed over and insulted
him, as though some great feat had been achieved, and every kris
was plunged into his body, which was afterward cast, without burial,
into the river. Si Tundo's relation was spared on pleading for mercy;
and after his whole property, even to his clothes, was confiscated,
he was allowed to retire to Sadung. Thus perished poor Si Tundo,
a Magindano pirate, with many, if not all, the vices of the native
character, but with boldness, courage, and constancy, which retrieved
his faults, and raised him in the estimation of brave men. In person
he was tall, elegantly made, with small and handsome features, and
quiet and graceful manners; but toward the Malays, even of rank, there
was in his bearing a suppressed contempt, which they often felt, but
could not well resent. Alas! my gallant comrade, I mourn your death,
and could have better spared a better man; for as long as you lived,
I had one faithful follower of tried courage among the natives. Peace
be with you in the world to come, and may the great God pardon your
sins and judge you mercifully!

"The case of poor Si Tundo proves that the feeling of love is not
quite dead among Asiatics, though its power is obscured by their
education and habits of polygamy; and that friendship and relationship
may induce a man here, as elsewhere, to risk his life and sacrifice
his property without any prospect of personal advantage. An old
Magindano man, a sort of foster-father of Si Tundo's, when he saw
me for the first time, clasped my arm, and repeatedly exclaimed,
'Si Tundo is dead; they have killed him;' adding, 'had you been here,
he would not have been killed.' I was touched by the old man's sorrow,
and his expression of feeling."

Datu Jembrong was likewise an Illanum, and retired to Sadung when the
rebel war had closed, and died after a few days' illness. Mr. Brooke
writes: "Thus I have lost the two bravest men--men whom I would rather
trust for fair dealing than any score of Borneons; for the Magindanos,
though pirates by descent and education, are a far superior people to
any in the Archipelago, with the exception of the Bugis. Whatever may
be their vices, they are retrieved by courage to a certain degree;
and where we find a manly character, we may presume that the meaner
arts of _finesse_ and treachery are less prevalent. Dampier and Forrest
both give them an excellent character; and it is a pity that of late
years little is known of them, and so little pains taken to hold a
friendly intercourse either with them or the Sooloos."

The important changes which ensued on the return of Mr. Brooke
to Sarawak, in the spring of 1841, now demand attention; and, as
heretofore, I proceed to describe them from the data intrusted to
my charge.

"In a former part of my journal," says Mr. Brooke, "I have mentioned
briefly the occasions which led to my invitation, and the reasons
which induced me to accept the offer of the Rajah Muda Hassim;
but I will repeat these, in order to bring the narrative at once
more distinctly before the memory. When I returned here for the
second time, in August of last year, it was with the determination
of remaining for a few days only on my way to the northward; and
nothing but my feeling for the miserable situation of Muda Hassim
induced me to alter my intention. The rebellion, which he had come
from Borneo to quell, had defied every effort for nearly four years;
and the attacks he had made on the rebels had failed entirely and
almost disgracefully. His immediate followers were few in number,
and aid from the neighboring countries was either denied, or withheld
on trivial excuses; while the opposition of Pangeran Usop in Borneo
paralyzed the efforts of his supporters in the capital, and, in case
of non-success, threatened his own power. The pride, the petty pride
of the Malay prince bent before these circumstances, and induced him
to state his difficulties to me, and to request my assistance. His
failure was strongly dwelt on, and his resolution to die here rather
than abandon his undertaking--to die disgraced and deserted! Under
these circumstances, could I, he urged upon me, forsake him? could I,
'a gentleman from England,' who had been his friend, and knew the
goodness of his heart, could I leave him surrounded and begirt with
enemies? It was possibly foolish, it was perhaps imprudent, but it
accorded with my best feelings; and I resolved not to abandon him
without at any rate seeing the probabilities of success; and it must
always be remembered that, in doing so, I had no ulterior object, no
prospect of any personal advantage. I joined his miserable army, which,
in numbers, barely exceeded that of the rebels, strongly stockaded. I
joined them at the outset of their campaign; and in a few days (ten
days) witnessed such scenes of cowardice, treachery, intrigue, and
lukewarmness among his followers, such a determination not to take
advice or to pursue any active measures, that I left them and returned
to my vessel. The Chinese I do not include in this representation;
they were true and willing, but wretchedly armed, and very justly
refused to be thrust forward into posts of danger, which the Malays
in their own country would not share. On my return to the vessel, I
frankly stated how useless my presence was among men who would not do
any thing I desired, yet would do nothing for themselves; and, under
the circumstances, I intimated my intention of sailing. Here, again,
I was pressed with the same entreaties; every topic was exhausted
to excite my compassion, every aid was at my disposal; and lastly,
if I would stay, and we were successful, the country was offered to
me. The only inquiry was, whether the rajah had the right and authority
to make over the country to me, and this I was assured he had. The
government, the revenue (with slight deductions for the sultan), and
one of his brothers to reside here in order to insure the obedience
of the Malays, were all comprehended in this cession, freely and
without condition. I might, at this point of the negotiation, have
insured _the title_ to the government as far as a written agreement
could give it; but for two sufficient reasons I declined all treaty
upon the subject until the war was over. The first of these reasons
was, that it would have been highly ungenerous to take advantage of
a man's distress to tie him down to any agreement which, in other
circumstances, he might not be willing to adopt; and by acting thus
ungenerously, it would be tempting the rajah to deceive me when the
treaty came to be ratified. The second reason was equally cogent; for
a mere barren bond, which I had no means to enforce, was worse than
useless, and no man would be nearer possession by merely holding a
written promise. I may add, likewise, that I saw so many difficulties
in the way of the undertaking, that I was by no means over-anxious to
close with it; and, previously to accepting and entering on so bold
a project, I was desirous thoroughly to be assured of the good faith
of the promiser. To the Rajah Muda Hassim's proposal I, therefore,
replied, that I could not accept it while the war was pending, as I
considered it wrong to take any advantage of his present situation;
and that, if he conferred authority on me in the camp, I would once
more go up the river and assist him to the utmost of my power. It
is needless to repeat any details of the war, except to say that I
found every support from him, and the highest consideration, both
in personal attentions and the bestowal of influence. He conquered,
I may say without self-praise, through my means; and on the close
of hostilities our negotiation about the country was revived. In its
progress I stated to him that Malay governments were so bad, that the
high were allowed so much license, and the poor so oppressed, that any
attempt to govern without a change of these abuses was impossible;
and as a foundation of my acceptance was the proposition, that all
his exertions must be employed to establish the principle that one man
was not to take any thing from another, and that all men were to enjoy
the produce of their labor, save and except at such times as they were
engaged in working for the revenue. That the amount of the revenue was
to be fixed and certain for three years, at a stated quantity of rice
per family; in lieu of which, should a man prefer it, he might pay in
money or in labor: the relative price of rice to money or labor being
previously fixed at as low a rate as possible. That the officers, viz.,
Patingi, Bandar, and Tumangong, were to receive stated salaries out of
this revenue, in order to prevent any extortion, either by themselves
or in their name; and that they were to be answerable for the whole
revenue under my superintendence. That the Dyaks were to be treated
the same as the Malays, their property protected, their taxes fixed,
and their labor free. At the same time, I represented to him the
difficulty of doing this, and that nothing but his power could effect
it; as any foreigner, without his unlimited support and confidence,
would have no chance of finding obedience from the numerous inferior
Pangerans and their followers. This, with much more, was the theme
of my conversation; to which was replied, _imprimis_, That their
customs and religion must not be infringed. That with regard to the
violence and rapacity of the higher classes, and the uncertainty
of taxation, which led to so much oppression, they were by no means
any part of the Ondong Ondong, _i. e._, the written law of Borneo,
but gross abuses which had arisen out of lax government. That it was
the wish of his heart to see these things mended; and that nothing
should be wanting on his part to assist me in accomplishing objects
so desirable, particularly with respect to the Dyaks, who were so
grossly abused. On this, a written agreement was made out, merely to
the purport that I was to reside at Sarawak in order to 'seek for
profit;' and on my remarking that this paper expressed nothing, he
said I must not think that it was the one understood between us, but
merely for him to show to the sultan at Borneo in the first place. I
accepted this version of the story, though it looked suspicious; and
on my part, over and above our written agreement, which expressed
nothing, I consented to buy a vessel, and bring down trade to the
place, in return for which I was assured of antimony ore in plenty;
and though I knew that profit was not to be expected, I was desirous
to comply, as, without a vessel regularly trading here, it would be
impossible to develop the resources of the country. While I went to
Singapore, the rajah promised to build me a house, in which I was to
take up my residence. I sailed accordingly, and returned within three
months, having performed all my engagements; but on reaching Sarawak,
the first disappointment I experienced was, that the house was not
commenced. I urged them to begin it, and after the most provoking
delays at length got it finished. I mention this because it was the
only instance in which good faith was kept.

"_August 3d._--The two schooners, Royalist and Swift, having arrived
at Sarawak, I found myself with a heavy monthly expense, and was
naturally anxious to dispatch them as speedily as possible. I was
assured that 6000 peculs of antimony ore would be down immediately,
and that whenever the people were set to work, any quantity might
be procured without difficulty; which, indeed, I knew to be true,
as Macotah had loaded a ship, a brig, and three native vessels in
six weeks. The procrastination, therefore, was the more provoking;
but as I had determined to arm myself with patience, and did not
anticipate foul play, I was content to wait for a time. The Swift
being leaky and requiring repairs, was another inducement to me to
lie by and land her cargo, which, ever since my arrival, the rajah
petitioned to have ashore, giving every pledge for a quick and good
return. At length I consented to let him have the cargo into his own
hands, on the assurance that the antimony ore" (_i. e._, the 6000
peculs which were ready?) "should be brought down directly. Nothing
could be more correct than the way they received the cargo, taking an
account of each separate article, comparing it with the invoice, and
noting down the deficiency; and the rajah himself superintended this
interesting process from morning till dark. At this time, having agreed
with him for the whole, as the easiest and best mode of dealing under
the circumstances, I did not much trouble myself about the deposit;
and my attention was first roused by the extreme apathy of the whole
party directly the cargo was in their possession--overhauled, reckoned,
and disposed of among them."





CHAPTER X.

    Obstacles in the way of coming to a satisfactory
    conclusion with Muda Hassim.--The law of force and reprisal
    considered.--Capabilities of Sarawak.--Account of Sarebus
    and Sakarran pirates.--Excursion up the river.--Visit to
    the Singè Dyaks.--Description of Mr. Brooke's house at
    Sarawak.--Circumstances relating to the wreck off Borneo Proper.


During the succeeding pages of my friend's journal, one hardly knows
which to admire most; his firmness, his cool courage, his determined
perseverance, or his patience. On the other hand, it is difficult to
decide whether the rajah's indolence and ingratitude, or Macota's
low cunning and treachery are the more disgusting. But I continue
the narrative, and readers will judge for themselves.

"Yet," says Mr. Brooke, "I had confidence, and was loth to allow
any base suspicion to enter my mind against a man who had hitherto
behaved well to me, and had not deceived me before. From the time the
cargo had been disposed of, I found myself positively laid on the
shelf. No return arrived; no steps were taken to work the antimony
ore; no account appeared of the positive amount to be received: a
promise was tendered; and all my propositions--nay, my very desire
to speak of the state of the country--were evaded. I found myself
clipped like Samson, while delay was heaped upon delay, excuse
piled on excuse, and all covered with the utmost show of kindness
and civility. It was provoking beyond sufferance; but with several
strokes which I considered important, I bore it with saint-like
patience. I remonstrated mildly but firmly on the waste of my money,
and on the impossibility of any good to the country while the rajah
conducted himself as he had done. I urged upon him to release the
poor women whom he had kept confined for nearly five months; and I
guarantied the peaceful disposition of the people if it were done. I
might as well have whistled to the winds, or have talked reason to
stones. I was overwhelmed with professions of affection and kindness,
but nothing ensued. I had trusted--my eyes gradually opened--I feared I
was betrayed and robbed, and had at length determined to be observant
and watchful, when an event occurred which finished the delusion,
and woke me fully to the treachery, or at any rate the weakness,
at work against me. My house was finished, and I had just taken
possession of it, when I understood that an overwhelming body of Dyaks,
accompanied by Malays, were proceeding up the river, with the avowed
purpose of attacking a hostile tribe, but with the real design of
slaughtering all the weak tribes in their way. Upward of 100 boats,
with certainly not fewer than 2500 men, had been at Sarawak a week,
asking permission for this expedition; and I was informed there was
not the slightest chance of its being granted, when to my surprise
I saw the expedition start.

"On being convinced that they really were going up the country,
I instantly quitted the house and returned on board the Royalist,
sending to know whether the rajah had granted leave for their entrance
into the interior. By him the whole blame of the transaction was
thrown upon Macota and the Orang Kaya de Gadong; and he himself was
said to be so ill that he could not be seen; but it was added, as I
disliked the measure so greatly, the same parties who had sent the
Dyaks up could recall them down, which indeed I had insisted on being
done. They accordingly retrograded and left; after which I continued
sulky on board and the rajah, shamming sick, sulked in his harem. That
any man beside the rajah himself would have been bold enough to grant
the permission, I knew, from experience, was impossible. I accepted
his denial as the groundwork of a reconciliation. In the mean time,
as he continued indisposed, I intimated my intention of proceeding to
Borneo in three days, and dispatching the Swift at the same time to
proceed to Singapore; part of her cargo, 750 peculs of antimony ore,
having been at length put on board. On this being made known to the
rajah, he forgot his sickness, and came out and proffered me a meeting
to discuss affairs, which I postponed until the following day. In
the mean time I took a candid view of my position, and considered the
best means of extricating myself from my difficulties with as little
trouble and inconvenience as possible to either party.

"I had lost much valuable time, spent much money, and risked my life
and the lives of my crew, in order to render assistance to Rajah
Muda Hassim in his distress; in return for which he had voluntarily
offered me the country. The conditions of my acceptance had been
discussed and mutually understood, and I had, in fulfillment of my
part, brought vessel and cargo. Profit I did not much care about;
the development of the country was my chief, I may say my only, aim;
and on my arrival I had been delayed and cheated by false promises,
which showed too plainly that he neither meant to adhere to his former
agreement, nor to pay for what he had on false pretences obtained. It
may appear to many that no measures ought to be kept with one who had
so behaved; but for the following reasons I resolved still to wait his
pleasure. In the first place, it was barely possible that indolence,
and not treachery, might have actuated him; and in the next place, if
it was possible to arrange so as to get back the amount of the Swift's
cargo, I was in duty and justice bound to use every endeavor before
resorting to measures of force. As for the cession of the country,
and all the good which must have resulted from it, I put these
considerations altogether out of the question. I had been deceived
and betrayed, and had met with the grossest ingratitude; but I had no
claim, nor would any written agreement have given me one; and I was
therefore constrained to submit without returning evil for evil. Every
point weighed, I felt, from every motive, inclined, nay desirous, to
avoid a rupture, or taking an equivalent for my property by force. The
Swift, with the part of her cargo received on board, after three
months' detention, and no more even talked of, I therefore resolved,
as already stated, to dispatch to Singapore. My first intention on
arriving here had been to send the Royalist back to that port and
dispose of her; but a native rumor being afloat that the crew of a
shipwrecked vessel were in Borneo Proper, I deemed it incumbent on me
to visit that place and effect their release. I had used every means
in my power since my arrival to induce the Rajah Muda Hassim to send
one or two of his Pangerans and a letter from himself to the sultan
by the Royalist, in order to insure that object; but although, day by
day, I had received promises, they were never performed. Seeing now
that this duty of humanity could no longer be delayed with propriety,
I resolved to dispatch the Royalist to Borneo, and myself to remain
here, to endeavor, if I could, to obtain _my own_. Each vessel was
to return as quickly as possible from her place of destination;
and I then resolved to give two additional months to the rajah, and
to urge him in every way in my power to do what he was bound to do
as an act of common honesty. Should these means fail, after making
the strongest representations and giving amplest time, I considered
myself free to extort by force what I could not gain by fair means.

"Having determined on these steps, I met the rajah by appointment,
and repeated all my grievances, and set strongly before him the injury
done in consequence; and lastly, plainly told him that I only came and
now only stayed in his country at his request, but that the property
he had taken must be repaid, and subsequently to that, if he had any
proposition to make, I would endeavor to meet his wishes. To all this
I received _no one satisfactory answer_, and, from the shuffling on
every complaint, I formed the worst opinion of his intentions.

"My determination, however, having been previously made, the result of
this conversation had no effect upon me; and at the end of three days,
the time I had limited, no letter for the sultan being forthcoming,
on the fourth morning the two schooners proceeded to sea, one for
Borneo, the other for Singapore, while, with three companions,
I remained in my new house. [12]

"I wish now to discuss a question which has often occupied my mind,
and upon which I have been very desirous to arrive at a right
conclusion. It is certain that a British subject cannot wrongfully
attack or injure any prince or person in his own country without
rendering himself liable to be punished by the laws of England. It is
both right and just that it should be so, because in demi-civilized or
savage countries the natives are often unable to protect themselves,
and an attack upon them savors of piracy. On the other hand, if the
native prince be the party to blame; if he fraudulently possess himself
of property under false pretences, make promises which he breaks,
and enter into agreements before witnesses which he never intends
to fulfill; then, I ask, is a British subject to submit to the loss,
when the party defrauding him is able to pay and will not? I answer
decidedly, he is not bound to submit to be cheated, and, if he have
the means, he has the right to enforce repayment. It may be urged that
trust ought not to be reposed; but trust is the ordinary course of
trade, and cannot alter the question. Again, it may be said, Apply
to the government; but it is well known and acknowledged that the
government will not interfere in any case of the sort. Seek redress by
law! there is no law to meet the contingency. Bear the loss, _i. e._
be betrayed, deceived, and cheated, and submit! It cannot be; for
although the law may properly inquire into the circumstances, yet
as it will not protect me here, or give me any redress for _fraud_
or _murder_, it cannot punish, if right be on my side. Am I quite
sure that the right is on my side? It is, as far as I can judge; and
having candidly stated every fact and circumstance, I am convinced
there can be but one opinion on the subject. I am sure that if I
seize property to the amount of that taken from me, I act justly,
though perhaps not legally; yet I firmly believe legally likewise,
although law and justice do not necessarily go always hand in hand. On
the whole, there was the old sore rankling--the false promises, the
gross deceit, the base ingratitude to a man who had done everything
to relieve this equivocating rajah from disgrace, defeat, and perhaps
death. But here I close this account for the present, to be resumed
on the return of the Royalist from Borneo.

"_August 4th._--Both retrospectively and prospectively the grounds for
all these transactions were ever pressing on my mind and guiding my
actions. The capabilities of the Sarawak country were very great. It
could abundantly supply the richest produce of the vegetable kingdom;
it abounded in mineral wealth, and especially in a vast staple
commodity of antimony ore; with a considerable population of Dyaks,
whose condition was decidedly improvable; a Malay population, by no
means large, which was advantageous; and a Chinese population ready to
immigrate with even a moderate prospect of protection. Beside these
inducements, must be added its propinquity to the Pontiana river,
and the trade which by that route might flow even from the center
of this little-known island. To crown all, there were the credit to
myself in case of success, the amelioration of the native condition,
however partial, and the benefit to commerce in general. These were
the reasons that induced me to enter on this arduous task; and to
these I may add a supplementary one, viz., that when I had struggled
for a time, I might rouse the zeal of others, and find efficient
support either from government or the mercantile body.

"I have in a former part of my journal mentioned the Illanun pirates,
and my meeting with them here. On our return we heard of their being
still on the coast, and from that time to this they have been ravaging
and plundering between Tanjong Datu, Sirhassan, and Pontiana. Malays
and Chinese have been carried off in great numbers; Borneo and Sambas
prahus captured without end; and so much havoc committed, that the
whole coast, as far as the natives are concerned, may be pronounced
in a state of blockade.

"Beside the Illanuns, there are two other descriptions of pirates
infesting these seas: one, the Dyaks of Sakarran and Sarebus, two
predatory tribes already mentioned; the other called Balagnini, a wild
people represented to come from the northward of Sooloo. I have not
seen them; but their boats are said to be very long and swift, with
sometimes outriggers; and one particular in their mode of attack is
too curious to omit. In closing on their victims they use long poles,
having a hook made fast at the extremity, with which, being expert,
they hook their opponents at a distance and drag them overboard,
while others are fighting with saligis and spears.

"I have before mentioned the arrival of one hundred Dyak boats at
Sarawak, to request permission from the rajah to ascend the river
and attack a tribe toward Sambas. What a tale of misgovernment,
tyranny, and weakness, does this request tell! These Dyaks were
chiefly from Sakarran, mixed with the Sarebus, and with them three
boats of the Malo tribe, whose residence is toward the Pontiana
river. The Sakarrans are the most powerful, the most predatory,
and the most independent tribe on the N.W. coast, their dependence
on Borneo being merely nominal. The latter are likewise predatory
and numerous, but they are on good terms with all the coast tribes
and with the Malays, while the Sarebus are against all, and all are
against them. Speaking generally, they are a remarkably fine body of
people, handsome, intelligent, powerful, well-made, beautifully-limbed,
and clear-skinned. They are somewhat fairer than the Malays and the
mountain Dyaks; but in manners, customs, and language, exactly resemble
the Sibnowans, except that the last, from misfortune, have become a
peaceful tribe. The Sarebus and Sakarrans are only distinguishable
by the numerous rings they wear in their ears. On one man I counted
fourteen of brass, various sizes, in one ear only. They are rather
fond of ornament, and wear grotesque caps of various-colored cloths
(particularly red), some of them square, others peaked, and others like
a cocked hat worn athwart-ships, and terminating in sharp points on
the top of the head. These head-dresses are ornamented with tufts of
red hair or black human hair, shreds of cloth, and sometimes feathers;
but what renders them laughable to look at is, that the hair is cut
close to match the shape of the cap; so that when a man displaces it,
you find him bare of hair about the forehead and posterior part of
the skull, that over the ears cut into points, and the rest of the
skull showing a good crop of black bristles.

"The commanders of this party were yclept poetically by their own
people, as _noms de guerre_, the Sun and the Moon, _i. e._, _Bulan_,
for moon, and _Matari_ for sun. The Sun was as fine a young man as the
eye would wish to rest upon; straight, elegantly yet strongly made,
with a chest and neck, and head set on them, which might serve Apollo;
legs far better than his of Belvidere; and a countenance mild and
intelligent. I became very good friends with both Sun and Moon, and
gave them a great deal of good advice about piracy, which, of course,
was thrown away.

"Their boats are built very long, raised at the stern, and the largest
pulling as many as sixty paddles; but I should not think them fast,
and any boat with a swivel might cut them up. The least average I
could give the hundred boats is twenty-five men per boat, making,
as already observed, 2500 in all. We counted ninety, and there were
others down the reach we could not see; and they themselves stated
their force to be 140 boats and 4000 men. The manners of these Dyaks
toward us were reserved, quiet, and independent. They stole nothing,
and in trading for small quantities of rice, bees-wax, cotton, and
their cloths, showed a full knowledge of the relative value of the
articles, or rather they priced their own at far above their proper
worth. I may indeed say of all the Dyaks I have seen, that they are
anxious to receive, but very loth to give; and when they have obtained
cloth, salt, copper, beads, &c. to the amount of two or three dollars
as a present, will bring in a bunch of plantains or a little rice,
and ask you _to buy_. The Sibnowans are the chief exceptions to this,
and they are my pet tribe. The language of Sakarran and Sarebus is the
same as the Sibnowan; and with all the word God, the _Allah Talla_
of the Malays, is expressed by _Battara_, from which we may infer
that their notion of the Deity, as probably was all the religion of
these regions, was derived from the Hindoos.

"When this force of Dyaks was, contrary to the assurance given to
me, sweeping up the river, I had just finished a late dinner. I was
_angry enough_, and resolved instanter to leave the house, when who
should come in, _as if by pure accident_, but Pangeran Budrudeen,
the rajah's brother. I controlled myself, spoke strongly withal but
civilly, and sent him away wishing he had not come near me; and the
boat being ready, I retired from the house to the Royalist. Their
immediate recall was the consequence; for the rajah having denied his
permission, those who fathered the act dared not persist in it when I
told them it was an act of disobedience. They tried to frighten me with
the idea that the Dyaks would attack us; but as I felt sure we could
blow them away in ten minutes, it had not the desired effect. They
had in the mean time reached Leda Tanah, whence they were brought down
again sulky enough, and did show a slight inclination to see whether
the people on board the Swift were keeping watch; for several of their
boats dropped close to her, and one directly under the bowsprit, as
silently as death; but on being challenged, and a musket leveled near
them, they sheered off, and the next day finally departed. The poor
Dyaks in the interior, as well as the Chinese, were in the greatest
state of alarm, and thence I gained some credit among them for my
interference on their behalf. The very idea of letting 2500 wild
devils loose in the interior of the country is horrible; for though
they have one professed object, they combine many others with it,
and being enemies of all the mountain tribes, they cut them up as much
as they can. What object, it may be inquired, can the Malays have in
destroying their own country and people so wantonly? I must endeavor
to explain, to the best of my belief and knowledge. The Malays take
part in these excursions, and thirty men joined the Sakarrans on
the present occasion, and consequently they share in the plunder,
and share largely. Probably Muda Hassim would have got twenty shares
(women and children); and these twenty being reckoned at the low rate
of twenty reals each, makes four hundred reals, beside other plunder,
amounting to one or two hundred reals more. Inferior Pangerans would
of course partake likewise. Muda Hassim _must_ have given his consent,
must have been a participator in this atrocity, nobody being desperate
enough to do such a thing without his orders. In fact, they dare not
move up the river themselves without leave, much less send up the
Dyaks. It is a hateful feature in this government, newly developed
since the close of the war.

"_August 5th._--One excursion I made up the river over our old
ground, staying a week, visiting various places. Where the village
of Siniawan once stood is now a small Chinese settlement, and their
garden bespeaks the fertility of the soil. From Siniawan I walked
over to Tundong, now the principal Chinese station. The scenery was
beautiful all the way from Siniawan to Tundong--gently undulating
ground rising into respectable hills, and backed by noble mountains,
and valleys so quiet and still, and looking so fertile, that I sighed
to think man's cultivating hand was not here. We paused, and rested
at a farm of the Paninjow. Their mode of cultivation is the same as
described by Marsden--cutting, clearing, planting, and abandoning
after one or two crops. They seem likewise to prefer the upland to
the wet ground. Tundong is quite a new settlement, situated close on
the banks of the river, which is here quite narrow and shallow. The
distance may be ten miles by water, as it took our boat four hours
and a half to pull against stream. We spent the same time walking,
but diverged from the road. Wherever the Chinese are, the sound of
the axe and the saw is to be heard in the woods as you approach, and
all are industriously employed. They have their carpenters, sawyers,
blacksmiths, and housebuilders, while the mass work the antimony
ore, or are busy constructing the trench where they find and wash
the gold. With such inhabitants a country must get on well, if they
are allowed fair play. I was quite tired, and stayed all night at
Tundong. On the following morning I started for the Singè mountain,
which is the residence of the Dyak tribe of the same name. The walk,
including a rest, occupied nearly three hours, the latter part uphill,
and we reached the village a good deal knocked up from the heat of the
sun and the badness of the way. Our entertainment was not of the best;
yet the Singè were not inhospitable, but suspicious that we came to
rob them. The rice and the fowls we required, although we paid for
them at double their value, were reluctantly produced; while at the
same time they showed themselves anxious enough to obtain the salt
we had brought to exchange, without giving the equivalent.

"The village is built on the shoulder of a mountain, not half way up,
and only accessible by a ladder-like path on either side. It consists
of about 200 miserable huts, and is as dirty and filthy as any place
I ever was in, with numerous half-starved pigs and dogs running about
it. The houses are small and mean, and detached from each other,
contrary to the usage of the other Dyaks, who inhabit one large house
containing numerous partitions for families; here, however, they have
one or two public halls or council-houses, which are built and thatched
in a circular form, and in which their young men and bachelors sleep;
here likewise are deposited the heads, of which they have more than
enow, as above one hundred ghastly remnants of mortality ornamented
the abode in which we slept. I could not on this occasion find
out that they professed to take the heads of friends or strangers,
though the latter may fall victims if on enemies' ground. They seem
to have no idea of cannibalism or human sacrifice, nor did they accuse
their enemies of these practices. They have a custom, that in case of
sickness in a house, or child-bearing, the house is forbidden to the
males and strangers, which is something similar to the tabboo of the
South-Sea Islands. This plea was urged as a reason why the head man or
Orang Kaya Parembam could not receive us in his dwelling. The Dyaks
are always decorous in their behavior, rarely give way to mirth, and
never annoy by their curiosity. Toward the Malays they are extremely
sulky and mulish; but they have good reasons, as the Malays are ever
extorting from them, and threatening them with the anger of the rajah
or the incursion of the Sakarrans. The women wear black bamboo stays,
which are sewn on when they arrive at the age of puberty, and never
removed save when _enceinte_. These Singè Dyaks, like the others,
attend to the warning of birds of various sorts, some birds being
in more repute than others. On starting for a hunting excursion we
met one of them on the hill-side, who said, 'You will be fortunate:
I heard the bird behind you.' Here, if a bird is before you, it is
a sign that enemies are there too, and they turn back: if behind,
they proceed in good spirits. They have a prejudice against the flesh
of deer, which the men may not eat, but which is allowed to women and
children. The reason given for this is, that if the warriors eat the
flesh of deer, they become as faint-hearted as that animal. These may
be called their superstitions, but religion they have none; and though
they know a name for God, and entertain some faint notion of a future
state, yet it is only in the abstract, for practically the belief
seems to be a dead letter. At their marriage they kill fowls, as I
have narrated; but this is a ceremony, not a sacrifice. They have no
priests or idols, say no prayers, make no offerings to propitiate the
Deity, and it is little likely therefore that human sacrifice should
exist among them. In this respect they are different from any known
people who have arrived at the same state of civilization. The New
Zealanders, the inhabitants of the South Seas, &c. &c., for instance,
all bow to their idols, toward which the same feelings of reverence
and devotion, of awe and fear, obtain as with more civilized beings
in regard to the invisible Deity; but here are the mere words, barren
and without practice.

"The day following our arrival at Singè we descended into the plains,
amid their former rice-fields, to shoot deer. The place is called
Pasar (bazaar or market), though it could scarcely ever have been
one. The rice-cultivation was formerly very extensive, and the low
ground all about the mountain is well cleared of wood by the industry
of these Dyaks. But the country becoming unsettled and troubled, and
roving parties of strange Dyaks landing on the coast near Onetong,
cut off the people employed in the fields, and they consequently were
abandoned. We took up our quarters in a ruinous little deserted hovel,
and in the evening walked over the neighboring district, where the
cocoanut and betel-trees mark its former state of prosperity. The sago
is likewise planted in considerable quantity, and serves for food,
when rice falls short. Deer, the large deer of Borneo, abound, and in
a walk of a few miles we saw from fifteen to twenty, and from their
tracks they must be very numerous indeed. The walking was difficult,
for owing to the softness of the ground, we often sank in up to our
thighs, and generally to our knees: and a short distance in this sort
of wading in stiff mud serves to knock a man up. I was fortunate enough
to kill one of the deer, and have no doubt that with more favorable
light a man might get many. The night's repose in the hut was broken
and uncomfortable, and our people were busy for several hours curing
the flesh of the animal, which is done as follows: first it is slightly
salted, and then burnt over a quick wood-fire in slices or lumps,
and thus keeps for many days, and is very palatable. Seriff Hussein
(formerly of Siniawan) was my companion on this excursion. He had
three followers, while I had three Javanese with me, beside my Bugis
boy Situ, who walks with the best of us. The morning after killing
the deer we ascended the Singè again by a desperately steep path;
and after resting an hour or two, walked to our boats, and descended
the stream to Siniawan. The night was marked by torrents of rain,
thunder, and lightning, which left the roads so bad that I resigned
my intention of walking up to Sarambo, and in the evening dropped
down to Leda Tanah, and tried unsuccessfully for another deer. We
saw some, but could not get near them. Here likewise are plenty of
rice-fields deserted, but which a little labor would bring again
into cultivation. The day following we rejoined the schooner, and,
as usual, found everything at a stand-still on shore.

"I may here mention our house, or, as I fondly styled it, our
palace. It is an edifice fifty-four feet square, mounted upon
numerous posts of the Nibong palm, with nine windows in each
front. The roof (_atap_) is of Nipah leaves, and the floor and
partitions are all of plank: furnished with couches, tables, chairs,
books, &c. the whole is as comfortable as man would wish for in
this out-of-the-way country; and we have, beside, a bathing-house,
cook-house, and servants' apartments detached. The view from the
house to the eastward comprises a reach of the river, and to the
westward looks toward the blue mountains of Matang; the north fronts
the river, and the south the jungle; and but for the uncertainty of
our affairs, I would have had a garden ere this, and found amusement
in clearing and improving. Farewell, I fear, to these aspirations;
our abode, however, though spacious, cool, and comfortable, can only
be considered a temporary residence, for the best of all reasons--that
in the course of a year it will tumble down, from the weight of the
superstructure being placed on weak posts. The original plan was
to have had a lower story, but about this I am now indifferent. The
time here passes monotonously, but not unpleasantly. Had we but the
animation of hope, and the stimulus of improvement, time would pass
rapidly, though without a companion to converse with.

"_August 6th._--The Royalist, as I mentioned before I reverted
to the subject of the pirate fleet, started for Borneo Proper,
to inquire respecting the crew of an English vessel, reported to
have been shipwrecked. Pangeran Sulieman brought the intelligence
from Borneo, but he knew very few particulars; and having been here
four months before my arrival, the chances were that with the change
of the monsoon they had sailed for Manilla. As, however, he assured
me he had seen European men and women, and a numerous Lascar crew, I
thought it right, at all events, to ascertain the fact; and in case of
their being there still, to endeavor to obtain their release. For this
purpose I was very desirous of procuring a letter from Muda Hassim to
the sultan, conveyed by a Pangeran of rank; which, in addition to my
own application, would most likely insure the object in view. This,
however, though promised, I could not accomplish; delay coming upon
delay, and the plague of my own affairs also intervening, postponed
my intention till I could see the Swift fairly off for Singapore. The
Royalist then went out with her on the Sunday, July 25th, proceeding
to Borneo to demand the crew, if there: and the other to Singapore. On
the 2d of August I was surprised by the receipt of a letter brought
from Sadong, and bearing date the 10th of July. The gentleman who
writes it can best tell his own story.




    'Island Sirhassan, off Tan Datu,
    'July 10th, 1841.


    'A boat leaves this to-morrow for Sarawak; perhaps this may fall
    into the hands of Mr. Brooke, or some of my countrymen, which,
    should I not succeed in getting to Singapore, I trust will lose
    no time in letting the authorities know, so that steps may be
    taken for the release of the remaining thirty-six British subjects
    now at Borneo; which I fear nothing but one of H. M. ships will
    effect. The pirates are cruising in great force between Sambas
    and this, and have taken thirteen Borneo prahus, or more; they
    know that there are Europeans in the prahu, and have expressed a
    wish to take them. Our situation is not very enviable. The bearer
    of this has just escaped from them. I have been living ashore
    with Abduramon, a native of Pulo Pinang, who knows Mr. Brooke,
    and has been very kind to me. Trusting penmanship and paper will
    be excused,


    'I remain, &c. &c.
    'G. H. W. Gill.'




"On the reverse was the following attestation, which threw more light
on the circumstances:--


    'I, G. H. Willoughby Gill, late chief officer of the ship
    Sultana, of Bombay, do hereby certify that the said ship was
    totally destroyed by lightning, thirty miles N. E. of the Bombay
    shoal, coast of Palawan, on the 4th of January, 1841. Part of
    the crew, forty-one in number, succeeded in reaching Borneo on
    the 16th of January, in a state of starvation and misery not to
    be described; the remainder are reported to have landed on the
    coast of Borneo per long-boat:--Captain John Page; G. H. W. Gill,
    chief officer; Alexander Young, second officer; one gunner; five
    sea-cunnies; two carpenters; twenty-three natives and Lascars; two
    Nakodas. Passengers:--Mrs. Page (of a daughter, 31st of March);
    Mr. and Miss de Souza; Mrs. Anderson, servant; one Ayah; in all
    forty-two souls. The sultan has permitted myself, Mr. and Miss de
    Souza, with three servants, to proceed to Singapore in one of his
    prahus, where I hope to succeed in procuring the release of the
    remainder of my companions from their present very uncomfortable
    situation. I dare not say more. Mr. de Souza and myself left on
    the 24th of May, and put in here dismasted on the 20th of June;
    since then have been detained by a fleet of piratical prahus,
    which arrived on the 24th, and left 9th of July. Should nothing
    prevent, we expect to be ready by the 15th; but am very doubtful
    of ever getting to Singapore, as I fear they are on the look-out
    for us outside.'


"This is the contents of the paper, which arriving after I had
retired to rest, effectually banished sleep from my pillow. The
'uncomfortable situation,' coupled with 'I dare say no more,' gives
the worst suspicions of their treatment in Borneo; while the chance
of the party at Sirhassan falling into the hands of the pirates is
extremely shocking. I instantly, on the receipt of the letter, sent
to the rajah to request that he would dispatch a boat for Sirhassan,
with a person competent to treat with the pirates; and on the morning
of the 3d I succeeded in dispatching a boat to Songi, in the Sadong,
to get some of the Datu Pangeran's people, who are Illanuns; but up to
this time they have not returned. I can only hope these poor people
at Sirhassan will be wise enough to stay there, instead of risking a
capture by the pirates. Should the Royalist return shortly, and have
obtained the crew, we may fight our way to that place and release
the party, who, I have little doubt, are still detained there. If the
Royalist is long away, and the captain goes in search of the missing
boat's crew, we may yet have the Illanuns from Sadong here in time
to dispatch. As for myself, I am tied, and have not the means at
present of locomotion; my situation is an anxious one. The Swift
must have been liable to fall in with this great force of pirates
on her way to Singapore, and will be again liable on her return. The
doubt and uncertainty about the poor fellows in Borneo and Sirhassan,
and the wretched condition of my own affairs, all cause unpleasant
reflections to my mind; yet I yield not, but will fight it out.

"I have just brought up my history to the present time; and, like a
log on the water, must wait for events to develop themselves.

"_7th._--A report arrived this morning that the Sirhassan party sailed
for Singapore on the 3d of the moon; and as Mr. Gill says they would
be ready for sea about the 15th of last month, I consider it likely
to be true. I trust they may escape the pirates, and safely reach
their destination."





CHAPTER XI.

    Return of the Royalist from Borneo Proper with intelligence of the
    sufferers from the wreck of the Sultana.--Effect of the arrival
    of the Diana on the negotiations for their release.--Outrage
    and oppression of Macota.--Fate of the Sultana and her
    crew.--Mr. Brooke made Rajah of Sarawak.--Liberation of rebel
    prisoners.--State of Dyak tribes.--Court of justice opened.--Dyak
    burials, and respect for the dead.--Malay cunning and treachery.


While waiting events, Mr. Brooke amused himself by writing down
such accounts of the interior as he was enabled to collect, from
time to time, from the natives visiting Sarawak, as well as a brief
description of the constitution and government, as enacted in Borneo
Proper. But as my object now is to trace the progress of my friend
up to the time when he embarked on board the Dido, I shall refer to
these matters hereafter.

"_Tuesday, August 17th, 1841._--Three weeks the Royalist has now been
absent, and I begin, in spite of my determination to the contrary,
to be somewhat uneasy about her. Suspense is certainly more difficult
to bear than misfortune, for the certainty of an event arouses within
us some of our best feelings to resist it; but suspense lets loose
our imagination, and gives rise to that sickening feeling of 'hope
deferred,' so truly characterized in the Scriptures.

"_18th._--The Royalist arrived near Sarawak, having come into the
river on the 16th, and in one tide from the Morotaba entrance as far as
the Paduman [13] rocks. They reported that they had not effected the
release of the prisoners, were very rudely treated, the boat detained
at a fort near the entrance of the Borneo river, all communication
denied with the Europeans, a letter for them seized from the native
crew, and provisions and water refused. In addition to this, a letter
from the sultan, addressed to me, stated to the effect, that the crew
of the Sultana having entered into a treaty with him, the merchant
and mate (Messrs. de Souza and Gill) had gone to Singapore to fulfill
that agreement. The captain having a wife in the family way, preferred
staying in Borneo, as the vessel was a small one, and therefore the
sultan did not grant my request on this occasion; and further, having
an agreement, he did not wish to be deceived regarding it. This was
a falsehood from beginning to end, as will be clear by comparing it
with Mr. Gill's statement, though I fear the poor men have been rash
enough to enter into some arrangement to ransom themselves."

On the 19th of August the Swift arrived; but the journal was laid by
until the 24th of October, when it thus recommences:

"I may now continue my narrative of events which have happened since I
last used my pen, together with fresh details of my present intentions,
and such additional knowledge as has been acquired. After the arrival
of the Swift, I still adhered to my former resolution of waiting
patiently for a settlement. I made several strong remonstrances,
and urged for an answer to a letter I had addressed to Muda Hassim,
in which was recapitulated our entire negotiation. This letter
was acknowledged to be perfectly true and correct, and the rajah,
in the conference which followed, again pledged himself to give me
the country, saying he always intended to do so, but was involved
in difficulties of the nature of which I could not be aware. Thus
far things went well, and there appeared, indeed, a frankness in his
manner which had formerly pleased me, but had long been in abeyance.

"On the return of the Royalist from Borneo, I had assured them that
a government vessel would be sent to demand the captives; but, taking
this assurance for a mere boast, they paid little attention to it, and
were therefore excessively frightened when, a week after the Swift,
the Diana steamer entered the river. I had the pleasure of calming
their fears, and was too generous to push matters to a settlement
during the two days the steamer remained.

"Muda Hassim now expressed himself desirous of sending some Pangerans
to Borneo, and I wished him likewise to do so on account of the
reflective power of the steamer, which, in that case, would have
shone upon him. With his usual delay, however, he failed to be ready,
and these Pangerans did not quit the river for two days afterward,
when they proceeded in a native prahu. I accompanied the steamer to
the mouth of the river, and wishing them success, pulled back to the
capital of Sarawak.

"_Oct 30th._--The Swift was slowly laden with antimony ore, worked
by the Chinese; and I gradually robbed the Royalist of furniture for
my house on shore. But I had no intention of allowing either vessel
to sail until the time arrived which I had fixed on for the final
adjustment of my affairs. By degrees, however, I learned many of the
difficulties of poor Muda Hassim's situation, and much of the weakness
of his character. The dissensions in Borneo; the intrigues of Macota;
the rapacity of his own people, and their total want of fidelity;
the bribes from the Sultan of Sambas; the false representations of
numerous Borneo Pangerans who asserted the immense profit to be derived
from the country; the dilatory movements of the Chinese; some doubts
of my good faith; and, above all, the natural tenacity of power, all
conspired to involve the rajah in the utmost perplexity, and would,
but for counterbalancing circumstances, have turned the scale against
me. Muda Hassim knew Macota to be false and in league with the Sultan
of Sambas; and he felt that he had no power, and that if he broke with
me, it would be extremely difficult to support himself against the
former rebels. He was fond of me, and trusted me more than he trusted
any one else; and pecuniary considerations had no doubt some weight,
for with all Macota's promises he could not get sufficient ore to
repay one quarter of his debt to me. However, all these conflicting
considerations, instead of inducing Muda Hassim to take one course,
only served to encourage his dilatory temper, and although puzzled,
ashamed, and fearful, he could not decide.

"At this period a robbery was committed up the river by some of
Macota's followers on a Chinese hadji, a converted Mohammedan. They
beat the old man, threw him into the water, and robbed him of a
tael of gold. The beating and attempt at drowning were certain,
for the Chinese hadji was so ill for several days under my care,
that he was in considerable danger. He complained to me loudly of
Macota; and from other sources I gained a pretty accurate account of
that gentleman's proceedings. By threats, by intrigue, by falsehood,
and even by violence, he had prevented or driven all persons from
daring to visit or come near me, whether abroad or ashore. He was
taxing the poor Dyaks, harassing the Siniawans, and leagued with the
Borneo Pangerans to plunder and get all he possibly could. Every Dyak
community was watched by his followers, and a spear raised opposite
the chief's house, to intimate that no person was to trade or barter
except the Pangeran. The mode of plunder is thus perpetrated. Rice,
clothes, gongs, and other articles are sent to a tribe at a fixed
price, which the Dyaks dare not refuse, for it is at the risk of losing
their children! The prices thus demanded by Macota were as follows:
one gantong of rice for thirty birds' nests. Twenty-four gantongs here
is equal to a pecul of rice--a pecul of rice costs one dollar and a
half; whereas thirty birds' nests weigh one catty, and are valued at
two rupees, so that the twenty-fourth part of one and a half dollars
is sold for two rupees. Was it surprising that these people were poor
and wretched? My astonishment was, that they continued to labor, and,
indeed, nothing but their being a surprisingly industrious race can
account for it, and they are only enabled to live at all by secreting
a portion of their food. Yet war and bad government, or, rather, no
government, have had the effect of driving more than half the Dyak
tribes beyond the limits of Sarawak.

"The rapacity of these Malays is as unbounded as it is short-sighted;
for one would think that the slightest degree of common sense
would induce some of the chiefs to allow no one to plunder except
themselves. But this is so far from being the case, that, when their
demand has been enforced, dozens of inferior wretches extort and
plunder in turn, each according to his ability; and though the Dyak
is not wanting in obstinacy, he can seldom withstand these robberies,
for each levy is made in the name of the rajah, or some principal
Pangeran; and the threat of bringing the powerful tribe of Sakarrans
or Sarebus to deprive them of their heads and wives and families,
generally reduces them to obedience. While on this subject, I may as
well mention a fact that came later to my knowledge, when several
of the Dyak chiefs, and one of particular intelligence, Si Meta by
name, assured me that each family paid direct revenue from thirty
to fifty pasus (tubs) of padi, besides all the other produces, which
are extorted at merely nominal prices.

"To return to my relation: the Chinese hadji recovered, and I
determined to punish the aggressors, for which purpose I seized an
Illanun said to be concerned, but who was innocent. In the mean time
the steamer returned from Borneo, and once more put in here for wood
and water. She brought Captain and Mrs. Page, Mr. Young, the second
officer, and all the rest of the crew, save only a few who had landed
at the north part of Borneo, and there been seized and sold as slaves,
and brought afterward as slaves to Borneo Proper. As the history
of the shipwreck and detention is curious, I may here relate it as
nearly as I can.

"The Sultana, a fine ship of 700 tons, the day previous to her being
struck by lightning, found the French frigate Magicienne aground and
deserted on the Bombay shoal; Captain Page boarded her, and discovered
every thing as it had been left by the crew--provisions, water,
&c., in abundance. The day after, the Sultana met with a worse fate,
being struck, and the cotton in the hold, fore and aft, fired by the
electric fluid. They had scarcely time to hoist out the boat when the
flames burst forth, and they quitted her very short of provisions, and
saving only some money and jewels. Captain Page bore up for the wreck
of the French frigate, intending to refit his long-boat aboard her,
and take provisions and arms to last them to Singapore; but, on making
her, there was so great a wash of the sea on the lee part of the reef,
that it was totally impossible to reach the Magicienne. Under these
unfortunate circumstances they bore up once more, still intending to
prosecute the voyage to Singapore, and made the land to the southward
of Palawan; and, being then short of water and provisions, landed
on a small islet off Balabac, or Balambangan. Here they procured a
few shell-fish and some very bad water; but seeing some natives in
prahus on a neighboring islet, and being-unarmed and apprehensive,
they lighted large fires in the evening to mislead these people, and,
as night advanced, silently put to sea, and made the best of their way
along the coast. With a heavy sea, and often high wind, they reached as
far as Labuan, off the entrance of the Borneo river; and here, being
in the utmost want, and reduced to an allowance of half a biscuit and
a cup of water per day, they were forced to put into Borneo Proper,
not without hopes of being well used, and enabled to buy provisions
and stores sufficient to carry them to Singapore or Sambas. I have
omitted to mention that, on making the land the first time, they parted
from the cutter, in consequence of the tow-rope breaking in the night;
but as they were then within sight of Borneo, and the wind fair, there
was no doubt of its making the land somewhere. This, indeed, it did
at Malludu Bay, where the native crew were seized and sold as slaves.

"The arrival of Captain Page in his long-boat caused, as may well be
imagined, considerable sensation in the campong; and they reached
the sultan's house, thinking it the best place to seek shelter and
protection. In this, however, they were soon undeceived; for neither
the one nor the other was granted, but a message sent that they must
deliver up all their property into the sultan's hands, as otherwise
he was afraid they would be plundered by his people. Accordingly,
having possessed himself of their money, some jewels, their boat,
&c., he gave them a miserable shed to live in. Here they passed the
time, and were gradually robbed of every thing they had in the world,
even to the baby-linen which Mrs. Page had prepared for an expected
infant. Sometimes, indeed, when Captain Page refused to yield to the
sultan's demands, their provisions were stopped till they could no
longer hold out; and in this way they were compelled to sign bonds
for considerable sums, with the understanding that, till these were
procured and paid, they should be detained.

"In this sad situation Mrs. Page was confined of a daughter, on
the 31st of March; and this miserable life continued from the 4th
of January, 1841, to August of the same year. Their first ray of
hope was the Royalist coming to fetch them: the steamer followed,
and they were released.

"After a stay of two or three days, the steamer once more sailed;
though I would fain have persuaded Captain Congleton to search for
the piratical fleet, of which I had excellent information; but he
considered himself not authorized, or, in other words, he declined
the responsibility.

"As there was a chance that Mr. Gill and the De Souzas were either
at Sirhassan or Tambelan, the steamer decided to touch at the latter
place, and a native chuliah brig was directed to call at the former. I
afterward learned that the pirates were then at Sirhassan; but as
the brig knew nothing about Sirhassan, it is probable she never went
there. In the evening the Diana sailed, and I reached Sarawak about
two o'clock in the morning.

"I now return to my concerns. The Chinese hadji, whom I had
protected, continued to reside with my servants, till one evening
we were alarmed at an attempt to poison my interpreter, a native
of the name of Mia. Arsenic had certainly been put into his rice;
but as the servants endeavored to point suspicion on this hadji,
and as I learned, at the same time, that they did not agree with
the old man, I cleared him in my own mind, and rather leaned to the
opinion of Mia having placed the arsenic in the plate himself, for the
express purpose of accusing the hadji. Connecting this event with all
Macota's former intrigues, I determined to bring matters to a crisis,
and test at once the strength of the respective parties. Accordingly,
after complaining of the matter previously mentioned to the rajah,
I landed a party of men, fully armed, and loaded the ship's guns
with grape and canister; after which I once more proceeded to Muda
Hassim, and, while I protested my kindness toward him, exposed Macota's
machinations and crimes, his oppression and his deceit, and threatened
him with an attack, as neither Muda Hassim nor myself were safe while
he continued practicing these arts. Muda Hassim was frightened; but
how Macota felt I can not say, as he never moved out of his house,
and it was long afterward before he was seen. From my knowledge,
however, of his temperament, I can well conceive that he was reduced
to a pitiable state of terror. The Siniawans took my part directly;
and their chiefs came to me to say that 200 men were all ready
whenever I pleased to call for them. The Chinese and the rest of the
inhabitants took no side; and Macota did not get a single follower
besides his immediate slaves, perhaps about twenty in number. After
this demonstration affairs proceeded cheerily to a conclusion. The
rajah was active in settling; the agreement was drawn out, sealed,
and signed; guns fired, flags waved; and on the 24th of September,
1841, I became the Governor of Sarawak, with the fullest powers."

Being now regularly established in his government, Mr. Brooke, with his
usual activity and circumspection, applied himself to the discharge
of the onerous duties it imposed upon him; and his first acts were
such as equally displayed his wisdom, firmness, and humanity. His
journal runs thus:

"_Nov. 3d._--I have a country; but, oh! how beset with difficulties,
how ravaged by war, torn by dissensions, and ruined by duplicity,
weakness, and intrigue! Macota's underhand dealings, after the
conclusion of my agreement with Muda Hassim had been ratified,
soon brought letters from his Sambas friends, _i. e._, one from the
sultan, one from the Tumangong, and one from another Pangeran--an
immense effort of conspiracy and correspondence! Of these letters the
sultan's alone was curious; for the rest only dealt in professions of
devoted attachment to the person and interests of Muda Hassim. But
the sultan, for want of some better plea, made use of the following
singular specimen of reasoning, viz., that the Chinese Kunsi were
indebted to him a sum of money, which they had agreed to pay him in
antimony ore; the agreement was not to pay him in gold, or money, or
other commodity--only in antimony ore; therefore he wanted antimony
ore. To this it was properly replied, that an arrangement had been
made with me, and that the Chinese could not agree to give antimony
ore without his (Muda Hassim's) consent.

"My first object, on holding the reins of government, was to release
the unfortunate women confined for a whole year by the rajah. This,
indeed, was not only necessary to inspire confidence in my just
intentions, but was dictated by humanity. I found Muda Hassim not
averse to take the measure, _now_ that he had really resolved to
adhere to my advice, and consequently I had the sincere satisfaction,
within a few days, of liberating upward of a hundred females and young
children, and of restoring them to their husbands and fathers; this
act being somewhat alloyed by Muda Hassim detaining twelve females,
and among them _two wives_. I urged as strongly as I could, but without
success, the advisability of releasing the whole; and I was obliged,
at last, to content myself with the mass, and yield the few whom I
could only have got _by force_ or the utter abrogation of our infant
treaty. When I pressed the affair, it was answered that, except for
me, _none_ would have regained their liberty; and that the release
was an act of great kindness and unexampled confidence toward me;
that what had been done was perfectly accordant with their customs;
and that the women detained were for the rajah's brothers--so far,
indeed, from being intended as an injury to the women, it was a great
honor and advantage. I explained the circumstances to the Patingi
and Tumangong, and they acquiesced in the decision--allowing the
custom--and said they had gained so much more than they had ever
hoped for, that they could submit to the rest.

"The next step was to assemble the Siniawans, who, since the close
of the war, would run away, and whom it was found impossible to keep
here. Some had retired to Sambas; some (among them Patingi Ali) had
gone to Sariki; and others had built a village on the borders of the
Sambas territory. The whole aim and object of Macota's government
was to get these people back; and those who were already here were
constantly plying backward and forward to recall their companions;
but as soon as they succeeded in getting one family, another
absconded. Confidence alone could restore them; and I therefore
intimated to the Patingi and Tumangong that there was no occasion for
their seeking them; that I by no means desired their return; and that
any of their people who wished to leave the country were at liberty
to do so whenever they felt inclined. This had the desired effect,
in a short time, of bringing back the fugitives from Pankalon Nibong;
and they continued daily to arrive from Sambas.

"My next measure was to inquire into the state of the Dyaks, to gain
their confidence, and, as much as it was within my power, prevent
the oppressions of the Malays. It was necessary, likewise, to fix a
rate of tax to be levied yearly; and the prospect seemed fair, as the
chief people of the following tribes had come in, and agreed that such
a tax on rice, amounting to sixteen gantongs, would be required from
each man, and that for the rest they would be obliged to labor; that
they could trade at pleasure; that no man could demand any thing from
them; that their wives and children were safe; and that, in case any
trouble arose, they were to let me know, and I would myself come to
their assistance. The tribes were, Lundu, Sarambo, Bombak, Paninjow,
and Sow. The only other tribe on the right-hand river were the Singè,
a powerful and stiff-necked people, with good reason to be shy; but
when once they are treated justly, their strength will be advantageous,
and give them confidence to resist oppression.

"The story told me by the three heads of the Sow Dyaks brought tears
into my eyes, as they each in turn related their grievances. One
of them, a remarkably intelligent person, addressed me nearly in
the following terms: 'From former times we have been the subjects
of the Patek of Borneo. The Borneons are the elder brothers, we
the younger; and the custom of old was, that we should pay revenue
and find protection. But they forgot what was right, and departed
from the custom, and robbed the Dyaks, and oppressed them. We have
done no wrong: we listened to the commands of the Patingi who was
put over us by the Patek. If he did wrong, he should be punished;
but we have suffered because we obeyed the commands of the officer
legally appointed. You might, sir, a few years ago, have sought in this
river, and not have found a happier tribe than ours. Our children were
collected around us; we had rice in plenty, and fruit-trees; our hogs
and fowls were in abundance; we could afford to give what was demanded
of us, and yet live happily. Now we have nothing left. The Sadong
people and the Sakarran Dyaks attacked us: they burned our houses,
destroyed our property, cut down our fruit-trees, killed many of our
people, and led away our wives and young children into slavery. We
could build another house; we could plant fruit-trees and cultivate
rice; but where can we find wives? Can we forget our young children? We
have asked the Patek to restore them; we have asked Pangeran Macota
to restore them: they have told us they would, but have not; we can
not trust them; their words are fair, but in their hearts they do not
mean to help us. We have now no one to trust but you--will you help
us? Will you restore our wives and children? If we get our families,
you will never repent it: you will find us true.'

"What could I answer? I could not deceive them, as I knew not how to
obtain their object; I therefore told them I feared it was impossible;
but I would try, and they themselves should go and try at the same
time. Poor, unhappy people, who suffer for the crimes of others! God
knows, I will aid you to the utmost of my power.

"_Nov. 5th._--To-day the greatest, and I hope the final, struggle
of the opposing faction was developed by the arrival of a brig from
Sambas, with two of the sultan's sons on board; Macota in high spirits,
and my party looking rather desponding; and, in fact, I can not trust
them against Sambas. For good or for bad, for success or for failure,
for life or for death, I will act justly, and preserve the high hand
over Macota.

"After the steps I have mentioned, I determined to open a court for
the administration of justice, wherein I should preside, together with
such of the rajah's brothers as liked to assist me. As for a jury,
or any machinery of form or law, it was rejected, because it must
be inefficient, if not corrupt; and the only object I aimed at was,
keeping witnesses out of ear-shot of each other, hearing the evidence,
deciding as appeared best, and in future punishing. This simple plan
insured substantial redress; and it gave all the people confidence
in me, and a notion of what was right.

"The first case was a follower of the rajah's, of the name of Sunudeen;
and a greater villain could not exist either in this or any other
land. It was as follows: A man from Samarahan, named Bujong, had
undertaken to marry his daughter to a Sarawak man called Abdullah; but
Abdullah proving a dissolute character, and greatly in debt, Bujong
broke off the engagement before the proper authorities, and returned
the presents which Abdullah, according to custom, had made. Abdullah,
it appeared, was indebted a small sum to Matassim (Mohammed Orsin),
and, between Sunudeen and Matassim, they resolved to lay the debt
on Bujong's shoulders; in other words, to plunder Bujong under false
pretenses. Accordingly, Sunudeen, with his comrade, went to Samarahan;
and, in his capacity of follower of the rajah, demanded the debt due
by Abdullah to Matassim. Bujong having no money, Sunudeen proceeded
and seized his nephew, a boy, and a slave-man belonging to him,
as _his slaves_. Poor Bujong resisted, and recovered his nephew, but
yielded his slave; he appealed, however, to the Orang Kaya de Gadong's
sons, and they failing, a Nakodah stated the case secretly to me. I
investigated it, and ordered the return of the slave in my presence,
which was obeyed. This may give an idea of the state of the country,
and the power of every petty scoundrel hanging about the rajah to
rob and plunder at pleasure.

"_7th._--I have before mentioned that the Dyaks of Sibnow bury their
dead; but I always found a reluctance on their part to show me their
place of sepulture. Once, indeed, chance led me to the burial-ground
of part of that tribe settled at Simunjang; but, as they seemed
restless to get away, I only took a hasty survey. The reason, I
have lately learned, for this is, that in their graves they deposit
the golden ornaments and other property of the person deceased,
amounting frequently to a considerable value in the precious metals,
brass swivels, gongs, &c.

"The tribe now at Lundu were formerly settled on the Samarahan river
for many years; and their burial-place there contained the ashes of the
parents and grandparents of the present chief, who, with his followers,
were not long ago driven to Lundu; and their former settlement being
deserted, it has been the employment of some of the rascals here to
rob these graves of their contents, and to desecrate the repose of the
dead. The Orang Kaya of Lundu complained to me sadly, but mournfully,
on this account, and said that if he could not find redress from the
rajah, he must obtain it himself by taking the heads of those who had
disinterred the bones of his ancestors. His whole manner convinced me
that they hold the burying-places in great respect; and my advice,
to remove the wealth and bones to a place of security at Lundu,
was rejected on the ground that they could not disturb the remains
of those whom they had once deposited in the earth.

"While there is so much of right feeling and manly principle in the
actions of these Dyaks, the miserable race who pretend to be their
superiors have no single virtue or good intention. I do not, however,
mean to confound the inhabitants of Sarawak, or the other rivers,
with those of Borneo Proper. The latter are thoroughly corrupt and
profligate. The former are Malays, but have their good qualities, and
certainly are not possessed with the spirit of intrigue which seems
the life, the only moving principle of the Borneons. It may truly be
said of the latter, that they would tell a lie when the truth would
serve them better. They will employ duplicity and treachery on every
slight occasion; defeat their own purpose by their meanness, and yet
continue in the same crooked paths. They will conspire without any
object, or one too mysterious to arrive at; and, while they raise a
cloud of doubts in the mind of the poor, their own equals look on and
detect the game. Yet, after all, they gain but little individually;
because so many are practicing the same arts at the same time with
equal skill; and the country is so exhausted by their oppressions
and rapacity, that in the end there is nothing to be got by their
tricks and manoeuvers. It is a strange state of society, and it is
only wonderful how it can exist; but they have their reward in being
poor and ill-provided, though living in the midst of a marvelously
fertile and luxurious country.

"_December 31st._--The last day of the year, in which I must bring
up the arrears of my account.

"The Sambas brig left only yesterday, after exhausting every effort
of intrigue, and every artifice which Malays can invent, to compass
their ends.

"With the Sambas brig came Seriff Hussein, a relation of the Sultan
of Pontiana, and half Arab half Bugis by descent. He came with the
avowed purpose of entering into the most friendly communication with
me, and residing here, provided I gave him any encouragement. His
real motive (if he has one) not being obvious, I, in the mean time,
treated him with all kindness; and he is an intelligent and pleasing
person, and, moreover, connected with the Siniawans, who have a good
opinion of him."





CHAPTER XII.

    Reflections on the new year.--The plundered village, and other
    wrongs.--Means for their suppression.--The new government
    proceeds to act.--The constitution.--Preparations for an
    expedition against the Sea Dyaks.--Form of a treaty.--Wreck of
    the Viscount Melbourne.--Administration of justice.--Difficulties
    and dangers.--Dyak troubles.--Views and arrangements of the
    Chinese.--Judicial forms.--Wrongs and sufferings of the Lundus.


"_Jan. 1st, 1842._--The past year is in the bosom of eternity,
into which bourne we are all hurrying. Here we have no merry-making,
no reunion of families, no bright fires or merry games, to mark the
advent of 1842; but we have genial weather, and are not pinched by
cold or frost. This is a year which to me must be eventful; for at its
close I shall be able to judge whether I can maintain myself against
all the circumstances and difficulties which beset me, or whether
I must retreat, broken in fortune, to some retirement in my native
land. I look with calmness on the alternative, and God knows no selfish
motives weigh on me; and if I fail, my chief regret will be for the
natives of this unhappy country. Let the year roll on, let the months
pass; and whatever they bring--whether it be life or death, fortune
or poverty--I am prepared; and in the deep solitude of my present
existence I can safely say that I believe I could bear misfortune
better than prosperity. In this, probably, I am not singular; for
there is something in prosperity which, if it does not make us worse,
makes us more foolish and more worldly--which decks passing time with
wreaths of gay flowers, and gilds the things of this life with tinsel
hopes and wishes, to the exclusion of the pure gold of reflection for
the life to come. What are all these gewgaws, these artificial flowers,
these momentary joys, these pleasures of the sense, before the war
of time? Nothing! And yet, if exertion can benefit our race, or even
our own country--if the sum of human misery can be alleviated--if
these suffering people can be raised in the scale of civilization and
happiness--it is a cause in which I could suffer, it is a cause in
which I _have_ suffered and _do suffer_; hemmed in, beset, anxious,
perplexed, and the good intent marred by false agents--surrounded
by weakness, treachery, falsehood, and folly, is suffering enough;
and to feel myself on the threshold of success, and only withheld by
the want of adequate means, increases this suffering. Hail, however,
1842! Come good, come ill, still hail! and many as are the light
hearts which have already greeted thee, mine will be more ready to
bow to the decrees of Providence which thy twelve months will develop.

"_Jan. 3d._--I have mentioned that the Sanpro had been attacked from
Sadong; and I now learn that, at the time, the men were out of the
village, and thus the women and children alone suffered; twenty-two
have been carried away into slavery. The village was burned after
being plundered, and the unfortunate people have since been living
in the jungle, with only such food as they could get there. The head
of the tribe and about six of his followers came down the river on a
raft to ask assistance from me, and I had the story from them. They
were relieved as far as my means admitted, and returned far happier
than they came. The very same day arrived news that six men of the
Sows were cut off by a wandering party of the Sakarrans.

"This leads me naturally to consider the means by which these
atrocities may be prevented. I propose first to send letters to
Seriff Sahib of Sadong, Seriff Muller of Sakarran, and Seriff Jaffer
of Singè, stating that I wish to be on good terms with my neighbors,
but am determined to attack any place which sends Dyaks to rob in my
country; and that I call on them to restrain their subjects from making
incursions here. In case this warning is neglected, I must strike one
blow suddenly, as a farther warning, and keep a good lookout at sea to
destroy any Dyak fleet that may be prowling outside. A good-sized boat,
with a six-pounder and a swivel or two, will effect the latter object,
backed by two or four light, fast-pulling boats, with musketry, which,
when the Dyak prahus fly, may keep pace with them and thin their
pullers, till the heavier boat can come up. To carry one of their
campongs, I must have twenty-five Europeans, and from some thirty to
fifty Bugis, who, coming from Singapore, may proceed at once to Sadong,
or, rather, the campong Tangi. Seriff Sahib is a great freebooter,
and dispatches his retainers to attack the weak tribes here for the
sake of the slaves, calculating, on the rajah's presumed weakness,
that he can do so with impunity. He may find himself mistaken.

"Seriff Muller is a brother of Seriff Sahib, and lives at Sakarran,
which powerful Dyak tribe are always willing to be sent by either
brother on a forage for heads and slaves. It is certain, however,
that they could never come from the Sadong side without Seriff Sahib's
permission; and on the late attack on Sanpro they were accompanied
by a party of Malays.

"Seriff Jaffer is by no means mixed up with these brothers, and there
is no love lost between them; nor would he, I think, do anything to
annoy me. This is the foreign policy.

"The domestic policy is as disturbed as the foreign. The rajah weak,
Macota intriguing, and my ministers--viz., the Patingi (Abong Mia),
the Bandar, and Tumangong--all false and foolish, and Macota's men;
with me, however, are the Siniawans.

"_Jan. 6th._--The Sambas brig returned, having been baffled and beat
about, and nearly lost at sea, unable to weather Tanjong Datu. The
crew say she was one hour under water. She now remains here to wait
the change of the monsoon, and her intriguing Pangerans return by land.

"_8th._--Seriff Hussein returned from Sambas, having been nearly
stabbed while there. The assassins, it was understood, were here,
and I endeavored to apprehend them; but, having heard of the seriff's
arrival, they made off.

"_10th._--This day the first laws and regulations are to be promulgated
in Sarawak; and as the event is a rare one, I here inscribe a copy
for the benefit of future legislators, observing that there is an
absolute necessity for mildness and patience, and that an opposite
course would raise such a host of enemies as to crush every good seed;
for, as it is, the gentlest course of justice brings down much odium,
and arouses intense dislike among a people who have had no law but
their own vile intrigues to guide or control them.

"Two cases have lately come to notice, which will serve as examples
of their singular crimes.

"One poor man owed another sixteen reals, and the debtor was away
trading for a few days, when the creditor sold the daughter (a free
woman) for thirty reals, to a person of influence.

"The second case, a respectable man, or a respectably born man, owed
a Pangeran fifty peculs of ore, and proposed to make over to him in
payment, a slave woman and her four children. The woman _had been_
a slave of his grandfather's, but was adopted as his daughter, and
enfranchised publicly; yet by intimidation, they were near getting
her and her offspring. Here the Pangerans and Nakodas bully a man
into silence and acquiescence; and the people dare not, as yet, bring
their complaints to me. But I hear these things, call the parties
together, and often prevent the commission of a premeditated crime;
by which means I save myself from the odium of punishing.

"There is great difficulty in acting at once with temper and firmness,
so as to appear the benefactor rather than the tyrant. It is, indeed,
an arduous and troublesome task; but _I think I see_ a ray of light
to encourage me.

"Here are the regulations, which I had printed at Singapore in the
Malayan language:--

"James Brooke, esquire, governor (rajah), of the country of Sarawak,
makes known to all men the following regulations:--

"'1st. That murder, robbery, and other heinous crimes will be punished
according to the ondong-ondong (_i.e._ the written law of Borneo);
and no person committing such offences will escape, if, after fair
inquiry, he be proved guilty.

"'2d. In order to insure the good of the country, all men, whether
Malays, Chinese, or Dyaks, are permitted to trade or labor according
to their pleasure, and to enjoy their gains.

"'3d. All roads will be open, that the inhabitants at large may seek
profit both by sea or by land; and all boats coming from others are
free to enter the river and depart, without let or hinderance.

"'4th. Trade, in all its branches, will be free, with the exception
of antimony ore, which the governor holds in his own hands, but which
no person is forced to work, and which will be paid for at a proper
price when obtained. The people are encouraged to trade and labor, and
to enjoy the profits which are to be made by fair and honest dealing.

"'5th. It is ordered that no person going among the Dyaks shall
disturb them, or gain their goods under false pretences. It must be
clearly explained to the different Dyak tribes, that the revenue will
be collected by the three Datus, bearing the seal of the governor;
and (except this yearly demand from the government) they are to give
nothing to any person; nor are they obliged to sell their goods except
they please and at their own prices.

"'6th. The governor will shortly inquire into the revenue, and fix
it at a proper rate; so that every one may know certainly how much
he has to contribute yearly to support the government.

"'7th. It will be necessary, likewise, to settle the weights, measures,
and money current in the country, and to introduce doits, that the
poor may purchase food cheaply.

"'8th. The governor issues these commands, and will enforce obedience
to them; and while he gives all protection and assistance to the
persons who act rightly, he will not fail to punish those who seek
to disturb the public peace or commit crimes; and he warns all such
persons to seek their safety, and find some other country where they
may be permitted to break the laws of God and man.'

"_Jan. 11th._--I have frequently said that all law and custom have
been long banished from this country; but I may here retrace the
customs which once obtained, the best of which I wish to restore.

"The inhabitants were all considered the property of the sultan--serfs
rather than slaves--and were divided into four classes. Imprimis, the
Dyaks (the aborigines); the Bruni, or people of the soil, probably
the descendants of the first Malay emigrants; the Awang-Awang, the
meaning of which I am ignorant of; and the Hamba Rajah, or rajah's
slaves. There is every reason to believe the Dyaks are an aboriginal
people; but between the Bruni and Awang-Awang it is difficult to
decide the priority. The Hamba Rajah speaks for itself.

"These three distinctions have been long confounded by intermarriage;
and the names rather than the reality are retained. The governors
of the country are the Patingi, a Bandar, and a Tumangong, who are
appointed from Borneo. Each of the classes was formerly ruled by its
particular officer, and the Dyaks were appropriated likewise among
them; the Patingi holding the tribes on the right-hand river, the
Bandar to the left, and the Tumangong on the sea-coast. The annual
revenue paid to Borneo was 300 reals; but they were subject to extra
demands, and to the extortions of the powerful chiefs.

"The government of the Dyaks I have already detailed; and though we
might hope that in a more settled state of things they would have been
more secure from foreign pillage, yet they were annually deprived
of the proceeds of their labor, debarred from trade, and deprived
of every motive to encourage industry. The character of their rulers
for humanity alone fixed the measure of their suffering, and bad was
the best; but it seems to be a maxim among all classes of Malays,
that force alone can keep the Dyaks in proper subjection; which is
so far true, that force alone, and the hopelessness of resistance,
could induce a wild people to part with the food on which they
depend for subsistence. At a distance I have heard of and pitied
the sufferings of the negroes and the races of New Holland--yet
it was the cold feeling dictated by reason and humanity; but now,
having witnessed the miseries of a race superior to either, the
feeling glows with the fervor of personal commiseration: so true is
it that visible misery will raise us to exertion, which the picture,
however powerfully delineated, can never produce. The thousands
daily knelled out of the world, who lie in gorgeous sepulchres, or
rot unburied on the surface of the earth, excite no emotion compared
to that conjured up by the meanest dead at our feet. We read of tens
of thousands killed and wounded in battle, and the glory of their
deeds, or the sense of their defeat attracts our sympathy; but if a
single mangled warrior, ghastly with wounds and writhing with pain,
solicited our aid, we should deplore his fate with tenfold emotion,
and curse the strife which led to such a result. Among the thousands
starving for want of food we trouble not ourselves to seek one; but
if the object is presented before our eyes, how certain a compassion
is aroused! To assist is a duty; but in the performance of this duty,
to be gentle and feeling is god-like; and probably between individuals,
there is no greater distinction than in this tender sympathy toward
distress. Poor, poor Dyaks! exposed to starvation, slavery, death! you
may well raise the warmest feelings of compassion--enthusiasm awakes
at witnessing your sufferings! To save men from death has its merit;
but to alleviate suffering, to ameliorate all the ills of slavery, to
protect these tribes from pillage and yearly scarcity, is far nobler;
and if, in the endeavor to do so, one poor life is sacrificed, how
little is it in the vast amount of human existence!

"_18th._--A Chinese boat with four men was chased into the river by
four Dyak prahus, and escaped with difficulty. On the intelligence
reaching me, I, with some trouble, mustered three canoes, and we
proceeded down, about one o'clock in the morning, in search of the
enemy. After rowing in the dark for some hours, we discovered a
light gliding up the river, and gave chase, but did not succeed; and
at daybreak returned, wet and tired, without seeing anything more,
when we learnt that the chase was a Sarawak boat, which, mistaking
us for Dyaks, as we did them, pulled with all speed home, and gave
the alarm of being nearly captured.

"In the evening I ordered a fine boat to be prepared for the war
with Sarebus and Sakarran, which appears to me inevitable; as it
is impossible, laying all motives of humanity aside, to allow these
piratical tribes to continue their depredations, which are inconsistent
with safety, and a bar to all trade along the coast. Eighty prahus
of Sarebus and Sakarran are reported to be ready, and waiting for
further reinforcements before putting to sea.

"_19th._--Information of three more of my Dyaks being cut off in the
interior by the predatory tribes.

"_20th._--Opened the subject of restoring the old Patingi, Bandar, and
Tumangong, and found Muda Hassim quite willing, but wishing to wait
till he hears from Borneo; at the same time telling me that I might
employ them in their respective situations. This matter I consider,
therefore, settled; and as these men are natives, and have the command
of all the common people, and are, moreover, willing to serve under
me, I conceive it a great advance in my government. Since my return
here they have proved themselves faithful and ready; but though true
in adversity, will they continue equally so in prosperity? I hope the
best from them, especially as their circumstances will be easy; and I
will endeavor to pay them as much as I can. Pay well, and men may be
trusted. Either way, it is a great advance; for every change will not
occur immediately; and, in the mean time, I shall be strengthened by
in-comers, especially Chinese, so that the parties may be balanced, and
each look to me as the link which holds them together. The government
must be a patchwork between good and evil, abolishing only so much of
the latter as is consistent with safety. But never must I appear in the
light of a reformer, political or religious; for to the introduction
of new customs, apparently trivial, and the institution of new forms,
however beneficial, the disgust of the semi-barbarous races may be
traced. People settled like myself too often try to create a Utopia,
and end with a general confusion. The feeling of the native which binds
him to his chief is destroyed, and no other principle is substituted
in its stead; and as the human mind more easily learns ill than good,
they pick up the vices of their governors without their virtues, and
their own good qualities disappear, the bad of both races remaining
without the good of either.

"We are in active preparation to fit out a fleet to meet the
piratical Dyaks. The rajah has a fine prahu, which I have taken in
hand to repair, and I have purchased a second; and the two, with
three or four small canoes, will be able to cope with a hundred or
a hundred and fifty Dyak boats. The largest of these boats is worth
a description. Fifty-six feet in length and eight in breadth; built
with a great sheer, so as to raise the bow and stern out of the water,
and pulling thirty paddles, she is a dangerous customer when mounting
four swivels and carrying a crew of twenty men with small arms. She is
called the 'Snake,' or 'Ular.' The second boat, somewhat shorter and
less fast, is named the 'Dragon;' her complement of paddles twenty, and
her fighting-men twenty, make one hundred and forty in, two boats. The
long canoes carry fifteen men each, which will bring the force up to
one hundred and eighty-five; and one boat of the rajah's will complete
two hundred men, of whom nearly one hundred are armed with muskets.

"To show the system of these people, I may mention that one of the
principal men proposed to me to send to Sakarran and Sarebus, and
intimate that I was about to attack Siquong (a large interior tribe),
and invite them to assist. 'They will all come,' he said: 'nothing
they will like so well; and when they are up the Samarahan river, we
will sally forth, attack; and destroy them at one blow.' My answer was,
that I could not deceive; but if they did come, I would attack them.

"_Feb. 1st._--Matari, or 'the Sun,' the Sakarran chief I have already
mentioned, arrived with two boats, and paid me several visits. He
assured me he wanted to enter into an agreement, to the effect that
neither should injure the other. To this treaty I was obliged to
add the stipulation, that he was neither to pirate by sea nor by
land, and not to go, under any pretence, into the interior of the
country. His shrewdness and cunning were remarkably displayed. He
began by inquiring, if a tribe, either Sakarran or Sarebus, pirated on
my territory, what I intended to do. My answer was, 'To enter their
country and lay it waste.' But he asked me again, 'You will give me,
your friend, leave to steal a few heads occasionally?' 'No,' I replied,
'you cannot take a single head; you cannot enter the country: and
if you or your countrymen do, I will have a hundred Sakarran heads
for every one you take here.' He recurred to this request several
times: 'just to steal one or two!' as a schoolboy would ask for
apples. There is no doubt that the two tribes of Sakarran and Sarebus
are greatly addicted to head-hunting, and consider the possession as
indispensable. The more a man has, the greater his honor and rank; nor
is there anything without to check or ameliorate this barbarous habit;
for the Malays of all classes, on this coast, take the same pride in
heads as the Dyaks themselves, with the exception that they do not
place them in their houses, or attach any superstitious ideas to them.

"I asked Matari what was the solemn form of agreement among his tribes;
and he assured me the most solemn was drinking each other's blood,
in which case it was considered they were brothers; but pledging the
blood of fowls was another and less solemn form.

"On the 26th of January the Royalist's boat, with Captain Hart and
Mr. Penfold, second mate, of the Viscount Melbourne, arrived here. The
reason, it appears, of the Royalist coming was, to seek the missing
crew of the Viscount Melbourne, a large ship wrecked on the Luconia
shoal. The captain in the launch, with some Coolies; the first and
third mates, with Colonel Campbell of the 37th, M.N.I., in a cutter;
the second mate, Mr. Penfold, and the surgeon, in the second cutter;
a fourth boat with twenty-five Lascars, and the jolly-boat, making
in all five boats, left the vessel well provisioned, and steered in
company for the coast, which they made somewhere between Borneo and
Tanjong Barram. The fourth boat was missed the night they made the
land; and being all at anchor, and the weather fine, it was strongly
suspected that the twenty-five Lascars deserted with her.

"The other four boats proceeded a day or two, when the first cutter,
with Colonel Campbell on board, went in the evening in search of water;
and though the rest showed lights all night, returned no more. They
were, on the following day, attacked by a prahu, which fired into
them and severely wounded one man, and succeeded in capturing the
jolly-boat; but finding nothing in her, set her on fire--Lascars and
all. The crew, however, was rescued, and she was abandoned; and the
two remaining boats, in course of time, arrived at Singapore. The
Royalist was taken up by government to seek the missing boats, and
just touched here for an hour or two, the boat coming up while the
vessel kept the sea.

"_Feb. 9th._--Mr. Williamson returned from Sanpro, where I sent
him to watch a party of natives who had gone among the Dyaks; the
Panglima Sadome, of the tribe of Sanpro, came with him, and brought
the lamentable account of the death of eight more Dyaks, cut off by
the Sakarrans. It frets me dreadfully; however, on the whole I see
a vast improvement, and a degree of confidence in me arising among
the Dyaks, greater than I expected.

"_14th._--I have now entered on the most difficult task, and the one
most likely to cause an ultimate failure in my undertaking, but which
is indispensably necessary. I mean, the administration of justice. As
long as my laws are applied to the people of the country, there is
no trouble; but directly _equal_ justice is administered, it causes
heartburn and evasion; the rajahs and Pangerans are surrounded by
a gang of followers who heretofore have robbed, plundered, and even
murdered, without inquiry being made. It was enough that a follower
of the rajah was concerned, to hush up all wrongs; and any of the
oppressed, who were bold enough to lodge a complaint, were sure to
rue it. All the rascals and ruffians who follow the great men find
this species of protection the best and the only reward; and as the
slaves are looked upon as personal property, any punishment inflicted
upon them is likewise inflicted upon their masters. I have all along
foreseen these obstacles, and the necessity of at once combating
them--whether successfully or not signifies little; but they must be
encountered, and the result left to the Almighty.

"Equal justice is the groundwork of society; and unless it can be
administered, there can be no hope of ultimate improvement. The
country may have bad laws; but such laws as it has must be enforced,
gently and mildly as may be toward the superiors, but strictly toward
the guilty; and all crimes coming under my cognizance must meet
with their punishment. These remarks are preliminary to two cases,
in which the rajah's followers have been concerned.

"The first of these was a man stealing sago, which is stored without
the houses at the water's edge; he was convicted. The other occurred
some time since, but has only just been traced. A party at night
gutted a house, getting a booty of upward of 200 reals; the goods
have been discovered; but the three followers of the rajah have
absconded since the affair has been blown; whether to return or not
is uncertain. There can be no doubt, however, that they have been sent
away to keep clear of the consequences, by one of the rajah's brothers
named Abdul Khadir, who, when they were off, accused two accomplices,
people of the country!

"Another most shameful mode of exaction and tyranny is practiced
by these Borneo people, particularly their Nakodas. It consists in
lending small sums of money to the natives (that is, Sarawak people),
and demanding interest at the rate of fifty per cent per month; by this
means a small sum is quickly converted into one which is quite out
of the power of the poor man to pay; and he, his wife, and children,
are taken to the house of the creditor to work for him, while the debt
still accumulates, and the labor is endless. I intend to strike at
this slavery in disguise, but not just yet; the suppression of robbery,
the criminal department of justice, being more immediately important.

"_15th._--I may, in continuation of yesterday, mention another instance
in illustration of this oppressive system. Si Pata (a Siniawan), son
of the Tumangong, lost in gambling to Nakoda Ursat eighteen reals,
which in eighteen months has now arisen to a debt of 170 reals; but
all prospect of payment of such an accumulated sum being impossible
from a poor man, Nakoda Ursat consigns the debt to Pangeran Abdul
Khadir, who can demand it by fair means or by foul; and if Si Pata
cannot pay, make his father pay. Thus a gambling transaction is run
up to ten times its original amount, and a whole family involved in
distress by these iniquitous proceedings. Such things must not be;
and odious as they seem to a European, and indignant as they make
him, yet he must not proceed with the strong hand. Reflection, too,
teaches us that vice is comparative; and in forming a judgment, we
must not forget a man's education, the society in which he lives,
the absence of restraint, and the force of example from childhood;
so that what would be heinous in a Christian long under a settled
government, is light by comparison in a Malay, who is a nominal
professor of Islam, and brought up with the idea that might makes
right, and has no one external cause to deter him from crime.

"_March 12th._--On the whole getting on very well, but with many
reasons for vexation, and more for anxiety. The chief of these is,
whether Mr. Bonham will come here, as I have suggested, or rather
pressed. Another feature of inquietude is from the Chinese of Sipang,
who certainly aim at greater power than I shall allow them, and
perhaps, some day or other, it will come to a struggle.

"Petty troubles I do not reckon, though there are enow on all sides,
and for the last few days I have felt as if sinking under them;
but that is not my usual temperament. I now look impatiently for
intelligence. Blow, fair breezes, and waft Royalist here!

"_25th._--A period of wearing uncertainty since my last, having news
neither of the Royalist nor of Mr. Bonham, and kept on the _qui vive_
by a schooner or two at the entrance of the river. The plot thickens
in and around; and for the sake of keeping up a register of events in
something like order, I will here mention the leading features. Seriff
Sahib, of Sadong, pretends to be friendly, but is treacherous in his
heart, as is his brother, Seriff Muller of Sakarran. We have been
quite clear of Dyaks, and our own tribes enjoying rest and peace;
and one tribe from without, namely Serang, has come in and claimed my
protection. The only tribe at all troublesome is the Singè, the chief
of which (the Orang Kaya Parembam) is decidedly opposed to me, and
swears by Macota. I am given to believe, however, that the majority
of his people do not agree with him; and I shall dispossess him of
his dignity, and substitute a friendly chief. The Singè Dyaks are
the most powerful and numerous in my territory, and the only ones
who have not been attacked and plundered by the Sakarrans.

"At Lundu are the Sibnowan Dyaks, under the Orang Kaya Tumangong; and
the Lundu Dyaks, once a flourishing tribe, now, by ill-treatment of
all sorts, reduced to twenty persons. I may mention among my other
difficulties, that many, nay most, of the Dyak tribes are held
as _private property_: any rascally Borneon making a present to
the sultan, gets a grant of a Dyak tribe, originally to rule, now
to plunder or sell; and in this way the portion of the Sibnowans
settled at Lundu are under Bandar Sumsu; but, being a resolute
people, he cannot do them much wrong. This Bandar Sumsu has lately
been disturbing the Lundu Dyaks in the following manner: a Sibnowan
Dyak lived with the Lundu Dyaks, which gave him an opening to demand
of the Lundus the sum of fifty reals (100 rupees), which was paid;
but unluckily the Sibnowan died in the course of a few months, still
with the Lundus, and a farther sum of eighty reals, or 160 rupees,
was demanded, which not being raised, the daughter of one of the head
people was seized, and sold for that sum to a Chinaman!

"Pangeran Macota has likewise been injuring these poor people,
though I shall find it difficult to bring it home to him. His agent,
Bandar Dowud (a man involved in debt), took fifteen Dyak cloths and
sold them, or rather forced them to take them, at an exorbitant rate;
in a month or two after, he returns and demands 200 reals over and
above the large price already paid for articles worth seven or eight
reals; the poor Dyaks not being able to pay, he seizes the chief's
daughter (a married woman), and demands four other women in lieu
of the sum. Happily for the poor Dyaks, this news came to my ears,
and I sent to Lundu in haste. They had all fled, having _stolen_
their two women, one from each Bandar, and carried them away. On the
Patingi and Tumangong reaching Lundu, they found two of the tribe, one
the Pangeran, the other the father of the girl sold to the Chinaman,
after a long search in the jungle. These two men I have now with me,
and wait for the Orang Kaya Tumangong before going into the case. The
Pangeran is the same Dyak whose conversation I have detailed at large
on my first visit to the place. He is a man of intelligence; and this
tribe (if it may yet be so called) has always borne the character of
being the most hospitable and generous among the Dyaks. I may at some
future time revert to them.

"There is a rumor of war between the Sarebus and Sakarran Dyaks, in
consequence of the former tribe seizing a Balow woman on the territory
of the latter, and refusing to restore her. Let these two predatory
tribes employ and weaken one another, and it will be well for us and
all the other people of this country, and they will afterward be the
more easily brought into subjection.

"From Borneo we have news, but as uncertain as everything else
regarding the capital. A hundred vessels, it is reported, are coming
to attack them; and they, in consequence, are building _a fort_. The
Royalist had been there and departed.

"Pangeran Usop, it is said, was about to come here, when the arrival
of the Royalist induced him to postpone his design.

"There is every reason to believe that the Chinese of Sambas,
particularly those of Montrado, are extremely dissatisfied; and a
report yesterday states that a man sent by the sultan to demand gold
had been killed by them, and that the sultan's letter to the Kunsi,
after being defiled, was publicly burned. Our own Chinese of Sipang are
certainly intriguing with Sambas; and, as the rajah well expresses it,
'their clothes-box is here, but their treasure-chest is at Sambas.'

"It is impossible to say what quantity of gold the Kunsi may get;
but their pretence that they _get none_ must be false, when every
common Malay obtains from half to one bunkal per month.

"To counteract the chance of evil, I have intimated that the Simbock
Kunsi are to come here; and on the whole, they (of Sipang) have taken
it more quietly than I expected. They are not in a state for war;
but they have vague notions and intentions provided they can keep out
opposition, to make this place subservient to them, as it would indeed
be, provided they were allowed to strengthen themselves while the other
parties remained stationary. But 'divide and rule' is a good motto in
my case; and the Chinese have overlooked the difference between this
country and Sambas. There they have numerous rivers in the vicinity
of their settlements--here but one; and, the Dyak population being
against them, starvation would soon reduce them to terms. The Royalist
arrived about the end of March, and sailed again on the 9th April.

"I have before mentioned the difficulty of administering justice;
and experience teaches me that the risk to myself, on this score,
is more to be apprehended than on any other. The forms I have not
much alluded to; and the following is as nearly as possible the Malay
custom:--The rajah's brothers and myself sit at one end of the long
room in my house; at the sides are the Patingis and Tumangong, and
other respectable people; in the center the parties concerned; and,
behind them, anybody who wishes to be present. We hear both parties;
question, if necessary; and decide--and from this decision there is
no appeal. One only condition I insist upon; and that is, that in
any intricate case, or whenever I dread confederacy, I do not allow
the witnesses to hear each other. The laws of evidence, in a _free
country_, prohibit any leading questions being put to witnesses: here,
for the purposes of justice, it is indispensable; for the people, being
ruled by fear, and apprehensive of consequences, often falter before
the face of the accused, and their testimony has to be wrung from
them. To decide also according to the technicalities of construction
would be here ridiculous, and defeat the ends of justice. The people
are rude and uncivilized; their oppressors crafty and bold, who have
no hesitation about lying, and bringing others to lie for them. Oaths
are a farce to them. The aggrieved are timid, vacillating, and simple,
and cannot readily procure even necessary evidence; for their witnesses
are afraid to speak. Under these circumstances, I look at the leading
features of the case, the probability, the characters, the position of
parties, and determine according to my judgment. It is not, indeed,
a very difficult task; for the disputes are generally glaring, and,
when bolstered up, usually fail in their most important links; and
at a touch of cross-questioning, the witnesses, resolved to tell
the same story, fall into opposite ones. In one case, about a slave,
three witnesses had resolved on the sex; but, questioned separately
as to size and age, all disagreed. They were not prepared. One
represented her a woman grown and marriageable; another, as high as
my walking-stick; the third, a little child.

"I have now on hand a serious matter, of robbery to a large extent,
and three of the rajah's followers are implicated. Would it were over
and well!--but done it must be. How little can those at a distance
know my difficulties--alone, unaided, the unceasing attention by day,
the anxiety and sleeplessness by night, the mountain of doubt upon
mountain piled, and the uncertainty of necessary support or assistance!

"The Pangeran of the Lundu Dyaks lived with me three weeks, and
I was able to do him substantial justice; and hope for the future
that his life, and that of the remnant of his tribe, may be rendered
more endurable.

"His residence with me was doubly advantageous, as it enabled me to
ascertain his character, and him to see something of our habits and
manners. The impression on my part was highly favorable; for I found
him a quiet, intelligent man, and a keen observer; and I believe
the impression he received was equally favorable. The _poetry_ of
the Dyak expressions is remarkable; and, like most wild people, they
seem to delight in oratory, and to be a good deal swayed by it. For
hours I have talked with the Pangeran, listened to his history,
heard his complaints, sympathized in the misfortunes of his tribe,
and shuddered at the wrongs and sufferings they have endured. 'We are
few,' he exclaimed, 'and therefore our oppressions are aggravated;
the same demands are made upon us as though we were many, and we have
not the means of resisting or complying. We fly to the jungle; we are
like deer--we have no home, no perch. Our wives and children are taken
from us; our sufferings are very great.' On another occasion he said,
'I have felt my sufferings to be so great, that I wished to die, if
Jovata would permit it. I wished to die; for I remembered how happy
we were once, and how miserable now.' I could dwell largely on these
and suchlike language and descriptions, which appear to me highly
pathetic and touching--at least I found them so in reality; and I
cannot forbear adding one or two more such, highly characteristic.

"'Our home,' said the Pangeran, 'was a happy one; none who came to
us wanted. The fruit on the trees was saved; the fish in the river
near us was never destroyed. Rice was plenty; if it was scarce, we
kept it, and fed ourselves upon vegetables, that we might give it to
those who visited our habitation. The fish, the fruit, and the rice
were preserved, [14] that the men of the seas (Malays) might eat of
them; yet they had no pity on us. We were free men, yet they treated
us worse than slaves. We are now but few; and unless you protect us,
we shall soon cease to be.' Again: 'The Tumangong was severe to us;
and when Macota came, he said the Tumangong was a bad man, and he
would shield us; but he was much worse than the Tumangong. Now, you
say you will cherish us; we believe you; but you are at a distance,
and perhaps may not be able.' Further: 'Pangeran Macota kept me nine
months in his house, and wanted to make me a slave; but I escaped,
and traveled through the woods, and swam the rivers, till I came to my
own country. He thought the Dyak had no eyes except in the jungle;
he thought he had no ears except to listen to the bird of omen;
he thought he had no wit except to grow rice; but the Dyak saw, and
heard, and understood, that while his words were sweet, his heart
was crooked, and that, whether they were men of the sea or Dyaks,
he deceived them with fair sayings; he said one thing to one man,
and another to a second; he deceived with a honied mouth. I saw and
understood it all while I lived in his house. How could I trust him
afterward?' These expressions were concluded by significantly twisting
his two fore-fingers round each other, to show the intrigues that were
carried on. I grew very fond of this poor naked savage; for if honesty
and a kind heart entitle a man to our esteem, he is worthy of it.

"I had a long conference with Si Nimook, the Sow Dyak, and hope to
recover his wife. Amid all the wealth and all the charity of England,
how well bestowed would a small portion be for the purpose of restoring
one hundred and fifty women and children to their husbands and parents,
and releasing them from slavery! A small rill from the plenteous river
would cheer this distant misery, and bestow the blessing of fertility
on the now barren soil of these poor Dyaks. Oh, that I had the brass
to beg--to draw out a piteous tale so as to touch the heart!"






CHAPTER XIII.

    Ascent of the left-hand river to the Stabad.--Remarkable cave
    in the Tubbang.--Diamond works at Suntah.--Return.--Infested
    by Dyak pirates.--A meeting of prahus, and fight.--Seriff
    Sahib's treatment of the Suntah Dyaks.--Expedition against the
    Singè.--Their invasion of the Sigos, and taking heads.--The
    triumph over these trophies.--Arms and modes of war.--Hot and
    cold council-houses.--Ceremonies in the installation of the
    Orang Kaya Steer Rajah.--Meeting of various Dyak tribes.--Hostile
    plans of Seriff Sahib, and their issue.--Resolves to proceed to
    Borneo Proper.


The next portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal details another excursion
up the country, and then proceeds to describe the early incidents of
his infant government. As he advanced on his way, affairs began to
assume more important aspects; and yet they could hardly be painted
with greater force or interest than in his simple notes.

"_April 25th._--Ascended the left-hand river, in order to introduce the
Kunsi Simbock to their new territory; passed the night on a pebbly
bank; moon at full, bright and unclouded, tinging the luxuriant
foliage, and glancing on the clear rapid stream. Four distinct and
distant races met on this lonely and lovely spot--English, Chinese,
Malays, and Dyaks! What a scope for poetry and reflection--the time,
the clime, the spot, and the company!

"_26th._--After our morning meal and bath, entered the small river
Stabad, which, according to report, runs from a source two or
three days' journey further into the interior. At present it is so
obstructed by fallen trees, that we were forced to return, after
ascending about four miles. We left our boats near its entrance,
and walked to the small but steep mountain, Tubbang. Its length may
be about 400 feet. After mounting, by a winding path, about half-way
up toward the top, we arrived at the entrance of a cave, into which
we descended through a hole. It is fifty or sixty feet long, and the
far end is supported on a colonnade of stalactites, and opens on a
sheer precipice of 100 or 150 feet. Hence the spectator can overlook
the distant scene; the forest lies at his feet, and only a few trees
growing from the rock reach nearly to the level of the grotto. The
effect is striking and panoramic; the grotto cheerful; floored with
fine sand; the roof groined like Gothic, whence the few clear drops
which filter through form here and there the fantastic stalactites
common to such localities. The natives report the cave to be the
residence of a fairy queen; and they show her bed, pillow, and other
of her household furniture. Within the cave we found a few remnants
of human bones; probably some poor Dyak who had crawled there to die.

"Having finished our survey of the place, and wandered sufficiently
about the mount, we reëmbarked, and dropped a short way down the
river, and started again into the jungle to look for antimony ore,
but without success, our guide having forgotten the road. After a
couple of hours' wandering, the latter part in a heavy storm of rain,
we reached the boats; and I thence ascended to Suntah, where we were
all glad to house ourselves, as the deluge continued.

"_27th._--I will say nothing of my works at Suntah, except that they
run away with my money, are badly conducted by my Chinese hadji,
and, above all, that I have great reason to suspect the integrity
and steadiness of this said hadji. I must therefore make up my mind
either to change him when the business is finished, or to watch him
very narrowly; for the honesty of a diamond-worker, like the virtue of
Cæsar's wife, must be above suspicion, or he must be watched closely;
but how?

"_28th._--Descended the river, and, arriving at Sarawak, found
both work and cause for inquietude. The rajah had heard of Dyak
pirates, and dispatched four boats, two large and two small: the
Snake, weakly manned by the Tumangong's people, and the rest led by
Pangerans (who neither work nor fight) and a wretched crew, chiefly
Borneons. Mr. Crimble, taking my servant Peter and four Javanese,
went most imprudently in the second of the large boats. The whole,
being dispatched in haste (foolish haste), insufficiently provided
in every respect, may fall into trouble, and involve me in very
unpleasant circumstances.

"The other cause for uneasiness is the attack of a Chinese boat at the
mouth of the river. The boat that attacked her is a small one, with
eight or ten men, which came out of Sadong, and had been lying here
for a week or more. She is commanded by a Pangeran named Badrudeen,
has some Illanuns on board, and is bound on a piratical cruise. As she
descended the river, she met with the small China boat, likewise from
Sambas, with eight men, which she treacherously assailed, desperately
wounding one man and severely another; but the China boat's consort
heaving in sight, the pirate pulled away. I must redress this, if it
be in my power; and have ordered the Datus to gather men to follow
the rascals, as it is probable they will be lurking not far from
hence. In the mean time it gave me great pain dressing the hurts of
these poor Chinese, one of whom I think must die, being cut along the
back and side--across the body from the side nearly to the backbone,
a ghastly gaping wound, beside having his arm slashed through. The
other man is very severely, and perhaps, without medical attendance,
mortally, hurt, having his arm half cut through at the muscular
development between the shoulder and elbow--poor fellow! I must say
for the Chinese, they seem very grateful for any attention shown them.

"_29th._--My birthday. Men collected, and to-morrow we start for
Telang Telang. This morning, much to my relief, our fleet returned,
after an encounter with thirteen Dyak boats. About one o'clock
on the 28th, pulling into a bay between Morotaba and Tanjong Poe,
they came unexpectedly on them. One Borneon boat had lagged behind;
the Pangeran who commanded deserted the second, and sought refuge with
the Tumangong, trying to induce him to fly; and the crew of the third,
a large boat with my two Europeans on board, was, by their account,
in a state of fear, which totally incapacitated them from acting. All
rose, none would pull; all shouted, none would serve the guns; all
commanded, none obeyed; most were screaming out to run; all bellowing
out, in hopes of frightening the enemy; none to direct the helm. The
Tumangong, with only seventeen men in all, insisted on advance;
and the Borneons, encouraged by threats from the Europeans, and the
good example of the Javanese, did not fly. The two boats opened their
fire; the Dyaks retreated in confusion and alarm: but from the tumult,
the noise, and the rocking of the boat, Mr. Crimble could only fire
three times with the bow six-pounder carronade, and from other guns
loaded with grape and canister, while the rascally Borneons never
fired at all. The Dyaks suffered loss, and left behind them clothes,
rice, fish, cooking-pots, swords, &c.; and, considering the state
of the Borneons, it was lucky the dread of our prowess put them to
flight so easily. Crimble assured me that, with a Siniawan crew, he
could have destroyed half their force. The Dyaks behaved very well,
pulling off with great steadiness and without noise.

"_June 20th._--The events of the month may be compressed into a
narrative comprising the internal and external.

"The internal state of the country is decidedly improving
and flourishing, and bears the aspect of gradually increasing
prosperity. Justice has been strictly administered. Robberies, which
a few months ago were of nightly occurrence, are now rarely heard of;
and that vile intriguing to make poor people slaves, from debt or
false claims, is entirely stopped.

"The people who had scattered at the close of the war have been
collected, and are building their houses a short way up the river
at the Campong Jekiso, which, when finished, will be a neat-looking
village.

"The Pangeran Macota is intriguing; but as he is sure to do that,
it need not be insisted upon.

"Muda Hassim is true and agreeable, and entirely reconciled to the
Patingi and Tumangongs; so far, indeed, nothing can be better than
our internal state: there is peace, there is plenty; the poor are
not harassed, and justice is done to all.

"The Dyaks of the interior are improving and content, and gaining
courage daily to complain of any wrong that may be offered them. To
the sena, or forced trade, I have almost put a stop, by confiscating
the goods wherever met with; and this plan once acted on, the Dyaks
have not been slow to bring me bundles of bidongs (Dyak cloths),
iron, and the like.

"The tribes that continue unsettled are the Suntah and Singè: the
affairs of the latter I will mention hereafter.

"Suntah has been for a long time under the government of Seriff Sahib
of Sadong, and through his _paternal_ charge has dwindled away from
four hundred to fifty or sixty families. Shortly after my assuming the
reins of government, he dispatched (according to custom) a mixed party
of Malays and Dyaks, and falling on my helpless tribe of Sanpro, killed
some, and carried away twenty women and children into captivity. I was
not strong enough to resent the injury; but wrote him a strong letter,
demanding the women, and telling him he was not to send, under any
pretext, into my country. The women I did not get; but I heard that
the communication frightened him: for, of course, they deem I am
backed by all the power of my country. While the Royalist still lay
here, I heard that his people were raising the revenue from the Suntah
Dyaks; but it must be remarked, that the Suntah are on the edge of my
territory, having left the former location. As this was done in the
face of my caution not to intermeddle without my consent, I resolved
at once to put the matter to the issue; and having armed four boats,
went up and seized all the rice and padi collected for my neighbors'
use. The Suntah Dyaks were and are alarmed to a pitiable degree;
for they fear Seriff Sahib with good reason; and yet my being on the
spot gave them no option of evading my demand. Thus the matter was
brought to a crisis; and having taken the revenue (as it was called)
for the poor Dyaks themselves, I shall be able to keep them from
starvation, to the verge of which, so early in the season, they are
already reduced. The Dyaks remain unsettled; but I am now in hopes of
bringing them to the interior of the Quop, which is further within our
own territory. Muda Hassim wrote to Seriff Sahib to tell him the Dyaks
were no longer his, but mine; and Seriff Sahib, sore-hearted, conspired
against us, and held for some time a higher tone than his wont.

"I shall now narrate my proceedings at the mountain of Singè,
from which I have just returned. The mountain, with its groves of
fruit-trees, has been already described; and as a preface to my present
description, I must particularize the circumstances of the Dyak tribe
of Singè. The tribe consists of at least 800 males, the most ignorant,
and therefore the most wild, of the Dyaks of my country; and, from
their position, they have never been overcome or ruined, and are
therefore a rich community, and proportionately independent. Their
old chief is by name Parembam, and the Panglima, or head-warrior, his
younger brother, by name Si Tummo. These men have for a very long time
ruled this tribe; and the elder has certainly acquired from the Malays
a portion of cunning and intrigue, and lost the general simplicity of
the native Dyak character. He is unquestionably a man of ability. His
sway, however, on the mountain has for a long time been unpopular;
and a large proportion of the people, dissatisfied with his extortions,
have been attached to a younger chief, by name Bibit. Some time past,
finding it impossible to manage this old chief, Parembam, and being
convinced that the change might readily be made, I called Bibit, and
made him chief, or Orang Kaya of the tribe. Parembam neither was nor is
inclined to give up his authority without a struggle; and though the
mass adhere to the new chief, by title 'Steer Rajah,' yet Parembam's
long-established customs, his great wealth, and his talents, render
him a dangerous old man to the younger leader. One quality, however,
Parembam is deficient in, as well as his brother the Panglima, and
that is _bravery_; and on this much depends in a Dyak tribe. Steer
Rajah, on the contrary, has always been renowned in war, and is the
envied possessor of many heads. The Dyaks have among them a fashion
which they call bunkit, or vaunting; for instance, in the present
case Steer Rajah and Parembam dared each other to go on excursions
to procure heads, _i. e._ against their enemies--this is bunkit. One
of Steer Rajah's followers went accordingly, and quickly procured the
head of a hostile warrior far out of my territory; and on the return
of the party, Parembam in turn sent forty men to Simpoke, which is
a tribe attached to Samarahan, and on our immediate border. Close to
the Dyaks of Simpoke live a party of the Sigo Dyaks, who belong to me;
and this party of Parembam's, confounding friends and enemies, killed
some of the Sigo Dyaks--how many is not certain. The Sigos, taking
the alarm, cut off their retreat, and killed two of the Singè Dyaks;
and many beside were wounded by sudas and ranjows, and, all broken,
fled back to their own country. Thus, though they obtained five heads,
they lost two, and those belonging to their principal warriors. This
news reaching me, I hurried up to the hill, and arrived just after
part of the war-party had brought the heads.

"I may here remark, that I have positively forbidden the Dyak tribes
within my territory to war one upon the other; and this, therefore,
was a serious offence against me on the part of Parembam. At once to
aim at more than this restriction would be fruitless, and even risk
my ability to effect this first step on the road to improvement. I
likewise came up here to go through the ceremony of installing the
Orang Kaya Steer Rajah in his office; and thus I have had an excellent
opportunity of seeing their customs and manners. What follows will
be a personal narration, or nearly so, of what I have seen; and it
applies, with slight difference, to almost all the interior tribes.

"On our ascending the mountain, we found the five heads carefully
watched, about half a mile from the town, in consequence of the
non-arrival of some of the war-party. They had erected a temporary
shed close to the place where these miserable remnants of noisome
mortality were deposited; and they were guarded by about thirty young
men in their finest dresses, composed principally of scarlet jackets
ornamented with shells, turbans of the native bark-cloth dyed bright
yellow, and spread on the head, and decked with an occasional feather,
flower, or twig of leaves. Nothing can exceed their partiality for
these trophies; and in retiring from the 'war-path,' the man who has
been so fortunate as to obtain a head hangs it about his neck, and
instantly commences his return to his tribe. If he sleep on the way,
the precious burden, though decaying and offensive, is not loosened,
but rests on his lap, while his head (and nose!) reclines on his
knees. The retreat is always silently made until close to home,
when they set up a wild yell, which announces their victory and the
possession of its proofs. It must, therefore, be considered, that
these bloody trophies are the evidences of victory--the banner of the
European, the flesh-pot of the Turk, the scalp of the North American
Indian--and that they are torn from enemies, for taking heads is the
effect and not the cause of war. On our reaching the Balei, or public
hall, of the Orang Kaya Steer Rajah, I immediately called a number of
their chiefs together, and opened a conference with them on the subject
of Parembam having attacked and killed the Dyaks of Sigo. They _all_
disapproved of it most highly, asserting that the Sigos were their
younger brothers; that no sufficient cause had ever existed; that
Parembam had acted badly, and must pay to purchase _peace_. Were they,
I asked, willing to force Parembam into payment? They were. Would
they insist on the heads being restored to the Sigos, and receive
those of their own people? They would!

"It may be observed, that their causes for war, as well as its
progress and termination, are exactly the same as those of other
people. They dispute about the limits of their respective lands; about
theft committed by one tribe upon another; about occasional murders;
the crossing each other on the war-path; and about a thousand other
subjects.

"When a tribe is on a warlike excursion, it often happens that their
track (or 'trail') is crossed by another tribe. Those who strike the
trail guard it at some convenient spot, apprehending the party to be
enemies; they plant ranjows in the path, and wait till the returning
party are involved among them to make an attack. If enemies, and they
succeed, all is well; but if friends, though no attack be made, it
is a serious offence, and mostly gives occasion to war if not paid
for. The progress of the contest consists in attacking each other
by these surprises, particularly about the time of sowing, weeding,
and cutting the rice-crops. When one party is weaker, or less active,
or less warlike than the other, they solicit a peace through some
tribe friendly to both, and pay for the lives they have taken: the
price is about two gongs, value 33 1/2 reals, for each life: thus
peace is concluded. This is the custom with these Dyaks universally;
but it is otherwise with the Sarebus and Sakarran. But Sarebus and
Sakarran are not fair examples of Dyak life, as they are pirates as
well as head-hunters, and do not hesitate to destroy all persons they
meet with.

"Parembam, having been called before me, declared that these heads
belonged to the Simpoke Dyaks, and that they had not attacked the
Sigos. As I was not quite certain of the fact, I thought it unjust
to proceed against him till I had stronger proof.

"On the following morning the heads were brought up to the village,
attended by a number of young men all dressed in their best, and were
carried to Parembam's house amid the beating of gongs and the firing
of one or two guns. They were then disposed of in a conspicuous place
in the public hall of Parembam. The music sounded and the men danced
the greater part of the day; and toward evening carried them away
in procession through all the campongs except three or four just
about me. The women, in these processions, crowd round the heads as
they proceed from house to house, and put sirih and betel-nut in
the mouths of the ghastly dead, and welcome them! After this they
are carried back in the same triumph, deposited in an airy place,
and left to dry. During this process, for seven, eight, or ten days,
they are watched by the boys of the age of six to ten years; and
during this time they never stir from the public hall--they are not
permitted to put their foot out of it while engaged in this sacred
trust. Thus are the youths initiated.

"For a long time after the heads are hung up, the men nightly meet
and beat their gongs, and chant addresses to them, which were rendered
thus to me: 'Your head is in our dwelling, but your spirit wanders to
your own country.' 'Your head and your spirit are now ours: persuade,
therefore, your countrymen to be slain by us.' 'Speak to the spirits of
your tribe: let them wander in the fields, that when we come again to
their country we may get more heads, and that we may bring the heads
of your brethren, and hang them by your head,' &c. The tone of this
chant is loud and monotonous, and I am not able to say how long it is
sung; but certainly for a month after the arrival of the heads, as one
party here had had a head for that time, and were still exhorting it.

"These are their customs and modes of warfare; and I may conclude by
saying that, though their trophies are more disgusting, yet their
wars are neither so bloody, nor their cruelties so great, as those
of the North American Indian. They slay all they meet with of their
enemies--men, women, and children; but this is common to all wild
tribes. They have an implacable spirit of revenge as long as the war
lasts, retort evil for evil, and retaliate life for life; and, as I
have before said, the heads are the trophies, as the scalps are to the
red men. But, on the contrary, they never torture their enemies, nor do
they devour them; and peace can always be restored among them by a very
moderate payment. In short, there is nothing new in their feelings,
or in their mode of showing them; no trait remarkable for cruelty; no
head-hunting for the sake of head-hunting. They act precisely on the
same impulses as other wild men: war arises from passion or interest;
peace from defeat or fear. As friends, they are faithful, just, and
honest; as enemies, blood-thirsty and cunning, patient on the war-path,
and enduring fatigue, hunger, and want of sleep, with cheerfulness and
resolution. As woodmen they are remarkably acute; and on all their
excursions carry with them a number of ranjows, which, when they
retreat, they stick in behind them, at intervals, at a distance of
twenty, fifty, or a hundred yards, so that a hotly-pursuing enemy gets
checked, and many severely wounded. Their arms consist of a sword, an
iron-headed spear, a few wooden spears, a knife worn at the right side,
with a sirih-pouch, or small basket. Their provision is a particular
kind of sticky rice, boiled in bamboos. When once they have struck
their enemies, or failed, they return, without pausing, to their homes.

"To proceed with my journal. My principal object in coming up the hill
was, to appoint the Orang Kaya Steer Rajah as the chief, beside Pagise
as Panglima, or head warrior, and Pa Bobot as Pangeran, or revenue
officer. It was deemed by these worthy personages quite unfit that
this ceremony should take place in the public hall or circular house,
as that was the place wherein the heads are deposited, and where they
hold councils of war.

"With the Dyaks, all council is divided into hot and cold; peace,
friendship, good intentions, are all included under the latter
head--war, &c., are under the former. Hot is represented by red, and
cold by white. So in everything they make this distinction; and as the
public hall is the place for war-councils and war-trophies, it is hot
in the extreme, unfit for friendly conference. A shed was therefore
erected close to the Orang Kaya's house, wherein the ceremony was to
take place. About nine in the evening we repaired to the scene; loud
music, barbarous but not unpleasing, resounded, and we took our seats
on mats in the midst of our Dyak friends. A feast was in preparation;
and each guest (if I may call them such) brought his share of rice
in bamboos, and laid it on the general stock. As one party came up
after another, carrying their burning logs, the effect was very good;
and they kept arriving until the place and its vicinity was literally
crammed with human beings. A large antique sirih-box was placed in
the midst; and I contributed that greatest of luxuries, tobacco.

"The feast, in the mean time, was in preparation, some of the
principal people being employed in counting the number who were to
eat, and dividing the bamboos into exactly equal portions for each
person. About six inches were allotted to every man; and it took a
very long time to divide it, for they are remarkably particular as
to the proper size and quantity to each share. The bamboos of rice
being, however, at length satisfactorily disposed, the Orang Kaya
produced as his share a large basin full of sauce, composed of salt
and chilis, and a small stock of sweetmeats; and then the ceremony
of his installation commenced as follows:

"A jacket, a turban, a cloth for the loins, and a kris (all of
white) were presented to the chief as a token of sejiek dingin,
or cold, _i.e._ good. The chief then rose, and, taking a white
fowl and waving it over the eatables, repeated nearly the following
words:--(The commencement, however, is curious enough to dwell upon:
the opening is a sort of invocation, beginning with the phrase,
'Samungut, Simungi.' Samungut is a Malay word, Simungi signifying
the same in Dyak; the exact meaning it is difficult to comprehend;
but it is here understood as some principle, spirit, or fortune,
which is in men and things. Thus the Dyaks, in stowing their rice at
harvest, do it with great care, from a superstitious feeling that the
Simungi of the padi will escape. They now call this principle to be
present--that of men, of pigs (their favorite animal), of padi, and
of fruits. They particularly named my Simungi, that of my ancestors,
of the Pangeran from Borneo, of the Datus and of their ancestors,
and of the ancestors of their own tribe. They call them--that is,
their Simungi--to be present. They then call upon Jovata to grant
their prayer, that the great man from Europe, and the Datus, might
hold the government for a length of time)--'May the government be
cold' (good); 'May there be rice in our houses;' 'May many pigs
be killed;' 'May male children be born to us;' 'May fruit ripen;'
'May we be happy, and our goods abundant;' 'We declare ourselves to
be true to the great man and the Datus; what they wish we will do,
what they command is our law.' Having said this and much more, the
fowl was taken by a leading Malay, who repeated the latter words,
while others bound strips of white cloth round the heads of the
multitude. The fowl was then killed, the blood shed in a bamboo,
and each man dipping his finger in the blood, touched his forehead
and breast, in attestation of his fidelity. The fowl was now carried
away to be cooked: and when brought back, placed with the rest of the
feast, and the dancing commenced. The chief, coming forward, uttered
a loud yell ending in 'ish,' which was oftentimes repeated during
the dance. He raised his hands to his forehead, and taking a dish,
commenced dancing to lively music. Three other old chief men followed
his example; each uttering the yell and making the salute, but without
taking the dish. They danced with arms extended, turning the body
frequently, taking very small steps, and little more than lifting
their feet from the ground. Thus they turned backward and forward,
passed in and out of the inner rooms, and frequently repeating the
yell, and making the salutation to me. The dish, in the mean time,
was changed from one to the other: there was little variety, no
gesticulation, no violence; and, though not deficient in native
grace, yet the movements were by no means interesting. The dance
over, the feast commenced; and everything was carried on with great
gravity and propriety. I left them shortly after they began to eat,
and retired, very fagged, to my bed, or rather, to my board; for
sitting cross-legged for several hours is surely a great infliction.

"I may add to this account that, while writing it, the Dyak land-tribes
of Siquong, Sibaduh, and Goon, sent their deputies to me. These people
are not under any Malay government, and it is now for the first
time they have trusted themselves as far as Sarawak. They have an
objection to drinking the river-water, and expressed great surprise
at the flood-tide. Their confidence is cheering to me, and will,
I trust, be advantageous to themselves. Their trade in rice is very
considerable: and toward Sambas they exchange eight or ten pasus of
rice for one of salt.

"Our conference was pleasing. They desired protection, they desired
trade. 'They had all heard, _the whole world had heard_, that _a
son of Europe_ was a friend to the Dyaks.' My visitors drank Batavia
arrack with great gusto, declaring all the time it was not half so
good as their own; however, at a pinch anything will do. Some other
Dyaks met these strangers; they were not adversaries, and so they
chewed sirih, and drank grog in company; but among enemies this may
not be: they can neither eat nor drink in company without desiring
a reconciliation. I may add, that the Siquong tribe consists of at
least four hundred families, with forty public halls, or baleis,
for heads. A Dyak family cannot be estimated at fewer than twelve
people, which will give four thousand eight hundred or five thousand
people. Sibaduh and Goon may be about seventy-five families: beside
these, Si Panjong and Sam Penex want to come in to me, which will
give one hundred and one more families. What might be done with these
people, if I had a little more power and a little assistance!

"I was going to close my account of the Dyaks; but I had scarcely
penned the last sentence when a large party of Singè Dyaks and
five Dyaks of Sigo arrived--thus all these enemies meeting. In
the conference which followed, the Singè allowed they were wrong in
attacking Sigo, and laid all the blame on the old chief, Parembam. They
likewise allowed it to be just that Parembam should be forced to pay,
and conclude a peace. With the Goon and Sibaduh Dyaks they had long
been at enmity; but they agreed to make peace if Sibaduh would pay
two gongs, formerly demanded, as the price of peace. The Sibaduh,
however, did not allow the justice of the demand; but the parties were
reconciled so far as that each promised to maintain a truce and to eat
together: and the Singès declared they would not attack the Sibaduhs on
account of the two gongs, but obtain them in a friendly conference. I
have (being hurried) briefly mentioned these circumstances, which took
a long time to settle, as the Dyaks are very fond of speechifying,
which they do sitting, without action or vivacity, but with great
fluency, and using often highly metaphysical and elegant language. It
was a great nuisance having fifty naked savages in the house all night,
extended in the hall and the anterooms. They finished a bottle of gin,
and then slept; and I could not avoid remarking that their sleep was
light, such as temperance, health, and exercise bestow. During many
hours I heard but one man snore, while half the number of Europeans
would have favored me with a concert sufficient to banish rest.

"I shall now briefly mention our _foreign policy_ for the last
few months.

"For a time we were annoyed with incessant reports of their coming to
attack us in force; but, though scarcely believing they would be bold
enough, I took precautions, pushed on the completion of our boats,
built a fort, and made a fence round the village. These precautions
taken, and fifteen boats in the water ready for action, I cared very
little, though the news reached me that Byong, the Sarebus chief,
had hung a basket on a high tree which was to contain my head.

"_Sadong._--Our relations with Seriff Sahib were very unsettled;
and by the bullying tone of the people of Singè I thought it probable
he might be induced to measure his strength, backed by the Sakarran
Dyaks, against us. I have already mentioned his attack upon my Dyaks of
Sanpro, and the second dispute about the Suntah Dyaks; in the first of
these he came off with impunity; in the second I met him with success,
and out-manoeuvered him, and wrested the Dyaks from him. Shortly after
the transactions at Suntah, a boat of Sakarran Dyaks came to Sarawak
nominally _to trade_, but in reality to tamper with the fidelity of the
Datus and others. They proposed to the Tumangong to join Seriff Sahib,
stating that they were sent by him to try all the people here. 'They
had been ruined here; Seriff Sahib would restore them their property;
and if they left Muda Hassim, James Brooke, and the Chinese, they
could afterward easily make a prey of the Dyaks and Chinese, with
Seriff Sahib's assistance, and get plenty of slaves.'

"The plan proposed for the removal was as follows:--Seriff Sahib,
with forty Malay boats, and the Sakarrans with one hundred boats,
were to request permission from Muda Hassim to attack the Dyak tribe
of Siquong, and under this pretence were to come up the river, when
the Datus were to join, with their wives and children, and all were to
take flight together. The Tumangong told me this as soon as he heard it
himself; and, to make sure, I sent Patingi Gapoor to fish their story
out of them, which he did most successfully. Being assured of the fact,
I called the Dyaks, and, before some dozens of our people and one or
two persons from Singè, taxed them with their guilt. They were obliged
to confess, and insisted upon it that Seriff Sahib had sent them,
&c. Many urged me to put these Dyaks to death; but the reluctance we
all have to shedding blood withheld me, and I had no desire to strike
at a wren when a foul vulture was at hand. I dismissed the emissaries
scot-free, and then both Muda Hassim and myself indited letters to
Seriff Sahib, that of Muda Hassim being severe but dignified. Before
they were dispatched, an ambassador arrived from Singè with letters
both to the rajah and myself, disclaiming warmly all knowledge of the
treachery, swearing _the most solemn_ oaths in proof of his truth, and
declaring that, so far from having committed so shameful an action,
he had never even dreamed of such a thing in his worst dreams, as
he hoped that God would save him. Our letters were sent before his
ambassador was received, and a second disclaimer, like the first,
quickly reached us. Of course it was my policy, whatever my opinion
might be, to receive his offers of friendship and to believe all he
said; and, therefore, the matter ended, and ended so far well, that
Seriff Sahib lowered his former tone; and, certainly, whatever he may
desire in his heart, or _dream_ of, he wants to be well with us here,
and, I can see, fears us. I am content, because I really wish for
peace, and not war; Muda Hassim is content, because he has humbled
Seriff Sahib, and acted decisively; and the seriff is content as the
fiend in the infernal regions. I leave it to all gentle readers to
form their own opinion of his truth or treachery; but I must hint to
them my private opinion that he did send agents to tempt, and would
have gained the Datus if he could; and as for his oaths, my belief
is, he would swear a basketful of the most sacred before breakfast to
support a lie, and yet not lose his appetite! The Datus were too old,
and knew him too well, to be caught in his trap.

"Seriff Sahib has now sent a fleet of boats up the Sarebus river;
but the result I do not yet know.

"To conclude our foreign policy, I must mention Borneo Proper.

"My great object is to reconcile Muda Hassim and the sultan, and
to restore the former to Borneo, before the coming of Mr. Bonham on
his diplomatic mission. To effect this, I have resolved to proceed
myself; and Muda Hassim, equally anxious, has letters and two of
his brothers ready to accompany me. If we can gain this object, I
shall be firmly established, and relieved from the intriguing, mean,
base Borneons. And it will be an advantage to the government measure,
in as far as they will be enabled to form their arrangements with all
instead of a single faction of the Borneo Pangerans. From all I hear,
Muda Hassim is more powerful than either the sultan or Pangeran Usop;
and if he appeals to arms, I am assured he will carry his point,
and become the sovereign of Borneo virtually, if not nominally.

"The Royalist now waits for us at the mouth of the river, which
I hope to reach on the 14th, this being the 12th July. Heigh for
the sea once more! But yet, though I go, I take my cares with me,
and but for the necessity, the absolute necessity, of bringing the
Borneo question to a crisis, good or bad, I would fain stop where I
am. For even during one short month's absence I fear my poor people
will suffer from the intrigues of the rascally Borneo Pangerans. In
this I do not include Muda Hassim, who, with a most amiable private
character, and with integrity and good faith, desires to do right,
as far as his education and prejudices will permit. It is sad to
reflect that this very prince, who really wishes to do good, and to
conduce to the comfort of his people, should, from want of energy,
have been so fearful an oppressor, through the agency of others; and
it is not here alone that vile agents for vile purposes are plentiful."





CHAPTER XIV.

    Visit of Captain Elliott.--Mr. Brooke sails for Borneo
    Proper.--Arrival.--Visited by leading men.--Condition of
    the country.--Reception by the Sultan.--Objects in view.--The
    different chiefs, and communications with them.--The Sultan and
    his Pangerans.--Objects of the visit accomplished.--Return to
    Sarawak.--Ceremonies of the cession.--Sail for Singapore.


After Mr. Brooke's return from his expedition against the Singè
Dyak chief Parembam, he was visited by his friend Captain Elliott,
of the Madras engineers, whose acquaintance I had the pleasure of
subsequently making at Singapore. He is, as Mr. Brooke describes him,
"a man of science and education, and the best of good fellows." During
his stay at Sarawak, he established his observatory, and all its
apparatus; and a shed (now converted into a goat-house) will always
retain the appellation of "the Observatory." Mr. Brooke and Captain
Elliott appear to have made some very amusing and agreeable excursions
up the different rivers, an account of which is given in the journal;
but I shall pass it over, as I am anxious to follow my friend through
with his government up to the time of my meeting him at Singapore.

"_Thursday, July 14th._--We were to have started on this most lucky
day at ten o'clock, but what with innumerable preparations and delays,
it was near six before the rajah was ready to dismiss the procession;
and my alarm became considerable that, Friday (an unlucky day) having
commenced by the native reckoning, we should again be postponed till
Sunday. However, by making six o'clock five, and keeping back the
watches to suit our purpose, our departure was achieved. The state
spears and swords were brought forth. The letters for the sultan, in
their brass tray covered with embroidered cloth, were duly mounted,
with the greatest reverence, on the head of Bandar Sumsu; and nothing
remained but to take leave. The rajah addressed a few words to his
brothers, requesting them to tell the sultan that his heart was always
with him; that he could never separate from him, whether far or near;
and that he was, and always had been, true to his son. Budrudeen then
rose, and approaching the rajah, seated himself close to him, bending
his head to the ground over his hand, which he had grasped. The rajah
hastily withdrew his hand, and clasping him round, embraced, kissing
his neck. Both were greatly agitated and both wept, and I could have
wept for company, for it was no display of state ceremony, but genuine
feeling. It is seldom, very seldom, they show their feelings; and the
effect was the more touching from being unexpected; beside, it is a
part of our nature (one's better nature) to feel when we see others
feel. Pangeran Marsale followed; both brothers likewise parted with
Muda Mahammed in the same way, and they certainly rose in my opinion
from this token of affection toward each other. My adieus followed; we
all rose; the rajah accompanied us to the wharf; and as we embarked,
I could see the tears slowly steal from his eyes. I could not help
taking his hand, and bidding him be of good cheer; he smiled in a
friendly manner, pressed my hand, and I stepped into my boat. Our gongs
struck up; the barge, decorated with flags and streamers, was towed
slowly along against the flood-tide; the guns fired from the wharf,
from the Chinese houses, and from our fort, and we passed along in
all the pomp and pride of _Sarawak state_. It was dusk when we got
down to the first reach, and there we brought up to wait for the ebb."

I shall omit that part of my friend's journal containing his remarks
and observations along the coast between Sarawak and the entrance of
the Borneo river. On the 21st July his narration continues thus:

"I must now leave geography, and turn to politics. On casting anchor
we acted on a plan previously formed, and sent off the gig, with Seriff
Hussein and Nakoda Ahmed, to the city, to intimate my arrival, and that
of the rajah's brothers, with letters from Muda Hassim. I trusted to
their dread of and curiosity about the English expedition to insure
my reception; but I gave particular directions, in case the sultan
asked about me, that my ambassadors were to say I was here; that I had
been corresponding about the English coming; that I was not a man in
authority, or belonging to the East India Company; and that they were
sure I should not land unless he invited me to come and see him. To
show eagerness would have raised suspicion; backwardness excites the
contrary feeling, and a desire to entertain some intercourse.

"_July 22d._--At the unconscionable hour of 2 A.M., a mob of Pangerans
came on board, in number not fewer than fifty, and with a multitude
of followers. They awoke us out of our first sleep, and crowded the
vessel above and below, so that we could scarce find room to make
our toilet in public, while the heat was suffocating us. However,
we did manage it, and sat talking till daylight. Our visitors were
chiefly relations or adherents of Muda Hassim, and some of the first
men in the country. Pangeran Budrudeen and Pangeran Marsale were in
their glory, and happy; and it was evident at once that our affairs
were likely to succeed to our heart's content. All were anxious and
eager in inquiries about Muda Hassim, and wishing his return. The
sultan, Pangeran Usop, Pangeran Mumin, and others declared, 'Borneo
could never be well till he came back.' In short, it was clear that
the country was in distress and difficulty from within: trade ruined,
piracy abounding, the mouth of the river unsafe, their forts insulted
by the pirates, the communication with their dependencies cut off,
food dear, and the tobacco, which comes from the northward, not to
be had. Everything conspires to forward Muda Hassim's views and mine;
and during this conversation, it was evident they were looking to me
as a friend.

"At daylight a boat from the sultan arrived to carry up the letters;
but Budrudeen and his brother resolved to proceed first, in order to
make sure of an honorable reception for the chop. At 7 o'clock there
was a stir. I saw them over the side with delight, and gave them a
salute with pleasure. Breakfast done, I was too happy to lie down,
and slept till past midday, having then only to wait for Budrudeen's
return.

"_23d._--Budrudeen came at 3 P.M., bringing with him good news
of the most favorable reception from all parties, all wishing for
reconciliation and the return of Muda Hassim. To-morrow, boats are
to come for the letters, which are to be conveyed in state. The
day following I am to go up, and am likewise to be received in all
honorable form.

"_24th._--At 7 A.M. the state-boat, a shabby concern, decorated with
yellow flags, arrived, and at eight the letters were borne away under
a salute. Thus we had a second time the satisfaction of getting rid
of the mob at an early hour.

"_25th._--At 9 1/2 A.M. I started with Williamson in the gig, with
the long-boat in company, carrying the presents. On approaching the
town, before the ebb had run long, it appeared to be a very Venice of
hovels, a river Cybele rising from the water. For those who like it,
the locality is not ill chosen. The hills recede from the river, and
form an amphitheatre; and several other rivers or streams flowing in,
cause a muddy deposit, on which the houses are built. At high water
they are surrounded; at low water stand on a sheet of mud. On nearing
it, we were encompassed by boats which preceded and followed us,
and we passed the floating market, where women, wearing immense hats
of palm-leaves, sell all sorts of edibles, balanced in their little
canoes, now giving a paddle, now making a bargain, and dropping down
with the tide, and again regaining their place when the bargain is
finished. The first impression of the town is miserable. The houses
are crowded and numerous, and even the palace does not present a
more captivating aspect, for, though large, it is as incommodious
as the worst. Our presentation was exactly similar to that of
our first meeting with Muda Hassim at Sarawak, only the crowd was
much greater. We had been seated but a few minutes when Pangeran
Usop arrived, and directly afterward the sultan. He gave us tea,
leaf-cigars, and sirih, and, in short, showed us every attention;
and what was best of all did not keep us very long. Our apartment
was partitioned off from the public hall, a dark-looking place,
but furnished with a table brought by us, and three rickety chairs,
beside matresses and plenty of mats. We were kept up nearly all night,
which, after the fatigues of the day, was hard upon us.

"Further observation confirmed us in the opinion that the town
itself is miserable, and its locality on the mud fitted only for
frogs or natives; but there is a level dry plain above the entrance
of the Kiangi river, admirably suited for a European settlement; and
across the Kiangi is swelling ground, where the residents might find
delightful spots for their country-houses. The greatest annoyance to
a stranger is the noisome smell of the mud when uncovered; and all
plated or silver articles, even in the course of one night, get black
and discolored. The inhabitants I shall estimate moderately at 10,000,
and the Kadien population are numerous amid the hills.

"_27th._--Our objects in coming to Borneo were threefold. Firstly,
to effect a reconciliation between the sultan and Muda Hassim;
secondly, to gain the sultan's approval and signature to my holding
Sarawak; and thirdly, to release the Kleeses [Hindoostanees] of the
shipwrecked vessels, the Sultana and Lord Melbourne. The first object
was gained at once, as the sultan seemed really overjoyed at being good
friends with his uncle; and Pangeran Usop, from whom we anticipated
difficulty, stepped forward directly to aid us while Pangeran Mumin
was not averse. I will not now stop to sketch the characters of these
worthies, as I shall hereafter have a better knowledge of them; but I
may remark, _en passant_, that it was evident, even to my inexperience,
that no two of them were on good terms, and all probably united in
a feeling that Muda Hassim's return would be a personal as well as
public advantage. The other principal Pangerans, namely, Tizudeen (the
sultan's natural brother), Kurmaindar (the father of the country),
Bahar (the rajah's brother-in-law), Tizudeen second (the rajah's
natural brother), were all for Muda Hassim; and the population, as
far as I could learn, decidedly desirous of his being restored to them.

"Each day I had several interviews with the sultan, in his surow
or private room; and he assured me of his fondness for Muda Hassim,
his wish to have him near him again, and the great benefit it would
be. Moreover, he was pleased to express great personal regard for me;
and every five minutes I had to swear 'eternal friendship,' while he,
clasping my hand, kept repeating, 'amigo _suya_,' 'amigo _suya_,'
meaning, _my_ friend, _my_ friend. At the same time he professed great
readiness to give me Sarawak--inquired the amount of revenue--seemed
satisfied, and said, 'I wish you to be there; I do not wish any
body else; you are my amigo, and it is nobody's business but mine;
the country is mine, and if I please to give you all, I can.' His
majesty is very proud of displaying his very small smattering of
Spanish or Portuguese; and almost all the higher people having
acquired a few words, shows there must have been a communication at
no very distant date. I was also warned not to care for any of the
other Pangerans,--not, indeed, to have anything to say to them.

"With this advice I took the liberty to dispense; and sent to Pangerans
Mumin and Usop to intimate my wish to visit them. The former pleaded
that his house was unfit to receive me; but the latter immediately
sent a most polite message, that any time, either by day or night,
he should be happy to see me; and accordingly I went. The house _and
style_ are the best in Borneo. I was politely and kindly greeted;
and I soon found that I was with a man of sense and quickness. There
was a little diplomacy at first on his part; but as I proceeded direct
to my object, he at once laid it aside. In fact, candor is the basis
of our right influence with the natives; and as I desired to make
Pangeran Usop my friend, I went candidly to work, and immediately
told him all that I had already told the sultan. The amount of my
conversation was as follows: The first topic being the anticipated
visit of the English, 'Were the English coming?' 'Was Mr. Bonham
coming?' were the first questions; and 'With what intent?' I replied,
that the English were certainly coming, but with no evil intentions;
that it was true they were offended by the ill usage the captain and
people of the Sultana had met with; yet that I had endeavored to put
it in the best light, and had urged that a friendly communication
for the future was better than a retrospect which might give rise to
unpleasant feelings: I was sure that the English desired a friendly
intercourse; and I hoped, though I could not say, that they would
look to the future, and not to the past. I had, I added, no authority;
but my friendship for the sultan induced me to inform him what I had
heard abroad. When Mr. Bonham came, he would be able to tell them
all; but I could say now that I thought he would demand a treaty
between Singapore and Borneo for the mutual protection of trade,
and the care of individuals of each nation who were shipwrecked or
otherwise sought protection at either place.

"On the whole, it is certain that the feelings of Borneo are decidedly
friendly, and equally certain that the persons of influence will
receive us in their warmest manner, and grant us every thing, if we
resort only to measures of conciliation. It never can be too often
repeated, that conciliation is the only policy with Malays, and
particularly the Borneons, who have very vague and confused ideas
of our power. A harsh truth, a peremptory demand, they have never
heard in their lives, and they will not hear it for the first time
and remain friendly; for all who have the least acquaintance with the
native character know their acute sense of false shame. To demand,
therefore, of the chief here to acknowledge our superiority would,
I am sure, be met with a haughty refusal. In a few years, if we
proceed mildly to establish a beneficial influence, they will fall
into our views without reserve; for, as I have often before stated,
their government is in the last stage of destruction and decay.

"The reconciliation of Muda Hassim was soon complete; and as to
the Kleeses of the Lord Melbourne, twenty in number, they were at
once surrendered to me, with a request that I would forward them to
Singapore as quickly as I could. The boat of the Lord Melbourne was
likewise given to me. I had some scruples about three Kleeses of the
Sultana, who had been sold at Malludu Bay, bought there by an Arab
seriff, and brought here. By all their laws and customs they were his
slaves, purchased at a distance, and, as I had no right to claim them
(supposing even that to be just), and was resolved not to leave them
in captivity, I paid a fair price for them at the rate of twenty-five
dollars per man. I regret to add, there is one other man not in the
place; and one is gone to Tutorga--about a day's journey hence.

"_28th._--I may here draw a brief sketch of the principal personages of
this most primitive court, beginning with its worthy head, the sultan.

"The sultan is a man past fifty years of age, short and puffy
in person, with a countenance which expresses very obviously the
imbecility of his mind. His right hand is garnished with an extra
diminutive thumb, the natural member being crooked and distorted. His
mind, indexed by his face, seems to be a chaos of confusion; without
acuteness, without dignity, and without good sense. He can neither
read nor write; is guided by the last speaker; and his advisers, as
might be expected, are of the lower order, and mischievous from their
ignorance and their greediness. He is always talking, and generally
joking; and the most serious subjects never meet with five minutes'
consecutive attention. The favorable side of his character is, that he
is good-tempered and good-natured; by no means cruel; and, in a certain
way, generous, though rapacious to a high degree. His rapacity, indeed,
is carried to such an excess as to astonish a European, and is evinced
in a thousand mean ways. The presents I made him were unquestionably
handsome; but he was not content without begging from me the share
I had reserved for the other Pangerans; and afterward, through
Mr. Williamson, solicited more trifles, such as sugar, penknives,
and the like. To crown all, he was incessantly asking what was left
in the vessel; and when told the truth,--that I was stripped as bare
as a tree in winter,--he frequently returned to the charge. In the
middle of the night, when our boat came up with some gifts for him,
he slipped out his royal person, that he might see what packages there
were. I must say, however, that this was not intended for me to know;
and, personally, he did not behave very ill toward me, only dunning
me occasionally. In regard to the Sarawak revenue, he was eager in his
inquiries; and was very ready, on the strength of his thousand dollars,
and my generosity, to give me a list of things which amounted to 10,000
dollars in value. I may note one other feature which marks the man. He
requested, as the greatest favor,--he urged, with the earnestness of
a child,--that I would send back the schooner before the month Ramban
(Ramadan of the Turks); remarking, 'What shall I do during the fast
without soft sugar and dates?' What effect the exaggerated promises of
Mr. de Souza must have had on such a temper, may readily be imagined;
and what the evil influence of such a prince on the country, needs
not be stated; for, like other fools, he is difficult to guide where
the object is right, and facile whenever it promises any immediate
advantage. I will only add, that during my intercourse of six days,
he has given me the impression that he is not in his right mind; and,
at any rate, that flattery and bad counsel have deprived him of the
little wit he might probably originally have possessed.

"Of Pangeran Mumin, the De Gadong and the sultan's son-in-law, I
know little; and he is, in secret, a most determined opposer of mine;
but I believe he, as well as most, is desirous of being good friends
with the English, and will readily listen to any overtures which
promise increase of trade. He seemed to me a shrewd, cunning man,
fit for a Nakoda.

"Pangeran Usop is a man of middle age, short, active, and intelligent,
and, I may add, ambitious. Pangeran Muda Hassim will throw himself into
the arms of the English, from his partiality, and from the hope of a
better order of things, and the eventual succession to the throne,
to which he stands next,--the present sultan having no legitimate
children.

"Two of my objects were thus achieved at once; and the Kleeses
(twenty-three) were, much to their satisfaction, dispatched to the
vessel in the Melbourne's gig. My own affair of Sarawak meets with some
opposition from Mumin, who is decidedly friendly to Macota. The sultan,
however, is steady to me, gabbles daily and hourly of his intentions;
and Pangeran Usop likewise pushes on my suit with his influence,
at the same time giving me this one piece of good advice, viz. that
Muda Hassim must be induced to return to Borneo, for that two persons
(Muda Hassim and myself) cannot govern together; and he added, 'If
Muda Hassim returns, you will have a fine trade at Sarawak; but while
he is there, no native prahus will visit the place.' This is true: I
have no fear of ultimate success in my suit; but delay is formidable,
and I have already intimated that I propose making my _congé_ on the
2d of August.

"_30th._--I have little more to add about Borneo, save my plaint
against our dungeon, though the said dungeon be honorably situated
behind the throne, and within the royal apartments. Just below
the town are several rills of the finest water; and the natives
report that they issue from a small but deep lake at a very short
distance. Beneath one of these spouts we each evening took a most
delicious bath in water as cold as it is limpid. I am no great bustler
at any time; but since being here, I have purposely abstained from
all manifestation of curiosity, and never desired or requested to see
much; it rouses suspicion, and suspicion rouses distrust, and distrust
draws the kris. On the contrary, by being backward at first, you become
subsequently a sort of domesticated animal, and privileged to use your
eyes and limbs. Most Europeans do themselves great injury by searching
the mountains and the waters, breaking the rocks, shooting the birds,
and gathering the plants. The natives can never believe they would take
so much trouble without being well paid by the value of the treasures
found, or employed by the East India Company to espy their land,
in order that the said company might seize it at their convenience.

"_31st._--A conclave of Pangerans, when it was finally resolved to
grant the country of Sarawak to me as rajah or governor.

"_August 1st, 1842._--An important day in my history, and I hope one
which will be marked with a white stone in the annals of Sarawak. The
letters to Muda Hassim being finished and signed, the contract giving
me the government of Sarawak came under discussion, and was likewise
completed by ten at night, signed, sealed, and witnessed. Thus I
have gained every object for which I came to Borneo; and to-morrow,
God willing, I take my leave.

"The miserable state of Borneo I have already mentioned; and it is now
a saying of the Balagnini pirates, that 'it is difficult to catch fish,
but easy to catch Borneons.' Externally and internally they are equally
wretched, and torn by factions; yet, on the whole, I am not inclined to
judge harshly of the poorer order of them. They are a good-tempered,
very hospitable, and unwarlike people, the victims of their rajahs;
the oppressed, but not the oppressors. In this character, however,
I do not reckon the Pangerans and their followers. It is from these
latter that Europeans take their estimate of the people generally,
and consequently truly account them, from that standard, to be a
wretched sample of humanity--mean, thievish, arrogant, insolent, and
ready for any wickedness. The Pangerans themselves are only a step
better: but even here I must make a little allowance; for I believe
their crimes arise more from their poverty and impunity than from
any inherent viciousness.

"_3d._--The Pangerans Budrudeen and Marsale, and a host more, came
on board this night, and kept us up as usual.

"_4th._--Another mob arrived the middle of last night. I retreated
from them, being far from well, and got some sleep. At 2 P.M. the
letters came on board; were received with honors; and as soon as we
could rid ourselves of our troublesome visitors, we dropped outside
Tanjong Sapo, and sailed the following day.

"The Kleeses sold at Malludu were brought from Ambun, and reported
to the authorities that a European woman was detained there. I made
particular inquires of the Borneon Pangerans, and they said they had
always understood that such was the case. Unhappy lady, if she be
a lady! Is it a compassionate part to release her after many years
of captivity?

"_14th._--Anchored off the Morotaba, having had nothing but calms,
light winds, and squalls.

"_15th._--Got part of the way up the river, and at 8 P.M. dropped our
anchor; and in about an hour later two boats started for Sarawak. The
night was moonlight, with a cold breeze; and, after a pleasant pull,
we arrived, and created as much sensation as we could desire. But it
was better, and I was gratified with the intelligence that everything
had gone on well during our absence. At break of day I went, fagged,
to bed. So ended our mission to Borneo.

"On the evening of the 18th the sultan's letters were produced in all
the state which could possibly be attained. On their arrival they were
received and brought up amid large wax torches, and the person who
was to read them was stationed on a raised platform; standing below
him was the rajah, with a saber in his hand; in front of the rajah
was his brother, Pangeran Jaffer, with a tremendous kempilan drawn;
and around were the other brothers and myself, all standing--the rest
of the company being seated. The letters were then read, the last one
appointing me to hold the government of Sarawak. After this the rajah
descended, and said aloud, 'If any one present disowns or contests
the sultan's appointment, let him now declare.' All were silent. He
next turned to the Patingis, and asked them; they were obedient to
the will of the sultan. Then came the other Pangerans--'Is there any
Pangeran or any young rajah that contests the question? Pangeran
Der Macota, what do you say?' Macota expressed his willingness to
obey. One or two other obnoxious Pangerans who had always opposed
themselves to me were each in turn challenged, and forced to promise
obedience. The rajah then waved his sword, and with a loud voice
exclaimed, 'Whoever he is that disobeys the sultan's mandate now
received, I will separate his skull;' at the moment some ten of his
brothers jumped from the verandah, and, drawing their long krisses,
began to flourish and dance about, thrusting close to Macota, striking
the pillar above his head, pointing their weapons at his breast. This
_amusement_, the violence of motion, the freedom from restraint, this
explosion of a long pent-up animosity, roused all their passions;
and had Macota, through an excess of fear or an excess of bravery,
started up, he would have been slain, and other blood would have
been spilt. But he was quiet, with his face pale and subdued, and,
as shortly as decency would permit after the riot had subsided, took
his leave. This scene is a custom with them; the only exception to
which was, that it was pointed so directly at Macota. I was glad,
at any rate, that all had gone off without bloodshed.

"_22d._--I found that though matters had been quiet during my absence,
repeated efforts had been made to disturb the country. First, it was
positively stated and industriously circulated that I was certain
to be killed in Borneo; and next a report was propagated that 6000
Chinese were on their march from Sambas, with evil intentions. These
rumors did not serve any object, and my return has set them at rest;
but I regretted to hear that the Singè Dyaks had, contrary to my
positive prohibition, killed a Dyak of Sanpro.

"Other affairs are prosperous. Macota is to be sent out of the country,
and the rajah himself talks of returning to Borneo; and both these
events will please me greatly.

"_January 1st, 1843._--Another year passed and gone; a year, with all
its anxieties, its troubles, its dangers, upon which I can look back
with satisfaction--a year in which I have been usefully employed in
doing good to others.

"Since I last wrote, the Dyaks have been quiet, settled, and improving;
the Chinese advancing toward prosperity; and the Sarawak people,
wonderfully contented and industrious, relieved from oppression,
and fields of labor allowed them.

"Justice I have executed with an unflinching hand; and the amount of
crime is certainly small--the petty swindling very great.

"The month of January was a dreary month. A sick man in the house, and
very little medicine; and what was worse, the Royalist did not make her
appearance. Yet both these troubles disappeared nearly together; for
M'Kenzie got well, and the schooner, bringing with her Dr. Treacher,
arrived. She had been detained undergoing some necessary repairs. The
accession of a medical man is particularly valuable.

"I have nothing to say about the country, except that I have given
Pangeran Macota orders to leave, which he is obeying in as far as
preparing his boat; and I hope that in six weeks we shall be rid of
his cunning and diabolically intriguing presence.

"The Rajah Muda Hassim, his brothers, and the tag-rag following,
I also hope soon to be rid of; for although they behave far better
than they did at first, it is an evil to have wheel within wheel;
and these young rajahs of course expect, and are accustomed to,
a license which I will not allow.

"Budrudeen is an exception--a striking and wonderful instance of the
force of good sense over evil education.

"The rest of the people go on well; the time revolves quietly; and
the Dyaks, as well as the Malays and Chinese, enjoy the inestimable
blessing of peace and security. At intervals a cloud threatens
the serenity of our political atmosphere; but it speedily blows
over. However, all is well and safe; and so safe that I have resolved
to proceed in person to Singapore.

"My motives for going are various; but I hope to do good, to excite
interest, and make friends; and I can find no season like the present
for my absence. It is now two years since I left Singapore, 'the
boundary of civilization.' I have been out of the civilized world,
living in a demi-civilized state, peaceably, innocently, and usefully.

"_Feb. 8th._--After ten days' delay at the mouth of the river,
got out."






CHAPTER XV.

    Captain Keppel's voyage in the Dido with Mr. Brooke
    to Sarawak.--Chase of three piratical prahus.--Boat
    expedition.--Action with the pirates, and capture of a
    prahu.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Mr. Brooke's reception.--Captain
    Keppel and his officers visit the Rajah.--The palace and the
    audience.--Return royal visit to the Dido.--Mr. Brooke's residence
    and household.--Dr. Treacher's adventure with one of the ladies
    of Macota's harem.--Another boat affair with the pirates, and
    death of their chief.


I have now followed Mr. Brooke's journal up to the time of our first
meeting at Singapore, and his accompanying me to Sarawak, and have
no remarks of my own to offer that could add in the slightest degree
to its interest; happily, none such are needed. I had not yet seen my
friend's journal when I arrived at Sarawak, nor was it until some time
after that I by degrees learned the progress of his infant government
from its commencement. It was with unfeigned pleasure I then found
that, while performing my duty in the suppression of piracy, I was,
at the same time, rendering the greatest assistance and support to
an individual in his praiseworthy, novel, and important position.

I had long felt a desire to explore the Island of Borneo, which the
few travelers who have called there describe as not only one of the
largest and most fertile in the world, but one of the most productive
in gold and diamonds, and other rich minerals and ores; one from which
the finest camphor known is brought into merchandise, and which is
undoubtedly capable of supplying every kind of valuable spice, and
articles of universal traffic and consumption. Yet, with all these
capabilities and inducements to tempt the energetic spirit of trade,
the internal condition of the country, and the dangers which beset
its coasts, have hitherto prevented the interior from being explored
by Europeans; and to prove how little we are acquainted even with its
shores, I actually sailed by the best Admiralty chart eighty miles
inland, and over the tops of mountains!

_May 4th, 1843._--Passed through the Tambelans, a beautiful group
of between 100 and 150 small islands. They are very extensive, and
but thinly inhabited. There is good anchorage near some of them; but
we had nothing less than twenty fathoms. They are placed so close
together that, after passing the first, we were to all appearance
completely land-locked in a magnificent and capacious harbor. The
following morning we anchored off the mouth of the Sambas river,
and sent the boats away to examine the creeks, islands, and rivers
along the coast for traces of pirates--which were discovered by the
remains of their fires on different parts, although no clew could be
obtained as to the direction in which they had gone. On the morning
of the 8th I again sent the pinnace and two cutters, Mr. Partridge,
Messrs. D'Aeth and Jenkins, with a week's provisions, the whole under
the command of Lieutenant Wilmot Horton, Mr. Brooke kindly offering
his assistance, which, from his knowledge of the Malay language, as
well as of the kind of vessels used by the pirates, was thankfully
accepted. I directed them to proceed to the Island of Marundum, and,
after visiting the South Natunas, to rejoin the Dido at Sarawak. In
the mean time I proceeded leisurely along the coast, anchoring where
convenient, and finding regular soundings all the way in from four
to ten fathoms: weather remarkably fine, and water smooth. On the
morning of the 9th, on rounding Tanjong Datu, we opened suddenly on a
suspicious-looking boat, which, on making us out, ran for a small, deep
bay formed by Cape Datu and the next point to the eastward. Standing
a little further on, we discovered a second large boat in the offing,
which likewise stood in shore, and afterward a third at the bottom
of the bay. From the description I had received, I easily made these
out to be Illanuns, an enterprising tribe of pirates, of whose daring
adventures I had heard much. They inhabit a small cluster of islands
off the N.E. coast of Borneo, and go out in large fleets every year to
look for prahus bound to Singapore or the Straits; and, after capturing
the vessels, reduce their crews to slavery. It is of a cruel nature;
for Mr. Brooke observes: "Nor is the slavery of that mild description
which is often attributed to the Asiatics; for these victims are bound
for months, and crowded in the bottom of the pirate vessels, where
they suffer all the miseries which could be inflicted on board an
African slaver."--Having fairly pinned these worthies into a corner,
and knowing that the only two small boats I had left on board would
stand no chance with them in pulling, to make sure of my prizes I
loaded the two foremost guns on each side, and, having no proper chart
of the coast, proceeded under easy sail, feeling my way into the bay
with the lead. When just within musket-range, I let go the anchor,
which was no sooner done than the three boats commenced making a
move. I thought at first they were coming alongside to sue for pardon
and peace; and my astonishment was great when I discovered that nothing
was further from their intention. One pulled away, close in shore,
to the eastward, and the other two to the westward. They were rowed
by about forty oars each, and appeared, from their swiftness, to be
flying, and that, too, from under my very nose; and what rendered it
still more ridiculous and disagreeable, owing to a strong ebb tide,
the ship remained exactly in a position that no gun could be brought
to bear on either side. The dingy and jolly-boat gave chase; but the
pirates had the start, and it was useless; for although a few men were
seen to drop from their oars in consequence of our fire of musketry
from the forecastle, still their pace never slackened; and when they
did come within the bearing of our guns, which they were obliged to
do for a minute or two while rounding the points that formed the bay,
though our thirty-two pound shot fell thickly about their heads,
frequently dashing the spray all over them, not a man flinched from
his oar. We could not help admiring their plan of escape, and the
gallant manner in which it was effected. I saw that it would be quite
unavailing to attempt to catch the boats that had pulled to windward;
but we lost no time in slipping our cable and making all sail in
chase of the one that had gone to leeward. But the "artful dodger"
was still too fast for us: we lost sight of him at dusk, close off
the mouth of a river, up which, however, I do not think he went; for
our two boats were there very shortly after him; and although they
searched all night and next morning, they could discover no traces
of the fugitive. Besides, these pirates have no friends among the
inhabitants of the province of Sarawak who would have screened them
from us; on the contrary, they would have put them to death if once
in their power. I certainly never made so sure of any thing in my
life as of capturing the three prahus after I had seen them safe at
the bottom of the little bay at Tanjong Datu: but "there is many a
slip between the cup and the lip." We returned the following day to
pick up the anchor and cable, and observed that it was a place well
adapted as a rendezvous for pirates. The bay is studded with rocks;
and, to my horror, I found that I had run her majesty's ship Dido
inside two that were a-wash at low water! A mountain stream of most
delicious water runs into the bay between two rocks, and the coast
abounds with oysters.

On the 13th the Dido anchored off Tanjong Poe, outside the bar at
the entrance of the river leading to Mr. Brooke's residence and seat
of government, at the town of Sarawak, situated about twenty-four
miles up. At half-tide on the following morning we crossed the bar,
carrying no less than three and a half fathoms, and entered the
beautiful river of Morotaba, which we ran up for the first fifteen
miles under all sail, with a fresh, leading breeze. The Dido was the
first square-rigged vessel that had ever entered those waters. We came
to at the junction river which unites the two principal entrances to
the Sarawak.

In the evening our boats returned on board from their expedition,
having reached Sarawak the day previous by the western entrance. On
leaving the Dido, on the morning of the 8th, they proceeded to the
Island of Marundum, a favorite rendezvous for pirates, where they
came on a fleet of the Illanum tribe, who, however, did not give them
an opportunity of closing; but, cutting their sampans adrift, made a
precipitate flight, opening fire as they ran out on the opposite side
of a small bay, in which they had been watering and refitting. This,
of course, led to a very exciting chase, with a running fire kept up
on both sides; but the distance was too great for the range of the
guns on either side; and the pirates, who, in addition to sailing
well, were propelled by from forty to sixty oars each, made their
escape. It was not until nearly hull-down that they (probably out
of bravado) ceased to fire their stern guns. As they went in the
direction of the Natunas, our boats steered for those islands, and
anchored under the south end of one of them. At daylight next morning,
although in three fathoms water, the pinnace, owing to the great rise
and fall of tide, grounded on a coral reef, and Lieutenant Horton
and Mr. Brooke proceeded in one of the cutters to reconnoiter. As
they neared the s.w. point, they were met by six prahus, beating
their tom-toms as they advanced, and making every demonstration of
fighting. Lieutenant Horton judiciously turned to rejoin the other
boats; and the pinnace having, fortunately, just then floated, he
formed his little squadron into line abreast, cleared for action,
and prepared to meet his formidable-looking antagonists. Mr. Brooke,
however, whose eye had been accustomed to the cut and rig of all
the boats in these seas, discovered that those advancing were not
Illanuns, and fancied there must be some mistake. The Natunas people
had been trading with Sarawak, and he was intimately acquainted with
a rich and powerful chief who resided on the island; he therefore
raised a white flag of truce on his spy-glass, and from the bow of
the pinnace hailed, waved, and made all the signs he could to warn
them of the danger into which they were running; but a discharge of
small arms was the only reply he got. They then detached their three
smallest vessels inshore, so as to command a cross-fire, and cut off
the retreat of our boats; and the rest advanced, yelling, beating
their tom-toms, and blazing away with all the confidence of victory,
their shot cutting through the rigging, and splashing in the water
all around. It was an anxious moment for the Dido's little party. Not
a word was spoken. The only gun of the pinnace was loaded with grape
and canister, and kept pointed on the largest prahu. The men waited,
with their muskets in hand, for permission to fire; but it was not
until within pistol-range that Lieutenant Horton poured into the
enemy his well-prepared dose. It instantly brought them to a halt;
yet they had the temerity to exchange shots for a few minutes longer,
when the largest cried for quarter, and the other five made for the
shore, chased by the two cutters, and keeping up a fire to the last.

The prize taken possession of by the pinnace proved to be a prahu
mounting three brass guns, with a crew of thirty-six men, belonging
to the Rajah of Rhio, and which had been dispatched by that chief to
collect tribute at and about the Natunas islands. They had on board ten
men killed, and eleven (four of them mortally) wounded. They affected
the greatest astonishment on discovering that our boats belonged
to a British man-of-war, and protested that it was all a mistake;
that the island had lately been plundered by the Illanun pirates,
for whom they had taken us; that the rising sun was in their eyes,
and that they could not make out the colors, &c. Lieutenant Horton,
thinking that their story might possibly have some foundation in truth,
and taking into consideration the severe lesson they had received,
directed Dr. Simpson, the assistant-surgeon, to dress their wounds;
and after admonishing them to be more circumspect in future, restored
them their boat, as well as the others which belonged to the island,
two of them being a trifle smaller, but of the same armament as
the one from Rhio, and the remaining three still smaller, carrying
twelve men each, armed with spears and muskets. These had been taken
possession of by the cutters after they had reached the shore and
landed their killed and wounded, who were borne away from the beach
so smartly by the natives that our people had not time to ascertain
the number hurt. The surgeon went ashore, and dressed the wounds of
several of them, an act of kindness and civilization far beyond their
comprehension. The natives, however, appeared to bear us no malice
for the injury we had inflicted on their countrymen, but loaded our
boats with fruit, goats, and every thing we required. It afforded some
amusement to find that among the slightly wounded was Mr. Brooke's
old, wealthy, and respectable friend already alluded to, who was not
a little ashamed at being recognized; but piracy is so inherent in a
Malay, that few can resist the temptation when a good opportunity for
plunder presents itself. The fact, which I afterward ascertained, was,
that they took our boats for some coming from a wreck with whatever
valuables they could collect; and their not having seen any thing of
the ship rather strengthened this conjecture; the excuse they made
for continuing the fight after they had discovered their mistake
being that they expected no quarter. [15]

_May 16th._--We proceeded up the river twelve miles further into the
interior of this interesting country, and with my friend Mr. Brooke
on board, approached Sarawak, his seat of government; in the reach
before you near which, and off the right bank of the river, is a long
and dangerous shelf of rocks. The deep channel which lies between the
bank and the rocks is not more than sixty or seventy feet wide, and
required some little care in passing; but, with the exception of the
flying jibboom, which got nipped off in the branch of a magnificent
overhanging tree, we anchored without accident in six fathoms water,
and greatly astonished the natives with a royal salute in honor of Muda
Hassim, the Rajah of Borneo. During the whole morning large boats, some
carrying as many as two hundred people, had been coming down the river
to hail Mr. Brooke's return; and one of the greatest gratifications I
had was in witnessing the undisguised delight, mingled with gratitude
and respect, with which each head man welcomed their newly-elected
ruler back to his adopted country. Although many of the Malay chiefs
had every reason to expect that in the Dido they saw the means by
which their misdeeds were to be punished, they showed their confidence
in Mr. Brooke by bringing their children with them--a sign peculiar
to the Malay. The scene was both novel and exciting; presenting to
us, just anchored in a large fresh-water river, and surrounded by a
densely-wooded jungle, the whole surface of the water covered with
canoes and boats dressed out with their various-colored silken flags,
filled with natives beating their tom-toms, and playing on their wild
and not unpleasant-sounding wind-instruments, with the occasional
discharge of firearms. To them it must have been equally striking
and extraordinary (as few of them had ever seen any larger vessel
than their own war-boats, or a European, until Mr. Brooke's arrival)
to witness the Dido anchored almost in the center of their town, her
mast-heads towering above the highest trees of their jungle; the loud
report of her heavy two-and-thirty pounder guns, and the running aloft,
to furl sails, of 150 seamen, in their clean white dresses, and with
the band playing, all which helped to make an impression that will
not easily be forgotten at Sarawak. I was anxious that Mr. Brooke
should land with all the honors due to so important a personage,
which he accordingly did, under a salute. The next business was my
visit of ceremony to the rajah, which was great fun, though conducted
in the most imposing manner. The band, and the marines, as a guard,
having landed, we (the officers) all assembled at Mr. Brooke's house,
where, having made ourselves as formidable as we could with swords
and cocked hats, we marched in procession to the royal residence,
his majesty having sent one of his brothers, who led me by the hand
into his presence. The palace was a long, low shed, built on piles,
to which we ascended by a ladder. The audience-chamber was hung with
red and yellow silk curtains, and round the back and one side of the
platform occupied by the rajah were ranged his ministers, warriors,
and men-at-arms, bearing spears, swords, shields, and other warlike
weapons. Opposite to them were drawn up our royal marines, the
contrast between the two body-guards being very amusing. Muda Hassim
is a wretched-looking, little man; still there was a courteous and
gentle manner about him that prepossessed us in his favor, and made
us feel that we were before an individual who had been accustomed to
command. We took our seats in a semicircle, on chairs provided for
the occasion, and smoked cigars and drank tea. His majesty chewed
his sirih-leaf and betel-nut, seated with one leg crossed under him,
and playing with his toes. Very little is ever said during these
audiences, so we sat staring at one another for half an hour with
mutual astonishment; and, after the usual compliments of wishing our
friendship might last as long as the moon, and my having offered him
the Dido and every thing else that did not belong to me in exchange
for his house, we took our leave.

_May 19th._--This was the day fixed for the rajah's visit to the Dido,
about which he appeared very anxious, although he had seldom been
known to go beyond his own threshold. For this ceremony all the boats,
guns, tom-toms, flags, and population were put in requisition; and the
procession to the ship was a very gorgeous and amusing spectacle. We
received him on board with a royal salute. He brought in his train a
whole tribe of natural brothers. His guards and followers were strange
enough, and far too numerous to be admitted on the Dido's deck,
so that as soon as a sufficient number had scrambled on board, the
sentry had orders to prevent any more from crowding in; but whether,
in so doing, the most important personages of the realm were kept out,
we did not ascertain. One fellow succeeded in obtaining a footing
with a large yellow silk canopy, a corner of which having run into
the eye of one of the midshipmen, the bearer missed his footing, and
down came the whole concern--as I was informed, by _accident_! The
party assembled in my cabin, and the remarks were few, nor did they
manifest great astonishment at any thing. In fact, a Malay never
allows himself to be taken by surprise. I believe, however, the rajah
did not think much of my veracity, when I informed him that this was
not the largest ship belonging to her Britannic majesty, and that she
had several mounting upward of 100 guns, though he admitted that he
had seen a grander sight than any of his ancestors. There was much
distress depicted in the royal countenance during his visit which I
afterward ascertained was owing to his having been informed that he
must not spit in my cabin. On leaving the ship, whether the cherry
brandy he had taken made him forget the directions he had received,
I do not know, but he squirted a mouthful of red betel-nut juice over
the white deck, and then had the temerity to hold out his hand to the
first lieutenant, who hastily applied to him the style (not royal)
of "a dirty beast," which not understanding, he smiled graciously,
taking it as some compliment peculiar to the English.

This farce over, I had now some time to look about me, and to refit my
ship in one of the prettiest spots on earth, and as unlike a dock-yard
as any thing could be.

Mr. Brooke's then residence, although equally rude in structure with
the abodes of the natives, was not without its English comforts of
sofas, chairs, and bedsteads. It was larger than any of the others,
but being, like them, built on piles, we had to mount a ladder to
get into it. It was situated on the same side of the river (the
right bank), next to, but rather in the rear of, the rajah's palace,
with a clear space of about 150 yards between the back and the edge
of the jungle. It was surrounded by palisades and a ditch, forming a
protection to sheep, goats, pigeons, cats, poultry, geese, monkeys,
dogs, ducks, and, occasionally, bullocks. The house consisted of but
one floor. A large room in the center, neatly ornamented with every
description of firearms, in admirable order and ready for use, served
as an audience and mess-room; and the various apartments round it
as bed-rooms, most of them comfortably furnished with matted floors,
easy chairs, pictures, and books, with much more taste and attention
to comfort than bachelors usually display. In one corner of the square
formed by the palisades were the kitchen and offices. The Europeans
with Mr. Brooke consisted of Mr. Douglas, formerly in the navy,
a clever young surgeon, and a gentleman of the name of Williamson,
who, being master of the native language, as well as active and
intelligent, made an excellent prime minister. Besides these were two
others, who came out in the yacht, one an old man-of-war's man, who
kept the arms in first-rate condition, and another worthy character,
who answered to the name of Charley, and took care of the accounts and
charge of every thing. These were attended by servants of different
nations. The cooking establishment was perfect, and the utmost harmony
prevailed. The great feeding-time was at sunset, when Mr. Brooke
took his seat at the head of the table, and all the establishment,
as in days of yore, seated themselves according to their respective
grades. This hospitable board was open to all the officers of the Dido;
and many a jovial evening we spent there. All Mr. Brooke's party were
characters--all had traveled; and never did a minute flag for want of
some entertaining anecdote, good story, or song, to pass away the time;
and it was while smoking our cigars in the evening that the natives,
as well as the Chinese who had become settlers, used to drop in,
and, after creeping up according to their custom, and touching the
hand of their European rajah, retire to the further end of the room,
and squat down upon their haunches, remain a couple of hours without
uttering a word, and then creep out again. I have seen sixty or
seventy of an evening come in and make this sort of salaam. All the
Malays were armed; and it is reckoned an insult for one of them to
appear before a rajah without his kris. I could not help remarking
the manly, independent bearing of the half-savage and nearly naked
mountain Dyak compared with the sneaking deportment of the Malay.

The following little adventure was told me during my stay at Sarawak,
by Dr. Treacher, who had lately joined Mr. Brooke, his former medical
attendant having returned to England. It appears that Dr. Treacher
received a message by a confidential slave that one of the ladies of
Macota's harem desired an interview, appointing a secluded spot in
the jungle as the rendezvous. The doctor, being aware of his own good
looks, fancied he had made a conquest, and, having got himself up as
showily as he could, was there at the appointed time. He described
the poor girl as both young and pretty, but with a dignified and
determined look, which at once convinced him that she was moved to
take so dangerous a step by some deeper feeling than that of a mere
fancy for his person. She complained of the ill treatment she had
received from Macota, and the miserable life she led, and avowed that
her firm resolve was to destroy (not herself, gentle creature! but)
him; for which purpose she wanted a small portion of arsenic. It was
a disappointment that he could not comply with her request; so they
parted--he full of pity and love for her, and she, in all probability,
full of contempt for a man who felt for her wrongs, but would not
aid in the very simple means she had proposed for redressing them.

While at Singapore, Mr. Whitehead had kindly offered to allow his
yacht, the Emily, a schooner of about fifty tons, with a native crew,
to bring our letters to Borneo, on the arrival at Singapore of the
mail from England. About the time she was expected, I thought it
advisable to send a boat to cruise in the vicinity of Cape Datu, in
case of her falling in with any of these piratical gentry. The Dido's
largest boat, the pinnace, being under repair, Mr. Brooke lent a large
boat which he had had built by the natives at Sarawak, and called the
Jolly Bachelor. Having fitted her with a brass six-pounder long gun,
with a volunteer crew of a mate, two midshipmen, six marines, and
twelve seamen, and a fortnight's provisions, I dispatched her under
the command of the second lieutenant, Mr. Hunt; Mr. Douglas, speaking
the Malayan language, likewise volunteered his services. One evening,
after they had been about six days absent, while we were at dinner,
young Douglas made his appearance, bearing in his arms the captured
colors of an Illanun pirate. It appears that the day after they had
got outside they observed three boats a long way in the offing, to
which they gave chase, but soon lost sight of them, owing to their
superior sailing. They, however, appeared a second and a third time,
after dark, but without the Jolly Bachelor being able to get near
them; and it now being late, and the crew both fatigued and hungry,
they pulled inshore, lighted a fire, cooked their provisions,
and then hauled the boat out to her grapnel, near some rocks, for
the night; lying down to rest with their arms by their sides, and
muskets round the mast, ready loaded. Having also placed sentries and
look-out men, and appointed an officer of the watch, they one and all
(sentries included, I suppose), owing to the fatigues of the day,
fell asleep! At about three o'clock the following morning, the moon
being just about to rise, Lieut. Hunt happening to be awake, observed
a savage brandishing a kris, and performing his war-dance on the bit
of deck, in an ecstasy of delight, thinking, in all probability, of
the ease with which he had got possession of a fine trading-boat, and
calculating the cargo of slaves he had to sell, but little dreaming of
the hornets' nest into which he had fallen. Lieut. Hunt's round face
meeting the light of the rising moon, without a turban surmounting it,
was the first notice the pirate had of his mistake. He immediately
plunged overboard; and before Lieut. Hunt had sufficiently recovered
his astonishment to know whether he was dreaming or not, or to rouse
his crew up, a discharge from three or four cannon within a few yards,
and the cutting through the rigging by the various missiles with which
the guns were loaded, soon convinced him there was no mistake. It
was as well the men were still lying down when this discharge took
place, as not one of them was hurt; but on jumping to their legs,
they found themselves closely pressed by two large war-prahus,
one on each bow. To return the fire, cut the cable, man the oars,
and back astern to gain room, was the work of a minute; but now came
the tug of war; it was a case of life and death. Our men fought as
British sailors ought to do; quarter was not expected on either side;
and the quick and deadly aim of the marines prevented the pirates from
reloading their guns. The Illanun prahus are built with strong bulwarks
or barricades, grape-shot proof, across the fore part of the boat,
through which ports are formed for working the guns; these bulwarks
had to be cut away by round shot from the Jolly Bachelor before the
musketry could bear effectually. This done, the grape and canister
told with fearful execution. In the mean time, the prahus had been
pressing forward to board, while the Jolly Bachelor backed astern; but,
as soon as this service was achieved, our men dropped their oars, and,
seizing their muskets, dashed on: the work was sharp, but short, and
the slaughter great. While one pirate boat was sinking, and an effort
made to secure her, the other effected her escape by rounding the point
of rocks, where a third and larger prahu, hitherto unseen, came to her
assistance, and putting fresh hands on board, and taking her in tow,
succeeded in getting off, although chased by the Jolly Bachelor, after
setting fire to the crippled prize, which blew up and sunk before the
conquerors got back to the scene of action. While there, a man swam off
to them from the shore, who proved to be one of the captured slaves,
and had made his escape by leaping overboard during the fight. The
three prahus were the same Illanun pirates we had so suddenly come
upon off Cape Datu in the Dido, and they belonged to the same fleet
that Lieut. Horton had chased off the Island of Marundum. The slave
prisoner had been seized, with a companion, in a small fishing canoe,
off Borneo Proper; his companion suffered in the general slaughter. The
sight that presented itself on our people boarding the captured boat
must indeed have been a frightful one. None of the pirates waited on
board for even the chance of receiving either quarter or mercy, but
all those capable of moving had thrown themselves into the water. In
addition to the killed, some lying across the thwarts, with their
oars in their hands, at the bottom of the prahu, in which there was
about three feet of blood and water, were seen protruding the mangled
remains of eighteen or twenty bodies. During my last expedition I
fell in with a slave belonging to a Malay chief, one of our allies,
who informed us that he likewise had been a prisoner, and pulled an
oar in one of the two prahus that attacked the Jolly Bachelor; that
none of the crew of the captured prahu reached the shore alive, with
the exception of the lad that swam off to our people; and that there
were so few who survived in the second prahu, that, having separated
from their consort during the night, the slaves, fifteen in number,
rose and put to death the remaining pirates, and then ran the vessel
into the first river they reached, which proved to be the Kaleka, where
they were seized, and became the property of the governing Datu; and
my informant was again sold to my companion, while on a visit to his
friend the Datu. Each of the attacking prahus had between fifty and
sixty men, including slaves, and the larger one between ninety and
a hundred. The result might have been very different to our gallant
but dosy Jolly Bachelors.

I have already mentioned the slaughter committed by the fire of the
pinnace, under Lieutenant Horton, into the largest Malay prahu; and
the account given of the scene which presented itself on the deck of
the defeated pirate, when taken possession of, affords a striking
proof of the character of these fierce rovers; resembling greatly
what we read of the Norsemen and Scandinavians of early ages. Among
the mortally wounded lay the young commander of the prahu, one of
the most noble forms of the human race; his countenance handsome
as the hero of Oriental romance, and his whole bearing wonderfully
impressive and touching. He was shot in front and through the lungs,
and his last moments were rapidly approaching. He endeavored to speak,
but the blood gushed from his mouth with the voice he vainly essayed
to utter in words. Again and again he tried, but again and again
the vital fluid drowned the dying effort. He looked as if he had
something of importance which he desired to communicate, and a shade
of disappointment and regret passed over his brow when he felt that
every essay was unavailing, and that his manly strength and daring
spirit were dissolving into the dark night of death. The pitying
conquerors raised him gently up, and he was seated in comparative
ease, for the welling out of the blood was less distressing; but the
end speedily came: he folded his arms heroically across his wounded
breast, fixed bis eyes upon the British seamen around, and, casting
one last glance at the ocean--the theater of his daring exploits,
on which he had so often fought and triumphed--expired without a sigh.

The spectators, though not unused to tragical and sanguinary sights,
were unanimous in speaking of the death of the pirate chief as the
most affecting spectacle they had ever witnessed. A sculptor might have
carved him as an Antinous in the mortal agonies of a Dying Gladiator.

The leaders of the piratical prahus are sometimes poetically addressed
by their followers as _Matari_, i. e., the sun; or _Bulan_, the moon;
and from his superiority in every respect, physical and intellectual,
the chief whose course was here so fatally closed seemed to be worthy
of either celestial name.







CHAPTER XVI.

    The Rajah's letter to Captain Keppel, and his reply.--Prepares
    for an expedition against the Sarebus pirates.--Pleasure
    excursion up the river.--The Chinese settlement.--The Singè
    mountain.--Interior of the residences.--Dyak festival of
    Maugut.--Relics.--Sporting.--Return to Sarawak.--The expedition
    against Sarebus.--State and number of the assailing force.--Ascent
    of the river.--Beauty of the scenery.


_May 21st._--I received intimation that the rajah had written a letter,
and wished me to appoint a time and place, that it might be presented
in due form. Accordingly I attended in Mr. Brooke's hall of audience on
the following day, where I found collected all the chiefs, and a crowd
of natives, many of them having already been informed that the said
letter was a requisition for me to assist in putting down the hordes
of pirates who had so long infested the coast. I believe many of those
present, especially the Borneons, to have been casually concerned,
if not deeply implicated, in some of their transactions. After I had
taken my seat with Mr. Brooke at the head of the table, the rajah's
sword-bearers entered, clearing the way for the huge yellow canopy,
under the shade of which, on a large brass tray, and carefully sewn
up in a yellow silk bag, was the letter, from which it was removed,
and placed in my hands by the Pangeran Budrudeen. I opened the bag
with my knife, and giving it to an interpreter, he read it aloud
in the Malayan tongue. It was variously received by the audience,
many of whose countenances were far from prepossessing.

The following is a copy of the letter, to which was affixed the
rajah's seal:


    "This friendly epistle, having its source in a pure mind,
    comes from Rajah Muda Hassim, next in succession to the royal
    throne of the kingdom of Borneo, and who now holds his court at
    the trading city of Sarawak, to our friend Henry Keppel, head
    captain of the war-frigate belonging to her Britannic Majesty,
    renowned throughout all countries--who is valiant and discreet,
    and endowed with a mild and gentle nature:

    "This is to inform our friend that there are certain great pirates,
    of the people of Sarebus and Sakarran, in our neighborhood,
    seizing goods and murdering people on the high seas. They have
    more than three hundred war-prahus, and extend their ravages even
    to Banjarmassim; they are not subject to the government of Bruni
    (Borneo); they take much plunder from vessels trading between
    Singapore and the good people of our country.

    "It would be a great service if our friend would adopt measures
    to put an end to these piratical outrages.

    "We can present nothing better to our friend than a kris, such
    as it is.

    "20th day of Rahial Akhir, 1257."


To which I sent the following reply:--


    "Captain Keppel begs to acknowledge the receipt of the Rajah
    Muda Hassim's letter, representing that the Dyaks of Sarebus and
    Sakarran are the pirates who infest the coast of Borneo, and do
    material damage to the trade of Singapore.

    "Captain Keppel will take speedy measures to suppress these and
    all other pirates, and feels confident that her Britannic Majesty
    will be glad to learn that the Rajah Muda Hassim is ready to
    coöperate in so laudable an undertaking."


Not being prepared for the oriental fashion of exchanging presents,
I had nothing to offer to his rajahship; but I found out afterward
that Mr. Brooke had (unknown to me) sent him a clock in my name. The
royal kris was handsome, the handle of carved ivory, with a good deal
of gold about it.

This information about the pirates gave me good ground to make a
beginning; and having arranged with Mr. Brooke to obtain all necessary
intelligence relative to their position, strength, and numbers, [16]
I determined on attacking them in their strongholds, commencing with
the Sarebus, who, from all accounts, were by far the most strongly
fortified. Mr. Brooke accepted my invitation to accompany us, as well
as to supply a native force of about three hundred men, who, should
we succeed in the destruction of the pirate forts, would be useful in
the jungle. Mr. Brooke's going to join personally in a war against (in
the opinion of the Datus) such formidable opponents as the Sakarran and
Sarebus pirates--who had never yet been conquered, although repeatedly
attacked by the united forces of the surrounding rajahs--was strongly
opposed by the chiefs. On his informing them that he should go, but
leaving it optional whether they would accompany him or not, their
simple reply was, "What is the use of our remaining? If you die,
we die; and if you live, we live; we will go with you." Preparations
for the expedition were accordingly commenced.

No place could have suited us better for a refit. Within a few yards
of the ship was a Chinese workshop. Our boats were hauled up to repair
under sheds, and we drew our fresh water alongside; and while the
Dido was at Sarawak, Mr. Jago, the carpenter, built a very beautiful
thirty-foot gig, having cut the plank up in the Chinaman's sawpit.

While these works were in progress, I accompanied Mr. Brooke up the
river. The Royalist having been dispatched to Singapore with our
letters, we started on our pleasure-excursion. With the officers
from the Dido and the chiefs, who always accompany the "Tuan Besar,"
we mustered about sixty persons; and with our guns, walking-sticks,
cigars, and a well supplied commissariat, determined to enjoy
ourselves.

We were not long in making the acquaintances of the chiefs. Men
who had formerly rebelled, who were conquered by Mr. Brooke, and
had their (forfeited) lives saved, their families restored to them,
and themselves finally reinstated in the offices they had previously
held--these men were very naturally and faithfully attached. Our young
gentlemen found their Malayan names difficult to remember, so that the
gallant old Patingi Ali was seldom called any other name than that of
"Three-Fingered Jack," from his having lost part of his right hand;
the Tumangong was spoken of as the "Father of Hopeful," from one of
his children, a fine little fellow, whom he was foolishly attached to,
and seldom seen without.

Der Macota, who had sometime before received the appellation of
"the Serpent," had, ever since he got his orders to quit, some six
months before, been preparing his boats, but which were ready in an
incredibly short time after the Dido's arrival; and thus Mr. Brooke got
rid of that most intriguing and troublesome rascal; a person who had,
from the commencement, been trying to supplant and ruin him. He it was
that gave the Sakarran pirates permission to ascend the river for the
purpose of attacking the comparatively defenceless mountain Dyaks;
and he it was that persecuted the unfortunate young Illanun chief,
Si Tundo, even to his assassination. He was at last got rid of from
Sarawak, but only to join and plan mischief with that noted piratical
chief, Seriff Sahib; he, however, met his deserts.

We ascended the river in eight or ten boats. The scene to us was
most novel, and particularly fresh and beautiful. We stopped at an
empty house on a cleared spot on the left bank during the ebb-tide,
to cook our dinner; in the cool of the afternoon we proceeded with
the flood; and late in the evening brought up for the night in a
snug little creek close to the Chinese settlement. We slept in native
boats, which were nicely and comfortably fitted for the purpose. At
an early hour Mr. Brooke was waited on by the chief of the Kunsi;
and on visiting their settlement he was received with a salute of
three guns. We found it kept in their usual neat and clean order,
particularly their extensive vegetable gardens; but being rather
pressed for time, we did not visit the mines, but proceeded to the
villages of different tribes of Dyaks living on the Sarambo mountain,
numbers of whom had been down to welcome us, very gorgeously dressed
in feathers and scarlet.

The foot of the mountain was about four miles from the landing-place;
and a number of these kind savages voluntarily shouldered our
provisions, beds, bags, and baggage, and we proceeded on our march. We
did not expect to find quite a turnpike-road; but, at the same time,
I, for one, was not prepared for the dance led us by our wild cat-like
guides through thick jungle, and alternately over rocky hills, or up
to our middles in the soft marshes we had to cross. Our only means of
doing so was by feeling on the surface of the mud (it being covered
in most places about a foot deep with grass or discolored water)
for light spars thrown along lengthwise and quite unconnected, while
our only support was an occasional stake at irregular distances,
at which we used to rest, as the spars invariably sunk into the mud
if we attempted to stop; and there being a long string of us, many
a fall and flounder in the mud (gun and all) was the consequence.

The ascent of the hill, although as steep as the side of a house,
was strikingly beautiful. Our resting-places, unluckily, were but few;
but when we did reach one, the cool, fresh breeze, and the increasing
extent and variety of scene--our view embracing, as it did, all the
varieties of river, mountain, wood, and sea--amply repaid us for the
exertion of the lower walk; and, on either hand, we were sure to have a
pure cool rivulet tumbling over the rocks. While going up, however, our
whole care and attention were requisite to secure our own safety; for
it is not only one continued climb up ladders, but such ladders! They
are made of the single trunk of a tree in its rough and rounded state,
with notches, not cut at the reasonable distance apart of the ratlins
of our rigging, but requiring the knee to be brought up to the level
of the chin before the feet are sufficiently parted to reach from
one step to another; and that, when the muscles of the thigh begin
to ache, and the wind is pumped out of the body, is distressing work.

We mounted, in this manner, some 500 feet; and it was up this steep
that Mr. Brooke had ascended only a few months before, with two hundred
followers, to attack the Singè Dyaks. He has already described the
circular halls of these Dyaks, in one of which we were received,
hung round, as the interior of it is, with hundreds of human heads,
most of them dried with the skin and hair on; and to give them, if
possible, a more ghastly appearance, small shells (the cowry) are
inserted where the eyes once were, and tufts of dried grass protrude
from the ears. But my eyes soon grew accustomed to the sight; and by
the time dinner was ready (I think I may say _we_) thought no more
about them than if they had been as many cocoa-nuts.

Of course the natives crowded round us; and I noticed that with these
simple people it was much the same as with the more civilized, and
that curiosity was strongest in the gentler sex; and again, that the
young men came in more gorgeously dressed, wearing feathers, necklaces,
armlets, ear-rings, bracelets, beside jackets of various-colored silks,
and other vanities--than the older and wiser chiefs, who encumbered
themselves with no more dress than what decency actually required,
and were, moreover, treated with the greatest respect.

We strolled about from house to house without causing the slightest
alarm: in all we were welcomed, and invited to squat ourselves on
their mats with the family. The women, who were some of them very
good-looking, did not run from us as the plain-headed Malays would have
done; but laughed and chatted to us by signs in all the consciousness
of innocence and virtue.

We were fortunate in visiting these Dyaks during one of their grand
festivals (called Maugut); and in the evening, dancing, singing,
and drinking were going on in various parts of the village. In one
house there was a grand _fête_, in which the women danced with the
men. The dress of the women was simple and curious--a light jacket
open in front, and a short petticoat not coming below the knees,
fitting close, was hung round with jingling bits of brass, which kept
"making music" wherever they went. The movement was like all other
native dances--graceful, but monotonous. There were four men, two of
them bearing human sculls, and two the fresh heads of pigs; the women
bore wax-lights, or yellow rice on brass dishes. They danced in line,
moving backward and forward, and carrying the heads and dishes in both
hands; the graceful part was the manner in which they half turned the
body to the right and left, looking over their shoulders and holding
the heads in the opposite direction, as if they were in momentary
expectation of some one coming up behind to snatch the nasty relic
from them. At times the women knelt down in a group, with the men
leaning over them. After all, the music was not the only thing wanting
to make one imagine oneself at the opera. The necklaces of the women
were chiefly of teeth--bears' the most common--human the most prized.

In an interior house at one end were collected the relics of the
tribe. These consisted of several round-looking stones, two deer's
heads, and other inferior trumpery. The stones turn black if the
tribe is to be beaten in war, and red if to be victorious; any one
touching them would be sure to die; if lost, the tribe would be ruined.

The account of the deer's heads is still more curious: A young Dyak
having dreamed the previous night that he should become a great
warrior, observed two deer swimming across the river, and killed
them; a storm came on with thunder and lightning, and darkness
came over the face of the earth; he died immediately, but came to
life again, and became a rumah guna (literally a _useful house_)
and chief of his tribe; the two deer still live, and remain to watch
over the affairs of the tribe. These heads have descended from their
ancestors from the time when they first became a tribe and inhabited
the mountain. Food is always kept placed before them, and renewed from
time to time. While in the circular building, which our party named
"the scullery," a young chief (Meta) seemed to take great pride in
answering our interrogatories respecting different skulls which we
took down from their hooks: two belonged to chiefs of a tribe who had
made a desperate defence; and judging from the incisions on the heads,
each of which must have been mortal, it must have been a desperate
affair. Among other trophies was half a head, the skull separated
from across between the eyes, in the same manner that you would
divide that of a hare or rabbit to get at the brain--this was their
division of the head of an old woman, which was taken when another
(a friendly) tribe was present, who likewise claimed their half. I
afterward saw these tribes share a head. But the skulls, the account
of which our informant appeared to dwell on with the greatest delight,
were those which were taken while the owners were asleep--cunning with
them being the perfection of warfare. We slept in their "scullery;"
and my servant Ashford, who happened to be a sleep-walker, that
night jumped out of the window, and unluckily on the steep side;
and had not the ground been well turned up by the numerous pigs,
and softened by rain, he must have been hurt.

_May 25th._--Having returned to our boats, we moved up another branch
of the river, for the purpose of deer-shooting, and landed under some
large shady trees. The sportsmen divided into two small parties, and,
under the guidance of the natives, went in search of game, leaving
the remainder of the party to prepare dinner against our return.

The distance we had to walk to get to our ground was what our guides
considered nothing--some five miles through jungle; and one of the
most distressing parts in jungle-walking is the having to climb over
the fallen trunks of immense trees.

A short time before sunset we came to a part of the jungle that
opened on to a large swamp, with long rank grass about six feet high,
across which was a sort of Dyak bridge. The guide having made signs
for me to advance, I cautiously crept to the edge of the jungle; and
after some little trouble, and watching the direction of his finger, I
observed the heads of two deer, male and female, protruding just above
the grass at about sixty yards' distance. From the manner the doe was
moving about her long ears, it had, to my view, all the appearance of a
rabbit. Shooting for the pot, I selected her. As soon as I fired, some
of my boat's crew made a dash into the grass; and in an instant three
of them were nearly up to their chins in mud and water, and we had
some difficulty in dragging them out: Our Malay guide more knowingly
crossed the bridge; and being acquainted with the locality, reached the
deer from the opposite side, taking care to utter a prayer and cut the
throat with the head in the direction of the Prophet's tomb at Mecca,
without which ceremony no true follower of Islam could partake of the
meat. The doe was struck just below the ear; and my native companion
appeared much astonished at the distance and deadly effect with which
my smooth-bored _Westley Richards_ had conveyed the ball.

The buck had got off before the smoke had cleared sufficiently for me
to see him. From what I had heard, I was disappointed at not seeing
more game. The other party had not killed anything, although they
caught a little fawn, having frightened away the mother.

My time was so occupied during my stay in Borneo, that I am unable
to give any account of the sport to be found in the island. Neither
had Mr. Brooke seen much of it; unless an excursion or two he had
made in search of new specimens of the ourang-outang, or mias, may
be brought under that head. This excursion he performed not only
with the permission and under the protection, but as the guest,
of the piratical chief Seriff Sahib; little thinking that, in four
years afterward, he would himself, as a powerful rajah, be the cause
of destroying his town, and driving him from the country.

So much for sporting. The pleasure, I believe, increases in
proportion to the risk. But, while on the subject, I may mention
that of pig-shooting, which I found an amusement not to be despised,
especially if you approach your game before life is extinct. The jaws
are long, tusks also, and sharp as a razor; and when once wounded,
the animals evince a strong inclination to return the compliment:
they are active, cunning, and very fast. I shot several at different
times. The natives also describe a very formidable beast, the size of
a large bullock, found farther to the northward, which they appear to
hold in great dread. This I conceive to be a sort of bison; and if so,
the sporting in Borneo altogether is not so bad.

The following day we went to other ground for deer; but the Dyaks had
now enjoyed peace so long that the whole country was in a state of
cultivation; and after scrambling over tracts of wild-looking country,
in which Mr. Brooke, two years before, had seen the deer in hundreds,
we returned to our boats, and down the river to Sarawak.

We now began to prepare in earnest for work of another sort. The
news of our intended attack on the Sarebus pirates had soon reached
them, and spread all over the country; and we had daily accounts of
the formidable resistance they intended to make. By the 4th July
our preparations were complete, and the ship had dropped down to
the mouth of the river. I forgot to mention that all the adjoining
seriffs had, in the greatest consternation, sent me assurances
of their future good intentions. Seriff Jaffer, who lived with an
industrious but warlike race of Dyaks up the Linga river, a branch
of the Batang Lupar, had never been known to commit piracy, and had
been frequently at war with both the Sarebus and Sakarrans, offered
to join our expedition. From Seriff Sahib, who lived up a river at
Sadong, adjoining the Sarebus territory, and to whom the "Serpent"
Macota had gone, Mr. Brooke and myself had invitations to partake of
a feast on our way to the Sarebus river. This was accompanied with a
present of a couple of handsome spears and a porcupine, and also an
offer to give up the women and children he had, with the assistance of
the Sakarran pirates, captured from the poor Sow Dyaks up the Sarawak.

Farther to the eastward, and up the Batang Lupar, into which the
Sakarran runs, lived another powerful seriff by the name of Muller,
elder brother and coadjutor of Seriff Sahib. These all, however,
through fear at the moment, sent in submissive messages; but their
turn had not yet come, and we proceeded toward the Sarebus.

The island of Burong, off which the Dido was to remain at anchor, we
made the first place of rendezvous. The force from the Dido consisted
of her pinnace, two cutters, and a gig; beside which Mr. Brooke lent us
his native-built boat, the Jolly Bachelor, carrying a long six-pounder
brass gun and thirty of our men; also a large tope of thirty-five tons,
which carried a well-supplied commissariat, as well as ammunition.

The native force was extensive; but I need only mention the names of
those from Sarawak. The three chiefs (the Tumangong and two Patingis,
Gapoor and Ali) had two large boats, each carrying about 180 men. Then
there was the rajah's large, heavy boat, with the rascally Borneons
and about 40 men, and sundry other Sarawak boats; and, beside,
a Dyak force of about 400 men from the different tribes of Lundu,
Sow, Singè, &c. Of course, it caused some trouble to collect this
wild, undisciplined armament, and two or three successive points of
rendezvous were necessary; and it was the morning of the 8th before
we entered the river. Lieutenant Wilmot Horton was to command the
expedition; with him, in the pinnace, were Mr. W. L. Partridge, mate;
Dr. Simpson, assistant-surgeon; Mr. Hallowes, midshipman; 14 seamen,
and 5 marines. In the first cutter was Mr. D'Aeth, Mr. Douglas,
from Sarawak, and Mr. Collins, the boatswain; in the second cutter,
Mr. Elliott, the master, and Mr. Jenkins, midshipman. The Jolly
Bachelor was commanded by Lieutenant Tottenham, and Mr. Comber,
midshipman, with Mr. Brooke's medical friend, Dr. Treacher, and an
amateur gentleman, Mr. Ruppel, from Sarawak. The force from the
Dido was about 80, officers and men. The command of the boats,
when sent away from a man-of-war, is the perquisite of the first
lieutenant. My curiosity, however, would not allow me to resist the
temptation of attending the party in my gig; and I had my friend
Mr. Brooke as a companion, who was likewise attended by a sampan and
crew he had taken with him to Sarawak from Singapore. His coxswain,
Seboo, we shall all long remember: he was civil only to his master,
and, I believe, brave while in his company. He was a stupid-looking
and powerfully-built sort of savage, always praying, eating, smiling,
or sleeping. When going into action, he always went down on his knees
to pray, holding his loaded musket before him. He was, however, a
curious character, and afforded us great amusement--took good care
of himself and his master, but cared for no one else.

In the second gig was Lieutenant E. Gunnell, whose troublesome duty it
was to preserve order throughout this extensive musketoe fleet, and to
keep the natives from pressing too closely on the rear of our boats--an
office which became less troublesome as we approached the scene of
danger. The whole formed a novel, picturesque, and exciting scene; and
it was curious to contemplate the different feelings that actuated the
separate and distinct parties--the odd mixture of Europeans, Malays,
and Dyaks, the different religions, and the eager and anxious manner
in which all pressed forward. The novelty of the thing was quite
sufficient to excite our Jacks, after having been cooped up so long
on board ship, to say nothing of the chance of a broken head.

Of the Malays and Dyaks who accompanied us, some came from curiosity,
some from attachment to Mr. Brooke, and many for plunder, but I
think the majority to gratify revenge, as there were but few of the
inhabitants on the north coast of Borneo who had not suffered more or
less from the atrocities of the Sarebus and Sakarran pirates--either
their houses burned, their relations murdered, or their wives and
children captured and sold into slavery.

We did not get far up the river the first day, as the tope was
very slow, and carried that most essential part of all expeditions,
the commissariat. Patingi Ali, who had been sent the day before to
await the force in the mouth of the Sarebus, fell in with five or six
native boats, probably on the look-out for us, to which he gave chase,
and captured one, the rest retreating up the river.

On the 9th June, 1843, we had got some thirty miles in the same
direction; every thing was in order; and, as we advanced, I pulled
from one end of my little fleet to the other, and felt much the same
sort of pride as Sir William Parker must have experienced when leading
seventy-five sail of British ships up the Yeang-tse Keang river into
the very heart of the Celestial Empire. It rained hard; but we were
well supplied with kajans, a mat admirably adapted to keep out the wet;
and securely covered in, my gig had all the appearance of a native
boat, especially as I had substituted paddles for oars. In this manner
I frequently went a little in advance of the force; and on the 9th I
came on a couple of boats, hauled close in under the jungle, apparently
perfectly unconscious of my approach. I concluded them to be part
of the small fleet of boats that had been chased, the previous day,
in the mouth of the river; and when abreast of them, and within range,
I fired from my rifle. The crews of each boat immediately precipitated
themselves into the water, and escaped into the jungle. They were
so closely covered in, that I did not see any one at first; but I
found that my ball had passed through both sides of an iron kettle,
in which they were boiling some rice. How astonished the cook must
have been! On coming up, our Dyak followers dashed into the jungle
in pursuit of the fugitives, but without success.

We moved on leisurely with the flood-tide, anchoring always on the
ebb, by which means we managed to collect our stragglers and keep the
force together. Toward the evening, by the incessant sound of distant
gongs, we were aware that our approach was known, and that preparations
were making to repel us. These noises were kept up all night; and we
occasionally heard the distant report of ordnance, which was fired,
of course, to intimidate us. During the day, several deserted boats
were taken from the banks of the river and destroyed, some of them
containing spears, shields, and ammunition, with a few fire-arms.

The place we brought up at for the night was called Boling; but here
the river presented a troublesome and dangerous obstacle in what is
called the bore, caused by the tide coming in with a tremendous rush,
as if an immense wave of the sea had suddenly rolled up the stream,
and, finding itself confined on either side, extended across,
like a high bank of water, curling and breaking as it went, and,
from the frightful velocity with which it passes up, carrying all
before it. There are, however, certain bends of the river where the
bore does not break across: it was now our business to look out for
and gain these spots between the times of its activity. The natives
hold them in great dread.

From Boling the river becomes less deep, and not safe for large
boats; so that here we were obliged to leave our tope with the
commissariat, and a sufficient force for her protection, as we had
received information that thirteen piratical boats had been some time
cruising outside, and were daily expected up the river on their return,
when our unguarded tope would have made them an acceptable prize. In
addition to this, we were now fairly in the enemy's country: and for
all we knew, hundreds of canoes might have been hid in the jungle,
ready to lanch. Just below Boling, the river branches off to the
right and left; that to the left leading to another nest of pirates
at Pakoo, who are (by land) in communication with those of Paddi,
the place it was our intention to attack first.

Having provisioned our boats for six days, and provided a strong guard
to remain with the tope, the native force not feeling themselves
safe separated from the main body,--we started, a smaller and more
select party than before, but, in my opinion, equally formidable,
leaving about 150 men. This arrangement gave but little satisfaction
to those left behind, our men not liking to exchange an expedition
where a fight was certain, for a service in which it was doubtful,
although their position was one of danger, being open to attack
from three different parts of the river. Our party now consisted of
the Dido's boats, the three Datus from Sarawak, and some Sow Dyaks,
eager for heads and plunder. We arrived at our first resting-place
early in the afternoon, and took up a position in as good order as
the small space would admit.

I secured my gig close to the bank, under the shade of a large tree,
at some little distance from the fleet of boats; and, by myself,
contemplated my novel position--in command of a mixed force of
500 men, some seventy miles up a river in the interior of Borneo;
on the morrow about to carry all the horrors of war among a race of
savage pirates, whose country no force had ever yet dared to invade,
and who had been inflicting with impunity every sort of cruelty on
all whom they encountered, for more than a century.

As the sun went down, the scene was beautiful, animated by the variety
and picturesque appearance of the native prahus, and the praying of
the Mussulman, with his face in the direction of the Prophet's tomb,
bowing his head to the deck of his boat, and absorbed in devotions from
which nothing could withdraw his attention. For a time--it being that
for preparing the evening meal--no noise was made: it was a perfect
calm; and the rich foliage was reflected in the water as in a mirror,
while a small cloud of smoke ascended from each boat, to say nothing of
that from my cigar, which added much to the charm I then experienced.

Late in the evening, when the song and joke passed from boat to boat,
and the lights from the different fires were reflected in the water,
the scenery was equally pleasing; but later still, when the lights
were out, there being no moon, and the banks overhung with trees,
it was so dark that no one could see beyond his own boat.

A little after midnight, a small boat was heard passing up the river,
and was regularly hailed by us in succession; to which they replied,
"We belong to your party." And it was not until the yell of triumph,
given by six or eight voices, after they had (with a strong flood-tide
in their favor) shot past the last of our boats, that we found how
we had been imposed on.






CHAPTER XVII.

    Ascent of the river to Paddi.--Town taken and burnt.--Narrow
    escape of a reinforcement of friendly Dyaks.--Night-attack by the
    pirates.--Conference: they submit.--Proceed against Pakoo.--Dyak
    treatment of dead enemies.--Destruction of Pakoo, and submission
    of the pirates.--Advance upon Rembas.--The town destroyed: the
    inhabitants yield.--Satisfactory effects of the expedition.--Death
    of Dr. Simpson.--Triumphant return to Sarawak.


_June 11th._--We moved on immediately after the passing up of the bore,
the dangers of which appeared to have been greatly exaggerated. The
beating of gongs and discharge of cannon had been going on the whole
of the previous night.

The scenery improved in beauty every yard that we advanced; but our
attention was drawn from it by the increase of yelling as we approached
the scene of action. Although as yet we had only heard our enemies,
our rapid advance with a strong tide must have been seen by them from
the jungle on the various hills which now rose to our view.

Being in my gig, somewhat ahead of the boats, I had the advantage of
observing all that occurred. The scene was the most exciting I ever
experienced. We had no time for delay or consideration: the tide was
sweeping us rapidly up; and had we been inclined to retreat then, we
should have found it difficult. A sudden turn in the river brought us
(Mr. Brooke was by my side) in front of a steep hill which rose from
the bank. It had been cleared of jungle, and long grass grew in its
place. As we hove in sight, several hundred savages rose up, and gave
one of their war-yells: it was the first I had heard. No report from
musketry or ordnance could ever make a man's heart feel so _small_
as mine did at that horrid yell: but I had no leisure to think. I had
only time for a shot at them with my double barrel, as they rushed
down the steep, while I was carried past. I soon after heard the
report of our large boat's heavy gun, which must have convinced them
that we likewise were prepared.

On the roof of a long building, on the summit of the hill, were several
warriors performing a war-dance, which it would be difficult to imitate
on such a stage. As these were not the forts we were in search of,
we did not delay longer than to exchange a few shots in sweeping along.

Our next obstacle was more troublesome, being a strong barrier right
across the river, formed of two rows of trees placed firmly in the
mud, with their tops crossed and secured together by ratans; and
along the fork, formed by the crossing of the tops of these stakes,
were other trees firmly secured. Rapidly approaching this barrier,
I observed a small opening that might probably admit a canoe;
and gathering good way, and putting my gig's head straight at it,
I squeezed through. On passing it the scene again changed, and I had
before me three formidable-looking forts, which lost not a moment in
opening a discharge of cannon on my unfortunate gig. Luckily their
guns were properly elevated for the range of the barrier; and, with
the exception of a few straggling grape-shot that splashed the water
round us, the whole went over our heads. For a moment I found myself
cut off from my companions, and drifting fast upon the enemy. The banks
of the river were covered with warriors, yelling and rushing down to
possess themselves of my boat and its crew. I had some difficulty in
getting my long gig round, and paddling up against the stream; but,
while my friend Brooke steered the boat, my cockswain and myself
kept up a fire with tolerable aim on the embrasures, to prevent, if
possible, their reloading before the pinnace, our leading boat, could
bring her twelve-pound carronade to bear. I was too late to prevent
the pinnace falling athwart the barrier, in which position she had
three men wounded. With the assistance of some of our native followers,
the ratan-lashings which secured the heads of the stakes were soon cut
through; and I was not sorry when I found the Dido's first cutter on
the same side with myself. The other boats soon followed; and while
the pinnace kept up a destructive fire on the fort, Mr. D'Aeth, who
was the first to land, jumped on shore, with his crew, at the foot
of the hill on the top of which the nearest fort stood, and at once
rushed for the summit. This mode of warfare--this dashing at once
in the very face of their fort--was so novel and incomprehensible
to our enemies, that they fled, panic-struck, into the jungle; and
it was with the greatest difficulty that our leading men could get
even a snap-shot at the rascals as they went.

That evening the country was illuminated for miles by the burning
of the capital, Paddi, and adjacent villages; at which work, and
plundering, our native followers were most expert.

At Paddi the river branches off to the right and left; and it was on
the tongue of land formed by them that the forts were very cleverly
placed. We took all their guns, and burned the stockades level with
the ground.

The banks of the river were here so confined, that a man might with
ease throw a spear across; and, as the jungle was close, it was
necessary to keep pretty well on the alert. For the greater part of
the night, the burning of the houses made it as bright as day. In
the evening, Drs. Simpson and Treacher amputated a poor fellow's
arm close to the shoulder, which, in the cramped space of the boat,
was no easy operation. He was one of our best men, and captain of
the forecastle on board the Dido.

Early on the following morning (12th) our boats, with the exception
of the Jolly Bachelor, now become the hospital, proceeded up the
two branches of the river; almost all the native force remaining to
complete the work of destruction.

An accident had nearly occurred at this period. A report had reached
us that several large boats--supposed to be a fleet of Sarebus pirates
returning from a cruise--were in the river; and knowing that they could
not well attack and pass our force at Boling without our hearing of
it, I took no further notice of the rumor, intending to go down in
my gig afterward and have a look at them. While we were at breakfast
in the Jolly Bachelor, a loud chattering of many voices was heard,
attended by a great beating of tom-toms; and suddenly a large prahu,
crowded with savages, came sweeping round the bend of the river,
rapidly nearing us with a strong flood-tide. As she advanced, others
hove in sight. In a moment pots and spoons were thrown down, arms
seized, and the brass six-pounder, loaded with grape and canister,
was on the point of being fired, when Williamson, the only person who
understood their character, made us aware that they were a friendly
tribe of Dyaks, from the River Linga, coming to our assistance,
or, more likely, coming to seek for plunder and the heads of their
enemies, with whom they had for many years been at war. Those in
the leading boat had, however, a narrow escape. I had already given
the order to fire; but luckily the priming had been blown off from
the six-pounder. Had it not been so, fifty at least out of the first
hundred would have been sent to their long homes. They were between
eight and nine hundred strong. The scene to me was indeed curious
and exciting: for the wild appearance of these fellows exceeded any
thing I had yet witnessed. Their war-dresses--each decorating himself
according to his own peculiar fancy, in a costume the most likely
at once to adorn the wearer and strike terror into the enemy--made
a remarkable show. Each had a shield and a handful of spears; about
one in ten was furnished with some sort of firearm, which was of more
danger to himself or his neighbor than to any one else. They wore
short padded jackets, capable of resisting the point of a wooden spear.

The first thing necessary was to supply each with a strip of white
calico, to be worn in the head-dress as a distinguishing mark, to
prevent our people knocking them over if met by accident while prowling
about the jungle. We also established a watchword, "Datu," which many
of them, who had great dread of the white men, never ceased to call
out. Sheriff Jaffer, in command of their force, had promised to join
us from the beginning; but as they did not make their appearance off
the mouth of the river, we thought no more of them. It was necessary
to dispatch messengers up the rivers to inform our boats of this
re-enforcement, as in all probability an attack would have been made
immediately on the appearing in sight of so formidable a force.

At 10 A.M. our boats returned, having gone up the right-hand branch
as far as it was practicable. That to the left having been obstructed
by trees felled across the stream, was considered, from the trouble
taken to prevent our progress, to be the branch up which the enemy
had retreated, and not being provisioned for more than the day,
they came back, and started again in the afternoon with the first
of the flood-tide. Of this party Lieutenant Horton took charge,
accompanied by Mr. Brooke. It was a small, but an effective, and
determined, and well-appointed little body, not likely to be deterred
by difficulties. A small native force of about forty men accompanied
them, making, with our own, between eighty and ninety people. The
forts having been destroyed, no further obstacles were expected
to our advance beyond the felling of trees and the vast odds as to
numbers in case of attack, the pirates being reckoned to be about
six thousand Dyaks and five hundred Malays.

The evening set in with rain and hazy weather. Our native skirmishing
parties were returning to their boats and evening meals; our
advancing party had been absent about an hour and a half, and I had
just commenced a supper in the Jolly Bachelor on ham and poached eggs,
when the sound of the pinnace's twelve-pounder carronade broke through
the stillness of the night. This was responded to by one of those
simultaneous war-yells apparently from every part of the country. My
immediate idea was that our friends had been surrounded. It was
impossible to move so large a boat as the Jolly Bachelor up to their
assistance; nor would it be right to leave our wounded without a
sufficient force for their protection. I immediately jumped into my
gig, taking with me a bugler, whom I placed in the bow, and seeing
our arms in as perfect readiness as the rain would allow us to keep
them in, I proceeded to join the combatants.

Daylight had disappeared, as it does in tropical climates, immediately
after the setting of the sun. The tide had just turned against me;
and as I advanced up the river, the trees hung over many parts,
nearly meeting across; at the same time the occasional firing that
was kept up assured me that the enemy were on the alert, and with all
the advantages of local knowledge and darkness on their side. From
the winding of the stream, too, the yells appeared to come from every
direction, sometimes ahead and sometimes astern. I had pulled, feeling
my way, for nearly two hours, when a sudden and quick discharge of
musketry, well on my left hand, intimated to me that I was approaching
the scene of action; and, at the same time, passing several large
canoes hauled up on the bank, I felt convinced that my anticipation
was right, that our party were surrounded, and that we should have to
fight our way to each other. My plan was to make it appear as if I was
bringing up a strong re-enforcement; and the moment the firing ceased,
I made the bugler strike up "Rory O'More," which was immediately
responded to by three British cheers, and then followed a death-like
stillness--if any thing, more unpleasant than the war-yell--and I
could not help feeling certain that the enemy lay between us.

The stream now ran rapidly over loose stones. Against the sky, where
the jungle had been cleared, I could distinctly see the outlines of
human beings. I laid my double-barrel across my knees, and we pulled
on. When within shot-range, I hailed, to make certain, and receiving
no answer, after a second time, I fired, keeping the muskets of the
gig's crew ready to repel the first attack in case the enemy did not
decamp. My fire was answered by Lieutenant Horton, "We are here,
sir." At first I was much distressed from the fear that I might
have hurt any one. They had not heard me hail, owing, I suppose,
to the noise of the water rushing over the stones; and they had not
hailed me, thinking that I must of course know that it was them, and
the enemy being in the jungle all round, they did not like to attract
attention to where they were. I found they had taken up a very clever
position. The running stream had washed the ground away on the right
bank, leaving a sort of little, deep bay, just big enough to hold
the boats, from which the bank rose quite perpendicularly. On the
top of this bank the jungle had been cleared for about thirty yards,
and on this Lieutenant Gunnel, with seven royal marines, was posted
as a rear-guard. This was an important position, and one of danger,
as the jungle itself was alive with the enemy; and although the spears
were hurled from it continually during the night, no shot was thrown
away unless the figure of the pirate could be distinctly seen.

It continued to rain: the men wore their great-costs for the purpose of
keeping their pieces dry; and several times, during that long night,
I observed the muskets of these steady and good men brought to the
shoulder and again lowered without firing, as that part of the jungle
whence a spear had been hurled to within a few feet of where they stood
did not show a distinct form of any thing living. The hours were little
less interesting for those who, in the boats below, stood facing the
opposite bank of the river with their arms in their hands. It appears
that the enemy had come down in great force to attack the boats from
that side; and as the river was there very shallow, and the bottom
hard, they could, by wading not more than knee-deep, have approached
to within five or six yards of them; but in the first attack they had
lost a great many men, and it is supposed that their repeated advances
throughout the night were, more to recover their dead and wounded than
to make any fresh attack on our compact little force, whose deadly aim
and rapid firing must have astonished them, and who certainly were,
one and all, prepared to sell their lives as dearly as possible.

To the left of our position, and about 200 yards up the river, large
trees were being felled during the night; and by the torch-lights
showing the spot, the officer of the boat, Mr. Partridge, kept up
a very fair ball-practice with the pinnace's gun. Toward morning a
shot fell apparently just where they were at work; and that being
accompanied by what we afterward ascertained caused more horror and
consternation among the enemy than any thing else, a common signal
sky-rocket, made them resign the ground entirely to us. The last shot,
too, that was fired from the pinnace had killed three men.

As daylight broke I found that most of our party had squatted down
with their guns between their knees, and, being completely exhausted,
had fallen asleep in spite of the rain. Few will ever forget that
night. There were two natives and one marine only of our party badly
wounded; the latter was struck by a rifle shot, which entered his
chest and lodged in his shoulder; and this poor fellow, a gallant
young officer named Jenkins, already distinguished in the Chinese
war, volunteered to convey in the second gig, with four boys only,
down to the Jolly Bachelor. He performed this duty, and was again up
with the party before daylight.

At daylight we found the pirates collecting in some force above us; and
several shots were fired, as if to try the range of their rifles; but
they took good care not to come within reach of our muskets. Shortly
after, the tide beginning to rise, we made preparations for ascending
further up the river. This was more than they bargained for, as we
were close to where they had removed their families, with such little
valuables as they could collect, when we so unexpectedly carried their
forts and took possession of their town; and we were not sorry on
observing, at that moment, a flag of truce advance from their party
down the stream, and halt half way to our position. We immediately
sent an unarmed Malay to meet them; and after a little talk, they
came to our boats. The message was, that they were ready to abide by
any terms we might dictate. I promised that hostilities should cease
for two hours; but told them we could treat only with the chiefs,
whose persons should be protected, and I invited them to a conference
at 1 P.M.

In the mean while, having first sent notice by the messengers, I
took advantage of the time, and ascended in my gig, without any great
difficulty, above the obstruction they had been so busy throwing across
the river during the night. The news that hostilities were to cease
was not long in being communicated; and, by the time I had got up,
the greatest confidence appeared to be established. Having pulled up
into shoal water, and where the river widened, the banks were soon
covered with natives; and some seventy or eighty immediately laid
aside their spears and walked off to my boat, the whole of which,
together with its crew, they examined with the greatest curiosity.

In the heat of the day we indulged in a most refreshing bath under
the shade of overhanging trees, the bottom of the river being fine
sand and pebbles worn smooth by the running stream.

At the appointed hour the chiefs made their appearance, dressed in
their best, but looking haggard and dejected. Mr. Brooke, the "Tuan
Besar," or great man, officiated as spokesman.

He fully explained that our invasion of their country, and destruction
of their forts and town, was not for the purposes of pillage or gain
to ourselves, but as a punishment for their repeated and aggravated
acts of piracy; that they had been fully warned, for two years before,
that the British nation would no longer allow the native trade between
the adjacent islands and Singapore to be cut off and plundered,
and the crews of the vessels cruelly put to death, as they had been.

They were very humble and submissive; admitted that their lives were
forfeited, and if we said they were to die, they were prepared;
although, they explained, they were equally willing to live. They
promised to refrain forever from piracy, and offered hostages for
their good behavior.

Mr. Brooke then explained how much more advantageous trade would be
than piracy, and invited them to a further conference at Sarawak,
where they might witness all the blessings resulting from the line
of conduct he had advised them to follow. If, on the other hand,
we heard of a single act of piracy being committed by them, their
country should be again invaded and occupied; and their enemies,
the whole tribe of Linga Dyaks, let loose upon them, until they were
rooted out and utterly destroyed.

To other questions they replied, that although the chief held
communication, and was in the habit of cruising with the people
of the other settlements of Pakoo and Rembas, still they could not
hold themselves responsible for their good conduct; and as both held
strongly fortified positions (of course supposed by themselves to be
impregnable), they did not think that they would abstain altogether
from piracy unless we visited and inflicted a similar chastisement
to that they themselves had suffered. They also stated that, although
they never would again submit to the orders of the great and powerful
chiefs, Seriffs Sahib and Muller, still they could not join in any
expedition against them or their old allies, their blood-thirsty and
formidable neighbors in the Sakarran river.

On our return to the still smoking ruins of the once picturesque town
of Paddi, we found that Seriff Jaffer, with his 800 warriors, had
not been idle. The country round had been laid waste. All had been
desolated, together with their extensive winter-stores of rice. It
was a melancholy sight; and, for a moment, I forgot the horrid acts
of piracy and cruel murders of these people, and my heart relented
at what I had done--it was but for a few minutes.

Collecting our forces, we dropped leisurely down the river, but not
without a parting yell of triumph from our Dyak force--a yell that
must have made the hearts of those quail whose wives and children
lay concealed in the jungle near to where we had held our conference.

We arrived at Boling soon after midnight, where we found the tope,
with our provision, quite safe. Several shots had been fired at her
the night before; and large parties had repeatedly come down to the
banks, and endeavored to throw spears on board.

At daylight (Wednesday, 14th) we lost no time in completing to four
days' provisions, and starting, with the flood-tide, for Pakoo. It
took us until late in the evening before we appeared in sight of two
newly-built stockades, from which the pirates fled, panic-struck,
without firing a shot, on our first discharge. We had evidently come
on them before they were prepared, as we found some of the guns in
the forts with the slings still on by which they had been carried.

The positions of the forts here, as at Paddi, were selected with great
judgment; and had their guns been properly served, it would have been
sharp work for boats. The same work of destruction was carried on;
but the town was larger than at Paddi, and night setting in, the
conflagration had a grand effect.

Although the greater part of their valuables had been removed, the
place was alive with goats and poultry, the catching of which afforded
great sport for our men. Some of the Singè Dyaks succeeded in taking
the heads of a few pirates, who probably were killed or wounded in
the forts on our first discharge. I saw one body afterward without its
head, in which each passing Dyak had thought proper to stick a spear,
so that it had all the appearance of a huge porcupine.

The operation of extracting the brains from the lower part of the
skull, with a bit of bamboo shaped like a spoon, preparatory to
preserving, is not a pleasing one. The head is then dried, with the
flesh and hair on it, suspended over a slow fire, during which process
the chiefs and elders of the tribe perform a sort of war-dance.

Soon after daylight the following morning (Thursday, 15th) the chiefs
of the tribe came down with a flag of truce, when much the same sort
of conference took place as at Paddi. They were equally submissive,
offering their own lives, but begging those of their wives and children
might be spared. After promising to accede to all we desired, they
agreed to attend the conference about to assemble at Sarawak, where
the only terms on which they could expect lasting peace and mutual
good understanding would be fully explained and discussed.

Like their friends at Paddi, they were of opinion that their
neighbors at Rembas would not abstain from piracy until they had
received convincing proof that the power existed which was capable
and determined to put down piracy. All these misguided people appeared
not only to listen to reason, but to be open to conviction; and I am
far from imputing to them that treachery so commonly attributed to
all classes of Malays. The higher grades, I admit, are cunning and
deceitful; but subsequent events during the last two years have proved
the truth and honesty of the intentions of these people. They have
strictly adhered to their promises; and have since, although surrounded
by piratical tribes, been carrying on a friendly trade with Sarawak.

Our next point of attack was Rembas. Although there was a nearer
overland communication between those places, the distance by water was
upward of sixty miles; but the strong tides were of great assistance,
as we could always rest when they were against us. High water was the
only time, however, that suited us for landing, as the fall of tide
left a considerable space of soft mud to wade through before reaching
_terra firma_: this was sufficiently unpleasant to our men, without the
additional trouble of having to load and fire when in that position;
besides, when stuck fast in the mud, you become a much easier object to
be fired at. At Rembas the tide was not up until just before daylight;
and, having no moon to light us, a night attack was not considered
advisable; so that we brought up about a quarter tide below the town,
on the evening of the 16th. As Rembas contained a larger proportion
of Malays (who are always well supplied with firearms) than the other
settlements, though we had not experienced any opposition at Pakoo,
we fully expected they would here make a better stand.

We advanced early in the morning, and soon came up with a succession
of formidable barriers, more troublesome to cut through than any
we had before encountered. About a mile below the town we landed
700 of the Linga Dyaks on the left bank of the river, who were to
separate into two divisions--commanded by Seriff Jaffer and his son,
a remarkably fine and spirited youth--and creep stealthily through
the jungle, for which the country was well adapted, so as to get
to the rear of the town and forts, and make a simultaneous attack
on the first shot being fired from our boats. The last barrier (and
there were four of them) was placed just within point-blank range;
the gig being a light boat, I managed to haul her over, close to the
bank, and advanced so as to be both out of sight and out of range;
and just as our first boat came up with the barrier, I pushed out
from under the bank, and opened a fire of musketry on the stockade,
which was full of men. This, with the war-yell that followed from
their rear (both unexpected), together with their fears having been
already worked upon by the destruction of Paddi and defeat of Pakoo,
threw them into the greatest confusion. They fled in all directions,
without provoking us by firing a shot, although we found the guns
loaded. Seriff Jaffer and his Dyaks were gratified by having all
the fighting to themselves, and by some very pretty hand-to-hand
encounters. We were much amused, afterward, by their own account of
the heroic deeds they had performed. Lives were lost on both sides,
and heads taken. This Rembas was by far the largest and strongest place
we had assaulted. We found some very large war-boats, both fitted and
building; one measured ninety-two feet in length, with fourteen beam;
and in addition to the usual good supply of fruit, goats, and poultry,
our men were gratified by finding several bullocks. The plunder was
great; and although, with the exception of the guns, of no value to
us, it was very much so to our native followers.

After we had destroyed every thing, we received a flag of truce,
when similar explanations and promises were made as at Paddi and
Pakoo; and here ended for the present, the warlike part of our
expedition. The punishment we had inflicted was severe, but not
more than the crime of their horrid piracies deserved. A few heads
were brought away by our Dyak followers, as trophies; but there was
no unnecessary sacrifice of life, and I do not believe there was
a woman or child hurt. The destruction of these places astonished
the whole country beyond description. In addition to the distance
and difficulty of access to their strongly-fortified positions, they
looked for protection from the bore that usually ran up the Sarebus,
and which they imagined none but their own boats could manage. As the
different Malay chiefs heard that, in ten days, a handful of white men
had totally destroyed their strongholds, they shook their heads, and
exclaimed, "God is great!" and the Dyaks declared that the Tuan Besar
(Mr. Brooke) had charmed the river to quiet the bore, [17] and that
the whites were invulnerable. Although this expedition would have a
great moral effect on all the more respectable and thinking natives,
inasmuch as the inhabitants of the places destroyed were looked upon,
from the large proportion of Malays, as more civilized than their
formidable and savage neighbors, the Dyaks inhabiting the Sakarran
river; still, it was not to be supposed, when the settlements of Paddi,
Pakoo, and Rembas could not be responsible for the good behavior of
one another, that it was probable the severe lesson taught them would
have any great effect on the Sakarrans.

On regaining the tope at Boling, we found our assistant surgeon,
Dr. Simpson, who had been left in charge of the sick, laid up with
fever and ague. For conveniency's sake, the wounded men had been
removed to a large native boat; and while the doctor was passing
along the edge of the boat, his foot slipped, he fell overboard,
and not being much of a swimmer, and a strong tide running, he was
a good while in the water, though a native went after him. He had,
for some time past, been in bad health; but the cold he then caught
brought on inflammation in the lungs, under the effects of which he
sank soon after our return to Singapore. Poor Simpson! he was not
only clever in his profession, but endeared to us all by his kind
and gentle manner, so grateful to the sick. There were few of us,
while in China, who had not come under his hands, and experienced
his tender, soothing, and unremitting attention.

We now gave our native followers permission to depart to their
respective homes, which they did loaded with _plunder_, usually, in
India, called _loot_; ourselves getting under weigh to rejoin the Dido
off the Island of Burong, and from thence we proceeded to the mouth
of the Morotaba, where, leaving the ship, Mr. Brooke and I went in
my boat, with two others in attendance, to take leave of the rajah,
prior to my return to Singapore and China. Although the greater part
of the native boats attached to the expedition had already arrived at
Sarawak, the rajah had sent them back, some miles down the river, with
as many others as he could collect, gorgeously dressed out with flags,
to meet Mr. Brooke and myself, the heroes of the grandest expedition
that had ever been known in the annals of Malayan history. Our
approach to the grand city was, to them, most triumphant, although
to us a nuisance. From the moment we entered the last reach, the
saluting from every gun in the capital that could be fired without
bursting was incessant; and as we neared the royal residence, the
yells, meant for cheers, and the beating of gongs, intended to be a
sort of "See, the conquering hero comes!" were quite deafening. The
most minute particulars of our deeds, of course greatly exaggerated,
had been detailed, long before our arrival, by the native chiefs, who
were eye-witnesses; and when we were seated in the rajah's presence,
the royal countenance relaxed into a smile of real pleasure as he
turned his wondering eyes from Mr. Brooke to myself and back again. I
suppose he thought a great deal of us, as he said little or nothing;
and, as we were rather hungry after our pull, we were very glad to
get away once more to Mr. Brooke's hospitable board, to which we did
ample justice.

My stay at Sarawak was but of short duration, as, before I had time to
carry out the arrangements I had made to put down this horrid traffic,
the Dido was, owing to some changes in the distribution of the fleet,
recalled to China.

As the tide would not suit for my return to the Dido until two
o'clock the following morning, we sat up until that hour, when,
with mutual regret, we parted. I had just seen enough of Borneo and
my enterprising friend, Mr. Brooke, to feel the deepest interest in
both. No description of mine can in any way give my readers a proper
idea of the character of the man I had just then left; and however
interesting his journal may appear in the reading, it is only by being
in his company, and by hearing him advocate the cause of the persecuted
inland natives, and listening to his vivid and fair description of
the beautiful country he has adopted, that one can be made to enter
fully into and feel what I would fain describe, but can not.

We parted; and I did not then expect to be able so soon to return
and finish what I had intended, viz., the complete destruction of
the strongholds belonging to the worst among the pirate hordes, so
long the terror of the coast, either by capturing or driving from
the country the piratical Seriffs Sahib and Muller, by whose evil
influence they had been chiefly kept up. From all that I had seen,
the whole country appeared to be a large garden, with a rich and
varied soil, capable of producing anything. The natives, especially
the mountain Dyaks, are industrious, willing, inoffensive, although
a persecuted race; and the only things wanted to make the country
the most productive and happiest in the world were, the suppression
of piracy, good government, and opening a trade with the interior,
which could not fail of success. All these I saw partially begun;
and I felt assured that with the assistance of a vessel of war, and
the countenance only of the government, Mr. Brooke would, although
slowly, yet surely, bring about their happy consummation.





CHAPTER XVIII.

    Captain Keppel sails for China.--Calcutta.--The Dido ordered to
    Borneo again.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Effect of her presence at
    Sarawak.--Great improvements visible.--Atrocities of the Sakarran
    pirates.--Mr. Brooke's letter.--Captain Sir E. Belcher's previous
    visit to Sarawak in the Samarang.--Coal found.--Second letter
    from the Rajah Muda Hassim.--Expedition against the Sakarran
    pirates.--Patusen destroyed.--Macota remembered, and his retreat
    burnt.--Further fighting, and advance.--Ludicrous midnight alarm.


_June 24th._--I reached the Dido at 8 o'clock, and immediately got
under weigh. After remaining twenty-four hours to water at Singapore,
I sailed for Hong Kong. My time, during the year that I was absent
from Borneo, if not quite so usefully, was not unpleasantly passed. We
lay a few months in the Canton river. In addition to having good
opportunities of seeing the natives of China in their domestic state,
I witnessed one of those most curious and extraordinary sights that
occasionally occur during the winter months in the city of Canton,
namely, a fire. The one I saw was about the most extensive that had
ever been experienced; and the Dido's crew had the gratification of
being of some assistance in the protection of British property. From
China the Dido accompanied the commander-in-chief, in the Cornwallis,
to the Spanish colony at Manilla, which is a place that few forget;
and a short description of our visit there has been given in an
interesting little work, written by Captain Cunynghame. On my return
to Hong Kong, I had the gratification of receiving on board the Dido,
Major-General Lord Saltoun and his staff, consisting of two old and
esteemed friends of mine, Captain, now Major Arthur Cunynghame,
his lordship's aid-de-camp, and Major Grant, of the 9th Lancers,
who had been adjutant-general to the forces. A more agreeable cruise
at sea I never experienced. We called at the island of Pinang, in the
Malacca straits, on our way, where we again fell in with the admiral;
and I was most agreeably surprised at meeting my friend Mr. Brooke,
who had come on to Singapore to meet Sir William Parker, and had
followed him up in the Wanderer, commanded by my friend Captain
Henry Seymour,--that vessel, in company with the Harlequin, Captain
the Hon. George Hastings, and the H. C. steamer Diana, having just
returned from an expedition to Acheen, whither they had been dispatched
by the commander-in-chief, to inquire into and demand redress for an
act of piracy, committed on an English merchant-vessel. An account
of the expedition has already been published. The pirates had made a
desperate resistance, and several lives were lost, and many severely
wounded on our side; among the latter was my friend Mr. Brooke (in the
head and arm), for which I took the liberty of giving him a lecture
on his rashness, he having quite sufficient ground for fighting over
in his newly-adopted country. He was much pleased at the admiral's
having promised that the Dido should return again to the Straits
station as soon as she had completed her voyage to Calcutta.

On the 11th March, 1844, we anchored off the grand City of Palaces,
and well does it merit the name. We could not have, timed our
visit better. The governor-general, the Earl of Ellenborough,
was being _fêted_ on his return from the frontiers, which _fêtes_
were continued on the arrival, a few days after ourselves, of the
Cornwallis at Kedgeree, when the flag of Sir William Parker was shifted
to the Dido. The admiral experienced the same style of hospitable
entertainment that had previously been given to General Sir Hugh Gough
on his return from the Chinese expedition. At Calcutta I was kindly
invited by the "Tent Club," and introduced to that noble and most
exciting of all field-sports, "Hog-hunting in India;" but with which
the pleasures of the day did not cease. The subsequent convivial
meeting was a thing not easily to be forgotten. Although under a
tent pitched by the edge of the jungle, thirty miles from the city,
none of the comforts of the house were wanting; there were the punkah
and the hookah, those luxuries of the East, to say nothing of heaps
of ice from the far West, which aided considerably the consumption of
champagne and claret; and to better all these good things, every man
brought with him the will and the power to please and to be pleased.

A few days before my departure from Calcutta, the governor-general
finding it necessary to send treasure to China, the admiral desired
me to receive it on board. Although a welcome cargo, it delayed for a
couple of months my return to Borneo. I found Mr. Brooke awaiting my
arrival at Singapore; but as I could not then receive him on board,
Captain Hastings took him over to Sarawak in the Harlequin.

On arriving at Hong Kong, Rear-Admiral Sir T. Cochrane appointed
Mr. Frederick Wade as first lieutenant, Lieutenant Wilmot Horton having
been promoted to the rank of commander for his gallant defence when
the Dido's boats were attacked by the very superior force of pirates
off the island of Sirhassan.

Having landed the treasure at Hong Kong, and completed stores and
provisions, I sailed from Macao on the 21st June, and working down
against the monsoon, arrived at Singapore on the 18th July. I here
found letters from Mr. Brooke, stating that the Sakarrans had been
out in great force; and although he was not aware of any danger to
himself or his settlement, still, by coming over quickly, I might
have a fair chance of catching and crushing them in the very act
of piracy. I lost no time in preparing for another expedition. The
government at Calcutta had become fully sensible of the necessity
of protecting the native trade to Singapore, and had sent down the
Phlegethon steamer, of light draught of water, and better adapted to
service in the straits or rivers than any of her majesty's larger
vessels. She was, moreover, fitted in every way for the peculiar
service on which she was to be employed, with a zealous, experienced,
and active commander, F. Scott, [18] as well as a fine enterprising
set of young officers. I lost no time in making application for her
to the resident counselor, Mr. Church (in the absence of Colonel
Butterworth, the Governor of the Straits), who immediately placed
her at my disposal; and with such means, I was anxious to commence
operations as speedily as possible, leaving the Vixen and Wolverine
to perform the other duties of the station.

_Thursday, 25th July._--Sailed from Singapore, having dispatched
the Phlegethon the previous night, with orders to rendezvous at the
entrance to the Morotaba, which we entered in the evening of the 29th;
and anchoring the ship inside the river, I went on in the steamer to
within four miles of Sarawak, when I pulled up in my gig, accompanied
by the Dido's pinnace, that I might, by firing her carronade as a
signal, be enabled to give notice of our approach, not feeling myself
quite secure from a shot from the forts, which were very judiciously
placed so as to command the last reach approaching the town, as I
knew that before Mr. Brooke's return they had been put in a state
of defence, and a regular watch kept, by self-appointed officers,
sleeping on their arms. I, however, got up without accident, in time
to receive a hearty welcome, about daylight.

Not expecting to revisit Borneo during the period that the ship had to
run before completing her usual time of commission, it was gratifying
for me to read in my friend's journal, alluding to my former visit;
"I came myself in the Dido; and I may say that her appearance was
the consummation of my enterprise." "The natives saw directly that
there was a force to protect and to punish; and most of the chiefs,
conscious of their evil ways, trembled; Muda Hassim was gratified,
and felt that this power would exalt his authority both in Borneo and
along the coast, and he was not slow in magnifying the force of the
Dido. The state in which Captain Keppel and his officers visited the
rajah all heightened the effect; and the marines and the band excited
the admiration and the fears of the natives. I felt the rajah's hand
tremble at the first interview; and not all the well-known command
of countenance, of which the natives are masters, could conceal
his emotion."

Gentle reader, excuse my vanity if I continue a little further with
my friend's journal, although it gets rather personal:

"I believe the first emotion was anything but pleasurable; but Captain
Keppel's conciliatory and kind manner soon removed any feeling of
fear; and was all along of the greatest use to me in our subsequent
doings. The first qualification, in dealing with a Malay, is a kind
and gentle manner; for their habitual politeness is such that they
are hurt by the ordinary _brusquerie_ of the European.

"I shall not go over the chase of the three boats of the Balagnini
pirates, or the attack made on the Dido's boats by the Sirhassan,
people, except to remark, that in the latter case, I am sure Lieutenant
Horton acted rightly in sparing their lives and property; for, with
these occasional pirates, a severe lesson, followed by that degree of
conciliation and pardon which shall best insure a correction of their
vices, is far wiser and preferable to a course of undistinguishing
severity."

I found Sarawak much altered for the better, and the population
considerably increased. Mr. Brooke had established himself in a
new house built on a beautiful and elevated mound, from which the
intriguing Macota had just been ejected on my first visit. Neat and
pretty-looking little Swiss cottages had sprung up on all the most
picturesque spots, which gave it quite a European look. He had also
made an agreeable addition to his English society; and a magazine
of English merchandise had been opened to trade with the natives,
together with many other improvements.

On the other hand, Seriff Sahib, not deterred, as I had anticipated
he would be, by the example I made of his neighbors in the Sarebus,
had taken measures for withdrawing from the adjoining river of Sadong,
where he had been living in a comparatively unguarded state, and
had, during the last nine months, been making busy preparations for
fortifying himself at a place called Patusen, up the Batang Lupar. He
had lately got things in a forward state, had called out a large
fleet of Sakarrans as an escort; and being puffed up with his own
power and importance, had thought proper to prolong the performance
of his voyage, of about 100 miles, from his residence in Sadong
to his fortified position at Patusen, for three weeks or a month,
during which time he had dispatched small parties of his fleet, which
consisted of upward of 150 war-prahus, on piratical excursions. These
robbers had, in addition to their piracies on the high seas, scoured
the coast in all directions, and committed the greatest atrocities,
attended with some of the most cruel murders. One sample will be
sufficient to show their brutal character:--A detachment of three of
their boats, having obtained information that a poor Dyak family,
belonging to a tribe in Mr. Brooke's territory, had come down from
their mountain to cultivate a small portion of land nearer the coast,
and, for their better security, had made their dwelling in the upper
branches of a large tree on the outskirts of the forest, determined to
destroy them. Their little children were playing in the jungle when
the pirates were seen approaching the tree with their diabolical
war-yells. As the poor man did not descend immediately on being
summoned, he was shot; when other ruffians, to save their ammunition,
mounted the tree, murdered the woman, and returned in triumph to their
boats with the heads of both victims. The children, who had witnessed
this from their hiding-places, succeeded in getting to Sarawak.

Taking advantage of Mr. Brooke's unusually long absence, Sarawak itself
was threatened, and open defiance hurled at any European force that
should dare approach Patusen. Reports, too, had been industriously
spread that Mr. Brooke never intended to return; and when he did
get back to his home, he found the town guarded and watched like a
besieged city. With his usual nerve and decision he withdrew his men
from the forts, and sent to Seriff Sahib to inform him that he should
suffer for his temerity.

A letter I received from him is so characteristic, and gives so lively
a description of these events, that I am tempted to print it.




    "Sarawak, 26th May, 1844.

    "My Dear Keppel,


    "It is useless applying a spur to a willing horse; so I will only
    tell you that there is plenty to do here, and the sooner you can
    come the better for all of us, especially your poor friends the
    Dyaks. Bring with you as much force as you can to attack Sakarran.

    "The case stands thus:--Seriff Sahib, quite frightened at Sadong
    since last year, enraged likewise at his loss of power and his
    incapability of doing mischief, collected all the Sakarran Dyaks,
    and was joined by many of the Dyaks of Sarebus and some Balows. He
    likewise had a good many Malays, and bullied every one in his
    vicinity. This force met at the entrance of the Sadong Delta, and
    committed depredations. They were not less than 200 Dyak boats,
    and some 15 or 20 armed Malay prahus, beside others. Just as
    they were collected, the Harlequin appeared off the coast, and
    had the Dido been with us, we might have _had them all_; but the
    opportunity will never again occur. Seriff Sahib, with this force,
    has started to-day for Sakarran, and I was not strong enough with
    my eight native boats to attack him. It is really greatly to be
    lamented, because we should most completely have crushed the head
    of the snake. We must, however, make the best of it. It is his
    intention, on his arrival at Sakarran, to fortify and wait for
    our attack, and in the mean time to send out his Dyaks along the
    coast and inland to such places as they dare venture to attack.

    "Come then, my dear Keppel, for there is plenty to do for all
    hands. I have ordered a gun-boat from Mr. Goldie, to make our
    force stronger; and had I possessed such a one the day before
    yesterday, I would have pulled away for the Sadong to-day.

    "My regards to all. I still propose Pepper-Pot Hall for your
    residence. I only wish I felt _quite sure_ that Fortune had it in
    store that you would be here on your return from China. That dame,
    however, seems to delight in playing me slippery tricks just at
    present; and never was the time and tide so missed before, which
    would have led to fortune, as the other day. All the queen's
    ships and all the queen's men could not bring such a chance
    together again.



    "Ever, my dear Keppel, your sincere friend,


    "J. Brooke.
    "Captain the Hon. Henry Keppel."




No one could have been more disappointed or have regretted more than
my gallant friend Captain Hastings, that his orders did not admit of
any delay, or of his attacking that redoubtable pirate Seriff Sahib,
especially as he had a small score to settle with that kind of gentry,
having had his first lieutenant, H. Chads, severely wounded in two
places, and several men killed, in the affair at Acheen Head. It was,
however, all for the best, as the few boats that the Harlequin could
have sent would have stood but a poor chance against upward of 200
war-prahus, all fitted and prepared for fight.

On the 1st of August, with the Dido and Phlegethon at anchor off
Sarawak, the warlike preparations were going on rapidly. I had saluted
and paid my visit to Muda Hassim; he was delighted to see me again,
and we went through the form of holding several conferences of war
in his divan. He appears to be a good well-meaning man, well inclined
toward the English, moderately honest, and, if roused, I daresay not
without animal courage; and altogether, with the assistance of his
clever younger brother, Budrudeen, a very fit person to govern that
part of Borneo of which he is rajah.

During my absence, Sarawak had been visited by H.M.S. Samarang,
Captain Sir Edward Belcher, who had received directions to call on and
communicate with Mr. Brooke. In dropping down the river the Samarang
grounded on a long shelf of rocks, at the top of high water, and with
the ebb-tide rolled over, filling with the succeeding flood. She was
nearly a fortnight in this position, but was ultimately saved by the
skill and almost unparalleled perseverance (aided by such assistance of
men and spars as Mr. Brooke could afford) of her captain, officers,
and crew--a feat that must have given the natives a good idea of
what British seamen are capable of. This accident delayed for a
short time a visit that was afterward made by Sir Edward Belcher,
accompanied by Mr. Brooke, to Borneo Proper. A hurried inspection of
the capabilities of that part of the coast took place; and the fact
of there being coal on the island was ascertained.

I received a second letter from Muda Hassim, of which the following
is a translation:


    "This comes from Pangeran Muda Hassim, Rajah of Borneo, to our
    friend Captain Keppel, in command of her Britannic Majesty's ship.


(After the usual compliments):


    "We beg to let our friend Captain Keppel know, that the pirates
    of Sakarran, whom we mentioned last year, still continue their
    piracies by sea and land; and that many Malays, under Seriff Sahib,
    who have been accustomed to send or to accompany the pirates
    and to share in their spoils, have gone to the Sakarran river,
    with a resolve of defending themselves rather than accede to our
    wishes that they should abandon piracy.

    "Last year Captain Belcher told the sultan and myself, that it
    would be pleasing to the Queen of England that we should repress
    piracy; and we signed an agreement, at his request, in which we
    promised to do so; and we tell our friend of the piracies and evil
    actions of the Sakarran people, who have, for many years past,
    done much mischief to trade, and make it dangerous for boats to
    sail along the coast; and this year many prahus, which wanted
    to sail to Singapore, have been afraid. We inform our friend
    Captain Keppel of this, as we desire to end all the piracy,
    and to perform our agreement with the Queen of England."


_Monday, 5th August, 1844_, being the morning fixed for the departure
of our expedition against the Sakarran pirates, the Phlegethon steamer
weighed at 8 o'clock, and proceeded down the river to await at the
mouth the collection of our force. Among those who accompanied us from
Sarawak was the Pangeran Budrudeen, the intelligent brother of the
rajah already noticed. This was a great and unusual event in the royal
family; and the departure from the rajah's wharf, which I viewed from
Mr. Brooke's house, on the opposite bank of the river, was intended
to be very imposing. The barge of state was decked out with banners
and canopies; all the chiefs attended, with the Arab priest Mudlana
at their head, and the barge pushed off amid the firing of cannon,
and a general screech, invoking the blessing of Mahomet.

Having seen the last boat off, Mr. Brooke and myself took our departure
in the gig, when another and last farewell salute was fired from the
rajah's wharf.

Three hours brought us to the steamer, anchored off the fishing huts
at the mouth of the river. Here we heard that a small boat from
the enemy's country had, under the pretence of trading, just been
in to spy into our force, but decamped again on the appearance of
the steamer. We now all got fairly away together, the smaller boats
keeping near the shoals in shore, while the steamer was obliged to make
an offing some miles from the coast. From the masthead we distinctly
made out the small boat that had left the mouth of the river before,
both pulling and sailing in the direction of the Batang Lupar, up which
the Sakarran country lies; and as it was desirable that the pirates
should not get information of our approach, at dusk, being well in
advance, and our auxiliary force following, I dispatched Mr. Brooke's
Singapore sampan and one of the Dido's cutters in chase. At half-past
nine we anchored in the stream within the entrance.

We were fortunate at Sarawak in picking up two excellent and
intelligent pilots, who had long known the whole river, and had
themselves been several times forced to serve in the boats while on
their piratical excursions.

_Tuesday 6th._--With the flood-tide arrived all the well appointed
and imposing little fleet, and with them the cutter and sampan with
two out of the three men belonging to the boat of which they had
been in chase; the third having been speared by Seboo, on showing a
strong inclination to run a-muck in his own boat, _i. e._ to sell his
life as dearly as he could. From these men we obtained information
that Seriff Sahib was fully prepared for defence--that his harem had
been removed--and that he would fight to the last. We also learned
that Macota, better known among us by the name of the "Serpent," and
often mentioned in Mr. Brooke's journal, was the principal adviser,
in whose house the councils of war were generally held.

We anchored, in the afternoon, off the mouth of the river Linga;
and while there we dispatched a messenger to Seriff Jaffer to
caution him against giving any countenance or support to either of
the Seriffs Sahib and Muller, on whose punishment and destruction we
were determined.

The Batang Lupar, as far as this, is a magnificent river, from three to
four miles wide, and, in most parts, from five to seven fathoms water.

_Wednesday, 7th._--We weighed at daylight, but were obliged to anchor
again before appearing in sight of Patusen, until the tide should
rise sufficiently to enable us to pass a long flat shoal, over which,
during the spring-tides, a bore rushes with frightful velocity.

We now collected our boats, and made our arrangements as well as
we could, for attacking a place we had not yet seen. We had now a
little more difficulty in keeping our native force back, as many of
those who had accompanied the expedition last year had gained so much
confidence that the desire of plunder exceeded the feeling of fear.

After weighing at 11, with a strong tide sweeping us up, we were not
many minutes in coming in sight of the fortifications of Patusen; and
indeed they were not to be despised. There were five of them, two not
quite finished. Getting suddenly into six feet water, we anchored the
steamer; not so formidable a berth, although well within musket-range,
as we might have taken up had I been aware of the increasing depth
of water nearer the town; but we approached so rapidly there was no
time to wait the interpretation of the pilot's information.

The Dido and Phlegethon's boats were not long in forming
alongside. They were directed to pull in shore, and then attack the
forts in succession; but my gallant first-lieutenant, Wade, who had
the command, was the first to break the line, and pull directly in
the face of the largest fort. His example was followed by the others;
and dividing, each boat pulled for that which appeared to the officer
in command to be the one most likely to make a good fight. The forts
were the first to open fire on both steamer and boats, which was
quickly and smartly returned. It is impossible to imagine a prettier
sight than it was from the top of the Phlegethon's paddle-box. It was
my intention to have fired on the enemy from the steamer, so as to
draw their attention off the boats; but owing to the defective state
of the detonating priming-tubes, the guns from the vessel did not go
off, and the boats had all the glory to themselves.

They never once checked in their advance; but the moment they touched
the shore the crews rushed up, entering the forts at the embrasures,
while the pirates fled by the rear.

In this sharp and short affair we had but one man killed, poor John
Ellis, a fine young man, and captain of the main-top in the Dido. He
was cut in two by a cannon-shot while in the act of ramming home a
cartridge in the bow-gun of the Jolly Bachelor. Standing close to
poor Ellis at the fatal moment was a fine promising young middy,
Charles Johnson, a nephew of Mr. Brooke's, who fortunately escaped
unhurt. This, and two others badly wounded, were the only accidents
on our side.

Our native allies were not long in following our men on shore. The
killed and wounded on the part of the pirates must have been
considerable. Our followers got several heads. There were no fewer
than sixty-four brass guns of different sizes, beside many iron,
found in and about the forts: the latter we spiked and threw into
the river. The town was very extensive; and after being well looted,
made a glorious blaze.

Our Sarawak followers, both Malays and Dyaks, behaved with the
greatest gallantry, and dashed in under the fire of the forts. In
fact, like their country, anything might be made of them under a good
government; and such is their confidence in Mr. Brooke's judgment,
and their attachment to his person, that he might safely defy in his
own stronghold the attacks of any foreign power.

After our men had dined, and had a short rest during the heat of the
day, we landed our whole force in two divisions--and a strange but
formidable-looking force they made--to attack a town situated about
two miles up, on the left bank of a small river called the Grahan,
the entrance to which had been guarded by the forts; and immediately
after their capture the tide had fallen too low for our boats to get
up. Facing the stream, too, was a long stockade; so that we determined
on attacking the place in the rear, which, had the pirates only waited
to receive us, would have caused a very interesting skirmish. They,
however, decamped, leaving everything behind them. In this town we
found Seriff Sahib's residence, and, among other things, all his
curious and extensive wardrobe. It was ridiculous to see our Dyaks
dressed out in all the finery and plunder of this noted pirate, whose
very name, a few days previous, would have made them tremble. Goats
and poultry there were in abundance. We likewise found a magazine
in the rear of the seriff's house, containing about two tons of
gunpowder; also a number of small barrels of fine powder, branded
"Dartford," in exactly the same state as it had left the manufactory
in England. It being too troublesome and heavy to convey on board
the steamer, and each of our native followers staggering up to his
knees in mud, under a heavy load of plunder, I had it thrown into the
river. It was evident how determined the chief had been to defend
himself, as, beside the defences already completed, eight others,
in different states of forwardness, were in the course of erection;
and had the attack been delayed a few weeks, Patusen would not have
been carried by boats without considerable loss of life. It was the
key to this extensive river; the resort of the worst of pirates; and
each chief had contributed his share of guns and ammunition toward
its fortification and defence.

We returned to our boats and evening meal rather fatigued, but much
pleased with our day's work, after ascending nearly seventy miles
from the mouth of the river. The habitations of 5000 pirates had
been burnt to the ground; four strong forts destroyed, together with
several hundred boats; upward of sixty brass cannons captured, and
about a fourth that number of iron spiked and thrown into the river,
beside vast quantities of other arms and ammunition; and the powerful
Seriff Sahib, the great pirate-patron for the last twenty years, ruined
past recovery, and driven to hide his diminished head in the jungle.

The 8th and 9th were passed in burning and destroying the rest of
the straggling town, and a variety of smaller boats, which were very
numerous. I had also an account to settle with that cunning rascal
Macota, for his aiding and abetting Seriff Sahib in his piracies. He
had located himself very pleasantly near a bend in the river,
about a mile above Seriff Sahib's settlement, and was in the act
of building extensive fortifications, when I had the satisfaction
of anticipating the visit and some of the compliments he would have
conferred on my friend Mr. Brooke at Sarawak. Budrudeen, the rajah's
brother, had likewise been duped by this fellow, and was exceedingly
anxious to insert the blade of a very sharp and beautiful kris into
the body of his late friend. Mr. Brooke, however, was anxious to
save his life, which he afterward had the satisfaction of doing. I
shall never forget the tiger-like look of the young Pangeran when we
landed together in the hopes of surprising the "Serpent" in his den;
but he was too quick for us, having decamped with his followers,
and in so great a hurry as to leave all his valuables behind--among
them a Turkish pipe, some chairs once belonging to the Royalist, and
other presents from Mr. Brooke. Everything belonging to him was burnt
or destroyed save some handsome brass guns. There was one of about
12 cwt. that had been lent by the sultan when Macota was in favor,
and which I returned to Budrudeen for his brother.

We were here joined by a large number of the Linga Dyaks, the same
force that had joined us the year previous, while up the Sarebus,
but unaccompanied by Seriff Jaffer, of whom it was not quite clear
that he had not been secretly aiding the pirates. I sent them back with
assurances to their chiefs that they should not be molested unless they
gave shelter or protection to either Seriff Sahib or Muller. Seriff
Sahib, with a considerable body of followers, escaped inland in the
direction of the mountains, from the other side of which he would be
able to communicate with the river Linga. Macota was obliged to fly
up the river toward the Undop, on which the village and residence of
Seriff Sahib's brother, Seriff Muller, was situated.

Having destroyed every boat and sampan, as well as house or hut, on
the 10th, as soon as the tide had risen sufficiently to take us over
the shoals, we weighed, in the steamer, for the country of the Sakarran
Dyaks, having sent the boats on before with the first of the flood.

About fifteen miles above Patusen is the branch of the river called
the Undop: up this river I dispatched Lieutenant Turnour, with
Mr. Comber, in the Jolly Bachelor, and a division of our native
boats, while we proceeded to where the river again branches off to
the right and left, as on the tongue of land so formed we understood
we should find a strong fort; beside, it was the highest point to
which we could attempt to take the steamer. The branch to the left
is called the Sakarran; that to the right retains the name of Lupar,
inhabited chiefly by Sakarrans. We found the place deserted and the
houses empty. Knowing that these people depended almost entirely
for protection on the strongly fortified position at Patusen, I did
not expect any similar opposition from either Seriff Muller or the
desperate bloodthirsty Sakarrans, and consequently divided my force
into three division--the one, already mentioned, under Lieutenant
Turnour, up the Undop; another, under Mr. D'Aeth, up the Lupar; while
Lieutenant Wade, accompanied by Mr. Brooke, ascended the Sakarran. I
had not calculated on the disturbed and excited state in which I
found the country; and two wounded men having been sent back from
the Undop branch with accounts of the pirates, chiefly Malays, who
were collected in great numbers, both before and in the rear of our
small force; and an attempt having been made to cut off the bearer
of this information, Nakoda Bahar, who had had a very narrow escape,
and had no idea of taking back an answer unless attended by a European
force,--I determined on sending assistance. But I had some difficulty
in mustering another crew from the steamer, and was obliged to leave my
friend Capt. Scott, with only the idlers, rather critically situated.

I deemed it advisable to re-collect my whole force; and before
proceeding to the punishment of the Sakarrans, to destroy the power
and influence of Seriff Muller, whose town was situated about twenty
miles up, and was said to contain a population of 1500 Malays,
independently of the surrounding Dyak tribes. Having dispatched
boats with directions to Lieutenant Wade and Mr. D'Aeth to join
us in the Undop, I proceeded in my gig to the scene of action,
leaving the steamer to maintain as strict a blockade of the Sakarran
and Lupar branches as, with their reduced force, they were capable
of. On my joining Lieutenant Turnour, I found him just returned from
a very spirited attack which he had made, assisted by Mr. Comber,
on a stockade situated on the summit of a steep hill; Mr. Allen, the
master, being still absent on a similar service, on the opposite side
of the river. The gallant old chief Patingi Ali was likewise absent,
in pursuit of the enemy that had been driven from the stockades,
with whom he had had a hand-to-hand fight, the whole of which--being
on the rising ground--was witnessed by our boats' crews, who could
not resist hailing his return from his gallant achievement with three
hearty British cheers. This had the effect of giving such an impulse
to his courage, that, in a subsequent affair, it unhappily caused a
serious loss among this active and useful branch of our force.

We had now to unite in cutting our way through a barrier across
the river similar to that described in the attack on the Sarebus,
which having passed, we brought up for the night close to a still more
serious obstacle, being a number of huge trees felled, the branches of
which meeting midway in the river, formed apparently an insurmountable
obstacle to our progress. But "patience and perseverance overcome
all difficulties;" and by night only three of the trees remained to
be cleared away. We were now within a short distance of their town,
so that we could distinctly hear the noise and confusion which our
advance had occasioned. On the right bank, and about fifty yards in
advance of the barrier, stood a farm-house, which we considered it
prudent to occupy for the night, for which advanced post we collected
about fifty volunteers. These consisted of Messrs. Steward, Williamson,
and Comber; a corporal and four marines; my gig's crew; and a medley
of picked men from our Dyak and Malay followers; not forgetting my
usual and trusty attendant John Eager with his bugle, the sounding of
which was to be the signal for the whole force to come to the rescue,
in the event of surprise--not at all improbable from the nature of
our warfare and our proximity to the enemy's town.

And here a most ludicrous scene occurred during the night. Having
placed our sentries and look-out men, and given "Tiga" as the
watchword, we were, shortly after midnight, suddenly aroused from
sound sleep by a Dyak war-yell, which was immediately responded to by
the whole force. It was pitch dark: the interior of our farmhouse, the
partitions of which had been removed for the convenience of stowage,
was crowded to excess. In a moment every man was on his legs: swords,
spears, and krisses dimly glittered over our heads. It is impossible
to describe the excitement and confusion of the succeeding ten minutes:
one and all believed that we had been surrounded by the enemy, and cut
off from our main party. I had already thrust the muzzle of my pistol
close to the heads of several natives, whom, in the confusion, I had
mistaken for Sakarrans; and as each in his turn called out "Tiga,"
I withdrew my weapon to apply it to somebody else; until, at last,
we found that we were all "Tigas." I had prevented Eager, more than
once, from sounding the alarm, which, from the first, he had not
ceased to press me for permission to do. The Dyak yell had, however,
succeeded in throwing the whole force afloat into a similar confusion,
and not hearing the signal, they concluded that they, and not we,
were the party attacked. The real cause we afterward ascertained to
have arisen from the alarm of a Dyak, who dreamt, or imagined, that he
felt a spear thrust upward through the bamboo-flooring of our building,
and immediately gave his diabolical yell. The confusion was ten times
as much as it would have been had the enemy really been there. So
ended the adventures of the night in the wild jungle of Borneo.





CHAPTER XIX.

    Seriff Muller's town sacked.--Ascend the river in pursuit
    of the enemy.--Gallant exploit of Lieutenant Wade.--His
    death and funeral.--Interesting anecdote of him.--Ascend the
    Sakarran branch.--Native boats hemmed in by pirates, and their
    crews slaughtered to a man.--Karangan destroyed.--Captain
    Sir E. Belcher arrives in the Samarang's boats.--Return to
    Sarawak.--New expedition against Seriff Sahib and Jaffer.--Macota
    captured.--Flight of Seriff Sahib.--Conferences.--Seriff Jaffer
    deposed.--Mr. Brooke's speech in the native tongue.--End of the
    expedition, and return to Sarawak.--The Dido sails for England.


At daylight we were joined by Lieutenant Wade and Mr. Brooke--their
division making a very acceptable increase to our force--and by
8 o'clock the last barrier was cut through between us and Seriff
Muller's devoted town. With the exception of his own house, from which
some eight or nine Malays were endeavoring to move his effects, the
whole place was deserted. They made no fight; and an hour afterward
the town had been plundered and burnt. The only lives lost were a few
unfortunates, who happened to come within range of our musketry in
their exertions to save some of their master's property. A handsome
large boat, belonging to that chief, was the only thing saved; and
this I presented to Budrudeen. After a short delay in catching our
usual supply of goats and poultry, with which the place abounded, we
proceeded up the river in chase of the chief and his people; and here
again we had to encounter the same obstacle presented by the felled
trees thrown across the river--if possible of increased difficulty,
owing to their greater size and the narrow breadth of the stream;
but although delayed we were not to be beaten. We ascertained that
the pirates had retreated to a Dyak village, situated on the summit
of a hill, some twenty-five miles higher up the Undop, five or six
miles only of which we had succeeded in ascending, as a most dreary
and rainy night closed in, during which we were joined by Mr. D'Aeth
and his division from the Lupar river.

The following morning, the 13th of August, at daybreak, we again
commenced our toilsome work. With the gig and the lighter boats we
succeeded better; and I should have despaired of the heavier boats
ever getting up, had they not been assisted by an opportune and sudden
rise of the tide, to the extent of twelve or fourteen feet, though
with this we had to contend against a considerably increased strength
of current. It was on this day that my ever active and zealous first
lieutenant, Charles Wade, jealous of the advanced position of our
light boats, obtained a place in my gig. That evening the Phlegethon's
first and second cutters, the Dido's two cutters, and their gigs,
were fortunate enough to pass a barrier composed of trees evidently
but recently felled; from which we concluded ourselves to be so near
the enemy, that, by pushing forward as long as we could possibly see,
we might prevent further impediments from being thrown in our way. This
we did; but at 9 P.M. arriving at a broad expanse of the river, and
being utterly unable to trace our course, we anchored our advanced
force for the night.

On Wednesday, 14th, we again pushed on at daylight. We had gained
information of two landing-places leading to the Dyak village on the
hill, round three-fourths of the foot of which the Undop flowed. The
first landing-place we had no trouble in discovering, from the number
of deserted boats collected near it. Leaving these to be looted by our
followers, we proceeded in search of the second, which we understood
was situated more immediately under the village, and which, having
advanced without our guides, we had much difficulty in finding. The
circuit of the base of the hill was above five miles. In traversing
this distance, we had repeated skirmishing with straggling boats
of the enemy, upon whom we came unexpectedly. During this warfare,
Patingi Ali, who, with his usual zeal, had here come up, bringing a
considerable native force of both Malays and Dyaks, was particularly
on the alert; and while we in the gig attacked the large war-prahu
of Seriff Muller himself--the resistance of whose followers was only
the discharge of their muskets, after which they threw themselves
into the river, part only effecting their escape--the Patingi nearly
succeeded in capturing that chief in person. He had escaped from his
prahu into a remarkably beautiful and fast-pulling sampan, in which he
was chased by old Ali, and afterward only saved his life by throwing
himself into the water, and swimming to the jungle; and it was with
no small pride that the gallant old chief appropriated the boat to his
own use. In the prahu were captured two large brass guns, two smaller
ones, a variety of small arms, ammunition, provisions, colors and
personal property, among which were also two pair of handsome jars of
English manufacture. After this, having proceeded some considerable
distance without finding the second landing-place, we put in close
to a clear green spot, with the intention of getting our breakfasts,
and of waiting the arrival of the other boat with the guides.

While our crew were busily employed cooking, Lieutenant Wade and
myself fancied we heard the suppressed voices of many people not
far distant, and taking up our guns we crept into the jungle. We had
not penetrated many yards before I came in sight of a mass of boats
concealed in a snug little inlet, the entrance to which had escaped
our notice. These were filled with the piratical Dyaks and Malays,
and on shore at various points were placed armed sentinels. My first
impulse was to conceal ourselves until the arrival of our force; but
my rash, though gallant friend deemed otherwise; and without noticing
the caution of my upheld hand, dashed in advance, discharging his gun,
and calling upon our men to follow. It is impossible to conceive the
consternation and confusion this our sudden sally occasioned among
the pirates. The confused noise and scrambling from their boats I
can only liken to that of a suddenly-roused flock of wild ducks. Our
attack from the point whence it came was evidently unexpected; and it
is my opinion that they calculated on our attacking the hill, if we
did so at all, from the nearest landing-place, without pulling round
the other five miles, as the whole attention of their scouts appeared
to be directed toward that quarter. A short distance above them was
a small encampment, probably erected for the convenience of their
chiefs, as in it we found writing materials, two or three desks of
English manufacture, on the brass plate of one of which, I afterward
noticed, was engraved the name of "_Mr. Wilson_." To return to the
pirates: with our force, such as it was--nine in number--and headed
by Lieutenant Wade, we pursued our terrified enemy, who had not the
sense or courage to rally in their judiciously selected and naturally
protected encampment, but continued their retreat (firing on us from
the jungle) toward the Dyak village on the summit of the hill.

We here collected our force, reloaded our fire-arms; and Lieutenant
Wade, seeing from this spot the arrival at the landing-place of the
other boats, again rushed on in pursuit. Before arriving at the foot
of the steep ascent on the summit of which the before-mentioned
Dyak village stood, we had to cross a small open space of about
sixty yards, exposed to the fire from the village as well as the
surrounding jungle. It was before crossing this plain that I again
cautioned my gallant friend to await the arrival of his men, of
whom he was far in advance; and almost immediately afterward he fell
mortally wounded at my feet, having been struck by two rifle-shots,
and died instantaneously. I remained with the body until our men
came up, and giving it in charge, we carried the place on the height
without a check or further accident. The Dyak village we now occupied
I would have spared, as on no occasion had we noticed any of the tribe
fighting against us; but it was by shot fired from it that poor Wade
was killed, and the work of destruction commenced simultaneously with
the arrival of our men. It was most gratifying to me throughout the
expedition to observe the friendly rivalry and emulation between the
crews of the Phlegethon and the Dido's boats. On this occasion the
former had the glory of first gaining the height; and one of the
officers of the former, Mr. Simpson, wounded, with a pistol-shot,
a man armed with a rifle, supposed to have been the person who had
slain our first-lieutenant.

I may here narrate a circumstance, from which one may judge of the
natural kind-heartedness of my lamented friend. During the heat of
the pursuit, although too anxious to advance to await the arrival of
his men, he nevertheless found time to conceal in a place of security
a poor terrified Malay girl whom he overtook, and who, by an imploring
look, touched his heart. The village and the piratical boats destroyed,
and the excitement over, we had time to reflect on the loss we had
sustained of one so generally beloved as the leader of the expedition
had been among us all. Having laid the body in a canoe, with the
British union-jack for a pall, we commenced our descent of the river
with very different spirits from those with which we had ascended only
a few hours before. In the evening, with our whole force assembled,
we performed the last sad ceremony of committing the body to the deep,
with all the honors that time and circumstance would allow. I read
that beautiful, impressive service from a prayer-book, the only one,
by the by, in the expedition, which he himself had brought, as he said,
"in case of accident."

Before we again got under weigh, several Malay families, no longer
in dread of their piratical chief, Seriff Muller, who had fled nobody
knew whither, gave themselves up to us as prisoners, trusting to the
mercy of a white man; the first instance of any of them having done
so. We heard, also, that Macota had retreated with the seriff; and on
examination we found the papers captured in the encampment belonged to
them, exposing several deep intrigues and false statements addressed
to the sultan, the purport of which was to impress his mind with the
belief of a hostile intention on the part of the British government
toward his country. We brought-up for the night off the still-burning
ruins of Seriff Muller's town.

On Thursday the 15th we again reached the steamer. We found her
prepared for action, having been much annoyed during the night by the
continued Dyak war-yells--sounds, to uninitiated ears, as unpleasant
as those of musketry. Having driven away the two principal instigators
and abettors of all the piracies committed along the coast of Borneo
and elsewhere, and destroyed their strongholds, it now remained for
us to punish the pirates themselves as far as lay in our power. The
Sakarran Dyaks being the only ones now remaining who had not received
convincing proofs that their brutal and inhuman trade would be no
longer allowed, the 15th and 16th were passed on board the steamer,
to rest the men after the severe fatigue encountered up the Undop,
and in making preparations for an advance up the Sakarran. During the
night of the 16th, several of our native followers were wounded. Their
boats not being furnished with anchors, and the river being deep, they
were obliged to make fast to the bank, which in the dark afforded great
facility for the enemy to creep down through the jungle unperceived,
so close as to fire a shot and even thrust their spears through the
thin mat covering of the boats. One poor fellow received a shot in
his lungs, from which he died the following day; a Dyak likewise
died from a spear-wound; and in the morning we witnessed the pile
forming for burning the Dyak, and the coffin making for conveying the
body of the Malay to Sarawak, his native place; both parties having
an equal horror of their dead falling into the hands of the enemy,
although differing in their mode of disposing of them.

On Saturday, the 17th, the expedition, consisting of the Dido's
pinnace, her two cutters and gig, the Jolly Bachelor, and the
Phlegethon's first and second cutters and gig, started up the
Sakarran. A small division of light native boats, under the command of
the brave old Patingi Ali, were selected to keep as a reconnoitering
party with our leading boats, while the remaining native force, of
above thirty boats, followed as a reserve. We advanced the first day
some twenty miles without so much as seeing a native, although our
progress was considerably delayed by stopping to burn farm-houses,
and a number of war-prahus found concealed in the jungle or long grass
on either side of the river. We brought up early in the afternoon, for
the purpose of strongly fortifying ourselves, both ashore and afloat,
against surprise before the night set in, by which time it would have
taken a well-disciplined and powerful force to have dislodged us.

This evening we had unusually fine weather; and we squatted down to
our meal of curry and rice with better appetites and higher spirits
than we had done for some days. We advanced the following day: and
although we reached several villages, the grain had been removed
from them all; which, in all probability, was done immediately upon
their hearing of the fall of their supposed impregnable Patusen. In
the evening we took the same precautions as on the preceding night,
considering that our enemies were not to be despised. Owing to heavy
rains which fell during the night, and caused a strong current, our
progress was considerably retarded. The scenery was beautiful--more
so than in any of the rivers we had yet visited. We likewise now
repeatedly fell in with small detachments of the enemy, and spears
were thrown from the banks, which added considerably to our excitement
and amusement. On every point we found the remains of the preceding
night's watch-fires, so that news of our approach would have been
conveyed rapidly along. While leading in the gig with a select
few of our followers, we came suddenly on a boat full of warriors,
all gorgeously dressed, and apparently perfectly unconscious of our
approach. The discharge of our muskets and the capsizing of their
war-boat was the work of an instant; but most of their crew saved
their lives by escaping into the jungle.

This evening, Sunday, the 18th, we experienced some difficulty
in finding a suitable place for our bivouac. While examining the
most eligible-looking spot on the bank of the river, the crew of
one of the Phlegethon's boats, having crept up the opposite bank,
came suddenly on a party of Dyaks, who saluted them with a war-yell
and a shower of spears; and it was absurd to see the way in which
they precipitated themselves into the water again to escape from
this unexpected danger. The Dyaks, too, appear to have been equally
surprised. The place we selected for the night was a large house about
forty yards from the edge of the river; and for a musket-range around
which we had not much difficulty in clearing the ground. Here we all
united our different messes, and passed a jovial evening. The night,
however, set in with a most fearful thunder-storm, accompanied by the
most vivid flashes of lightning I ever witnessed. The rain continued
to fall in torrents; it cleared up at daylight, when we proceeded. As
yet the banks of the river had been a continued garden, with sugarcane
plantations and banana-trees in abundance. As we advanced, the scenery
assumed a wilder and still more beautiful appearance, presenting high
steep points, with large overhanging trees, and occasionally forming
into pretty picturesque bays, with sloping banks. At other times we
approached narrow gorges, looking so dark that, until past, you almost
doubted there being a passage through. We were in hopes that this
morning we should have reached their capital, a place called Karangan,
supposed to be about ten miles farther on. At 9 o'clock Mr. Brooke,
who was with me in the gig, stopped to breakfast with young Jenkins
in the second cutter. Not expecting to meet with any opposition for
some miles, I gave permission to Patingi Ali to advance cautiously
with his light division, and with positive instructions to fall back
upon the first appearance of any natives. As the stream was running
down very strong, we held on to the bank, waiting for the arrival of
the second cutter. Our pinnace and second gig having both passed up,
we had remained about a quarter of an hour, when the report of a few
musket-shots told us that the pirates had been fallen in with. We
immediately pushed on; and as we advanced, the increased firing from
our boats, and the war-yells of some thousand Dyaks, let us know that
an engagement had really commenced. It would be difficult to describe
the scene as I found it. About twenty boats were jammed together,
forming one confused mass; some bottom up; the bows or sterns of
others only visible; mixed up, pell-mell, with huge rafts; and among
which were nearly all our advanced little division. Headless trunks,
as well as heads without bodies, were lying about in all directions;
parties were engaged hand to hand, spearing and krissing each other;
others were striving to swim for their lives; entangled in the common
_mêlée_ were our advanced boats; while on both banks thousands of
Dyaks were rushing down to join in the slaughter, hurling their
spears and stones on the boats below. For a moment I was at a loss
what steps to take for rescuing our people from the embarrassed
position in which they were, as the whole mass (through which there
was no passage) were floating down the stream, and the addition of
fresh boats arriving only increased the confusion. Fortunately, at
this critical moment one of the rafts, catching the stump of a tree,
broke this floating bridge, making a passage, through which (my gig
being propelled by paddles instead of oars) I was enabled to pass.

It occurred to Mr. Brooke and myself simultaneously, that, by advancing
in the gig, we should draw the attention of the pirates toward us,
so as to give time for the other boats to clear themselves. This had
the desired effect. The whole force on shore turned, as if to secure
what they rashly conceived to be their prize.

We now advanced mid-channel: spears and stones assailed us from
both banks. My friend Brooke's gun would not go off; so giving
him the yoke-lines, he steered the boat while I kept up a rapid
fire. Mr. Allen, in the second gig, quickly coming up, opened upon
them, from a congreve-rocket tube, such a destructive fire as caused
them to retire panic-struck behind the temporary barriers where they
had concealed themselves previous to the attack upon Patingi Ali,
and from whence they continued, for some twenty minutes, to hurl
their spears and other missiles. Among the latter may be mentioned
short lengths of bamboo, one end heavily loaded with stone, and
thrown with great force and precision; the few fire-arms of which
they were possessed were of but little use to them after the first
discharge, the operation of reloading, in their inexperienced hands,
requiring a longer time than the hurling of some twenty spears. The
sumpitan was likewise freely employed by these pirates; but although
several of our men belonging to the pinnace were struck, no fatal
results ensued, from the dextrous and expeditious manner in which
the wounded parts were excised by Mr. Beith, the assistant-surgeon;
any poison that might remain being afterward sucked out by one of
the comrades of the wounded men.

As our force increased, the pirates retreated from their position,
and could not again muster courage to rally. Their loss must have
been considerable; ours might have been light, had poor old Patingi
Ali attended to orders.

It appears that the Patingi (over-confident, and probably urged
on by Mr. Steward, who, unknown to me, was concealed in Ali's beat
when application was made by that chief for permission to proceed
in advance for the purpose of reconnoitering), instead of falling
back, as particularly directed, on the first appearance of any of
the enemy, made a dash, followed by his little division of boats,
through the narrow pass above described. As soon as he had done so,
huge rafts of bamboo were lanched across the river, so as to cut off
his retreat. Six large war-prahus, probably carrying 100 men each,
then bore down--three on either side--on his devoted followers;
and one only of a crew of seventeen that manned his boat escaped to
tell the tale. When last seen by our advanced boats, Mr. Steward and
Patingi Ali were in the act (their own boats sinking) of boarding the
enemy. They were doubtless overpowered and killed, with twenty-nine
others, who lost their lives on this occasion. Our wounded in all
amounted to fifty-six.

A few miles higher up was the town and capital of Karangan, which
place it was their business to defend, and ours to destroy, and this
we succeeded in effecting without further opposition. We ascended a
short distance above this, but found the river impracticable for the
further progress of the boats; but our object having been achieved,
the expedition may be said to have closed, as no more resistance was
offered; so we dropped leisurely down the river, and that evening
reached our resting-place of the previous night: but having burnt
the house in the morning, we were obliged to sleep in our boats,
with a strong guard on shore.

Attempts were made to molest the native boats by hurling spears
into them from the jungle under cover of the night; but after a few
discharges of musketry the enemy retired, leaving us to enjoy another
stormy and rainy night as we best could.

On the 20th we reached the steamer, where we remained quiet all the
next day, attending to the wounded, and ascertaining the exact extent
of our loss. On the 22d we again reached Patusen. We found everything
in the same wretched state as when we left; and a pile of firewood,
previously cut for the use of the steamer, had not been removed. After
dark a storm of thunder, lightning, and heavy rain, came on as usual,
and with it a few mishaps. A boat belonging to the old Tumangong was
capsized by the bore, by which his plunder, including a large brass
gun, was lost, and the crew with difficulty saved their lives. At
eight we heard the report of a gun, which was again repeated much
nearer at nine; and before a signal-rocket could be fired, or a
light shown, we were astonished by being hailed by the boats of
a British man-of-war; and the next moment Captain Sir E. Belcher,
having been assisted by a rapid tide, came alongside the steamer with
the welcome news of having brought our May letters from England. On
the arrival of the Samarang off the Morotaba, Sir Edward heard of
the loss we had sustained; and, with his usual zeal and activity,
came at once to our assistance, having brought his boats no less
than 120 miles in about thirty hours. At the moment of his joining
us, our second mishap occurred. The night, as previously mentioned,
was pitch dark, and a rapid current running, when the cry of "a man
overboard" caused a sensation difficult to describe. All available
boats were immediately dispatched in search; and soon afterward we
were cheered by the sound of "all right." It appears that the news
of the arrival of the mail was not long in spreading throughout our
little fleet, when Mr. D'Aeth, leaving the first cutter in a small
sampan, capsized in coming alongside the steamer; the man in the bow
(who composed the crew) saved himself by catching hold of the nearest
boat; Mr. D'Aeth would have been drowned had he not been an excellent
swimmer. This was not the last of our mishaps; for we had no sooner
arranged ourselves and newly-arrived visitors from the Samarang
comfortably on board the steamer from the pelting rain, than the
accustomed and quick ear of Mr. Brooke heard the cry of natives in
distress. Jumping into his Singapore sampan, he pushed off to their
assistance, and returned shortly afterward, having picked up three,
half drowned, of our Dyak followers, whom he had found clinging
to the floating trunk of a tree. They too had been capsized by the
bore; when, out of eleven composing the crew, only these three were
saved--although the Dyaks are invariably expert swimmers.

On the 23d, after waiting to obtain meridian observations, we moved
down as far as the mouth of the river Linga, and then dispatched one
of our Malay chiefs to the town of Bunting to summon Seriff Jaffer
to a conference. This, however, he declined on a plea of ill health,
sending assurance, at the same time, of his goodwill and inclination
to assist us in our endeavors to suppress piracy.

On the night of the 24th, we once again reached Sarawak, where the
rejoicings of the previous year, when we returned from a successful
expedition, were repeated. On the third evening after our return,
we were just settling down to enjoy a little rest, having got our
sick and wounded into comfortable quarters, and were beginning
heartily to indulge in the comforts of a bed after our fatigue and
harassing duties in open boats during the previous three weeks, when
information arrived that Seriff Sahib had taken refuge in the Linga
river, where, assisted by Seriff Jaffer, he was again collecting his
followers. No time was to be lost; and on the 28th, with the addition
of the Samarang's boats, we once more started, to crush, if possible,
this persevering and desperate pirate; and, in the middle of the night,
came to an anchor inside the Linga river.

When our expedition had been watched safely outside the Batang
Lupar, on its return to Sarawak, all those unfortunate families that
had concealed themselves in the jungle, after the destruction of
the different towns of Patusen and Undop, had emerged from their
hiding-places, and, embarking on rafts, half-ruined boats, or,
in short, anything that would float, were in the act of tiding and
working their passage toward the extensive and flourishing town of
Bunting. Their dismay can well be imagined, when, at daylight on the
morning of the 29th, they found themselves carried by the tide close
alongside the long, black, terror-spreading steamer, and in the midst
of our augmented fleet. Escape to them was next to hopeless; nor did
the softer sex seem much to mind the change--probably thinking that to
be swallowed up by the white man was not much worse than dying in the
jungle of starvation. I need not say that, instead of being molested,
they were supplied with such provisions and assistance as our means
would permit us to afford, and then allowed to pass quietly on;
in addition to which we dispatched several of our native followers
into the Batang Lupar, to inform the poor fugitives that our business
was with the chiefs and instigators of piracy, and not to molest the
misguided natives.

With the ebb tide a large number of boats came down from the town--the
news of our arrival having reached them during the night--containing
the principal chiefs, with assurances of their pacific intentions,
and welcoming us with presents of poultry, goats, fruit, &c., which
we received, paying the fair market-price for them, either by way of
barter or in hard dollars. They assured us that Seriff Sahib should not
be received among them; but that they had heard of his having arrived
at Pontranini, on a small tributary stream some fifty miles above
their town. We immediately decided on proceeding in pursuit before he
could have time to establish himself in any force. It was also evident
that the Balow Dyaks, who inhabit this part of the country, were
decidedly in favor of our operations against Seriff Sahib, although
afraid--on account of Seriff Jaffer and his Malays--to express their
opinions openly. We also ascertained that Macota, with a remnant of
his followers, was hourly expected in the mouth of the river, from the
jungle, into which he had been driven during the fight on the Undop
heights. Knowing that it would fare badly with this treacherous and
cunning, although now harmless chief, should he fall into the hands of
any of our native followers, I dispatched two boats to look out for and
bring him to us alive. This they succeeded in doing, securing him in a
deep muddy jungle, into which he had thrown himself upon perceiving the
approach of our men. Leaving him a prisoner on board the Phlegethon,
we, with the floodtide pushed forward in pursuit of Seriff Sahib.

For two days we persevered in dragging our boats, for the distance
of twenty miles, up a small jungly creek, which, to all appearance,
was impassable for anything but canoes. But it had the desired
effect, proving to the natives what determination could achieve in
accomplishing our object, even beyond the hopes of our sanguine Balow
Dyak guides. The consequence was, that Seriff Sahib made a final and
precipitate retreat, across the mountains, in the direction of the
Pontiana river. So close were we on his rear--harassed as he was by the
Balow Dyaks, who had refused him common means of subsistence--that he
threw away his sword, and left behind him a child whom he had hitherto
carried in the jungle; and this once dreaded chief was now driven,
single and unattended, out of the reach of doing any further mischief.

The boats returned, and took up a formidable position off the town of
Bunting, where we summoned Seriff Jaffer to a conference. To this he
was obliged to attend, as the natives had learnt that we were not to
be trifled with, and would have forced him on board rather than have
permitted their village to be destroyed. With Pangeran Budrudeen,
acting as the representative of the sultan, Seriff Jaffer was obliged
to resign all pretensions to the government of the province over
which he had hitherto held sway, since it was considered, from his
being a Malay and from his relationship to Seriff Sahib, that he was
an unsafe person to be intrusted With so important a post.

A second conference on shore took place, at which the chiefs of
all the surrounding country attended, when the above sentence was
confirmed. On this occasion I had the satisfaction of witnessing what
must have been--from the effect I observed it to have produced on
the hearers--a fine piece of oratory, delivered by Mr. Brooke in the
native tongue, with a degree of fluency I had never witnessed before,
even in a Malay. The purport of it, as I understood, was, to point
out emphatically the horrors of piracy on the one hand, which it was
the determination of the British government to suppress, and on the
other hand, the blessings arising from peace and trade, which it was
equally our wish to cultivate; and it concluded by fully explaining,
that the measures lately adopted by us against piracy were for the
protection of all the peaceful communities along the coast. So great
was the attention bestowed during the delivery of this speech that
the dropping of a pin might have been heard.

From these people many assurances were received of their anxiety
and willingness to cooperate with us in our laudable undertaking;
and one and all were alike urgent that the government of their river
should be transferred to the English.

On the 4th September the force again reached Sarawak, and thus
terminated a most successful expedition against the worst pirates on
the coast of Borneo.

We found the Samarang off the Morotaba entrance, when Mr. Brooke
and myself became the guests of Sir Edward Belcher for several days,
during which time we made excursions to all the small islands in that
neighborhood, discovered large quantities of excellent oysters, and
had some very good hog-shooting. Afterward, accompanied by the boats
of the Samarang, we paid a visit to the Lundu Dyaks, which gave them
great delight. They entertained us at a large feast, when the whole
of the late expedition was fought over again, and a war-dance with
the newly-acquired heads of the Sakarran pirates was performed for
our edification. Later in the evening, two of the elder chiefs got
up, and, walking up and down the long gallery, commenced a dialogue,
for the information, as they said, of the women, children, and poorer
people who were obliged to remain at home. It consisted in putting
such questions to one another as should elicit all the particulars of
the late expedition, such as, what had become of different celebrated
Sakarran chiefs (whom they named)? how had they been destroyed? how
did they die? by whom had they been slain? &c. All these inquiries
received the most satisfactory replies, in which the heroic conduct
of themselves and the white men was largely dwelt upon. While this
was performing, the two old warriors, with the heads of their enemies
suspended from their shoulders like a soldier's cartouch-box, stumped
up and down, striking the floor with their clubs, and getting very
excited. How long it lasted none of our party could tell, as one and
all dropped off to sleep during the recital. Mr. Brooke has given so
good a description of these kind and simple people that I need not
here farther notice them.

Shortly after our return to the Samarang, she, getting short of
provisions, sailed for Singapore, and Mr. Brooke and myself went up
to Sarawak, where the Dido was still lying. Great rejoicings and
firing of cannon, as on a former occasion, announced our return;
and, after paying our respects to the rajah, we visited the Tumangong
and Patingis.

A curious ceremony is generally performed on the return of the chiefs
from a fortunate war expedition, which is not only done by way of
a welcome back, but is supposed to insure equal success on the next
excursion. This ceremony was better performed at the old Tumangong's
than at the other houses. After entering the principal room we seated
ourselves in a semicircle on the mat floor, when the old chief's
three wives advanced to welcome us, with their female relatives,
all richly and prettily dressed in sarongs suspended from the waist,
and silken scarfs worn gracefully over one shoulder, just hiding or
exposing as much of their well-shaped persons as they thought most
becoming. Each of these ladies in succession taking a handful of
yellow rice, threw it over us, repeating some mystical words, and
dilating on our heroic deeds, and then they sprinkled our heads with
gold-dust. This is generally done by grating a lump of gold against
a dried piece of shark's skin. Two of these ladies bore the pretty
names of Inda and Amina. Inda was young, pretty, and graceful; and
although she had borne her husband no children, she was supposed to
have much greater influence over him than the other two. Report said
that she had a temper, and that the Tumangong was much afraid of her;
but this may have been only Sarawak scandal. She brought her portion
of gold-dust already grated, and wrapped up in a piece of paper,
from which she took a pinch; and in reaching to sprinkle some over
my head, she, by accident, put the prettiest little foot on to my
hand, which, as she wore neither shoes nor stockings, she did not
hurt sufficiently to cause me to withdraw it. After this ceremony we
(the warriors) feasted and smoked together, attended on by the ladies.

Another conference with Muda Hassim took place, and I subsequently
quitted Sarawak for Singapore, intending to re-provision the Dido
at that port, and then return to Sarawak, in order to convey the
rajah and his suite to Borneo Proper. At Singapore, however, I found
orders for England, and sailed accordingly; but the service alluded
to was readily performed by Sir Edward Belcher, in H.M.S. Samarang,
accompanied by the H. C.'s steamer Phlegethon.

On my return to England I had the gratification to learn that
Mr. Brooke had been appointed agent for the British government in
Borneo, and that Captain Bethune, R.N., C.B., had been dispatched on
special service to that island: events I cannot but consider of great
importance to the best interests of humanity, and to the extension
of British commerce throughout the Malayan Archipelago.





CHAPTER XX.


    Later portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal.--Departure of Captain
    Keppel, and arrival of Sir E. Belcher.--Mr. Brooke proceeds, with
    Muda Hassim, in the Samarang to Borneo.--Labuan examined.--Returns
    to Sarawak.--Visit of Lingire, a Sarebus chief.--The Dyaks of Tumma
    and Bandar Cassim.--Meets an assembly of Malays and Dyaks.--Arrival
    of Lingi, as a deputation from the Sakarran chiefs.--The Malay
    character.--Excursion up the country.--Miserable effects of excess
    in opium-smoking.--Picturesque situation of the Sow village of
    Ra-at.--Nawang.--Feast at Ra-at.--Returns home.--Conferences with
    Dyak chiefs.


The return to England of Captain Bethune, C.B., bringing with him a
further portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal to my charge, enables me to
afford my readers some interesting details relative to the important
events that have occurred in Borneo subsequent to my departure from
Sarawak.

"_January_, 1845.--The departure of the Dido left me sad and lonely,
for Captain Keppel had been really my companion and friend; and he
so thoroughly entered into my views for the suppression of piracy,
and made them his own, that I may not expect any successor to act
with the same vigour and the same decision. Gallant Didos! I would
ask no further aid or protection than I received from you. Sir
Edward Belcher, with the Phlegethon in company, arrived not long
after the Dido's departure, and conveyed the Rajah Muda Hassim and
his train to Borneo Proper. H.M.S. Samarang and Phlegethon visited
and examined Labuan, and proceeded thence to Ambun. Ambun is a
miserable village; and it at once gave the lie to the report of a
European female being there in captivity, for no _poor Orang Kaya_
could retain such a prize. The inhabitants of Ambun are Badjows,
and the country people or Dyaks of the interior are called Dusuns, or
villagers. I saw many of them, and they appeared a gentle mild race,
and far less warlike by account than our Dyaks. They are not tattooed,
and the sumpitan is unknown amongst them. Leaving Ambun, which is
situated in a pretty bay, we proceeded to Tampasuk, a considerable
town, inhabited by Illanuns and Badjows. This is a piractical town;
and I was informed by an Arab in captivity there that scarcely a
week passes without strife and contention amongst themselves. There
likewise I received information respecting the Balagnini, the great
pirates of these seas. They are represented as in habiting numerous
small islands in the vicinity of Sooloo: their origin is Badjow. I
apprehend there would be little difficulty in breaking their power,
and curing the propensity to piracy.

"This cruise being over, I established myself quietly at Sarawak. The
country is peaceable; trade flourishes; the Dyaks are content;
the Malays greatly increased in number--in short, all goes well. I
received a visit from Lingire, a Dyak chief of Sarebus. At first he
was shy and somewhat suspicions; but a little attention soon put him
at his ease. He is an intelligent man; and I hail with pleasure his
advent to Sarawak, as the dawn of a friendship with the two pirate
tribes. It is not alone for the benefit of these tribes that I
desire to cultivate their friendship, but for the greater object of
penetrating the interior through their means. There are no Malays
there to impede our progress by their lies and their intrigues;
and, God willing, these rivers shall be the great arteries by which
civilization shall be circulated to the heart of Borneo.

"_14th._--The Dyaks of Tumma, a runaway tribe from Sadong, came
down last night, as Bandar Cassim of Sadong wishes still to extract
property from them. Bandar Cassim I believe to be a weak man, swayed
by stronger-headed and worse rascals; but, now that Seriff Sahib and
Muda Hassim are no longer in the country, he retains no excuse for
oppressing the poor Dyaks. Si Nankan and Tumma have already flown,
and most of the other tribes are ready to follow their example, and
take refuge in Sarawak. I have fully explained to the Bandar that he
will lose all his Dyaks if he continues his system of oppression,
and more especially if he continues to resort to that most hateful
system of seizing the women and children.

"I had a large assembly of natives, Malay and Dyaks, and held forth
many good maxims to them. At present, in Sarawak, we have Balows
and Sarebus, mortal enemies; Lenaar, our extreme tribe, and our new
Sadong tribe of Tumma. Lately we had Kantoss, from near Sarambow,
in the interior of Pontiana; Undops, from that river; and Badjows,
from near Lantang--tribes which had never thought of Sarawak before,
and perhaps never heard the name. Oh, for power to pursue the course
pointed out!

"_16th._--The Julia arrived, much to my relief; and Mr. Low, a botanist
and naturalist, arrived in her. He will be a great acquisition to
our society, if devoted to these pursuits. The same day that the
Julia entered, the Ariel left the river. I dismissed the Tumma Dyaks;
re-warned Bandar Cassim of the consequences of his oppression; and
had a parting interview with Lingire. I had another long talk with
Lingire, and did him honor by presenting him with a spear and flag,
for I believe he is true, and will be useful; and this Orang Kaya
Pa-muncha, the most powerful of these Dyaks, must be mine. Lingire
described to me a great fight he once had with the Kayans, on which
occasion he got ninety-one heads, and forced a large body of them
to retire with inferior numbers. I asked him whether the Kayans used
the sumpitan? he answered, 'Yes.' 'Did many of your men die from the
wounds?' 'No; we can cure them.' This is one more proof in favor of
Mr. Crawfurd's opinion that this poison is not sufficiently virulent
to destroy life when the arrow is (as it mostly is) plucked instantly
from the wound.

"_26th._--Linn, a Sakarran chief, arrived, deputed (as he asserted,
and I believe truly) by the other chiefs of Sakarran to assure me of
their submission and desire for peace. He likewise stated, that false
rumors spread by the Malays agitated the Dyaks; and the principal rumor
was, that they would be shortly attacked again by the white men. These
rumors are spread by the Sariki people, to induce the Sakarrans to quit
their river and take refuge in the interior of the Rejong; and once
there, the Sakarrans would be in a very great measure at the mercy of
the Sariki people. This is a perfect instance of Malay dealing with
the Dyaks; but in this case it has failed, as the Sakarrans are too
much attached to their country to quit it. I am inclined to believe
their professions; and at any rate it is convenient to do so and to
give them a fair trial.

"_28th._--How is it to be accounted for, that the Malays have so
bad a character with the public, and yet that the few who have had
opportunities of knowing them well speak of them as a simple and
not unamiable people? With the vulgar, the idea of a Malay--and by
the Malay they mean the entire Polynesian race, with the exception
of the Javanese--is that of a treacherous, blood-thirsty villain;
and I believe the reason to be, that from our first intercourse to
the present time, it is the Pangerans or rajahs of the country, with
their followers, who are made the standard of Malay character. These
rajahs, born in the purple; bred amid slaves and fighting-cocks,
inheriting an undisputed power over their subjects, and under
all circumstances, whether of riches or poverty, receiving the
abject submission of those around their persons, are naturally the
slaves of their passions--haughty, rapacious, vindictive, weak,
and tenacious unto death of the paltry punctilio of their court
The followers of such rajahs it is needless to describe; they are
the tools of the rajah's will, and more readily disposed for evil
than for good; unscrupulous, cunning, intriguing, they are prepared
for any act of violence. We must next contrast these with a burly,
independent trader, eager after gain; probably not over-scrupulous
about the means of obtaining it, ignorant of native character, and
heedless of native customs and native etiquet. The result of such
a combination of ingredients causes an explosion on the slightest
occasion. The European is loud, contemptuous, and abusive; the Malay
cool and vindictive. The regal dignity has been insulted; the rajah
has received 'shame' before his court; evil counselors are at hand
to whisper the facility of revenge, and the advantages to be derived
from it. The consequence too frequently follows--the captain and crew
are krissed, and their vessel seized and appropriated. The repeated
tragedy shocks the European mind; and the Malay has received, and
continues to this day to receive, a character for treachery and
bloodthirstiness. Even in these common cases an allowance must be
made for the insults received, which doubtless on numerous occasions
were very gross, and such flagrant violations of native customs as to
merit death in native eyes; and we must bear in mind, that we never
hear but one side of the tale, or only judge upon a bloody fact. It
is from such samples of Malays that the general character is given
by those who have only the limited means of trade for forming a
judgment; but those who have known the people of the interior and
lived among them, far removed from the influence of their rajahs,
have given them a very different character. Simple in their habits,
they are neither treacherous nor bloodthirsty; cheerful, polite,
hospitable, gentle in their manners, they live in communities with
fewer crimes and fewer punishments than most other people of the
globe. They are passionately fond of their children, and indulgent
even to a fault; and the ties of family relationship and good feeling
continue in force for several generations. The feeling of the Malay,
fostered by education, is acute, and his passions are roused if shame
be put upon him; indeed, this dread of shame amounts to a disease;
and the evil is, that it has taken a wrong direction, being more the
dread of exposure or abuse, than shame or contrition for any offence.

"I have always found them good-tempered and obliging, wonderfully
amenable to authority, and quite as sensible of benefits conferred,
and as grateful, as other people of more favored countries. Of
course there is a reverse to this picture. The worst feature of
the Malay character is the want of all candor or openness, and the
restless spirit of cunning intrigue which animates them, from the
highest to the lowest. Like other Asiatics, truth is a rare quality
among them. They are superstitious, somewhat inclined to deceit in
the ordinary concerns of life, and they have neither principle nor
conscience when they have the means of oppressing an infidel, and a
Dyak who is their inferior in civilization and intellect.

"If this character of the Malay be summed up, it will be anything but
a bad one on the whole; it will present a striking contrast to the
conduct and character of the rajahs and their followers, and I think
will convince any impartial inquirer, that it is easily susceptible
of improvement. One of the most fertile sources of confusion is,
classing at one time all the various nations of the Archipelago under
the general name of Malay, and at another restricting the same term
to one people, not more ancient, not the fountain-head of the others,
who issued from the center of Sumatra, and spread themselves in a
few parts of the Archipelago.

"The French, the German, the English, Scotch, and Irish are not
more different in national character than the Malay, the Javanese,
the Bugis, the Illanun, and the Dyak; and yet all these are
indiscriminately called Malay, and a common character bestowed upon
them. It would be as wise and as sensible to speak of a European
character.

"_31st._--Started on a short excursion up the country, and slept
at Siniawan. Here I found a young Pangeran (who came from Sambas
with Mr. Hupé, a German missionary) enchained in the delights of
opium. He left Sarawak for Sambas two months since, proceeded five
hours' journey, and has since been smoking the drug and sleeping
alternately. His life passes thus: between four and five he wakes,
yawns, and smokes a pipe or two, which fits him for the labors of
taking his guitar and playing for an hour. Then follows a slightly
tasted meal, a pipe or two succeeds, and content and merriment for
another hour or two. About eight o'clock the gentleman reclines, and
pipe succeeds pipe till, toward daylight, he sinks intoxicated and
stupid on his pillow, to wake up again in due course to play again the
same part. Poor wretch! two months of this life of dissipation have
reduced him to a shadow--two more months will consign him to his grave.

"_Feb. 1st._--Started after breakfast, and paddled against a strong
current past Tundong, and, some distance above, left the main stream
and entered the branch to the right, which is narrower, and rendered
difficult of navigation by the number of fallen trees which block up
the bed, and which sometimes obliged us to quit our boat, and remove
all the kajang covers, so as to enable us to haul the boat under the
huge trunks. The main stream was rapid and turbid, swollen by a fresh,
and its increase of volume blocked up the waters of the tributary, so
as to render the current inconsiderable. The Dyaks have thrown several
bridges across the rivers, which they effect with great ingenuity; but
I was surprised on one of these bridges to observe the traces of the
severe flood which we had about a fortnight since. The water on that
occasion must have risen twenty feet perpendicularly, and many of the
trees evidently but recently fallen, are the effects of its might. The
walk to Rat, or Ra-at, is about two miles along a decent path. Nothing
can be more picturesque than the hill and the village. The former is
a huge lump (I think of granite), almost inaccessible, with bold bare
sides, rising out of a rich vegetation at the base, and crowned with
trees. The height is about 500 feet; and about a hundred feet lower is
a shoulder of the hill on which stands the eagle-nest-like village of
Ra-at, the ascent to which is like climbing by a ladder up the side
of a house. This is one of the dwelling-places of the Sow Dyaks,
a numerous but dispersed tribe. Their chief, or Orang Kaya, is an
imbecile old man, and the virtual headship is in the hands of Nimok,
of whom more hereafter. Our friends seemed pleased to see us, and Nimok
apologized for so few of his people being present, as the harvest was
approaching; but being anxious to give a feast on the occasion of my
first visit to their tribe, it was arranged that to-morrow I should
shoot deer, and the day following return to the mountain. The views
on either side from the village are beautiful--one view enchanting
from its variety and depth, more especially when lighted up by the
gleam of a showery sunshine, as I first saw it. Soon, however, after
our arrival, the prospect was shut out by clouds, and a soaking rain
descended, which lasted for the greater part of the night.

"_2d._--Started after breakfast, and after a quiet walk of about
three hours through a pleasant country of alternate hill and valley,
we saw the valley of Nawang below us. Nawang is the property of
the Singè Dyaks, and is cultivated by poor families, at the head
of which is Niarak. The house contained three families, and our
party was distributed among them, ourselves, i. e. Low, Crookshank,
and myself, occupying one small apartment with a man, his wife, and
daughter. The valley presented one of the most charming scenes to
be imagined--a clearing amid hills of moderate elevation, with the
distant mountains in the background; a small stream ran through it,
which, being damned in several places, enables the cultivator to flood
his padi-fields. The padi looked beautifully green. A few palms and
plantains fringed the farm at intervals, while the surrounding hills
were clothed in their native jungle. Here and there a few workmen in
the fields heightened the effect; and the scene, as evening closed,
was one of calm repose, and, I may say, of peace. The cocoa-nut, the
betel, the sago, and the gno or gomati, are the four favorite palms of
the Dyaks. In their simple mode of life, these four trees supply them
many necessaries and luxuries. The sago furnishes food; and after the
pith has been extracted, the outer part forms a rough covering for
the rougher floor, on which the farmer sleeps. The leaf of the sago
is preferable for the roofing of houses to the nibong. The gomati, or
gno, gives the black fibre which enables the owner to manufacture rope
or cord for his own use; and over and above, the toddy of this palm
is a luxury daily enjoyed. When we entered, this toddy was produced
in large bamboos, both for our use and that of our attendant Dyaks;
I thought it, however, very bad. In the evening we were out looking
for deer, and passed many a pleasant spot which once was a farm, and
which will become a farm again. These the Dyaks called rapack, and they
are the favorite feeding-grounds of the deer. To our disappointment
we did not get a deer, which we had reckoned on as an improvement to
our ordinary dinner-fare. A sound sleep soon descended on our party,
and the night passed in quiet; but it is remarkable how vigilant their
mode of life renders the Dyaks. Their sleep is short and interrupted;
they constantly rise, blow up the fire, and look out on the night:
it is rarely that some or other of them are not on the move.

"Yearly the Dyaks take new ground for their farm; yearly they fence
it in, and undergo the labor of reclaiming new land; for seven years
the land lies fallow, and then may be used again. What a waste of
labor! more especially in these rich and watered valleys, which,
in the hands of the Chinese, might produce two crops yearly.

"_3d._--Took leave of this pleasant valley, and by another and shorter
road than we came reached Ra-at. We arrived in good time on the hill,
and found everything prepared for a feast. There was nothing new in
this feast. A fowl was killed with the usual ceremony; afterward a
hog. The hog is paid for by the company at a price commensurate with
its size: a split bamboo is passed round the largest part of the body,
and knots tied on it at given distances; and according to the number
of these knots are the number of pasus or padi for the price.

"Our host of Nawang, Niarak, arrived to this feast with a plentiful
supply of toddy; and before the dance commenced, we were requested
to take our seats. The circumstances of the tribe, and the ability of
Nimok, rendered this ceremony interesting to me. The Sow tribe has long
been split into four parties, residing at different places. Gunong
Sow, the original locality, was attacked by the Sakarran Dyaks,
and thence Nimok and his party retired to Ra-at. A second smaller
party subsequently located at or near Bow, as being preferable;
while the older divisions of Jaguen and Ahuss lived at the places so
named. Nimok's great desire was to gather together his scattered tribe,
and to become _de facto_ its head. My presence and the Datus' was a
good opportunity for gathering the tribe; and Nimok hoped to give them
the impression that we countenanced his proposition. The dances over,
Nimok pronounced an oration: he dwelt on the advantages of union;
how desirous he was to benefit his tribe; how constantly it was his
custom to visit Sarawak in order to watch over the interests of the
tribe--the trouble was his, the advantage theirs; but how, without
union, could they hope to gain any advantage--whether the return of
their remaining captive women, or any other? He proposed this union;
and that, after the padi was ripe, they should all live at Ra-at,
where, as a body, they were always ready to obey the commands of the
Tuan Besar or the Datu.

"This was the substance of Nimok's speech. But the effect of his
oratory was not great; for the Bow, and other portions of the tribe,
heard coldly his proposition, though they only opposed it in a few
words. It was evident they had no orator at all a match for Nimok: a
few words from Niana drew forth a second oration. He glanced at their
former state; he spoke with animation of their enemies, and dwelt
on their great misfortune at Sow; he attacked the Singè as the cause
of these misfortunes: and spoke long and eloquently of things past,
of things present, and things to come. He was seated the whole time;
his voice varied with his subject, and was sweet and expressive;
his action was always moderate, principally laying down the law with
his finger on the mats. Niarak, our Singè friend, attempted a defence
of his tribe; but he had drunk too freely of his own arrack; and his
speech was received with much laughter, in which he joined. At this
juncture I retired, after saying a few words; but the talk was kept
up for several hours after, amid feasting and drinking.

"_4th._--After breakfast, walked to our boats, and at six P.M. reached
home, just in time; weather very rainy.

"_10th._--Nothing to remark in these days, except the ordinary course
of business and of life.

"_13th._--The Tumangong returned from Sadong, and brought me a far
better account of that place than I had hoped for. It appears that
they really are desirous to govern well, and to protect the Dyaks;
and fully impressed with the caution I gave them, that unless they
protect and foster their tribes, they will soon lose them from their
removal to Sarawak.

"One large tribe, the Maluku, a branch of the Sibnowans, are, it
appears, very desirous of being under my protection. It is a tempting
offer, and I should like to have them; but I must not deprive the
rulers of Sadong of the means of living comfortably, and the power
of paying revenue. Protect them I both can and will. There are great
numbers of Sarawak people at Sadong, all looking out for birds'-nests;
new caves have been explored; mountains ascended for the first time
in the search. It shows the progress of good government and security,
and, at the same time, is characteristic of the Malay character. They
will endure fatigue, and run risks, on the chance of finding this
valuable commodity; but they will not labor steadily, or engage in
pursuits which would lead to fortune by a slow progress.

"_15th._--Panglima Laksa, the chief of the Undop tribe, arrived, to
request, as the Badjows and Sakarrans had recently killed his people,
that I would permit him to retort. At the same time came Abong Kapi,
the Sakarran Malay, with eight Sakarran chiefs, named Si Miow, one of
the heads, and the rest Tadong, Lengang, Barunda, Badendang, Si Bunie,
Si Ludum, and Kuno, the representatives of other heads. Nothing could
be more satisfactory than the interview, just over. They denied any
knowledge or connection with the Badjows, who had killed some Dyaks
at Undop, and said all that I could desire. They promised to obey me,
and look upon me as their chief: they desired to trade, and would
guaranty any Sarawak people who came to their river; but they could
not answer for all the Dyaks in the Batang Lupar. It is well known,
however, that the Batang Lupar Dyaks are more peaceable than those of
Sakarran, and will be easily managed; and as for the breaking out of
these old feuds, it is comparatively of slight importance, compared
to the grand settlement; for as our influence increases we can easily
put down the separate sticks of the bundle. There is a noble chance,
if properly used! It may be remarked that many of their names are
from some peculiarity of person, or from some quality. Tadong is a
poisonous snake; but, on inquiry, I found the young chief so named had
got the name from being black. They are certainly a fine-looking race.

"_17th._--Plenty of conferences with the Sakarran chiefs; and,
as far as I can judge, they are sincere in the main, though some
reserves there may be. Treachery I do not apprehend from them; but,
of course, it will be impossible, over a very numerous, powerful,
and warlike tribe, to gain such an ascendency of a sudden as at once
to correct their evil habits."

Here again Mr. Brooke appears to have been placed on the horns of a
dilemma by his ignorance of the views of the British Government. Had
his position in Borneo been certain--had he either been supported
or deserted--his path of policy would have been clear; whereas he
evidently did not know what the morrow would bring forth; whether
it would find him with an English force at his back, or abandoned to
his own resources.





CHAPTER XXI.

    Mr. Brooke's memorandum on the piracy of the Malayan
    Archipelago.--The measures requisite for its suppression, and for
    the consequent extension of British commerce in that important
    locality.


I cannot afford my readers a more accurate idea of the present state
of piracy in the Malayan Archipelago, of the best mode of suppressing
it, and of the vast field which the island of Borneo offers for the
extension of British commerce, than by quoting a few of Mr. Brooke's
observations on these important subjects, written before the operations
of the squadron under command of Rear-Admiral Sir Thomas Cochrane
took place, of which an account will be given in Chapter XXII. With
reference to the first topic, piracy, Mr. Brooke remarks:--

"The piracy of the Eastern Archipelago is entirely distinct from
piracy in the Western world; for, from the condition of the various
governments, the facilities offered by natural situation, and the total
absence of all restraint from European nations, the pirate communities
have attained an importance on the coasts and islands most removed from
foreign settlements. Thence they issue forth and commit depredations on
the native trade, enslave the inhabitants at the entrance of rivers,
and attack ill-armed or stranded European vessels; and roving from
place to place, they find markets for their slaves and plunder.

"The old-established Malay governments (such as Borneo and Sooloo),
weak and distracted, are, probably without exception, participators
in or victims to piracy; and in many cases both--purchasing from
one set of pirates, and enslaved and plundered by another; and while
their dependencies are abandoned, the unprotected trade languishes
from the natural dread of the better-disposed natives to undertake
a coasting voyage.

"It is needless to dwell upon the evil effects of piracy; but before
venturing an opinion on the most effectual means of suppression,
I propose briefly to give an account of such pirate communities as
I am acquainted with.

"The pirates on the coast of Borneo may be classed into those who
make long voyages in large heavy-armed prahus, such as the Illanuns,
Balignini, &c., and the lighter Dyak fleets, which make short but
destructive excursions in swift prahus, and seek to surprise rather
than openly to attack their prey. A third, and probably the worst
class, are usually half-bred Arab seriffs, who, possessing themselves
of the territory of some Malay state, form a nucleus for piracy,
a rendezvous and market for all the roving fleets; and although
occasionally sending out their own followers, they more frequently
seek profit by making advances, in food, arms, and gunpowder, to all
who will agree to repay them at an exorbitant rate in slaves.

"The Dyaks of Sarebus and Sakarran were under the influence of two
Arab seriffs, who employed them on piratical excursions, and shared
in equal parts the plunder obtained. I had once the opportunity of
counting ninety-eight boats about to start on a cruise; and reckoning
the crew of each boat at the moderate average of twenty-five men,
it gives a body of 2450 men on a piratical excursion. The piracies
of these Arab seriffs and their Dyaks were so notorious, that it is
needless to detail them here; but one curious feature, which throws
a light on the state of society, I cannot forbear mentioning. On all
occasions of a Dyak fleet being about to make a piratical excursion,
a gong was beat round the town ordering a particular number of Malays
to embark; and in case any one failed to obey, he was fined the sum
of thirty rupees by the seriff of the place.

"The blow struck by Captain Keppel of her majesty's ship Dido on these
two communities was so decisive as to have put an entire end to their
piracies; the leaders Seriff Sahib and Seriff Muller have fled, the
Malay population has been dispersed, and the Dyaks so far humbled,
as to sue for protection; and in future, by substituting local Malay
rulers of good character in lieu of the piratical seriffs, a check
will be placed on the Dyaks, and they may be broken of their piratical
habits, in as far as interferes with the trade of the coast.

"The next pirate horde we meet with is a mixed community of
Illanuns and Badjows (or sea-gipsys) located at Tampasuk, a few
miles up a small river; they are not formidable in number, and their
depredations are chiefly committed on the Spanish territory; their
market, until recently, being Bruni, or Borneo Proper. They might
readily be dispersed and driven back to their own country; and the
Dusuns, or villagers (as the name signifies), might be protected and
encouraged. Seriff Houseman, a half-bred Arab, is located in Malludu
Bay, and has, by account, from fifteen hundred to two thousand men with
him. He is beyond doubt a pirate direct and indirect, and occasionally
commands excursions in person, or employs the Illanuns of Tampasuk,
and others to the eastward, who for their own convenience make common
cause with him. He has no pretension to the territory he occupies;
and the authority he exerts (by means of his piratical force) over
the interior tribes in his vicinity, and on the island of Palawan,
is of the worst and most oppressive description. This seriff has
probably never come in contact with any Europeans, and consequently
openly professes to hold their power in scorn.

"To my own knowledge Seriff Houseman seized and sold into slavery
a boat's crew (about twenty men) of the Sultana, a merchant ship,
which was burned in the Palawan passage. Within the last few months he
has plundered and burned a European vessel stranded near the Mangsi
Isles; and to show his entire independence of control, his contempt
for European power, and his determination to continue in his present
course, he has threatened to attack the city of Bruni, in consequence
of the Bruni government having entered into a treaty with her majesty's
government for the discouragement and suppression of piracy. This fact
speaks volumes; an old-established and recognized Malay government is
to be attacked by a lawless adventurer, who has seized on a portion
of its territory, and lives by piracy, for venturing to treat with a
foreign power for the best purposes. If any further proof of piracy
were requisite, it would readily be established by numerous witnesses
(themselves the victims), and by the most solemn declaration of
the Bruni authorities, that peaceful traders on the high seas have
been stopped by the prahus of this seriff and his allies, their
vessel seized, their property plundered, and their persons enslaved;
numerous witnesses could attest their having been reduced to slavery
and detained in the very household of Seriff Houseman! When, however,
the facts of his having sold into slavery the crew of a British vessel
(which has been established before the Singapore authorities) come
to be known, I conceive every other proof of the character of this
person is completely superfluous.

"The indirect piracy of Seriff Houseman is even more mischievous
than what is directly committed; for he supplies the Balagnini
(a restless piratical tribe, hereafter to be mentioned) with food,
powder, arms, salt, &c. under the agreement that they pay him on
their return from the cruise, at the rate of five slaves for every
100 rupees' worth of goods. The Balagnini are in consequence enabled,
through his assistance, to pirate effectively, which otherwise they
would not be able to do; as, from their locality, they would find it
difficult to obtain fire-arms and gunpowder. The most detestable part
of this traffic, however, is Seriff Houseman selling, in cold blood,
such of these slaves as are Borneons, to Pangeran Usop, of Bruni,
for 100 rupees for each slave, and Pangeran Usop re-selling each
for 200 rupees to their relations in Bruni. Thus, this vile seriff
(without taking into account the enormous prices charged for his
goods in the first instance) gains 500 per cent for every slave, and
Pangeran Usop clears 100 per cent on the flesh of his own countrymen,
thereby _de facto_ becoming a party to piracy, though doubtless veiled
under the guise of compassion.

"More might be added on the subject of the piracies committed by this
seriff; and it could easily be shown that the evils accruing from
them affect, not only the peaceful trader, but extend to the peaceful
agriculturist; but, for the sake of brevity, I deem it sufficient to
add, that he exercises the same malign influence on the north coast as
Seriff Sahib exercised on the northwest; and that, having surrounded
himself by a body of pirates, he arrogates the rights of sovereignty,
defies European power, contemns every right principle, and threatens
the recognized and legitimate governments of the Archipelago.

"The Balagnini inhabit a cluster of small islands somewhere in the
vicinity of Sooloo; they are of the Badjow or sea-gipsy tribe, a
wandering race, whose original country has never been ascertained. At
present, as far as I can learn, they are not dependent on Sooloo,
though it is probable they may be encouraged by some of the rajahs
of that place, and that they find a slave market there.

"The Balagnini cruise in large prahus, and to each prahu a fleet
sampan is attached, which, on occasion, can carry from ten to fifteen
men. They seldom carry large guns, like the Illanuns, but in addition
to their other arms, big lelas (brass pieces, carrying from a one
to a three pound ball), spears, swords, &c. They use long poles with
barbed iron points, with which, during an engagement or flight, they
hook their prey. By means of the fleet sampans already mentioned,
they are able to capture all small boats; and it is a favorite device
with them to disguise one or two men, while the rest lie concealed
in the bottom of the boat, and thus to surprise prahus at sea, and
fishermen or others at the mouths of rivers. By being disguised as
Chinese they have carried off numbers of that nation from the Sambas
and Pontiana rivers. The cruising-grounds of these pirates are very
extensive; they frequently make the circuit of Borneo, proceed as far
as the south of Celebes, and in the other direction have been met off
Tringanu, Calantan, and Patani. Gillolo and the Moluccas lie within
easy range, and it is probable that Papua is occasionally visited by
them. It will readily be conceived how harassing to trade must be the
continued depredations of the Balagnini pirates, and more especially
to the trade of Bruni, which seems, from the unwarlike habits of the
natives, the chosen field of their operations. The number of Borneons
yearly taken into slavery is very considerable, as a fleet of six
or eight boats usually hangs about the island of Labuan, to cut off
the trade, and to catch the inhabitants of the city. The Borneons,
from being so harassed by these pirates, call the easterly wind 'the
pirate wind.' The Balagnini commence cruising on the northwest coast
about the middle of March, and return, or remove to the eastern side
of the island, about the end of November.

"Of Magindano, or Mindanao, we are at the present time very ignorant;
but we know that the inhabitants are warlike and numerous, and that
that part of the island called Illanun Bay sends forth the most daring
pirates of the Archipelago. The first step requisite is to gain more
information concerning them, to form an acquaintance with some of
their better-disposed chiefs, and subsequently we might act against
them with a suitable force; but it would be rash and premature, in
the present state of our knowledge, to come in contact with them in
their own country. On one occasion I met eighteen Illanun boats on
neutral ground, and learned from their two chiefs that they had been
two years absent from home; and from the Papuan negro-slaves on board
it was evident that their cruise had extended from the most eastern
islands of the Archipelago to the north-western coast of Borneo.

"Having now enumerated the pirates I have become acquainted with
since my residence in Sarawak, I shall proceed to offer an opinion
of the best mode for the suppression of piracy in these seas.

"In the first place, a blow should be struck at the piratical
communities with which we are already acquainted, and struck with
a force which should convince all other pirates of the hopelessness
of resistance; subsequently the recognized Malay governments may be
detached from all communication with pirates; and, joining conciliation
with punishment, laying down the broad distinction of piracy and no
piracy, we may foster those who abandon their evil habits, and punish
those who adhere to them.

"A system of supervision will, however, be necessary to carry out these
measures: our knowledge of the native states must be improved; and as
we become able to discriminate between the good and the bad, our sphere
of action may be enlarged, and we may act with decision against all
descriptions of pirates; against the indirect as well as the direct
pirate; against the receiver of stolen goods as well as the thief;
and against the promoter as well as the actual perpetrator of piracy.

"I would especially urge that, to eradicate the evil, the pirate-haunts
must be burned and destroyed, and the communities dispersed; for merely
to cruise against pirate-prahus, and to forbear attacking them until we
see them commit a piracy, is a hopeless and an endless task, harassing
to our men, and can be attended with but very partial and occasional
success; whereas, on the contrary principle, what pirate would venture
to pursue his vocation if his home be endangered--if he be made to
feel in his own person the very ills he inflicts upon others?

"A question may arise as to what constitutes piracy; and whether,
in our efforts to suppress it, we may not be interfering with the
right of native states to war one upon another. On the first point,
it appears clear to me, that the plunder or seizure of a peaceful
and lawful trader on the high seas constitutes an act of piracy,
without any reference to the nation or color of the injured party;
for if we limit our construction of piracy, we shall, in most cases,
be in want of sufficient evidence to convict, and the whole native
trade of the Archipelago will be left at the mercy of pirates, much
to the injury of our own commerce and of our settlement of Singapore.

"On the second point, we can only concede the right of war to
recognized states; and even then we must carefully avoid introducing
the refinements of European international law among a rude and
semi-civilized people, who will make our delicacy a cloak for
crime, and declare war merely for the sake of committing piracy with
impunity. On the contrary, all chiefs who have seized on territory and
arrogate independence (making this independence a plea for piracy)
can never be allowed the right of declaring war, or entering on
hostilities with their neighbors; for, as I have before remarked,
all native trade must in that case be at an end, as the piratical
chiefs, no longer in dread of punishment from European powers, would
doubtless declare war against every unwarlike native state which they
did not need as a market for the sale of their slaves and plunder.

"Practically acting, however, on the broad principle, that the seizure
of any lawful trader constitutes piracy, I consider no injustice could
be done to the native states, and no interference occur with their
acknowledged rights; for in practice it would be easy to discriminate
a war between native nations from the piracies of lawless hordes of
men; and without some such general principle, no executive officer
could act with the requisite decision and promptitude to insure the
eradication of this great evil.

"With a post such as is proposed to be established, our measures for
the suppression of piracy (after the punishment of Seriff Houseman
and the Balagnini) would advance step by step, as our knowledge
increased, and with alternate conciliation and severity, as the
case might require. By detaching the recognised governments from the
practice, and gradually forming among the chief men a friendly and
English party opposed to piracy, we should, I doubt not, speedily
obtain our principal object of clearing the sea of marauders, and
ultimately correct the natural propensity of the natives for piracy.

"In order to extend our commerce in these seas generally, and more
particularly on the N.W. coast of Borneo, it is requisite, 1st, that
piracy be suppressed; 2dly, that the native governments be settled,
so as to afford protection to the poorer and producing classes; and,
3dly, that our knowledge of the interior should be extended, and our
intercourse with the various tribes more frequent.

"That our commerce may be largely extended is so clear that I shall
not stop to detail the productions of the island of Borneo, as it
will suffice here to state generally that all authorities agree in
representing it as one of the richest portions of the globe, and in
climate, soil, and mineral and vegetable productions, inferior to no
portion of the same extent.

"If these opinions be true--and from my experience I believe them to be
so--it follows that the materials for an extensive and extended trade
exist, and only require development, while a numerous and industrious,
though wild population, which inhabits the interior, is debarred from
all intercourse with Europeans from the badness of Malay government.

"On the first requisite for the development of commerce I need add
nothing further, as it is a duty incumbent on all governments to
eradicate piracy at any cost; and in the present case it would not
be found a difficult or tedious task.

"A post like Labuan or Balambangan would, beyond doubt, give an
impetus to trade, merely from the freedom from all restrictions,
and the absence of all exactions, which the natives would enjoy;
and (piracy being checked) countries which now lie fallow would,
from their proximity, be induced to bring their produce into market.

"This limited extension is, however, of little moment when compared
with the results which must attend our exerting a beneficial influence
over the native governments for the purposes of affording protection
to the poorer classes, insuring safety to the trader, and opening a
field for the planter or the miner.

"The slightest acquaintance with the northwest coast of Borneo would
convince any observer of the ease with which these objects might be
effected; for the native government, being in a state of decadence,
requires protection, and would willingly act justly toward traders and
capitalists, and encourage their enterprises, in order to continue on
friendly terms with any European power located in their vicinity. The
numerous rivers on the coast, with their local rulers, are harassed
by the demands of every petty Pangeran; and while the sovereign is
defrauded of his revenue, which the people would cheerfully pay, and
his territory ruined, this host of useless retainers (acting always
in his name) gain but very slight personal profits to counterbalance
all the mischief they do.

"The principal feature is the weakness of the governments, both of the
capital and its dependencies; and in consequence of this weakness there
is a strong desire for European protection, for European enterprise,
and for any change effected by Europeans. Supposing Labuan to be
taken as a naval post, I consider that European capital might with
safety be employed in Bruni.

"In the rivers contiguous to Sarawak the presence of Europeans would
be hailed with joy, not only by the Dyaks, but by the Malays; and
subsequently it would depend on their own conduct to what degree they
retained the good-will of the natives; but with ordinary conciliation,
and a decent moral restraint on their actions, I feel assured that
their persons and property would be safe, and no obstruction offered
to fair trade or to mining operations.

"Supposing, as I have before said, the occupation of Labuan by the
English, our influence over the government of Bruni would be complete;
and one of our principal objects would be to maintain this ascendency,
as a means of extending our trade.

"Our position at Labuan would, it must be borne in mind, differ
from the position we occupied in relation to the native princes
in Singapore. In the latter case, the native princes were without
means, without followers, and with a paltry and useless territory,
and became our pensioners. In the case of Labuan, we shall have an
acknowledged independent state in our vicinity; and for the prosperity
of our settlement we must retain our ascendency by the support of
the government of Muda Hassim. Let our influence be of the mildest
kind; let us, by supporting the legitimate government, ameliorate the
condition of the people by this influence; let us pay every honor to
the native princes; let us convince them of our entire freedom from all
selfish views of territorial aggrandizement on the mainland of Borneo,
and we shall enjoy so entire a confidence that virtually the coast
will become our own without the trouble or expense of possession. I
have impressed it on the Rajah Muda Hassim and Pangeran Budrudeen,
that the readiest and most direct way of obtaining revenues from their
various possessions will be by commuting all their demands for a stated
yearly sum of money from each; and by this direct taxation, to which
Muda Hassim and his brother seem ready to accede, the system of fraud
and exaction would be abolished, the native mind tranquillized, and
the legitimate government would become the protector rather than the
oppressor of its dependencies. By this measure, likewise, a tone might
be imparted to the native chiefs and rulers of rivers, and the people
at large taught to feel that, after the payment of a specified sum,
a right existed to resist all extra demands. Beside this, these rajahs
are convinced that a certain yearly revenue is what they require,
and is the only means by which they can retain their independence;
and I have impressed it on their minds that, to gain a revenue,
they must foster trade and protect Europeans in their dealings.

"If Labuan were English, and if the sea were clear of pirates, I
see no obstacle to bringing these and other measures into immediate
operation; and I am assured we should have the sincere and hearty
cooperation of the Borneon government.

"Since the advent of Europeans in the Archipelago, the tendency of
the Polynesian governments generally has been to decay; here the
experiment may be fairly tried on the smallest scale of expense,
whether a beneficial European influence may not reanimate a falling
state, and at the same time extend our own commerce. We are here devoid
of the stimulus which has urged us on to conquest in India. We incur
no risk of the collision of the two races: we occupy a small station
in the vicinity of a friendly and unwarlike people; and we aim at
the development of native countries through native agency.

"If this tendency to decay and extinction be inevitable; if this
adaptation of European policy to a native state be found unable to
arrest the fall of the Borneon government, yet we shall retain a people
already habituated to European manners, industrious interior races,
and at a future period, if deemed necessary, settlements gradually
developed in a rich and fertile country. We shall have a post in time
of war highly advantageous as commanding a favorable position relative
to China, we shall extend our commerce, suppress piracy, and prevent
the present and prospective advantages from falling into other hands;
and we shall do this at small expense.

"I own the native development through their own exertions is but a
favorite theory; but whatever may be the fate of the government of
Borneo, the people will still remain; and if they be protected and
enabled to live in quiet security, I cannot entertain a doubt of the
country's becoming a highly productive one, eminently calculated as
a field for British enterprise and capital.

"If the development of the resources of the country can be effected by
its native rulers it will be a noble task performed; but if it fail,
the people of the coast will still advance and form governments for
themselves under British influence.

"In concluding this hasty and general view of the subject, I may remark
that commerce might be extended and capital laid out on the northwest
coast of Borneo, to an amount to which it is difficult to fix limits,
as the country is capable of producing most articles of commerce
in demand from this quarter of the world, and the natives (who, as
far as we know them, are an unwarlike, mild, and industrious race)
would receive our manufactures, from which they are now in a great
measure debarred. I have not alluded to any other countries of the
Archipelago: for we must first become acquainted with them; we must
become intimate, cultivate an English party, and accustom them to our
manners; and probably the same conciliatory policy, the same freedom
from design, which has succeeded in Borneo, will succeed elsewhere,
if pushed with temper and patience.

"The general principle ought to be--to encourage established
governments, such as those of Borneo and Sooloo, provided they will
with all sincerity abandon piracy, and assist in its suppression;
but at the same time, by supervision to convince ourselves of the
fact, and keep them in the right path; for all treaties with these
native states (and we have had several) are but so much waste paper,
unless we see them carried into execution.

"I have now only to mention the third means for the extension of
commerce. Our intercourse with the natives of the interior should be
frequent and intimate: these people (beyond where I am acquainted with
them) are represented as very numerous, hospitable, and industrious;
and a friendly intercourse would develop the resources of their
country, draw its produce to our markets, and give the natives a taste
for British manufactures. This intercourse, however, must be prudently
introduced and carefully advanced; for to bring these wild people into
contact with ignorant and arrogant Europeans would produce bloodshed
and confusion in a month. In Borneo, it is an advantage that the two
races can not come in collision; for from its climate it precludes
all idea of colonization; and that which is next to an impossibility,
the maintaining a good understanding between ignorant civilized
men and ignorant savages. It is a field for commerce and capital,
but no violent change of native customs should be attempted; and in
this way alone, by gradual means, can we really benefit the natives
and ourselves. When we consider the amount of produce obtained from
the countries of the Archipelago, and their consumption of British
manufactures, under the worst forms of government, living in a state
of distraction and insecurity, and exposed to the depredations of
pirates at sea, we may form some idea how vast may be the increase,
should peace and security be introduced among them; and judging of
the future by the past--by the limited experiment made at Sarawak--we
may hope that the task is neither so difficult nor so uncertain as
was formerly supposed."





CHAPTER XXII.

    Arrival of Captain Bethune and Mr. Wise.--Mr. Brooke appointed
    her Majesty's Agent in Borneo.--Sails for Borneo Proper.--Muda
    Hassim's measures for the suppression of piracy.--Defied by
    Seriff Houseman.--Audience of the Sultan, Muda Hassim, and
    the Pangerans.--Visit to Labuan.--Comparative eligibility
    of Labuan and Balambangan for settlement.--Coal discovered
    in Labuan.--Mr. Brooke goes to Singapore and visits Admiral
    Sir T. Cochrane.--The upas-tree.--Proceeds with the Admiral
    to Borneo Proper.--Punishment of Pangeran Usop.--The
    battle of Malludu.--Seriff Houseman obliged to fly.--Visit
    to Balambangan.--Mr. Brooke parts with the Admiral, and goes
    to Borneo Proper.--An attempt of Pangeran Usop defeated.--His
    flight, and pursuit by Pangeran Budrudeen.--Triumphant reception
    of Mr. Brooke in Borneo.--Returns to Sarawak.


"_February 25th._--Borneo River, H.M.S. Driver. Scarcely, on the 17th,
had I finished writing, when a boat from her majesty's steamer Driver,
bringing Captain Bethune and my friend Wise, arrived. How strange,
the same day, and almost the same hour, I was penning my doubts and
difficulties, when a letter arrives from Lord Aberdeen appointing
me confidential agent in Borneo to her majesty, and directing me to
proceed to the capital, with a letter addressed to the sultan and the
Rajah Muda Hassim, in reply to the documents requesting the assistance
of the British government to effect the suppression of piracy.

"My friend Wise I was glad to see, and a few hours' conversation
convinced me how greatly I have been indebted to his exertions
for success and my present position. His knowledge of trade,
his cheerfulness regarding our pecuniary future, all impart
confidence. Thus I may say, without much self-flattery, that the
first wedge has been driven which may rive Borneo open to commerce and
civilization, which may bestow happiness on its inhabitants. Captain
Bethune is commissioned to report on the best locality for a settlement
or station on the N.W. coast. I will only say here that no other
person's appointment would have pleased me so well: he is intelligent,
educated, and liberal, and in concert with him I am too happy to work.

"On the 18th of February the Driver arrived; on the 21st left Sarawak,
and at noon of the 24th arrived at the anchorage in Borneo river,
having towed the gun-boat against the N.E. monsoon. Mr. Williamson was
dispatched to Borneo, and found all right. They were delighted with
our coming and our mission, and the sultan himself has laid aside his
fears. A few presents have been sent, which will delight the natives,
and all will prosper.

"_26th._--Budrudeen arrived, and from him I learned the politics
of Borneo since my last visit, when Muda Hassim was reinstated in
authority.

"As my mission refers more especially to piracy, I may here notice Muda
Hassim's measures relative to that subject. Shortly after his arrival
he addressed a letter to the Illanuns of Tampasuk, informing them of
the engagement with the English to discourage and suppress piracy,
advising them to desist, and ordering them not to visit Borneo until
he (Muda Hassim) was convinced they were pirates no longer. This is
good and candid. Muda Hassim at the same time requested Seriff Schaik
to address a communication to Seriff Houseman of Malludu, acquainting
him with his engagements, and the resolve of the Europeans to suppress
piracy, adding that he was friends with the English, and no man could
be friends with the English who encouraged piracy. The answer to this
letter of Seriff Schaik, as far as I have yet learned, is a positive
defiance. Three months since, I am informed, a brig or schooner was
wrecked at a place called Mangsi, and she has been completely plundered
and burned by Seriff Houseman: her cargo consisted of red woolens,
fine white cloths, Turkey red cotton handkerchiefs, tin, pepper,
Malacca canes, ratans, &c., &c. This evidently is a vessel bound to
China, whether English or not is doubtful: the crew have not been
heard of or seen here; and it is to be hoped may have reached Manilla.

"_28th._--Borneo, or Bruni city. Left the Driver at 9 A.M. in the
gun-boat, with the pinnace and cutter in company: a fine breeze carried
us to Pulo Chermin, and nearly the whole way to Pulo Combong, where
we met with the state-boat bearing the letter. We entered the town
straggling, and _the letter_ having been received with firing of guns,
banners displayed, and all the respect due to a royal communication,
we were dragged in haste to the audience; the sultan on his throne,
Muda Hassim and every principal Pangeran waiting for us--Pangeran Usop
to boot. The letter was read; twenty-one guns fired. I told them in
all civility that I was deputed by her majesty the queen to express
her feelings of good will, and to offer every assistance in repressing
piracy in these seas. The sultan stared. Muda Hassim said, 'We are
greatly indebted; it is good, very good.' Then, heated, and sunburned,
and tired, we took leave, and retired to the house prepared for us.

"_March, 1st._--A long conference with Budrudeen, when, I believe,
we exhausted all the important topics of Borneo politics: subsequently
we visited Muda Hassim and the sultan. The latter was profuse in his
kind expressions, and inquired of the interpreter when the English
would come to Labuan, adding, 'I want to have the Europeans near
me.' On this head, however, he gained no information. The presents
were given to the sultan and rajah.

"_5th._--In the evening visited Muda Hassim, and heard news from
Malludu, which, divested of exaggerations, amounted to this: that
Seriff Houseman was ready to receive us; was fortified, and had
collected a fleet of boats; and that if the English did not come and
attack him, he would come and attack Borneo, because they were in
treaty with Europeans. After leaving Muda Hassim, paid the sultan
a visit.

"_10th._--I have nothing to say of our departure. Budrudeen accompanied
us to the Mooarra, and thence, on Friday evening, we crossed to the
anchorage of Labuan.

"_12th._--Labuan. An island of about fifty feet high; twenty-five
miles in circumference; woody; timber good; water from wells and
a few small streams, which, after a drought, are dry; natives say
water never fails. Anchorage good for the climate; well protected
from the N.E.; not extensive; situation of contemplated town low;
climate healthy, _i.e._, the same as Borneo; soil, as far as seen,
sandy or light sandy loam. Coal found near the extreme N.E. point:
by native reports it is likewise to be found in many other places;
traces of coal are frequent in the sandstone strata. Anchorage not
difficult of defense against a European enemy; entrance sufficiently
broad and deep between two islands, with a shoal: vide chart. The
island of Labuan, for the purposes of refuge for shipwrecked vessels,
of a windward post relative to China, for the suppression of piracy,
and the extension of our trade, is well suited; it is no paradise,
and any other island, with good climate, wood, and water, would suit
as well. Its powerful recommendation is its being in the neighborhood
of an unwarlike and friendly people. There is no other island on
the N.W. coast, and the abandoned Balambangan, to the northward of
Borneo, is the only other place which could by possibility answer. The
comparison between Balambangan and Labuan may be stated as follows:
Balambangan, as a windward post relative to China, is superior, and it
commands in time of war the inner passage to Manilla, and the eastern
passages to China by the Straits of Makassar. Of its capabilities
of defense we know nothing. It was surprised by the Sooloos. Its
climate was not well spoken of. The island is larger than that of
Labuan, and, as far as we know, has no coal. The great, and to me
conclusive consideration against Balambangan is, that it is in the
very nest of pirates, and surrounded by warlike and hostile people;
and that to render it secure and effective, at least double the force
would be necessary there that would suffice at Labuan. If Labuan
succeeds and pays its own expenses, we might then take Balambangan;
for the next best thing to a location on the main is to influence the
people thereon by a succession of insular establishments. Yesterday
we made an agreeable excursion to the n.e. point of Labuan; near
the point it is picturesque, the cliffs are bold and cave-worn; the
trees hang over the cliffs, or encroach on the intermediate sands,
till they kiss the wave. Near a small cavern we discovered a seam of
coal, which afforded us employment while Captain Bethune and Mr. Wise
walked to obtain a view of the southern coast of the island.

"_Bruni, 21st May, 1845._--After a longer time passed in Singapore than
I wished, we at length started, in the Phlegethon steamer, for this
city. At Singapore I had several interviews with Sir Thomas Cochrane.

"_22d._--On the authority of Sulerman, an intelligent Meri man, I am
told that the tree below the town is the real upas, called by the
Meri men _tajim_--the Borneons call it _upas_. _Bina_ (the name we
formerly got from a Borneon for upas) is, by Sulerman's statement,
a thin creeper, the root or stem of which, being steeped in water,
is added to the upas, to increase the poisonous quality; it is not,
however, poisonous in itself. There is another creeper, likewise called
bina, the leaves of which are steeped and mixed with the upas, instead
of the stem of the first sort. This information may be relied on (in
the absence of personal knowledge), as the man is of a tribe which uses
the sumpitan, and is constantly in the habit of preparing the poison.

"_August 8th._--Off Ujong Sapo, at the entrance of Borneo river. The
time since I last added to my most desultory journal is easily
accounted for. I have been at Singapore and Malacca, and am now
anchored off Borneo Proper, with seven vessels, and an eighth is
hourly expected. It is difficult, with such a force, to be moderate;
and, with Sir Thomas Cochrane's other duties and engagements, it is
probably impossible to devote any length of time on this coast; yet
moderation and time are the key-stones of our policy. I have settled
all the ceremonial for a meeting between the sultan and the admiral.

"The Pangeran Budrudeen came on board H.M.S. Agincourt, with every
circumstance of state and ceremony, and met the admiral, I acting
as interpreter. It was pleasing to witness his demeanor and bearing,
which proved that, in minds of a certain quality, the power of command,
though over savages, gives ease and freedom. The ship, the band,
the marines, the guns, all excited Budrudeen's attention. On the 9th,
it is arranged that the admiral shall meet the sultan and the rajah.

"_9th._--In the course of the day, after the audience had terminated,
the admiral made his demand of reparation on the sultan and Muda
Hassim for the detention and confinement of two British subjects
subsequent to their agreement with the British government. Of course,
the sultan and the rajah replied that they were not in fault; that
the act was Pangeran Usop's, and that he was too powerful for them
to control by force. If Sir Thomas Cochrane would punish him, they
should be much obliged, as they desired to keep the treaty inviolate.

"_10th._--Pangeran Usop had to be summoned; come he would not, and yet
I was in hopes that, when he saw the overwhelming force opposed to him,
his pride would yield to necessity. About 2 P.M. the steamers took up
their positions; the marines were landed, every thing was prepared,
yet no symptom of obedience. At length a single shot was fired from
the Vixen, by the admiral's order, through the roof of Usop's house,
which was instantly returned, thus proving the folly and the temper
of the man. In a few minutes his house was tenantless, having been
overwhelmed with shot. Usop was a fugitive; the amount of mischief
done inconsiderable, and no damage except to the guilty party. Twenty
captured guns the admiral presented to the sultan and the rajah;
two he kept, from which to remunerate the two detained men. So far
nothing could be more satisfactory. Usop has been punished severely,
the treaty strictly enforced, and our supremacy maintained. No evil has
been done except to the guilty; his house and his property alone have
suffered, and the immediate flight has prevented the shedding of blood.

"_11th._--At mid-day the admiral, with the Vixen and Nemesis, went
down the river, leaving the Pluto to me, to follow in next day.

"_12th._--This morning I visited the sultan in company with Muda
Hassim. By twelve at night the Pluto was anchored in the creek at
Labuan, and on the 13th I once more took up my quarters aboard the
flag-ship.

"_14th._--Wooding.

"_16th._--Last evening anchored within the point called in the chart
Sampormangio, or, properly, Sampang Mengayu, which, being translated,
signifies piratical or cruising waiting-place. The weather was thick
and squally, and it was late before the Dædalus and Vestal arrived
with their tows, the Nemesis and Pluto, the former frigate having
carried away her mizzen top-mast.

"_17th._--Squadron under weigh pretty early, getting into Malludu
Bay. After breakfast, had a very heavy squall. Agincourt heeled
to it, and sails of various sorts and sizes were blowing about in
ribbons aboard some of the ships: afterward brought up nearly off
the Melow river.

"_18th._--Vixen, Nemesis, Pluto, and boats, proceeded up the bay, and
anchored as near as possible to the entrance of the Marudu, or Malludu
river. The character of Malludu bay generally may be described as clear
of danger, with high, wooded banks on either side, till in the bight,
when the land gets flat and mangrovy, and the water shallow, and where
the mouths of several small rivers are seen, one of which is Malludu.

"_19th._--On the 19th of August was fought the celebrated battle
of Malludu; the boats, 24 in number, and containing 550 marines
and blue-jackets, having left the previous afternoon. As I was not
present, I can say only what I heard from others, and from what I
know from subsequently viewing the position. A narrow river with two
forts mounting eleven or twelve heavy guns (and defended by from 500
to 1000 fighting men), protected by a strong and well-contrived boom,
was the position of the enemy. Our boats took the bull by the horns,
and indeed had little other choice; cut away part of the boom under a
heavy fire; advanced, and carried the place in a fight protracted for
fifty minutes. The enemy fought well and stood manfully to their guns;
and a loss of six killed, two mortally and fifteen severely wounded,
on our side, was repaid by a very heavy loss of killed and wounded on
theirs. Gallant Gibbard, [19] of the Wolverine, fell mortally wounded
while working at the boom, ax in hand. In short, the engagement was
severe and trying to our men from the fire they were exposed to. At
two minutes to nine, aboard the Vixen, we heard the report of the
first heavy gun, and it was a time of anxiety and uneasiness till
the first column of black smoke proclaimed that the village was fired.

"I may here mention that before the fight commenced a flag of truce
came from the enemy, and asked for me. Captain Talbot (in command)
offered to meet Seriff Houseman either within or without the boom,
provided his whole force was with him. Seriff Houseman declined; but
offered (kind man!) to admit two gigs to be hauled over the boom. No
sooner was this offer declined, and the flag returned the second time
with a young Seriff, son of Seriff Layak of Bruni, than the enemy
opened fire, which was promptly returned. Had Captain Talbot entered
as proposed, I deem it certain he would never have quitted the place
alive; for the Seriff and his followers had made themselves up to
fight, and nothing but fight. Many chiefs were killed; two or three
Seriffs in their large turbans and flowing robes; many Illanuns in
their gay dresses and golden charms; many Badjows; many slaves--among
them a captive Chinaman; many were wounded; many carried away; and
many left on the ground dead or dying.

"_20th._--On the evening of the 19th a detachment of ten boats, with
fresh men and officers, quitted the Vixen, and arrived at the forts
shortly after daylight. I accompanied this party; and the work of
destruction, well begun yesterday, was this day completed. Numerous
proofs of the piracies of this Seriff came to light. The boom was
ingeniously fastened with the chain cable of a vessel of 300 or 400
tons; other chains were found in the town; a ship's long-boat; two
ship's bells, one ornamented with grapes and vine leaves, and marked
'Wilhelm Ludwig, Bremen;' and every other description of ship's
furniture. Some half-piratical boats, Illanun and Balagnini, were
burned; twenty-four or twenty-five brass guns captured; the iron
guns, likewise stated to have been got out of a ship, were spiked
and otherwise destroyed. Thus has Malluda ceased to exist; and Seriff
Houseman's power received a fall from which it will never recover.

"Amid this scene of war and devastation was one episode which moved
even harder hearts than mine. Twenty-four hours after the action,
a poor woman, with her child of two years of age, was discovered in
a small canoe; her arm was shattered at the elbow by a grape shot;
and the poor creature lay dying for want of water in an agony of
pain, with her child playing round her and endeavoring to derive
the sustenance which the mother could no longer give. This poor
woman was taken on board the Vixen, and in the evening her arm was
amputated. To have left her would have been certain death; so I
was strongly for the measure of taking her to Sarawak, where she
can be protected. To all my inquiries she answered, 'If you please
to take me, I shall go. I am a woman, and not a man; I am a slave,
and not a free woman: do as you like.' She stated too, positively,
that she herself had seen Seriff Houseman wounded in the neck, and
carried off; and her testimony is corroborated by two Manilla men, who,
among others, ran away on the occasion, and sought protection from us,
who likewise say that they saw the Seriff stretched out in the jungle,
but they cannot say whether dead or wounded. The proof how great a
number must have been killed and wounded on their part is, that on
the following day ten dead men were counted lying where they fell;
among them was Seriff Mahomed, the bearer of the flag of truce, who,
though offered our protection, fought to the last, and in the agonies
of death threw a spear at his advancing foes.

"The remnant of the enemy retired to Bungun; and it will be some time
before we learn their real loss and position. It is needless here
to say any thing on the political effects to be expected from the
establishment of a government in Bruni, and the destruction of this
worst of piratical communities. When I return to Bruni, and see how
measures advance, I may mention the subject again; but I will venture
here to reurge, that mere military force, however necessary, can not
do what it is desirable should be done. Supervision and conciliation
must go hand in hand with punishment; and we must watch that the snake
does not again rear his head through our neglect. The key-stone is
wanting as yet, and must be supplied if possible; we must, to back
the gallant deeds of the admiral and fleet, continue to pursue a
steady course of measures. In the evening returned to the Vixen.

"_21st._--The morning quiet. After breakfast, under weigh; proceeded
off the river Bankoka, where we found the Cruiser at anchor. As there
was nothing to detain us, crossed over to the squadron--remained
an hour aboard Agincourt; then rejoined Sir Thomas Cochrane aboard
Vixen, and before dinner-time were at anchor in the northeast side
of Balambangan. Our woman prisoner doing well, and pleased with the
attention paid her.

"_23d._--Southwestern harbor of Balambangan. Yesterday examined the
N.E. harbor; a dreary-looking place, sandy and mangrovy, and the harbor
itself filled with coral patches; here the remains of our former
settlement were found: it is a melancholy and ineligible spot. The
S.W. harbor is very narrow and cramped, with no fitting site for a
town, on account of the rugged and unequal nature of the ground; and if
the town were crammed in between two eminences, it would be deprived
of all free circulation of air. Water is, I hear, in sufficient
quantity, and good. On the whole, I am wretchedly disappointed with
this island; it has one, and only one recommendation, viz., that it
is well situated in the Straits for trading and political purposes;
in every other requisite it is inferior to Labuan. Balambangan is
commercially and politically well placed. Labuan, though inferior,
is not greatly inferior in these points; the harbor, the aspect,
the soil, are superior: it may probably be added, that the climate
is superior likewise; and we must remember that those who had an
opportunity of trying both places give the preference to Labuan.

"Then, on other points, Labuan has a clear advantage. It commands the
coal; it is in the vicinity of a friendly people, and settlement may
be formed with certainty and at a moderate expense, and with small
establishments. Can this be done at Balambangan? I own I doubt it;
the people in the vicinity we know nothing of, but we shall find
them, in all probability, hostile. The Sooloos we are already too
well acquainted with. The Illanuns are in the vicinity. In the case
of Labuan, the details of the first establishment (no small step)
can be clearly seen and arranged; but I do not see my way regarding
Balambangan. The matter is of secondary importance, but a languishing
settlement at first is to be dreaded; food will be scarce, and houses
difficult to build; while at Labuan the population of Bruni are at
our disposal, and the government our own. I leave others to judge
whether a superior (but somewhat similar) position, commercially
and politically, will outweigh the other disadvantages mentioned,
and repay us for the extra expenses of the establishment; but, for
myself, I can give a clear verdict in favor of Labuan.

"_24th._--Buried poor Mr. East, of the Agincourt, on
Balambangan. Gibbard, poor, gallant fellow, was consigned to the deep
a day or two before.

"_25th._--A day of disaster and parting: the morning blowy, with an
unpleasant sea. Vestal ran ashore on a coral-patch, but soon swung
off. I was very sorry to part with the Agincourt. Farewell, gallant
Agincourts! farewell, kind admiral! farewell, the pride, pomp, and
panoply of a flag-ship liner! My occupation's over for the present,
and I retire with content to solitude and the jungle of Sarawak. I
step down the huge side, wave a parting adieu, jump on the Cruiser's
deck--the anchor is weighed, and away we fly.

"_30th._--Coming down in her majesty's ship Cruiser, and now off
Ujong Sapo. On our passage we had some good views of Kina Balow,
and from various points; judging the distance by the chart, the angle
of elevation gives the mountain not less than 12,000 feet and up to
14,000; the latter result agreeing with the computation of the master
of the Dædalus.

"_31st._--Started for Bruni, and half way met a boat with Pangeran
Illudeen, bringing the news of the place. Two days after the admiral
and his steamers left, Pangeran Usop seized the hill behind his late
house with 300 Kadiens, and commenced an attack on the town. Pangeran
Budrudeen on this mustered about the like number and mounted the
hill, and by a fire of musketry dislodged the enemy, who retired,
stood again, were again defeated, and finally dispersed. This victory
raised the courage of the Brunions, and a counter-attack was planned,
when the arrival of her majesty's ship Espiegle delayed them. As
the officers of the Espiegle and the rajah could not speak a word
of each other's language, the boat only stayed a few hours, and went
away in ignorance of the condition of the town. After her departure,
Budrudeen gathered about a thousand men of all arms, with some hundred
muskets; and leaving Bruni at three o'clock in the morning, reached the
landing-place at 6 A.M., and at eight marched for Barukas, where they
arrived at one o'clock. On the way the Kadiens humbled themselves, and
begged their houses might be spared, which were spared accordingly. On
reaching Barukas, they found Pangeran Usop had been deserted by the
Kadiens, and was in no way expecting their coming. The few persons who
remained fled ignominiously, Pangeran Usop showing them the example;
and his women, children, gold, and other property, fell into the hands
of his victors. The same evening Budrudeen returned to the city in
triumph; and there can be no doubt these vigorous measures have not
only settled them in power, but have likewise raised the spirits
of their adherents, and awed the few who remain adverse. 'Never,'
the Brunions exclaim, 'was such a war in Bruni. Pangeran Budrudeen
fights like a European; the very spirit of the Englishman is in him;
he has learned this at Sarawak.' Fortune favored Usop's escape. He
fled to the sea-shore near Pulo Badukan, and there met a boat of
his entering from Kimanis: he took possession and put out to sea,
and returned with her to that place.

"Budrudeen we found in active preparation for pursuit. A dozen
war-prahus were nearly ready for sea, and this force starts directly
we depart.

"Budrudeen's vigor has given a stimulus to this unwarlike people,
and he has gained so great a character--victory sits so lightly on
his plume--that his authority will now be obeyed; while Usop, in
consequence of his cowardly flight (for so they deem it), from the
want of energy he has displayed, has lost character as well as wealth,
and would scarce find ten men in Bruni to follow him. Unluckily for
himself, he was a great boaster in the days of his prosperity; and
now the contrast of his past boasting with his present cowardice is
drawn with a sneer. 'His mouth was brave,' they exclaim, 'but his heart
timid.' 'He should have died as other great men have died, and not have
received such shame; he should have amoked, [20] or else given himself
up for execution.' This seems to be the general impression in the city.

"My mind is now at rest about the fate of my friends; but I still
consider a man-of-war brig coming here every month or two as of
great importance; for it will be necessary for the next six months
to consolidate the power of Muda Hassim and Budrudeen; and if, with
the new order of things, they constantly see white faces, and find
that they are quiet and inoffensive, the ignorant terror which now
prevails will abate. Besides this, we might find the opportunity
a favorable one for becoming acquainted with the Kadiens and the
Marats, and giving them just impressions of ourselves; for I have
no doubt that on the late occasion the Kadiens were worked upon by
all kinds of false reports of the pale faces taking their lands,
burning their houses, &c., &c., &c. We only see the effects; we do
not see (until we become very well acquainted with them) the strings
which move the passions of these people. The Kadiens are, however, an
unwarlike and gentle race, and have now given in their submission to
Muda Hassim. I do not mention the sultan, because, as I before said,
he is so imbecile that, as regards public affairs, he is a cipher:
he will some day cease to be sultan, and give place to a better man.

"Our interview with the rajah, with Budrudeen, and all the other host
of our acquaintance, was quite a triumph--they hot with their success,
and we bringing the account of Malludu's sanguinary fight. Happy
faces and wreathed smiles supplied the place of the anxious and
doubtful expression which I had left them wearing. All vied in their
attentions; fruit enough to fill a room: the luscious durian, the
delicate mangosteen and lousch, the grateful rombusteen, the baluna,
pitabu, mowha, plantain, &c., &c., were showered upon us from all
quarters. The rajah daily sent a dinner; all was rejoicing, and few
or no clouds lowered in the distance. I was proud and happy; for I
felt and feel that much of this has been owing to my exertions. I
will not stop to say how or why; but I first taught them to respect
and to confide in Englishmen, and no one else has yet untaught them
this lesson.

"_September 3d._--After parting interviews we quitted the city at two,
and arrived aboard her majesty's ship cruiser at eight P.M. To-morrow
morning we sail for Sarawak, where, at any rate, I hope for rest for
a month or two.

"_19th._--Sarawak. Thus concludes a large volume. Captain Bethune and
myself, with Commander Fanshawe and a party of Cruisers, returned from
a five days' excursion among the Dyaks, having visited the Suntah,
Stang, Sigo, and Sanpro tribes. It was a progress; at each tribe there
was dancing, and a number of ceremonies. White fowls were waved as I
have before described, slaughtered, and the blood mixed with kunyit,
a yellow root, &c., &c., which delightful mixture was freely scattered
over them and their goods by me, holding in my hand a dozen or two
women's necklaces. Captain Bethune has seen and can appreciate the
Dyaks: to-morrow he leaves me, and most sorry shall I be to lose
him. A better man or a better public servant is not to be found.

"Among my Dyak inquiries, I found out that the name of their god is
Tuppa, and not Jovata, which they before gave me, and which they use,
but do not acknowledge. Tuppa is the great god; eight other gods were
in heaven; one fell or descended into Java--seven remained above;
one of these is named Sakarra, who, with his companions and followers,
is (or is in) the constellation of a cluster of stars, doubtless the
Pleiades; and by the position of this constellation the Dyaks can
judge good and bad fortune. If this cluster of stars be high in the
heavens, success will attend the Dyak; when it sinks below the horizon,
ill luck follows; fruit and crops will not ripen; war and famine
are dreaded. Probably originally this was but a simple and natural
division of the seasons, which has now become a gross superstition.

"The progress is ended; to-morrow I shall be left in the solitude
and the quiet of the jungle: but, after witnessing the happiness,
the plenty, the growing prosperity of the Dyak tribes, I can scarcely
believe that I could devote my life to better purpose, and I dread
that a removal might destroy what I have already done.

"We must now wait the decision of government with patience. Captain
Bethune, in making his report, will have the advantage of real
substantial personal knowledge. I esteem him highly, and regard him
as a man of the most upright principles, who is not, and will not be
swayed in his duty by any considerations whatever. I am glad we are
to stand the ordeal of such a man's inquiry."





CHAPTER XXIII.

    Borneo, its geographical bounds and leading divisions.--British
    settlements in 1775.--The province of Sarawak formally ceded by
    the sultan in perpetuity to Mr. Brooke its present ruler.--General
    view of the Dyaks, the aborigines of Borneo.--The Dyaks of Sarawak,
    and adjoining tribes; their past oppression and present position.


I will now endeavor to make the reader better acquainted with the
nature of a country and people so imperfectly known, by offering that
general view of its past events and present condition which will
make the information respecting them more intelligible, as well as
applicable to new circumstances and future measures.

By looking at the map, it will be seen that the island of Borneo
extends over 11 degrees of latitude and as many of longitude, from
4° N. to 7° S., and 108° to 119° E. The N.W. coast is but thinly
populated; and the natives who inhabit the banks of some of the
beautiful rivers differ, as has been already stated, from each
other in manners and customs, and have but little communication
among themselves. The S., E., and N.E. coasts of Borneo are also
but thinly inhabited, and very little known. There are various
divisions of Malays, as well as different tribes of Dyaks, who live
in an unsettled state, and occasionally make war on one another:
their principal occupation, however, is piracy. The north part of
the island was once in the possession of the East India Company, who
had a settlement and factory on the island of Balambangan, which was
attacked in 1775, when in a weak and unguarded state, by a powerful
piratical tribe of Sooloos, who surprised the fort, put the sentries
to death, and turned the guns on the troops, who were chiefly Buguese
(or Bugis) Malays. Those who escaped got on board the vessels in
the harbor, and reached the island of Labuan, near the mouth of the
Borneo river; while the booty obtained by the pirates was estimated
at 375,000_l._ From that time to this these atrocious pirates have
never been punished, and still continue their depredations.

The remainder of the coast on the N.W. is now called Borneo Proper,
to distinguish it from the name that custom has given to the whole
island, the original name of which was Kalamantan, and Bruni that of
the town now called Borneo. The latter was probably the first part
of the coast ever visited by Europeans, who consequently extended
the appellation to the island itself. The town of Borneo, situated
on the river of that name, was, until the last few years, a port
of some wealth, and carrying on an extensive trade, which has been
ruined entirely by the rapacity of the Malay chiefs, who have now
but little control over that part of Borneo Proper which lies to the
northward of the river. The province of Sarawak is situated at the
S.W. end of Borneo Proper, and was formally ceded in perpetuity by the
sultan in 1843 to Mr. Brooke, who, indeed, had possessed the almost
entire management of the district for the two previous years. "It
extends from Tanjong Datu (I quote from Mr. Brooke's description of
his territory) to the entrance of the Samarahan river, a distance
along the coast of about sixty miles in an E.S.E. direction, with
an average breadth of fifty miles. It is bounded to the westward
by the Sambas territory, to the southward by a range of mountains
which separate it from the Pontiana river, and to the eastward by
the Borneon territory of Sadong. Within this space then are several
rivers and islands, which it is needless here to describe at length,
as the account of the river of Sarawak will answer alike for the
rest. There are two navigable entrances to this river, and numerous
smaller branches for boats, both to the westward and eastward; the
two principal entrances combine at about twelve miles from the sea,
and the river flows for twenty miles into the interior in a southerly
and westerly direction, when it again forms two branches--one running
to the right, the other to the left hand, as far as the mountain
range. Beside these facilities for water-communication, there exist
three other branches from the easternmost entrance, called Morotaba,
one of which joins the Samarahan river, and the two others flow from
different points of the mountain range already mentioned. The country
is diversified by detached mountains, and the mountain range has an
elevation of about three thousand feet. The aspect of the country may
be generally described as low and woody at the entrance of the rivers,
except a few high mountains; but in the interior undulating in parts,
and part presenting fine level plains. The climate may be pronounced
healthy and cool, though for the six months from September to March a
great quantity of rain falls. During my three visits to this place,
which have been prolonged to eight months, and since residing here,
we have been clear of sickness, and during the entire period not one
of three deaths could be attributed to the effects of climate. The
more serious maladies of tropical climates are very infrequent; from
fever and dysentery we have been quite free, and the only complaints
have been rheumatism, colds, and ague; the latter, however, attacked
us in the interior, and no one has yet had it at Sarawak, which is
situated about twenty-five miles from the mouth of the river.

"The soil and productions of this country are of the richest
description, and it is not too much to say, that, within the same
given space, there are not to be found the same mineral and vegetable
riches in any land in the world. I propose to give a brief detail
of them, beginning with the soil of the plains, which is moist and
rich, and calculated for the growth of rice, for which purpose
it was formerly cleared and used, until the distractions of the
country commenced. From the known industry of the Dyaks, and their
partiality to rice-cultivation, there can be little doubt that it
would become an article of extensive export, provided security
were given to the cultivator and a proper remuneration for his
produce. The lower grounds, beside rice, are well adapted for the
growth of sago, and produce canes, rattans, and forest-timber of the
finest description for ship-building and other useful purposes. The
Chinese export considerable quantities of timber from Sambas and
Pontiana, particularly of the kind called Balean by the natives,
or the lion-wood of the Europeans; and at this place it is to be had
in far greater quantity and nearer the place of sale. The undulating
ground differs in soil, some portions of it being a yellowish clay,
while the rest is a rich mold; these grounds, generally speaking, as
well as the slopes of the higher mountains, are admirably calculated
for the growth of nutmegs, coffee, pepper, or any of the more valuable
vegetable productions of the tropics. Beside the above mentioned
articles, there are birds'-nests, bees-wax, and several kinds of
scented wood, in demand at Singapore, which are all collected by the
Dyaks, and would be gathered in far greater quantity provided the
Dyak was allowed to sell them.

"Turning from the vegetable to the mineral riches of the country,
we have diamonds, gold, tin, iron, and antimony ore certain; I have
lately sent what I believe to be a specimen of lead ore to Calcutta;
and copper is reported. It must be remembered, in reading this list,
that the country is as yet unexplored by a scientific person, and that
the inquiries of a geologist and a mineralogist would throw further
light on the minerals of the mountains, and the spots where they are
to be found in the greatest plenty. The diamonds are stated to be
found in considerable numbers, and of a good water; and I judge the
statement to be correct from the fact that the diamond-workers from
Sandak come here and work secretly, and the people from Banjamassim,
who are likewise clever at this trade, are most desirous to be allowed
to work for the precious stone. Gold of a good quality certainly is to
be found in large quantities. The eagerness and perseverance of the
Chinese to establish themselves is a convincing proof of the fact;
and ten years since a body of about 3000 of them had great success
in procuring gold by their ordinary mode of trenching the ground.

"The quantity of gold yearly procured at Sambas is moderately stated
at 130,000 bunkals, which, reckoned at the low rate of 20 Spanish
dollars a bunkal, gives 2,600,000 Spanish dollars, or upward of half
a million sterling. The most intelligent Chinese are of opinion,
that the quantity here exceeds that at Sambas; and there is no good
reason to suppose it would fall short of it were once a sufficient
Chinese population settled in the country.

"Antimony ore is a staple commodity, which is to be procured in any
quantity. Tin is said to be plentiful, and the Chinese propose working
it; but I have had no opportunity of visiting the spot where it is
found. Copper, though reported, has not been brought; and the iron ore
I have examined is of inferior quality. The specimen of what I supposed
to be lead ore has been forwarded to Calcutta, and it remains to be
seen what its value may be. And beside the above-mentioned minerals,
there can be little doubt of many others being discovered, if the
mountain range was properly explored by any man of science. Many
other articles of minor importance might be mentioned; but it is
needless to add to a list which contains articles of such value,
and which would prove the country equal in vegetable and mineral
productions to any in the world.

"From the productions (continues Mr. Brooke) I turn to the inhabitants,
and I feel sure that in describing their sufferings and miseries I
shall command the interest and sympathy of every person of humanity,
and that the claims of the virtuous and most unhappy Dyaks will meet
with the same attention as those of the African. And these claims have
the advantage, that much good may be done without the vast expenditure
of lives and money which the exertions on the African coast yearly
demand, and that the people would readily appreciate the good that was
conferred upon them, and rapidly rise in the scale of civilization."

The inhabitants may be divided into three different classes, viz. the
Malays, the Chinese, and the Dyaks; of the two former little need be
said, as they are so well known.

The Dyaks (or more properly Dyak) of Borneo offer to our view
a primitive state of society; and their near resemblance to
the Tarajahs of Celebes, [21] to the inland people of Sumatra,
and probably to the Arafuras of Papua, [22] in customs, manners,
and language, affords reason for the conclusion that these are the
aboriginal race of the Eastern Archipelago, nearly stationary in their
original condition. While successive waves of civilization have swept
onward the rest of the inhabitants, while tribes as wild have arisen
to power, flourished, and decayed, the Dyak in his native jungles
still retains the feelings of earlier times, and shows the features
of society as it existed before the influx of foreign races either
improved or corrupted the native character.

The name "Dyak" has been indiscriminately applied to all the wild
people on the island of Borneo; but as the term is never so used
by themselves, and as they differ greatly, not only in name, but in
their customs and manners, we will briefly, in the first instance,
mention the various distinct nations, the general locality of each,
and some of their distinguishing peculiarities.

1st. The Dusun, or villagers of the northern extremity of the island,
are a race of which Mr. Brooke knows nothing personally; but the name
implies that they are an agricultural people: they are represented as
not being tattooed, as using the sumpitan, and as having a peculiar
dialect. [23]

2d. The Murut. They inhabit the interior of Borneo Proper. They are
not tattooed, always use the sumpitan, and have a peculiar dialect. In
the same locality, and resembling the Murut, are some tribes called
the Basaya.

3d. The Kadians (or Idaans of voyagers) use the sumpitan, and have
likewise a peculiar dialect; but in other respects they nowise differ
from the Borneons, either in religion, dress, or mode of life. They
are, however, an industrious, peaceful people, who cultivate the
ground in the vicinity of Borneo Proper, and nearly as far as Tanjong
Barram. The wretched capital is greatly dependent upon them, and,
from their numbers and industry, they form a valuable population. In
the interior, and on the Balyet river, which discharges itself near
Tanjong Barram, is a race likewise called Kadian, not converted to
Islam, and which still retains the practice of "taking heads."

4th. The Kayan. The Kayans are the most numerous, the most powerful,
and the most warlike people in Borneo. They are an inland race,
and their locality extends from about sixty miles up the country
from Tanjong Barram to the same extent farther into the interior, in
latitude 3° 30' N., and thence across the island to probably a similar
distance from the eastern shore. Their customs, manners, and dress are
peculiar, and present most of the characteristic features of a wild
and independent people. The Malays of the N.W. coast fear the Kayans,
and rarely enter their country; but the Millanows are familiar with
them, and there have thence been obtained many particulars respecting
them. They are represented as extremely hospitable, generous, and kind
to strangers, strictly faithful to their word, and honest in their
dealings; but on the other hand, they are fierce and bloodthirsty,
and when on an expedition, slaughter without sparing. The Kayans are
partially tattooed, use the sumpitan, have many dialects, and are
remarkable for the strange and apparently mutilating custom adopted
by the males, and mentioned by Sir Stamford Raffles.

5th. To the southward and westward of Barram are the Millanows,
[24] who inhabit the rivers not far from the sea. They are, generally
speaking, an intelligent, industrious, and active race, the principal
cultivators of sago, and gatherers of the famous camphor barus. Their
locality extends from Tanjong Barram to Tanjong Sirak. In person
they are stout and well-made, of middling height, round good-tempered
countenances, and fairer than the Malays. They have several dialects
among them, use the sumpitan, and are not tattooed. They retain the
practice of taking heads, but they seldom seek them, and have little
of the ferocity of the Kayan.

6th. In the vicinity of the Kayans and Millanows are some wild tribes,
called the Tatows, Balanian, Kanowit, &c. They are probably only a
branch of Kayans, though differing from them in being elaborately
tattooed over the entire body. They have peculiar dialects, use the
sumpitan, and are a wild and fierce people.

7th. The Dyak. They are divided into Dyak Darrat and Dyak Laut, or
land and sea Dyaks. The Dyak Lauts, as their name implies, frequent
the sea; and it is needless to say much of them, as their difference
from the Dyak Darrat is a difference of circumstances only. The tribes
of Sarebus and Sakarran, whose rivers are situated in the deep bay
between Tanjong Sipang and Tanjong Sirak, are powerful communities,
and dreadful pirates, who ravage the coast in large fleets, and murder
and rob indiscriminately; but this is by no means to be esteemed a
standard of Dyak character. In these expeditions the Malays often join
them, and they are likewise made the instruments for oppressing the
Laut tribes. The Sarebus and Sakarran are fine men, fairer than the
Malays, with sharp keen eyes, thin lips, and handsome countenances,
though frequently marked by an expression of cunning. The Balows and
Sibnowans are amiable tribes, decidedly warlike, but not predatory;
and the latter combines the virtues of the Dyak character with much
of the civilization of the Malays. The Dyak Laut do not tattoo, nor
do they use the sumpitan; their language assimilates closely to the
Malay, and was doubtless originally identical with that of the inland
tribes. The name of God among them is Battara (the Avatara of the
Hindoos). They bury their dead, and in the graves deposit a large
portion of the property of the deceased, often to a considerable
value in gold ornaments, brass guns, jars, and arms. Their marriage
ceremony consists in two fowls being killed, and the forehead and
breast of the young couple being touched with the blood; after which
the chief, or an old man, knocks their heads together several times,
and the ceremony is completed with mirth and feasting. In these two
instances they differ from the Dyak Darrat.

It must be observed that the Dyak also differs from the Kayan in not
being tattooed; and from the Kayan Millanows, &c., in not using the
_national_ weapon--the sumpitan. The Kayan and the Dyak, as general
distinctions, though they differ in dialect, in dress, in weapons,
and probably in religion, agree in their belief of similar omens,
and, above all, in their practice of taking the heads of their
enemies; but with the Kayan this practice assumes the aspect of an
indiscriminate desire of slaughter, while with the Dyak it is but
the trophy acquired in legitimate warfare. The Kadians form the only
exception to this rule, in consequence of their conversion to Islam;
and it is but reasonable to suppose, that with a slight exertion
in favor of Christianity, others might be induced to lay aside this
barbarous custom.

With respect to the dialects, though the difference is considerable,
they are evidently derived from a common source; but it is remarkable
that some words in the Millanow and Kayan are similar to the Bugis and
Badjow language. This intermixture of dialects, which can be linked
together, appears to be more conclusive of the common origin of the
wild tribes and civilized nations of the Archipelago than most other
arguments; and if Marsden's position be correct (which there can be
little or no reason to doubt), that the Polynesian is an original race
with an original language, [25] it must likewise be conceded that the
wild tribes represent the primitive state of society in these islands.

We know little of the wild tribes of Celebes beyond their general
resemblance to the Kayans of the east coast of Borneo; and it is
probable that the Kayans are the people of Celebes, who crossing the
Strait of Makassar, have in time by their superior prowess possessed
themselves of the country of the Dyaks. Mr. Brooke (from whom I am
copying this sketch) is led to entertain this opinion from a slight
resemblance in their dialects with those used in Celebes, from the
difference in so many of their customs from those of the Dyaks, and
from the Kayans of the _northwest coast of Borneo_ having one custom
in common with the wild tribe of Minkoka in the Bay of Boni. Both
the Kayans and Minkokas on the death of a relative seek for a head;
and on the death of their chief many human heads must be procured:
which practice is unknown to the Dyak. It may further be remarked,
that their probable immigration from Celebes is supported by the
statement of the Millanows, that the Murut and Dyak give place to the
Kayan whenever they come in contact, and that the latter people have
depopulated large tracts in the interior, which were once occupied
by the former.

Having thus briefly noticed the different wild people of the island,
I proceed with the more particular task of describing the Dyak Darrats.

The locality of these Dyaks may be marked as follows:--The Pontiana
river, from its mouth, is traced into the interior toward the northward
and westward, until it approaches at the farthest within 100 miles of
the northwest coast; a line drawn in latitude 3° N. till it intersects
the course of the Pontiana river will point out the limit of the
country inhabited by the Dyak. Within this inconsiderable portion of
the island, which includes Sambas, Landak, Pontiana, Sangow, Sarawak,
&c., are numerous tribes, all of which agree in their leading customs,
and make use of nearly the same dialect. Personally (writes our sole
authority for any intelligence respecting them), I am acquainted only
with the tribes of Sarawak and some tribes further in the interior
beyond the government of the Malays, who inhabit the country between
Sarawak and Landak; and the description of one tribe will serve as
a description of all, so little do they vary.

Before, however, I say anything of the character of the Dyaks, or their
temper, it will be necessary to describe briefly the government under
which they live, and the influence it has upon them; and if afterward
in the recital there appear some unamiable points in their character,
an allowance will be made for their failings, which those who rule
them would not deserve.

The Dyaks have from time immemorial been looked upon as the bondsmen
of the Malays, and the rajahs consider them much in the same light
as they would a drove of oxen--_i. e._ as personal and disposable
property. They were governed in Sarawak by three local officers, called
the Patingi, the Bandar, and the Tumangong. To the Patingi they paid a
small yearly revenue of rice, but this deficiency of revenue was made
up by sending them a quantity of goods--chiefly salt, Dyak cloths,
and iron--and demanding a price for them six or eight times more than
their value. The produce collected by the Dyaks was also monopolized,
and the edible birds'-nests, bees-wax, &c. &c. were taken at a price
fixed by the Patingi, who moreover claimed mats, fowls, fruits, and
every other necessary at his pleasure, and could likewise make the
Dyaks work for him for merely a nominal remuneration. This system,
not badly devised, had it been limited within the bounds of moderation,
would have left the Dyaks plenty for all their wants; or had the local
officers known their own interest, they would have protected those upon
whom they depended for revenue, and under the worst oppression of one
man the Dyaks would have deemed themselves happy. Such unfortunately
was not the case; for the love of immediate gain overcame every other
consideration, and by degrees old-established customs were thrown
aside, and new ones substituted in their place. When the Patingi
had received all he thought proper to extort, his relatives first
claimed the right of arbitrary trade, and gradually it was extended
as the privilege of every respectable person in the country to serra
[26] the Dyaks. The poor Dyak, thus at the mercy of half the Malay
population, was never allowed to refuse compliance with these demands;
he could plead neither poverty, inability, nor even hunger, as an
excuse, for the answer was ever ready: "Give me your wife or one of
your children;" and in case he could not supply what was required,
the wife or the child was taken, and became a slave. Many modes of
extortion were resorted to; a favorite one was convicting the Dyak of
a fault and imposing a fine upon him. Some ingenuity and much trickery
were shown in this game, and new offences were invented as soon as
the old pleas would serve no longer; for instance, if a Malay met a
Dyak in a boat which pleased him, he notched it, as a token that it
was his property; in one day, if the boat was a new one, perhaps three
or more would place their marks on it; and as only one could get it,
the Dyak to whom the boat really belonged had to pay the others _for
his fault_. This, however, was only "a fault;" whereas, for a Dyak
to injure a Malay, directly or indirectly, purposely or otherwise,
was a _high offence_, and punished by a proportionate fine. If a
Dyak's house was in bad repair, and a Malay fell in consequence and
was hurt, or pretended to be hurt, a fine was imposed; if a Malay in
the jungle was wounded by the springs set for a wild boar, or by the
wooden spikes which the Dyaks for protection put about their village,
or scratched himself and said he was injured, the penalty was heavy;
if the Malay was _really hurt_, ever so accidentally, it was the
ruin of the Dyak. And these numerous and uninvited guests came and
went at pleasure, lived in free quarters, made their requisitions,
and then forced the Dyak to carry away for them the very property of
which he had been robbed.

This is a fair picture of the governments under which the Dyaks live;
and although they were often roused to resistance, it was always
fruitless, and only involved them in deeper troubles; for the Malays
could quickly gather a large force of sea Dyaks from Sakarran, who
were readily attracted by hope of plunder, and who, supported by
the fire-arms of their allies, were certain to overcome any single
tribe that held out. The misfortunes of the Dyaks of Sarawak did not
stop here. Antimony ore was discovered; the cupidity of the Borneons
was roused; then Pangerans struggled for the prize; intrigues and
dissensions ensued; and the inhabitants of Sarawak in turn felt
the very evil they had inflicted on the Dyaks; while the Dyaks were
compelled, amid their other wrongs, to labor at the ore without any
recompense, and to the neglect of their rice-cultivation. Many died in
consequence of this compulsory labor, so contrary to their habits and
inclinations; and more would doubtless have fallen victims, had not
civil war rescued them from this evil, to inflict upon them others
a thousand times worse.

Extortion had before been carried on by individuals, but now it
was systematized; and Pangerans of rank, for the sake of plunder,
sent bodies of Malays and Sakarran Dyaks to attack the different
tribes. The men were slaughtered, the women and children carried
off into slavery, the villages burned, the fruit-trees cut down,
[27] and all their property destroyed or seized.

The Dyaks could no longer live in tribes, but sought refuge in
the mountains or the jungle, a few together; and as one of them
pathetically described it--"We do not live," he said, "like men; we are
like monkeys; we are hunted from place to place; we have no houses; and
when we light a fire, we fear the smoke will draw our enemies upon us."

In the course of ten years, under the circumstances detailed--from
enforced labor, from famine, from slavery, from sickness, from
the sword--one half of the Dyak population [28] disappeared; and
the work of extirpation would have gone on at an accelerated pace,
had the remnant been left to the tender mercies of the Pangerans;
but chance (we may much more truly say Providence) led our countryman
Mr. Brooke to this scene of misery, and enabled him, by circumstances
far removed beyond the grounds of calculation, to put a stop to the
sufferings of an amiable people.

There are twenty tribes in Sarawak, on about fifty square miles
of land. The appearance of the Dyaks is prepossessing: they have
good-natured faces, with a mild and subdued expression; eyes set
far apart, and features sometimes well formed. In person they are
active, of middling height, and not distinguishable from the Malays
in complexion. The women are neither so good-looking nor well-formed
as the men, but they have the same expression, and are cheerful and
kind-tempered. The dress of the men consists of a piece of cloth
about fifteen feet long, passed between the legs and fastened round
the loins, with the ends hanging before and behind; the head-dress
is composed of bark-cloth, dyed bright yellow, and stuck up in front
so as to resemble a tuft of feathers. The arms and legs are often
ornamented with rings of silver, brass, or shell; and necklaces
are worn, made of human teeth, or those of bears or dogs, or of
white beads, in such numerous strings as to conceal the throat. A
sword on one side, a knife and small betel-basket on the other,
complete the ordinary equipment of the males; but when they travel
they carry a basket slung from the forehead, on which is a palm-mat,
to protect the owner and his property from the weather. The women wear
a short and scanty petticoat, reaching from the loins to the knees,
and a pair of black bamboo stays, which are never removed except the
wearer be _enceinte_. They have rings of brass or red bamboo about the
loins, and sometimes ornaments on the arms; the hair is worn long;
the ears of both sexes are pierced, and earrings of brass inserted
occasionally; the teeth of the young people are sometimes filed to a
point and discolored, as they say that "Dogs have white teeth." They
frequently dye their feet and hands of a bright red or yellow color;
and the young people, like those of other countries, affect a degree
of finery and foppishness, while the elders invariably lay aside all
ornaments, as unfit for a wise person or one advanced in years.

In character the Dyak is mild and tractable, hospitable when he is
well used, grateful for kindness, industrious, honest, and simple;
neither treacherous nor cunning, and so truthful that the word of
one of them might safely be taken before the oath of half-a-dozen
Borneons. In their dealings they are very straightforward and correct,
and so trustworthy that they rarely attempt, even after a lapse
of years, to evade payment of a just debt. On the reverse of this
picture there is little unfavorable to be said; and the wonder is,
they have learned so little deceit or falsehood where the examples
before them have been so rife. The temper of the Dyak inclines to be
sullen; and they oppose a dogged and stupid obstinacy when set to a
task which displeases them, and support with immovable apathy torrents
of abuse or entreaty. They are likewise distrustful, fickle, apt to
be led away, and evasive in concealing the amount of their property;
but these are the vices rather of situation than of character, for
they have been taught by bitter experience that their rulers set no
limits to their exactions, and that hiding is their only chance of
retaining a portion of the grain they have raised. They are, at the
same time, fully aware of the customs by which their ancestors were
governed, and are constantly appealing to them as a rule of right,
and frequently arguing with the Malay on the subject. Upon these
occasions they are silenced, but not convinced; and the Malay, while
he evades or bullies when it is needful, is sure to appeal to these
very much-abused customs whenever it serves his purpose. The manners
of the Dyaks with strangers are reserved to an extent rarely seen
among rude or half-civilized people; but on a better acquaintance
(which is not readily acquired), they are open and talkative, and,
when heated with their favorite beverage, lively, and evincing
more shrewdness and observation than they have gained credit for
possessing. Their ideas, as may well be supposed, are very limited;
they reckon with their fingers and toes, and few are clever enough to
count beyond twenty; but when they repeat the operation, they record
each twenty by making a knot on a string.

Like other wild people, the slightest restraint is irksome, and
no temptation will induce them to stay long from their favorite
jungle. It is there they seek the excitement of war, the pleasures of
the chase, the labors of the field, and the abundance of fruit in the
rich produce which assists in supporting their families. The pathless
jungle is endeared to them by every association which influences the
human mind, and they languish when prevented from roaming there as
inclination dictates.

With reference to the gradual advance of the Dyaks, Mr. Brooke
observes in an early part of his journal:--"The peaceful and
gentle aborigines--how can I speak too favorably of their improved
condition? These people, who, a few years since, suffered every extreme
of misery from war, slavery, and starvation, are now comfortably
lodged, and comparatively rich. A stranger might now pass from village
to village, and he would receive their hospitality, and see their padi
stored in their houses. He would hear them proclaim their happiness,
and praise the white man as their friend and protector. Since the
death of Parembam, no Dyak of Sarawak lost his life by violence, until
a month since, when two were cut off by the Sakarran Dyaks. None of
the tribes have warred among themselves; and I believe their war
excursions to a distance in the interior have been very few, and
those undertaken by the Sarambos. What punishment is sufficient for
the wretch who finds this state of things so baleful as to attempt
to destroy it? Yet such a wretch is Seriff Sahib. In describing the
condition of the Dyaks, I do not say that it is perfect, or that it
may not be still further improved; but with people in their state
of society innovations ought not rashly or hastily to be made; as
the civilized being ought constantly to bear in mind, that what is
clear to him is not clear to a savage; that intended benefits _may_
be regarded as positive injuries; and that his motives are not, and
scarcely can be, appreciated! The greatest evil, perhaps, from which
the Dyaks suffer, is the influence of the Datus or chiefs; but this
influence is never carried to oppression, and is only used to obtain
the expensive luxury of 'birds'-nests' at a cheap rate. In short,
the Dyaks are happy and content; and their gradual development must
now be left to the work of time, aided by the gentlest persuasion,
and advanced (if attainable) by the education of their children."

The latest accounts from Sarawak describe the increasing prosperity
of that interesting settlement. Among other recent intelligence I
have heard from Mr. Brooke that Seriff Sahib died of a broken heart,
shortly after his arrival at the Pontiana river.





CHAPTER XXIV.

    Proposed British settlement on the northwest coast of Borneo,
    and occupation of the island of Labuan.--Governor Crawfurd's
    opinions thereon.


The establishment of a British settlement on the northwest coast of
Borneo, and the occupation of the island of Labuan, are measures that
have for some time past been under consideration by her majesty's
government; and I am courteously enabled to lay before my readers
the valuable opinions of Mr. Crawfurd (late Governor of Singapore)
on this subject:

"I am of opinion (Mr. Crawfurd writes) that a settlement on the
northwest coast of Borneo--that is, at a convenient point on the
southern shore of the China Sea--would be highly advantageous to
this country, as a coal depôt for steam navigation; as a means of
suppressing Malayan piracy; as a harbor of refuge for ships disabled
in the China Sea; and finally, as a commanding position during a
naval war.

"The island of Labuan has been pointed out for this purpose; and as
far as our present limited knowledge of it will allow me to judge, it
appears to possess all the necessary qualities for such a settlement.

"The requisite properties are, salubrity of climate, a good harbor, a
position in the track of steam-navigation, conveniency of position for
ships disabled in typhoons, conveniency of position for our cruisers
during war, and a locality strong and circumscribed by nature, so as
to be readily capable of cheap defence.

"Labuan lies in about 6° of north latitude, and consequently the
average heat will be about 83° of Fahrenheit; the utmost range of
the thermometer will not exceed ten degrees. In short, the year is a
perpetual hot summer. It is, at the same time, well ventilated by both
monsoons; and being near twenty miles from the marshy shores of the
Borneo river, there is little ground to apprehend that it will be found
unhealthy, even if those shores themselves had been ascertained to be
so, which, however, is not the case; for, in proof of their salubrity,
it may be stated, that the town of Borneo is healthy, although it
stands, and has stood for centuries, on the flooded banks of the river;
the houses being built on posts, and chiefly accessible by boat.

"With respect to harbor, a most essential point, I do not perceive
that the island is indented by any bay or inlet that would answer the
purpose of one. [29] The channel, however, which lies between it and
the mainland of Borneo is but seven miles broad, and will probably
constitute a spacious and convenient harbor. The name of the island
itself, which means anchorage, I have no doubt is derived from the
place affording shelter to native shipping, and those probably, in
most cases, fleets of pirate prahus. This channel is again further
restricted by four islets, and these, with four more lying to the
southwest, will afford shelter in the southwest or mild monsoon;
protection is given in the northeast, the severest monsoon, by Labuan
itself: and I may add, that the island is, by four degrees of latitude,
beyond the extreme southern limit of the typhoons of the Chinese Sea.

"In the channel between Labuan and the main, or rather between Labuan
and the islets already mentioned, the soundings on the Admiralty
chart show that vessels drawing as much as eighteen feet water may
anchor within a mile of the shore, and the largest vessels within
a mile and a half; a convenience for shipping which greatly exceeds
that of Singapore. One of the advantages of Labuan will be that it
will prove a port of refuge for shipping disabled in the storms of
the Chinese Seas. Many examples, indeed some of recent occurrence,
might be adduced to show the need there is of such a port.

"Labuan lies nearly in the direct track both of steam and sailing
navigation from India to China, during the northeast, the worst
and severest of the two monsoons; and is as intermediate a position
between Singapore and Hong Kong as can be found, being 700 miles from
the former and 1000 from the latter.

"The insular character and narrow limits of Labuan will make it
easily and cheaply defensible. The extreme length of the island
appears to be about six miles, its greatest breadth about four and a
half, and probably its whole area will not be found to exceed thirty
square miles.

"From the rude tribes of the immediate vicinity no hostile attack is
to be apprehended that would make the present erection of forts or
batteries necessary. No Asiatic enemy is at any time to be feared that
would make such defences requisite. In five-and-twenty years it has
not been found imperative to have recourse to them at Singapore. It
is only in case of war with a naval power that fortifications would be
required; but I am not informed what local advantages Labuan possesses
for their erection. A principal object of such fortifications would
be the defence of the shipping in the harbor from the inroads of an
enemy's cruisers. At one point the soundings, as given in the Admiralty
chart, are stated nine fathoms, within three quarters of a mile of
the shore; and I presume that batteries within this distance would
afford protection to the largest class of merchantmen. In Singapore
Roads no class of shipping above mere native craft can lie nearer than
two miles of the shore; so that in a war with a European naval power,
the merchant shipping there can only be defended by her majesty's navy.

"One of the most striking national advantages to be expected from
the possession of Labuan would consist in its use in defending our
own commerce, and attacking that of opponents, in the event of a
naval war. Between the eastern extremity of the Straits of Malacca
and Hong Kong, a distance of 1700 miles, there is no British harbor,
and no safe and accessible port of refuge; Hong Kong is, indeed,
the only spot within the wide limits of the Chinese Sea for such a
purpose, although our legitimate commercial intercourse within it
extends over a length of 2000 miles. Everywhere else, Manilla and
the newly opened ports of China excepted, our crippled vessels or our
merchantmen pursued by the enemy's cruisers, are met by the exclusion
or extortion of semi-barbarous nations, or in danger of falling into
the power of robbers and savages.

"Labuan fortified, and supposing the Borneon coal to be as productive
and valuable in quality as it is represented, would give Great Britain
in a naval war the entire command of the China Sea. This would be the
result of our possessing or commanding the only available supply of
coal, that of Bengal and Australia excepted, to be found in the wide
limits which extend east of the continents of Europe and America.

"The position of Labuan will render it the most convenient possible
for the suppressing of piracy. The most desperate and active pirates
of the whole Indian Archipelago are the tribes of the Sooloo group
of islands lying close to the north shore of Borneo, and the people
of the north and northeastern coast of Borneo itself; these have
of late years proved extremely troublesome both to the English and
Dutch traders; both nations are bound by the Convention of 1824 to
use their best endeavors for the suppression of piracy, and many
efforts have certainly been made for this purpose, although as yet
without material effect in diminishing the evil.

"From Labuan, these pirates might certainly be intercepted by armed
steamers far more conveniently and cheaply than from any other position
that could be easily pointed out: indeed, the very existence of a
British settlement would tend to the suppression of piracy.

"As a commercial depôt, Labuan would have considerable advantages
by position; the native trade of the vicinity would of course resort
to it, and so would that of the north coast of Borneo, of the Sooloo
Islands, and of a considerable portion of the Spice Islands. Even for
the trade of the Philippines and China, it would have the advantage
over Singapore of a voyage by 700 miles shorter; a matter of most
material consequence to native commerce.

"With all the countries of the neighborhood lying west of Labuan I
presume that a communication across both monsoons might be maintained
throughout the year. This would include a portion of the east coast
of the Malay peninsula, Siam, and part of Cochin China.

"Labuan belongs to that portion of the coast of Borneo which is the
rudest. The Borneons themselves are of the Malay nation, originally
emigrants from Sumatra, and settled here for about six centuries. They
are the most distant from their original seat of all the colonies which
have sprung from this nation. The people from the interior differ from
them in language, manners, and religion, and are divided into tribes
as numerous and as rude as the Americans when first seen by Europeans.

"From such a people we are not to expect any valuable products of art
or manufacture, for a British mercantile depôt. Pepper is, however,
produced in considerable quantity, and the products of the forests
are very various, as bees-wax, gum-benjamin, fine camphor, camphor
oil, esculent swallows' nests, canes and rattans, which used to form
the staple articles of Borneon import into Singapore. The Borneon
territory opposite to Labuan abounds also, I believe, in the palm
which yields sago, and indeed the chief part of the manufactured
article was thirty years ago brought from this country. The Chinese
settlers would, no doubt, as in Singapore and Malacca, establish
factories for its preparation according to the improved processes
which they now practice at those places.

"There may be reason to expect, however, that the timber of the
portion of Borneo referred to may be found of value for ship-building;
for Mr. Dalrymple states that in his time, above seventy years ago,
Chinese junks of 500 tons burden used to be built in the river
of Borneo. As to timber well-suited for boats and house-building,
it is hardly necessary to add that the northwest coast of Borneo,
in common with almost every other part of the Archipelago, contains
a supply amounting to superfluity.

"I may take this opportunity of stating, as evidence of the conveniency
of this portion of Borneo for a commercial intercourse with China,
that down to within the last half century a considerable number of
Chinese junks were engaged in trading regularly with Borneo, and that
trade ceased only when the native government became too bad and weak
to afford it protection. Without the least doubt this trade would
again spring up on the erection of the British flag at Labuan. Not
a single Chinese junk had resorted to the Straits of Malacca before
the establishment of Singapore, and their number is now, of one size
or another, and exclusive of the junks of Siam and Cochin China,
not less than 100.

"From the cultivation of the land I should not be disposed to expect
anything beyond the production of fresh fruits and esculent vegetables,
and when the land is cleared, of grass for pasture. The seas in this
part of the world are prolific in fish of great variety and great
excellence; and the Chinese settlers are found everywhere skillful
and industrious in taking them.

"Some difficulty will, in the beginning, be experienced with respect to
milk, butter, and fresh meat: this was the case at first in Singapore,
but the difficulty has in a good measure been overcome. The countries
of the Archipelago are generally not suited to pasture, and it is
only in a few of them that the ox and buffalo are abundant. The sheep
is so nowhere, and for the most part is wanting altogether; cattle,
therefore, must be imported.

"As to corn, it will unquestionably be found far cheaper to import
than to raise it. Rice will be the chief bread-corn, and will come in
great abundance and cheapness from Siam and Cochin China. No country
within 700 miles of Singapore is abundant in corn, and none is grown
in the island: yet from the first establishment of the settlement
to the present time, corn has been both cheap and abundant, there
has been wonderfully little fluctuation, there are always stocks,
and for many years a considerable exportation. A variety of pulses,
vegetable oil, and culinary salt, will be derived from the same
countries, as is now done in abundance by Singapore.

"The mines of antimony are 300 miles to the southwest of Labuan,
and those of gold on the west and the south coasts; and I am not
aware that any mineral wealth has been discovered in the portion of
Borneo immediately connected with Labuan, except that of coal--far
more important and valuable, indeed, than gold or antimony. The
existence of a coal-field has been traced from Labuan to the islands
of Kayn-arang--which words, in fact, mean coal island--to the island
of Chermin, and from thence to the mainland over a distance of thirty
miles. With respect to the coal of Labuan itself, I find no distinct
statement beyond the simple fact of the existence of the mineral;
but the coal of the two islands in the river, and of the main, is
proved to be--from analysis and trial in steam-navigation--superior
to nearly all the coal which India has hitherto yielded, and equal
to some of our best English coals. This is the more remarkable, as
it is known that most surface-minerals, and especially coals, are
inferior to the portions of the same veins or beds more deep-seated.

"Nearly as early as the British flag is erected, and, at all events,
as soon as it is permanently known to be so, there may be reckoned
upon with certainty a large influx of settlers. The best and most
numerous of these will be the Chinese. They were settled on the Borneo
river when the Borneo government, never very good, or otherwise than
comparatively violent and disorderly, was most endurable.

"Borneo is, of all the great islands of the western portion of the
Archipelago, the nearest to China, and Labuan and its neighborhood the
nearest point of this island. The distance of Hong Kong is about 1000
miles, and that of the island of Hainan, a great place for emigration,
not above 800; distances which to the Chinese junks--fast sailers
before the strong and favorable winds of the monsoons--do not make
voyages exceeding four or five days. The coasts of the provinces
of Canton and Fokien have hitherto been the great hives from which
Chinese emigration has proceeded; and even Fokien is not above 1400
miles from Labuan, a voyage of seven or eight days. Chinese trade
and immigration will come together. The northwest coast of Borneo
produces an unusual supply of those raw articles for which there
is always a demand in the markets of China; and Labuan, it may be
reckoned upon with certainty, will soon become the seat of a larger
trade with China than the river of Borneo ever possessed.

"I by no means anticipate the same amount of rapid advance in
population, commerce, or financial resources for Labuan, that has
distinguished the history of Singapore, a far more centrical position
for general commerce; still I think its prospect of success undoubted;
while it will have some advantages which Singapore cannot, from its
nature, possess. Its coal-mines, and the command of the coal-fields
on the river of Borneo, are the most remarkable of these; and its
superiority as a post-office [30] station necessarily follows. Then
it is far more convenient as a port of refuge; and, as far as our
present knowledge will enable us to judge, infinitely more valuable
for military purposes, more especially for affording protection to the
commerce which passes through the Chinese Sea, amounting at present
to probably not less than 300,000 tons of shipping, carrying cargoes
certainly not under the value of 15,000,000_l_. sterling.

"Labuan ought, like Singapore, to be a free port; and assuredly
will not prosper if it is not. Its revenue should not be derived
from customs, but, as in that settlement, from excise duties:
upon the nature of these, as it is well known, it is unnecessary
to enlarge. They covered during my time, near twenty years ago,
and within five years of the establishment of the settlement, the
whole charges of a small but sufficient garrison (100 Sepoys), and
a moderate but competent civil establishment.

"The military and civil establishments have been greatly increased
of late years; but the revenue, still in its nature the same, has
kept pace with them. During my administration of Singapore, the
municipal charges fell on the general fund; but they are at present
amply provided for from a distinct source, chiefly an assessment
on house-property.

"If the military and civil charges of Labuan are kept within moderate
bounds, I make no doubt but that a similar excise revenue will be
adequate to cover the charges of both, and that in peace at least the
state need not be called on to make any disbursement on its account;
while during a naval war, if the state make any expenditure, it will
be fully compensated by the additional security which the settlement
will afford to British commerce, and the annoyance it will cause to
the enemy.

"As to the disposal of the land, always a difficult question in a new
and unoccupied colony, the result of my own inquiries and personal
experience lead me to offer it as my decided conviction that the most
expedient plan--that which is least troublesome to the government,
most satisfactory to the settler, and ultimately most conducive to the
public prosperity--is to dispose of it for a term of years, that is,
on long leases of 1000 years, or virtually in perpetuity; the object in
this case of adopting the leasehold tenure being, by making the land
a chattel interest, to get rid of the difficulties in the matter of
inheritance and transfer, which, under the administration of English
law, and in reference more particularly to the Asiatic people who
will be the principal landowners, are incident to real property. Town
allotments might be sold subject to a considerable quit-rent, but
allotments in the country for one entirely nominal. Those of the
latter description should be small, proportionate with the extent of
the island, and the time and difficulty required in such a climate
to clear the land, now overgrown for the most part with a stupendous
forest of evergreen trees, and the wood of which is too abundant to be
of any value, certainly for the most part not worth the land-carriage
of a couple of furlongs.

"A charter for the administration of justice should be as nearly as
possible contemporaneous with the cession. Great inconvenience has
resulted in all our Eastern settlements of the same nature with that
speculated on at Labuan, from the want of all legal provision for
the administration of justice; and remembering this, it ought to be
guarded against in the case of Labuan.

"Whether in preparing for the establishment of a British settlement
on the coast of Borneo, or in actually making one, her majesty's
ministers, I am satisfied, will advert to the merits and peculiar
qualifications of Mr. Brooke. That gentleman is unknown to me,
except by his acts and writings; but, judging by these, I consider
him as possessing all the qualities which have distinguished the
successful founders of new colonies; intrepidity, firmness, and
enthusiasm, with the art of governing and leading the masses. He
possesses some, moreover, which have not always belonged to such men,
however otherwise distinguished; a knowledge of the language, manners,
customs, and institutions of the natives by whom the colony is to be
surrounded; with benevolence and an independent fortune, things still
more unusual with the projectors of colonies. Toward the formation of
a new colony, indeed, the available services of such a man, presuming
they are available, may be considered a piece of good fortune."







CONCLUDING OBSERVATIONS.


[First Edition.]


The recent proceedings of Government in following up the impression
made upon Malay piracy, as related in these pages; the appointment
of Mr. Brooke as British Agent in Borneo, armed with the moral and
physical power of his country; the cession of the island of Labuan to
the British crown; and the great advance already made by the English
ruler of Sarawak, in laying broad foundations for native prosperity,
while extending general security and commerce; all combine to add an
interest to the early individual steps which have led to measures of
so much national consequence.

Deeply as I felt the influence of that individual on the condition of
Borneo, and the Malayan Archipelago generally, while employed there,
and much as I anticipated from his energetic character, extraordinary
exertions, and enlarged views for the future, I confess that my
expectations have been greatly increased by the progress of events
since that period. It needed nothing to confirm my faith in the
results that were sure to follow from his enlightened acts--from
his prudence and humanity in the treatment of his Dyak subjects,
and the neighboring and interior independent tribes--from his firm
resistance to the Malay tyranny exercised upon the aborigines,
and his punishment of Malay aggression, wherever perpetrated. But
when I see these elements of good wisely seconded by the highest
authorities of England, I cannot but look for the consummation of
every benefit desired, much more rapidly and effectively than if left
to the efforts of a private person, even though that person were a
Brooke! If the appearance of H.M.S. Dido on the coast and at Sarawak
produced a salutary effect upon all our relations with the inhabitants,
it may well be presumed that the mission of Captain Bethune, and the
expedition under Rear-Admiral Sir Thomas Cochrane, must have greatly
improved and extended that wholesome state of affairs. Indeed, it is
evident, by the complete success which attended Mr. Brooke's official
visit to Borneo Proper in H.M.S. Driver, after receiving dispatches
from Lord Aberdeen appointing him British agent in the island,
carried out by Captain Bethune in November, 1844, that the presence
of a British force in those seas was alone necessary to enable him
to suppress piracy, and perfect his plans for the establishment of
a native government which should not oppress the country, and which
should cultivate the most friendly intercourse with us. Thus we find
the piratical Pangeran Usop put down, and Muda Hassim exercising the
sovereign power in the name of his imbecile nephew, who still retains
the title of sultan. The principal chiefs, and men distinguished by
talent and some acquaintance with foreign affairs, are now on our side;
and it only requires to support them in order that civilization may
rapidly spread over the land, and Borneo become again, as it was one
or two centuries ago, the abode of an industrious, rich, pacific,
and mercantile people, interchanging products with all the trading
nations of the world, and conferring and reaping those blessings
which follow in the train of just and honorable trade wheresoever its
enterprising spirit leads in the pursuit of honest gain. As the vain
search for the philosopher's stone conducted to many a useful and
valuable discovery, so may we be assured that the real seeking for
gold through the profitable medium of commerce has been, is, and will
be the grand source of filling the earth with comfort and happiness.

Among the numerous visions of this kind which open to our sense while
reflecting on the new prospects of this vast island--so little known,
yet known to possess almost unbounded means to invite and return
commercial activity--is the contemplation of the field it presents
to missionary labors. When we read Mr. Brooke's description of the
aboriginal Dyak, and observe what he has himself done in one locality
within the space of four or five short years, what may we not expect
to be accomplished by the zeal of Christian missions judiciously
directed to reclaim such a people from utter barbarism, and induce
them to become true members of a faith which teaches forbearance and
charity between man and man, and inculcates, with the love and hope
of heaven, an abhorrence of despotism and blood, and a disposition to
live in good-will and peace with all our fellow-creatures? There are
here no prejudices of caste, as in India, to impede the missionaries'
progress. Mr. Brooke has pointed out what may be effected in this way,
and we have only to say amen to his prayer, with an earnest aspiration
that it may be speedily fulfilled.

Having enjoyed the pleasure of communicating to the public this
satisfactory description of the _status quo_ in Borneo to the latest
period (September, 1845), I venture to congratulate them upon it. Thus
far all is well and as it should be, and promising the happiest issue;
but I hope I may not be charged with presumption in offering an opinion
from my experience in this quarter, and respectfully suggesting that,
in addition to a permanent British settlement at Labuan, it will be
absolutely necessary to proceed with the suppression of Malay piracy,
by steadily acting against every pirate-hold. Without a continued and
determined series of operations of this sort, it is my conviction that
even the most sanguinary and fatal onslaughts will achieve nothing
beyond a present and temporary good. The impression on the native mind
is not sufficiently lasting: their old impulses and habits return
with fresh force; they forget their heavy retribution; and in two
or three years the memory of them is almost entirely effaced. Till
piracy be completely suppressed there must be no relaxation; and
well worth the perseverance is the end in view, the welfare of one
of the richest and most improvable portions of the globe, and the
incalculable extension of the blessings of Britain's prosperous
commerce and humanizing dominion.

In looking forward to the certain realization of these prospects,
I may mention the important circumstance of the discovery of coal in
abundance for the purposes of steam navigation. The surveys already
made afford assurances of this fact, and the requisite arrangements
are in progress for opening and working the mines. It is generally
known that the Dutch assert very wide pretensions to colonies
and monopolies in those seas. A treaty has been concluded between
the Netherlands government and England; and although that important
document contains no reference whatever to Borneo, it is most desirable
for the general extension of commerce that no national jealousies, no
ideas of conflicting interests, no encroaching and ambitious projects,
may be allowed to interfere with or prevent the beneficial progress
of this important region. With such a man as Mr. Brooke to advise the
course most becoming, disinterested, and humane for the British empire
to pursue, it is not too much to say that, if the well-being of these
races of our fellow-creatures is defeated or postponed, the crime will
not lie at our door. The sacrifices we have made to extinguish slavery
throughout the world are a sure and unquestionable pledge that we will
do our utmost to extirpate the horrid traffic in those parts, and to
uproot the system of piracy that feeds it. It is the bounden duty of
both Holland and Great Britain to unite cordially in this righteous
cause. The cry of nature is addressed to them; and if rejected, as
surely as there is justice and mercy in the Providence which overrules
the fate of nations, no blessing will prosper them, but wealth, and
dominion, and happiness will pass away from them forever. Mr. Brooke
invokes their coöperation, and his noble appeal cannot be withstood.

The central position of Labuan is truly remarkable. That island is
distant from


                Hong Kong   1009 miles.
                Singapore    707   "
                Siam         984   "
                Manilla      650   "


On the other hand, Mr. Brooke's territory of Sarawak is distant from


                Singapore    427 miles.
                Labuan       304   "
                Hong Kong   1199   "


How direct and central are these valuable possessions for the universal
trade of the East!







POSTSCRIPT TO THE SECOND EDITION.


June 6th, 1846.

In the foregoing remarks with which I closed the first edition of this
book, I ventured to congratulate the public on the cheerful aspect
of affairs in Borneo at the latest period of which accounts had then
reached me. I could then say, with a joyful heart, "Thus far all
is well and as it should be, and promising the happiest issue." But
now I must write in a different strain. The mischiefs I pointed out
above as likely to ensue from a desultory and intermittent mode of
dealing with Malay piracy have revealed themselves even sooner and in
a more formidable manner than I had anticipated. The weak and covetous
sultan of Borneo has, with more than the usual fickleness of Asiatics,
already forgotten the lessons we gave him and the engagements he
solemnly and voluntarily contracted with us. Mr. Brooke's faithful
friends, Muda Hassim and the Pangeran Budrudeen, with numbers of
their families and retainers, have been basely murdered by their
treacherous kinsman, because of their attachment to the English
and their unswerving determination to put down piracy; and what is
worst of all, Mr. Brooke's arch-enemy, the subtle and indefatigable
villain Macota, the man whose accursed head was thrice saved by my
too-generous friend, has now returned triumphantly to the scene
of his former crimes, and is commissioned by the sultan to take
Mr. Brooke's life by poison, or by any other of those treacherous arts
in which there is no more consummate adept than Macota. I could trust
securely to Mr. Brooke's gallantry and skill for the protection of
his life against the attacks of open foes; and my only fears arise
when I reflect on his utter insensibility to danger, and think how
the admirable qualities of his own guileless, confiding nature may
facilitate the designs of his enemies.

H.M.S. Hazard, from Hong Kong, having touched at Bruni about the
end of March last, was boarded by a native, who gave the captain
such information as induced him to sail with all speed for Sarawak;
and there this man made the following deposition:--




    Japper, a native of Bruni, deposes that he was sent aboard
    H.M.S. Hazard by the Pangeran Muda Mahomed, to warn the captain
    against treachery, and to communicate the following details to
    Mr. Brooke at Sarawak.

    The Rajah Muda Hassim was raised by the sultan to the title of
    Sultan Muda (or young sultan), and, together with his brothers and
    followers, was living in security, when he was attacked by orders
    of the sultan at night, and together with thirteen of his family,
    killed in different places. Four brothers, viz. Pangeran Muda
    Mahomed, Pangeran Abdul Kader, Pangeran Abdulraman, and Pangeran
    Mesahat, together with several young children of the Rajah Muda
    Hassim, alone survive. The deponent Japper was in attendance on
    his lord, the Pangeran Budrudeen, at the time of the attack. The
    Pangeran, though surprised by his enemies, fought for some time,
    and when desperately wounded, retired outside his house with his
    sister and another woman named Koor Salem. The deponent was there
    and was wounded, as were both the women. The Pangeran Budrudeen
    ordered deponent to open a keg or cask of gunpowder, which he did;
    and the last thing his lord did was to take his ring from his
    finger and desire the deponent to carry it to Mr. Brooke; to bid
    Mr. Brooke not to forget him, and not to forget to lay his case
    before the Queen of England. The deponent then quitted his lord,
    who was with the two women, and immediately after his lord fired
    the powder, and the three were blown up. The deponent escaped
    with difficulty; and a few days afterward, the ring intrusted
    to his charge, was taken from him by the sultan. The sultan,
    and those with him, killed the Rajah Muda Hassim and his family,
    because he was the friend of the English and wanted to suppress
    piracy. The sultan has now built forts and defied the English. He
    talked openly of cutting out any vessel that arrived; and two
    Pangerans went down, bearing the flag of the Rajah Muda Hassim,
    to look at the vessel, and to kill the captain if they could get
    him ashore. The deponent had great difficulty in getting to the
    ship; and should his flight be discovered, he considers the lives
    of the surviving portion of the Rajah Muda Hassim's family will be
    in danger. The deponent did what he was ordered, and what his late
    lord, the Pangeran Budrudeen, desired him to do. The sultan had
    a man ready to send, named Nakoda Kolala, to Kaluka, to request
    that Pangeran Macota would kill Mr. Brooke by treachery or poison.


    (_Signed_)
    J. Brooke.




Having put Mr. Brooke on his guard, the Hazard proceeded to Singapore,
whence the H.E.I.C. war-steamer Phlegethon would be immediately
dispatched to Sarawak.


H h





Suggestions for Accelerating the Communication Between Great Britain
and China.

------------------------+-----------------+---------+-------+---------+---------+---------+-------------------
                        |                 |         |Average|Interval |Interval |         |
                        |                 |         | Rate  | under   |   at    |  Total  |
  Proposed Route from   |                 |         |  per  | Weigh.  | Anchor. |Interval.|
  Hong Kong to London,  |                 |Distance,| Hour, |----+----+----+----+----+----|
    and vice versâ.     |     Course.     | Miles.  | Miles.| D  | h  | D  | h  | D  | h  |      Duties at Anchor.
------------------------+-----------------+---------+-------+----+----+----+----+----+--- +----------------
Hong Kong to Pulo Labuan| S.  2°18'E.     |  1009   |   7   |  6 | -- |  1 | 12 |  7 | 12 |To receive Coal.[A]
Pulo Labuan to Singapore| S. 69 23 W.     |   707   |  --   |  4 |  6 | -- | 12 |  4 | 18 |{To receive Coal, land and
                        |                 |         |       |    |    |    |    |    |    |{receive Mails.
Singapore to Malacca    |{S. 64 48 W. 19} |   122   |  --   | -- | 18 | -- |  6 |  1 | -- |To land and receive Mails.
                        |{N. 51 41 W. 103}|         |       |    |    |    |    |    |    |
Malacca to Pinang       | N. 30 37 W.     |   222   |  --   |  1 |  8 | -- | 16 |  2 | -- |(To receive Coal, land and
                        |                 |         |       |    |    |    |    |    |    | receive Mails.
Pinang to Ceylon [B]    |{N. 82 24 W. 303}|  1219   |  --   |  7 |  6 |  2 | 12 |  8 | 18 |    Ditto       Ditto
                        |{S. 80 45 W. 916)|         |  --   |    |    |    |    |    |    |
                        |-----------------+---------+-------+----+----+----+----+----+----+-------------------
Ceylon to Aden         {|As now performed by the Peninsular and Oriental Steam }| 11 | -- |
                       {|  Navigation Co., detention of 2 days included        }|    |    |
Aden to Suez            |          Ditto           Ditto                        |  8 | -- |
Suez to Alexandria      |          Ditto                  all stoppages included|  3 | -- |
Alexandria to Malta     |          Ditto                                Ditto   |  4 | -- |
Malta to Marseilles     |As now performed by H.M. Post-Office Packets,  ditto   |  4 | -- |
Marseilles to London    |      Ditto      by regular course of Post     ditto   |  5 | -- |
                                                                                |----+----|
Total Interval from Hong Kong to London, and vice versâ, by the proposed        |    |    |
  Route.                                                                   Days | 59 | -- |
Average interval of transmission of China Correspondance, viâ Calcutta and     }|    |    |
  Bombay, during the last Twenty Overland Mails, viz. from 10th October, 1841, }|    |    |
  to 6th May, 1843                                                             }| 89 | -- |
                                                                                |----+----|
      Difference of time in favor of proposed Route                        Days | 30 |    |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------+----+----+-------------------

KEY:  D - Days.
      h - Hours.



Mem.--I have adopted an average rate of seven miles per hour as a fair
estimate of the speed well-appointed Steam Vessels, of moderate size
and power, will be enabled to accomplish and maintain, throughout
the proposed Route, at all seasons of the year; for, during the
whole distance from Pinang to Aden, and _vice versâ_, neither
monsoon, from the course steered, becomes at any period a directly
adverse wind, an advantage which the route hitherto observed does
not possess. Assuming that the Hon. East India Company continue the
management of the Bombay line, and that the Peninsular and Oriental
Steam Navigation Company are encouraged to render their operations
more comprehensive, by the establishment of branch steamers between
Ceylon and Singapore, to which latter port her majesty's steam
vessels on the China station could convey the mails from Hong Kong,
this all-important object might, without difficulty, be attained. The
advantages to the Straits settlements, consequent on the adoption of
improved arrangements, require no comment; and the _practicability_
of effecting a very considerable acceleration of the communication
with China is evident from the simple fact that the average interval
which has occurred in the transmission of letters from China, by the
last twenty Overland Mails (irrespective of the unfortunate July mail
from Bombay), exceeds the period occasionally occupied by fast-sailing
ships, in accomplishing the voyage viâ the Cape of Good Hope.


London, _14th Sept. 1843._ [33]
HENRY WISE,

13, Austin Friars.

P.S.--_Oct. 9th._ The arrival at Suez on the 16th ult. of the
H.C.S. Akbar, in _forty-six_ days from Hong Kong, after accomplishing
the passage down the China seas, against the S.W. monsoon--unassisted
also by any previously arranged facilities for coaling, exchange of
steamers at Aden, and other manifest advantages requisite for the
proper execution of this important service, confirms the correctness
of my estimate for performing the voyage from Hong Kong to Suez,
or _vice versâ_, viz. _forty-three_ days, including stoppages.






APPENDIX.



No. I.

NATURAL HISTORY.


_Mr. Brooke's Report on the Mias._ (From the Transactions of the
Zoological Society.)

JAMES BROOKE, Esq., to Mr. WATERHOUSE.


My dear Sir:--Singapore, 25th March, 1841.

I am happy to announce the departure of five live ourang-outangs by
the ship Martin Luther, Captain Swan; and I trust they will reach you
alive. In case they die, I have directed Captain Swan to put them into
spirits, that you may still have an opportunity of seeing them. The
whole of the five are from Borneo: one large female adult from Sambas;
two, with slight cheek-callosities, from Pontiana; a small male,
without any sign of callosities, from Pontiana likewise; and the
smallest of all, a very young male with callosities, from Sadung. I
will shortly forward a fine collection of skulls and skeletons from
the northwest coast of Borneo, either shot by myself or brought by
the natives; and I beg you will do me the favor to present the live
ourangs and this collection to the Zoological Society. I have made
many inquiries and gained some information regarding these animals,
and I can, beyond a doubt, prove the existence of two, if not three,
distinct species in Borneo.

First, I will re-state the native account: secondly, give you my own
observations; and thirdly, enter into a brief detail of the specimens
hereafter to be forwarded.

1st. The natives of the northwest coast of Borneo are all positive as
to the existence of two distinct species, which I formerly gave you
by the names of the _Mias pappan_ and _Mias rombi_; but I have since
received information from a few natives of intelligence that there are
three sorts, and what is vulgarly called the Mias rombi is in reality
the _Mias kassar_, the rombi being a distinct and third species. The
Mias pappan is the _Simia Wurmbii_ of Mr. Owen, having callosities
on the sides of the face: the natives treat with derision the idea
of the Mias kassar, or _Simia morio_, being the female of the Mias
pappan or Simia Wurmbii; and I consider the fact can be established
so clearly that I will not trouble you with their statements: both
Malays and Dyaks are positive that the female of the Mias pappan has
cheek-callosities the same as the male; and if on inquiry it prove
to be so, the existence of three distinct species in Borneo will
be established. The existence of the Mias rombi is vouched by a few
natives only, but they were men of intelligence, and well acquainted
with the animals in the wild state. They represent the Mias rombi to
be as tall as the pappan, or even taller, but not so stout, with longer
hair, a smaller face, and no callosities either on the male or female;
and they always insisted that it was not the female of the pappan.

The Mias kassar or Simia morio is of the same color as the Mias pappan,
but altogether smaller, and devoid of callosities either on the male
or female adults.

By the native statements, therefore, we find three distinct species,
viz. the Mias pappan or Simia Wurmbii, the Mias kassar or Simia morio,
and the Mias rombi, which is either the _Simia Abelii_, or a fourth
species. The existence of the Sumatran ourang in Borneo is by no
means impossible; and I have already compared so many of the native
statements, that I place more confidence in them than I did formerly,
more especially as their account is in a great measure borne out by
the skulls in my possession. I had an opportunity of seeing the Mias
pappan and the Mias kassar in their native woods, and killing one of
the former and several of the latter species. The distribution of these
animals is worthy of notice, as they are found both at Pontiana and
Sambas in considerable numbers, and at Sadung on the northwest coast,
but are unknown in the intermediate country which includes the rivers
of Sarawak and Samarahan. I confess myself at a loss to account for
their absence on the Sarawak and Samarahan rivers, which abound with
fruit, and have forests similar and contiguous to the Sadung, Linga,
and other rivers. The distance from Samarahan to Sadung does not
exceed twenty-five miles; and though pretty abundant on the latter,
they are unknown on the former river. From Sadung, proceeding to the
northward and eastward, they are found for about 100 miles, but beyond
that distance do not inhabit the forests. The Mias pappan and Mias
kassar inhabit the same woods, but I never met them on the same day;
both species, according to the natives, are equally common, but from
my own experience the Mias kassar is the most plentiful. The Mias
rombi is represented as unfrequent and rarely to be met with. The
pappan is justly named _Satyrus_, from the ugly face and disgusting
callosities. The adult male I killed was seated lazily on a tree, and
when approached only took the trouble to interpose the trunk between
us, peeping at me, and dodging as I dodged. I hit him on the wrist,
and he was afterward dispatched. I send you his proportions, enormous
relative to his height; and until I came to actual measurement my
impression was that he was nearly six feet in stature. The following
is an extract from my journal relating to him, noted down directly
after he was killed:--

"Great was our triumph as we gazed on the huge animal dead at our feet,
and proud were we of having shot the first ourang we had seen, and
shot him in his native woods, in a Borneo forest, hitherto untrodden by
European feet. The animal was adult, having four incisors, two canines,
and ten molars in each jaw; but by his general appearance he was not
old. We were struck by the length of his arms, the enormous neck,
and the expanse of face, which altogether gave the impression of great
height, whereas it was only great power. The hair was long, reddish,
and thin; the face remarkably broad and fleshy, and on each side, in
the place of a man's whiskers, were the callosities or rather fleshy
protuberances, which I was so desirous to see, and which were nearly
two inches in thickness. The ears were small and well shaped, the nose
quite flat, mouth prominent, lips thick, teeth large and discolored,
eyes small and roundish, face and hands black, the latter being very
powerful. The following are the dimensions:


                                                        ft. in.
Height from head to heel                                 4   1
Length of foot                                           1   0
Ditto hand                                               0  10 1/2
Length of arm from shoulder-blade to finger-end          3   5 3/4
Shoulder-blade to elbow                                  1   6
Elbow to wrist                                           1   1 1/2
Hip to heel                                              1   9
Head to os coccygia                                      2   5 1/2
Across the shoulders                                     1   5 1/2
Circumference of neck                                    2   4
Ditto below the ribs                                     3   3 1/4
Ditto under the arms                                     3   0
From forehead to chin                                    0   9 3/4
Across the face, below the eyes, including callosities   1   1
From ear to ear across the top of the head               0   9 1/2
From ear to ear behind the head                          0   9 3/4


The natives asserted the animal to be a small one; but I am skeptical
of their ever attaining the growth of a tall man, though I bear in mind
that full-grown animals will probably differ as much in height as man."

Some days after this, and about thirty miles distant, I was fortunate
enough to kill two adult females (one with her young), and a male
nearly adult, all the Mias kassar. The young male was not measured,
owing to my having waded up to my neck in pursuit of him, and thereby
destroyed my paper and lost my measure; but he certainly did not exceed
3 feet, while the two females were about 3 ft. 1 in. and 3 ft. 2 in. in
height. The male was just cutting his two posterior molars: the color
of all resembled that of the Mias pappan, but the difference between
the two animals was apparent even to our seamen. The kassar has no
callosities either on the male or female, whereas the young pappans
dispatched by the Martin Luther (one of them not a year old, with two
first molars) show them prominently. The great difference between the
kassar and the pappan in size would prove at once the distinction of
the two species; the kassar being a small, slight animal, by no means
formidable in his appearance, with hands and feet proportioned to the
body, and they do not approach the gigantic extremities of the pappan
either in size or power; and, in short, a moderately strong man would
readily overpower one, when he would not stand the shadow of a chance
with the pappan. Beside these decisive differences may be mentioned
the appearance of the face, which in the Mias kassar is more prominent
in the lower part, and the eyes exteriorly larger, in proportion to
the size of the animal, than in the pappan. The color of the skin in
the adult pappan is black, while the kassar, in his face and hands,
has the dirty color common to the young of both species. If further
evidence was wanted, the skulls will fully prove the distinction of
species; for the skulls of two adult animals compared will show a
difference in size alone which must preclude all supposition of their
being one species. Mr. Owen's remarks are, however, so conclusive,
that I need not dwell on this point; and with a suite of skulls,
male and female, from the adult to the infant, of the Mias kassar,
which I shall have the pleasure to forward, there can remain, I should
think, little further room for discussion. I may mention, however,
that two young animals I had in my possession alive, one a kassar,
the other a pappan, fully bore out these remarks by their proportionate
size. The pappan, with two molars, showed the callosities distinctly,
and was as tall and far stouter than the kassar with three molars,
while the kassar had no vestige of the callosities. Their mode of
progression likewise was different, as the kassar doubled his fists
and dragged his hind quarters after him, while the pappan supported
himself on the open hands sideways placed on the ground, and moved one
leg before the other in the erect sitting attitude; but this was only
observed in the two young ones, and cannot be considered as certainly
applicable to all.

On the habits of the ourangs, as far as I have been able to observe
them, I may remark, that they are as dull and as slothful as can
well be conceived, and on no occasion when pursuing them did they
move so fast as to preclude my keeping pace with them easily through
a moderately clear forest; and even when obstructions below (such
as wading up to the neck) allowed them to get way some distance,
they were sure to stop and allow us to come up. I never observed the
slightest attempt at defence; and the wood, which sometimes rattled
about our ears, was broken by their weight, and not thrown, as some
persons represent. If pushed to extremity, however, the pappan could
not be otherwise than formidable; and one unfortunate man, who with a
party was trying to catch a large one alive, lost two of his fingers,
beside being severely bitten on the face, while the animal finally
beat off his pursuers and escaped. When they wish to catch an adult,
they cut down a circle of trees round the one on which he is seated,
and then fell that also, and close before he can recover himself,
and endeavor to bind him.

In a small work entitled "The Menageries," published in 1838, there
is a good account of the Borneon ourang, with a brief extract from
Mr. Owen's valuable paper on the Simia morio; but, after dwelling on
the lazy and apathetic disposition of the animal, it states in the same
page that they can make their way amid the branches of the trees with
surprising agility; whereas they are the slowest and least active of
all the monkey tribe, and their motions are surprisingly awkward and
uncouth. The natives on the northwest coast entertain no dread, and
always represent the ourangs as harmless and inoffensive animals; and
from what I saw, they would never attack a man unless brought to the
ground. The rude hut which they are stated to build in the trees would
be more properly called a seat or nest, for it has no roof or cover
of any sort. The facility with which they form this seat is curious,
and I had an opportunity of seeing a wounded female weave the branches
together, and seat herself within a minute; she afterward received
our fire without moving, and expired in her lofty abode, whence it
cost us much trouble to dislodge her. I have seen some individuals
with nails on the posterior thumbs, but generally speaking, they are
devoid of them: of the five animals sent home, two have the nails,
and three are without them; one has the nail well formed, and in the
other it is merely rudimentary. The length of my letter precludes my
dwelling on many particulars which, as I have not seen the recent
publications on the subject, might be mere repetitions; and I will
only mention, as briefly as I can, the skulls of these animals in my
possession. From my late sad experience I am induced to this, that
some brief record may be preserved from shipwreck. These skulls may
be divided into three distinct sorts. The first presents two ridges,
one rising from each frontal bone, which, joining on the top of the
head, form an elevated crest, which runs backward to the cerebral
portion of the skull.

The second variety is the Simia morio; and nothing need be added to
Mr. Owen's account, save that it presents no ridge whatever beyond the
frontal part of the head. No. 9 in the collection is the skull of an
adult male: No. 2 the male, nearly adult, killed by myself: Nos. 11
and 3 adult females, killed by myself: No. 12 a young male, with three
molars, killed by myself: No. 21 a young male, died aboard, with three
molars: No. 19, young male, died aboard, with two molars. There are
many other skulls of the Simia morio which exactly coincide with this
suite, and this suite so remarkably coincides through the different
stages of age, one with another, that no doubt can exist of the
Simia morio being a distinct species. The different character of the
skull, its small size and small teeth, put the matter beyond doubt,
and completely establish Mr. Owen's acute and triumphant argument,
drawn from a single specimen.

The third distinction of the skulls is, that the ridges rising from the
frontal bones do not meet, but converge toward the top of the head,
and again diverge toward the posterior portion of the skull. These
ridges are less elevated than in the first-mentioned skulls, but the
size of the adult skulls is equal, and both present specimens of aged
animals. For a long time I was inclined to think the skulls with the
double ridge were the females of the animals with the single and more
prominent ridge; but No. 1 (already described as killed by myself)
will show that the double ridge belongs to an adult and not young
male animal, and that it belongs to the Simia Wurmbii with the huge
callosities. The distinction therefore cannot be a distinction of
sex, unless we suppose the skulls with the greater development of
the single ridge to belong to the female, which is improbable in the
highest degree. The skulls with the double and less elevated ridges
belong, as proved by No. 1, to the Simia Wurmbii; and I am of opinion
the single and higher ridge must be referred to another and distinct
species, unless we can account for this difference on the score of
age. This, I conceive, will be found impossible, as Nos. 7 and 20
are specimens similar to No. 1, with the double and less elevated
ridges decidedly old, and Nos. 4 and 5 are specimens of the single
high ridge, likewise decidedly old.

These three characters in the skulls coincide with the native
statements of there being three distinct species in Borneo, and this
third Borneon species may probably be found to be the Simia Abelii, or
Sumatran ourang. This probability is strengthened by the adult female
on her way home: her color is dark brown, with black face and hands;
and in color of hair, contour, and expression, she differs from the
male ourangs with the callosities to a degree that makes me doubt her
being the female of the same species. I offer you these remarks for
fear of accident; but should the specimens, living and dead, arrive
in safety, they will give a fresh impetus to the inquiry, and on my
next return to Borneo I shall, in all probability, be able to set
the question at rest, whether there be two or three species in that
country. Believe me, my dear sir, with best wishes, to remain,


Yours very truly, J. Brooke.


Borneo, like Celebes, teems with Natural History unknown to European
science; and Mr. Brooke has sent some remarkable specimens to England,
though his own large collection was, unfortunately, wrecked on its
voyage homeward. Every arrival, however, is now adding to the stores
we already possess. The British Museum has been much enriched, even
within the last year, with rare specimens of zoology and botany; and
at the Entomological Society there have been exhibited and described
many curious insects hitherto strange and unclassified.





No. II.

PHILOLOGY.


It was intended in this work to convey to the studious in
philology,--upon which science, rationally investigated, so
much depends on our ability to ascertain the origin and trace the
earliest relations of mankind,--as copious a vocabulary of the Dyak
language, with definitions of meaning and cognate references, as
might be considered a useful contribution to that important branch
of learning. But various considerations have induced us to forego
the design; and not the least of them has been, not the difficulty,
but the impossibility of reducing the whole collection to a system,
or of laying down any certain rule of orthography in this Oriental
confusion. Nearly all the vowels, for example, have been found of
equal value; and as they have but one general Malay name, so it
happens that (for instance) the consonants _b d_might be pronounced
with the intervening sound, _bad_, _bed_, _bid_, _bod_, _bud_, and
sundry variations beside, unknown to the English tongue. This will in a
great degree account for the universally vexatious, because puzzling,
spelling, inflections, and pronunciation of Eastern names, which
is so injurious to the literature and knowledge of those countries
among Europeans.

The vowel-sounds adopted are:

    _a_         like              _a_ in _father_.
    _e_           "               _a_ in _fan_.
    _i_           "               Italian _i_, or _ee_ in _thee_.
    _i_           "               _i_ in _pin_.
    _o_           "               _o_ in _spoke_.
    _u_           "               _oo_ in _cool_.
    _u_           "               u in run.
    _y_         occasionally like _i_.
    _ow_ (_ou_) like              _ow_ in _cow_.


The final _k_ in Malayan is frequently mute: thus Dyak is pronounced
Dyaa, with the slightest possible aspiration.

_gn_ is a liquid sound.

We add an alphabetical list of some of the words which have occurred
in the preceding pages.


_Arafuras_, or _Haraforas_, natives of Papua.

_Balanian_, wild tribes in Borneo.

_Bandar_, or _Bandhara_, treasurer, high steward, high officer
of state.

_Basaya_, tribes in the interior of Borneo Proper, locating near and
resembling the Murut.

_Battara,_ one of the Dyak names of God (the Hindu _Avatara_).

_Borneo_, the island of, written "Bruni" by the inhabitants.

_Borneo Proper,_ the northern and northwestern part of the island;
an independent Malay state.

_Borneons_, the Malay inhabitants of Borneo Proper.

_Bruni_, the native name for Borneo.

_Bugis_, natives of Celebes.

_Bulan_, the Moon, a poetical title of honor to a pirate-chief.

_Campong_, a native village, or town.

_Datu_, a cape or point of land to the northwest of the river
Banjamassim.

_Datus_, strictly, native chiefs, heads of tribes.

_Dusun,_ agricultural villagers on the northern extremity of Borneo.

_Dyaks_; or Dyak, aborigines of Borneo, and generally pronounced Dyah.

_Dyak Darrat,_ Land Dyaks.

_Dyak Laut,_ Sea Dyaks.

_Gantong_, a Malay measure for rice.

_Gunong_, a mountain.

_Hadji_, a Mahomedan who has made a pilgrimage to Mecca.

_Haraforas_, or _Arafuras_, natives of Papua.

_Idaans_ [Kadiens], Borneon tribes, and the name generally given to
most of the varieties of the Indian Archipelago.

_Illanuns_ or _Lanuns_, pirates inhabiting the small cluster of
islands between Borneo and Magindano.

_Jovata_, a Dyak name of God, of Hindu origin.

_Kadiens_, Borneon tribes, Mahomedans, the Idaan of preceding voyagers
and writers. See _Idaans_.

_Kalamantan_, an original name of Borneo.

_Kanowit_, wild tribes in Borneo.

_Kaya_, a title of authority, Orang Kaya de Gadong, chief man of
Gadong.

_Kayans_, the most powerful and warlike people of Borneo, living
inland.

_Kuching_, the former name of the town of Sarawak.

_Lubuan_, the island off Borneo river, ceded by the sultan to the
British crown.

_Lelas_, guns.

_Magindano_, an island off the northeast of Borneo, the natives of
which are pirates.

_Makassar_, the straits of, usually written Macassar, but more
accurately Mangkassar.

_Malays_, settled on the Malayan peninsula, coasts of Borneo, &c. &c.,
a race of seafaring character, often piratical, and conquerors of
various native tribes in the Indian Archipelago.

_Malukus_, pirates from a bay in Gillolo, whose country is in the
possession of the Dutch.

_Marundum_, an island off Borneo.

_Matari_, or _Mata-hari_(the eye of day), the Sun, a poetical title
of honor to a pirate-chief.

_Mias Rombi_ and _M. Pappan_, two species of ourang-outang, determined
by Mr. Brooke.

_Millanows_, a tribe resembling the Kayans, living near the river Meri,
river Bentulu, tolerably civilized, and fairer than the Malays.

_Minkokas_, a wild tribe near the Bay of Boni.

_Morotaba_ river, one of the mouths of the Sarawak.

_Montrado_, a very large and populous Chinese settlement near Point
Data.

_Murut_, inhabitants of the interior of Borneo Proper.

_Natunas_, islands off Borneo.

_Ondong-ondong_, the written law of Borneo.

_Orang_, a man.

_Orang outang_, a wild man.

_Pangeran_, or _Pangiran_, the title of a high Malay authority.

_Panglima_, the head warrior of a Dyak tribe.

_Patingi_, or _Patingus_, a high local officer.

_Patobong_, the name of the ranjows and sudas, defences in war.

_Patakan Dyaks_, said by the Malays to be cannibals.

_Pontiana_, one of the finest rivers in Borneo; also the name of
natives on its banks. The Dutch have a settlement on this river.

_Ranjows_, bamboo-spikes stuck in the ground to wound the feet of
attacking enemies, or concealed in pits to wound or destroy them.

_Rhio_, a Malay settlement, under Dutch control.

_Sadung_, a river adjoining the Sarawak.

_Sakarra_, a Dyak god, residing in the Pleiades.

_Sakarran_, a river like the Sarebus (which see), with a similar
native population on its banks.

_Satigi_, a wooden spear, or dart.

_Sampan_, a small prahu.

_Sarebus_, a river flowing into the deep bay between Tanjong Sipang
and Tanjong Sirak.

_Sarebus_, powerful Dyak tribes and pirates, located on the above,
and other rivers flowing into the bay. They have thrown off the Malay
yoke, and plunder as far as Celebes.

_Seriff_, or _Sheriff_, a high Malay title, peculiar to persons of
Arab descent.

_Sibnowans_, or _Sibnyons_, Mr. Brooke's favorite tribe of Dyaks,
of superior character.

_Singè_, Dyak tribes.

_Songi Besar_, large river.

_Sooloo_, on the northeast of Borneo, a powerful piratical nest,
the natives of which massacred the garrison of Balambangan in 1775.

_Sudahs_, defences to wound the feet of attacking enemies.

_Sumpitan_, or _Simpote_, a tube seven or eight feet in length,
through which the Borneons blow small sharp-pointed arrows.

_Tanjong_, a point of land.

_Turaj_, or _Tarajahs_, natives of Celebes.

_Tatows_, wild tribes in the interior of Borneo.

_Tiran_, natives on the north of Borneo, reported (on doubtful
authority) to be pirates and cannibals.

_Tuan_, sir, an exclamation of assent to an approved speaker, instead
of "hear, hear," or "yes."

_Tuan Besar_, sir, great, great chief, higher applause and deference.

_Tumangong_, a local Malay officer.

_Tumbilans_, a beautiful group of about 150 small islands between
Borneo and Singapore.

_Tuppa_, a Dyak god.

_Wakil_, a deputy.

_Zedong_, like the Tiran, which see.




No. III.

_Proposed Exploring Expedition to the Asiatic Archipelago, by_ James
Brooke, Esq. 1838.


The voyage I made to China opened an entirely new scene, and showed
me what I had never seen before, savage life and savage nature. I
inquired, and I read, and I became more and more assured that there
was a large field of discovery and adventure open to any man daring
enough to enter upon it. Just take a map and trace a line over the
Indian Archipelago, with its thousand unknown islands and tribes. Cast
your eye over the vast island of New Guinea, where the foot of European
has scarcely, if ever, trod. Look at the northern coast of Australia,
with its mysterious Gulf of Carpentaria; a survey of which, it is
supposed, would solve the great geographical question respecting the
rivers of the mimic continent. Place your finger on Japan, with its
exclusive and civilized people; it lies an unknown lump on our earth,
and an undefined line on our charts! Think of the northern coast of
China, willing, as is reported, to open an intercourse and trade
with Europeans, spite of their arbitrary government. Stretch your
pencil over the Pacific Ocean, which Cook himself declares a field
of discovery for ages to come! Proceed to the coast of South America,
from the region of gold-dust to the region of furs--the land ravaged
by the cruel Spaniard and the no less cruel Bucaneer--the scene of
the adventures of Drake and the descriptions of Dampier. The places
I have enumerated are mere names, with no specific ideas attached to
them: lands and seas where the boldest navigators gained a reputation,
and where hundreds may yet do so, if they have the same courage and
the same perseverance. Imagination whispers to ambition that there
are yet lands unknown which might be discovered. Tell me, would not
a man's life be well spent--tell me, would it not be well sacrificed,
in an endeavor to explore these regions? When I think on dangers and
death, I think of them only because they would remove me from such
a field for ambition, for energy, and for knowledge.

Borneo, Celebes, Sooloo, the Moluccas, and the islands of the Straits
of Sunda and Banka, compose what is called the Malayan group; and
the Malays located on the sea-shores of these and other islands may
with certainty be classed as belonging to one people. It is well
known, however, that the interior of these countries is inhabited
by various tribes, differing from the Malays and each other, and
presenting numerous gradations of early civilization: the Dyaks of
Borneo, the Papuans of New Guinea, and others, beside the black race
scattered over the islands. Objects of traffic here as elsewhere
present interesting subjects of inquiry; and while our acquaintance
with every other portion of the globe, from the passage of the Pole
to the navigation of the Euphrates, has greatly extended, it is matter
of surprise that we know scarcely anything of these people beyond the
bare fact of their existence, and remain altogether ignorant of the
geographical features of the countries they inhabit. Countries which
present an extended field for Christianity and commerce, which none
surpass in fertility, rich beyond the Americas in mineral productions,
and unrivaled in natural beauty, continue unexplored to the present
day; and, spite of the advantages which would probably result, have
failed to attract the attention they so well deserve. The difficulty
of the undertaking will scarcely account for its non-performance,
if we consider the voluntary sacrifices made on the shrine of African
research, or the energy displayed and the sufferings encountered by
the explorers of the Polar regions: yet the necessity of prosecuting
the voyage in an armed vessel, the wildness of the interior tribes,
the lawless ferocity of the Malays, and other dangers, would prevent
most individuals from fixing on this field for exertion, and points
it out as one which could best and most fully be accomplished by
Government or some influential body.

It is not my object to enter into any detail of the past history of
the Malayan nations, but I may refer to the undoubted facts that they
have been in a state of deterioration since we first became acquainted
with them; and the records of our early voyagers, together with the
remains of antiquity still visible in Java and Sumatra, prove that once
flourishing nations have now ceased to exist, and that countries once
teeming with human life are now tenantless and deserted. The causes
of such lamentable change need only be alluded to; but it is fit to
remark, that while the standard of education is unfurled, and dreams
are propagated of the progressive advancement of the human race, a
large part of the globe has been gradually relapsing and allowed to
relapse into barbarism. Whether the early decay of the Malay states,
and their consequent demoralization, arose from the introduction of
Mahommedism, or resulted from the intrigues of European ambition, it
were useless to discuss; but we are very certain that this "Eden of the
Eastern wave" has been reduced to a state of anarchy and confusion,
as repugnant to every dictate of humanity as it is to the prospect
of commercial advantage.

Borneo and Celebes, and indeed the greater portion of the islands
of the Malayan Archipelago, are still unknown, and the apathy of two
centuries still reigns supreme with the enlightened people of England;
while they willingly make the most expensive efforts favorable to
science, commerce, or Christianity in other quarters, the locality
which eminently combines these three objects is alone neglected
and alone uncared for. It has unfortunately been the fate of our
Indian possessions to have labored under the prejudice and contempt
of a large portion of the well-bred community. While the folly of
fashion requires an acquaintance with the deserts of Africa, and a
most ardent thirst for a knowledge of the usages of Timbuctoo, it at
the same time justifies the most profound ignorance of all matters
connected with the government and geography of our vast acquisitions
in Hindoostan. The Indian Archipelago has fully shared this neglect;
and even the tender philanthropy of the present day, which originates
such multifarious schemes for the amelioration of doubtful evils,
which shudders at the prolongation of apprenticeship for a single year
in the West, is blind to the existence of slavery in its worst and most
aggravated form in the East. Not a single prospectus is spread abroad;
not a single voice is upraised to relieve the darkness of Paganism,
and the horrors of the Eastern slave-trade. While the trumpet-tongue
of many an orator excites thousands to the rational and charitable
objects of converting the Jews and reclaiming the Gipsys; while the
admirable exertions of missionary enterprise in the Ausonian climes
of the South Sea have invested them with worldly power as well as
religious influence; while we admire the torrent of devotional and
philosophical exertion, we cannot help deploring that the zeal and
attention of the leaders of these charitable crusades have never
been directed to the countries under consideration. These unhappy
countries have failed to rouse attention or excite commiseration;
and as they sink lower and lower, they afford a striking proof how
civilization may be dashed, and how the purest and richest lands
under the sun may be degraded and brutalized by a continued course of
oppression and misrule. It is under these circumstances that I have
considered individual exertion may be usefully applied to rouse the
zeal of slumbering philanthropy, and to lead the way to an increased
knowledge of the Indian Archipelago. Such an exertion will be made at
some cost and some sacrifice; and I shall here quit the general topic,
and confine myself to the specific objects of my intended voyage.

It must be premised, however, that any plan previously decided on
must always be subject during its execution to great modifications in
countries where the population is always rude and often hostile, and
where the influence of climate is sometimes so fatally opposed to the
progress of inquiry. Local information, likewise, frequently renders
such a change both advisable and advantageous; and circumstances, as
they spring up, too often influence us beyond the power of foresight,
more especially in my own case, where the utmost care would still
leave the means very inadequate to the full accomplishment of the
proposed undertaking. With a small vessel properly equipped, and
provided with the necessary instruments for observation, and the means
for collecting specimens in natural history, it is proposed in the
first instance to proceed to Singapore, which may be considered as
head-quarters for the necessary intervals of refreshment and repose,
and for keeping open a certain communication with Europe. Here the
best local information can be obtained, interpreters procured, the
crew augmented for any particular service; and here, if needful, a
small vessel of native construction may be added to the expedition,
to facilitate the objects in view. An acquaintance may likewise be
formed with the more respectable Bugis merchants, and their good-will
conciliated in the usual mode, viz., by civility and presents, so as
to remove any misconceived jealousy on the score of trading rivalry,
and to induce a favorable report of our friendly intentions in their
own country, and at the places where they may touch. The Royalist
will probably reach Singapore in the month of March, 1839, at the
latter end of the northwest, or rainy monsoon. The delay consequent
on effecting the objects above mentioned, beside gaining a general
acquaintance with the natural history and trade of the settlement,
and some knowledge of the Malay language, will usefully occupy the
time until the setting in of the southeast, or dry monsoon. It may be
incidentally mentioned, however, that in the vicinity of Singapore
there are many islands imperfectly known, and which, during the
intervals of the rainy season, will afford interesting occupation. I
allude, more especially, to the space between the Straits of Rhio and
those of Duryan, and likewise to the island called Bintang, which,
although laid down as one large island, is probably composed of small
ones, divided by navigable straits; a better acquaintance with which
might facilitate the voyage from Singapore to the more eastern islands,
by bringing to light other passages beside those of Rhio and Duryan;
and, at any rate, would add something to our geographical knowledge
in the immediate vicinity of our settlement. On the commencement of
the healthy season I propose sailing from Singapore, and proceeding
without loss of time to Malludu Bay, at the north end of Borneo. This
spot has been chosen for the first essay; and in a country every part
of which is highly interesting, and almost unknown, the mere fact of
its being a British possession gives it a prior claim to attention.

The objects in view may be briefly mentioned. 1. A general knowledge of
the bay, and the correct position of various points--more especially
the two principal headlands at its entrance, so as to determine its
outline. The westernmost of these headlands, called Sampanmange, will
likewise determine the extreme north point of Borneo. 2. Inquiries for
the settlement of Cochin Chinese, reported, on Earl's authority, to be
fixed in the vicinity of Bankoka: an intercourse will, if possible,
be opened with this settlement, if in existence. 3. The rivers which
flow into the bay will be carefully and minutely explored, and an
attempt will be made to penetrate into the interior as far as the lake
of Kini Ballu. 4. For the same purpose, every endeavor will be used to
open a communication with the aboriginal inhabitants of the country,
and every means employed to conciliate their good opinion; and (if
the ceremony exists in this part of the island) to enter into the
bonds of fraternity (described by Mr. Dalton) with some of the chiefs.

I speak with great diffidence about penetrating into the interior of
this country, for I am well aware of the insurmountable difficulties
which the hard reality often presents, which are previously
overlooked and easily overcome in the smoothness of paper, or the
luxury of a drawing-room. The two points to be chiefly relied upon
for this purpose are, a friendly intercourse with the natives, and
the existence of navigable rivers. It is mentioned by Sir Stamford
Raffles, on native authority, that a land communication, of not more
than forty miles, exists between Malludu Bay and Lake Kini Ballu;
but neither this computation, nor any other derived from the natives,
however intelligent otherwise, can be relied on; for the inhabitants of
these countries are generally ignorant of any measure for distance; and
their reckoning by time is so vague, as to defy a moderately-certain
conclusion. The fact, however, of the vicinity of the lake to the bay
may be concluded; and it follows, as a reasonable inference, that the
river or rivers flowing into the bay communicate with the lake. The
existence of such rivers, which were from the locality to have been
expected, is vouched for by Captain Forrest. "Most of this north part
of Borneo (he says), granted to the English East India Company by the
Sooloos, is watered by noble rivers: those that discharge themselves
into Malludu Bay are not barred." It is by one or other of these rivers
that I should hope to penetrate as far as the lake and mountain of
Kini Ballu, and into the country of the Idaan. I have not been able to
learn that any Malay towns of importance are situated in the bight of
Malludu Bay, and their absence will render a friendly communication
with the aborigines a matter of comparative ease. The advantages
likely to result from such friendly relations are so evident, that
I need not dwell upon them; though the mode of effecting such an
intercourse must be left to the thousand contingencies which govern
all, and act so capriciously on the tempers of the savage races. The
utmost forbearance, and a liberality guided by prudence, so as not
to excite too great a degree of cupidity, appear the fundamental
rules for managing men in a low state of civilization. The results
of an amicable understanding are as uncertain as its commencement;
for they depend on the enterprise of the individual, and the power
of the native tribe into whose hands he may have fallen. I will not,
therefore, enter into a visionary field of discovery; but it appears
to me certain that, without the assistance of the natives, no small
party can expect to penetrate far into a country populous by report,
and in many parts thickly covered with wood. Without entertaining
any exaggerated expectation, I trust that something may be added
to our geographical knowledge of the sea-coast of this bay, its
leading features, productions, rivers, anchorages, and inhabitants,
the prospect of trade, and the means of navigation; and although my
wishes lead me strongly to penetrate as far as the lake of Kini Ballu,
yet the obstacles which may be found to exist to the fulfillment of
this desire will induce me to rest satisfied with the more moderate
and reasonable results.

It may not be superfluous to notice here, that a foregone conclusion
appears to be spread abroad regarding the aboriginal (so called)
inhabitants of Borneo, and that they are usually considered and
mentioned under the somewhat vague appellation of Dyaks. They are
likewise commonly pronounced as originating from the same stock as the
Arafuras of Celebes and New Guinea, and radically identical with the
Polynesian race. The conclusion is not in itself highly improbable,
but certainly premature, as the facts upon which it is built are so
scanty and doubtful as to authorize no such structure. On an island
of the vast size of Borneo, races radically distinct might exist;
and at any rate, the opposite conclusion is hardly justifiable, from
the specimens of language or the physical appearance of the tribes
of the southern portion of the country. We have Malay authority for
believing that there are many large tribes in the interior, differing
greatly in their degree of civilization, though all alike removed from
the vicinity of a superior people. We have the Dyaks of the south; the
Idaan of the north; the Kagins; and a race little better than monkeys,
who live in trees, eat without cooking, are hunted by the other tribes,
and would seem to exist in the lowest conceivable grade of humanity. If
we may trust these accounts, these latter people resemble in many
particulars the Orang Benua, or aborigines of the peninsula; but the
Dyaks and Idaans are far superior, living in villages, cultivating
the ground, and possessing cattle. Beside these, likewise, we have
the names of several other tribes or people; and, in all probability,
many exist in the interior with whom we are unacquainted.

There are strong reasons for believing that the Hindoo religion,
which obtained so extensively in Java and Sumatra, and yet survives at
Bali and Lombock, was likewise extended to Borneo; and some authors
have conceived grounds for supposing a religion anterior even to
this. If only a portion of these floating opinions should be true,
and the truth can only be tested by inquiry, we may fairly look for the
descendants of the Hindoo dynasty as well as an aboriginal people. It
never seems to have occurred to any one to compare the Dyaks with the
people of Bali and Lombock. We know indeed but little of the former;
but both races are fair, good-looking, and gentle. Again, respecting
the concluded identity of the Dyaks and the Arafuras, it is clear we
have a very limited knowledge indeed of the former; and, I may ask,
what do we know of the Arafuras?

In short, I feel as reluctant to embrace any preconceived theory as
I am to adopt the prevailing notion on this subject; for it requires
a mass of facts, of which we are wholly deficient, to arrive at
anything approaching a reasonable conclusion. To return, however,
to the proceedings of the Royalist, I would remark, that it depends
greatly on the time passed in Malludu Bay whether our next endeavor
be prosecuted at Abai on the western, or Tusan Abai on the eastern
coast. The object in visiting Abai would he chiefly to penetrate to
the lake, which, on the authority of Dalrymple and Burton, is not
far distant thence, by a water communication; but should any success
have attended similar efforts from Malludu Bay, this project will be
needless, as in that case the enterprise will have been prosecuted to
the westward, and reach to the vicinity of Abai. As Kaminis is the
limit of the British territory to the westward, so Point Kaniungan,
situated to the southward of the bay of Sandakan, forms the eastern
boundary; and a line drawn from coast to coast between these points
is represented as including our possessions. A reference to the chart
will show the extent to be considerable; and the eastern coast from
Malludu Bay to Point Kaniungan is so very little known, that it is
highly desirable to become acquainted with its general features and
conformation, and to seek thence the means of gaining an inlet into
the interior, should it be denied at Malludu Bay.

The reported proximity of Kini Ballu to Malludu Bay, and likewise to
Abai would (supposing it is anything like the size it is affirmed to
be) lead us to expect that it cannot be far distant from the eastern
coast; and it is but reasonable to conclude that some rivers or streams
discharge themselves into the sea in the numerous indentations that
abound on this shore. However this may be, the coast, with its bays
and islands and bold headlands, is one of great interest, and almost
unknown; and the careful inspection of it as far as Point Kaniungan
will, I trust, add something to our knowledge. The longitude of
Point Kaniungan and Point Unsang will likewise determine the eastern
extremity of Borneo.

Much more might be added on this topic, especially of the reported
communication by a line of lakes from Malludu Bay to Banjarmassim,
which, if true, would in all probability place some of these lakes
near particular points of the east coast, as the whole line, from the
relative position of the two extremes, must be on the eastern side
of the island. These reports, and the various surmises which arise
from them, are rather matters for verification than discussion; and I
will therefore only add that, tempted by success, I shall not devote
less than a year and a half to this object; but, in case of finding
a sickly climate, or meeting with a decidedly hostile population,
I shall more easily abandon the field, and turn to others of not less
interest, and perhaps of less risk.

Equal to Borneo in riches, and superior in picturesque beauty to any
part of the Archipelago, is the large and eccentric country of the
Bugis, called Celebes. So deep are the indentations of its coasts,
that the island may be pronounced as being composed of a succession
of peninsulas, nearly uniting in a common center in the district of
Palos; and thus, by the proximity of every part to the sea, offering
great facilities for brief and decisive interior excursions. The
Dutch are in possession of Makassar, and had formerly settlements
on the northwest coast and in the bay of Sawa. Their power appears,
however, never to have been very extensively acknowledged; and
at present I have not been able to meet with any account of the
condition of their factories. This information will probably be gained
at Singapore. Avoiding the Dutch settlements, I propose limiting my
inquiries to the northern and northeastern portion of the island, more
especially the great bay of Gunong Tella. It is impossible to state
here the direction of these inquiries, or any definite object to which
they should be turned, as I am acquainted with no author who speaks
of the country, save in a general and vague manner. It is reported
as rich, fertile, mountainous, strikingly beautiful, and possessed of
rivers; abounding in birds, and inhabited, like Borneo, by wild tribes
in the interior, and by the Bugis on the sea-shores and entrance of
rivers. The character of the Bugis, though so variously represented,
gives me strong hopes of rendering them, by care and kindness, useful
instruments in the prosecution of these researches; for all writers
agree that they are active, hardy, enterprising, and commercial; and
it is seldom that a people possessing such characteristics are deaf
to the suggestions of self-interest or kindly feeling. The arrogance,
and especially the indolence, of the Malays, counteracts the influence
of these strong incentives; and the impulse which governs such rude
tribes as the Dyaks and Arafuras is a dangerous weapon, which cuts all
ways, and often when least anticipated. The Badjows, or sea-gipsys,
are another race on whom some dependence may be placed. Mr. Earl,
who had a personal acquaintance with this tribe, and could speak their
language, always expressed to me a degree of confidence in their good
faith, which must have had some grounds.

I may here conclude the first stage of the expedition, during the
progress of which the head-quarters will be fixed at Singapore. During
some of the intervals I hope to see Manilla, and to acquire a cursory
knowledge of the unexplored tract at the southern extremity of Celebes,
called in Norie's general chart the Tiger Islands.

The time devoted to the objects above mentioned must, as I have before
said, be regulated by the degree of fortune which attends them; for,
cheered by success, I should not readily abandon the field; yet, if
persecuted by climate, or other serious detriments, I shall frequently
shift the ground, to remove myself beyond such evil influence. It
is scarcely needful to continue a detail of projects so distant,
having already carved out for myself a work which I should be proud to
perform, and which is already as extended as the chances of human life
and human resolves will warrant. The continuation of the voyage would
lead me to take the Royalist to Timor or Port Essington, thence making
excursions to the Arru Isles, Timor Laut, and the southern shores
of New Guinea. That part of the coast contiguous to Torres Straits I
am particularly desirous of visiting; as it has been suggested to me
by Mr. Earl, and I think with reason, that a better channel than the
one we are at present acquainted with may be found there. That such
a channel exists, and will be discovered when the coast is surveyed,
I entertain but little doubt; but the navigation is hazardous, and
must, from the westward, be attempted with great caution.

My own proceedings must, of course, be regulated by the discoveries
previously made by Captain Wickham or others; and as this gentleman
has orders to survey Torres Straits, the field may be well trodden
before I reach it. The rest of the voyage I shall consider as one
merely of pleasure, combining such utility as circumstances will
permit. It is probable that I shall visit our Australian settlements;
glance at the islands of the Pacific; and return to Europe round
Cape Horn. Before concluding, I may observe, that there are points
of inquiry which may be useful to the studies of the learned, which
(provided the process be moderately simple) I shall be willing to make,
and I shall always be happy to receive any directions or suggestions
regarding them. I allude to observations on the tides, to geology,
to the branches of natural history, &c. &c., for the general inquirer
often neglects or overlooks highly intersting facts, from his attention
not having been called to them. The specimens of natural history will
be forwarded home on every visit to Singapore; and the information
will be sent ot the Geographical Society, and may always, if it be of
any value, be used as freely as it is communicated. In like manner,
the objects of natural history will be open to any person who is at
all interested in such pursuits. I cannot but express my regret,
that from pecuniary considerations as well as the small size of
the vessel, and the limited quantity of provision she carries, I
am unable to take a naturalist and draughtsman; but I should always
hail with pleasure any scientific person who joined me abroad, or who
happened to be in the countries at the time; and I may venture to
promise him every encouragement and facility in the prosecution of
his pursuits. I embark upon the expedition with great cheerfulness,
with a stout vessel, a good crew, and the ingredients of success as
far as the limited scale of the undertaking will permit; and I cast
myself upon the waters--like Mr. Southey's little book--but whether
the world will know me after many days, is a question which, hoping
the best, I cannot answer with any positive degree of assurance.





No. IV.


_Sketch of Borneo, or Pulo Kalamantan, by J. Hunt_, Esq.

(Communicated, in 1812, to the Honourable Sir Thomas Stamford Raffles,
late Lieutenant-Governor of Java.)


The island of Borneo extends from 7° 7' north to 4° 12' south latitude,
and from 108° 45' to 119° 25' east longitude; measuring at its extreme
length nine hundred miles, at its greatest breadth seven hundred,
and in circumference three thousand. It is bounded on the north by the
Solo seas, on the east by the Straits of Macassar, on the south by the
Java, and on the west by the China seas. Situated in the track of the
most extensive and valuable commerce, intersected on all sides with
deep and navigable rivers, indented with safe and capacious harbors,
possessing one of the richest soils on the globe, abounding in all
the necessaries of human life, and boasting commercial products that
have in all ages excited the avarice and stimulated the desires of
mankind,--with the exception of New Holland, it is the largest island
known. Of the existence of this extensive territory, so highly favored
by Providence, and enriched by the choicest productions of nature,
there remains scarce a vestige in the geographical descriptions of
the day; and its rich products and fertile shores, by one tacit and
universal consent, appear abandoned by all the European nations of
the present age, and handed over to the ravages of extensive hordes
of piratical banditti, solely intent on plunder and desolation.

The natives and the Malays, formerly, and even at this day, call
this large island by the exclusive name of Pulo Kalamantan, from
a sour and indigenous fruit so called. Borneo was the name only
of a city, the capital of one of the three distinct kingdoms on the
island. When Magalhaens visited it in the year 1520, he saw a rich and
populous city, a luxuriant and fertile country, a powerful prince,
and a magnificent court: hence the Spaniards hastily concluded that
the whole island not only belonged to this prince, but that it was
likewise named Borneo. In this error they have been followed by
all other European nations. The charts, however, mark this capital
"Borneo Proper," or in other words, the only place properly Borneo:
this is the only confession of this misnomer that I have met with
among Europeans. The natives pronounce Borneo, Bruni, and say it
is derived from the word Brani, courageous; the aboriginal natives
within this district having ever remained unconquered.

The aborigines of Borneo, or Pulo Kalamantan, still exist in the
interior in considerable numbers; there are various tribes of them,
speaking different dialects. Some of them acknowledge Malay chiefs,
as at Landa, Songo, Mantan, &c. Several communities of them still
remain under independent chiefs of their own nation; and everywhere
their origin, their language, their religion, their manners and
customs, are totally distinct and apparent from those of the Islams,
or Malays, who have settled on the island. About Pontiana and Sambas
they are called Dayers; at Benjarmasing, Biajus; at Borneo Proper,
Moruts; farther northward, Orang Idan. Their original history is as
much enveloped in obscurity as that of the Monocaboes of Malaya, the
Rejangs and Battas of Sumatra, or the Togals of the Philippines. On
a nearer acquaintance with their language, customs, traditions, &c.,
perhaps an affinity in origin may be discovered among all the original
possessors of the Eastern isles. The Moruts and Orang Idan are much
fairer and better featured than the Malays, of a more strong and robust
frame, and have the credit of being a brave race of people. The Dayer
is much darker, and approaches nearer in resemblance to the Malay. The
Biajus I never saw. The few particulars which I have been able to
collect of these people I shall briefly state: They live in miserable
small huts; their sole dress consists of a slight wrapper round their
waists, sometimes made of bark, at others from skins of animals, or
perhaps of blue or white cloth; they eat rice or roots, and indeed
any description of food, whether beast, reptile, or vermin: they are
extremely filthy; this and bad food give them a cutaneous disorder,
with which they are very generally afflicted. Several tribes of them
smear themselves with oil and pigments, which gives them the appearance
of being tattooed. Whether this is intended to defend them against the
bites of insects, to operate as a cure or prevention of this epidemic,
or to adorn their persons, I cannot take upon me to decide. They
believe, it is said, in a Supreme Being, and offer sacrifices of
gratitude to a beneficent Deity. Polygamy is not allowed among them;
no man has more than one wife; they burn their dead. They are said
to shoot poisoned balls or arrows through hollow tubes; and whenever
they kill a man, they preserve the skull to exhibit as a trophy to
commemorate the achievement of their arms. They are said to have
no mode of communicating their ideas by characters or writing, like
the Battas. Driven from the sea-coast of Borneo into the mountains
and fastnesses in the interior, they are more occupied in the chase
and the pursuits of husbandry than in commerce. They, however, barter
their inland produce of camphor, gold, diamonds, birds'-nests, wax, and
cattle, for salt (which they hold in the highest degree of estimation,
eating it with as much _goût_ as we do sugar), china, porcelain,
brass and iron cooking utensils, brass bracelets, coarse blue and
white cloth, Java tobacco, arrack (which they also like), parangs,
hardware, beads, &c. Some tribes of them are said to pull out their
front teeth and substitute others of gold, and others adorn themselves
with tigers' teeth. The greatest numbers and most considerable bodies
of these men are found near Kiney Balu and about Borneo Proper.

The Malays represent them as the most savage and ferocious of men;
but to be more savage or ferocious than a Malay is a thing utterly
impossible. Their representations may be accounted for. These
aborigines have always evinced a strong disposition and predilection
for liberty and freedom; they have either resisted the yoke of the
Malay, or have retired to their mountains to enjoy this greatest of
all human blessings. The Malay, unable to conquer them, lays plans
for kidnapping as many as he can fall in with. Every Dyak so taken is
made a slave of, his children sold, and his women violated. The Malay,
hence, is justly considered by them as the violator of every law,
human and divine; and whenever any of these people meet with one,
they satiate their vengeance, and destroy him as the enemy of their
race, and as a monster of the human kind. The Portuguese missionaries
found these people very tractable converts, and very large bodies of
them are very easily governed by a single Malay chief, as at Landa,
Songo, and Matan. I have seen very large bodies of them at Kimanis
and Maludu, but none of them possessing the ferocity of a Malay.

The Islams, or Malayans, who now possess the sea-coasts of Borneo
(as well as the sea-coasts of all the Eastern islands), are said to be
colonies from Malacca, Johore, &c., planted in the fourteenth century;
at this period, according to Mr. Poivre, "Malacca was a country
well peopled, and was consequently well cultivated. This nation was
once one of the greatest powers in the Eastern seas, and made a very
considerable figure in the theater of Asia; they colonized Borneo,
Celebes, Macassar, Moluccas, &c." The Malays on Borneo are like the
Malays everywhere else, the most atrocious race of beings on the
earth; and from their general character, and imprudent institutions,
both political and religious, are fast moldering in self-decay,
or mutual destruction.

From the earliest date that I have been able to trace, the island of
Borneo was always divided into three distinct kingdoms. The kingdom of
Borneo, properly so called, extended from Tanjong Dato, in latitude
3° 15' north, to Kanukungan point, in the Straits of Macassar, 1°
15' north, which included the whole north part of the island. The
kingdom of Sukadana (from _suka_, happiness, and _dunia_, the world,
or earthly paradise), extending from Tanjong Dato to Tanjong Sambar,
which belonged to the King of Bantam (when or how acquired I have
not learned): and the remainder of the island from Tanjong Sambar
to Kanukungan Point aforesaid, to the kingdom of Benjarmasing (from
_bendar_, a port of trade, and _masing_, usual, or the ordinary port
of trade).

When the Portuguese first visited Borneo, in 1520, the whole island
was in a most flourishing state. The numbers of Chinese that had
settled on her shores were immense; the products of their industry,
and an extensive commerce with China in junks, gave her land and
cities a far different aspect from her dreary appearance at this day,
and their princes and courts exhibited a splendor and displayed a
magnificence which has long since vanished.

Pigofetta says there were twenty-five thousand houses in the city of
Borneo Proper, and that it was rich and populous. Much later accounts
describe the numbers of Chinese and Japanese junks frequenting her
ports as great; but in 1809 there were not three thousand houses in
the whole city, nor six thousand Chinese throughout that kingdom,
and not a junk that had visited it for years. But the ports of Borneo
have not dwindled away more than Acheen, Johore, Malacca, Bantam,
Ternate, &c. All these places likewise cut a splendid figure in
the eyes of our first navigators, and have since equally shared a
proportionate obscurity.

Were the causes required which have eclipsed the prosperity of Borneo
and the other great emporiums of Eastern trade that once existed, it
might be readily answered--a decay of commerce. They have suffered the
same vicissitudes as Tyre, Sidon, or Alexandria; and like Carthage--for
ages the emporium of the wealth and commerce of the world, which now
exhibits on its site a piratical race of descendants in the modern
Tunisians and their neighbors the Algerines--the commercial ports of
Borneo have become a nest of banditti, and the original inhabitants
of both, from similar causes--the decay of commerce--have degenerated
to the modern pirates of the present day.

In exact proportion as the intercourse of the Europeans with China
has increased, in precise ratio has the decrease of their direct trade
in junks become apparent. The Portuguese first, and subsequently the
Dutch, mistress of the Eastern seas, exacted by treaties and other ways
the Malay produce at their own rates, and were consequently enabled
to undersell the junks in China. But these powers went further;
by settling at ports on Borneo, or by their guardas de costas, they
compelled the ports of Borneo to send their produce, calculated for
the China market, to Malacca and Batavia, which at length completely
cut up the direct trade by means of the Chinese junks.

The loss of their direct intercourse with China affected their
prosperity in a variety of ways. First, by this circuitous direction
of their trade, the gruff goods, as rattans, sago, cassia, pepper,
ebony, wax, &c., became too expensive to fetch the value of this
double carriage and the attendant charges, and in course of time were
neglected; the loss of these extensive branches of industry must
have thrown numbers out of employment. But the loss of the direct
intercourse with China had more fatal effects; it prevented large
bodies of annual emigrants from China settling upon her shores;
it deprived them of an opportunity of visiting the Borneon ports,
and exercising their mechanical arts and productive industry; and
of thus keeping up the prosperity of the country in the tillage of
the ground, as well as in the commerce of her ports. The old Chinese
settlers by degrees deserted these shores; and to fill up the chasms
in their revenues by so fatal a change, the rajahs have been tempted
to turn their views to predatory habits, and have permitted their
lands to run to jungle, by dragging their wretched laborers from
agricultural employments to maritime and piratical enterprises.

The first material alteration in the sovereignty of the territorial
possession took place in the kingdom of Borneo Proper, when her rajah
was obliged to call in the aid of the Solos to defend him against
an insurrection of the Maruts and Chinese. In consideration of this
important aid, the Rajah of Borneo Proper ceded to the Sultan of Solo
all that portion of Borneo then belonging to him, from Kimanis, in
latitude 5° 30' north, to Tapean-durian, in the Straits of Macassar,
which includes the whole north of Borneo. After this period, the power
and fortunes of the Sultan of Solo rapidly declined. The Spaniards
succeeded in conquering all their islands. Solo, the capital, was
taken and fortified; the sultan and his court made prisoners. When the
English captured Manilla, they found this sultan incarcerated. They
agreed to relieve him from prison, and reinstate him on the musnud of
his forefathers under the express stipulation that the whole of the
aforesaid territory of Borneo, ceded to Solo by the rajah of that
kingdom, should be transferred to the English East India Company,
together with the south of Palawan, and the intermediate islands. These
terms were joyfully acceded to by the Sultan of Solo, and signed,
sealed, and delivered by him to the late Alexander Dalrymple, in the
year 1763.

The kingdom of Sukadana was ceded by the Rajah of Bantam (in what year
I know not) to the Dutch East India Company. Whether the kingdom of
Benjarmasing was ever actually ceded to the Dutch or not, I have not
been able to learn. But the occupancy of her capital, the military
government of the country, by the erection of forts, and a permanent
standing force, since transferred to the English arms, give to the
East India Company, actually or virtually, the entire sovereignty
and rule over the whole of this large island, with the exception of
the piratical port of Borneo Proper, and the portion of territory
yet annexed thereto.

The Portuguese, at a very early period, established themselves at
Benjarmasing: at Borneo Proper there still remain two bastions and a
curtain of a regular stone fort built by them: they had also one on
the island of Laboan, since destroyed. They fixed themselves at old
Sambas, from which they were driven by the Dutch in the year 1690,
and nearly about this period from all their establishments on Borneo.

When, or from what causes, the Dutch were induced to evacuate Sambas, I
know not, nor have I learned the period when they fortified themselves
at Benjarmasing and Pasir, but believe it could not have taken place
before the middle of the last century. They, however, settled at
Pontiana in 1786, and built a fortified wall round the palace and
factory, but were compelled to withdraw from it when the war broke out
with the English in 1796. The ports at Benjarmasing, when evacuated,
were sold by the Dutch to the sultan, and are since said to have
been repurchased from him by the English. The Dutch obtaining the
cession of the kingdom of Sukadana from the Rajah of Bantam, and their
subsequent measures in different parts of this territory, will show
that they had extensive views of firmly establishing themselves on this
island; and waking from an age of lethargy, at last began to see the
great advantages and unbounded resources these rich possessions were
capable of affording them, without any cost or expense whatever. The
year they withdrew from Pontiana they had it in contemplation to take
repossession of Sambas, and to unite all the ports, as well as the
interior, under the Rajah of Pontiana, in trust for them. Some letters
to this effect were written by the Dutch government to the late rajah.

That the English were not insensible to the value and importance
of the once valuable commerce of Borneo may be inferred not only
from the number of the Honorable Company's regular ships annually
dispatched to her ports prior to the year 1760 (vide Hardy's Shipping
Register), but from the efforts they have repeatedly made to establish
themselves on her shores. There still exist the remains of a British
factory at Borneo Proper. Before the year 1706, they had made two
successive attempts to fortify themselves at Benjarmasing; twice they
have attempted an establishment on the sickly island of Balambangan
(lying north of Borneo, near Maludu); and in 1775, the Honorable
Company's ship Bridgewater was sent to Pasir with similar views.

The failure of these British attempts, as well as the exclusion of all
other powers from the ports of Borneo, may be principally attributed
to the sordid desire of the Dutch of monopolizing the whole produce
of the Eastern Archipelago, and their rooted jealousy in opposing
the establishment of every other power in the vicinity of Java,
or that of the Spice Islands.

These considerations and feelings have induced them to commit the
most flagrant crimes, not only against the natives of these regions,
but against every European power. Their infamous massacres at Amboyna,
Banda, Bantam, &c., have been historically recorded to their eternal
disgrace. By their intrigues at Benjarmasing, the British attempts at
a settlement twice failed; and Forrest, in his Voyage to New Guinea,
says, that the Solos were by Dutch instigation induced to cut off the
infant establishment of Balambangan, in 1775. They frustrated the
attempts of the Bridgewater at Pasir; and even the massacre of the
garrison of Pulo Condore was effected by Javanese soldiers supplied
by the governor of Batavia. The English, from their strong desire
of having a port in the China seas, hastily pitched upon the most
unhealthy spots for that purpose, viz. Balambangan and Pulo Condore.

The father of the present Sultan of Pontiana was the descendant of an
Arab, residing at Simpan, near Matan. By the advice and concurrence
of the Dutch he was induced, about forty-two years ago, to settle
on the unfrequented shores of the river Pontiana, or Quallo Londa,
with promises of early coöperation and assistance, as well as of
rendering it the mart of the trade and capital of all Sukadana. As
soon as Abdul Ramman (the name of the first sultan) had succeeded in
attracting around him several Chinese, Buguese, and Malay settlers,
and in building a town, the Dutch (in 1786) came with two armed
brigs and fifty troops to establish their factory. To make good
their promises to Abdul Ramman (the treaty I have never seen), they
immediately overthrew the chief of Mompava, and gave his country in
trust to this ally: they shortly after invested the ancient city of
Sukadana, burned it to the ground, transferred the inhabitants to
Pontiana, or dispersed them and their chief into the interior. The
Dutch likewise placed the present rajas on the musnuds of Songo, Landa,
&c., and kept up a force at the former, with the express stipulation
that the whole of their produce should be sent from each of their
respective districts to the Dutch factory of Pontiana. They had it
in contemplation, in 1795, to take repossession of Sambas, and wrote
to Abdul Ramman as to the preparatory measures requisite, when the
English war, as before observed, obliged them to abandon Pontiana.

This Abdul Ramman, the first sultan or chief of Pontiana, reigned
thirty-five years, and died in 1807, leaving his eldest son, the
present Sultan Kasim, now forty-six years of age, his successor;
who has a second brother, called Pangeran Marko, aged thirty-eight,
and Pangeran Hosman, thirty-six years, beside four sisters, one
of whom married the present Rajah of Matan, and about seventy half
brothers and sisters, the natural children of his father, with an
extensive sub-progeny. The present sultan has three sons (Abibuker,
heir-apparent, twenty-one years old, Ali, and Abdul Ramman), and
four daughters, lawfully begotten. None of the royal family make use
of either opium, betel, or tobacco, in any shape whatever; and the
present sultan has much the appearance of an Arab. The grandfather
of the present sultan was from Arabia, a Sayed Suriff; one of his
relations was fixed at Palimbang, whose name is unknown to me, and
the other, Shad Fudyel, at Acheen, who has been long dead.

The wet season commences from September, and ends in April,
when heavy rain, hard squalls, and much thunder and lightning are
experienced. From April till September is called the dry season, but
even in this portion of the year seldom a day elapses without a smart
shower or two. The monsoons on the northerly shores of Borneo are found
to correspond with those prevalent in the China seas, viz. from the
N.E. from October to April, and from the S.W. the rest of the year. To
the southward, about Benjarmasing, the monsoons are the same as in the
Java seas, _i. e._ westerly from October to April, and easterly the
rest of the year. Those parts of Borneo near or upon the equator have
variable winds all the year, and land and sea breezes close in shore.

This country is by no means so warm as one would be led to imagine by
its proximity everywhere to the line: this arises from the perpetual
refreshing showers and the land and sea breezes, the former being
wafted over innumerable rivers. In the month of November, the
thermometer at Pontiana ranges from 78° to 82°.

During the wet season, the rivers swell and overflow the adjacent
shores, and run down with such continued rapidity, that the water may
be tasted fresh at sea at the distance of six or seven miles from the
mouths: these overflowings fertilize the banks and adjacent country,
and render the shores of Borneo, like the plains of Egypt, luxuriantly
rich. Susceptible of the highest possible culture, particularly in
wet grain, in the dry season the coast, from these overflowings,
presents to the eye the richest enameled fields of full grown grass
for miles around. It is at this season that whole herds of wild cattle
range down from the mountains in the interior to fatten on the plains,
but during the wet season they ascend to their hills.

The whole of the north, the northwest, and the center of Borneo is
extremely mountainous. The greatest portion of the ancient kingdom
of Borneo Proper is extremely elevated. That of Kiney Baulu, or
St. Peter's Mount, in latitude 6° north, is perhaps one of the
highest mountains known. The country about Sambas, Pontiana, and
Sukadana is occasionally interspersed with a few ranges of hills,
otherwise the land here might be deemed low. But to the southward,
and more particularly to the east, in the Straits of Macassar, it
is very low. The shore in these latter places is extremely moist and
swampy, but the interior is said to be dry.

The common charts of Borneo will show the innumerable rivers that
water this vast island in every possible direction; but it is worthy of
remark, that all the principal rivers on this island have their main
source in a large lake in the vicinity of that stupendous mountain
before mentioned, Kiney Baulu. The river Benjarmasing takes its rise
from thence, and after traversing in all its windings a distance of
1500 miles, intersecting the island into two parts, falls into the
Java sea. Its rise and fall is said to be twelve feet, and it has
only nine feet at low water on the bar. It is said to have numberless
villages scattered on its banks; but I have obtained no particular
accounts of them, or their produce.

The great river of Borneo Proper is certainly the finest on the
island. It is a deep, navigable, and majestic stream; it has three
fathoms upon the bar at low water; the rise and fall is, I believe,
fifteen feet; there are docks here for Chinese junks of five or six
hundred tons, and a first-rate ship of war might get up far above
the town. The country, too, is populous, productive, and healthy. The
southern branch of this river has been well surveyed, but the branch
leading to the Marut country is little known; it has its source in
Kiney Baulu.

In the ancient kingdom of Sukadana, the five principal rivers are
the Sukadana, the Lava, the Pogore, the Pontiana, and the Sambas. The
former rivers communicate inland, and their main source is in Kiney
Baulu. The whole of these rivers are deep and navigable for seventy
or eighty miles; but have all of them mud flats at their mouths,
which would not admit of the entry of vessels exceeding fourteen feet
at high water springs.

The third most considerable river on Borneo is the Kinabatangan, lying
in the north of the island, and emptying itself into the Sulo seas. It
is said to be deep and navigable much farther than the Benjarmasing
river; it has several mouths, but it has never been surveyed. The
rivers Kuran, Pasir, and a variety of others that fall into the Straits
of Macassar, are said to be noble streams, navigable for vessels
of large burthen; but I have no accurate information of them. The
harbor of Sandakan is one of the finest in the world; a correct chart
of the same is published. The harbor of Tambisan, near Cape Unsing,
is equal to Pulo Pinang, and calculated for careening and building
ships; a tolerable chart of these is also published. The harbors of
Pulo Laut, Punangan, Maludu, and several others in the Straits of
Macassar, afford good anchorage and complete shelter for shipping.

Situated as Borneo is, immediately under the equator, everything
that can be produced in vegetation by the combined influence of
heat and moisture is here displayed in the highest luxuriance and
super-excellence. All the Oriental palms, as the cocoa-nut, the areca,
the sago, &c., abound here. The larger grasses, as the bamboo, the
canna, the nardus, assume a stately growth, and thrive in peculiar
luxuriance. Pepper is found wild everywhere, and largely cultivated
about Benjarmasing and the districts of Borneo Proper. The _laurus
cinnamomum_ and _cassia odoriferata_ are produced in abundance about
Kimanis. In no part of the world does the camphor-tree flourish in
equal perfection as in the districts of Maludu and Payton, in the north
of Borneo. The ebony, the dammar, the tree that yields the finest
dragon's blood in the world, all abound here. The cotton and coffee
trees are found in all parts of Borneo, though not much attended
to. The chocolate nut of Sulo is preferred at Manilla to that from
South America. The tree that yields the clove-bark, and the nutmeg,
and clove, thrive luxuriantly, though never tried to any extent.

The woods about Pontiana for carpentry and joinery, are kayu bulean,
chena, mintangore, laban, ebony, iron-wood, dammar, and dammar laut,
&c. &c. The pine abounds in the bay of Maludu, teak at Sulo. The
fruit-bearing trees which enrich and adorn the Indian continent,
offer, on the Borneon shore, all their kindred varieties, nurtured
by the bountiful hand of luxuriant nature. The durian, mangustin,
rambutan, proya, chabi, kachang, timon, jambu, kniban, beside the
nanka or jack, tamarind, pomplemose, orange, lemon, and citron,
all the kindred varieties of the plantain, banana, melon, annanas,
pomegranate, &c., are found on Borneo.

The garden-stuffs met with are onions, garlic, yams, pumpkins,
brinjals, greens, beans, cucumbers; and turnips, cabbages, and potatoes
would succeed, were there Europeans to attend to them.

The elephant was said to be seen about Cape Unsing, where several
teeth are still found; but it is conceived this animal is extinct on
the island. There are no dromedaries nor camels; nor are horses, asses,
or mules met with on Borneo (the former are seen at Sulo). None of the
larger breed of the feline species are found here, as the lion, tiger,
leopard; nor the bear, the wolf, the fox, nor even a jackal, or dog,
that I ever saw. The ourang-outang, or the man of the woods, is the
most singular animal found in these regions. The rivers swarm with
alligators, and the woods with every variety of the monkey tribe. The
names of other animals on Borneo are the bodok or rhinoceros, pelando
or rabbit, rusa or stag, kijang or doe, minjagon, babi utan or wild
hog, tingileng, bintangan, &c. There are buffaloes, goats, bullocks,
hogs, beside the rat and mouse species; a dog I never saw on Borneo.

There are few snakes on the sea-coast, owing to the moisture; plenty,
however, are found in the interior. The musketoe, the fly, the frog,
and the noisy beetle, with other insects and vermin found in Malay
countries, abound here.

The coasts and rivers abound with excellent and wholesome fish in
the greatest variety, and of the most delicious flavors; but such
is the miserable state of society, that few Malays have either the
inclination or the inducement to venture beyond the mouths of their
rivers in quest of them; and even there they are more indebted to the
industry of the Chinese with their fishing-stakes than to their own
labor for the supply of their markets. The names of their fish are,
the kakab, klabaw, jilawat, lai-is, pattain, udang or prawn, shrimp,
talang, sinanging, bawan, rowan, taylaon, duri, bleda, tingairy,
alu-alu, pako, jumpul, pari or skait, boli ayam, tamban or shad,
belut or eel, iyu or shark, lida or sole, batu batu, kabab batu, klaoi,
krang or cockle, tiram or oyster, tipy and lapis pearl oysters, cupang
or muscle, all the varieties of the turtle, with several other sorts.

The ornithology of Borneo is somewhat limited. There are the bayan,
nuri, dara, pepit or sparrow, tukukur or turtle-dove, berkey, kandang,
kiridi, gogaw or crow, seyrindit, layang or swallow, kalilawan. The
Chinese rear ducks; the tame fowl abounds; but the turkey, goose,
and peafowl are seldom met with.

The principal gold mines on Borneo are in the vicinity of Sambas. There
is a mountain called Guning Pandan, about eighty miles inland; from
this branch out three rivers--one leads to Mompava, one to Batu Bulat
near Tanjong Mora, and one to Landa; the whole intermediate area
between the above rivers is of a firm yellow argillaceous schistus,
or ferruginous quartz, interspersed with horn and vitreous ores, of
a remarkable dark reddish color, abounding with the richest veins of
gold, and equal if not superior to any mine extant. There are only
fifty parets or mines now wrought in the whole kingdom of Sukadana,
thirty of which are in the Sambas district, each mine having at least
three hundred men, Chinese, employed in them. Their pay, one with
another, is four dollars per mensem.

The mines are rented from the rajah at the rate of fifty bunkals of
gold per mine per annum, beside a capitation tax of three dollars
per head on every Chinaman. There are thirty thousand Chinese in the
Sambas districts, and they feel themselves strong enough to oppose or
evade this tax; it hence becomes a perpetual contest between greedy
extortion on the one side, and avaricious chicane on the other;
there are beside about twelve thousand Malays and Dayers.

The Laurat gold mines are situated to the eastward of the town of
Sambas, and are particularly rich and productive. The mines of Siminis
are one day's journey from Sambas, up a small creek leading from
Sambas river, below the town; and the mines are abundant. Salako is
up a river fifteen miles south of the Sambas river; it lies nearly
forty miles up, but communicates with Sambas by another river:
here the metal is found more abundant than anywhere else; and twenty
thousand Chinese are found in this district. Mantrado is three days'
journey up the Mompava river; it is under an independent Malay
prince. Some accounts make the population of this district great,
near fifty thousand Dayers, Malays, and Chinese; but perhaps half
the number may be nearer the truth; these are chiefly employed on
the gold mines, and in producing food for the miners; these mines,
however, do not produce that quantity which they might under Chinese
management. Mandore is about a day's journey from Pontiana, and belongs
to the sultan; it is reckoned a very rich mine, though but recently
wrought. There are as yet only twelve parets of about two hundred
men each, but it is capable of extension. Likewise are found in this
district some very rich specimens of copper ore; it has not as yet
been wrought, gold being deemed a much more productive article. The
sultan wishes, however, he had some boring utensils and an experienced
miner, to enable him to decide whether it would be worth working under
the peculiar circumstances above mentioned. Numbers of Chinese are
settled in this district, and the population is annually increasing.

About three days' journey up the Pongole river lies the district of
Songo, with a population of twenty-five thousand souls, Dayers, and a
few Chinese, under a Malay and an independent prince. The population
is chiefly employed on the rich mines of gold in the neighborhood,
which is particularly pure and abundant; but the mines are not wrought
with the same industry as those under Chinese management. The Dutch
thought it of so much consequence as to keep a force at Songo, and to
place the present rajah on that musnud. About two days' journey farther
up lies another gold district, called Santam, the inhabitants of which
are principally Dayers. Beyond Santam, and higher up on the same river,
lies the town of Sukadow, abounding in gold, the inhabitants of which
are also Dayers.

Matan belongs to the rajah of that name: he had the title of Rajah
of Sukadana, until driven out of the latter place by the Dutch,
seventeen years ago. There are ten thousand Dayers in this district,
and a few Chinese and Malays. The mines of gold are abundant, and
capable of becoming highly productive, as well as the mines of iron
and unwrought tin; but the sultan is much addicted to the use of
opium, and hence neglects a valuable country, capable, under better
management, of becoming the most valuable district on all Borneo.

About three days' journey from Pontiana lies the celebrated mountain
of Landa, which, after Golconda, is the most valuable diamond mine
in the world. There are at least thirty thousand people, principally
Dayers, employed on the mines and agriculture; it belongs to a Malay
prince, raised to that musnud twenty-five years ago by the Dutch,
through the agency of the present Sultan of Pontiana: here also much
gold is produced; and much more might be had under proper management.

There is a very valuable gold mine in the north of Borneo, at a place
called Tampasuk, situated in the district ceded to the English by
the Sultan of Sulo; but having become the principal pirate port on
the coast, the working of the mines has been discontinued.

The whole produce of the gold mines of Sukadana is said to be
annually about twenty piculs, or a million of dollars, at twenty-five
dollars a bunkal; but no calculation of this sort can possibly be
correct. Living, as the Chinese do, under the rapacity of despotic
and ferocious freebooters, who are actuated by no one principle of
honor, justice, or good faith, it is their interest to conceal the
riches they amass, not only to preserve themselves from the clutches of
these tyrants, but as the most compact substance to transport to their
native shores, to which they repair with the fruits of their industry,
by the annual junks that arrive at Pontiana, leaving the mines to
new settlers: from two to three hundred leave Pontiana every year.

The standard of Slakow gold at Pontiana is affixed at twenty-three
Spanish dollars the bunkal, of two dollars weight. The Songo and
Laurat is twenty-five dollars the said bunkal.

Not having had an opportunity to inspect any of the gold mines
personally, I know not if the ores readily melt of themselves, or
whether they require the aid of any fluxes before they yield the metal;
but I believe the principal attention of the miners is directed to the
rich veins of pure native gold, and that no operation is performed
beyond that of pulverizing, and simple washing; all the gold about
Pontiana being in dust, though some I have met with in Borneo Proper
was run into bars. About Landa, where the diamonds are found, the whole
of the stratum is observed to be a clay of a red burnt appearance,
nearly to the same degree as that of burnt bricks, which gives to the
rivers hereabouts a peculiar tinge. Whether this has been formed by
the action of subterraneous fires, or is the effect of volcanoes or
earthquakes, I cannot decide; the latter are said to be frequently
felt at Pontiana and at Sambas; and the former are said to exist in
the central mountains of Borneo.

From the slovenly manner in which the diamonds are sought for by
the Dayers, they seldom collect them of a size exceeding three or
four carats weight each. When rough, the Landa diamond has a white
or yellow hue; but none are found of that inky and flinty tinge,
so valuable in some of the Golconda diamonds. But that Landa does
produce them of a very considerable size, the extensive and valuable
specimens in Java, as well as the quantities annually sent to Batavia,
will evince. The King of Matan is at this instant in possession of a
diamond weighing 367 carats: the value of which, according to the old
mode of calculation, would be (367 x 367 x 2 = 269,378_l._) The Sultan
of Pontiana says, however, that a much larger price was offered for it
by the Dutch government of Java. He refused, it is said, twenty-five
laks of dollars, two sloops of rice, fifty pieces of cannon, and
a hundred muskets. Several from twenty to thirty carats have been
dug up. At Mompava there are said to be very rich copper mines;
but from want of population, a vigorous government, and scientific
mineralogists, little is to be hoped from them at the present day. At
Pulo Bongorong, near Borneo Proper, there is plenty of loadstone found.

About one degree north of Sambas there is a country called Sarawak,
belonging to the Rajah of Borneo Proper; there is a vast district
abounding in tin, in veins as rich and as plentiful as those wrought
on Banca: but they have been neglected for a series of years; they
were partially wrought before those of the latter were discovered, in
the beginning of the last century. The tyranny of that government, the
want of hands, and the contiguity of rich and valuable gold-mines, have
together caused their utter neglect; and there is little probability
of more favorable results, except under a change of government,
and a happier order of things.

In the Matan districts there is an extensive and most valuable
iron-mine, producing pure metal without any admixture of ore: it is
fully equal in quality to the best Swedish iron. They run it into
shot, and much of it is exported; but the gold-mines in its vicinity,
and the want of a proper government, are obstacles to its further
productiveness and utility. At Maday, on the northeast coast of
Borneo, in the province of Mangidara, there is a very rich mine of
gold. Pasir and Coti, in the Straits of Macassar, produce considerable
quantities of gold; and gold and diamonds are brought down by the
river to Benjarmasing. I have, however, no accurate information on
the subject, and can simply note the general fact.

There are several fine specimens of crystal found at Kimanis and Sulo;
they call them water diamonds. To give full effect to the mines in
the kingdom of Sukadana, says the Sultan of Pontiana, and to raise
the excess of food required for the additional hands, would together
give employment to at least a million of Chinese. Under the British
flag, he thinks thousands of new settlers will find their way in the
annual junks.

All that extensive range, from Cape Unsing, passing by the Tawi Tawi
islands and Sulo, as far as Baselan, is one vast continued bed of
pearl-oysters, principally of the Behoren or mother-of-pearl-shell
species; these are called by the natives _tipi_. There is likewise
an extensive bed of the Ceylon oyster, called by the Malays _kapis_;
the principal banks of the latter are found in Maludu Bay. The Sulo
pearls have, from time immemorial, been the most celebrated, and
praised as the most valuable of any in the known world. Pigofetta,
the companion of Magalhaens, mentions having seen in 1520 two Sulo
pearls in the possession of the Rajah of Borneo as large as pullet
eggs. Very large ones, from one to two hundred _chaw_ weight, are at
all times to be purchased at Sulo; and there are altogether sold here
to the China junks, the Spaniards, &c. more than two laks of dollars
worth annually. The quantity of mother-of-pearl-shell, _communibus
annis_, sold there is two thousand piculs, at six dollars a picul. The
fishery is partly carried on by the Malays, and partly by the Chinese;
the large pearls they endeavor to conceal as much as possible, from
a law that all pearls above a certain size of right belong to the
sultan. "The small narrow guts," says Dalrymple in his account of the
Sulo seas, "about Tawi Tawi, are the most rich and valuable fishery in
the world." I have had an opportunity of inspecting the banks about
Manar and Tutacoryn, as well as all the banks in the Sulo seas; but
the former have not banks near as extensive, equaling in the quantity
of oysters, in productiveness, size, or richness, the Sulo pearl, nor
are they to be compared in any way to the Sulo beds. Still the Ceylon
fishery has netted the British Government from one to two laks of
pagodas for permitting it to be fished fourteen days annually. As this
portion of Borneo belongs to the English, a much greater revenue might
be drawn from these vast sources of wealth, under proper management.

As there are no people of sufficient opulence to contract for so vast
a fishery, the Company might undertake it themselves; three or four
gun-boats would be necessary to protect the fishermen; and a small
fort should be erected at Tambisan or Tawi Tawi. But it is necessary
to observe, the Sulo people do not practice diving at all, as is
the case at Beharen and Ceylon, but only comprehend the slow method
of dredging for the tipy with a thing like the fluke of a wooden
anchor. It would be a desirable thing, in the event of prosecuting
this valuable fishery as a national concern, to obtain forty or fifty
Arab divers from Beharen, and perhaps an equal number of Chulias
from Nagore and Negapatam, from the number employed annually on the
Ceylon fishery. These men would teach the Malay the superiority of
diving, which can, in fourteen days' fishing, bring into government
a revenue of two laks of pagodas, pay the expenses of the fishery,
and enrich all parties concerned; while the Malayan operose plan of
dredging perhaps affords but a precarious subsistence. But had they
divers, from the extent of the banks, instead of fourteen days in the
year, they might, one after another, be fished the whole year round,
and never be exhausted. The Chinese fishermen, though laborious,
possess no enterprise, and can never be prevailed on to dive, from
apprehension of the sharks. The Caffris from New Guinea and the Arroes
would be superior to them.

The Sultan of Sulo, in 1810, proposed to me to bring over one hundred
Chulia divers from Negapatam on our joint expense and profit: and
the divers agreed to go over on receiving each twenty-five rupees
advance, their victuals being found, and one-fourth of the produce of
oysters allowed them, as at Ceylon. Circumstances, however, occurred
to prevent an undertaking which I think must have turned out highly
lucrative. They dredge the banks all the year round. The water on the
Tahow, Maludu, and Tawi Tawi banks, is from seven to ten fathoms deep;
in other places they fish in fifteen fathoms water.

The Malays of Borneo understand the art of cutting, polishing, and
setting their diamonds. Gold and silver filagree works they excel in;
gunpowder is manufactured at Pontiana; brass cannon is cast at Borneo
Proper; iron-shot is run from their mine. They can manufacture and
repair krises, and clean their arms. Their carpentry extends to the
building and repairing of prows, and the erecting of a hut. Their
industry is further exerted in collecting birds'-nests and wax; in
cutting rattan and felling timber; in the pearl and tripan fisheries;
or as mariners in commercial or piratical pursuits. The tillage
of the ground and the edible fisheries are often left to the more
indefatigable industry of the Chinese. For the exercise of every
other useful occupation also, the mechanical and scientific arts,
and the labor of the mines, these indolent savages are indebted solely
to the superior industry and civilization of the Chinamen.

The amusements of the Malays in other parts are unpractised on the
shores of Borneo: the only ones I ever saw were flying the kite,
swimming, and the songs of their women; this latter is confined to
the rajahs.

Wherever a water-communication on Borneo presents, the indolence of the
Malay will not permit him to think of the construction of a road. In
the interior, however, there are pathways in all directions; about
Mompava, where the river is narrow and shallow, they have constructed
several roads. Being a people much occupied in maritime pursuits,
they prefer, like the amphibious Dutch, traveling by rivers, or the
innumerable cuts, canals, and creeks, which everywhere intersect the
country: beside, their prows afford more protection from surprise,
and they conceive their town as safer by being surrounded by a
jungle and situated in a swamp; nor have they any conception beyond
water-carriage.

Their laws neither depend upon the Koran nor any written code,
human or divine, beyond the whim and caprice of the chief (assassin)
and his gang of desperadoes. The Sultan of Pontiana has, however,
established the following regulations:

Punishments for murder:--Life for life, except when the parties can
commute the same by fine.



A proclamation is publicly affixed announcing the law, that if any
person be found adulterating gold-dust, or uttering it, so depreciated,
with a view to defraud, the perpetrator shall lose his right arm,
and the adulterated gold shall be confiscated.

For theft:--Five dollars per head is given by the sultan to any one
bringing in the head of a thief: if brought in alive, he is suspended
by the heels and flogged as far as nature can bear short of death,
and the punishment repeated _ad libitum_.

Prisoners taken from an enemy, whether found in arms or not, are made
slaves of, or suffer death, at the option of the captor.

The Malay government is said to exhibit the feudal system in its most
perfect form. The chief, or rajah, issues his orders to the Pangerans,
or princes of the blood; to the Datus, or nobles of royal descent;
or to the Orang Kayas, or wealthy vassals. All these obey and follow
him to war, free of expense, when the king is sufficiently powerful
to enforce it; but whenever the vassal feels himself strong enough
to throw off the yoke, and to assert his independence, he sets up for
himself. These vassals exact the same obedience from their slaves or
villains, who pay the like deference only so long as they are compelled
to observe and obey them. The property acquired by a slave he is often
allowed to enjoy unmolested during his lifetime; but at his death, his
master administers to the estate as heir, executor, and sole legatee.

In fact, it is a government that inspires on all sides one universal
distrust--that rules by precedents of oppression without a view
to protection. The chiefs dread the power of their vassals, who,
in return, apprehend everything from the rapacity of the governing
power; while the bulk of the people, having no property to lose, are
still compelled to appear abroad armed to defend their very persons
from the outrage and violence of the next assassin they meet.

Where governments not only tolerate murder, rapine, thefts, piracies,
conflagrations, with every outrage violating the happiness and safety
of society, but are the first to set the example and to consecrate the
atrocity--where the people are taught no one principle of morality
or religion--where the arts and sciences are wholly unknown or
despised--where the amusements and sociabilities of human life are
totally disregarded--where the bounties and comforts of nature are
rather dispensed with than enjoyed, and where the absolute necessaries
to existence and the decorations of life are more scanty and wretched
than yet discovered among the rudest set of barbarians extant; if,
from the experience of the past, expectations of the future are to be
formed, we may safely infer that every vestige of Malay government
and dominion will be ingulfed in the vortex of self and mutual
destruction. Such a system of society has in itself the seeds of
dissolution, and is rapidly verging to an inherent decay and general
oblivion, which it will doubtless meet, unless some beneficent power
arrest its baneful impetus, and direct its feverish energies through
channels calculated to promote the happiness and to consolidate the
welfare of the inhabitants of these scattered regions.

Should so fortunate an occurrence ever fall to the lot of
Borneo--should a strong and a wise government ever be established on
her shores--a government that will religiously respect property and
secure to industry the fruits of her labor--that will, by a wise system
of laws, protect the peaceable and punish the violator of the laws of
a well-organized society--that will direct their industry to useful
purposes, and check their propensities to violence and plunder--such
a government, in a short series of years, would behold, as if by
magic, a paradise burst from her wilds, see cultivation smile upon
her jungles, and hail a vast and increasing population, blessing the
hand that awoke them to life, to happiness, and to prosperity. That so
felicitous a change is not the mere reverie of a glowing imagination,
or the sheer effusion of benevolence alone, is easily demonstrable.

Whoever has seen the Egyptian fertility of the soil, from the
moistness of the climate, the numberless rivers meandering around and
intersecting the country in all directions, with the mild temperature
of the climate, from similar causes--whoever considers the vast extent
and inexhaustible wealth of her innumerable mines of pure native gold,
her block-tin, her copper, her iron, her diamonds, &c., her various
valuable fisheries of pearl and tripan--whoever views her ports,
her harbors, and her productive shores, at the threshold of the
over-teeming population of China, and at the same moment recollects
that the country abounds in various valuable products in the highest
possible estimation, and of increasing demand in the empire of China,
must easily conceive what a tempting field and rich harvest this
land of promise holds out to their industry and cupidity under such
a system of laws and government as we have deemed a _sine quâ non_.

If, under the present codes of tyranny, oppression, and general
ferocity, where nothing is permanent but violence and desolation--if,
under such a system of barbarism, a hundred thousand Chinese (which
is the fact) have found inducements sufficiently strong to settle on
her shores, what might we not hope and expect from the overburdened
population of that vast empire under a happier order of things? The
astonishing number of Chinese settled within a few years at Pulo
Pinang, on a contracted soil, possessing no peculiar advantages
but from a free trade and equitable laws impartially administered,
is both a fact and an illustration; and what might not Borneo hope
for from a happier soil, greater inducements, and other physical
advantages? Java, under the despotism of the Dutch, with the character
of a sickly climate, and the remembrance of the cruel massacre of sixty
thousand innocent Chinese, could still boast a hundred thousand of
these people at the period it fell to the British arms; and withal,
let it be remembered that these shores were once blessed with the
industry of these people to a far greater extent under a happier
period of her history.

Whatever, indeed, might prove the work of ages in various other parts
of the globe would, under the present circumstances of the Chinese
empire, be instantaneous on these shores; and their habits of industry
and civilization, when once rooted to the soil, would soon spread
their genial influence to the extensive population of the interior,
unite them in the bonds of social life, cement them in the general
prosperity, and render these extensive shores a valuable appendage
and an increasing resource to the wealth and power that brought about
so happy a revolution in their affairs.

For a considerable series of years past, the piratical ports of
Borneo, &c., have been in the habit of committing depredations upon
the commerce of British India, in the capture of her ships, the
insulting of her flag, the offering of outrageous violence to the
persons and lives of her mariners, merchants, &c., and this, too,
with the most perfect impunity; no retribution having been exacted,
no reprisals made, no remonstrance presented, and, in fact, no notice
taken of their atrocious depredations. Hence these desperadoes, from
inference and experience of the past, have been led to conclude, that
whatever was practicable would be tolerated; that wherever they had
the means or opportunity of overpowering, it was their duty, as it was
to their advantage, to seize it to their own use, without any other
apprehensions of the consequences than what might arise in the attempt.

Under this discouraging aspect of affairs, there was but little more
left to the commercial community of India than either to abandon the
valuable commerce of Borneo wholly; or, if allured to it by a prospect
of gain, to proceed in armed vessels at an increased expense and high
insurance, so as to cover the extraordinary risks. These enhanced
prices either operated as a prohibition to the trade, or circumscribed
it so much, that an occasional capture excited no surprise, and was
frigidly dismissed as a matter of course.

But, from the prodigious accession of territorial possession, including
the whole of the vast Dutch empire in the East, the communications
between these and British India have necessarily increased a thousand
fold; consequently, the recent alarming depredations upon our commerce,
the serious obstacles to a safe communication, almost tantamount to a
blockade of our Eastern ports by these pirates, imperiously call upon
the British Government to adopt the most energetic means and decisive
measures to crush their power and annihilate their resources, either by
extirpating them wholly, or placing them and their possessions under
such future control and checks, as shall prevent the possibility of
a revival of a power capable of recurring to enormities that have so
long outraged and disgraced the British flag in the Eastern seas.

The idea of extirpating whole hordes of piratical states, were it
possible, must, from its cruelty, be incompatible with the liberal
principles and humane policy of a British government. The simple
burning down of a Malay town can prove no serious impediment to
future piratical enterprises: constructed, as they are, of bamboos,
mats, and atap leaves, a town is almost rebuilt in the same period
of time as it takes to destroy it. The Dutch, who had centuries of
dear-bought experience, knew there was no other mode of prevention
and radical cure than building small redoubts at the principal towns,
and keeping up an adequate force to check piratical enterprises, and
to turn their restless minds to exertions of industry; satisfied if,
with the attainment of these objects, they covered the expenses of
the establishment. This is the true history of the innumerable little
forts on Celebes, Borneo, Timor, and all the Eastern isles.

The principal piratical ports that still exist, beside those of
Lingin, Rhio, and Billiton, are--1st, Pangeran Annam, at Sambas; 2d,
Port Borneo Proper, and four hundred prows at Tampasuk, both under the
Rajah of Borneo Proper; 3d, the Pasir pirates; 4th, the Sulo pirates;
5th, the Illano, or pirates on the Isle of Magindano.

I shall, from memory, cite such few of their depredations as I
recollect.

In 1774, says Forrest, the British were expelled from their infant
settlement of Balambangan by an insurrection of the Sulos, who,
finding the garrison weak and sickly, unprepared and off their guard,
murdered and plundered them, and set fire to their settlement:--this
was in return for having released their sultan from prison, and
reëstablished him on the musnud of his ancestors. In 1800, Captain
Pavin and a boat's crew were cruelly murdered in the palace of the
Sultan of Sulo while the commander was drinking a cup of chocolate:
they fired upon the ship Ruby, but did not succeed in capturing her. In
1810, they plundered the wreck of the ship Harrier of a valuable cargo:
several of her crew are still in slavery at Bagayan Sulo. In 1788,
the ship May of Calcutta, 450 tons burden, Captain Dixon, was cut off
at Borneo Proper: they were invited up to the town with the ship,
and while at dinner, the sultan and his people fell upon them, and
murdered Captain Dixon, three officers, and ten Europeans; the lascars
were retained in slavery, the valuable cargo plundered, and the ship
burnt. In 1803 the ship Susanna of Calcutta, Captain Drysdale, was
cut off near Pontiana by the Sambas and Borneo pirates; the Europeans
were all massacred, and the vessel taken. In 1769, Captain Sadler,
with his boat's crew, was murdered by the Sambas pirates off Mompava,
having a prodigious quantity of gold-dust: they did not succeed in
cutting off the ship. In 1806, Mr. Hopkins and crew, of the Commerce,
were murdered by the pirates of Borneo Proper; the ship was plundered
by them and the Sambas pirates. In 1810, Captain Ross was cut off. In
1811, Captain Graves was cut off by the Pasir pirates with a rich
cargo. In 1812, the enormities of Pangeran Annam have out-heroded
Herod: these are too recent to require recapitulation. Independent
of his depredations on the Coromandel, a Portuguese ship, &c., nine
Europeans of the Hecate have been seized and made slaves; two have
been since murdered; two have escaped; and five are hamstrung and
otherwise maimed. Mrs. Ross and her son are still in slavery there.

The Tampasuk pirates, belonging to the Rajah of Borneo Proper, aiding
and abetting Pangeran Annam against the English, are Datu Akop,
Datu Aragut, and Datu Jumbarang, with ten large men-of-war prows:
there is also there the Rajah Endut, a Siak chief.

Matan is under an independent rajah, who was formerly styled Sultan
of Sukadana; but about seventeen years ago the Dutch burnt down his
city. At length, by some pecuniary aid received from the late Sultan of
Pontiana, he was enabled to reëstablish his affairs as Rajah of Matan;
and, in consideration of this aid, entered into a treaty of alliance,
which stipulated, that on his daughter's marriage with the grandson
of the late, and son of the present. Sultan of Pontiana, he would
cede his kingdom and large diamond as a marriage-portion: the parties
yet remain single. Under the head mineralogy we have pointed out how
valuable a country this might become under better management. Iron,
gold, tin, and diamonds abound here; also much wax, pepper, rattans,
garu, and about two piculs of the finest birds'-nests, which sell at
twenty-eight dollars the catty at Pontiana. Most of the trade finds
its way to Pontiana, Benjar, or Java, in prows. The population is
about ten thousand Dayers, &c.

Sukadana, once the most celebrated city on Borneo, as the name implies,
a terrestrial paradise, the capital of a kingdom and a great mart of
trade, since burnt down and destroyed by the Dutch, exhibits nothing
but ruins. There still remain numberless delicious fruit-trees, and
a country still susceptible of general cultivation, being yet clear
of jungle and morass. It is utterly abandoned: that it has not been
rebuilt is owing to the Rajah of Pontiana, at whose suggestion it was
destroyed, and whose interest it was to keep it down, having himself
risen upon its ashes.

There are no towns of any importance between Matan and Pontiana. The
rise of this dynasty of sultans has been noted in another place; it
is, however, almost the only power that has been expressly raised,
supported, and that still exists, by commerce. It is situated in
latitude 4° north of the equator. The river has two mouths to it; the
northern mouth is the deepest, the most direct, and of the greatest
breadth; there are in this branch only two reaches up to the town. The
city is no more than fifteen miles from the mouth of the rivers; its
site is on the junction of the Matan and Landa rivers. About two-thirds
of the way up it is fortified; first, with a battery on piles in the
center of the stream, mounting five guns; on the left bank is another
with wooden pales, mounting likewise five guns; on the opposite bank
is a third, similar to the foregoing, with a like number of cannon;
and, lastly, on the same bank is their grand battery, constructed of
stone, mounting five eighteen-pounders, at the batu, or rock. Here the
mausoleum of the royal family is erected, containing the tomb of the
late sultan. The whole of this side of the river exhibits the marks
of infant cultivation. The jungle has been, in part, cleared away,
and here and there a solitary hut greets the eye. The sultan's palace
has a battery of eleven guns of all sizes; none of these are calculated
to make any serious resistance. So sensible is the sultan of this that
he has commenced staking round with piles a low, swampy island, just
detached from the palace. On this stands the grand mosk. He proposes
throwing mud and stones within the ranges of piles, and planting
upon them the heaviest-calibered cannon: it is a commanding site,
and capable of being rendered formidable. There are no roads about
Pontiana; the town is situated in the midst of a swamp, so low that
the tide at high water overflows the lower parts of the houses, and
this, with the addition of a country overrun with impenetrable jungle,
renders it extremely unhealthy, and a most disagreeable residence.

The campo China contains about two thousand souls, and lies on the left
bank of the Matan river, abreast of the palace; the campo Buguese,
on the right bank of the Landa; and the campo Malayu adjoins the
palace. The whole population is about seven thousand souls: no Dayers
are found hereabout. The whole of the districts under Pontiana produce
about three hundred coyans of rice, the average selling price of which
is from fifty-five to seventy Spanish dollars the coyan. The king's
revenue is forty thousand dollars per annum. The Chinese plead poverty,
but some of the Buguese are pointed out as wealthy. The quantity of
gold that finds its way to Pontiana is annually from three to four
piculs. The imports there consist of opium, iron, steel, salt, rice,
hardware, cutlery, blue and white gurras, salampories, Java cloths,
gunpowder, beside China produce of all possible descriptions. They
make their returns in gold, diamonds, birds'-nests, wax, rattans,
garu, ebony, agar-agar; beside pepper, sago, camphor, cassia, tripan,
&c. brought here by the prows: five Chinese junks annually visit
Pontiana, bringing down produce amounting to about fifty thousand
dollars. The depredations of the Pangeran Annam prevent an extension
of this most useful of all trades to this country. One or two Siamese
junks arrive annually. The Tringanu, Timbilan, Karimata, and Borneo
Proper prows trade here; and before Java fell to the British arms,
the Buguese from the eastward traded here to a considerable amount.

The stone walls built by the Dutch still encompass the palace. The
piles on which their factory stood are yet discernible, but the
buildings have been pulled down. Should the English hoist their flag
here, a new factory must be erected; the most eligible situation for
which would be where the mosk now stands, or the mosk itself might
be converted into one, and another rebuilt elsewhere; but to this
the sultan has insuperable objections. In an English fort, to think
to have a mosk open to the ingress of a large body of Malays at all
times is wholly incompatible with a certain reserve and security
required from it. Beside, as the island is small, and soldiers at
times inconsiderate, they might profane or defile its holy precincts,
and thus lay the foundation of perpetual disputes, or even a serious
rupture. The fort and factory, if built at all at Pontiana, must hence
be fixed in some detached place. The sultan is building a new palace
and covering it with tiles; a novelty in this quarter. There is but
a scanty supply of fowls and buffaloes, and the necessaries of life
are scarce and dear. It is altogether the most uncouth and dreary
spot under the sun, though the sultan prefers it to Sambas and Mompava.

Their naval force consists of two small ships, two brigs, fifty prows
large and small, and about one thousand men. There is water on the bar
to admit vessels drawing nine feet water. The roadstead, with seven
fathoms water on it, lies seven miles from the river's mouth. Care
must be taken not to mistake the Pongole river seen from the offing,
and which lies ten miles farther southward. The only stock procurable
here were hogs at ten dollars the picul, and water shipped off in
China tank-boats at four and a half dollars the ton.

The next port is Mompava, about sixteen miles to the northward of
Pontiana, and the second port belonging to the sultan. The river is
shallow, narrow, extremely serpentine, and constantly running down
with great rapidity. The country around is a paradise in comparison
with Pontiana. It is upon an elevated site, and, wherever the eye
reaches, it is clear of jungle, and of fine rich mold, susceptible
of the highest culture. There is a walk up to the town about eight
miles from the mouth of the river; here the fishing-stakes nearly
extend across the river, beside two miserable forts, mounting each
five or six pounders, to defend the river. The population is seven
thousand men, Malays, Buguese, and Dayers, and about two thousand
Chinese. Formerly the territory of Mompava extended as far as 1° north
latitude. This territory belonged to a chief or rajah, reduced by the
Dutch twenty-five years ago, shortly after they settled at Pontiana;
the territory thus conquered was delegated in trust to the Rajah of
Pontiana. The Sambas rajah has forcibly taken possession of a part
of it. Sultan Kassim, of Pontiana, governed this district during his
father's lifetime. On his accession to the musnud, five years ago, he
placed a half-brother there, a stupid fellow, about twenty-five years
of age. This man, about eight months ago, was trying to establish his
independence, which he found he could not maintain. It has the same
trade as Pontiana, but the regulations of the sultan do not admit of
any vessel's touching here for that purpose. The palace is extensive,
paled round with a sort of a fortification. The campo China, in
October last, was in part burnt down by the people of Sambas, to the
number of four hundred houses. There is a variety of roads hereabout;
one leading to Sambas, one to Landa, one to Mintrada, &c. Groves of
cocoanut-trees mark the site of ancient villages, since demolished; and
indicate that it once enjoyed a superiority and preëminence, of which
it has been despoiled. In point of susceptibility of cultivation, it
is a full half century beforehand with Pontiana; it is capable of great
improvement, and much grain might be raised with very little trouble.

There is a considerable mud-flat at the mouth of the Sambas river,
extending four or five miles out, but no regular bar. Vessels
drawing thirteen feet may get in at high water springs; nine feet is
the least water, and there is thirteen at the flood. In the offing
there is a rise and fall of seven feet. At the entrance of the river
neither shore must be too closely hugged, having ledges of rocks near
them. Twelve miles above the bar the river branches into two parts;
the broad or northern branch is called the Borneo river, having its
source in Kiney Baulu; the other, leading to the town of Sambas,
is named the Landa river, having its source in the diamond mines;
where these two unite below there was formerly a fort. The Landa
river is extremely serpentine, deep to the very bushes on both sides,
and quite clear of danger up to the town, except near Siminis creek,
about ten miles below the fort; here a reef of rocks runs across
the stream, and as the fair way over them is somewhat intricate,
the channel ought to be buoyed before attempted to be passed. The
Barracouta, drawing thirteen feet, just scraped them at high water.

About five or six leagues up the Landa branch, and about thirteen from
the sea, stands the town and palace of Sambas, on the confluence of the
Landa and Salako rivers. The fort on the right bank of the Landa is
about a league below the town, built of two rows of large piles, the
interstices being filled up with mud and stones, apparently mounting
five guns, eighteens and twelves in the lower tier, and an equal number
of smaller caliber on the ascend or more elevated range. A boom or
dam of fishing-stakes was constructed across the river one-eighth of a
mile below the fort, a large armed prow was moored in the center of the
river, mounting two long twelves, and a masked battery opposite to the
right, the number of guns unknown. The reach which these forts command
is a mile and a half. The land makes an elbow where these forts are,
which obliged the Barracouta to haul athwart the river, to get her
broadside to bear. The whole of this Landa river is very narrow,
but near the forts not one-third additional to her length. Both
sides of this river toward the fort appear tolerably clear from
the mast-head, interspersed with pleasant hills inhabited by the
Chinese. The tides are pretty regular, six hours and six hours,
running a knot and a half per hour. This river is too serpentine
and narrow to admit sailing up; sweeps, towing, or tiding it up are
the only modes that can be resorted to. The great branch of Borneo
river, before mentioned, when up it twenty miles, divides into two;
the branch running north being called Tampasan river, the other still
retaining the name of Borneo. The Tampasan branch leads to old Sambas;
it is from hence they get their supplies of rice and provisions,
by the two cuts above the town of Sambas, which reunites the Landa
and Borneo streams. There are roads from the great branch leading
to the town, fort, and palace. Since the Dutch abandoned Sambas,
three sultans have reigned on this musnud (within fifty years, or
thereabout). There are four Pangerans, Annam being the most daring of
the whole. His naval force consists of the Portuguese ship of 400 tons,
one brig, and eight or ten large fighting prows, beside his allies
from Borneo Proper, with ten large prows. The population amounts to
twelve thousand Dayers and Malays, and thirty thousand Chinese.

Under the head mineralogy we have given a detailed account of the
principal sources of its industry. Sambas produces, beside gold, ten
piculs of birds'-nests annually (of an inferior quality), much ebony,
rattans, wax, &c. The trade here is much the same as at Pontiana,
and susceptible of a tenfold increase: it is every way superior to the
latter for the capital of a large mart. The country is better cleared,
and hence susceptible of more easy cultivation; the land more elevated
and less swampy, consequently healthier; the river deeper and farther
navigable; the population more dense, and, the land being clear of
jungle, more capable of being increased. Beside, it is the vicinage of
the most considerable gold-mines on all Borneo. The Sultan of Pontiana
would make it his capital if desired; his apprehensions of the power
of the Sambas princes lead him to give the preference to Pontiana.

The town of Calaca, belonging to the Rajah of Borneo Proper, lies
north of Tanjong Datu; it is the principal port of trade south of
the capital, and the mart of the Sedang country. Here much grain
is produced, one hundred piculs of black birds'-nests, two hundred
piculs of wax, some gold, pepper, camphor, &c., but the tin-mines,
before mentioned, are utterly neglected. There are several other towns
upon each of the rivers along this coast; the principal ones are Salat,
Bacalo, Pasir, and Baram. They produce nearly the same articles as the
above, which are, however, sent on to the capital as fast as collected.

It is here necessary to observe, that all the rocks and shoals laid
down on this coast do not exist at all; such as Volcano Island, the
Byhors, Krenpel, the whole Slykenburgh, five Comadas, &c. Having
beat up this coast twice, and carefully surveyed the whole, I can
declare a finer and clearer coast does not anywhere exist. The old
chart, published by A. Dalrymple, is much more correct than the recent
ones. The numbers of immense drifts and floating isles hereabout must
have given birth to all these imaginary dangers.

The town of Borneo Proper, the capital of the kingdom of the same
name, lies in latitude 5° 7' north; it is situated fifteen miles up
one of the finest rivers in the world, with three fathoms low water on
the bar, and a rise and fall of fifteen feet. A correct plan of the
river and town is published by Mr. Dalrymple. Here are mud docks for
vessels of 500 or 600 tons. The town consists of about three thousand
houses, built on stakes, in the middle of the river, with a population
altogether of fifteen thousand souls, Chinese, Malays, Moruts, &c.

The palace is slightly fortified; but the Rajah of Pontiana says, the
Rajah of Borneo Proper is preparing the means of defence, apprehending
the resentment of the English in vindicating the rights of their flag,
so frequently insulted by them with impunity; however, as there is
sufficient water for a line-of-battle ship to the city, nothing need
be apprehended from them. The remains of a stone fort up the river
are still seen, but the one on Pulo Laboan is destroyed. Both banks
of the river are planted with pepper, which formerly produced sixty
thousand piculs annually; these are now running to decay from want
of commerce. The Chinese junks, for years past, have ceased touching
here, from the numberless piratical depredations committed upon them;
and the Portuguese from Macao have attempted to renew the trade
from time to time, but at length, in 1808, their agent withdrew to
Macao, a large ship having been cut off and the crew murdered the year
preceding. They now have no other resource but piracy; and the produce,
such as it is, finds its way in prows to Tringan, Sambas, Pontiana,
Lingin, and Malacca. Very large quantities of the finest camphor in
the world are procurable here; it comes down from the Morut country, by
the great river; a great deal of wax, some gold, much birds'-nests of
an inferior quality, any quantity of sago, cassia, clove-bark, pepper,
betel-nut, rattans, camphor-oil, &c., tripan, tortoise-shell, &c.

The hills hereabout are clear of jungle, and wear a beautiful
appearance, and, without the aid of history, bear evident marks of
a more extensive population and culture. There are plenty of black
cattle, buffaloes, goats, fruits and vegetables of all kinds, abundance
and variety of fish, turtle, &c. The articles best suited for this
market are coarse China, white cangyans, brass plates, China crockery,
brass wire, tea, sugar-candy, coarse China silks and satins, blue and
white coarse guras and salampories, coarse ventipallam handkerchiefs,
arcot chintzes, iron and steel, quallies, cooking utensils, and other
articles suited to a Malay market--all coarse; no opium. The Borneo
catty is two and a half lbs.

The English have been very desirous of a port in the China seas for
ages past, but have generally appeared to stumble on the most unhealthy
and ill-adapted places possible, such as Balambangan, Pulo Condore,
&c.; and even the principal object of Lord Macartney's embassy was
the obtaining of a cession of this nature. But if a capital harbor,
a navigable and majestic river, a productive country, a healthy site,
population ready formed, and a commerce all sufficient to pay the
expenses of an establishment (within one hundred miles of Balambangan)
is required, the East India Company ought to have pitched upon Borneo
Proper. It was once a most flourishing country, and a very short
period under British auspices would render it the first mart in the
East for China-Malayan commerce. There are large, populous towns of
Moruts, and Orang Idan, who abhor the Malays, but who would be soon
reconciled to a milder and less traitorous government.

Kimanis lies in latitude 5° 8' north; this is the first port on this
coast ceded to the English by the Sultan of Sulo. The town lies ten
miles up the river, at the foot of some of the most beautiful hills
I ever saw, and is inhabited by thirty-five thousand Orang Idan. The
river is small, and almost choked up at the mouth. This province
has the following sea-ports in it, viz., Kimanis, Benome, Papal,
and Pangalat, each governed by Orang Kayas, which still continue
to send their produce to Borneo Proper, consisting of ten piculs
of birds'-nests annually, two hundred piculs of wax, two piculs of
camphor, and cassia, sago, betel-nut, and pepper, as much as required;
tripan, camphor-oil, and rice; with fruit, fish, and provisions,
of sorts which are cheap and plentiful. The articles mentioned as
fit for Borneo answer here, only their produce is had about fifty
per cent cheaper.

The province of Kiney Baulu has the following seaports:--Putatan,
Mangatal, Innanam, Labatuan, Mangabong, Tawaran, Sulaman, Ambung, Abai,
Tampasuk, and Padasan. The whole of this province is tremendously
high. The stupendous mountain of Kiney is about fifteen miles from
Tampasuk, which at present is the most considerable pirate-port in the
Malay seas, and belongs to the Rajah of Borneo Proper. The pirates
frequenting this place have committed such depredations hereabout
as to have induced the English to call the north of Borneo Pirates'
Point. These desperate banditti originally resided at Tawaran, but
were compelled to leave it from the resentment of whole tribes of
Orang Idan. The whole of this province is very fertile; it is the
source of all the great rivers on the island, and is more populous
with the aborigines of the country than perhaps the rest of the island
put together. The gold mines of Tampasuk have been mentioned; there
are also mines of rock-crystal. Tawaran and several other places
abound in goats and cattle. Abai has a small harbor, and the whole
of this coast is accurately laid down by Lieutenant James Burton,
in the sloop Endeavor. There are produced in this province much
wax, tortoise-shell, very fine camphor, sago, rattans, and a red
birds'-nest (which comes from Mantanane isle to Pandasan). They send
their produce to Borneo Proper. The pirates are commanded by Datus
from Borneo Proper. The lake in the vicinity of Kiney Baulu is said
to be delightful; it is many miles in circumference, well cultivated,
populous, and productive. It is said to be very cold, from the extreme
elevation, and the inhabitants are almost as fair as Europeans. There
is a valuable coral-tree somewhere hereabout.

The Bay of Maludu, on the north of Borneo, is thirty miles in length,
and from four to six in breadth, with numberless rivers flowing into
it. There is no danger on the right-hand shore going up, but what
is seen; on the larboard shore considerable coral-reefs are met
with. Laurie and Whittle's chart of it is tolerably correct. The
principal towns are, Sungy Bassar, nearly at the head of the bay,
and Bankaka, on the left; the former, under Sheriff Mahomed, sends
its produce to Sulo; the latter, under Orang Kayas, trades with Borneo
Proper. The British, when last at Balambangan, threw up a small redoubt
on the Bankaka side, with a view to supplies of rice and provisions;
and this part is tranquil and a good roadstead, being sheltered from
the swell brought in by the sea-breeze.

The rich and valuable fishery of copis or Ceylon oyster in this bay
has been mentioned; it might be rendered of considerable value. The
whole of the rivers for miles up abound in rattans; Mr. A. Dalrymple
thinks four thousand tons might be easily cut down every year without
exhausting it, and sent by junks to China. There are forests of
beautiful pines of stately growth, well calculated for the largest
masts, and in high esteem at China. There is no quarter of the world
which abounds more in that species of the sea-turtle (called by the
Malays pakayan) which yields the shell; any quantity may be had on
all the shores and isles of this bay.

The interior abounds in camphor, which can be had in any quantities;
so vastly abundant is it, and so little does the Orang Idan know of
the extreme value of this commodity, that a bamboo of camphor may
be procured in exchange for a bamboo of salt. The petty towns are
Sandeck, Bowengun, Patasan, Pone, and Milawi. It produces in one
year two hundred piculs of wax, fifty piculs of tortoise-shell,
ten piculs of best camphor, and as much inferior; ten piculs of
birds'-nests, at ten dollars the catty; 1st camphor, twenty-five;
rattans, one dollar per picul; tortoise-shell, one dollar the catty;
wax, twenty the picul. Articles required are the same as at Borneo
Proper. Rice, provisions, fish, and fruits are abundant and cheap;
the sugar-cane also.

The province of Paytan is the principal district for camphor of any
in the world. Whole forests for miles everywhere meet the eye, and
the produce from them is the finest that can be conceived, large and
transparent as Chin-chew sugar-candy. The principal towns are Pitan,
Kinarubatan, Kulepan, and the famous town of Sugut. The coast is so
full of coral-reefs, and has been so very indifferently surveyed,
that it is only frequented by prows; there is a road from Sugut to
Bankaka in Maludu Bay. Much wax, tripan, sago, &c., is produced here.

Labuk has the towns of Camburcan, Labuk, and Songsohi; its produce is
somewhat similar to that of Paytan, with the addition of clove-bark
and birds'-nests.

Sandakan. This celebrated harbor has been already mentioned as one
of the finest in the world. The towns within it are Towsam, Duyom,
Lu, Bokean, Dom or Doung, Seagally-hood and Tong luly luku; all
these are governed by Datus from Sulo, who have expressly settled
here to collect the prodigious quantities of birds'-nests abounding
in this district. They are procured here at ten dollars the catty;
and sent to Sulo, with tripan, wax, &c. The Sulos are very jealous of
any ships going in here, and will leave no attempt untried in cutting
off a vessel going in, although an English port.

In the province of Mangidora lies the great river Kinnabatingan,
which is navigable a vast way up, with several towns of Orang Idan
on its shores. The other towns are Salasany, Supabuscul, Tambesan,
which forms also an elegant harbor, Laboan or Saboan, Tuncu, Salurong,
Giong, and Maday, which has a gold-mine, before mentioned. The whole
of this province, it is said, will produce above one hundred piculs
of the finest birds'-nests, much black ditto, some camphor, tripan,
honey, wax, dammer, Buru mats, fine spars; sago and pepper were
formerly largely cultivated here. The pearl-banks of Tawi Tawi have
been mentioned.

Tirun. The sea-ports of this last mentioned and valuable province,
ceded to the English by the Sulos, are chiefly inhabited by Buguese
people. The towns are Sibuku, Sambakung, Leo or Ledong, Sikatak,
Sabellar, Kuran or Barrow, Talysion Dumaung, Tapeandurian. The
principal ports are Kuran and Sibuku; they produce a large quantity
of very fine white birds'-nests, a quantity of black ditto, much
dammer, sago, tripan, wax, rattans, camphor, honey, Buru mats, gold,
&c. The people of Tapeandurian are represented as very ferocious,
and the sea-coast hereabout requires surveying.

The ports of Pasir and Coti originally belonged to the King of
Benjarmasing; very fine birds'-nests are procured here at twenty
dollars the catty; much gold, tripan, wax, &c.

Were Borneo to be settled, I think the principal factory ought to be
at Borneo Proper; the second at Sambas; the third at Benjarmasing;
the fourth at Pasir; the fifth at Tabesan or Sandakan.

In looking over the map of the world, it is a melancholy reflection to
view so large a portion of the habitable globe as all Borneo abandoned
to barbarism and desolation; that, with all her productive wealth
and advantages of physical situation, her valuable and interesting
shores should have been overlooked by all Europeans; that neither
the Dutch nor the Portuguese, with centuries of uncontrolled power in
these seas, should have shed a ray of civilization on shores bordering
upon their principal settlements; that her ports and rivers, instead
of affording a shelter to the extensive commerce of China, should
at this enlightened period of the world hold out only terror and
dismay to the mariner; and that all that she should have acquired
from the deadly vicinage and withering grasp of Dutch power and
dominion has been the art of more speedily destroying each other,
and rendering themselves obnoxious to the rest of mankind. Now that
her destinies are transferred to the enlightened heads and liberal
hearts of Englishmen,--now that her fortunes are embarked under the
administration of a wise and liberal government,--we may confidently
hope that a happier order of things will, under the blessing of an
all-ruling Providence, speedily restore these extensive shores to
peace, to plenty, and to commerce; and we ardently trust that another
age may not be suffered to pass away without exhibiting something
consolatory to the statesman, the philosopher, and the philanthropist.





No. V.

_Extracts from the late Mr. Williamson's Journal._


In October, 1845, Mr. Brooke commissioned some of the European
gentlemen of his party to make a tour of inspection through the
outlying Dyak tribes dependent on Sarawak, for the purpose of
ascertaining their condition and prospects, and taking steps for the
redress of any grievances of which they might have to complain. A few
extracts from the rough journal kept on that occasion by Mr. Williamson
may not be uninteresting to the reader, as showing what a large
measure of success had already attended Mr. Brooke's wise and earnest
efforts to restore peace and plenty to the poor persecuted Dyaks;
what incessant vigilance on his part was still requisite to check the
inveterate propensity of the knavish Malays to plunder and oppress
them; and with what well-directed activity he pursues his labors
for the physical welfare and the moral regeneration of his subjects
and neighbors.

"_Wednesday, Oct. 8th._--At 11 A.M. arrived at Pankalum Bunting,
where we found about thirty Dyaks in a small hut ready to welcome us,
and carry our luggage up to the village. At one o'clock started for
the Bakar village, about five miles from the landing place, at the
foot of the Sadong hills. This tribe consists of one hundred families,
occupying four villages. There are about twenty-five houses in Mungu
Babi (_i. e._ Hog Hill), the village where we are at present, and
five padi stores. It is very recently that the Dyaks have ventured
to store their padi in houses. At 8 P.M. attended the feast given in
our honor, where we saw the women dancing; they appeared very happy,
and pleased to see us.

"_9th._--This morning we had all the Orang Kayas of the four villages,
who informed me they were very comfortable and happy. I told them the
object of my mission, at which they all seemed pleased, and said that
that if they were oppressed they would come to Sarawak and complain
to the Tuan Besar, When I asked them about the Sadong Dyaks, they said
I should hear all when I met them, as they will hide nothing from me.

"The only thing these Dyaks complain of is, that Nakodah Mahomed told
them he had the Tuan Besar's chop, and gave them to understand that the
powder, muskets, &c., in his possession, belonged to the Tuan Besar;
in consequence of which they carried these goods for Nakodah Mahomed
without receiving any payment for their labor. I told them that in
future they need not carry goods for any man coming from Sarawak, or
elsewhere, without due payment in ready money; and that should traders
at any time leave their goods in the Dyak houses, they need not be
alarmed, but bring the goods to the Tuan Besar and tell him how they
were left behind. They further told me that the Siringi wish to claim
their siri cave, where they get their birds'-nests which is close
to Kumpung, and has belonged to them as long as they can remember;
that this cave is a whole day's journey from Siring--how, then, can
it belong to the Siringi? I answered, that on my return the Tuan Besar
would set the matter right, and give the cave to its proper owners.

"_Same day._--Proceeded to Jinan, about eight miles distant. There
are here fifteen houses, and the Dyaks are very comfortable, having
plenty of grain, and being well off for sugar-cane, sweet potatoes,
plantains, betel-nut, beside various other fruit-trees. The houses
here, as at Mungu Babi, are very shabby.

"_10th._--This morning met Orang Kaya Kusunan, who told me the
Toup Dyaks were waiting half way to receive us. At 4 P.M. I had the
Orang Kaya Tumangong of Toup, and the Orang Kaya of Kurran, Si Labi,
Si Mabong, Daah, Bugu (Sadong tribes), and the Orang Kaya Pasunan,
beside other Dyaks, the Bandar Cassim, with his Sadong Malays, and our
own people, at the house where I was staying. I explained my mission
to them, and made them understand that, at the Bandar's express wish,
the Tuan Besar had sent me to them to ascertain their condition. The
Bandar then told them it was his wish to institute the same laws and
customs as at Sarawak; after which, I informed the Dyaks that there
will be no more forcing of goods on them at exorbitant prices, and
that for the future, should any one 'serra' them, they must complain
to the Bandar, and subsequently lay their case before Mr. Brooke. The
conference, I am glad to say, ended to every one's satisfaction.

"At 8 P.M. the Orang Kaya Rih and two others of the same tribe
complained to me of their grievances, and told me that Si Tore,
a Sadong man, had forced 10 pieces of iron, weighing 15 catties,
on them about two years and a half ago, and that he now demanded 100
pasus of padi for it. (This is serra with a vengeance: 100 pasus are
equal to 2 1/2 tons weight!) They had paid 10 pasus; should they,
they asked me, pay the rest? I told them I would settle the business
at Bandar Cassim's village.

"_11th._--The Dyaks gave us a feast last night; the women danced and
the merriment was kept up till morning. At 11 started in boats with
Bandar Cassim, and at 2 P.M. arrived at his village [34] called * * *,
where every thing had been got ready for our reception; a house was
well fitted with gay curtains and mats, and after a salute of three
guns as we approached, we took up our residence and made ourselves
very comfortable. At 7 in the evening we met all the respectable
part of the community of this little Malay village. I told them what
I was sent for, the Bandar as usual giving way to our wishes, and
repeating that Sarawak and Sadong, and Sadong and Sarawak, were as
one country. I told Si Tore, Sebi Gani, and Sirdeen, that they must
make no further demands on the Rih Dyaks, and that neither they nor
anybody else could serra the Dyaks any longer--not even the Bandar
himself; for they must recollect that the Sadong Dyaks would take
refuge in Sarawak if oppressed.

"After the Bandar had left, the brother-in-law of the Orang Kaya
of Sinkaru, together with the Orang Kaya of Si Nankau Kujang, and
Orang Kaya Kurang, came to me. The former of these complained that
Abang Tahar (the old Patingi's son-in-law), about two years ago,
forced a small tatawak [35] and one brass dish on them, for which
he demanded three Dyaks as slaves, whom he seized at the time and
took away, and that now he demanded another Dyak boy. I replied they
were on no account to comply, that they must complain to the Bandar;
and if he took no notice of it, to go to Sarawak to the Tuan Besar.

"The Orang Kaya likewise told me that formerly there were twenty-five
families in his tribe, but now they were reduced to fifteen, the
rest having been seized and sold into slavery! (Here follow other
complaints. The day's journal concludes thus:)--The Sinkaru Dyaks have
not yet returned to their former Tumbawong, [36] but are scattered
about in the jungle and very poorly off. I told them to return to
their former place of residence, and to collect the tribes there.

"_Sunday, 12th._--Orang Kaya Si Rubin and Orang Kaya Signa Mantay,
of Rubin, likewise came to me to say that they were scattered, some
at * * * some at Bedope, and some at Rubin, and all badly off for
grain. When collected, they have about thirty families; formerly
they had about fifty. Those missing had mostly been seized and made
slaves. At 11h 30m we started for * * * (part of Rubin tribe), where
we arrived about half-past two. We found one house with five families
in it, and a Pangah [37] attached. Pa Rigan, the * * * of this tribe,
told me that Abang Tahar, Abang Ally, Abang Bakar, &c. &c. (all of
Gadong, under Patingi Müel), demand from the Dyaks old serras, which
have been paid long ago. Dangon, a Sirkaru Dyak, told me that Abang
Tahar, a short time since, demanded from his tribe a Dyak boy, and
four Dyak boys from the En Singi Dyaks. Bandar Cassim put a stop to
these demands at the time; but he has revived them since. The Malays
of Sadong, whenever they go among the Dyaks, seize their fowls, eggs,
rice, cocoa-nuts, and all sorts of property. The Bandar tells me he
never permits these people to go among the Dyaks, but that they do
it by stealth over land, and that the Tuan Besar must do something
to prevent them from oppressing and frightening the Dyaks. (Here
follow other complaints against the Gadong people, after which the
journal continues.)

"_13th._--Girang, a Bedope Dyak of the Rubin tribe, told me how
very much he is bullied and troubled by the Gadong people, who are
constantly threatening to attack him. I advised him to collect the
tribe at Rubin, their old Tumbawong. At 7 started back for the Bandar's
village, where we arrived at 10 o'clock. After a bath and breakfast,
the Bandar's mother came to me with a present of two sarongs, one
for the Tuan Besar and one for myself, and begged that I would urge
the Tuan Besar to take care of the Bandar as if he were his own son,
and not to cast him off. I told her that Mr. Brooke would support
the Bandar as long as he conducted himself properly. The Orang Kaya
Baga, Orang Kaya Sinching of Milikin, * * * of En Tayen, Orang Kaya
Laja of Rahmone, Orang Kaya Rinjou of Sirkaru, Orang Kaya Mior
Muntah, Pangara Lilli of Bunan, Orang Kaya Nijou of Mapuh, Orang
Kaya Ganggong of En Kelas, and Pangara Achong of En Singi, all met
me. I told them the object of my mission in presence of the Bandar
and several other Malays, and they were highly delighted. They asked
me to allow the Bandar to govern them, as they are much troubled
by the Gadong people. Abang Tahar lately demanded four Dyak boys
of Pangara Achong, and two from the Orang Kaya of Sirkaru; beside
which, the Sadong people seize their property whenever they go among
them. They are very poorly off for grain. They asked me for a letter
which should prevent people from annoying them. I told them I should
represent the matter to the Tuan Besar, and that no doubt he will
give his chop to each tribe. They all speak well of Bandar Cassim;
but his people are bad, and those at Gadong [38] are worse.

"_14th._--At 6h 30m started up the river Kayan toward Tumma,
having left Talip with nineteen men to return to Sarawak by way of
Samarahan. At 8 we stopped at Mang-garut, where the Dyaks presented
us with a deer they had caught. These Dyaks are badly off for grain,
and it is the same tribe Bandar Cassim attacked in the Goa Siri (siri
cave) some few years ago. Orang Kaya Pa Jampat told me, that on that
occasion the Bandar seized eight Dyaks and took them with him. [39]
The river here begins to be narrow and shallow, with pebbly banks,
and clear water. At noon we stopped at Muara Rubin, where we intended
to stay a day to inquire for coal, which was stated to have been
found in this neighborhood; but as nobody knew the whereabout, and
as the Hindoo remains (said to consist of one stone in the shape of
a Malay hat) were five hours out of our way, we continued our route
till evening, having parted company with the Bandar at Muara Rubin,
as I well knew the Tumma Dyaks would be afraid of his approach.

"_15th._--At daylight started toward Tumma, and at 9 stopped below
Muora Sangan, where we breakfasted, after which we pushed up again,
and at 1 arrived at Si Sijack, where the Tumma are. Orang Kaya Pa
Muany, the chief, told me they were very much bullied, as a Sarawak
man, named Pakar, and Marrat, the father-in-law of Bandar Mulana of
Sarawak, forced upon them a quantity of goods in the name of the
Tuan Besar and the Bandar Mulana. (Here follows a list of things,
such as gongs, tatawaks, jackets, handkerchiefs, and the like, with
the most exorbitant prices affixed to them. The rice and padi had not,
however, been paid for.) There are three villages of this tribe; two
about 250 yards apart; one of which, containing about ten families,
is ruled by the Orang Kaya Pa Muany, and the other, with about thirty
families, by the Orang Kaya Mayo and the Orang Kaya Pa Balet. In the
other village, about three reaches above, is the Orang Kaya Pa Magong,
with ten families. They said they were very comfortable under the
Patingi Ali (father of the present Bandar Mulana), but that since
Bandar Mulana has succeeded, they have been oppressed. They told
me they had run away from Sadong because they heard the Tuan Besar
was a just and good rajah, and that all his Dyaks were comfortable,
but now they are oppressed. Pakar told them that if they did not take
his tatawaks they must not remain here, but run away!

"There are forty families of the Si Nangkan Soyar tribe, and thirteen
families of the Tibader tribe. The Orang Kayas told me that, had I not
arrived, the rice in payment of the goods forced on them would have
been taken down, as Pakar was here hurrying them to carry it to Sanar;
but that when he heard of my coming he could not be persuaded to wait
and meet me. The following goods have just been returned by the Gregan
Dyaks (here follows a long list of goods and prices). Pangara Achong
of the En Singi tribe told me that he has one family of his tribe at
Gregan, and he wanted them to return with him. I asked the Pangara of
Gregan whether this family wished to return, but he did not know. I
then told them no one could force them, but that they might do just as
they pleased. The Orang Kaya Pa Jampat goes down with me to Kuching to
lay before the Tuan Besar a claim made upon him by the Malay Pangeran
of Samarahan. Beside which, I take down the Orang Kaya and Pangara
of Tumma, Si Markan Singan and Tebadu, together with all the goods
forced on them, that the case may be judged by the Tuan Besar.

"Bandar Cassim demands a debt of the Orang Kaya Pa Muany of Tumma;
he originally sold them (_i. e._ forced on them, of course) a gong
for 150 pasus of padi, 100 of which was paid; and the question is,
whether they were to pay the rest. This was four years ago. I left it
for the Tuan Besar's decision." (Here follows a list of goods forced
on the Tebadu Dyaks.) [40]



THE END.












HARPER'S NEW MISCELLANY
OF
POPULAR STERLING LITERATURE.


"Books that have an _aim_ and _meaning_ in them."

Now in course of publication, a new and attractive library of sterling
books, elegantly printed in duodecimo, on fine paper, and _bound in
extra muslin gilt, fitted for permanent preservation_.


PRICE FIFTY CENTS A VOLUME.

_The cheapest Popular Series of Works yet Published._



I., II.

Elements of Morality and Polity.

BY WILLIAM WHEWELL, D.D.,

AUTHOR OF "HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF THE INDUCTIVE SCIENCES," &c.

2 vols. 12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, $1 00.

Dr. Whewell's work ought to be read, because it can not be read
without advantage: the age requires such books.--_London Athenæum._

A text-book of simple truths, from which, by induction, a complete
system of morality is constructed, applicable to all the relations
and circumstances of life, and embracing every department of human
action. The reader who shall carefully study these volumes--and a
more inviting page, clear and legible, the eye does not often rest
upon--will find his labor more than rewarded.--_New York Commercial
Advertiser._

Professor Whewell's "Elements of Morality" have been universally
received in England as a contribution of rare value to the department
of moral and political science.--_Baltimore American._

A splendid production by one of the most distinguished of the
scientific men of the age. This is a book, not to be read merely, but
to be re-perused and patiently studied, we have heard it pronounced by
no mean critic the most complete and lucid work on ethical philosophy
ever produced. We commend this work to the especial notice of thinkers
and readers, to scholars and schools generally, as a most admirable
text-book--_Sun._

The style of the work, though simple, is extremely clear, strong, and
eloquent. It is a book to be _studied_ rather than superficially read,
and can not fail to be of the very highest importance in instructing
and disciplining the public mind.--_American Patriot._

This is beyond all comparison the most complete, comprehensive, and
luminous treatise on the important subjects it discusses, that is to
be found in the language, and its careful study is indispensable to
every one who would obtain true and definite notions in regard to the
principles of public and private morals. It is profoundly learned
and philosophical, but the writer thinks logically and clearly,
and is therefore at all times lucid and comprehensible.--_Buffalo
Commercial Advertiser._










III.

The Philosophy of Mystery.

BY WALTER COOPER DENDY.

12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.

This is a learned and elaborate work, in which the writer goes
into the investigation of all the phenomena of mind in the erratic
operations and phantasies of ghost seeing and spectral hallucinations,
and aims to give the true philosophy of all such delusions. He is a
medical man of considerable eminence, and has spared no pains in his
researches, giving a great number of facts and cases to illustrate
his philosophy. The volume will be much sought for, as it is really
a desideratum in the world of literature. We know of no work on this
subject which lays the same just claim to public attention, or the
study of the philosopher.--_Christian Advocate and Journal._

The volume before us is both instructive and amusing, and at this
particular time, when the extremes of superstition and philosophy have
shaken hands, it will be likely to effect an inconceivable amount of
good, if properly studied. It is one of the most remarkable productions
of the day, and must create an extraordinary degree of interest in
the public mind.--_Merchant's Magazine._

It belongs to that class of writings which you can take up and put down
at pleasure, and which may be subjected to repeated readings. The work
is pleasant, however, in spite of this--pleasant because of its facts,
its numerous details of mystery, its vast collection of anecdote, its
developments of _diablerie_, its tidings from the spiritual world,
and the many cases which it brings together of the curious and the
wonderful in nature and art, which former ages, and ignorance and
superstition, have concluded to consider supernatural. Where science
and modern speculation furnish the solution to the mystery, Mr. Dendy
couples it with the statements, and the book is thus equally valuable
and amusing.--_Charleston Transcript._

Here lies a remarkable work; beautiful in its style, and wondrous
in its matter. The work is strictly philosophical in its tendency,
yet more amusing than a novel.--_True American._

This is a book for the lovers of marvels and of mysteries. It
contains an immense collection of anecdotes of spectral apparitions,
of illusions of vision or of hearing, of striking phenomena exhibited
in dreams, in insanity, in trance, or in magnetism, and furnishes
many very valuable hints to aid in the solution of these mysteries,
by which so many have been bewildered or affrighted. It is written
in a style of great ease and elegance, and can not fail to find a
very wide circle of welcoming readers.--_Albion._

This unique and remarkable book has just been placed on our table;
we know its reputation of old; it is an admirable discourse on the
subject of supernaturalisms, such as mental illusions, dreams, ghosts,
mesmeric phenomena, &c. If any one will but read the first half dozen
pages, we will vouch for it he will not neglect the rest of the volume:
it is one of the best written books on one of the most curious range
of topics that could engage the pen of a writer, or the attention of a
reader. It is, in fact, one of the most curious volumes ever perused,
upon a series of the most singular subjects, and, in this new and
neat form, it will command a vast number of readers.--_Sunday Times._

"The Philosophy of Mystery" is an exceedingly able work; far better,
we think, than the "Natural Magic" of Brewster, a book of identical
purpose, carried out in a totally different way. The "Natural Magic"
is the more ratiocinative, Mr. Dendy's essay the more poetical, the
more imaginative, and to us the more interesting.--_National Press._







IV.

The Life of Mozart:

INCLUDING HIS CORRESPONDENCE.

BY EDWARD HOLMES,

AUTHOR OF "A RAMBLE AMONG THE MUSICIANS Of GERMANY," &c.

12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.

It is written in a beautiful, narrative style, and can not but be
every where acceptable. To all who appreciate the extraordinary
genius of Mozart, the delicate structure of his mind, the incidents
of his life, and his romantic death, this volume will indeed be a
treasure.--_Boston Gazette_.

It contains, in addition to much of his interesting correspondence,
and other papers, a detailed account of his life, adventures, and
rise as an artist, and a discriminating sketch of his character, the
peculiarities of which are happily illustrated by anecdotes. Many
things of him, unknown even to his admirers, are here given to the
world, and his biographer, fully appreciating the artist, has yet,
not like a flatterer, but with true independence, spoken candidly of
the faults of the man.--_Merchant's Magazine_.

Of this far-famed life of Mozart it is scarcely necessary for us
to say a word; the foreign reviews have been so unanimous in their
encomiums, that we suppose few will be found insensible to the strong
inducement of its perusal, especially as the work may be obtained at
the trifling cost of half a dollar, and in so beautiful a guise. We
have looked into the biography but slightly, yet find it redolent with
interest, and fully sustaining the high estimate placed upon the work
by the _London Athenæum_ and _Blackwood_. If the Harpers continue
to fill their new library with sterling works like the present,
it will present the most truly valuable series, yet the cheapest,
ever attempted in any age or country.--_Evening Gazette_.

The only authentic biography of the great composer that is extant
in the English language, and the events of his career are replete
with useful admonitions and warning to the sons of genius, and they
whisper to those whose present claims are not allowed that there
is a future full of promise. In his life Mozart was neglected and
impoverished, and he went to his grave with more than the bitterness
of death crowding on his thoughts, but fame has taken possession of
his memory, and among those who move as gods in musical art, few are
equal to him, none are superior. This biography possesses an interest
for all who feel interested in the great men of the earth. It is not
only remarkably well written, but has a completeness about it we have
never found before in any life of Mozart.--_Louisville Journal_.

There is such a charm in this narrative, that the lovers of good
biography can not hear of it too soon. We can not conceive a more
fascinating story of genius. To a style which would alone have sufficed
to the production of an interesting and striking narrative, Mr. Holmes
unites a depth of knowledge and musical appreciation very rare and
remarkable. We thank him cordially for a most pleasing addition to
our standard biographical literature.--_Examiner_.

The book is one of extraordinary interest, not merely to the lovers
of music and appreciators of the great composer, but to the general
reader, as a vivid picture of the life of a man of genius, who
encountered all the difficulties, trials, and sufferings usually the
lot of genius when it comes before a world incapable of appreciating
it, and indifferent to its welfare. The domestic portions of the book
are invaluable; his relations to his father and his wife are very
beautiful. The work is admirably executed, as well in the scientific
as anecdotical passages, and is worthy of the widest sale.--_News_.








III.

_The Philosophy of Mystery._

BY WALTER COOPER DENDY.

12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.


This is a learned and elaborate work, in which the writer goes
into the investigation of all the phenomena of mind in the erratic
operations and phantasies of ghost seeing and spectral hallucinations,
and aims to give the true philosophy of all such delusions. He is a
medical man of considerable eminence, and has spared no pains in his
researches, giving a great number of facts and cases to illustrate
his philosophy. The volume will be much sought for, as it is really
a desideratum in the world of literature. We know of no work on this
subject which lays the same just claim to public attention, or the
study of the philosopher.--_Christian Advocate and Journal._

The volume before us is both instructive and amusing, and at this
particular time, when the extremes of superstition and philosophy have
shaken hands, it will be likely to effect an inconceivable amount of
good, if properly studied. It is one of the most remarkable productions
of the day, and must create an extraordinary degree of interest in
the public mind.--_Merchant's Magazine._

It belongs to that class of writings which you can take up and put down
at pleasure, and which may be subjected to repeated readings. The work
is pleasant, however, in spite of this--pleasant because of its facts,
its numerous details of mystery, its vast collection of anecdote, its
developments of _diablerie_, its tidings from the spiritual world,
and the many cases which it brings together of the curious and the
wonderful in nature and art, which former ages, and ignorance and
superstition, have concluded to consider supernatural. Where science
and modern speculation furnish the solution to the mystery, Mr. Dendy
couples it with the statements, and the book is thus equally valuable
and amusing.--_Charleston Transcript_.

Here lies a remarkable work; beautiful in its style, and wondrous
in its matter. The work is strictly philosophical in its tendency,
yet more amusing than a novel.--_True American_.

This is a book for the lovers of marvels and of mysteries. It
contains an immense collection of anecdotes of spectral apparitions,
of illusions of vision or of hearing, of striking phenomena exhibited
in dreams, in insanity, in trance, or in magnetism, and furnishes
many very valuable hints to aid in the solution of these mysteries,
by which so many have been bewildered or affrighted. It is written
in a style of great ease and elegance, and can not fail to find a
very wide circle of welcoming readers.--_Albion_.

This unique and remarkable book has just been placed on our table;
we know its reputation of old; it is an admirable discourse on the
subject of supernaturalisms, such as mental illusions, dreams, ghosts,
mesmeric phenomena, &c. If any one will but read the first half dozen
pages, we will vouch for it he will not neglect the rest of the volume:
it is one of the best written books on one of the most curious range
of topics that could engage the pen of a writer, or the attention of a
reader. It is, in fact, one of the most curious volumes ever perused,
upon a series of the most singular subjects, and, in this new and
neat form, it will command a vast number of readers.--_Sunday Times._

"The Philosophy of Mystery" is an exceedingly able work; far better,
we think, than the "Natural Magic" of Brewster, a book of identical
purpose, carried out in a totally different way. The "Natural Magic"
is the more ratiocinative, Mr. Dendy's essay the more poetical, the
more imaginative, and to us the more interesting.--_National Press._










IV.

_The Life of Mozart:_

INCLUDING HIS CORRESPONDENCE.

BY EDWARD HOLMES,

AUTHOR OF "A RAMBLE AMONG THE MUSICIANS OF GERMANY," &c.

12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.


It is written in a beautiful, narrative style, and can not but be
every where acceptable. To all who appreciate the extraordinary
genius of Mozart, the delicate structure of his mind, the incidents
of his life, and his romantic death, this volume will indeed be a
treasure.--_Boston Gazette._

It contains, in addition to much of his interesting correspondence,
and other papers, a detailed account of his life, adventures, and
rise as an artist, and a discriminating sketch of his character, the
peculiarities of which are happily illustrated by anecdotes. Many
things of him, unknown even to his admirers, are here given to the
world, and his biographer, fully appreciating the artist, has yet,
not like a flatterer, but with true independence, spoken candidly of
the faults of the man.--_Merchant's Magazine._

Of this far-famed life of Mozart it is scarcely necessary for us
to say a word; the foreign reviews have been so unanimous in their
encomiums, that we suppose few will be found insensible to the strong
inducement of its perusal, especially as the work may be obtained at
the trifling cost of half a dollar, and in so beautiful a guise. We
have looked into the biography but slightly, yet find it redolent with
interest, and fully sustaining the high estimate placed upon the work
by the _London Athenæum_ and _Blackwood_. If the Harpers continue
to fill their new library with sterling works like the present,
it will present the most truly valuable series, yet the cheapest,
ever attempted in any age or country.--_Evening Gazette._

The only authentic biography of the great composer that is extant
in the English language, and the events of his career are replete
with useful admonitions and warning to the sons of genius, and they
whisper to those whose present claims are not allowed that there
is a future full of promise. In his life Mozart was neglected and
impoverished, and he went to his grave with more than the bitterness
of death crowding on his thoughts, but fame has taken possession of
his memory, and among those who move as gods in musical art, few are
equal to him, none are superior. This biography possesses an interest
for all who feel interested in the great men of the earth. It is not
only remarkably well written, but has a completeness about it we have
never found before in any life of Mozart.--_Louisville Journal._

There is such a charm in this narrative, that the lovers of good
biography can not hear of it too soon. We can not conceive a more
fascinating story of genius. To a style which would alone have sufficed
to the production of an interesting and striking narrative, Mr. Holmes
unites a depth of knowledge and musical appreciation very rare and
remarkable. We thank him cordially for a most pleasing addition to
our standard biographical literature.--_Examiner._

The book is one of extraordinary interest, not merely to the lovers
of music and appreciation of the great composer, but to the general
reader, as a vivid picture of the life of a man of genius, who
encountered all the difficulties, trials, and sufferings usually the
lot of genius when it comes before a world incapable of appreciating
it, and indifferent to its welfare. The domestic portions of the book
are invaluable; his relations to his father and his wife are very
beautiful. The work is admirably executed, as well in the scientific
as anecdotical passages, and is worthy of the widest sale.--_News_










V.

_The Practical Astronomer:_

COMPRISING ILLUSTRATIONS OF LIGHT AND COLORS; PRACTICAL DESCRIPTIONS
OF ALL KINDS OF TELESCOPES, &C., WITH DESCRIPTIVE ACCOUNTS OF THE EARL
OF ROSSE'S LARGE TELESCOPES, AND OTHER TOPICS CONNECTED WITH ASTRONOMY.

BY THOMAS DICK, LL.D.,

AUTHOR OF THE "CHRISTIAN PHILOSOPHER," "CELESTIAL SCENERY," "THE
SIDEREAL HEAVENS," &c.

100 Engravings. 12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.


The _name_ of the distinguished author of this work is a sufficient
passport to public favor and a sure guarantee to its sterling
value, and those who have read Dr. Dick's former works will need
no recommendation of this book by us. He is not only an original
and profound observer of nature, but truly a most excellent
_Christian_ philosopher, whose powers of intellect and expanded
views of the character of the great Architect of the universe are so
eminently calculated to direct the mind not alone to the grandeur,
the magnificence, and sublimity of the laws and principles of the
material world, but to look through nature up to "Nature's God." It
is truly a valuable work.--_Farmer and Mechanic._

The merits of this work are of the highest order; Dick is one of the
profoundest and purest of modern philosophers.--_Western Continent._

Here is the ninth volume presented by this gifted author to the public;
the aim of all of which has been to simplify sciences which before
have been too often considered as every way _above_, and therefore
unworthy of the attention of ordinary readers. It is specially
addressed to private students and the higher schools, and comprises
a large amount of new and valuable matter connected with astronomy,
and pointing out ways in which the more humble student can in the
best way improve the advantages placed in his way.--_Auburn Journal._

Let not the inquisitive fear that the intricacies of science or
the technicalities of language will obstruct the pleasure they
will derive from the study of this book; for the clearness of the
author's style, and the elucidation of the one hundred engravings,
render it within the scope and comprehension of every intelligent
student.--_Industrial Record._

The copious use of engravings and of pictorial illustrations,
together with the plain, popular explanations, render this book a
truly _practical_ work. Dr. Dick is not only thoroughly scientific,
but he knows well how to render his acquisitions available to the
great body of common readers, by his accurate method and clear
descriptions.--_Watchman._

We have always been an admirer of the writings of this gentleman, and
popularity keeps on his side wherever he is known. He is a profound
thinker and a devout Christian. His works all tend to illustrate
the simple as well as the sublimest principles of philosophy, and
while they instruct, can not fail to enlighten. The present volume
comprises illustrations of light and colors, practical descriptions of
all kinds of telescopes, the use of the equatorial-transit, circular,
and other astronomical instruments, and other topics connected with
astronomy. It is illustrated by 100 engravings, and will be found
a most valuable book for all classes, but particularly as a work of
instruction for youth.--_Illustrated Magazine._










VI., VII.

_The Life of Paul Jones._

BY ALEXANDER SLIDELL MACKENZIE, U. S. N.

2 vols. 12mo, Portrait, Muslin, extra gilt, $1 00.


The history of the naval adventures and victories of Paul Jones forms
one of the most romantic chapters in the record of great deeds, and
can not fail to attract general and ardent attention, since it relates
to the very beginning of the American navy.--_Commercial Advertiser._

The various biographies of Paul Jones now extant have been carefully
searched by Mr. Mackenzie; as also the log books of Jones's various
cruizes and papers in possession of his heirs, with a view to procure
a full and authentic collection of facts and incidents for the present
work. Thus industriously compiled and stored, and that by an able
hand, this edition must necessarily, as it does, possess considerable
merit.--_Philadelphia Chronicle._

Paul Jones will always be regarded as one of the most daring
and gallant heroes who ever made the ocean the theater of their
exploits. Such a name can never be forgotten by Americans, nor can
the services which he rendered to the cause of American liberty,
in its infant struggles, ever pass into oblivion. No better
biographer for such a character could have been found than Captain
Mackenzie. Familiar with all the details of seamanship, possessing the
same bold patriotism which made the career of his hero so illustrious,
and being an accomplished and vigorous writer, he has given us a most
admirable biography.--_Courier and Enquirer._

This is a capital American biography, of an American naval hero,
scarcely less renowned and no less gallant and gifted with an heroic
spirit than Nelson, the great British admiral. There is scarcely a more
stirring life in the whole compass of literature than that of Jones;
and the important part he played in giving force and almost life itself
to the American navy, then in its earliest infancy, renders his history
peculiarly interesting and attractive. No man certainly ever performed
more gallant exploits, and few have rendered more important service to
the cause of freedom than he. Many of his actions for bravery, skill,
and the performance of almost incredible deeds, by apparently the most
inadequate means, are scarcely rivalled by any thing in the records
of naval history. His life should be familiar to American readers;
and in the elegant, forcible, and graphic style of Commander Mackenzie
it can not fail to be universally read.--_True Sun._

We are glad to see the life of this celebrated man by one competent to
write it. His adventures border so much on the marvelous that one is
glad to be sure of reading only what is authentic, and that written in
a style and language becoming the subject. There is a good moral lesson
conveyed in this life of Paul Jones.--_Christian Advocate and Journal._

The name and achievements of Paul Jones are indissolubly connected with
American history; and his renowned deeds, which made him the terror
of the coast of Britain, are among the most romantic in the annals of
naval warfare, and impart to this work the highest interest. This is
the most complete and authentic biography of Commodore Jones ever
published, as all accessible materials have been collected, and
are used by Commander Mackenzie with the ability and tact which he
possesses as an accomplished scholar and an officer, accomplishments
which peculiarly qualify him to write naval biography. A fine portrait
of this true naval hero will be found in the first volume.--_Baltimore
American._

We have read it with some care, and compared it with other biographies,
and think it greatly superior to any yet published. It contains a
full narrative of all the important events in Jones's eventful career,
and yet is less voluminous than previous works.--_Highland Courier._












VIII.

The Ascent of Mount Ararat,

(ACHIEVED FOR THE FIRST TIME).

BY DR. FRIEDRICH PARROT.

TRANSLATED BY W. D. COOLEY.

12mo, Map and Wood-cuts, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.


This is a most interesting book, both in its description of the
country and inhabitants of Central Asia, and in its connection with
the remarkable event of our world--_the Flood_. Mount Ararat, which
was ascended by M. Parrot, must ever possess to the Biblical reader
most intense interest, as the resting place of the ark after the
universal deluge.--_Pittsburgh Chronicle._

A work destined, from the intrinsic interest of the subject, and
the fullness of detail which is spread before the reader, to a
very wide circulation. The idea of ascending Mount Ararat seems to
have risen with the traveler to a passion; previous travelers had
never accomplished it; the natives of the region looked upon it as
impossible; their superstition regarded the inaccessible summit as
the mysterious resting place of the ark to this day. How Dr. Parrot
approached the region, what adventures he met with by the way, what
manners and customs he witnessed, how he twice essayed to reach the
sacred peak and turned back, and how on a third attempt he accomplished
the feat through difficulties the recital of which has led scientific
men still to doubt if the ascent were really performed--may all be
read in this compact volume, illustrated by maps and engravings,
with every aid to the reader's comprehension.--_News._

Hardly a subject could have been selected more stirring in its
character than "A Journey to Ararat." Held in equal veneration by Jew,
Christian, and Mohammedan, and regarded with superstitious feelings
even by the pagan, that mountain has always enjoyed a degree of
celebrity denied to any other. Sinai, and Horeb, and Tabor may have
excited holier musings; but Ararat "the mysterious"--Ararat, which
human foot had not trod after the restorer of our race, and which,
in the popular opinion, no human foot would be permitted to tread till
the consummation of all things--Ararat the holy, which winged cherubim
protected against the sacrilegious approach of mortals, and which
patriarchs only were permitted to revisit, appeared in many respects an
object of curiosity as unique as it was exciting.--_London Athenæum._

It is a highly entertaining work, embodying much historical,
geographical, and scientific information, and conveying a knowledge of
the character, habits, and manners of the people among whom the author
traveled. The ascent of Mount Ararat is so very difficult that many
persons have doubted whether the feat was accomplished by Dr. Parrot,
but his acknowledged integrity ought to place his claims in this
respect above suspicion. The lovers of bold adventure will find in
this volume much to gratify their peculiar taste, and the general
reader can hardly fail to be pleased with it.--_New York Tribune._

This volume has claims upon the public, as a scientific and truly
valuable work, which have been possessed by few others. It is, in fact,
the condensed narrative of an exploring expedition sent out by the
Russian government into the region about Mount Ararat, a region which
possesses more interest for scientific men, perhaps, than any other
in the world which has been so little explored.--_New York Courier._

It reads more like the travels of Von Humboldt than any book we have
lately read. The writer is a man of science and observation, and the
book we recommend to the public.--_Lowell Courier._











IX.

Remarkable Criminal Trials.

TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN OF FEUERBACH,

BY LADY DUFF GORDON.

12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents.


A book of thrilling interest; one that can not fail to be read with
avidity.--_New York Courier._

This work abounds with singular cases of criminal jurisprudence in
Bavaria, of the most astounding and thrilling interest, the details of
which are of remarkable character, and differ essentially from those
hitherto familiar to the public in England or this country. They
are fully equal, in their absorbing interest, to any thing in the
famous "Causes Celebres" of France; and, perhaps, for their unique
and striking features, are unexcelled by any delineations of crime
elsewhere on record.--_True Sun._

Public attention was first drawn to this work by an able and
interesting article in the Edinburgh Review. They are all narratives
of marvelous interest--more strange and wonderful, many of them,
than any work of fiction, and giving to the reader a clear view
of the nature and peculiarities of the criminal jurisprudence of
Germany.--_N. Y. Commercial Advertiser._

Its illustration of the many curious customs of German criminal
jurisprudence will be sufficiently startling to the English reader;
but, apart from this, the extraordinary subtle discrimination thrown
into the narrative of each particular crime gives to the volume, as a
mere story book, the intellectual interest, the passion, and all the
rich and various coloring of a philosophical romance. The translation
is excellent, and a judicious compression of the original has added
much to the effect.--_London Examiner._

The narratives abound with thrilling interest, setting forth the
constant recurrence of crime, detection, and punishment, in which
the attention of the reader is roused by the novelty of the scene,
and rewarded by the light thrown upon the darkest portion of human
nature.--_New Bedford Mercury._

This work has been so highly extolled by the Edinburgh Foreign
Quarterly and other reviews, that not much need be said of its
character and claims to public notice. It presents some of the
most remarkable stories of horrible crimes and their exposure
we have ever met, and gives a very clear and vivid conception of
the peculiarities of German criminal jurisprudence. It is a book
which will be universally read, as one of the most thrilling and
absorbing interest. The translator has given in the preface a very
good account of the criminal law of Germany, and has selected only
those portions of the original work which will have the greatest
value and interest.--_Mirror._

This book is of an entirely different character from works of a similar
title that have hitherto appeared. It contains an account of fourteen
trials for murder in Germany, and the object of it is to show the
peculiar mode of trial instituted by the Bavarian code.--_Evening
Gazette._

The records of crime are not usually a profitable kind of reading. The
contagion of the example is generally greater than the warning of
the fate of the criminal; and many a villain has been made by the
very means taken to keep him from crime. But as much depends on the
manner of the narrative, and as it is possible to extract some of the
gravest lessons of virtue and wisdom from the misdeeds of others, it
gives us pleasure to state that the present work is unexceptionable in
this respect, while the cases possess extraordinary interest, and are
replete with instruction. They afford much insight of human motives,
and teach impressive lessons of the retributive justice of Providence,
and the misery and evil of sin.--_Biblical Repository_.












X., XI.

Journal of Researches

INTO THE NATURAL HISTORY AND GEOLOGY OF THE COUNTRIES VISITED DURING
THE VOYAGE OF H. M. S. BEAGLE ROUND THE WORLD.

BY CHARLES DARWIN, M.A., F.R.S.

2 vols. 12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, $1 00.


This is another most valuable contribution to the cause of _popular
education_, issued in Harper's New Miscellany; a series that bids fair
to surpass even their Family Library in the sterling excellence and
popularity of the works which it renders accessible to all classes
of the community. The work contains, in a condensed and popularized
form, the results of the British Exploring Expedition, which Mr. Darwin
accompanied at the special instance of the lords of the Admiralty. The
voyage consumed several years, and was performed at a very heavy
expense on the part of the British government. Yet here we have its
most important results, divested of all scientific technicalities,
and presented in a form at once attractive and accurate. The work is
entitled to secure a very wide circulation. It contains an immense
amount of information concerning the natural history of the whole
world, and is superior, in point of interest and value, to any similar
work ever published.--_New York True Sun._

A work very neatly issued, and has the interest of a leading
subject well developed, the unfailing secret of producing a book of
character. In the present state of the world, when new countries are
opening every day to the great conqueror, Commerce, such publications
are of unusual importance. Perhaps no information, just now, can be
of more consequence to us than that which puts us in possession of
the movements of English discovery.--_News._

This is a most valuable and a most interesting work; one which combines
true scientific worth with the graces of style suited to render it
popular, better than almost any similar work which has recently come
under our notice. The voyage of the Beagle was, in truth, a scientific
exploring expedition; and Mr. Darwin accompanied it at the special
request of the lords of the Admiralty. Its results have been published
in several very elaborate, extensive, and costly volumes in England;
but as these were entirely beyond the reach of the great mass of the
reading public, Mr. Darwin prepared these volumes, in which all the
important results of the expedition are fully, clearly, and distinctly
presented, interwoven with a most entertaining narrative of personal
incident and adventure.--_N. Y. Courier._

This is a work of remarkable interest and value. The author,
in circumnavigating the world, under commission of the British
government, for scientific and exploring purposes, visited nearly
every country on the globe, and preserved in this brief, simple, but
beautiful narrative all the singular facts of a scientific, social,
or geographical nature which are of general interest. The amount of
information condensed in these volumes is incredible; and the skill
with which the useful and interesting is selected from that which
is unimportant or well known is admirable. We admire the style,
the straightforward sincerity of the writer, the apparent candor,
and the erudite research which he uniformly exhibits. Without one
quarter of the bulk or pretension of our famous exploring expedition,
the present work is hardly inferior to it in value and interest. This
series is gaining a fine character, of which we hope the publishers
will be jealous.--_New York Evangelist._











HARPER'S FAMILY LIBRARY.

_Books that you may hold readily in your hand are the most useful,
after all._--Dr. Johnson.


The above-named series, extending to 173 volumes, comprises a rich and
varied collection of works in the several departments of literature,
forming a most valuable circle of useful, instructive, and entertaining
knowledge, adapted for popular use. The utmost care has been taken,
not only to exclude whatever can have an injurious influence on the
mind, but to embrace every thing calculated to strengthen the best
and most salutary impressions.

No family ought to be without this library, as it furnishes the
readiest resources for that education which ought to accompany
or succeed that of the boarding-school or the academy, and is
infinitely more conducive than either to the cultivation of the
intellect.--_Monthly Review._


CONTENTS OF THE SERIES.


1, 2, 3.--MILMAN'S HISTORY OF THE JEWS. $1 20.

4, 5.--HISTORY OF NAPOLEON BONAPARTE.   90 cents.

6.--SOUTHEY'S LIFE OF LORD NELSON.   45 cents.

7.--LIFE OF ALEXANDER THE GREAT.   45 cents.

8, 74.--NATURAL HISTORY OF INSECTS.   90 cents.

9.--GALT'S LIFE OF LORD BYRON.   Portrait, 40 cents.

10.--BUSH'S LIFE OF MOHAMMED.   Engravings, 45 cents.

11.--SCOTT'S LETTERS ON DEMONOLOGY.   40 cents.

12, 13.--GLEIG'S HISTORY OF THE BIBLE.   80 cents.

14.--DISCOVERY IN THE POLAR REGIONS.   45 cents.

15.--CROLY'S LIFE OF GEORGE IV.   45 cents.

16.--DISCOVERY AND ADVENTURE IN AFRICA. 45 cts.

17, 18, 19, 66, 67.--CUNNINGHAM'S LIVES OF EMINENT PAINTERS AND
SCULPTORS.   Portraits, $2 10.

20.--JAMES'S CHIVALRY AND THE CRUSADES.   45 cts.

21, 22.--LIFE OF MARY QUEEN OF SCOTS.   85 cents.

23.--ANCIENT AND MODERN EGYPT.   45 cents.

24.--FLETCHER'S HISTORY OF POLAND. 45 cents.

25.--SMITH'S   FESTIVALS,   GAMES,   AND  AMUSEMENTS, ANCIENT AND
MODERN.   45 cents.

26.--BREWSTER'S LIFE OF SIR ISAAC NEWTON. 45 cts.

27.--RUSSELL'S   PALESTINE.   45 cents.

28.--MEMES'S  MEMOIRS OF JOSEPHINE.   45 cents.

29.--COURT AND  CAMP OF BONAPARTE.   45 cents.

30.--LIVES AND VOYAGES OF DRAKE, CAVENDISH, AND DAMPIER, Account of
the Bucaniers, &c.   45 cents.

31.--BARROW'S DESCRIPTION OF PITCAIRN'S ISLAND, &c.   45 cents.

32, 72, 84.--SACRED HISTORY OF THE WORLD.   $1 35.

33, 34.--JAMESON'S FEMALE SOVEREIGNS.   80 cents.

35, 36.--LANDERS' TRAVELS IN AFRICA.   90 cents.

37.--ESSAY ON THE INTELLECTUAL POWERS.   45 cts.

38, 39, 40.--LIVES OF CELEBRATED TRAVELLERS. $1 25.

41, 42.--LIFE OF FREDERIC THE GREAT.   90 cents.

43, 44.--SKETCHES FROM VENETIAN HISTORY.   90 cts.

45, 46.--THATCHER'S INDIAN BIOGRAPHY.   90 cents.

47, 48, 49.--MURRAY'S BRITISH INDIA.   $1 35.

50.--BREWSTER'S NATURAL MAGIC.   45 cents.

51, 52.--TAYLOR'S HISTORY OF IRELAND.   90 cents.

53.--DISCOVERY IN NORTH AMERICA.   45 cents.

54.--HUMBOLDT'S TRAVELS.   45 cents.

55, 56.--EULER'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.   90 cents.

57.--POPULAR GUIDE TO THE OBSERVATION OF NATURE.   45 cents.

58.--ABERCROMBIE'S MORAL FEELINGS.   40 cents.

59.--DICK ON IMPROVEMENT OF SOCIETY.   45 cents.

60.--JAMES'S HISTORY OF CHARLEMAGNE.   45 cents.

61.--RUSSELL'S NUBIA AND ABYSSINIA.   45 cents.

62, 63.--RUSSELL'S OLIVER CROMWELL.   90 cents.

64.--MONTGOMERY'S LECTURES ON POETRY.   45 cts.

65.--BARROW'S LIFE OF PETER THE GREAT.   45 cents.











FOR FAMILY READING.


X. RECOLLECTIONS OF A HOUSEKEEPER.

BY MRS. C. GILMAN.--18mo, muslin gilt, 45 cents.


XI. THE MAYFLOWER; OR, SKETCHES OF SCENES AND INCIDENTS AMONG THE
DESCENDANTS OF THE PILGRIMS.

BY MRS. HARRIET B. STOWE.--18mo, muslin gilt, 45 cents.

A series of beautiful and deeply interesting tales, remarkable for
a rigorous yet disciplined imagination, a lively and pure style,
and their high moral tone. They are books which will interest mature
readers as well as children and youth. As an author she will take
her place among that fine and elevated class to which Miss Sedgwick
and Mrs. Child belong; authors whose writings unite with the graces
of composition a deep sympathy with all that is human, and a noble
philanthropy.--_Biblical Repository._


XII. CONQUEST AND SELF-CONQUEST; OR, WHICH MAKES THE HERO?

18mo, muslin gilt, 37 1/2 cents.

An admirable volume; admirable in style, in sentiment, and in
tendency.--_Courier and Enquirer._


XIII.

THE COUSINS. A TALE OF EARLY LIFE.

By the Author of "Conquest and Self-Conquest."--18mo, 37 1/2 cents.

We have read this volume with unmingled satisfaction. It is replete
with instruction, not only for the young, but for all who are concerned
to know and judge their motives of life. We thank the author for
her nice and interesting discriminations between the motives of
conduct. Indeed, we do not know of any works of this description from
the American press which are entitled to a more just popularity than
those which have proceeded from the pen of this writer. They place
her beside the Edgeworths, and the Barbaulds, and the Opies, who
have so long delighted and instructed our children and us.--_New-York
Observer._


XIV. PRAISE AND PRINCIPLE; OR, FOR WHAT SHALL I LIVE?

By the Author of "Conquest and Self-Conquest."--18mo, 37 1/2 cents.

A book most worthy to be put into the hands of youth engaged in their
educational course, and can not but inspire the love of truth and
goodness for their own sakes.--_Biblical Repository._

This little work is designed to inculcate upon the minds of youth the
importance of a steadfast adherence to _principle_ in the concerns of
life; and among "children of a larger growth" its perusal may afford
both pleasure and improvement.--_Bedford Mercury._








107, 108.--PARRY'S THREE VOYAGES.   90 cents.

109, 110.--LIFE OF DR. JOHNSON.   90 cents.

111.--BRYANT'S AMERICAN POETS.   45 cents.

112, 113.--HALLECK'S BRITISH POETS.   90 cents.

114, 115, 116, 117, 118.--KEIGHTLEY'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. $2 25.

119, 120.--HALE'S UNITED STATES.   90 cents.

121, 122.--IRVING'S LIFE OF GOLDSMITH.   90 cents.

123, 124.--DISTINGUISHED MEN OF MODERN TIMES. Portraits, 90 cents.

125.--LIFE OF DE WITT CLINTON.   45 cents.

126, 127.--LIFE OF COMMODORE OLIVER H. PERRY. Portrait, 90 cents.

128.--LIFE AND TRAVELS OF BRUCE. 45 cents.

129.--LIVES OF JAY AND HAMILTON. 45 cents.

130.--BREWSTER'S LIVES OF GALILEO, TYCHO BRAHE, AND KEPLER.   45 cents.

131.--HISTORY OF ICELAND, GREENLAND, AND THE FAROE ISLANDS.   45 cents.

132.--MANNERS AND  CUSTOMS OF THE JAPANESE IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY.
45 cents.

133.--DWIGHT'S HISTORY OF CONNECTICUT. 45 cents.

134, 135.--RUINS OF ANCIENT CITIES.   90 cents.

136, 137.--HISTORY OF DENMARK.   90 cents.

138.--CAMP ON DEMOCRACY.   45 cents.

139.--LANMAN'S MICHIGAN.   45 cents.

140.--FENELON'S ANCIENT PHILOSOPHERS. 45 cents.

141, 142.--COUNT SEGUR'S EXPEDITION TO  RUSSIA. Map, 90 cents.

143, 144.--HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY.   90 cents.

145.--BUCKE'S BEAUTIES OF NATURE.   45 cents.

146.--LIEBER'S ESSAYS ON PROPERTY.   45 cents.

147.--WHITE'S HISTORY OF SELBORNE.   45 cents.

148.--WRANGELL'S EXPEDITION TO SIBERIA.   45 cts.










NOTES

[1] Gunong, a mountain, part of a chain.

[2] Pronounced short, for (properly) Bandhara; a treasurer, chief
steward.

[3] The old name for the town of Sarawak.

[4] Aloes wood, _Lignum aloes_.

[5] The Malay name for the betel, the aromatic leaves of which are
chewed along with the pinang or areca nut, a little pure lime, and
various spices.

[6] The banks of the Boyur and Quop are Nepa palm.

[7] fines--J.H.

[8] Western as regards Polynesia.

[9] Also, vol. iv. of the _Bengal Asiatic Researches_.

[10] Canto xv., stanza 55, 56.

[11] The following is an extract from an equally sapient proposition,
published in the Chinese state-papers on the 14th January, 1840; it is
headed, Memorial of Toang Wangyen to the emperor, recommending plans
for the extermination of barbarians: "Your minister's opinion is this:
that we, being upon shore and they in their ships, it is not at all
requisite to order our naval forces to proceed out a great distance
to contend with them in battle. When the commercial intercourse
of the said barbarians shall have been entirely put an end to, and
their supplies grow scanty, it will be impossible for them to remain
a long time anchored in the outer seas, and they will necessarily,
as formerly, enter the inner waters in order to ramble and spy about
them. We can then, by means of our naval vessels, tempt them and
cause them to enter far in; and a previous arrangement having been
made, we can summon the people who live along the coasts, such as are
expert and able swimmers, and those who possess bravery and strength,
to the amount of several hundreds of men: we can then cause them,
during the night, to divide themselves into companies, and silently
proceeding through the water, straightway board the foreign ships;
and overcoming the crews in their unprepared state, make an entire
massacre of the whole of them."

[12] I need hardly remark on the singular courage and disregard
of personal safety and life itself evinced by my friend on this
occasion. At issue with the rajah on points of great temptation to him,
beset by intrigues, and surrounded by a fierce and lawless people,
Mr. Brooke did not hesitate to dispatch his vessels and protectors,
the one on a mission of pure humanity, and the other in calm pursuance
of the objects he had proposed to himself to accomplish; and with
"three companions," place himself at the mercy of such circumstances,
regardless of the danger, and relying on the overruling Providence
in which he trusted, to bring him safely through all his difficulties
and perils.--H. K.

[13] Now called Samarang.

[14] This I found on inquiry, to be strictly true--a most amiable
trait!--B.

[15] I am happy to say that the Lords of the Admiralty have since been
pleased to promote Lieut. Wilmot Horton and Mr. W. L. Partridge, mate,
who commanded the pinnace, for their gallantry on this occasion.--H. K.

[16] Piratical habits are so interwoven with the character of these
Sarebus people, that the capture at sea of a few prahus would have but
small effect in curing the evil; while a harassing duty is encountered,
the result is only to drive the pirates from one cruising-ground to
another; but, on the contrary, a system which joins conciliation with
severity, aiming at the correction of the native character as well
as the suppression of piracy, and carrying punishment to the doors
of the offenders, is the only one which can effectually eradicate an
evil almost as disgraceful to those who permit it as to the native
states engaged in it.

[17] It had never been known so quiet as during the days we were up
their river.

[18] I have lately heard, with much regret, of the death of this
valuable officer.

[19] Leonard Gibbard made his first trip to sea under my charge in
1834, when I commanded the Childers in the Mediterranean, and at that
early age gave promise of what he afterward proved himself to be--a
gallant officer and thorough seaman. Poor fellow! he was always a
general favorite wherever he went--H. K.

[20] _Anglicè_, run-a-muck.

[21] See Prichard's Researches, 1826, which, meager as they must have
been from the want of data, tell us in two or three pages nearly all
we know on the subject. That able investigator states that the Dyaks
of Borneo resemble the Taraj of Celebes.

[22] With regard to the Arafuras, or Haraforas, it is stated that
they are termed in some districts Idaan, in others Murut, and in
others Dayaks. See Raffles' Java. And Leyden assures us that all
these varieties were originally called Idaan.

[23] A singular contrast to preceding accounts, which represent the
north and northeastern population not only as pirates, called Tiran
or Zedong, but even as cannibals. Near them there appear to be the
piratical nests of Magindano, Sooloo, &c.

[24] There are several rivers, Meri, Bentulu, &c., the inhabitants
of which, says Mr. Brooke, I class under the general term Millanow,
as their dialects show a very close connection, and their habits are
the same. Evidently from language they are civilized tribes of Kayans.

[25] Leyden concluded that the language was allied to the Batta and
Tagala, and the whole derived from and varieties of the primitive
tongue of the Philippine Islands.

[26] Probably a Dyak phrase for levying exactions on the oppressed
people. It is not Malay.

[27] The utter destruction of a village or town is nothing to the
infliction of cutting down the fruit-trees. The former can be rebuilt,
with its rude and ready materials, in a few weeks; but the latter,
from which the principal subsistence of the natives is gathered,
cannot be suddenly restored, and thus they are reduced to starvation.

[28] The grounds for this opinion are an estimate personally made
among the tribes, compared with the estimate kept by the local
officers before the disturbance arose; and the result is, that only
two out of twenty tribes have not suffered, while some tribes have
been reduced, from 330 families to 50; about ten tribes have lost
more than half their number; one tribe of 100 families has lost all
its women and children made slaves; and one tribe, more wretched,
has been reduced from 120 families to 2, that is, 16 persons;
while two tribes have entirely disappeared. The list of the tribes
and their numbers formerly and now are as follows:--Suntah, 330--50;
Sanpro, 100--69; Sigo, 80--28; Sabungo, 60--33; Brang, 50--22; Sinnar,
80--34; Stang, 80--30; Samban, 60--34; Tubbia, 80--30; Goon, 40--25;
Bang, 40--12; Kuj-juss, 35--0; Lundu, 80--2; Sow, 200--100; Sarambo,
100--60; Bombak, 35--35; Paninjow, 80--40; Singè, 220--220; Pons,
20--0; Sibaduh, 25--25. Total, formerly, 1795--now, 849 families;
and reckoning eight persons to each family, the amount of population
will be, formerly, 14,360--now, 6792: giving a decrease of population
in ten years of 846 families, or 7568 persons!

[29] Sir Edward Belcher has since surveyed Labuan in her majesty's
ship Samarang, and finding an excellent harbor, named it Victoria
Bay.--H. K.

[30] Vide Mr. Wise's Plan (p. 362,3) for accelerating the communication
between Great Britain and China, viz. the conveyance of the mails from
Hong Kong to Suez (_viá_ Ceylon) direct. Submitted to her majesty's
Government, 14th September, 1843; adopted 20th June, 1845.

[31] The Borneo coal-mines would also serve to keep the Hong Kong,
Singapore, and Pinang stations supplied with fuel for Steam Vessels
carrying the Mails between Hong Hong and Suez direct.

[32] Receiving at Ceylon the Outward Overland Mail from England,
and returning therewith to China.

[33] Date of submitting the above proposed route and estimate to her
majesty's Government for consideration.

[34] The MS. having been under water in the wreck of the Great
Liverpool steamer, this name and some others are illegible.

[35] A sort of gong.

[36] Tumbawong is a place they have deserted, or been forced to quit.

[37] A head-house.

[38] Gadong is a small Malay village on the Sadong, considerably
nearer the sea than the Bandar's village.

[39] This occurred during Seriff Sahib's time; the Dyaks were
frightfully oppressed.

[40] The goods brought down by Mr. Williamson were on a public trial
confiscated, and the parties concerned fined. These Dyaks from their
distance and timidity, were afraid to complain, but will in future
not be imposed upon. It would be a hopeless task trying to prevent
the Malays playing their tricks on the Dyaks; and the only chance
of freeing the Dyaks from these exactions is by inspiring them with
confidence. In Sarawak this has been done, and may easily be extended;
for the Dyak, though greatly depressed by a course of persecution,
I have always found ready to state his complaints whenever he has a
hope of redress. The Orong Kaya Pa Jampat of Mang-garut was freed of
the debt claimed by the Samarahan Pangara; and the other complaints
referred to my decision have been either rectified, or steps taken
to do justice, and to render the Dyak tribes of Sadong happy and
easy.--_Note by Mr. Brooke._






